JP2018094283A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To make it possible to check for a fault of the segments that make up a digit and for a fault of the signal lines that send a signal to the segments.SOLUTION: Segment signals are commonly used between digits 3 and 4. When the number of acquired medals is displayed, the high-order digit (e.g., 0) of the number of acquired medals is displayed at digit 3 by a first interrupt process and the low-order digit (e.g., 9) of the number of acquired medals is displayed at digit 4 by a second interrupt process ((5) in the Figure). When a pressing order is instructed, a part of pressing-order instructing information (=) is displayed at the digit 3 by the first interrupt process and another part of the pressing-order instructing information (e.g., 1) is displayed at the digit 4 by the second interrupt process ((2) in the Figure). When an unrecoverable error occurs, no interrupt processes are executed, but a process of displaying a part of error information (E) at the digit 3 and a process of displaying another part of the error information (e.g., 1) at the digit 4 are repeated ((4) in the Figure).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 190

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine that includes a display unit having a plurality of segments and displays operation information of a stop switch that is advantageous to a player on the display unit.

  In the conventional slot machine, the main control board determines whether or not to notify the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, and when it is decided to notify, the operation information is connected to the main control board. There is known a slot machine for displaying on a seven-segment display (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-150881 A

Here, the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is important information related to whether or not the medal is paid out.
However, if the segment of the 7-segment display is broken or there is a failure in the signal line that sends a signal to the segment, the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player will not be displayed correctly on the 7-segment display. As a result, there is a risk that the player may be disadvantaged.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the present invention is a slot machine that includes a display unit (seven-segment display) having a plurality of segments, and displays operation information of a stop switch that is advantageous to the player on this display unit. This is to make it possible to confirm the presence or absence of a segment failure and the presence or absence of a failure in a signal line that transmits a signal to the segment.

The present invention solves the above problems by the following means. The configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses.
The invention according to the initial claim of the present application corresponds to the initial invention 50 among the initial inventions 1 to 51 described later.
The invention of claim 1 (26th embodiment)
It has a plurality of segments (segments A to G) that can be lit, and includes a first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) that display predetermined information by lighting the segment,
In the 1st display part and the 2nd display part, the segment signal (segment A-G signal) which shows which segment is made to light is combined,
In a situation where information relating to the number of game media acquired (the number of acquired medals) is displayed (when the process proceeds to the medal payout process in step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 186), the first interrupt process (LED display counter value) Segment signal is output so that the first digit (upper digit) of the information related to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the interrupt processing when is "00100000 (B)" In the interrupt process (interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”), the segment signal is displayed so that the second digit (lower digit) of the information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the second display unit. Output
Under the situation where the operation information (push order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the push order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 186), at least Outputting a segment signal so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing;
In a situation where specific error information (“E1” error) is displayed (when an error that cannot be recovered occurs), a part of the specific error information is displayed on the first display unit without executing interrupt processing. So that the segment signal is output (the error upper digit display output process in step S1497 in the unrecoverable error process 1 in FIG. 136) and the other part of the specific error information is displayed on the second display unit. Thus, the process of outputting the segment signal (the error lower digit display output process of step S1502 in the unrecoverable error process 1 of FIG. 136) is repeatedly executed.

According to the present invention, the segment signal is also used in the first display unit and the second display unit. For this reason, by confirming whether or not the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit are lit, the first display among the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit. The presence or absence of a failure can be confirmed for a common part between the display unit and the second display unit.
In addition, by displaying the first digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media and a part of the specific error information on the first display unit, it is possible to confirm whether or not the segment of the first display unit is lit. The presence or absence of a failure in the segment of the first display unit and the presence or absence of a failure in the signal line that transmits a signal to the segment of the first display unit can be confirmed.

It is a block diagram which shows the outline of control of the slot machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows storage number display LED, advantageous area display LED, acquisition number display LED, a settlement switch, etc. FIG. It is a figure which shows the main control board accommodated in the board | substrate case, (a) shows Example 1, (b) shows Example 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the detail of a digit and a segment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a figure which shows the display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, the positional relationship of each reel, an effective line, etc. It is a figure (1) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a symbol. It is a figure (2) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a symbol. It is a figure (3) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payout, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (4) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a symbol. It is a figure (5) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payout, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (6) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payout, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (1) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure (2) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure which shows a pushing order instruction number table. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a pressing order instruction number, an advantageous pressing order, and display content. It is a figure which shows a production group number table. It is a figure explaining transfer of RT. It is a figure which shows the lighting process of advantageous area display LED. It is a timing chart (example 1 and example 2) which shows the flow of processing of a main control board, acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a timing chart (example 3 and example 4) which shows the flow of processing of a main control board, acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a figure which shows the flow of the notification of the pushing order instruction | indication information by acquisition number display LED, and the alerting | reporting of the correct answer pushing order by an image display apparatus. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the memory area regarding an advantageous area and the total number of games. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the memory area regarding the total payout number. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the memory area regarding the number of payouts at the time of continuous character operation. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the memory area regarding the payout number at the time of an accessory operation. It is a part of RWM, and is a diagram (modification example) showing a storage area relating to the number of payouts at the time of continuous character operation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process which updates the game frequency etc. using a register | resistor. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 1 in step S109-S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 2 in step S109-S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 3 in step S109-S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process which updates the number of games etc., without using a register. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the calculation process of an advantageous area ratio. It is a figure explaining the information displayed on management information display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on the storage number display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on acquisition number display LED. 2 is an external perspective view showing a base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. FIG. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the main control board accommodated in the board | substrate case, (a) shows Example 1, (b) shows Example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 1) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 2) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 3) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 4) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 5) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 6) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 7) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 8) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 9) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 10) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 1) by the side of the sub control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 2) by the side of the sub control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image display example (Example 1-Example 4) of the image display apparatus by a sub control board regarding the addition in AT (3rd Embodiment). In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure explaining the increase in the number of AT games, the change of production, etc. It is a time chart (example 1 and example 2) of an external signal in a 4th embodiment. It is a time chart (example 3) of the external signal in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows RT transfer in Example 1 of 5th Embodiment. In 5th Embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the relationship between RT transfer and AT. It is a figure which shows Example 2 ((a)-(c)) of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows RT transfer in 6th Embodiment. In 6th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of replay D group drawn by RT3, a winning combination, and a pushing order, and a display combination. It is a time chart which shows Example 1 and Example 2 of 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 3 of 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 4 and Example 5 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game in 9th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 1 and Example 2 of 11th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 3 and Example 4 of 11th Embodiment. In a 12th embodiment, it is a time chart which shows an ending effect etc. It is a figure which shows the numerical table (2) of 13th Embodiment. In a 14th embodiment, it is a time chart which shows extension of an advantageous section. In 15th Embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the relationship between an advantageous area and a freeze. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number definition (1) in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows winning number definition (2) in 16th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure following FIG. 74 (a), (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2. , (D) shows Example 3 and (e) shows Example 4. (A) is a figure which shows the data definition for winning number conversion in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2, (d) shows Example 3, (e ) Shows Example 4. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number conversion table in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows description of "DEFB", (c) shows Example 1, (d) shows Example 2. (A) is a figure which shows the data definition for winning number lottery in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows the meaning of each identifier. It is a figure which shows all RT common lottery table (1) in 16th Embodiment. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (2) in the sixteenth embodiment and is a diagram following FIG. 79. It is a figure which shows all RT common lottery table (3) in 16th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure following FIG. (A) is a figure which shows all RT common lottery table (4) in 16th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure following FIG. 81, (b) is a figure which shows the lottery table at the time of non-RT in 16th Embodiment. Yes, (c) shows the RT1 lottery table in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the RT2 lottery table in 16th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the RT3 lottery table in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the lottery table at RT4 in 16th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the 1BBA lottery table in 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1BBB time lottery table in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processes, such as a condition apparatus number in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the internal lottery 1 in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process of the lottery determination in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the condition apparatus number set 1 in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processes, such as a condition apparatus number in the modification of 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process at the time of all the reel stop in the modification of 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the condition apparatus number set 2 in the modification of 16th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number definition (3) in 17th Embodiment, (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2, (d) shows the data definition for winning number conversion. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number conversion table in 17th Embodiment, (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2, (d) shows all RT common lottery table (5). FIG. It is a figure which shows all the RT common lottery tables (6) in 17th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure following FIG.94 (d). It is a figure which shows all RT common lottery table (7) in 17th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure following FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the 2 step | paragraph lottery address table in 17th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the 2 step | paragraph lottery table 1, (c) is a figure which shows the 2 step | paragraph lottery table 2, (D) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 3, (e) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 4, and (f) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 5. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processes, such as a condition apparatus number in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the condition apparatus number set 3 in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the two-step lottery in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a lottery process without a setting difference in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processes, such as a condition apparatus number in the modification of 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the condition apparatus number set 4 in the modification of 17th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the data definition for winning number lottery in 18th Embodiment, (b) shows the meaning of each identifier. It is a figure which shows all RT common lottery table (8) in 18th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows all the RT common lottery tables (9) in 18th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure following FIG. It is a figure which shows all the RT common lottery tables (10) in 18th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure following FIG. It is a figure which shows all the RT common lottery tables (11) in 18th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processes, such as a condition apparatus number in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an advantageous section number acquisition process in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the condition apparatus number set 5 in 18th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number definition (4) in 19th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the data definition for winning number conversion and advantageous area shift determination, (c) shows Example 1. , (D) shows Example 2. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number conversion table in 19th Embodiment, (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows all the RT common lottery tables (12) in 19th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows all RT common lottery table (13) in 19th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure following FIG. It is a figure which shows all the RT common lottery tables (14) in 19th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure following FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the advantageous area transition determination random number table in 19th Embodiment, (b) shows description of "DEFW", (c) shows Example 1, (d) shows Example 2. . It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processes, such as a condition apparatus number in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the internal lottery 2 in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the condition apparatus number set 6 in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the advantageous area transfer lottery in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processes, such as a condition apparatus number in the modification of 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the condition apparatus number set 7 in the modification of 19th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the more detailed structure of main CPU, ROM, RWM in 20th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows various LED on the display board in 20th Embodiment. (B) is a diagram more specifically showing a management information display LED in the twentieth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the detail of the digit and segment in 20th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the data table memorize | stored in ROM. In a 20th embodiment, it is a figure showing output ports 2-5 provided in a main control board (a reference example is also shown). In a 20th embodiment, it is a figure showing wiring of an electric signal on a main control board. In a 20th embodiment, it is a figure showing wiring of an electric signal on a main control board. In a 20th embodiment, it is a figure showing wiring of an electric signal in a display board. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between an interrupt, LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP), and an output signal in 20th Embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process (I_INTR) by a main control board (main CPU). It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows unrecoverable error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1). It is a flowchart which shows unrecoverable error processing 2 (SS_ERROR_STOP2). It is a figure which shows the structure of the output port in 21st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between the digit and segment in 21st Embodiment. (B) is a figure which shows the LED display counter of 21st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in 21st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in 21st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows various LED on the display board in 22nd Embodiment. (B) is a diagram specifically showing a management information display LED in the twenty-second embodiment. (C) is a figure which shows the setting value display LED in 22nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the digit and segment in 22nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the output port in 22nd Embodiment. In a 22nd embodiment, it is a circuit diagram showing wiring of an electric signal of a main control board. In a 22nd embodiment, it is a circuit diagram showing wiring of an electric signal of a main control board. In FIG. 22, it is a circuit diagram which shows the wiring of the electrical signal of a display board. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between an interrupt, a LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) value, a digit signal, and a segment signal in 22nd Embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in 22nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in 22nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the output ports 2-6 in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the digit and segment in 23rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between an interrupt, a LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) value, a digit signal, and a segment signal in 23rd Embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). It is a figure which shows the output ports 2-7 in 24th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the digit and segment in 24th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows Example 1 of the LED display counter in 24th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows Example 2 of the LED display counter in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in 24th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the numerical table (1) in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the numerical table (2) at the time of non-RT in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the numerical table (2) at the time of RT1 in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the numerical table (2) at the time of RT2 in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the numerical table (2) at the time of RT3 in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the numerical table (2) at the time of RT4 in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the numerical table (2) at the time of 1BBA operation | movement in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the numerical table (2) at the time of 1BBB action | operation in 25th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the presence or absence of the advantageous area shift at the time of rare role winning in 1st Embodiment, and the advantageous area display LED lighting, (b) is the advantageous area shift at the time of rare role winning in 25th Embodiment It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of advantageous section display LED lighting. It is a figure which shows the 1BB winning probability for every setting value in 25th Embodiment, and the advantageous area transfer probability at the time of 1BB winning. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the instruction | indication function action | operation process in 25th Embodiment. In a 25th embodiment, after shifting to an advantageous section which does not have an instruction game section, it is a time chart which shows an example which operates an instruction function at the time of the first push order bell winning. In a 25th embodiment, it is a time chart showing an example of canceling the operation of the instruction function by winning a special role before the operation of the first instruction function after the transition to the advantageous section without the instruction game section is there. In a 25th embodiment, it is a time chart which shows an example which operates an instruction function at the time of the first push order bell winning after satisfying an instruction operation condition once in an advantageous section which does not have an instruction game section. In a 25th embodiment, it is a time chart which shows an example which cancels operation of an instruction function by winning a special role before an instruction operation condition is satisfied once in an advantageous section which does not have an instruction game section. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, in an advantageous section that does not have an instruction game section, after the number of games in the advantageous section has been exhausted (after the count value of the advantageous section counter has become “0”), the instruction function is provided when the push order bell is won. It is a time chart which shows the example which makes it operate | move and complete | finishes an advantageous area. In the 25th embodiment, in an advantageous section that does not have an instruction game section, before the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted (before the count value of the advantageous section counter becomes “0”), It is a time chart which shows the example which cancels | releases operation | movement of an instruction | indication function. Information on the RWM that is cleared in the initialization process (first initialization process) at the end of the advantageous section in the twenty-fifth embodiment, information on the RWM that is retained after the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section, and when the setting is changed It is a figure which shows the information on RWM cleared by the initialization process (2nd initialization process). (A) shows a modified example of the number table (1) in FIG. 160, and (b) shows whether or not there is an advantageous section transition and advantageous section display LED lighting at the time of rare role winning in FIG. 168 (b). FIG. (A) shows a modified example of the number table (1) in FIG. 160, and (b) shows whether or not there is an advantageous section transition and advantageous section display LED lighting at the time of rare role winning in FIG. 168 (b). FIG. (A) shows a modified example of the number table (1) in FIG. 160, and (b) shows whether or not there is an advantageous section transition and advantageous section display LED lighting at the time of rare role winning in FIG. 168 (b). FIG. It is a figure which shows the address of the data memorize | stored in the use area | region of RWM in 26th Embodiment, a label, and the content. It is a figure which shows LED segment table 1 and 2 memorize | stored in the use area | region of ROM in 26th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the data and address of LED segment table 1 and 2 in 26th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the address of the pressing order instruction number table in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pushing order instruction number set process (M_ORD_INF) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout number update process in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows medal payout processing (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in 26th Embodiment. (1) is a diagram showing a state in which “88” (setting is being changed) is displayed on the acquired number display LED, and (2) is displayed “= 1” (first left stop) on the acquired number display LED. (3) is a diagram showing a state in which “dE” (front door open) is displayed on the acquired number display LED, and (4) is “E1” (in the acquired number display LED). (5) shows a state in which the stored number “50” is displayed on the stored number display LED, and the acquired number “9” is displayed on the acquired number display LED. FIG. It is a figure which shows the address of the data memorize | stored in the use area | region of RWM in 27th Embodiment, a label, and the content. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the setting value data in 27th Embodiment, setting value display data, and setting value display. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in 27th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value display data set process in 27th Embodiment. (1) is a diagram showing a state in which the set values “1” to “6” are displayed on the digit 4, and (2) displays “= 1” (first left stop) on the acquired number display LED. It is a figure which shows a state, (3) is a figure which shows the state which displayed acquisition number "9" on acquisition number display LED. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the pushing order instruction number in the modification of 26th and 27th Embodiment, the pushing order instruction information, and the advantageous pushing order. It is a figure which shows the relationship between segment AG and the bits 0-6 in the modification of 26th and 27th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the pushing order instruction number in the modification of 26th and 27th Embodiment, display data, the display of a digit, and an advantageous pushing order. It is a figure which shows the next operation instruction information in the modification of 26th and 27th Embodiment, display data, the display of a digit, and the relationship of the stop switch which should be operated next. It is the figure which illustrated the condition device number 11-22 about the relationship of the condition apparatus number in the modification of 26th and 27th Embodiment, display data, the display of a digit, and the advantageous pushing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in the modification of 27th Embodiment.

In the present specification, the meanings of terms are as follows.
“RT” means that the type (number) of condition devices (1BB, replays, small roles) to be drawn and their winning probabilities are unique lottery states. “RT transition” By shifting from RT to another RT, it means that the winning probability of at least one condition device (for example, replay) to be a lottery varies. Therefore, the winning probability for each type of replay in one RT is a value specific to that RT, and the winning probability for each type of replay is the same between one RT and the other RT. Absent. However, the combined value of the replay winning probability may be the same for one RT and the other RT.

In this embodiment, RT includes non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 (FIG. 22 described later).
“Non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to “RT0”. Therefore, in this specification, “RT” includes non-RT.
In the present embodiment, the non-inside is non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3, and the inside is RT4. The type (number) of replays to be selected for lottery and the winning probability differ between non-inside and inside.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, 1BBA operation | movement and 1BBB operation | movement are provided as RT in special game. In the present embodiment, at least one replay lottery is performed in both the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation.
The “combination” refers to a lottery target. In the present embodiment, a condition device is selected, and the condition device is set to include at least one combination. Therefore, when one of the condition devices is won, at least one winning combination is won (has at least one winning combination).

The lottery condition devices include a “combination condition device” including any of “special roles (combines)” and a “winning and replay condition device” including either a small role or a replay. .
The “object condition device” includes any special combination. SB (Single Bonus; Regular Bonus), CB (Type 2 Special Bonus; Challenge Bonus), SB (Single Bonus; Regular Bonus), which is a device that facilitates winning of small roles when a special role wins, 1BB (first type accessory continuous operation device; first type big bonus) and 2BB (second type accessory continuous operation device; second type big bonus) operate.

Here, the first-type accessory continuous operating device (1BB) refers to a device that can continuously operate the first-type special accessory (RB).
Similarly, the second-type accessory continuous operation device (2BB) refers to a device that can continuously operate the second-type special accessory (CB).
In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and has two types (1BBA and 1BBB) described later.
During the operation of 1BB, the RB ends when either of the two winning combinations or the two games are satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied. .
In the present embodiment, SB, CB, and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the “winning and replay condition device” includes either a small role or a replay that does not carry the winning information after the next game.
In the present embodiment, winning and replay condition device numbers “0” to “30” are provided.
On the other hand, the “object condition device” includes RB, 1BB, and 2BB that can carry the winning information after the next game, and SB and CB that do not carry the winning information after the next game. In this embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) that can carry the winning information after the next game is provided.

When winning information is selected for an equipment condition device that includes any of the special roles that can be carried over from the next game onwards, the winning information for special roles until the combination of symbols corresponding to that special role stops on the active line. Is carried over to the next game.
A game in which winning information is not won by the equipment condition device including any of the special roles that can be carried over after the next game is referred to as “non-inside”. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols for the special feature that has been elected is not yet stopped on the active line, that is, the game carrying the special feature's winning information is `` inside ''That's it. In the present embodiment, the game won in the accessory condition device is included in “non-inside”, but the game won in the accessory condition device may be included in “inside”.

  The “advantageous operation mode” of the stop switch is an operation mode in which a winning combination with a large number of payouts is won in a game in which an advantage / disadvantage is caused in the game result (combination of symbols stopped on the active line) by the operation mode of the stop switch, Alternatively, it refers to an operation mode in which a winning combination that shifts (promotes) to an advantageous RT or does not shift (falls) to an unfavorable RT is awarded. The “advantageous operation mode” is also referred to as a correct operation mode.

The “operation mode” is a concept indicating the pressing order of the stop switches and / or the operation timing (timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the effective line).
In the present embodiment, the “game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch” is a game in which a push order bell (small role B group, small role C group) is won, duplicate replay (replay B group, replay C group). ) Equivalent to the game at the time of winning.

Furthermore, at the time of pushing order bell winning, the bell (small role) that wins when the stop switch is operated in the correct pushing order is the high-order bell (the number of payouts of the double winning bell group (small role group) is In some cases, a combination of symbols such as the most small combinations is displayed as a bell (small combination) that is most advantageous to the player.
On the other hand, when the stop switch is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won, there are cases where the Anme Bell wins and cases where the combination is missed according to the operation timing of the stop switch. The stop appearance (a combination of symbols on the active line; also referred to as “spilled eyes”) displayed when the role is missed is referred to as “pattern symbols” in the present embodiment, and has pattern symbols 01 to 03.

On the other hand, in the replay overlap win (replay B group, replay C group win), different symbol combinations are displayed in a stopped state depending on the pressing order of the stop switches, but no overshoot occurs in the replay win ("PB = 1" described later) ").
In this case, a combination of symbols advantageous to the player, for example, a combination of symbols that shifts to an RT with a higher replay winning probability, or a pressing order for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols that maintain an RT with a high replay winning probability is displayed as `` correct answer ''. This is referred to as “push order” or “promotion push order”.
On the other hand, a push order in which a combination of symbols transitioning from an RT that is advantageous to the player (for example, RT having a high replay winning probability) to an unfavorable RT (for example, RT having a low replay winning probability) is stopped and displayed is “incorrect This is referred to as “push order” or “fall (downgrade) push order”.

The “instruction function” means a function of displaying (notifying) the above-described “advantageous operation mode” to the player.
In other words, the “instruction function” refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, when the “instruction function” is a device that facilitates the winning of a small role, the “instruction function” displays the correct answer pressing order for winning the correct answer pressing order (high eye bell) when winning the pressing order bell. In other words, it is not included to display the correct answer pressing order for winning an advantageous replay (a replay for shifting to an advantageous RT or a replay for maintaining an advantageous RT) at the time of duplicate replay winning.

In the following embodiment, “instruction function” refers to a function that displays “advantageous operation mode” to the player, and “operation of the instruction function” displays the correct answer push order when the push order bell is won. , And displaying the correct answer pressing order for winning an advantageous replay at the time of replay overlap win.
It is “display” to show the contents of the “instruction” to the player, and “notification” to notify the player of the instruction content. Therefore, the “instruction function” is both a “display function” and a “notification function”.
Further, “instruction” is a concept having the meaning of “instruction”, but no penalty is imposed on the player just because the “instruction” is not followed. However, if the correct answer pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function is not followed, the high-order bell may not win when the pressing bell wins, or an unfavorable replay may win when the replay overlap wins.

In addition, “instruction function operation game” is a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (conditional device having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (small role B group, small role C group, replay B group, replay C A game that activates an instruction function in a game that is won by the group). Therefore, the instruction function operation game is one game. The instruction function operation game may be referred to as a notification game.
Further, even in a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch, when the instruction function is not activated, the game is not an instruction function operation game.

In the present embodiment, the “game section” includes a “normal section”, a “standby section”, and an “advantage section”.
First, the “normal section” is a signal related to an instruction function, specifically a push order instruction number or a winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct push order) described later is a peripheral board (for example, sub-control). It is a game section that is prohibited from being transmitted to the board) and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (the instruction function is not activated). However, in addition to the lottery of the condition device (combination), it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (lottery etc.).
In the normal section, the instruction function must not be operated, so that the push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (LED or the like) electrically connected to the main control board. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is not possible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by an image display device electrically connected to a sub-control board described later.

In the normal section, when the transition determination to the advantageous section is performed, it is necessary to perform the transition determination in association (correlation) with the selected condition device.
Here, the decision to move to the advantageous section in association with the elected condition device means that when determining whether or not to move to the advantageous section at the same time as the lottery of the condition device, and that the specific condition device has been won And a case where a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section is separately performed.

  In this embodiment, it is set so as to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section simultaneously with the lottery of the condition device. In addition, the length (the number of games) of the advantageous section to be determined (win) depends on the selected condition device. For example, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when winning 1BB, which will be described later, when the initial value is counted after the end of 1BB game, it becomes the advantageous section of 50 games, and when the small role E1 is elected alone When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, there is a case where it becomes an advantageous section that only executes one instruction function operation game (excluding games won in the small role C group, replay B group, and replay C group). is there.

Furthermore, in determining the transition to the advantageous section in association with the selected condition device, a conditional device that can be determined to transition to the advantageous section (separately, when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the advantageous section) The condition device that is a condition for performing the lottery is set so that it is a condition device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability.
Here, the “set value” determines the player's degree of advantage. The higher the set value (or the lower the set value), the more advantageous to the player (so that the expected value of the game is higher). ) Is set. For example, six levels of setting values 1 to 6 are provided.
The “condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability (common setting)” refers to a condition device having the same winning probability in all settings.

  In addition, it is only `` possible '' to determine the transition to the advantageous section in association with the winning of the conditional device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability, and at the time of winning the conditional device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability This does not mean that it is always necessary to make a transition to an advantageous section, or that a lottery to make a transition to an advantageous section must always be performed. Of course, it is possible not to make any decision regarding the advantageous section even when a condition device that does not have a setting difference in winning probability is won.

  On the other hand, the “conditional device having a setting difference in the winning probability (by setting)” indicates that the winning probabilities are not all the same. For example, in addition to the case where the winning probabilities are different for all setting values, the winning probabilities for some setting values are different from the winning probabilities for some other setting values (for example, winning probabilities for setting 1 to setting 5) Is “x” and the winning probability of setting 6 is “y (≠ x)”).

In addition, the “advantageous section” is a gaming section having a performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). Specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction content is displayed on the main control board. Only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that (an advantageous operation mode) can be identified, it indicates a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board. A game in an advantageous section may be referred to as a notification-enabled game. On the other hand, a game in the normal section or a game in the standby section may be referred to as a non-notifiable game.
However, the sub-control board cannot output an instruction content that the main control board performs or an effect contrary to the received signal related to the instruction function.

  In the advantageous section of this embodiment, the maximum payout number (“9”) corresponding to the specified number (“3”) in the game (when the accessory is not in operation) that can execute the instruction function operation game can be obtained. At least one or more games instruct the operating mode of the stop switch for winning the winning combination (small winning role 01) for the maximum payout number in a game selected as a condition device (small role B group) having an advantageous operating aspect It is necessary.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, a small combination B group and a small combination C group are provided as so-called push order bell condition devices.
In the small combination B group, a small combination 01 which is a nine-piece combination always wins when the pressing order is correct, and a single combination can be won (may be missed) when the pressing order is incorrect.
On the other hand, in the small combination C group, a small combination 02 which is a three-piece combination always wins when the pressing order is correct, and a single combination always wins when the pressing order is incorrect.

The game when the instruction function operation game is executed is when the accessory is not operated (normal game), and the specified number (the number of medals to be inserted) in this normal game is “3”.
Further, when the specified number is “3”, the maximum payout number is “9” (at the time of winning the small role 01).
For this reason, in the advantageous section of this embodiment, the correct pressing order for winning the small role 01 is determined by operating the instruction function when the condition device (small role B group) that allows the small role 01 to win is activated. It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

In addition, during an advantageous section, in a game won by a condition device having an advantageous operation mode, the instruction function may be always activated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
On the other hand, even if the game is won by the condition device having an advantageous operation mode during the advantageous section, the instruction function may not be activated.

Furthermore, the “standby section” refers to a gaming section when it has not yet shifted to the advantageous section after it has been decided to shift to the advantageous section. The waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, the normal zone may be shifted to the advantageous zone, the normal zone may be shifted to the standby zone, and the standby zone may be further transferred to the advantageous zone. It should be noted that it is not possible to shift from the advantageous section to the standby section, and always shift to the normal section after the advantageous section ends. The waiting section can be transferred only when it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination that can carry the winning information after the next game and corresponds to the special combination. A game with a combination of symbols must be finished. Of course, the game may end before the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is displayed.
In the standby section, the instruction function cannot be operated on the main control board, and a signal related to the instruction function cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board. When the instruction function is operated on the main control board and a signal related to the instruction function is transmitted to the sub-control board, the condition is that it is in an advantageous section.

In the advantageous section of the present embodiment, when one instruction function operation game (excluding games won in the small role C group, replay B group, and replay C group) is executed, and when a predetermined number of games are executed Have
In an advantageous section in which a predetermined number of games are executed, when a condition device having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch is won, the instruction function is basically activated.
The condition for ending the advantageous section is not to determine the number of games described above but, for example, to perform an end (punk) lottery at a predetermined timing, and to end the advantageous section when the lottery is won. May be.

Alternatively, only by shifting to the advantageous section, the execution condition of the instruction function operation game is not satisfied, and whether or not the instruction function operation game is executed is determined by lottery or the like on the condition that it is in the advantageous section, When it is decided to execute the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In addition, during the advantageous section, it is determined (lottery or the like) whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section.
In addition, the upper limit number of games is determined in the advantageous section, and when the upper limit number of games is reached, even if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is always terminated at that point (limiter ), Shift to normal section.

  In addition, when the upper limit number of games is reached, even if the condition device (group B) having an advantageous operation mode that can obtain the maximum payout number (“9”) has not been won or won However, even if the position related to the maximum payout number (small role 01) has never instructed the operation mode of the stop switch to win, the advantageous section is always ended at that time (limiter operation), Transition to the section.

As mentioned above, although the content partially overlaps with the above, the advantageous section in the present embodiment is defined as follows.
a) In the normal section, the lottery of whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (even when it is determined simultaneously with the lottery of the condition device) must be linked to the condition device having no setting difference. In other words, the transition probability to the advantageous section should not be different depending on the set value.
b) The set value should not be referred to in the advantageous lot addition lottery (even if the lottery is determined without lottery). When an advantageous section is added based on the selected condition device, it must be linked to a condition device with no setting difference.

c) Special part in the regular section (meaning a special part that carries over the winning. The same applies in this paragraph.) During the inside or during the special part in operation, the lottery of the advantageous section (may be determined at the same time as the lottery of the conditional equipment) ) Must not be performed. In addition, during the special role, even if it is in the advantageous section, it is not allowed to carry out the lottery (which may be decided without performing the lottery) on the advantageous section. Furthermore, if a conditional device having a setting difference that includes a special combination in an advantageous section is elected and the special combination is in operation, the advantageous section is added during the special combination operation. )).
Here, since it was common to perform an AT lottery even after becoming inside, waiting for an AT win while maintaining the inside without winning a special role even if inside. It was possible. However, recently, it is desirable not to perform an AT lottery in the interior. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a special role is won in the normal section and becomes inside, it is determined that the normal section should not shift to the advantageous section in the inside. Furthermore, if a special role is won in an advantageous section and becomes inside, it is determined that the advantageous section must not be added in the inside.

d) When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, the next game is shifted to the advantageous section, and until the advantageous section starts (in this embodiment, until the next game can be betted). ), It is necessary to display to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game (lighting of a lamp indicating the advantageous section, etc.).
Here, conventionally, when an AT is won, it is common to consume a certain number of games (via a precursor) from when the AT is won until the AT is notified to the player. It was. Also, for example, when an AT is drawn based on the winning of a rare role, if the player loses a rare role in the game, the player has won the rare role and the AT is drawn based on the rare role. In some cases, even if the rare role is won and the AT is won, the game may be stopped before the AT win is notified. Thereafter, when another person played a game on the table, there was a problem that the other person might enjoy the benefit of the AT (assigned by the previous player). However, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as a general rule, until the advantageous section starts (in this embodiment, until the next game can be betted), it is displayed that it is an advantageous section from the next game. Therefore, the above problem does not occur.
As described above, conventionally, the AT winning is notified after the AT winning (especially after the AT sign), but in the present embodiment, in principle, until the next game bet is possible. This is different in that an advantageous section is displayed before the advantageous section is started.
Further, the conventional AT winning notification is merely performed as part of the production, but the player is informed that the next game is an advantageous zone from the next game in this embodiment (a lamp indicating the advantageous zone) Is turned on in order to solve the above problem.

The advantageous section ratio refers to the ratio of staying in the advantageous section with respect to all the game sections (normal section + standby section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games in all the game sections is “1000” and the number of games in the advantageous section in the meantime is “700”, the advantageous section ratio is “70%”.
As will be described later, the advantageous section ratio is displayed in the present embodiment, but the displayed advantageous section ratio is a numerical value obtained by rounding down the decimal point as a result of the calculation.

The pull-in rate (PB) is the probability that a desired symbol to be stopped on the active line can be stopped on the active line from the moment when the stop switch is operated until the reel stops (maximum number of moving frames). Show.
If the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the active line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the active line (until the effective line is reached). Inability to pull in is referred to as “PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1”.
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel at the moment when the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch), the target symbol can always be stopped (drawn) on the effective line. = 1 ".

“PB = 1” has a case where all the reels are so in the role and a case where only the specific (partial) reels are.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames is set to “4”, and when the target symbol is arranged at an interval of 5 symbols or less, “PB = 1” is obtained, exceeding 5 symbols (6 symbols or more). When arranged at intervals, “PB ≠ 1”. In particular, the number of symbols of the reel of this embodiment is set to “20”, and if four symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols, the symbol is “PB = 1”.

In the case where the game progresses as “N−1” game, “N” game, “N + 1” game,... (“N” is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is “N” game. When it is an eye, the game of the “N” game is referred to as “current game”. Further, the game of the “N-1” game is referred to as “previous game”.
On the other hand, the game of the “N + 1” game is referred to as “next game”.

The “rendering rate” is a value calculated by the expected medal payout number / the number of medal inserted. When “1”, the current state is maintained, and when “1” is exceeded, the number of medals increases. If the number is less than “1”, the number of medals is decreased.
In addition, the “medal payout number expectation value” is calculated by the sum of “winning probability of combination × number of payouts” for all the combinations to be selected in the game.

  Furthermore, the “difference number” is a value calculated by “medal payout number (actually paid out medal number or expected medal payout number) −medal insertion number”. When the medal insertion number is “3”, if the medal payout number (expected value) is “3”, the difference number is “± 0”, and if the medal payout number (expected value) exceeds “3”, When the difference number exceeds “0” and the medal payout number (expected value) is less than “3”, the difference number is less than “0”.

“Bet” refers to betting a medal (game medium) to play a game. In the present embodiment, the number of bets that can be played (specified number) is set to 3 when the accessory is not in operation (during a normal game). On the other hand, the number of bets that can be played (specified number) is set to 2 during the operation of the accessory (1BB). In order to bet a medal, an actual medal is carefully inserted from a medal insertion slot, or a bet switch is operated to bet a stored medal.
The “game medium” is a medal in the present embodiment, but electronic information is used as the game medium, for example, in the case of a sealed game machine. “Electronic information” means, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is played on a gaming machine. It can be stored in a gaming machine as a gaming medium for performing the game.
In addition, since the display of the ratio of the actors and the like described later can be applied not only to the slot machine but also to the ball game machine, the “game medium” includes not only a medal but also a game ball. It is.

  “Reservation” refers to crediting a medal into the slot machine 10, unlike the “bet”. “Storage” may be used to include a bet, but in this specification, “storage” is used to mean that “bet” is not included. In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number that can be stored is set to “50” regardless of the gaming state or the like. When a small role wins and medals are paid out, medals are stored. In addition, when a medal is carefully inserted from the medal insertion slot and the maximum number is already bet, the inserted medal is stored. Therefore, when a medal is cleaned and inserted from the medal slot, it has a case where it is betted and a case where it is stored.

  It is equivalent that the slot machine 10 “pays” a medal to the player and that the player “acquires” a medal. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the slot machine 10, “medal payout”, and from the player side, “medal acquisition”. For this reason, there are a case of “payout (number of sheets)” (for example, payout means 67) and a case of “acquirement (number of sheets)” (for example, acquired number display LED 78), which have the same meaning.

In the present specification, a numerical value with “B” at the end (in particular, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a numerical value with “H” at the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating “16” in a decimal number is expressed as “00010000 (B)” in a binary number and “10 (H)” in a hexadecimal number. In addition, a numerical value indicating a decimal number is expressed as “16 (D)” as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether the number is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, the end symbols of “B”, “D”, and “H” may be omitted, respectively.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
A main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided as typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 50 includes an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (not necessarily including only those illustrated in FIG. 1).

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as a bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection unit to which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit that transmits signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the peripheral device for input is indicated by an arrow from the peripheral device to the main control board 50, and the peripheral device for output is indicated by an arrow from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. It is shown (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium that can store (update) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game. Data (total number of games etc.) necessary to display management information described later is stored in the RWM 53.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs necessary for the progress of the game, various data (for example, a data table), and the like.

The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game. Specifically, the lottery of the role, the drive control of the reel 31, and the winning Execute paying out.
The main CPU 55 incorporates a register. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality (for example, an A register to an L register, a transmission register, and the like) are provided.

An MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted on the main control board 50. Note that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside the MPU inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is mounted on a sub control board 80 described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside the one installed in the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are sent into the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes a passage sensor 43 a, a blocker 45, and a closing sensor 44 (but not limited to these), and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
When a medal is inserted from the medal slot 43, the passage sensor 43a first detects the medal.

  Further, a blocker 45 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals, and forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout slot when the insertion of medals is not permitted. To do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding medals inserted from the medal insertion port 43 to the hopper 35 is formed.

  Here, the blocker 45 is in a state where the insertion of medals is not permitted during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 are stopped and the payout corresponding to the winning combination is completed at the time of winning the winning combination). To do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when a game is not being performed.

  A closing sensor 44 (a plurality of optical sensors) is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. Accordingly, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is further detected by the insertion sensor 44 after being detected by the passage sensor 43a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a checkout switch 46 as operation switches operated by the player. Connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting a stored medal for the current game. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum or specified number) medals are provided.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

  In addition, the specified number of this embodiment is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated and 2 when the accessory is activated, but two medals when the 1-bet switch 40a is operated (pressed) twice. Can be inserted, and three medals can be inserted when operated (pressed) three times. Further, during operation of the accessory, if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, it is possible to insert two medals (a prescribed number) at a time.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of left, middle and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31 and are operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (pays out) a medal that has been bet and / or stored (credited) in the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50. In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. In FIG. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. Thus, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed therebetween.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (such as a relay board). For example, one or more other boards (such as relay boards) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

  The display board 75 is equipped with a storage number display LED 76, an advantageous section display LED 77, and an acquisition number display LED 78. These LEDs 76 to 78 are provided in the vicinity of an operation switch operated by the player, and are provided at a position where the player can always visually recognize them. It is not necessary that all the LEDs 76 to 78 are provided on one display substrate 75. For example, the display substrate 75 includes a plurality of display substrates 75 such as the display substrates 75A, 75B,. Any of the LEDs 76 to 78 may be provided.

FIG. 2 shows the actual positional relationship (arrangement) of the storage number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, the acquired number display LED 78, the settlement switch 46, the 1-bet switch 40a, and the 3-bet switch 40b on the front side of the slot machine 10. It is a top view.
In FIG. 2, a display board 75 (shown by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is disposed in the slot machine 10 below the storage number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, and the acquired number display LED 78. ing.

The storage number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored in the slot machine 10 and includes a digit 1 that displays an upper digit and a digit 2 that displays a lower digit. That is, the storage number display LED 76 displays two digits.
Here, “digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, it is composed of a seven segment LED (so-called 7-segment) and a segment DP (decimal point, a dot-like LED that displays a decimal point). Has been.
As shown in FIG. 2, there are four digits 1 to 4 mounted on the display board 75, but in this embodiment, there are nine digits, and the other digits are the main control board. 60 (details will be described later).

The storage number display LED 76 displays the number of stored medals, and in this embodiment, displays a number between “00” and “50” (integer).
For example, in a state where no medals are bet and stored, the display of the storage number display LED 76 is “00”. Here, when one medal is maintained, the one medal is bet for the game. When two more cards are added, three medals are bet for the game (when the prescribed number is three). Therefore, when up to three medals are maintained, the medals are bet and not stored. As medals continue to be maintained, medals are stored in the slot machine 10 and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76.

  In this embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored sheets reaches 50 (when “50” is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), medals are not stored any more. In this state, if a medal is maintained from the medal insertion slot 43, the maintained medal is returned from the payout slot by the blocker 45.

  Here, when a winning combination (excluding replay) is awarded and a medal corresponding to the winning combination is paid out, the slot machine 10 has priority over actually paying out a medal from the payout slot. Medals are stored. For example, in the case where the stored number before winning a winning combination is “10” and the 9 winning combination wins, the display of the storing number display LED 76 is updated from “10” to “19”.

  Furthermore, when the number of stored items exceeds “50” when winning a winning combination, the portion exceeding “50” is actually paid out from the payout port. For example, when the number of reserved coins is “47” before winning a winning combination and nine medals are paid out for winning nine winning combinations, three are stored and the number of storing is “50”, which exceeds “50”. Six cards are paid out from the payout slot.

  Further, at the time of replay winning, medals are not stored and paid out, and the number of medals bet in the game are automatically bet for replay. For example, when the game is played with 3 bets (3 cards) and a replay is won, 3 medals are automatically bet. Since the automatic bet based on the replay winning is the insertion of medals for replaying, even if the settlement (return) operation is performed thereafter, the medals cannot be settled.

  According to the “Rules for Game Machine Approval and Type Approval (hereinafter, simply“ Rule ”)”, when the combination of symbols corresponding to replay is stopped on the active line, It is interpreted as operating and not a “winning”. However, in the present application (this specification and the like), replay is also treated as one of the roles (replaying game), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay is stopped on the active line is referred to as “replay winning”.

  Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is constituted by the segment DP of the digit 2. The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned off in the normal section and the standby section, but during the advantageous section, it is controlled to be in the lighting state. Therefore, the player can determine at a glance whether or not he / she is currently staying in the advantageous section by confirming whether the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on / off.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 2, the advantageous section display LED 77 is located in the vicinity of the settlement switch 46. Therefore, when the player ends the game and has a stored medal (for example, when “10” is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), the player operates the checkout switch 46. The fact that it is not in the advantageous section can be easily confirmed by the unlit state of the advantageous section display LED 77. Further, in this embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit before the settlement switch 46 becomes operable. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game against the player's will despite being in the advantageous zone (or the advantageous zone from the next game).

Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 is an LED for displaying the number of payouts (the number of players acquired) when winning a winning combination, and is composed of a digit 3 for displaying the upper digit and a digit 4 for displaying the lower digit. ing. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays two digits, like the storage number display LED 76.
The acquisition number display LED 78 is “00” when there are no medals to be paid out. For example, when nine medals to be described later win a prize and nine medals are paid out, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is: From “00” to “09”.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as “0”.

The acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs. For example, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened and a door open error is detected, an error number “dE” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays an advantageous operation mode (push order instruction information) when the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also serves as a display of an advantageous operation mode by the operation of the acquisition number, error contents, and instruction function. Note that an advantageous push order notification when the instruction function is activated is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

Here, in this specification, the display of the pressing order using the acquisition number display LED 78 by the main control board 50 is referred to as “operation of the instruction function”, and the display of the pressing order by the sub control board 80 is “notification of the pressing order”. Called.
Further, as shown in FIG. 20 described later, a number corresponding to an advantageous pressing order is referred to as a “pressing order instruction number”.
Furthermore, the push order displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function, for example, information such as “= 1” in FIG. 20 is referred to as “push order instruction information”. That is, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function.

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing other digits (digits 5 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50. FIG. In FIG. 3, (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2.
The main control board 50 is housed and sealed in a transparent board case 16 because of its security. The main control board 50 cannot be accessed unless the caulking portion 16a of the board case 16 is broken (the board case 16 cannot be opened). In FIG. 3, the main control board 50 (50 </ b> A and 50 </ b> B) is illustrated so as to be seen through without being blocked by the board case 16. The caulking portion 16a may be referred to as a sealing member.

On the board case 16, stickers displaying a certification of the proper main control board 50, a serial number, an opening record of the caulking portion 16 a, and the like are affixed. Digits 5 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 so as not to be present.
The digit 5 is a set value display LED 73, and is an LED that displays the current set value when the setting is confirmed or changed. The set value display LED 73 does not necessarily have to be mounted on the main control board 50. For example, the set value display LED 73 can also be used as the back side of the front door, the storage number display LED 76, or the acquired number display LED 78.

Digits 6 to 9 are management information display LEDs 74. In order to ensure the visibility of the management information display LED 74, for example, one digit housing in FIG.
It is preferable to design the width m1 × length n ≧ 36 square millimeters. Alternatively, when the management information display LED 74 is a single horizontally long (width m2) digit casing,
It is preferable to design the size such that width m2 × length n ÷ 4 (number of digits) ≧ 36 square millimeters.

In FIG. 3, in Example 1 of (a), there is one main control board 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Example 2 of (b), the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards. And each board | substrate may be connected by the harness etc. However, even if the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of different boards, it is necessary to house the whole in the board case 16 and seal it.
In the example of FIG. 3B, the main control board 50 is two main control boards 50A and 50B, and connectors are provided on the main control boards 50A and 50B, respectively, and the connectors are connected by a harness. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a connector that can directly connect the main control boards 50A and 50B may be used without using a harness (the same applies to FIG. 42B described later).
The set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50A side, but the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B. That is, the main control board 50B also serves as a display board for mounting the management information display LED 74.

  Further, the management information display LEDs 74 are arranged in one horizontal row as shown in Example 1 of (a), and, for example, digits 6 and 7 are arranged in the upper row as shown in Example 2 of (b). The digits 8 and 9 may be arranged in one row on the lower stage.

FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the digits 1 to 9, the segments A to G, and the segment DP.
As described above, each digit is composed of seven rod-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment DP, and the segments A to G (seven) constitute a so-called 7-segment. .

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, in the digit 1, the segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the upper digits of the storage number display LED 76, and the segment DP is unused.
In addition, among the digits 2, the segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the lower digits of the storage number display LED 76, and the segment DP is used as the advantageous section display LED 77.
Furthermore, the segments A to G of the digits 3 and 4 constitute 7 segments of the upper digit and the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is not used.

  Further, among the digits 5, the segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the set value display LED 73, and the segment DP is an LED that is lit during the setting change. That is, among the set value display LEDs 73, when only 7 segments are lit, setting is being confirmed, and when 7 segments and segment DP are lit, setting is being changed. The segment DP of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment DP of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the set value is confirmed during the setting change.

  The segments 6 to 9 constitute the management information display LED 74, and the segments 6 and 7 display the information type of the management information. Segments 8 and 9 display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in segments 6 and 7 in the management information. The segment DP of the digits 6 to 9 is unused. However, when the management information display LED 74 is turned on, the segment DP of the digit 7 can be turned on. In addition, by turning on the segment DP of the digit 7, it is possible to clarify the boundary between the digits 6 and 7 indicating the information type and the digits 8 and 9 indicating the numerical values, thereby facilitating the confirmation.

FIG. 4 shows a configuration diagram of segment data. For example, when “0” is displayed on the digit 1, the segments A to F are turned on and the segments G and DP are turned off, so that the segment data is “00111111 (B)”.
Further, when “1” is displayed on the digit 2 and the segment B, C, and DP are turned on during the advantageous section, the segment data becomes “10000110 (B)”. That is, by setting the most significant bit (8th bit) of the segment data of digit 2 to “0” or “1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off or turned on. Accordingly, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section by determining whether the eighth bit of the segment data of the digit 2 is “0” or “1”.

In FIG. 1, a motor 32 and the like of a symbol display device are electrically connected to a main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) for displaying symbols, motors 32 for driving the reels 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reels 31.

  The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination) is attached is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape on, for example, the peripheral side surface of the reel 31 and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has rotated one time, or the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (cuts) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, a symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

  In addition, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when paying out medals of the hopper 35 from a payout port, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that are maintained and received from the medal slot 43 are formed so as to be accommodated in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as “chute part”).
The payout sensor 37 is a pair of optical sensors arranged at a predetermined distance, and is configured to be detected by the other payout sensor 37 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal was detected by the one payout sensor 37. Has been. Then, based on the timing at which the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medals have been paid out correctly.

For example, when the signals of both the payout sensors 37 are OFF even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that no medal has been paid out and a hopper error (no medal) is detected. Is done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals of the payout sensor 37 remains on, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

The power switch 11 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is turned on when a setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot and is rotated 90 degrees to the right (clockwise), and is turned on when confirming the setting or changing the setting.

  The setting switch 13 is a switch operated when changing a setting value. For example, every time the setting is changed, the set value is incremented by “1”. In this embodiment, the setting value has setting 1 to setting 6, and during the setting change, every time the setting switch 13 is operated, the setting value becomes “1” → “2” →. “1” → ... and so on. Note that any setting value is displayed during the setting change, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed setting value is confirmed.

In addition, when the power switch 11 is turned on while the switch is turned on, the reset switch 14 is reset, that is, initialized, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
The door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when a front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and detects the open / closed state of the front door.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external concentrated terminal board 100 is output from a part of the output port 52.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external concentration terminal board 100. In the present embodiment, an external signal (1BB signal, RB signal, advantageous section signal), an external signal indicating that an error or power failure has occurred in the slot machine 10 and the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 are shown. An external signal, a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and the like are provided.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71 described later) is unidirectionally connected to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. Information necessary for production output (control command) is transmitted.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
An effect peripheral device such as the following effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, the peripheral device for production is not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data and the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the production.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs such as a lottery for production, various data, and the like as production data.

  The effect lamp 21 is made of an LED, for example, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect lamp 21 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31, and the back lamp and reel 31 for illuminating from behind the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three symbols that are continuously visible from the display window 17). Fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reel 31 from above, and a frame lamp that is disposed on the front face of the slot machine 10 and blinks when winning a winning combination.

The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, and the like. It displays game information (such as the number of games played and the number of games acquired during the operation of an accessory or in an advantageous zone).
The cross key 24 and the menu button 25 are used to display information intended by the player (including a two-dimensional code that is a player's game history), and the hall manager (store manager, etc.) changes various settings. Used when

Subsequently, the combination of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols, etc. will be described.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, symbol numbers are also shown. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number 0 is “Bell A”.
As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
In the figure, “blank” does not mean that a symbol is not displayed at all, and a predetermined symbol corresponding to “blank” is displayed.
Note that “Bell A”, “Bell B”, and “Bell C” are symbols having similar appearances, but different symbols.

6A shows the positional relationship between the display window (transparent window) 17 provided on the front door (front door (not shown)) of the slot machine 10 and each reel 31, and the effective line (design symbol). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing display lines for displaying combinations.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction in this embodiment. Further, each reel 31 is arranged so that three symbols that are continuous in the vertical direction can be seen from the display window 17. Therefore, the display window 17 of the slot machine 10 is arranged so that a total of nine symbols (frames) can be seen. The number on the lower right of each symbol indicates the symbol number.

FIG. 6B illustrates the designation of symbol positions in this specification. In the present specification, for each reel 31, the symbol positions at the time of stopping visible from the display window 17 are referred to as “upper stage”, “middle stage”, and “lower stage” in order from the top. ”,“ Middle left ”, and“ lower left ”.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6A, effective lines are set for the nine symbols visible from the display window 17.

  Here, the “effective line” is a symbol combination line (display line) that is a symbol arrangement line when the reel 31 is stopped, and forms a symbol combination, and a symbol corresponding to one of the roles. When the combination stops at that line, it is the line that wins the role. In this embodiment, one effective line (a straight line passing through “lower left stage” − “middle middle stage” − “upper right stage”) is defined, and all other symbol combination lines are invalid lines. Yes.

  An invalid line is a line that is not set as a valid line among symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on that line, a profit corresponding to the combination is given. This line does not perform (medal payout etc.). In other words, the invalid line is a line that is not a target of combination of symbols in the first place.

  Conventionally, there are known slot machines in which the number of effective lines differs according to the number of medals inserted. For example, when the number of inserted medals is 1, the number of effective lines is set to 1. When the number of inserted medals is 2, the number of effective lines is set to 3. When the number of inserted medals is 3, the number of effective lines is set to 5. And so on. In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, three or two medals are inserted to play a game, and in all games, one shown in FIG. 6A becomes an active line, There is no change in the number of effective lines due to the number of medals inserted. Therefore, in this specification, the term “effective line” refers to the line illustrated in FIG.

  7 to 12 are diagrams showing combinations of combinations of types (combinations included in a condition device lottered by the combination lottery means 61 described later), the number of payouts, and the like in this embodiment. Note that FIG. 12 shows pattern symbols 01 to 03 (numbers “101” to “101”) as combinations of symbols that are displayed when the winning combination is missed when a specific condition device is won, although it is not a role. “120”).

The roles of the present embodiment are roughly classified into special roles, replays (replaying roles), and small roles.
A combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on the active line (the combination wins, the same applies hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out.
However, the number of payouts at the time of winning a special role is set to 0. In replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

  7 to 12, “specified number 3” displayed in the number of payouts, etc. indicates the number of payouts when the specified number is 3 (when the accessory is inactive, that is, the number of input during normal game play). The “specified number 2” indicates the number of payouts and the like when the specified number is 2 (the number of inserted items during operation of the accessory, that is, during the special game). For example, the replay 01 with the number “3” indicates that a replay is performed with a specified number of three, and “−” with a specified number of two indicates that a lottery is not performed.

In FIG. 7, numbers “1” and “2” correspond to special combinations (combinations). In the present embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB).
The special role is a role to shift from the normal game to the special game.
When winning 1BB, there is no payout of medals in the current game, but the next game shifts to a 1BB game corresponding to a special game (operation of an accessory).
During a 1BB game (when an accessory is activated), it is an advantageous game for the player that can expect to win medals more than when the accessory is not activated because the payout rate is set to exceed “1”. .

In addition, the replay (re-playing combination) is a combination that allows a re-play to be performed while maintaining the number of medals inserted in this game (automatic betting of medals).
As shown in FIG. 7, the replay of this embodiment includes replays 01 to 06 (numbers “3” to “13”).
Replays 02 and 03 are replays that are transferred to other RTs when winning in a specific RT. Therefore, these replays are also referred to as transition replays.

More specifically, when Replay 02 wins at RT2, the next game is shifted to RT3 (RT advantageous to the player). For this reason, the replay 02 is also referred to as a promotion replay.
Further, when Replay 03 wins at RT3, the next game is shifted to RT2 (RT that is more disadvantageous to the player than the previous RT). For this reason, the replay 03 is also referred to as a fall (demotion) replay.

  In addition, the replays 04 and 05 are first used as a control replay for the purpose of increasing the types of condition devices by overlapping a plurality of replays, and in the present embodiment, Replay included in replay B2, B3, C2, C3, or E. When the replay B2, B3, C2, or C3 is won, the replay 04 or 05 as the control replay does not stop at the active line.

Furthermore, the replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as rare replays and are included in the replay E of the condition device described later. When the replay E is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the extra lottery may not be executed, but the extra lottery may be performed.
The replay 06 is a replay that is drawn during the 1BB operation, and is included in the replay D of the condition device described later. When replay D is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the extra lottery may not be executed, but the extra lottery may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, the small combination includes small combinations 01 to 40 (numbers “14” to “100”). The small roles 01 and 02 are small roles (small roles corresponding to high-level bells) that are won in the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won, which will be described later. Further, the small roles 03 to 34 are small roles (small roles corresponding to Anme Bell) that can be won (PB ≠ 1) in the incorrect answer pressing order at the time of pressing order bell winning.
Furthermore, the small combinations 35 to 38 are rare small combinations (small combinations corresponding to watermelon or cherry).
Furthermore, the small combinations 39 and 40 are small combinations that can be awarded only when the specified number is 2, that is, when the combination is activated.

  As described above, the pattern symbols 01 to 03 are not the combination itself, but appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the incorrect pressing order is determined when the pressing order is won. It is a combination of symbols. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols stops at an effective line in a specific RT (in this embodiment, non-RT, RT1, or RT3), the pattern symbol shifts RT (in this embodiment, shifts to RT2). It is a combination. In the present embodiment, pattern symbols 01 to 03 always appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) at the time of the incorrect answer in the pushing order at the time of winning the small role B group. However, other symbol combinations (not the combination itself) may appear.

In each of the above-mentioned combinations, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination does not stop on the active line in the game selected for the combination, a combination that is carried over after the next game and a combination that is not carried over are determined. .
The combination carried over is 1BB in this embodiment. When 1BB is won, in the game until 1BB wins, the 1BB winning information is controlled to be carried over after the next game.

  On the other hand, the winning combination of 1BB is carried over, while small plays and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. In the lottery of the condition device, when winning a small combination or replay, the winning combination is valid only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over after the next game. That is, in the game won for these winning combinations, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be won, but at the end of the game regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won. The right to the elected role will cease.

  When the game is started, the player inserts medals stored in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet), or cleans and inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (manual bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a prescribed number of medals bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) performs lottery of the roles by the role lottery means 61 and drives all the motors 32 to control all the reels. 31 is controlled to rotate. As the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reel 31 are moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window 17 at a predetermined speed.

  Then, the player presses the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) controls the driving of the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 and responds to the result lottery result of the role lottery means 61. Thus, stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed.

  Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the active line (when the winning combination of the winning combination), a medal corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are exemplifications and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (decision, selection) of the condition device (winning role). Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, and the like.
“Condition device winning” is also referred to as a role lottery result, lottery result, winning number, winning result, or the like.

  The role lottery means 61 includes, for example, a lottery random number generation means (hardware random number, etc.), a random number extraction means for extracting a random number generated by the random number generation means, and a random value extracted by the random number extraction means. And determining means for determining whether the condition device has been won or not and determining the selected condition device.

  The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal numbers). The random number is, for example, a random number for which a counter that performs 1 count at 200 n (nano) sec continues to count as a cycle in a range of “0” to “65535”. While the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number Keep counting.

  The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the condition device corresponding to the region to which the random number value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a condition device lottery table to be described later. For example, if the extracted random number value belongs to the area of the winning and replay condition device number “1” (replay A), it is determined that the replay A is won.

13-16 is a figure which shows the kind of condition apparatus lotteryed by the part lottery means 61, and the content of the winning combination contained in each condition apparatus.
In the following description, the condition device will be mainly described, and details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing when each condition device is won will be described in the reel control means 65. To do.

As described above, the condition device of the present embodiment does not carry the winning information to the next game, as well as the “game condition device” that is a condition device that includes any of the special roles that can carry the winning information to the next game. It consists of a “winning and replay condition device” which is a condition device that includes either a small role or a replay.
The winning of the accessory condition device corresponds to 1BB winning in the present embodiment, and includes the accessory condition device numbers “1” and “2”.
The equipment condition device number “0” corresponds to the non-winning special role, the equipment condition device number “1” corresponds to the 1BBA winning, and the equipment condition device number “2” wins the 1BBB. Equivalent to.

For example, when the replay A is won, the accessory condition device number is “0”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “1”.
On the other hand, when 1BBA is selected alone, the accessory condition device number is “1”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “0”.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where 1BB and a small role are duplicated. For example, when 1BBA and a small role D are won simultaneously, the accessory condition device number is “1”, and the winning and replay condition device number Becomes “26”.
When 1BB and a small combination or replay are won, the winning of the small combination or replay is given priority in this game (the priority can be arbitrarily set). In addition, since the winning of the small role or replay is valid only in the current game, the winning is not carried over to the next game, but the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game unless winning.

Hereinafter, the winning and replay condition apparatus will be described.
The condition device number “0” corresponds to a non-winning role (so-called “losing”).
In addition, the replay A with the condition device number “1” is the single winning of the replay 01. When Replay A is won, Replay 01 wins regardless of push order (in any push order).

Replays B1 to B3 with condition device numbers “2” to “4” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay group B”), and replays C1 to C3 with condition device numbers “5” to “7” (hereinafter collectively referred to as generic names). In this case, each of them is a duplicate winning of a plurality of types of replays, and is a duplicate winning including at least one of replay 01 or 02. And according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, it sets so that the kind of replay to win may differ.
For example, in the replay B1 of the condition device number “2”, the replay 02 wins in the pressing order of the first left stop, and the replay 01 wins at a time other than the left first stop (middle or first right stop).

In the case of replay overlap winning, there is no concept of high / low for medal payout because the replay (replaying gamer) wins in any pushing order. However, for example, when the replay B1 is won at RT2, the RT is promoted (shifted from RT2 to RT3) by winning the replay 02 in the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the left first stop, RT2 is maintained by winning the replay 01.
When the replay C1 is won in RT3, RT3 is maintained by winning the replay 01 in the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the first stop on the left, the RT is dropped (relegated) (shifted from RT3 to RT2) by winning the replay 03.

Replay D of the condition device number “8” is a single winning of replay 06. When Replay D is won, Replay 06 wins regardless of push order.
Similarly, the replay E of the condition device number “9” is a duplicate win of the replays 04 and 05. When Replay E is won, Replay 04 or 05 wins regardless of the push order. These replays 04 and 05 have a role as a rare replay. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the lottery is drawn at RT1 and the replay E is won during RT1 and the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the extra lottery may not be executed, but the extra lottery may be performed.

In FIG. 14, the small combination A with the condition device number “10” is arranged in a so-called common bell, and the small combination 01 is a single winner. When winning the small combination A, the small combination 01 always wins (PB = 1) regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
14 to 15, the small roles B1 to B12 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “small role B group”) having the condition device numbers “11” to “22” correspond to so-called push order bells. The winning combination includes at least one of the small combination 01 (9-bell, 9-sheet combination) and the small combination 03 to 34 (one-sheet combination).

  When these condition devices are selected, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when the correct answer pressing order is set, “PB = 1” and the small combination 01 which is a high-ranking bell (9 bells, 9 winning combinations) wins a prize. On the other hand, when the order is the wrong answer pressing order, the small combination 03 which is a low-cost bell (one piece combination) according to the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated). -34 wins, and when neither of the small roles wins (when a pattern symbol is displayed due to missing).

In FIG. 16, the small roles C1 to C3 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “small role C group”) of the condition device numbers “23” to “25” are so-called pushes in the same manner as the small role B group described above. Corresponding to the order bell, the winning combination includes a small combination 02 (three bells, three combinations) and small combinations 03 to 10 (one combination).
When these condition devices are selected, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when the correct answer pressing order is set, “PB = 1” and the small combination 02 which is the high-ranking bell (three bells, three roles) wins a prize. On the other hand, when the order is incorrect, “PB = 1”, and any one of the small roles 03 to 10 which is an Anme Bell (one-piece combination) wins. Therefore, when winning the small role C group, unlike the winning time of the small role B group, there is no case where a pattern symbol is displayed (missing). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases where none of the small roles are won.

When winning the small role B group, there will be 9 payouts when the high-order bell wins, so there will be 3 in (inserts) and 9 out (payouts) in the correct push order. The number of sheets is “+6 sheets”. Therefore, the number of medals increases when the correct answer is in the pushing order, and the condition device decreases the number of medals when the answer is incorrect (the number of payouts is 1 or 0).
On the other hand, in the small role C group, when the high-ranking bell wins, three payouts are made, so when the correct answer is pushed, there are 3 in (inserted number) and 3 out (paid out number). The difference number is “± 0”. Therefore, when the answer is correct in the pushing order, the number of medals is maintained as it is, and when the answer is incorrect in the pushing order (the number of payouts is one), the condition device decreases the number of medals.

  In this way, the reason why both the push order bells for nine payouts and the push order bell for three payouts in the correct push order is provided for adjusting the payout rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the probability of winning a single role is 25% when the push order is incorrect when winning the small role B group, and the other 75% is a pattern symbol. Is set to be displayed (no payout when pattern symbols are displayed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, in the case of incorrect answer in the pressing order when winning the small role C group, one winning combination is awarded with “PB = 1”. In this way, it is possible to set the payout rate within an appropriate range by providing two types of push order bells with different payout numbers for the correct answer and the incorrect answer, and appropriately setting the winning probability. become.

The small combination D of the condition device number “26” corresponds to a rare small combination (watermelon). The small role D is a single winning of the small role 35 and is set to “PB ≠ 1”.
Further, the small combination E1 with the condition device number “27” and the small combination E2 with the condition device number “28” correspond to a rare small combination (cherry) like the small combination D1. The small combination E1 is a double winning combination of the small combinations 36 and 38, and the small combination E2 is a double winning combination including the small combination 37 in addition to the small combinations 36 and 38. When winning a small combination E1 or E2, two combinations (small combination 36 or 38) win the prize regardless of the push order.

The small combination F with the condition device number “29” is a combination that is drawn only during the 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a double winning combination of the small combinations 01 to 39. When winning the small role F, the small role 39, which is a 10-piece role, wins with “PB = 1”.
The small combination G of the condition device number “30” is a combination that is drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a single winning combination of the small combination 40. When winning the small role G, the small role 40, which is a nine-piece role, wins with “PB = 1”.

  FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 show the winning probabilities determined by the lottery table when the condition device lottery is performed by the role lottery means 61, and shows the numbers of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device for each RT. FIG. Dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 by “65536” gives the winning probability. For example, the number of 1BBA single winners is set to “20” and “10” (total of “30”) for both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the single winning probability of 1 BBA is “30/65536”.

FIG. 17 is a numerical table of condition devices that are common to settings and that can be determined to shift to an advantageous section, or that perform an additional addition of an advantageous section (or that can perform an additional lottery).
Here, “setting common” indicates that there is no setting difference, that is, setting 1 to setting 6 have the same value.
And, when a condition device common to the settings is won, it may always be decided to shift to the advantageous section (determined to be added during the advantageous section), or whether or not to shift to the advantageous section ( Whether or not to add during the advantageous section may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, a condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous zone (decide to add during the advantageous zone) and a condition device that decides not to move to the advantageous zone (decide not to add during the advantageous zone) It may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the condition device common to the settings shown in FIG. 17 is provided with a condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous section and a condition device that decides not to move to the advantageous section. Further, during the advantageous section, the condition device is always set to determine to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 17, in the normal section, “◯” means that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and “x” means that it is decided not to move to the advantageous section. Further, in the advantageous section, “Δ” means that it is decided to add the advantageous section, and “x” means that it is decided not to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 17, “◯” is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and “Δ” is determined to add the advantageous section, but not limited to this, “◯” It may mean that a lottery is selected to shift to an advantageous section, and “Δ” may mean a lottery whether or not to add an advantageous section.

FIG. 18 shows condition devices and their numbers that are not determined to shift to the advantageous section and that are not determined to be added to the advantageous section.
In the present embodiment, the condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous section or to add the advantageous section is limited to when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is selected, and the condition device shown in FIG. In the win, none of them decides to move to the advantageous section and decides to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 18, the numerical values of setting 1 and setting 6 are representatively illustrated, but actually, as described above, the setting value has six stages of setting 1 to setting 6 and the setting value is set. A numeric value for each value is defined.

In FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, since the condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB is drawn only in the non-inside, it is drawn in non-RT, RT1 to RT3. Moreover, 1BBA and 1BBB have the case where it wins independently, and the case where it overlaps with small part D, E1, or E2. On the other hand, the small role D, E1 or E2 has a case where it wins alone. A condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB that is drawn in RT4 is treated as a single winning combination of the small role D, E1, or E2. Therefore, the numbers that become the single winning of the small role D in RT4 are “580” to “585” in total, and the numbers that become the single winning of the small role E1 in RT4 are “1030” in total, The numbers that become the single winning of the small role E2 in RT4 are "310" to "370" in total.
Also, 1BBB is set as a winning combination when a condition device having a setting difference is won, and it is decided to shift to an advantageous section based on winning of 1BBB or to add an advantageous section. Never happen.

Replay D is drawn only during the 1BB operation. Furthermore, Replay E is drawn only at RT1. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process proceeds to RT1. When the replay E is won at RT1, the advantageous section is added (limited to the advantageous section). Therefore, in order to set so that it does not appear in other RTs, the replay E is drawn in lots only at RT1.
Further, the small combinations D and E1 are drawn only when the accessory is not operated, and are not drawn when the accessory is operated.
On the other hand, the small combinations F and G are not drawn when the combination is not activated, but are drawn only when the combination is activated.

  In FIG. 17, the total number of 1BBA single winners is “30”, but in this embodiment, the number “20” determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into a numeric value “10” determined not to shift. That is, in the case of winning 1BBA alone, if the number “20” is won, and if the game is a normal section, the advantageous section is simultaneously won. On the other hand, in the case where 1 BBA is elected alone, if the number “10” is elected, the advantageous section is not elected.

In addition, when 1 BBA is elected alone during the advantageous section, it is decided to add the advantageous section for both the number “20” and “10”.
Similarly, the number of the winning combination of the small role E1 is “1000” in total, but in this embodiment, the number “250” determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into a numeric value “750” that is determined not to be transferred to “”.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the single winning number for the small role E1 is set to one “1000” (not divided into the “250” and the “750”), and the small role E1 is won. In addition, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. For example, it may be decided to move to the advantageous interval with a probability of 25% and not decide to move to the advantageous interval with a probability of 75%. In this way, it is possible to provide a number that is won in the advantageous section from the beginning and a number that is not won in the advantageous section, but the value itself is a single value, and when the number is won, the transition is made to the advantageous section. You may make it perform the lottery (two-step lottery) of whether to do.
In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of RT4 (inside the interior), it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, even when winning the small role D or E1, when it is RT4, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added ("* 3" in FIG. 17). .

In FIG. 18, when 1BBB is selected alone and 1BBB and small combination D are both selected, the decision regarding the advantageous section is not made. However, as will be described later, an opportunity to add an advantageous section is provided after the end of the operation of 1BBB (after transition to RT1).
The small role E2 has a case where it wins redundantly with 1BBB and a case where it wins alone, but neither makes a decision regarding an advantageous section. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, in the case of winning the small role E1, there are cases where the determination regarding the advantageous section is performed for both the single winning of the small role E1 and the overlapping winning with 1BBA.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18, the replay A, replay B group, and replay C group condition devices are common in setting, but are not determined to move to the advantageous section, and are added in the advantageous section. I do not decide.
However, not limited to the examples of FIGS. 17 and 18, at the time of winning the replay condition device, it is decided to shift to an advantageous section (including lottery) or decided to add an advantageous section (including lottery). ) May be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 18, in Replay A, Replay B group, and Replay C group, the numbers are slightly different between setting 1 and setting 6 (for example, “1” is different), and replay A, replay B group, The replay group C may be set separately.

  In FIG. 18, Replay A is drawn in all RTs when the accessory is not in operation. In addition, the replay B1 group is drawn only at RT2. Furthermore, the replay group C is drawn only at RT3. The small combination A, small combination B group, and small combination C group all have a setting difference between setting 1 and setting 6, but the numbers are the same in all RTs.

Further, as shown in the table of “special combination and small combination” in FIG. 18, in setting 1 and setting 6, setting 6 has a higher probability of winning 1BB and small combination. Therefore, in this respect, setting 6 is more advantageous than setting 1.
Furthermore, as shown in the “Replay” table, the winning probability of replay is highest at RT3. And, in the advantageous section, since it is basically set to stay at RT3, not only the medal is increased by the operation of the instruction function at the time of pushing order bell winning, but the gaming state is reduced by the replay winning with less decrease of the medal. .

Further, the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group are all set in a condition device having a setting difference. Here, the number difference between setting 1 and setting 6 of the small role A is “250”, and the number difference between setting 1 and setting 6 of the small role B group (whole) is “240 (20 × 12)”. Is. Therefore, the small combination A has a larger number difference than the small combination B group. Thereby, the difference of the payout rate according to a set value can be provided reliably by making the direction of the number of the small combination A which does not have a winning difference according to a pushing order into a larger value.
In addition, since the combination of symbols that can be won when winning the small role A and the combination of symbols that can be won when the correct answer in the pushing order when winning the small role B group are set identically (described later), the small role A The set value cannot be estimated by counting the number of winning (winning).

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning the small role B group is set higher than the probability of winning the small role C group. Here, when the specified number is 3, the maximum payout number is 9, and during the advantageous section, at least 1 instruction function operation game in which the payout number is 9 (maximum payout number with the specified number of 3) is 1 Need to be executed once. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once when the small group B is won. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small role B group higher than the winning probability of the small role C group, it is won by one instruction function operation game (small role C group, replay B group, replay C group) It is possible to reduce the expected value of the number of games in an advantageous section that ends only with a game (excluding played games). Furthermore, it is less likely that the advantageous section cannot be ended because the small part B group has not been won once during the predetermined number of times, even though it is an advantageous section that ends by executing a predetermined number of games. be able to.

Returning to FIG.
The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of winning flags corresponding to each combination based on the lottery result by the combination lottery means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all combinations. When any of the condition devices is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device is turned on (the winning flag is set).

For example, in a non-internal game, when the replay B1 is won, the two winning flags Replay 01 and Replay 02 included in the conditional device are turned on, and the winning flags of the other roles are turned off.
Similarly, in the non-inside medium game, when the small role B1 is won, the small role 01, the small role 03, the small role 10, the small role 11, the small role 18, the small role 19 and the small role included in the condition device. The seven winning flags of the combination 26 are turned on, and the winning flags of the other combinations are turned off.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, winnings for small roles other than 1BB and replay are not carried over, so even if the winning combination for the small role or replay is won in this game, and the winning flag for these roles is turned on, the current game will end. Sometimes the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the 1BB win is carried over, if 1BB is won in the game this time and the winning flag relating to the 1BB won is once turned on, the ON state is maintained until the 1BB wins, Turned off when 1BB wins.

  Also, for example, when the winning lottery means 61 duplicates 1BBA and small role D, the winning flag of the small role 35 corresponding to 1BBA and small role D is turned on, and there is no case where both roles win in the game. Therefore, for example, when 1 BBA does not win, regardless of whether the small role 35 has won or not, the 1BBA winning flag is kept on and the winning flag of the small role 35 is turned off.

Furthermore, for example, when the 1BBA is won by the role lottery means 61, the 1BBA winning flag is turned on in this game, and when the 1BBA is not won in the current game, the 1BBA winning flag is kept on. .
Furthermore, in the next game, when winning the small role A1, in addition to 1BBA carrying over the winning, the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned on, and when 1BBA does not win at the end of this game, 1BBA The winning flag is kept on, and the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned off.

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects the push order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the combination lottery means 61. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a push order instruction number table.
Note that the push order instruction number selection means 63 may select the push order instruction number in any of the advantageous section and the normal section. The push order instruction number may be selected. In such a case, the push order instruction number is always “A0” during the normal section.
The selected push order instruction number can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only during the advantageous section (except that the push order instruction number “A0” is transmitted during the normal section). Therefore, even if the push order designation number is selected by the push order designation number selection means 63 in the normal section, the push order designation number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, each condition device has a unique push order instruction number. For example, the push order instruction number corresponding to Replay A is “A0”, and the push order instruction number corresponding to Replay C3 is “A3”. The push order instruction numbers include “A0” to “A3”.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the push order instruction number, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number, and the display contents 1 and 2. The push order instruction number “A0” does not have a push order that is advantageous to the player (the push order does not cause any advantage / disadvantage, that is, the push order does not matter).
In addition, the push order instruction numbers “A1” to “A3” each have a push order that is advantageous to the player. For example, an advantageous pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number “A2” is the middle first stop.

The push order corresponding to the push order instruction number in the replay group B is set to the push order for winning the replay 02 (push order for promoting RT).
Further, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the replay C group is set to the pressing order for winning the replay 01 (maintaining RT).
Similarly, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the small combination B group is set to the pressing order for winning the small combination 01 (9 sheets).
In addition, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the small combination C group is set to the pressing order for winning the small combination 02 (three).

  In FIG. 20, “display content 1” indicates content displayed by the operation of the instruction function (control of the main control board 50). In this embodiment, push order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 is displayed. Show. In the present embodiment, the push order instruction numbers “A” and “0” to “3” correspond to the display of “=” and “0” to “3” of the LED (7-segment), respectively. When “=” is displayed, segments D and G in FIG. 4 are turned on in 7 segments (see FIG. 26 described later). Further, when the push order instruction number is “A0”, there may be no display (no segment is lit).

Furthermore, “display content 2” indicates the content displayed by the control of the sub-control board 80, and in this embodiment, is the correct answer pressing order displayed on the image display device 23.
Note that “operation of the instruction function” means display using the acquisition number display LED 78 by the main control board 50, and the display by the control of the sub control board 80 corresponds to “operation of the instruction function” of the present invention. Is not included.
For example, when the winning and replay condition device “11” is won in the advantageous section, the push order instruction number “A1” is selected, and “= 1” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function. The Further, on the image display device 23, for example, “1 ○○” or the like is displayed on the image so that the player can understand that it is the first left stop.

In FIG. 19, the push order instruction numbers (* 1) when winning the small role A are as follows.
When winning the small role A, since the small role 01 wins regardless of the pressing order, there is no advantageous pressing order. However, during the advantageous section, one of “A1” to “A3” is selected as the dummy push order instruction number. The selection rates are “1/3” respectively. By setting in this way, when the small role A is won in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated and the pressing order instruction information is displayed. As a result, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the small role A or the small role B group in the game. The reason for this setting is as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability (number) of the small combination A is higher in setting 6 than in setting 1. Therefore, it becomes possible to estimate the set value by counting the number of times that the small role 01 has won in a game in which the instruction function does not operate during the advantageous section. In order to avoid such a strategy, when the small role A is won in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated to display the dummy push order instruction information. Of course, it is not impossible to estimate the set value by counting the number of times the small role 01 has won in the game in which the instruction function is activated, but the number of times in which the small role 01 has won in the game in which the instruction function is not activated. More trials are required than when estimating the set value by counting.

Furthermore, in FIG. 19, the pressing order instruction information (* 2) at the time of winning the small roles E1 and E2 is as follows.
As shown in FIG. 17, when the small role E1 is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. However, as described above, when 1BB is elected during the advantageous section and becomes inside, the advantageous section is not added. For this reason, in the advantageous section and inside (in the gaming section where the advantageous section is not added), the combination of symbols corresponding to the small combination E1 is selected (the combination of the symbols that is expected to add the advantageous section) If a certain middle cherry) stops, there is a risk of giving the player an impression of wasting. Therefore, when the small part E1 is won in the advantageous section and inside, the push order instruction number “A3” is selected, the instruction function is activated, and “right first stop” is displayed.

  When the small switch E1 is won and the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right, as shown in FIG. 16, the so-called middle cherry does not stop. This makes it difficult to notice the winning of the small role E1. In addition, since each of the small roles 36 or 38 that can be awarded when winning the small role E1, the payout number is two, even if the right first stop is instructed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

Further, as described above, the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, and in this embodiment, it is set within 1500 games. Therefore, even when the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is reached, when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated unconditionally.
In the case of having such a game, for example, when the small role E1 is won and the middle cherries are displayed when the game is close to 1500 games in the advantageous section, the player expects to add the advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after 1400 games or more from the start of the advantageous section, even if the small role E1 is won, the middle cherries are not displayed as in the case of winning in the inside. Activating the instruction function, display the right first stop.

When the small role E2 is won, as shown in FIG. However, when the small role E2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the left or middle first stop, the middle cherry may be displayed. Therefore, if there are more than 1400 games from the inside or the beginning of the advantageous section, if the middle cherry is displayed, the player may be misunderstood. , Right first stop is displayed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the small role E2 is won, the determination regarding the advantageous section is not made in the first place, so that the middle stage cherry may be displayed without the operation of the instruction function as described above.

In FIG. 1, the effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
As a result of the lottery of the condition devices, it is also conceivable to send the winning winning and replay condition device numbers themselves to the sub-control board 80. However, in this embodiment, the winning winning and replay condition device number itself is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning and replay condition device numbers won in the current game.

  On the other hand, on the main control board 50 side, an effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is determined in advance. Then, after lottery of the condition device, the effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number selected in the current game, the sub-control board 80 can select and output the effect corresponding to the effect group number.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an effect group number table.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, each condition device has a unique production group number. For example, the production group number corresponding to the winning of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group is defined as “5”. The production group numbers corresponding to the winnings of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group may be different, such as “5”, “6”, and “7”, respectively.

Therefore, the main control board 50 selects “5” as the effect group number when winning the small role A, the small role B group or the small role C group as a result of the lottery of the condition device. Then, the information of the selected effect group number “5” is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the information that the production group number is “5”, the sub-control board 80 knows that in this game, any of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group is won. it can. Thereby, the winning effect of the bell can be output.

  However, even if the sub-control board 80 receives the information indicating that the effect group number “5” has been won, or when the player has won one of the small roles B group in the game, You can't know the order. In this embodiment, the push order instruction numbers corresponding to the correct push order are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous section, but are not transmitted during the normal section or the standby section. Therefore, during the advantageous section, the sub-control board 80 can output the fact that the winning combination of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group is won and the correct pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number as an effect. it can. On the other hand, in the normal section and the standby section, the sub-control board 80 remains in the effect of winning either the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group (bell), and the correct answer pressing order. Cannot be output as a production.

  Even if the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, different effects can be output due to different effect group numbers. For example, the push order instruction number when winning the replay B1 is “A1” (first left), and the push order instruction number when winning the small role C1 is “A1” (first left) In either case, the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

  However, when the replay B1 is won, the production group number “2” is transmitted, and when the small role C1 is won, the production group number “5” is transmitted. For this reason, when the production group number “2” is transmitted, it is possible to notify the correct pressing order using, for example, blue indicating replay. When the production group number “5” is transmitted, for example, a bell It becomes possible to notify the correct pressing order using the yellow color indicating.

  In FIG. 1, the reel control means 65 starts rotation of all (three) reels 31 when a rotation start command for the reels 31 is received, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in this embodiment. To control. Further, the reel control means 65 refers to on / off of the winning flag in the current game after lottery of the condition device is performed by the winning lottery means 61, and the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined and the motor 32 is driven based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated. Control is performed so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 selects a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (the combination with the winning flag turned on) within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as to be able to stop on the active line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the winning combination (the combination whose winning flag is off) on the effective line. .

Here, “within the range of stop control of the reel 31” means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (symbols)). Means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to be within 190 ms. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to four frames.

  For example, in FIG. 5, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first “replay” of the left reel 31 is located at the lower left stage (on the active line), four frames ahead, that is, the fifth “bell” The symbols up to “B” can be stopped at the lower left. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols of No. 1 (bita stop) to No. 5 (4 tops) are symbols that can be stopped at the lower left.

However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to set the maximum number of moving frames to 4 frames from the symbol next to the symbol positioned on the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first “replay” of the left reel 31 is located in the lower left stage, from the next symbol, that is, the second “blank”, Up to “Replay” No. 6, which is the symbol ahead of the four frames, becomes a symbol that can be stopped at the lower left. Therefore, at the above-described operation timing, the symbols Nos. 2 to 6 are symbols that can be stopped at the lower left.
In the following description, it is assumed that the maximum number of moving frames is 4 frames from the symbols positioned on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

  First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, the stop switch 42 is operated. In addition, the design is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.

  That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 is stopped when the symbol related to the winning combination does not stop at a predetermined effective line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range, the symbol related to the winning combination is controlled to stop as much as possible on the predetermined effective line (retraction stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of 31 stop control, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is controlled so as not to stop on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won, the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42, and according to a predetermined priority order, The highest priority drawing pull-in control is performed.

Further, the reel control means 65 detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. The reel control means 65 detects which one of the left, middle and right stop switches 42 is operated when the stop switch 42 is operated by the player.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated is input to the reel control means 65. By discriminating this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

  Furthermore, the reel control means 65 includes a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol (“replay” in the case of the left reel 31) passes the lower left stage (on the effective line), what The stop position is determined in advance such that the number of symbols is stopped at the lower left stage by controlling the movement of only the symbols (in the number of frames).

Here, the symbol arrangement in the present embodiment will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 5, in all the reels 31, four “replays” are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the “replay” of all the reels 31 has the “PB = 1” arrangement.
Similarly, in the left reel 31, four of “Bell A” and “Bell B” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
In the middle reel 31, four “bells C” are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the “bell C” of the middle reel 31 has the “PB = 1” arrangement.
Furthermore, in the right reel 31, four “Bell A” and “Bell B” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.

Furthermore, in the right reel 31, four “cherries” are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the “cherry” of the right reel 31 has the “PB = 1” arrangement.
In addition, on the left reel 31, four of “Black 7” and “Watermelon” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
Similarly, on the middle reel 31, four of “blue 7” and “cherry” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
Similarly, on the right reel 31, any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “blank”, or “red 7” is arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the total of these four symbols is “PB = 1”.

On the other hand, in the left reel 31, “cherry” is arranged at the third, eighth, and thirteenth positions, and is not “PB = 1”.
Similarly, with respect to “watermelon”, the left and middle reels 31 have a “PB ≠ 1” arrangement, and the right reel 31 has a “PB = 1” arrangement.

Hereinafter, the stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16 described above.
First, the stop position determination table at the time of winning and replay condition device winning will be described.
The non-winning table is used in a game when a winning combination is not won, and defines a combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that a combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on the active line.

  The replay A table is used when replay A is won (replay 01 is a single winner), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the reels are set so that the replay 01 is stopped on the active line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. 31 stop positions are defined. The symbols of the reels 31 related to the replay 01 and replays 02 to 06 described later have a “PB = 1” arrangement in all the reels 31. Accordingly, the replay that is always won at the time of winning the replay (when a plurality of replays are duplicated, one of the replays that is won repeatedly) always wins.

  The replay B1 table is used in the game at the time of replay B1 winning, and within the range of the reel 31 stop control, the replay 02 is stopped at the active line at the time of the first left stop (in the correct push order), and the first left stop Other than the time (when the pressing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 01 is stopped on the active line (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game using the replay B1 table, at the time of the first left stop, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1” as described above). In this case, “Replay” stops at the upper left.
Next, at the time of middle second stop, “replay” is stopped at the middle middle stage. At the time of the third stop on the right, “cherry” is stopped at the upper right. In this case, “Replay” stops at the lower right. As a result, “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Replay” − “Cherry” is stopped on the active line, and Replay 02 is won. Furthermore, “replay”-“replay”-“replay” stops in “upper left”-“middle middle”-“lower right”.

On the other hand, in the game using the replay B1 table, “blue 7” or “cherry” is stopped at the middle and middle level during the middle first stop (“PB = 1”). In this case, “replay” stops in the middle and upper stages. Thereafter, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). At this time, as described above, “replay” stops at the upper left.
When the right reel 31 is stopped, “replay” is stopped at the upper right stage (“PB = 1”). As a result, “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Blue 7 / Cherry” − “Replay” is stopped on the active line, and Replay 01 is won. Furthermore, “replay”-“replay”-“replay” stops in “upper left”-“middle upper”-“upper right”.

In a game in which the replay B1 table is used, the same control as that at the middle first stop is performed at the first right stop.
Further, with respect to the replay B2 table at the time of replay B2 winning and the replay B3 table at the time of replay B3 winning, the replay 02 is won at the correct push order and the replay 01 is awarded at the incorrect push order.

  The replay C1 table is used in the game at the time of replay C1 winning, and within the range of the reel 31 stop control, the replay 01 is stopped at the active line at the time of the first left stop (in the correct push order), and the first left stop Other than the time (when the pressing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 03 is stopped on the active line (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control for stopping the replay 01 at the effective line at the time of the first left stop is the same as the replay B1 table, and thus the description is omitted.
In the game using the replay C1 table, “replay” is stopped at the middle and middle stage during the middle first stop (“PB = 1”). Thereafter, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, “replay” stops in the middle left. When the right reel 31 is stopped, the “watermelon” is stopped at the upper right stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, “Replay” stops in the middle right. As a result, “Bell A / Bell B” − “Replay” − “Watermelon” is stopped on the active line, and Replay 03 is won. Further, “replay”-“replay”-“replay” stops in “middle left”-“middle middle”-“middle right”.

In a game using the replay C1 table, the same control as at the middle first stop is performed at the right first stop.
Furthermore, with respect to the replay C2 table when the replay C2 is selected and the replay C3 table when the replay C3 is selected, the replay 01 is awarded when the push order is correct and the replay 03 is awarded when the push order is incorrect. .

The replay D table is used in a game when the replay D is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that the replay 06 is stopped at the active line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is determined. The replay 06 is “PB = 1”.
In addition, the replay E table is used in the game when the replay E is won, and the reel 31 is set so that the replay 04 or 05 is stopped on the active line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. 31 stop positions are defined. In this case, either “Replay 04” or “05” can be stopped by “PB = 1”.

  The small role A table is used in a game when winning the small role A, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the small role 01 is stopped on the reel 31 so that the small role 01 is stopped on the active line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. The stop position is determined. The combination of symbols of the small role 01 is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell C” − “replay”, and “PB = 1” in all the reels 31. When “Black 7 / Watermelon” stops at the lower left, “Bell A / Bell B” stops at the middle left. Furthermore, when “Replay” stops at the upper right, “Bell A / Bell B” stops at the right middle. Therefore, when winning the small role 01, “Bell A / Bell B”-“Bell C”-“Bell A / Bell B” are stopped at “Left middle stage”-“Middle middle stage”-“Right middle stage”.

  The small role B1 table is used in the game when winning the small role B1, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the small role 01 is stopped on the active line at the time of the first left stop (at the correct push order), Except at the time of the first stop (when the push order is incorrect), a single combination included in the winning combination (when the small combination B1 is won, any of the small combinations 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, 26) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop at the effective line or stop any of the pattern symbols 01 to 03.

At the time of the first left stop in the game using the small role B1 table (at the correct answer in the pressing order), it is the same as the small role A table, so the description is omitted.
Even when the following small role B2 table to small role B12 table is used, the same stop control as that of the small role A table is performed when the correct answer is pressed.
As a result, at the time of winning the small role A and the correct answer in the small role B group winning time, the small role 01 always wins, and “left middle”-“middle middle”-“right middle” “Bell A / Bell B” − “Bell C” − “Bell A / Bell B” stops. Therefore, even if the small role 01 wins in a game in which the instruction function is not activated, the player does not know whether the small role A is won or the correct answer is the push order when the small role B group is won.

In addition, even during the advantageous section, when the small role A is won, if the instruction function is operated with a dummy as described above, it is determined whether the player is the small role A or the small role B group. I don't know.
As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a setting difference in the winning number of the small combination A. Therefore, the set value can be estimated by counting the number of winnings of the small combination A. However, if the stoppage is the same between the winning combination of the small role A and the correct answer in the small role B group winning, it is not possible to count only the number of winnings of the small role A. Can not guess.

In the game using the small role B1 table, more specifically, the following stop control is executed.
First, at the time of winning the small combination B1, as shown in FIG. 14, the seven small combinations 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, and 26 are won, and the combinations of symbols are as follows.
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 photos)
Small role 03: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 10: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 piece)
Small part 11: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 18: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 19: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 26: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)

Then, as a stop control of the reel 31 when a plurality of small combinations having different payout numbers are selected, the following method is exemplified.
As the first priority, when all of the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination (of the reel 31) can be stopped on the active line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to “stop all of the symbols that make up the winning symbol combination on the active line” (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is set to “number priority” ”Or“ number priority ”, the reel 31 is controlled to stop.
Here, the “number priority” is to stop (pull in) the symbol of the reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination having the largest number of payouts among the combinations of symbols that are selected in duplicate, with priority on the line. Say. For this reason, at the time of winning the small combination B group, the small combination 01 corresponds to a combination of symbols (9 sheets) having the largest number of payouts.
On the other hand, “number priority” means that the symbols on the reel 31 are stopped on the effective line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line is maximized.

  For example, when the small combination B1 is won and the middle first stop is performed, it is not possible to simultaneously stop all the middle reels 31 related to the winning combination on the active line. This is because there are a plurality of types of symbols for the medium reel 31 of the selected small role, but there is only one effective line, so only one type of symbol can be stopped on the effective line.

Therefore, when the small combination B group is selected, the reel 31 is controlled to stop according to either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, the reels are controlled to stop with priority on the number of sheets when the correct answer is in the pressing order, and the reels 31 are controlled to stop with priority on the number when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order. When the reels are controlled to stop with priority on the number, the small combination 01 (nine-piece combination) is configured so that a single combination can be won without winning (so that it may be missed).
Thus, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is such that priority is given to the number of sheets in a specific pressing order (correct answer pressing order in the present embodiment), and priority is given to the number in other pressing orders (incorrect answer pressing order in the present embodiment). The number priority or the number priority is performed according to

In the above example, when priority is given to the number at the time of middle first stop (when pressing order is incorrect), stop either "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the active line and stop on the active line The maximum number of possible symbol combinations is two each. For example, if the “bell A” is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the small role 03 or 11 can be won. Since “Bell A” or “Bell B” of the middle reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the total of two symbols, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, either “Bell A” or “Bell B” is always stopped. Can be made.
Here, it is assumed that “bell A” is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this time, the small role 03 or 11 can win.

  Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping “Bell A” or “Bell C” on the active line. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left reel 31, “Bell A” is arranged at 15th and 0th, and “Bell C” is arranged at 18th. For this reason, when the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are No. 11 to No. 19 and No. 0, “Bell A” or “Bell C” can be stopped on the active line, When the number is 1 to 10, “Bell A” or “Bell C” cannot be stopped at the active line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming a specific symbol), “Bell A” or “Bell C” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. In particular, in this embodiment, since “Bell A” can be stopped without stopping “Bell C”, the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are No. 11 to No. 19 and No. 0. Is always stopped at the active line.
In this way, the reason for stopping “Bell A” without stopping “Bell C” is to make it possible to display a pattern symbol to be described later when the winning combination is missed at the time of the third stop. This is because the pattern symbol cannot be displayed if the “bell C” is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped.

  On the other hand, when “bell A” cannot be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that any pattern symbol is stopped on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern of the left reel 31 is “black 7” or “watermelon” among the pattern symbols of which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “Bell A”. Since “PB = 1” of “Black 7” or “Watermelon” on the left reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the total of the two symbols, any of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the second left stop, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" .
Further, before the third stop on the right, when “Bell A” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” can be stopped on the active line. Bell A "is stopped. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop “Bell A” on the active line, if the symbol of the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 4 to No. 13, stop “Bell A”. “Bell A” cannot be stopped within the other range. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, “bell A” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. When “Bell A” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” − “Bell A” − “Bell A” is obtained, and the small role 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of “Bell A”-“Bell A”-“Rotating”, when “Bell A” cannot be stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Cherry” is set to the active line. Stop ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes “Bell A” − “Bell A” − “Cherry”, and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
In the case of “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1”). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell A” − “bell A / bell B”, and the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped on the active line during the first stop during the small role B1 winning (when the push order is incorrect). In this case, at this time, the small combination 10 or 18 can be won.
Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping “bell B” or “red 7”, which is a symbol related to the small role 10 or 18, on the active line. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left reel 31, “Bell B” is arranged at Nos. 5 and 10, and “Red 7” is arranged at No. 7. For this reason, when the symbol of the left reel 31 is No. 1 to No. 10 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, “Bell B” or “Red 7” can be stopped on the active line. In some cases, "Bell B" or "Red 7" cannot be stopped at the active line.

  Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming a specific symbol), “Bell B” or “Red 7” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. In particular, in this embodiment, since “Bell B” can be stopped without stopping “Red 7”, when the symbol of the left reel 31 is No. 1 to No. 10 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. Always stops “Bell B” on the active line.

  On the other hand, if the “bell B” cannot be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that one of the pattern symbols is stopped on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern design in which the design of the middle reel 31 is “Bell B” is “Black 7” or “Watermelon”. Since “PB = 1” of “Black 7” or “Watermelon” on the left reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the total of the two symbols, any of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the second left stop, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating". .
Further, before the third stop on the right, when “Bell B”-“Bell B”-“Rotating”, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell B” can be stopped on the active line. Bell B "is stopped. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop “Bell B” on the effective line, the pattern of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 14 to No. 18, or No. 19 to No. 3. “Bell B” can be stopped, and “Bell B” cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, “Bell B” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. When “Bell B” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell B” − “Bell B” − “Bell B” is obtained and the small role 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of “Bell B” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Cherry” is set to the effective line. Stop ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes “Bell B” − “Bell B” − “Cherry”, and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
In the case of “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1”). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell B” − “bell A / bell B”, and the pattern symbol 01 stops.

As described above, at the time of the first stop in the middle of winning the small role B1, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbol related to one piece with “PB = 1”, and both the left and right reels 31 are “1”. The symbol relating to one winning combination can be stopped with a probability of “/ 2”. Furthermore, when the symbol related to one combination cannot be stopped, the pattern symbol can always be stopped. Therefore, at the time of small first B1 winning at the time of the middle stop (at the time of pushing order incorrect answer)
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (Minor Role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small part 10)
Either.

Next, the case of the right first stop at the time of winning the small role B1 will be described. When priority is given to the number when the right reel 31 is stopped, if either “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the active line is two each. And become the maximum. For example, if the “bell A” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the small combination 03 or 19 can be won. Since “Bell A” or “Bell B” of the right reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the total of two symbols, “Bell A” or “Bell B” can always be stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped. it can.
First, it is assumed that “bell A” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this time, the small role 03 or 19 can be won.

  Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping “bell A” or “bell C”, which is a symbol related to the small role 03 or 19, on the active line. Here, in the same manner as described above, priority is given to the stop of “Bell A”. “Bell A” can be stopped with a probability of “½”. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7” or “Watermelon” is stopped (“PB = 1” in the total of two symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the right and the second stop on the left, "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" .
Further, in the case of “Bell A”-“Rotating”-“Bell A” before the middle third stop, when “Bell A” can be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “ Bell A "is stopped. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop “Bell A” on the active line, if the symbol of the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 5 to 14, stop “Bell A”. “Bell A” cannot be stopped within the other range. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, “Bell A” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. When “Bell A” is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” − “Bell A” − “Bell A” is obtained, and the small role 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of “Bell A” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”, when “Bell A” cannot be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Blue 7” or “Cherry” "Is stopped at the active line (" PB = 1 "in the total of two symbols). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops on the effective line.
Further, in the case of “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1”). ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops on the effective line.

Further, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is first stopped. In this case, at this time, the small role 10 or 26 can be won.
Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping “bell B” or “red 7”, which is a symbol related to the small role 10 or 26, on the active line. Here, priority is given to the stop of “Bell B”. “Bell B” can be stopped with a probability of “½”. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7” or “Watermelon” is stopped (“PB = 1” in the total of two symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the right and the second stop on the left, it is “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”, or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”. .
Further, in the case of “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” before the middle third stop, when “Bell B” can be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “ Bell B "is stopped. Here, when the middle reel 31 is stopped randomly, “Bell B” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. When “Bell B” is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Bell B” − “Bell B” − “Bell B” is obtained and the small role 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of “bell B”-“rotating”-“bell B”, when “bell B” cannot be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “blue 7” or “cherry” "Is stopped at the active line (" PB = 1 "in the total of two symbols). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops on the effective line.
Further, in the case of “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1”). ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops on the effective line.

From the above, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B1, the right reel 31 can stop the symbol related to one piece with “PB = 1”, and both the left and right reels 31 are “1”. The symbol relating to one winning combination can be stopped with a probability of “/ 2”. Furthermore, when the symbol related to one combination cannot be stopped, the pattern symbol can always be stopped. Therefore, at the time of the first stop right at the time of winning the small role B1 (when the push order is incorrect)
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (Minor Role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small part 10)
Either.
The winning rate and the pattern symbol stop rate are the same as those in the middle first stop.
Therefore, when winning the small role B1, the small role 01 wins with “PB = 1” at the time of the first stop on the left (at the correct push order). On the other hand, in the middle or right first stop (when the push order is incorrect), one winning combination wins with a probability of “1/4” and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. .

In the case of winning the small role B2, the small role B2 table is provided as in the case of winning the small role B1. The winning roles included at the time of winning the small role B2 are:
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 photos)
Small role 04: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 09: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 12: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 17: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 20: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 25: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first stop at the left (at the time of pushing correct answer), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the active line with priority on the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped during the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C" during the left stop. Here, since “bell A” can be stopped when “bell C” can be stopped, “bell A” is stopped without stopping “bell C”. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell A” — “Bell A” — “Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” — “Bell A” — “Rotating”.

When "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when stopping right. As a result, the small role 04 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped during the middle first stop. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7”. Here, since “Bell B” can be stopped when “Red 7” can be stopped, “Bell B” is stopped without stopping “Red 7”. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, either “Bell B”-“Bell B”-“Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon”-“Bell B”-“Rotating”.

When "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" when stopping right. As a result, the small role 09 is won. Further, when “bell A” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B2 (at the time of pushing order incorrect answer), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “Bell A” is stopped at the first stop on the right, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7” at the left stop. Here, since “Bell B” can be stopped when “Red 7” can be stopped, “Bell B” is stopped without stopping “Red 7”. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”.

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 09 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first stop on the right. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C”. Here, since “bell A” can be stopped when “bell C” can be stopped, “bell A” is stopped without stopping “bell C”. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell A” — “Rotating” — “Bell B” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” — “Rotating” — “Bell B”.

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 04 is won. Further, when “Bell A” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, when winning the small role B2, when the push order is incorrect,
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (Minor 04)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (small role 09)
Either.

In the case of winning the small role B3, the small role B3 table is provided as in the case of winning the small role B1. The winning roles included when winning the small role B3
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 photos)
Small role 05: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 08: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small part 13: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 16: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 21: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 24: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first stop at the left (at the time of pushing correct answer), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “bell A” is stopped during the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either “bell B” or “red 7” during the left stop. Here, “Bell B” is stopped without stopping “Red 7” in the same manner as described above. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Bell A” − “Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”.

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when stopping right. As a result, the small role 08 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped during the middle first stop. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C”. Here, similarly to the above, “bell A” is stopped without stopping “bell C”. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, either “Bell A”-“Bell B”-“Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon”-“Bell B”-“Rotating”.

When "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when "Bell A" can be stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the small role 05 is won. Further, when “bell A” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B2 (at the time of pushing order incorrect answer), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “Bell A” is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C” at the left stop. Here, “Bell A” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell A” — “Rotating” — “Bell A” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” — “Rotating” — “Bell A”.

When “Bell A” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”, “Bell B” is stopped when it is possible to stop “Bell B” during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 05 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first stop on the right. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7”. Here, “Bell B” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”.

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when it can be stopped during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 08 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, when winning the small role B3,
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (Minor 05)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (small role 08)
Either.

In the case of winning the small role B4, the small role B4 table is provided as in the case of winning the small role B1. The winning roles included when winning the small role B4 are:
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 photos)
Small role 06: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 07: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 14: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 15: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 22: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small part 23: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first stop at the left (at the time of pushing correct answer), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “Bell A” is stopped during the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7” during the left stop. Stop “Bell B”. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Bell A” − “Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”.

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" at the right stop. As a result, the small role 07 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped during the middle first stop. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C”. Here, “Bell A” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, either “Bell A”-“Bell B”-“Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon”-“Bell B”-“Rotating”.

When "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when stopping right. As a result, the small role 06 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of first right stop at the time of winning the small role B4 (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “Bell A” is stopped at the first stop on the right, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7” at the left stop. Here, “Bell B” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”.

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" during an intermediate stop. As a result, the small role 07 is won. Further, when “Bell A” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first stop on the right. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C”. Here, “Bell A” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell A” — “Rotating” — “Bell B” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” — “Rotating” — “Bell B”.

When “Bell A” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”, “Bell B” is stopped when it is possible to stop “Bell B” during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 06 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, when winning the small role B4,
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 06)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small part 07)
Either.

In the following, a detailed description of each of the small roles B5 to B12 tables at the time of winning the small roles B5 to B12 will be omitted, and only the outline thereof will be described.
In the small role B5 table used at the time of winning the small role B5, the small role 01 wins at the time of the first stop during the correct push order, and the small role 03 or small with a probability of "1/4" when the push order is incorrect. The winning combination 10 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B1 winning.
Also, in the small role B6 table used when winning the small role B6, the small role 01 wins at the time of the first stop during the correct push order answer, and the small role 04 with the probability of “1/4” at the incorrect push order answer. Or, the small role 09 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B2 winning.

Furthermore, in the small role B7 table used when winning the small role B7, the small role 01 wins during the first stop during the correct push order, and the small role has a probability of 1/4 when the correct push order is incorrect. 05 or small role 08 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B3 winning.
Furthermore, in the small role B8 table used when winning the small role B8, the small role 01 wins at the time of the first stop during the correct pressing order, and the small role 06 with a probability of “¼” when the incorrect pressing order is correct. Alternatively, the small role 07 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B4 winning.

In the small role B9 table used when winning the small role B9, the small role 01 wins at the right first stop when the push order is correct, and the small role 03 or small with a probability of “¼” when the push order is incorrect. The winning combination 10 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B1 winning.
In the small role B10 table used when winning the small role B10, the small role 01 wins when the right first stop is in the correct push order, and the small role 04 has a probability of “¼” when the incorrect push order is correct. Or, the small role 09 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B2 winning.

Furthermore, in the small role B11 table used when winning the small role B11, the small role 01 wins at the right first stop when the push order is correct, and the small role has a probability of 1/4 when the push order is incorrect. 05 or small role 08 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B3 winning.
In addition, in the small role B12 table used when winning the small role B12, the small role 01 wins at the right first stop when the push order is correct, and the small role 06 has a probability of “¼” when the push order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small role 07 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B4 winning.

  As is clear from the above, one combination that can be awarded in the case of incorrect answer in the pressing order at the time of winning the small combination B group is the small combination 03 to the small combination 10. Therefore, other small roles included in each condition device are not won. This setting is related to a single combination that can be won when winning a small combination C group to be described later.

  The small role C1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small role C1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small role 02 is stopped on the active line at the time of the first left stop (in the correct push order), Except at the time of the first stop (at the time of incorrect push order), so as to stop the single role included in the winning combination (any of the small roles 03 to 10 at the time of the small role C1 winning) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.

  When winning a small role C1 (same for small roles C2 and C3, which will be described later), in the correct push order, as in the case of winning the small role B group, the small role 02 (three-time role) is to be won in the priority order. Control. As shown in FIG. 7, the symbol combination corresponding to the small role 02 is “Bell A / Bell B” − “Blue 7 / Cherry” − “Watermelon”, and “PB = 1” in all reels 31. . Therefore, the small combination 02 can always be won in the correct answer in the pressing order.

  Further, when the small combination C1 is won, when the answer is incorrect (the middle or right first stop), control is performed so that the single combination (small combination 03 to 10) is won with priority on the number. Here, the symbol combinations of the small roles 03 to 10 are combinations of symbols “Bell A” or “Bell B” for each reel 31 as shown in FIG. 8. Furthermore, among the combinations of symbols of the small roles 03 to 10, in any reel 31, there are four “Bell A” and four “Bell B”, and either “Bell A” or “Bell B” is selected. Even if it is stopped, the number priority condition is satisfied. In particular, when the small combination C2 and small combination C3 are won, the small combination 21 and the small combination 22 are included, respectively, but even if these small combinations are included in the winning combination, the type of the symbol with priority on the number does not change. In all the reels 31, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is “PB = 1” as a sum of two symbols. Therefore, any of the small roles 03 to 10 can always be won.

  As described above, when winning the small combination C1, the small combination 02 (three-piece combination) wins when the correct answer is in the pushing order (“PB = 1”), and when the incorrect answer is in the pushing order, one of the small roles 03 to 10 (1 The winning combination ("PB = 1") won't cause a spill (stop of pattern symbols) unlike the small role B group winning.

  The small role C2 table and the small role C3 table respectively used when winning the small role C2 and winning the small role C3 are the same as the small role C1 table. As shown in FIG. 16, the middle first stop is in the correct pushing order when the small combination C2 is won, and the right first stop is in the correct pushing order when the small combination C3 is won. Since the stop control for winning the small role 02 or the small roles 03 to 10 is the same as that for winning the small role C1, the description thereof will be omitted.

  Therefore, one single combination (small role 03 to 10) that can be stopped when the push order is incorrect when the small role B group is won and one single role that can be stopped when the push order is incorrect when the small role C group is won ( The small roles 03 to 10) are the same. Thereby, it is not possible to determine which of the small role B group or the small role C group is won in the game only by looking at the winning of the small roles 03 to 10.

  The small role D table is used in a game at the time of winning the small role D, and defines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the small role 35 is stopped on the active line within the range of stop control of the reel 31. In the small role D table, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is not related. As shown in FIG. 9, the combination of symbols of the small role 35 is the same as “watermelon”. “Watermelon” has a “PB ≠ 1” arrangement on the left and middle reels 31 and a “PB = 1” arrangement on the right reel 31. Therefore, in the game using the small role D table, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the “watermelon” stops on the active line, the “watermelon” stops on the active line. When the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which “watermelon” does not stop on the active line, “watermelon” does not stop on the active line, and the small part 35 is lost.

  The small role E1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small role E1, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small role 36 or 38 is stopped at the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is. Here, as shown in FIG. 16, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, so that it becomes a so-called middle cherry stop form (so that “cherry” stops at the left middle stage). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined. On the other hand, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the middle cherry does not stop when the stop switch 42 is operated in the first right stop.

  The winning of the small role E1 includes the small roles 36 and 38 (further, the small role E2 includes the small role 37 at the time of winning the small role E2, which will be described later). The given number / number priority is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by a predetermined arbitrary stop control. For this reason, control is performed so that the winning of the small combination 36 is given priority during the left or middle first stop, and control is performed so that the winning of the small combination 38 is given priority during the first right stop.

  In FIG. 5, “cherry” of the left reel 31 is No. 3, No. 8, and No. 13 (“PB ≠ 1”). Then, when “Cherry” is stopped in the middle left, “Blank” or “Red 7” is stopped in the active line in the lower left. Therefore, in this case, the symbol related to the small role 36 is stopped for the left reel 31.

For example, when “Red 7” of No. 7 is stopped at the lower left stage at the first left stop (“Cherry” is stopped at the left middle stage), “Blue 7” or “Cherry” is effective when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Stop at the line (“PB = 1”), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, any of “Black 7”, “Blue 7”, “Red 7”, or “Blank” (4 symbols combined, “PB = 1)) is stopped at the active line. As a result, the small role 36 is won.
In addition, when the second or twelfth “blank” is stopped at the lower left when the left reel 31 is stopped (“cherry” is stopped at the left middle), when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Blue 7” or “Cherry” is stopped on the active line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Black 7”, “Blue 7”, “Red 7” or “Blank” is stopped on the active line. . As a result, the small role 36 is won.

During the middle first stop, the stop control is performed in the same manner as described above. Therefore, the symbols related to the small role 36 are stopped when the middle and right reels 31 are “PB = 1”, and the left reel 31 has a case where “red 7” or “blank” stops and a case where they do not stop ( “PB ≠ 1”).
However, when “Red 7” or “Blank” cannot be stopped in the lower left stage at the first left or middle stop, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped. “Bell A” or “Bell B” can be stopped by “PB = 1”. The stop form in this case is “Bell A / Bell B” − “Blue 7 / Cherry” − “Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank”, and the small role 38 wins.

On the other hand, in a game in which the small role E1 table is used, the winning of the small role 38 is given priority when the first right stop. Therefore, in this case, “Bell A / Bell B”-“Blue 7 / Cherry”-“Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank” stops and the small role 38 wins with “PB = 1”. .
Furthermore, at the time of the first stop on the right, even if “Cherry” can be stopped at the left middle when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Berry A” or “Bell” is not stopped at the lower left. B ”(in this case,“ Cherry ”is not stopped in the middle left) is stopped.

The small role E2 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small role E1, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the small role 36 or 38 (or the small role 37) is stopped on the effective line. The stop position is determined.
Therefore, since the small combination E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small combination E1 table, the same stop position determination table can be used.

  Alternatively, in the case of the first left stop, only when “red 7” or “blank” can be stopped at the lower left stage (when the middle cherry is stopped), “replay” is set to the active line for the middle reel 31. It may be stopped (“PB = 1”), and for the right reel 31, any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7”, or “blank” may be stopped. Thereby, the small role 37 wins a prize. If the stop control is performed in this way, the stop control can be performed to determine whether the small role E1 is won or the small role E2 is won when the middle stage cherry is stopped.

The small role F table is used in a game when the small role F is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that any of the small roles 01 to 39 is stopped on the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is determined.
In the present embodiment, the small combination F is drawn by lottery only during 1BB operation.
Further, the small role F table performs stop control with priority on the number of sheets, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. Thereby, the small role 39 is always won. In the left reel 31, “PB = 1” is arranged by adding the two symbols “Cherry” or “Bell C”, so that the small role 39 wins with “PB = 1”.

  The small role G table is used in a game at the time of winning the small role G, and determines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the small role 40 is stopped on the active line within the range of stop control of the reel 31. . Since the small combination 40 is composed of a combination of symbols arranged with “PB = 1” for all the reels 31, the small combination 40 can always be won in the game.

The 1BBA table is used when a game is performed when the equipment condition device number “1” is won (1BBA alone is elected), or when 1BBA is won before the previous game and the current game is not won, and the reel 31 is stopped. The combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped is determined so that the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is stopped on the effective line and the combination of symbols corresponding to roles other than 1BBA is not stopped on the effective line. It is a thing.
Since the symbol of 1BBA is “red 7” in all the reels 31 (PB ≠ 1), “red 7” cannot be stopped at the effective line unless it is pushed.

Similarly, the 1BBB table is used when a game is performed when the equipment condition device number “2” is won (1BBB single winner), or when 1BBB is won before the previous game, and this game is not won, and the reel 31 Within the range of stop control, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBB is stopped on the effective line, and the combination of symbols corresponding to roles other than 1BBB is not stopped on the effective line. The combination is determined.
Since the symbol of 1BBB is “PB ≠ 1” for all reels 31 as in 1BBA, “red 7” and “black 7” cannot be stopped at the effective line unless they are pushed.

  In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, in the game in which 1BB and the small role or replay are won, or in the game in which 1BB was won before the previous game and the small role or replay was won in the current game, the following stop control is performed. Is mentioned.

For example, first of all, if it is not possible to stop both symbols on the active line with priority given to stopping the symbols of both 1BB and the small roles or replays that have been won, the winning small The stop control which gives priority to stopping the symbol of a combination or a replay to an effective line is mentioned. The stop control for stopping the symbols of both 1BB and the small role or replay on the active line is up to the second stop, and at the third stop, the control is performed so that 1BB, the small role or the replay is won. The role of will not win twice.
Secondly, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small role or replay symbols on the active line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the active line, the winning 1BB Stop control that gives priority to stopping the symbol on the active line (opposite to the above).

  Third, although priority is given to stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the active line, when stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the active line, When the winning 1BB symbol can be simultaneously stopped on the active line, stop control is performed in which the symbol is stopped at that position.

  When 1BB (“PB ≠ 1”) and a small role or replay of “PB = 1” are duplicated (when winning simultaneously), the winning 1BB symbol and the small role or replay It is not necessary to perform control for stopping both of the symbols on the effective line, and it is also possible to perform control so that only the small role or replay symbol of “PB = 1” is stopped on the effective line. Accordingly, since the small roles E1 and E2 are “PB = 1”, only the small role E1 or E2 is respectively selected when the 1BBA and the small role E1 of the present embodiment are overlapped, or when the 1BBB and the small role E2 are simultaneously selected. It is also possible to execute stop control for winning a prize.

Returning to FIG.
The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols on the reel 31 stopped on the active line matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination when the reel 31 is stopped (whether any combination has won a prize). Or not). The winning determination means 66 determines the symbol on the active line by detecting, for example, the angle when the motor 32 is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

  The payout means 67 determines that the winning combination determining means 66 determines that the combination of symbols stopped on the active line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations, and when the winning combination is won. Depending on the winning combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player, or credits are added. Further, at the time of replay winning, control is performed so that the number of medals inserted in the current game is automatically inserted without paying out medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied when each game and all the reels 31 are stopped. When it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, the RT control means 68 controls to perform the RT transition. Is.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram in the present embodiment. As described above, the RT of the present embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA operation (1BBA game), and 1BBB operation (1BBB game). And as shown in FIG.17 and FIG.18, the kind (number) of the condition apparatus chosen by lot and its winning probability differ for every RT.

  In the present embodiment, the RT transition timing is set at the time of stop display of the symbol combination or at the time of winning the RT transition combination, that is, at all stops (when all reels 31 are stopped). Therefore, for example, during RT1, when the pattern symbols are stopped when all the reels 31 are stopped, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 during the entire stop. The transition from non-RT, RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or may be performed based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game won of 1BB. Also good. In the present embodiment, the game shifts to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game won by 1BB.

The non-internal game corresponds to non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3. Further, the game in the inside corresponds to RT4.
In addition, during the advantageous section, the slot machine 10 is basically controlled so that it stays at RT3. However, when a player presses the stop switch 42 in the wrong order, it may stay at RT2. is there. In the case of an advantageous section that ends with only one instruction function operation game (excluding games won in the small role C group, replay B group, and replay C group), it is not necessary to stay at RT3. That is, in RT2, one instruction function operation game (excluding games won in the small role C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group) may be performed, and the advantageous section may be terminated. Of course, you may make it stay at RT3 fundamentally.

In the non-RT, non-internal game of RT1 to RT3, a lottery of an accessory condition device is performed. When 1BB is won in these RTs and 1BB does not win, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal game.
In addition, when 1BB wins in the game won for 1BB, the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB is started when the current game is fully stopped.

RT4 is continued until the winning 1BB wins. When the RT control means 68 determines that 1BBA or 1BBB has won in RT4, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game) or 1BBB operation (1BBB game), respectively.
When 1BBA is in operation, the operation is continued until the operation end condition of 1BBA is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the 1BBA operation end condition is set such that the number of payouts exceeds 150.

  The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out during each game and 1BBA operation. When it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the RT control means 68 terminates the 1BBA operation. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and control is performed so as to shift to non-RT from the next game.

The 1BBB operation is the same as described above. When the operation proceeds during the 1BBB operation, the operation is continued until the operation end condition of 1BBB is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the end condition for the 1BBB operation is set to pay out more than 200 medals.
The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 200 medals have been paid out in each game, and when determining that more than 200 medals have been paid out, the RT control means 68 determines that the operation end condition of 1 BBB is satisfied, Control to shift to RT1 from the next game.

  In addition, the replay is not included in the count of 150 sheets or 200 sheets during 1BB operation. As shown in FIG. 17, during the 1BB operation, there is a case where the replay D is won, but the automatic bet at the time of winning the replay does not count as the number of payouts. For this reason, the number of games during the operation of 1BB increases as the replay D is won. In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the winning probability of Replay D during 1BBA operation is set to 10 times that during 1BBB operation, so the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is 1BBB operation More than the expected number of games in the middle.

During the operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, as described above, the RB is continuously operated. The RB is ended when either of two winning combinations or two games are satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on condition that the end condition for the 1BB operation is not satisfied.
Also, as shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability of the small combination E2 during the 1BBA operation is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. When the small combination E2 is won and the small combination 36 or 38 wins, the number of payouts is two. As a result, the number of games until setting 6 reaches the end condition (exceeding 150) during 1 BBA operation is greater than setting 1. Therefore, during the 1BBA operation in the advantageous section, since the expected value for winning Replay D is higher in setting 6 than in setting 1, the probability that the advantageous section is added increases. Details of this point will be described in the control of the advantageous section described later.

  When the RWM 53 is initialized, the game is started from non-RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and RT may be maintained even when RWM 53 is initialized. Here, for example, when the RWM 53 is initialized when the 1BB winning is carried over, the 1BB winning is also maintained (carried over).

In non-RT, the RT control means 68 continues non-RT until a pattern symbol is displayed. In non-RT, when the small role B group is drawn and one of the small role B groups is won and the selected small role is missed, a pattern symbol is displayed. When a pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT2 from the next game.
In RT1, RT1 is maintained until a pattern symbol is displayed, as in non-RT. When a pattern symbol is displayed in RT1, the process proceeds to RT2.

RT2 is the RT having the highest stay rate in the normal section. In RT2, when the Replay B group is won and Replay 02 wins, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the next game shifts to RT3.
On the other hand, in RT3, the pattern symbol is displayed or the replay C group is won and the game is continued until the replay 03 wins. In RT3, when a pattern symbol is displayed or when Replay 03 wins, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT2.

  As described above, in the normal section (and not in the interior), most people go back and forth between RT2 and RT3, but the probability of staying at RT2 is the highest in terms of probability. As described above, when 1BB is won in RT2 or RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), the next game moves to RT4 (inside).

  In addition, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section during the normal section, when the game decided to move to the advantageous section is RT3, in order to maintain RT3, the instruction function at the time of winning the replay group C And the correct answer pressing order for winning the replay 01 is displayed. Thereby, the fall to RT2 is prevented. Further, when winning the small role B group, the correct function pressing order for winning the small role 01 is displayed by operating the instruction function. Similarly, when winning the small role C group, by operating the instruction function, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small role 02 is displayed.

On the other hand, when the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT2, the correct answer for winning Replay 02 by operating the instruction function while operating the instruction function as described above, when the replay group B is won. The push order is displayed, and control is performed to shift to RT3.
In addition, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section when it is non-RT or RT1, it shifts to an advantageous section even during non-RT or RT1, but until the pattern symbol is displayed, the instruction function In the game that can be operated (for example, at the time of winning the small role B group), the instruction function is not operated, and it waits until the pattern symbol is displayed. When a pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT or RT1, and the process shifts to RT2, the instruction function is activated as described above.

The advantageous section control means 69 is a means for executing a transition from a normal section to an advantageous section (including a standby section), determination of whether or not to end the advantageous section, addition in the advantageous section, operation control of the instruction function, and the like. is there.
First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the non-inner middle game.
Further, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to increase the number of games in the advantageous section in the advantageous section and the non-inner middle game.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section, when a specific condition device is won in the lottery by the lottery means 61, the advantageous section is simultaneously selected. Decide to migrate. Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is limited to being in the non-inside, and it is not determined to move from the normal section to the advantageous section in the interior.

In addition, as described above, when the transition to the advantageous section is determined according to the winning lottery result (the winning condition device), the condition device having a setting difference cannot be selected as a condition.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a case where the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section on the condition that the condition device common to the setting is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 17, for example, when 1BBA is elected alone, there are a case where it is determined to shift to an advantageous section and a case where it is not determined to shift. When the random number value included in the range of the numerical value “20” is extracted from the numerical value “30” assigned to the single winning of 1 BBA, it is decided to move to the advantageous interval, and the numerical value “10”. When a random value included in the range is extracted, it is determined not to shift to the advantageous interval. “1BBA + small role D”, “1BBA + small role E1”, and single winning of small role E1 are the same as above.

  In addition, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added in any case. In addition, when winning these condition devices, it is also possible not to add an advantageous section uniformly, but to make an extra lottery, or to draw whether or not to make an extra lottery However, in this embodiment, for the sake of simplification of description, the advantageous section is added uniformly.

When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, an advantageous section having a predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games in the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, the end condition of the advantageous section is not determined by the number of games, but end conditions other than the number of games (for example, the number of payouts, the number of differences, the number of wins for the small role B group, the number of times the instruction function is activated, etc.) Good. In the present embodiment, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won in the normal section, the process shifts to an advantageous section in which end conditions are set as follows.
Specifically, for example, it may be determined as follows.
When 1BBA is elected alone (place number "20"): The initial value is counted after the end of 1BB game and shifts to the advantageous section of 100 games. When 1BBA + small role D overlaps win (place number "5"): The initial value is 1BB Counting from the end of the game and shifting to the advantageous section of 250 games 1BBA + small role E1 overlapping winning (number "20"): The initial value is counted after the end of the 1BB game and transitions to the advantageous section of 200 games Small When winning combination D alone (place number “50”): Advantageous section with initial value of 150 games When winning small role E1 alone (placement “250”): Advantageous section with initial value of 100 games, or one small combination Any of the advantageous sections that end with the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the group B (which may be determined by lottery. Or, it is included in the range of the number “120” in the number “250”. When the random value to be extracted is extracted, the initial value is 10 (If the random number value included in the range of the number “130” is extracted as an advantageous section of 0 game, it may be an advantageous section that ends with the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the small role B group)

Since the winning probability of the small role D is lower than the winning probability of the small role E1, in order to give a premiere feeling when winning the small role D, the number of games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the small role D is small. It is set more than when winning the role E1. The number of games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the small role E1 may be set larger than that at the time of winning the small role D.
Also, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, for example, when winning 1BBA alone, the number of games in the advantageous section is increased by “30”, and the small role E1 is elected alone (number “250”). ) Is added to the number of games by “50”, and when the small role E1 is elected alone (number “750”), the number of games is added by “20”, and so on.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 17, in the regular section, when the small role E1 is elected alone, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section with a probability of “¼” (“250” in the total number “1000”). To do.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, the single winning probability of the small role E <b> 2 is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.

Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherries, but the probability of determining to shift to the advantageous section when the middle cherries appear is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6.
In other words, the player can be given an impression that there is a setting difference even though there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to move to the advantageous section.
In contrast to the present embodiment, setting 1 may be set higher than setting 6 for the single winning probability of the small role E2 in FIG.
In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the appearance probability of the middle cherry, but the lower the probability that it will be decided to shift to the advantageous section when the middle cherry appears.
In addition, during the advantageous section, when the small role E1 is elected alone, the advantageous section is always added. On the other hand, when the small role E2 is elected alone in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not added. Accordingly, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherry, but the probability that the advantageous section is added when the middle cherry appears is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6. Therefore, although there is no setting difference in the probability that the advantageous section is added, the player can be given an impression that there is a setting difference.

In addition, 1BBA is a special combination whose winning number is common to all settings (except when 1BBA and small role D are duplicated), and 1BBB is a special combination having a setting difference in the winning number.
In this case, when the common 1BBA is won during the advantageous section and the 1BBA is in operation, the advantageous section can be added during the operation of the 1BBA. On the other hand, when 1BBB having a setting difference in the advantageous section is won and 1BBB is in operation, it is stipulated that the advantageous section cannot be added during the operation of 1BBB. It is stipulated that when 1BBA and small part D having a setting difference in the advantageous section are overlapped and 1BBA is in operation, it is not possible to add the advantageous section during operation of 1BBA.

On the other hand, when setting 1 and setting 6 are compared during 1BBA operation, the winning probability of small role A is lower in setting 6 than setting 1, and the winning probability of small role E2 is set in setting 6 Higher than. For this reason, since the operation end condition of 1BBA is set to payout exceeding 150, the number of games (expected value) during the operation of 1BBA is larger in setting 6 than in setting 1.
Therefore, for example, if the replay D is selected so that the advantageous section is added, the expected value of the number of times that the replay D is won during the 1BBA operation is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. The advantageous section can be easily added.

Furthermore, during the 1BBA operation, when the number of games reaches a predetermined number, it may be set so that an advantageous section is added.
As described above, during 1BBA operation, setting 6 has a higher expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation than setting 1.
As described above, the operation end condition of 1 BBA is set to have paid out over 150 sheets. On the other hand, the expected payout number per game during 1 BBA operation is about “8.664” for setting 1 and about “8.557” for setting 6. Therefore, the expected value of the number of games that the payout number reaches 150 is about “17.3” in setting 1 and about “17.5” in setting 6.
Therefore, when the number of games reaches, for example, 18th game during 1BBA operation, if it is decided to add the advantageous section unconditionally, the higher the set value, the easier the addition of the advantageous section. be able to.
Furthermore, during the 1BBA operation, it may be set so that an advantageous section is added each time a certain number of games elapses. Even in this way, the higher the set value, the easier it is to add the advantageous section.

On the other hand, since 1BBB is a special combination having a setting difference, it is not possible to add an advantageous section during the operation of 1BBB.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 22, when the operation of 1BBA is completed, it shifts to non-RT, and when it shifts to non-RT, it stays in non-RT until the pattern symbol is displayed, and the pattern symbol is displayed. Goes to RT2. That is, it does not go through RT1 after the end of the operation of 1BBA.

  On the other hand, after the end of the operation of 1BBB, the process proceeds to RT1, and stays at RT1 until the pattern symbol is displayed. In RT1, the replay E is selected by lottery, and as shown in FIG. 17, if RT1 is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the replay E is won. Thereby, after the end of the 1BBB operation, the addition probability of the advantageous section becomes higher than after the end of the 1BBA operation. If the number of games added to the advantageous section at the time of winning the replay E is set to an appropriate value, it is possible to balance after the end of the 1BBA operation and after the end of the 1BBB operation.

  And, when the advantageous section is maintained and the process proceeds to RT1, until the pattern symbol is displayed, the instruction function is not activated in the game in which the instruction function can be activated (for example, at the time of winning the small role B group), the pattern symbol Wait until appears. When a pattern symbol is displayed at RT1 and the process proceeds to RT2, the instruction function is activated. When the transition is made to RT1 while maintaining the advantageous section, during the advantageous section, the small role 01 wins by operating the instruction function at the time of winning the small role B group, and the pattern (unless there is a push order mistake) The symbol is never displayed. For this reason, when it transfers to RT1 during an advantageous area, it can also continue to stay at RT1 until an advantageous area is complete | finished. Not until the advantageous period ends, but until the predetermined number of games, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small role B group, and after the predetermined number of games, the game that can operate the instruction function until the pattern symbol is displayed ( For example, when the small role B group is won), the instruction function may not be operated, and the pattern symbol may be displayed.

Further, when it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 performs control so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until a predetermined timing arrives. If it is a section or a standby section), the advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned off.
When the advantageous section control means 69 decides to shift to the advantageous section first, after the game decided to shift to the advantageous section ends (when all reels 31 stop and there is a payout, the medal The advantageous section display LED 77 is lit until the medal insertion (betting) of the next game (after payout) becomes possible, and until the operation of the settlement switch 46 (the settlement processing operation) becomes possible when there is a stored medal. To control.

Secondly, when the transition to the advantageous section is decided based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB that can carry the winning information after the next game, until the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB stops. Control to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77.
Therefore, if the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination, for example, the special combination is a special combination that carries the winning information to the next game such as 1BB, 2BB, and RB. In some cases, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination stops (only when a standby section is provided).

  On the other hand, if the special role is valid only for games won such as SB or CB and the special information does not carry the winning information to the next game, it will be selected for the condition device that contains only the small role and replay. As in the case where the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on this, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 until the next game medal insertion (betting) becomes possible and until the settlement switch 46 can be operated. is there.

FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating timing 1 and timing 2 as timings for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77.
In this embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77, firstly, “after the decision to move to the advantageous section, after the end of the current game (all Until the reel 31 is stopped and the medals of the next game after the medals have been paid out can be inserted (bet) and the settlement switch 46 can be operated (hereinafter, this timing is referred to as “predetermined timing”). The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated, the advantageous section starts. That is, in this embodiment, as a general rule, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts. Thereby, after deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game without knowing it.

  In FIG. 23, timing 1 shows an example of this case. In this example, when the small role E1 is elected (single) and it is determined to shift to the advantageous zone based on the winning of the small role E1, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. As in this example, it is always applied when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section based on winning of a condition device that does not include 1BB that can be carried over after the next game.

Secondly, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB that can carry the winning information after the next game, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed. By the time, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. When the start switch 41 for the next game of the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is displayed is operated, the advantageous section starts. In this embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts.
In FIG. 23, timing 2 shows an example of this case. In this example, when 1BBA and small role E1 are elected redundantly, and when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on this overlapping winning, the advantageous section display is displayed until the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed. The LED 77 is turned on. Therefore, until the moment when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BBA is displayed, the lighting timing may be before that, for example, timing 1 (for example, when no standby section is provided).

  Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device that includes the special combination that can be carried over after the next game, the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is displayed uniformly. When this is done, it may be determined that the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. Alternatively, even if it is a transition to an advantageous section based on the election of the conditional device including the special role, it is decided to move to the advantageous section uniformly based on the election of the conditional device not including the special role. Similarly to the time, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on by a predetermined timing.

Alternatively, when it is determined that the winning information is shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination that can be carried over after the next game, the lighting timing may be determined by lottery or the like.
In addition, when it is determined that the winning information is shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination that can be carried over after the next game, other than the timing 1 and the timing 2 shown in FIG. In the next game of the game won for the special role, when the start switch 41 is operated, at least a part of the reels 31 are rotating, or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the winning of the role is won) It may be.

  In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section starts (the standby section ends with the next game of the game won for the special role). In addition, when the start switch 41 is operated in a game after the next game of the game won for the special role and the special role can be won, at least a part of the reels 31 rotate. It may be during the middle or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won). In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section starts (the standby section ends with the game in which the special role can be won). ).

Here, for example, when the small combination E1 is elected, the 59th “red 7”-“cherry”-“red 7” (FIG. 9) in the small combination 36 can be stopped. Then, it is assumed that “Red 7” — “Rotating” — “Red 7” has stopped as a result of pinching in the game at the time of winning 1 BBA. Next, when the player aims at “cherry” when the middle reel 31 stops, but “cherry” does not stop on the active line (the kick control is controlled), the small role E1 is won in the game. You can see that it is not. In this case, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the player knows that 1BBA is a single winner, and in the next game of the game at the time of 1BBA win, the 1BBA symbol It becomes possible to push the combination of. That is, lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 functions as a 1BBA winning notification. This is because it is not decided to shift to an advantageous section at the time of losing (not winning). Conventionally, when 1BB is won, etc., there is a tendency to give a 1BB winning notification after performing a continuous production (an effect that tells whether or not 1BB has been won). If it is turned on, such a continuous production is wasted.
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB that can be carried over after the next game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit until the winning 1BB wins. It was made to have.

On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1BBA + small role E1”, if the winning of the small role E1 is given priority in the game, 1BBA is not won in the game.
On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the single winning of the small role E1, it is necessary to light the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (because a standby section cannot be provided). ).
Therefore, if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1BBA + small role E1”, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit until the winning 1BBA wins, the small role E1. When the winning section is won, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, so that the player knows that 1 BBA has not been repeatedly won.

  Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1BBA + small role E1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the predetermined timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), and the predetermined section is selected. A case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the timing has elapsed (timing 2 shown in FIG. 23) is provided. Which one is adopted depends on, for example, “1BBA + small role E1” winning numbers, or when “1BBA + small role E1” is won (only when it is decided to move to the advantageous zone) A lottery (two-stage lottery) of whether or not the display LED 77 is immediately turned on (whether or not a standby section is provided) may be performed. As a result, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the 1BBA is not repeatedly won, and the player's expectation can be continuously felt.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small role E1 is set to “PB = 1”. Therefore, regardless of whether “1BBA + small role E1” is won or only when the small role E1 is alone, In the game, the small role E1 (small role 36 or 38) wins.
However, it is also possible to set the small combination included in the condition device of the small combination E1 to “PB ≠ 1”. Then, when the small role included in the condition device of the small role E1 is set to “PB ≠ 1,” when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when “1BBA + small role E1” is won, It is possible to control that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing when winning, but the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even if the predetermined timing has passed when the small role E1 is not winning.

  However, not limited to the above, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination that can be carried over after the next game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is always displayed by the predetermined timing. May be lit (always the timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), or the advantageous section display LED 77 may not always be lit even after a predetermined timing has elapsed (always shown in FIG. 23). Timing 2).

Further, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section at the time of winning the small role D alone and at the time of winning the small role E1, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous interval display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (providing a waiting interval). Therefore, it becomes a so-called prompt notification and cannot expect the player's expectation.
Therefore, as described above, when the small combination E1 is elected alone, there are two advantageous intervals, that is, an advantageous interval that continues until the predetermined number of games is consumed, and an advantageous interval that is terminated by the operation of the instruction function at the time of one small combination B group winning. Set the type. Then, after turning on the advantageous section display LED 77, until the time of winning the first small role B group, production of expectation (whether or not it is an advantageous section that continues until the predetermined number of games is consumed) If the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the player's expectation can be given thereafter. This is because, even when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it is not known at the time when the advantageous section continues until the advantageous section has consumed the predetermined number of games.

Even when the small role E1 is elected alone, if it does not shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light in the first place, so that it is necessary to output a continuous effect (such as an effect indicating whether to move to the advantageous section) Absent.
In addition, when the above-mentioned condition device is won, the instruction function at the time of winning the small role B group is not set as the winning of the small role B group (one instruction function operation game) or the predetermined number of games. It is also possible to determine the number of actuations by a lottery, for example, within a range of 1 to 50 times.

  As a specific process for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77, the eighth bit of the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is changed from “0” to “1”. Since the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is stored in the RWM 53, the segment data is changed. For example, it is possible to store the data obtained by performing an OR operation on the previous segment data and “10000000” as new data in the RWM 53. As a result, the value corresponding to the segment DP in the segment data of the digit 2 is “1”.

In addition, as described above, the digits of the present embodiment include a total of nine digits 1 to 9, and a method for lighting these digits includes controlling as follows.
The main control board 50 executes “interrupt processing” every 2.235 ms in parallel with the main processing in addition to “(game progress) main processing” which is processing for repeating each game. In this interrupt processing, LED lighting control, reel 31 drive control, external signal transmission processing, and the like are performed. And in this embodiment, the dynamic lighting which lights one digit for every interrupt process is performed with respect to the digits 1-9. For example, only digit 1 is lit in the current interrupt process, and digit 2 is lit in the next interrupt process. By repeating this, one digit is turned on at a rate of one in nine interrupt processes. In addition, you may perform not only such dynamic lighting but static lighting which connected the signal line for every digit.

  Accordingly, the segment data is changed as described above when it is time to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77. After the change, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on when the lighting timing of the digit 2 comes by interruption processing.

  Further, the advantageous section control means 69 activates the instruction function in a game in which the instruction function is to be activated in the advantageous section by operating the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub-control board 80 to be described later. Push order instruction information is displayed on the display LED 78. For example, when the small combination B1 is won, push order instruction information “= 1” corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This control corresponds to “operation of the instruction function” in the present embodiment.

During the advantageous section, the instruction function operation game will be
1) Non-RT and RT1: When winning the small role C group (When winning the small role B group, the pattern function is displayed, so the instruction function is not activated.)
2) RT2: At the time of replay B group winning, at the time of small role B group winning, at the time of small role C group winning 3) RT3: At the time of replay C group winning, at the time of small role B group winning, and at the time of small role C group winning .

Further, as described above, when the small combination A is won, the instruction function is activated as a dummy. When winning the small role A, the small role 01 wins regardless of the push order, so no matter which push order is instructed, there will be no disadvantage to the player. It will not harm the fairness of
Specifically, when winning the small role A, it is possible to select any one of the push order instruction numbers “A1” to “A3” by lottery using a random number or the like.

  When the small role E1 is won when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached, the advantageous section control means 69 selects the push order instruction number “A3” and displays the push order of the right first stop. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the middle cherry from appearing when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached.

  In the present embodiment, in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the small role E1 is elected, and the advantageous section is not added when the small role E2 is elected. The first right stop is displayed so that the middle cherry is not displayed. In particular, since the advantageous section is always added at the time of winning the small role E1 in the advantageous section, it is possible to give the player an impression that the advantageous section is added by displaying the middle cherries. Accordingly, when it is not desired to display the middle cherries in a game where the advantageous section is not added (when the small role E2 is won), the right first stop is displayed.

  Further, for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached (when the advantageous section cannot be added), either the winning of the small role E1 or the winning of the small role E2 is performed in order to prevent the middle cherries from being displayed. In addition, the right first stop is displayed by the operation of the instruction function, and the middle cherry is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is set to “1500 games”. For this reason, for example, when the small role E1 (and E2) is won when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section becomes “1400 games” or more, the first right stop is displayed by operating the instruction function. .
As described above, the “operation of the instruction function” in the present invention refers to the display of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is advantageous to the player, but in this embodiment, the appearance of the middle cherry is avoided. The display of the pressing order is also included in “Activation of the indication function”. Of course, such a case may not be included in the “operation of the instruction function”, and the pressing order may be displayed only on the image display device 23.

In the present embodiment, an advantageous section counter 69a and an upper limit counter 69b are provided as counters for counting the number of games related to the advantageous section (see FIG. 1).
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section counter 69a sets an initial value of the number of games (for example, “100”) determined at that time. Then, the count value is decremented every time one game is consumed, and when it becomes “0”, the advantageous section is ended. Note that decrement may be performed from a game that has shifted to an advantageous section, or may be performed after the end of the 1BB game. Further, the advantageous section counter 69a does not have to set the initial value of the number of games (for example, “100”) determined at that time when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, after the end of the 1BB game. An initial value may be set.
Further, when an advantageous section is added in the advantageous section, a value corresponding to the added value is added to the current count value of the advantageous section counter 69a.

  For example, when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is “55”, it is determined that the advantageous section is added, and when the number of added games is “30”, the count value is changed from “55” to “ 85 ". Each time one game is digested, “84”, “83”... Are decremented one by one.

  Further, when 1BBA is in operation (except for those based on duplicate winning of 1BBA and small part D), the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued, but when 1BBB is in operation, the advantageous section counter 69a is continued. The counting by is interrupted. In this embodiment, the reason is set as described above. During the 1BBA operation (except for the one based on the overlapping winning combination of the 1BBA and the small role D), it is possible to execute the addition of the advantageous section, but during the 1BBB operation, the advantageous section Since the addition is not executed, the setting is made as described above in order to balance the two (so that the 1BBB operation in the advantageous section is not extremely disadvantageous to the player than the 1BBBA operation). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to continue counting by the advantageous section counter 69a even during the operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, or the advantageous section counter during any operation of 1BBA and 1BBB. The counting by 69a may be interrupted.

  On the other hand, after winning 1BBA or 1BBB during the advantageous section, until the 1BBA or 1BBB wins (inside), the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued. When 1BB is won or when it is notified that 1BB has been won, the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a may be interrupted at that time. Even when the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is interrupted when 1BB is won, the remaining number of games in the advantageous section displayed on the image display device 23 is informed until it is notified that 1BB has been won. You may make it decrement one game at a time.

In addition, there is a case where a condition device including 1BB in the normal section is won (such as overlapping winning of 1BBA and small role E1), and the transition to the advantageous section is made based on the winning of this condition device. In this case, a standby section is started from the next game (only when a standby section is provided), and the inside of 1BB is in progress.
On the other hand, when the condition device including 1BB in the advantageous section is elected, it is in the advantageous section and inside 1BB, and the advantageous section is not added in the inside of 1BB in the advantageous section.

Therefore, if the condition device that includes 1BB in the normal section is elected and the transition to the standby section has not yet made the transition to the advantageous section, a longer roll-off effect (notifies whether 1BB has been won or not) It is considered that it is not disadvantageous for the player even if the production is performed, for example, a continuous production over a plurality of games). This is because, during the waiting period, there is no advantageous period, so counting (decrement) by the advantageous period counter 69a and counting (decrement) by an upper limit counter 69b described later are not performed.
On the other hand, when the condition device including 1BB in the advantageous section is elected and becomes inside, even after becoming inside, the count (decrement) by the advantageous section counter 69a or an upper limit counter 69b to be described later Is counted (decremented). In this case, since it is not possible to add an advantageous section, it is preferable that the 1BB winning is notified early without performing an excessively long turn effect.
Specifically, for example, the average number of games of the former beat production is 4 games, and the average number of games of the latter beat production is 2 games.

  On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated at the time of the small role B group winning once in the small role E1, the advantageous section counter 69a counts in the advantageous section counter 69a. Do not set a value. In this case, regardless of the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a, the advantageous section is continued until the small role B group is won. When the small role B group is won and the instruction function is activated, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the current game, and the advantageous section is ended.

  In addition, when the operation number of the instruction function at the time of winning the small role B group is preliminarily given as an ending condition of the advantageous section, a counter (decrement counter) for counting the number of games at the time of winning the small role B group is provided. “1” may be set. Then, when the instruction function is activated once at the time of winning the small role B group, the count value becomes “0”, and it may be determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied.

Note that it is possible to determine whether or not the current game is an advantageous section by providing an advantageous section flag or the like and turning it “ON” during the advantageous section.
However, in the present embodiment, the eighth bit in the segment data of the digit 2 serves as an advantageous section flag. As described above, when it is determined that the advantageous section end condition is satisfied in this game, or when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is “0”, the eighth bit in the segment data of the digit 2 is “0”. ”Is executed.

  In addition, when it is decided that the small role E1 is elected alone and shifts to the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section where the number of games is fixed, or by the operation of the instruction function at the time of the single small role B group winning A lottery is performed as to whether to shift to an advantageous section that ends (so-called fake advantageous section). Here, how the probability is allocated between the former and the latter is arbitrary.

Then, for example, when the small role E1 is elected alone and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, and an effect that indicates which advantageous section has been output is output. (You may continue until you win the small role B group). Next, when winning the small role B group, after the instruction function is activated in the game, if it is an advantageous section that ends with the operation of the instruction function once, the advantageous section is terminated with the current game (advantageous). The section display LED 77 is turned off). On the other hand, when it has shifted to the advantageous section of the predetermined number of games, the advantageous section is continued after the next game (the advantageous section display LED 77 is kept on).
In the above example, it is assumed that the small group B is won before reaching the predetermined number of games from the start of the advantageous section.

  Further, the upper limit counter 69b always starts counting when the advantageous section is started (when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section or when the advantageous section is started, “1500” is set), and thereafter, the advantageous counter is started. Until the end of the section, the count is not interrupted in any case, and the count value is decremented by “1” for each game. For example, counting is continued even during 1BB operation. This is different from the advantageous section counter 69a. The advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b may be incremented from “0” by “1” for each game.

  Then, when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes “0”, the advantageous section control means 69 sets the advantageous section in the current game even if the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a exceeds “0” ( Compulsory) is terminated (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is updated to “0”), and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off (in the segment data of the digit 2, the eighth bit is updated to “0”). As described above, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b has the highest priority in the advantageous section. When the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes “0”, the advantageous section is ended even if the 1BB is operating.

In addition, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game in which the number of payouts is 9 (the maximum payout number with the specified number of 3). Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once when winning the small role B group, but when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes “0”, the small role B is once. Even if the instruction function operation game has not been executed at the time of winning the group, or even if the small role B group has never been won, the advantageous section is (forcedly) terminated in this game, and the advantageous section display LED 77 Turn off the light.
Further, referring to the values of the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b, the image display device 23 may display the number of remaining games or the number of digested games.

In FIG. 1, the external signal transmission means 70 transmits an external signal to the external concentration terminal board 100. This external signal is a signal indicating the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of 1BB operation, the end of 1BB operation, or the like.
The main control board 50 executes a game and game end check process, and updates the external signal control number at the game end check process.
In the present embodiment, the “external signal control number” is a number that takes different values depending on the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of the 1BB operation, and the end of the 1BB operation.

  Further, when the start switch 41 is operated, the external signal flag is updated so that the value corresponds to the external signal control number. After the external signal flag is updated, the external signal transmission unit 70 transmits an external signal corresponding to the external signal flag from the output port 52. When this external signal is input to the external concentration terminal board 100, it is transmitted to the hall computer 200. The external signal is output to, for example, a data counter.

The control command transmission means 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output from the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
The control command includes, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Each of the first control command and the second control command is, for example, 8-bit 1-byte data. One control command is a pair of the first control command and the second control command. Further, the first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating a parameter (variable).

For example, in the case of a control command indicating RT, the first control command is “33 (H)” (00110011 (B)) in the present embodiment. In addition, when the parameter of RT is, for example, RT1, in this embodiment, “00000001 (B)”. Therefore, the two-byte data obtained by combining these, “00110011/00000001” (“/” indicates between the first control command and the second control command, and is not actually present) is an RT control command. Is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.
As for the push order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the production group number, and the accessory condition device number, the first control command is type data, and the second control command is RWM 53, as in the above RT. Is stored in the data.

  Note that the control command transmission means 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub-control board 80. For example, when the push order bell is won, the correct push order may be known based on the winning and replay condition device numbers due to fraud. On the other hand, with respect to the accessory condition device number, there is no fear of the above fraud. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA is won, the accessory condition device number “1” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Further, when the condition device having the correct answer pressing order is selected in the advantageous section, the pressing order instruction numbers corresponding to the correct answer pressing order are acquired and stored in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when the condition device that is in the advantageous section and does not have the correct answer push order is selected, the push order instruction number is not acquired and stored in the RWM 53. Here, at the start of each game, the data of the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 is cleared, but the data after clearing is “A0”. Therefore, the data of the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 is “A0” except when the condition device having the correct push order in the advantageous section is selected.
Further, during a normal section or a standby section, even if a condition device having a correct pressing order is selected, the pressing order instruction number is not acquired and stored in the RWM 53.

Then, when the condition device having the correct answer pressing order in the advantageous section is selected, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits the pressing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80.
The control command transmission means 71 transmits the information “A0” as the pressing order instruction number except when the condition device having the correct pressing order in the advantageous section is selected.
Furthermore, when not in the advantageous section, the control command transmission means 71 does not transmit the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. In addition, when it is not in the advantageous section, the control command transmission means 71 may uniformly transmit the push order instruction number “A0”. However, in this embodiment, when it is not in the advantageous section, the push order instruction is given. The number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes effect output control means 91.
As described above, the effect output control means 91 is a control command transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, each control such as RT number, push order instruction number, effect group number, and accessory condition device number. Based on the command, at what timing (when the start switch 41 is operated, when each stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), what kind of effect is output (how the lamp 21 is turned on, blinked, or turned off) The specific effects such as what kind of sound is output from the speaker 22 and what kind of image is displayed on the image display device 23 are determined by lottery.

  Then, the effect output control means 91 controls the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. In addition, during the 1BB operation or during the advantageous section, the acquired number, the number of games (the number of remaining games or the number of digested games), and the like are displayed as images. Further, during the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when winning a small role B1 in a game in an advantageous section and receiving a control command corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1”, the correct left push order “Left first stop” or “1- ○ Informs the player that the player can easily know the correct pressing order, such as “-○”. Note that when the push order instruction number “A0” is received in the advantageous section, the push order is not notified.

  Furthermore, it can be said that the control command of the production group number does not include information on which condition device is actually won, but includes rough winning information. For example, when the control command corresponding to the production group number “5” is received, it is impossible for the sub-control board 80 to know which of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group is won. . However, it can be known whether the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group is won. Therefore, it is possible to output effects such as displaying the symbol of “bell” or lighting the frame lamp with “yellow” which is the corresponding color of “bell”.

Here, when winning the small role A, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order, the small role 01 always wins, so immediately after the start switch 41 is operated, that is, the first stop switch. It is possible to produce a bell (yellow) effect before the is operated.
On the other hand, when winning the small role group B or the small role group C during the normal section, a bell (yellow) effect may be performed when winning of the small role 01 is confirmed, that is, after the first stop switch 42 is operated. preferable. Of course, it may be after the second stop switch 42 is operated or after the third stop switch 42 is operated.

However, if the output timing of the production at the time of winning the small role A and the output timing of the production at the time of winning the small role B group or the small role C group are different, Since it is possible to discriminate whether the winning combination is the small role B group or the small role C group, it is possible to count the winning number of the small role A, and it is possible to estimate the set value.
Therefore, when winning the small role A in the normal section, the output of the bell effect is started immediately after the first stop switch 42 is operated, for example, at the same timing as the correct answer in the pressing order when the small role B group or the small role C group is won. In this case, it is possible to make it impossible to determine which of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group is won. In particular, in the present embodiment, when any of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group is won, a control command corresponding to the same effect group number “5” is transmitted. . In this way, the effect group numbers of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group are made the same (“5”), and the sub control board 80 that receives the effect group number, for example, the first stop switch If it is designed to output the production at the timing immediately after the operation of 42, the production group numbers of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group are made different ("5" to "7"). Design that is more efficient than the case of the case (in the latter case, when any production group number of “5” to “7” is received, the production is output at the timing immediately after the operation of the first stop switch 42, for example. The efficiency is poor).

24 and 25 show the timing of transmitting the control command of the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number, and the display of the push order instruction information by the acquisition number display LED 78 (the operation of the instruction function (on the main side). ))), And is a time chart showing notification of correct pressing order by the image display device 23 (notification on the sub-side). 24 and 25 show four examples 1 to 4.
24 and 25, first, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the lottery unit 61 draws the condition device, and the effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is determined. Further, when it is during the advantageous section, the push order instruction number corresponding to the selected condition device is determined.

  Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 the control commands of the push order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the production group number, and the accessory condition device number. When the sub control board 80 is in the advantageous section, the sub control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. On the other hand, when in the advantageous section, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number by the operation of the instruction function.

  In “Example 1” in FIG. 24, when the push order instruction number is determined, first, the push order instruction information is displayed by the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50. Thereafter, the push order instruction number is transmitted, and then the effect group number and the accessory condition device number are transmitted. Next, the sub-control board 80 determines that the start switch 41 has been operated in response to the reception of the accessory condition device number, and notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. Both the display of the pressing order instruction information and the notification of the correct pressing order are performed until the reel 31 reaches the constant speed rotation.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct answer push order is so-called three choices (first stop), the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated to notify the correct push order by the image display device 23. It is going to be. On the other hand, for example, when the correct answer pressing order is so-called six choices, the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23 is performed until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. Note that, as in this embodiment, even if the correct answer pressing order is so-called three choices, the correct answer pressing order may be continuously notified until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. is there.

  In the present embodiment, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the control command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 as described above, and thus the sub control board 80 receives this control command. Thus, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated. When the first stop switch 42 is operated, the notification of the correct pressing order by the image display device 23 is terminated. It goes without saying that effects other than the correct answer pressing order, for example, image display (character display etc.) peculiar to the advantageous section are continued.

Furthermore, the display of the pressing order instruction information by the acquisition number display LED 78 is until the winning determination is performed on the main control board 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the correct pressing order is three choices as in the present embodiment, the pressing order instruction information may be displayed until the first stop switch 42 is operated.
The display of the acquisition number display LED 78 after the display of the pressing order instruction information is “00” (the upper and lower digits are “0”), “* 0” (the upper digit is turned off (*), and the lower digit is “ 0 "is displayed)," ** "(the upper digit and the lower digit are turned off),"-"(both the upper digit and the lower digit are turned on only for the segment G), and the like.

  In “Example 2” of FIG. 24, after the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by the main control board 50, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function, and then the effect group The number and the equipment condition device number are transmitted. After receiving the production group number and the accessory condition device number, the sub control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order.

  In “Example 3” of FIG. 25, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number, the production group number, and the accessory condition device number, the sub control board 80 displays the correct push order on the image display device 23. After that, at the moment (or immediately before) the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed, the main control board 50 displays the pressing order instruction information by the operation of the instruction function. In Example 1 and Example 2 above, the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of the push order instruction information) is performed at a timing earlier than the notification of the correct push order by the sub control board 80. . On the other hand, in Example 3, the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub-control board 80 is performed at a timing earlier than the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of the pressing order instruction information).

  “Example 4” in FIG. 25 performs the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of push order instruction information) and the notification of the correct push order by the sub control board 80 at substantially the same timing. . In the case of controlling in this way, for example, the instruction function is activated after “N” ms have elapsed since the push order instruction number or the accessory condition device number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 (push order instruction). The sub-control board 80 controls to start notifying the correct pressing order after “N” ms have elapsed after receiving the pressing order instruction number or the accessory condition device number. Can be mentioned.

24 and 25 show four examples, it is preferable that the operation of the instruction function (display of the pressing order instruction information) is performed after the start switch 41 is operated until the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed. . In addition, it is preferable to perform push order notification by the sub-control board 80 side after the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 side. By setting in this way, when an incorrect push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, or the sub control board 80 notifies a push order different from the received push order instruction number. Even in this case, since the push order instruction information has already been displayed by the main control board 80, the player notices an error in notification by the sub control board 80, and the player is not disadvantaged. Absent.
Further, the operation of the instruction function (display of push order instruction information) by the main control board 50 side is performed until the winning determination time, but may be performed until the third reel 31 is stopped.

  Next, the case where the operation of the instruction function (display of push order instruction information) and notification of the correct push order are performed will be described in more detail. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game (flow from the top to the bottom in the figure), the display of the acquired number display LED 78, and a notification example of the image display device 23. Note that the example of FIG. 26 is the timing corresponding to “Example 1” of FIG.

In the instruction function operation game in the advantageous section, first, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 activates the instruction function and displays the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78. In the example of FIG. 26, an example in which the small combination B1 is won is shown. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the pressing order instruction number “A1”, that is, “= 1”.
Then, before the reel 31 reaches constant speed rotation, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order. In the example of FIG. 26, an example of displaying “1OO” is shown.

Next, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated and the left stop switch 42 is operated, that is, in the correct answer push order, the image display device 23 indicates that the push order is correct. Is output (correct answer production). On the other hand, if the push order is incorrect, the image display in the correct push order is deleted.
In the present embodiment, the correct / incorrect push order is determined by the operation of the first stop switch 42. Therefore, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the notification (image display) regarding the correct push order is terminated. In the case of 6 choices, it is possible to continue to notify the correct pressing order until the second stop switch 42 is operated or the third stop switch 42 is operated.

  In the example of FIG. 26, the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) is continued until the winning determination is made (the same applies to the example 1 of FIG. 24). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the instruction function (display of the acquired number display LED 78) may be terminated in the same manner as the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23, for example, when the incorrect answer pressing order is reached. . In addition, as in this embodiment, when the correct answer pressing order is three choices, an instruction is given when the first stop switch 42 is operated (even if the first stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order). The operation of the function may be terminated.

  However, it is desirable to end the operation of the instruction function after the notification by the image display device 23 is stopped. This is to prevent the push order notification from being performed on the sub control board 80 side even though the instruction function is not operated on the main control board 50 side. However, of course, the operation of the instruction function may be ended simultaneously with the end of the notification by the image display device 23, or the operation of the instruction function may be ended before the end of the notification by the image display device 23.

Of course, even if the push order is incorrect, the image display device 23 may continue to notify the correct push order.
However, if the push order notification by the image display device 23 is stopped when the push order is incorrect, it is possible to switch to another effect.

  When all the reels 31 are stopped, a winning determination is performed. Here, when the small role 01 wins and 9 medals are paid out, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 indicates that 9 medals have been paid out from the display “= 1” of the push order instruction information. It changes to “09” shown. It should be noted that “01” is displayed when one winning combination is won due to a pressing order error, etc., and “00” (or “**”) is displayed when missing a winning combination. It should be noted that “= 1” → “00” (“00” is displayed to reset the display once) from the display “= 1” of the push order instruction information to the display of the medal payout number “09”. ) → “09” may be displayed.

Alternatively, “= 1” → “**” (the upper digit and the lower digit are turned off to reset the display once) → “09” may be displayed.
Further, when the player operates the bet switch 40 or caresses the medal and bets the medal, the displayed content is changed to “00” in order to clear the content of the acquired number displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. (It may be “**”).

In FIG. 1, management information control means 72 is means for controlling (storage, computing, displaying, etc.) management information displayed on the management information display LED 74.
In the present embodiment, the information to be displayed on the management information display LED 74 is
(1) Advantageous sector ratio (cumulative)
(2) Consecutive character ratio (6000 games (15 sets total))
(3) Character ratio (6000 games (15 sets total))
(4) Ratio of consecutive assets (cumulative)
(5) Property ratio (cumulative)
(See FIG. 38 described later).

First, the “favorable section ratio (the ratio of staying in the advantageous section)” means the ratio of the advantageous section to the total gaming section (normal section + standby section + advantageous section). Ratio). For example, in the game section with “10000” games, when the number of games in the advantageous section is “7000”, the advantageous section ratio is “70 (%)”.
In this embodiment, one set is set to “400” number of games. Then, a total of 15 sets, that is, “6000” number of games is set as “total”, and each ratio at “6000” number of games is calculated.

  Furthermore, “cumulative” refers to the sum of the numerical values that have been counted so far, and in this embodiment, is counted for the purpose of at least “175000” number of games. When the total number is less than “175000” games, the total value is displayed by blinking display, for example. When the total number is “175000” or more, the total value is displayed by lighting display, for example. The cumulative total continues to be added until reaching a value (upper limit value) that can be stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 even after the number of “175000” games has been reached.

“Consecutive character ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the first type special character (RB) is activated to the total number of medals acquired. Therefore, in the present embodiment, “refers to the number of medals acquired during operation of 1 BB with respect to the total number of medals acquired.
For example, when the number of medals earned in the “6000” number of games is “2000”, and the number of medals earned during the operation of the “first type special character (RB)” is “500”, The item ratio (6000 games) is “25 (%)”.

Further, the “community ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of medals earned at the time of the actuating to the total number of medals acquired. Here, in addition to the above-mentioned first type special character, the “character” is a second type special character (CB), 2BB (second type special character continuous operation device, CB is continuously operated), SB (Single Bonus) is included.
And in this embodiment, since CB, 2BB, and SB are not provided, an accessory ratio becomes the same value as a continuous accessory ratio.

  27 to 31 (FIG. 31 shows a modification of FIG. 29) are diagrams showing a part of the storage area of the RWM 53 controlled by the management information control means 72. In the figure, a 4-digit numerical value starting with “F” indicates an address of the RWM 53. For each address, a 1-byte (8-bit) data buffer (storage area) is provided.

  First, FIG. 27 shows a buffer for storing data relating to an advantageous section. As information relating to the advantageous section, there are three storage areas of a value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, the total number of games, and an advantageous section ratio. The storage area for the value corresponding to the advantageous section game frequency is 4 bytes ("F004" to "F001"), the storage area for the total number of games is 3 bytes ("F007" to "F005"), and the advantageous section ratio The storage area is 1 byte (“F008”).

In this embodiment, the total number of games is updated so that the value of the total number of games is incremented by one every time one game is consumed.
On the other hand, in the advantageous section, every time one game is consumed, a value obtained by multiplying the value of the advantageous section game number by 100 (referred to as “advantageous section game number corresponding value”) is added. For this reason, a storage area of 3 bytes is provided for the total number of games, and a storage area of 4 bytes is provided for the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games.

The purpose of this embodiment is to store at least “175000” times or more as the total number of games. This is to display the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio when the total number of games is “175,000” or more.
Here, since “175000 (D)” is “18” digits in binary, it can be stored in 3 bytes of “24” digits.

When it is assumed that the total number of games “175000 (D)” is an advantageous zone, the value corresponding to the advantageous zone game frequency is “175000 × 100” (D). This value is “25 digits in binary number”. Therefore, 3 bytes of “24” digits are not enough, but 4 bytes of “32” digits can be stored.
For the reasons described above, the storage area for the total number of games is 3 bytes, and the storage area for the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is 4 bytes.

As for the total number of games, “1” is added for each game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a value other than “1” (value corresponding to the total number of games) is added. Also good.
On the other hand, since the advantageous section ratio is “100 (D)” at the maximum value, and the value is “7” digits in binary, it can be stored with a storage capacity of 1 byte.

The total number of games is updated every game, the number of games, and when the 3-byte storage area reaches the upper limit (3-byte full, that is, “FFFFFF (H)”, decimal number about 16.78 million), The count ends at that time, and the number of games is not updated from the next game.
The value corresponding to the number of times of advantageous section games is incremented by “+100” for each game in the advantageous section, but even if it is assumed that all games are advantageous sections, the value of the total number of games becomes 3 bytes full. It is possible to count up to. Then, when the counting of the total number of games is finished, the counting of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is also finished.

The advantageous section ratio is a value calculated by “advantageous section game count corresponding value / total number of games” (as will be described later, subtraction is actually performed and no division is performed). Since the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is a value obtained by multiplying the number of advantageous section games by 100, the ratio itself can be calculated by the above calculation. The main CPU 55 of the present embodiment uses an assembler, cannot handle a decimal point, and cannot perform division using a value exceeding 2 bytes. This makes it possible to calculate.
In this embodiment, an integer is stored as the advantageous section ratio, and the fractional part is rounded down. For example, when the total number of games is “1100 (D)” and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is “56000 (D)”, the ratio of advantageous sections is “50 (D)”, and “F008” includes “ “00110010 (B)” is stored.

  The advantageous section ratio can be updated every game, for example, when there is a request to display the advantageous section ratio, the advantageous section ratio is calculated from the value corresponding to the advantageous section game number and the total number of games, You may memorize | store in "F008". Then, a decimal value based on the value stored in “F008” is displayed as the advantageous section ratio.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data relating to the total payout number. When medals are paid out by winning a small role, the value stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is updated.
As shown in FIG. 28, there is provided a ring buffer provided with 15 storage areas (01 set to 15 sets) composed of 2-byte data (for example, “F012 (upper digit)” and “F011 (lower digit)”).
Each 2-byte data stores the number of payouts between 400 games. For example, when nine winning combinations win and nine payouts are made, “9 (D)” is added to the total payout number.
Here, in the regular slot machine, the maximum payout number in one game is determined to be “15” or less, and assuming that there are 15 payouts per game, “6000” in 400 games. It becomes. Since “6000 (D)” is 13 digits in binary, it can be stored in 2 bytes (16 digits).

Further, when there is a payout from the first game to the 400th game, the payout number is stored in the 01th set (“F012” and “F011”). From the 401th game to the 800th game, the payout number is stored in the 02th set (“F014” and “F013”).
In this way, 400 games are set as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) for a total payout number of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided ("F031" to "F02F" in FIG. 28). This storage area is for storing the total number of payouts for 15 sets, that is, 6000 games.
Assuming that 15 coins are paid out in all 6000 games, it is necessary to store up to a value of “90000 (D)”, but “90000 (D)” is 17 digits in binary, It can be stored in 3 bytes (24 digits).

For example, up to the first 15 sets, the total payout number at the number of games less than 6000 games is stored in “F031” to “F02F”.
When the 6000th game is reached, the number of payouts for 400 games is stored in all the buffers of the 01st to 15th sets (2 bytes each), so the total payout number of 15 sets (6000 games) is also Moreover, it becomes the total value for 6000 games.
Next, when moving to the 6001 game, the first set of 2-byte data (“F012” and “F011”) is cleared, and the total payout number from the 6001 game to the 6400 game is stored in this buffer. Go. From the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the total payout number (3-byte data) of the 15 sets is maintained without change.

Then, when the 6400 game is completed and the addition to the 01th set of 2-byte data is completed, the total payout number for the 15th set is calculated (additional 2-byte data from the 01st set to the 15th set is added), The total payout number of the calculated 15 sets is updated.
In the same way as above, after the 6401 game, the second set of 2-byte data (“F014” and “F013”) is cleared when the 6401 game is entered, and the 6401 game to the 6800th game are stored in this buffer. The total number of payouts is stored.
In the above method, the total payout number for 15 sets is updated every 400 games, but when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, the total payout number for 15 sets is calculated, You may update to that value.

The total number of payouts (cumulative) (“F034” to “F032”) is a 3-byte storage area for storing the total number of payouts. The total of the number of payouts is obtained in order to calculate each ratio when the number of games is 175000 games or more (such as a continuous character operation ratio described later). However, the cumulative payout number is continuously stored even after 175,000 games have elapsed, and the update ends when the storage capacity of 3 bytes reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full).
If it is assumed that every game of 155,000 times and 15 medals are paid out, the binary number is 22 digits, so that it can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a buffer that stores data related to the number of payouts related to the consecutive character in the RWM 53.
As shown in FIG. 29, there is provided a ring buffer provided with 15 storage areas composed of 3-byte data (for example, the 01st set is “F043 (most significant digit)” to “F041 (lowest digit)”). .

Each 3-byte data stores a value obtained by multiplying the number of medals to be paid out at the time of continuous character operation by 100 (referred to as “value corresponding to the number of payouts”). For example, when the 10 winning combinations are won and 10 payouts are made during continuous action, “+1000” is set as the payout number corresponding value.
The reason why the value multiplied by 100, not the value of the number of payouts itself, is stored for the same reason as the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games. This is because it is calculated as

Furthermore, each 3-byte data stores a value corresponding to the number of payouts when 400 consecutive games are activated. Specifically, from the first game to the 400th game, when there is a payout number at the time of continuous character operation, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 01th set (“F043” to “F041”). To do. For the next 401th game to 800th game, the payout number correspondence value is stored in the 02th set (“F046” to “F044”).
In this way, 400 games are set as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.
If it is assumed that 15 medals are paid out for each game in 400 games, the payout number corresponding value is “600000 (D)”, and this value is 20 digits in binary, so 3 bytes Can be memorized.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) of values corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out at the time of operation of a continuous accessory for a total of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided (“F070” to “F06E”). This storage area is a storage area for storing 15 sets, that is, a value corresponding to the number of payouts between 6000 games.
Assuming that 15 medals are paid out in each game in 6000 games, the payout number corresponding value is “9000000 (D)”, and this value is 24 digits in binary, so 3 bytes. It can be memorized.

For example, until the first fifteenth set, “F070” to “F06E” store the number corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous actor operation at the number of games less than 6000 games. When the 6000th game is reached, the payout number correspondence values between 400 games are stored in all the buffers of the 01st to 15th sets (each 3 bytes). In addition, the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous feature is activated for a total of 15 sets (6000 games) is a total value for 6000 games.
When the game shifts to the 6001 game, the first set of 3-byte data (“F043” to “F041”) is cleared, and the number of payouts in the continuous action from the 6001 game to the 6400 game is stored in this buffer. The corresponding value is memorized. In addition, from the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the value corresponding to the number of paid-out coins for the continuous character actuating for 15 sets in total is maintained without being changed.

  And when it becomes 6400 games and the 3-byte data of the 01th set is determined, the value corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out during the continuous operation of the 15 sets is calculated (each 3-byte data from the 01st set to the 15th set is calculated). (Addition), and the calculated value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous feature activation for the total of 15 sets is updated.

In the same way as above, after the 6401 game, the 3rd byte data (“F046” to “F044”) of the 02th set is cleared when moving to the 6401 game, and the 6401th game to the 6800th game are stored in this buffer. Until then, the 3rd byte data of the 02th set is updated.
In addition, in the above method, the value corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out when the consecutive feature works for the total of 15 sets is updated every 400 games. However, when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, A value corresponding to the number of payouts during the operation of the accessory may be calculated and updated.

The cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous actor operation (“F074” to “F071”) is a storage area for storing the cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous character actuating. This is for calculating the continuous character operating ratio when the game is 175000 games or more. However, the cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous character activation is stored even after 175,000 games have elapsed, and the update is terminated when the storage capacity of 4 bytes reaches the upper limit (4 bytes full).
If it is assumed that 15 medals continue to be paid out for each game, every game “1500 (D)” continues to be added. Therefore, in 4 bytes, about 2.86 million games can be stored.

  In addition, the continuous character actuating ratio (6000 games) (“F075”) is a value corresponding to the number of paying out coins during continuous actuating operation of “6000 games (“ F070 ”to“ F06E ”) / total payout number of 6000 games (FIG. 28). Among these, it is a buffer for storing values of “F031” to “F02F”).

In addition, the continuous character actuating ratio (cumulative) (“F076”) is calculated as “cumulative continuous character actuating payout number corresponding value (“ F074 ”to“ F071 ”) / total payout number (“ F034 ”in FIG. 28). ”To“ F032 ”).
Since the above ratio stores the decimal value up to the maximum value “100 (D)”, it can be stored in one byte.
In addition, although the continuous character operation ratio (6000 games) and the continuous character operation ratio (cumulative) can be updated every game, for example, when a display request for these ratios is made, the calculation is performed. The calculation result may be stored in each storage area (“F075” or “F076”) and the value may be displayed.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a buffer that stores data relating to the number of paid-out items in the RWM 53. As is apparent from a comparison between FIG. 30 and FIG. 29, a buffer for storing a value corresponding to the number of payouts for a feature is also provided in the same manner as a buffer for storing a value corresponding to the number of payout for a continuous character. The buffer for storing the value corresponding to the number of payouts for the bonus items has the same structure as the buffer for storing the value for the number of payouts for the continuous feature.

That is, for every 400 games, a storage area for 15 sets capable of storing 3 bytes of data as a value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of actuating, and a value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of actuating the total of 6000 games (15 sets). A 3-byte buffer for storing, and a 4-byte buffer for storing a value corresponding to the total number of payouts at the time of actuating an accessory. In addition, there are two types of buffers (1 byte) for storing an accessory operating ratio, one for 6000 games and one for accumulation.
Since the storage method in each of these buffers is the same as in the case of the continuous character operation, the description thereof is omitted.

Note that since the consecutive combination corresponds to 1BB (including RB) of the present embodiment, when a medal is paid out during the 1BB operation, the value is stored in the corresponding number of payouts at the time of continuous combination operation shown in FIG.
In addition, when the medals are paid out during the operation of all the winnings including the consecutive winnings, the bonuses are stored in the payout number corresponding value at the time of the winning action shown in FIG.
Here, in this embodiment, only 1BB (and RB) which is a continuous accessory is provided as the accessory, and in such a case, the value stored in the buffer shown in FIG. The value stored in the buffer shown in FIG.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modification of the ring buffer, and in this example, a modification of FIG. 29 is shown.
In FIG. 29, a ring buffer consisting of 3 bytes for each of the 01th set to the 15th set is provided, and the total value of 15 sets is stored.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 31, the point of calculating the total value of 15 sets is the same as in FIG. 29, but 16 sets are provided as ring buffers.

In FIG. 31, from the 1st game to the 6000th game, the payout number corresponding value is stored in 3 bytes of each of the 01 set to the 15th set as in FIG.
Here, when it is desired to calculate the value corresponding to the total payout number from the first game to the 6000th game, the calculation is performed by adding the respective 3-byte data from 01 set to 15 sets.

Next, the payout number corresponding values from the 6001th game to the 6400th game are stored in the 16th set of 3-byte buffers (“F070” to “F06E”).
When the 6401th game is reached, the first set of 3 byte data (“F043” to “F041”) is cleared, and the payout number corresponding value from the 6401th game to the 6800th game is changed to 01 set of 3 byte data. I will remember it.

When calculating the total payout number corresponding value of 6000 games (15 sets) between 6401 games and 6800 games, the calculation is performed by adding 3 byte data of 02 sets to 16 sets.
Further, when the total payout number corresponding value of 6000 games (15 sets) is calculated when 6800 games are reached, the calculation is performed by adding 3 bytes of data of 1 set to 15 sets.
In this way, the 3 byte buffer of any one of the 16 sets is set as the currently updated 3 byte buffer, and the other 15 sets of 3 byte buffers are calculated for the total number of payouts for 15 sets. Used when

The data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is not initialized only by turning on / off the power switch 11, and the data is maintained.
Even when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the setting is changed (when the RAM is cleared), the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is an exception to the initialization, and the data is maintained without being initialized. The Here, in order to shift to the setting change mode, the power switch 11 is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 12 is turned on (turned 90 degrees to the right) when the power switch 11 is turned off. Can be migrated. Further, the initialization of the predetermined storage area at the time of setting change described above is executed before the set value can be changed (setting change mode) based on the operation of the setting switch 13.

However, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the data is initialized when the error is recovered. On the other hand, when a recoverable error occurs, the data is not initialized but is maintained.
Here, the “unrecoverable error” refers to a serious error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and the operation for shifting to the setting change mode described above is performed. For example,
1) When the read set value is not within the range of settings 1 to 6 (abnormal setting value),
2) As a result of determining the stop symbol, if a symbol that should not be displayed (kick symbol) is displayed (design combination error)
3) Random number update abnormality determined for each interrupt process,
4) When the power-off recovery data is not normal.

  When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 12, and then the power switch 11 is turned on. As a result, the predetermined range of the RWM 53 (data in each buffer, setting value information, RT information, winning condition device information in FIGS. 27 to 30) is cleared. Then, a set value is set, and if there is no other error, a return process is performed.

On the other hand, the “recoverable error” refers to an error that can be recovered without turning the power switch 11 on and off. For example, a medal clogging error, medal retention error, medal illegal passing error, passage sensor 43a abnormality, insertion sensor 44 abnormality, payout sensor 37 abnormality, medal abnormality insertion error, and the like can be mentioned.
When a recoverable error occurs, the error process is displayed and the main process is stopped, but if the hall clerk performs an error canceling operation (removing the cause of the error) and operates the reset switch 14, the error has been cancelled. If it is determined whether or not the error has been canceled, the process is resumed.

Next, an update process of the advantageous section game count corresponding value and the total game count will be described. In the flow charts of FIGS. 32 to 37 below, the advantageous section game number corresponding value is abbreviated as “advantageous section corresponding value”.
FIG. 32 is an example in which the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games are updated using a register. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of the part surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 32, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 of the dotted line enclosed part, and FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 3 of a part. FIG. 36 shows an example in which the value corresponding to the advantageous section game count and the total game count are updated without using a register.

  FIG. 32 is executed at the end of each game, for example, the game. In the method using registers, the chip of this embodiment can use the A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (seven registers) at the time of calculation. In particular, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games (“F004” to “F001”) is 4 bytes, and the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) is 3 bytes. The number of registers matches the number of bytes.

32, in step S101, the upper 1 byte of the total number of games (data “F007” in FIG. 27) is set in the A register. In the next step S102, the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games (data of “F006” and “F005” in FIG. 27) are set in the DE register.
Further, in step S103, the upper 2 bytes (data of “F004” and “F003” in FIG. 27) of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are set in the BC register. In the next step S104, the lower 2 bytes (data of “F002” and “F001” in FIG. 27) of the value corresponding to the advantageous section game number are set in the HL register.

In step S105, "1" is added to the total game count lower 2 byte register, that is, the DE register value in this example. In the next step S106, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games by adding “1” in step S105. For example, when the lower 2 bytes of data are “FFFF (H)” before the start of this flowchart, an overflow occurs due to addition of “1” in step S105 (a flag register (F register built in the main CPU 55). ) Carry flag becomes “1”). When it is determined that an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S107, and when it is determined that no overflow has occurred (carry flag ≠ “1”), the process proceeds to step S109. Note that after adding “1” in step S105, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in step S106. Therefore, at the time of step S106, the DE register value when the overflow has occurred is “0”. "
In this embodiment, the “0” bit of the F register (flag register) is set as the carry flag. The carry flag is a flag that becomes “1” when a carry occurs or a carry (also referred to as overflow) occurs due to an operation using a register.

  In step S107, “1” is added to the upper 1-byte register of the total number of games, that is, the A register value in this example. In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. Here, the “upper limit” means the upper limit of the count. Since the total number of games in this embodiment is counted as 3 bytes, when 3 bytes are full, specifically when the value is “FFFFFF (H)”, no further addition is possible. It is determined that the upper limit has been reached. Note that after adding “1” to the A register value in step S107, it is determined that the upper limit has been reached when the A register value actually overflows (when the carry flag = “1”). is there. It can be paraphrased when the value of the A register becomes “0” (when the zero flag = “1”). When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. When it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S109.

  Therefore, when the total number of games in this embodiment is 3 bytes full, and when it is about 16.78 million decimal numbers, the total number of games is not added any more. However, even when 3 bytes are full, the game of FIG. 32 is executed every game, but every game, “Yes” is determined in step S108, and this flowchart is ended.

When the process proceeds from step S106 or step S108 to step S109, it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section. It is possible to determine whether or not the current game is an advantageous section by providing an advantageous section flag that is turned on when the advantageous section is in effect and determining whether the advantageous section flag is on or off. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section by determining whether or not the eighth bit of the segment data of the digit 2 is “1”. It is.
When it is determined in step S109 that it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S110, and when it is determined that it is not in the advantageous section, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is not updated, and the process proceeds to step S114.

  In step S110, “100 (D)” is added to the lower 2-byte register value of the advantageous interval game number corresponding value, that is, the HL register value in this example. In step S111, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred. In this embodiment, during the advantageous interval, “100 (D)” is added in increments. Therefore, overflow occurs in 2 bytes because “FFDC (H) (65500 (D))” is “100 (D ) ”Is added to“ 0040 (H) (65600 (D)) ”. When it is determined that an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S112. When it is determined that no overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S112, “1” is added to the upper 2-byte register of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the BC register in this example. In step S113, the updated BC register value and HL register value are written in “F004” to “F001” in FIG. Thereby, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games (RWM53) is updated. In the next step S114, the updated A register value and DE register value are written in “F007” to “F005” in FIG. Thereby, the total number of games (RWM53) is updated. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

  In the flowchart of FIG. 32, before the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full, the value corresponding to the advantageous section game number does not become 4 bytes full. As described above, the total number of games can be counted about 16.78 million times, but assuming that all the total number of games is an advantageous section, even if the value of about 16.78 million is multiplied by 100, This is because 4-byte full is not reached. Therefore, in step S112, even if “1” is added to the upper 2 byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, correct arithmetic processing is realized without determining whether or not overflow has occurred. And simplification of arithmetic processing can be realized.

  Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 32, each data of the RWM 53 is set (copied) in the register and the calculation is executed. When it is determined in step S108 that the total number of games has reached the upper limit, the total number of games is calculated. The processing according to this flowchart is terminated without returning the set register value to the RWM 53. Therefore, the total number of games stored in the RWM 53, that is, the 3-byte data stored in “F007” to “F005” of the RWM 53 remains “FFFFFF (H)”, and the RWM 53 is not changed before and after the start of this flowchart. There is no change in the data of the total number of games.

Next, a specific example of processing in steps S109 to S114 will be described in FIG.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of steps in the meantime. 33, steps S109 to S112 are the same as those in FIG. In FIG. 33, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.

After step S112, when the process proceeds to step S121, the value of the upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated. Specifically, the value of the BC register is written in “F004” and “F003” in FIG. In the next step S122, the value of the lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the advantageous section game number is updated. Specifically, the value of the HL register is written in “F002” and “F001” in FIG.
Next, when proceeding to step S123, the total number of games is updated in batches for 3 bytes. Specifically, the A register value and the DE register value are written in “F007”, “F006”, and “F005”, respectively, in FIG.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 of steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 34, steps S109 to S112 are the same as those in FIG. In FIG. 33, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.
After step S112, when the process proceeds to step S131, the advantageous zone game count corresponding value is updated in batches of 4 bytes. Specifically, the BC register value and the HL register value are written in “F004”, “F003”, “F002”, and “F001”, respectively, in FIG. Then, when the process proceeds to step S123, the total number of games is updated in batches of 3 bytes as in the first specific example.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a specific example 3 of steps S109 to S114 of FIG. In FIG. 35, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S141.
Each step of FIG. 35 is the same as that of FIG. 35 is different from FIG. 34 in that even if it is determined in step S109 that it is not in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S131 and the advantageous section game number corresponding value is updated. In other words, in this case, “100 (D)” is not added to the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, but based on the BC register value and the HL register value set in step S103 and step S104 in FIG. In FIG. 27, “F004”, “F003”, “F002”, and “F001” are written. In this case, the same value as in the previous game is written again.

The above-described examples of FIGS. 32 to 35 are examples in which the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are updated (used) via a register.
On the other hand, FIG. 36 shows an example in which the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous games are updated without using a register in principle.
In FIG. 36, in step S201, “1” is added to the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games. Specifically, “1” is added to the data “F006” and “F005” in FIG.

  In the next step S202, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the addition in step S201. That is, by adding “1” to the data “F006” and “F005”, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is “1”. The determination may be made based on whether or not the data of “F006” and “F005” has become “0000 (H)”. When it is determined that an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S203, and when it is determined that no overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S203, “1” is added to the upper 1 byte of the total number of games. Specifically, “1” is added to the data “F007” in FIG. In the next step S204, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. In this determination, it is determined whether or not “F007” overflows due to the addition of “1” in step S203 and the carry flag is set to “1”, and the carry flag is set to “1”. If it is, it is determined that the upper limit has been reached. It may be determined whether the data of “F007” has become “0 (H)”, and when it has become “0 (H)”, it may be determined that the upper limit has been reached. When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process proceeds to step S205, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S205, “1” is subtracted from the upper 1 byte of the total number of games. When the process proceeds to step S205, the upper 1 byte overflows in the addition in step S203 and becomes “0 (H)”. Therefore, by subtracting “1” from this value, in step S203 The data before adding “1”, that is, “FF (H)” is returned.
In step S206, “1” is also subtracted from the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games. As a result, the values of “F006” and “F005” become “FFFF (H)”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S202 or step S204 to step S207, it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section. This determination is similar to step S109 in FIG. And when it is judged that it is not in an advantageous section, since it is not necessary to update the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S208. In step S208, “100 (D)” is added to the lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, “F002” and “F001” in FIG. Here, since the assembler cannot directly add the value “100 (D)” to the RWM 53, the data “F002” and “F001” are first stored in the HL register. Then, the result of adding the value “100 (D)” to the HL register is stored in “F002” and “F001”, thereby updating the data of “F002” and “F001”.

  In the next step S209, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the calculation of step S208. Here, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is “1”. When the carry flag is “1”, it is determined that an overflow has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S209 that an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S210. If it is determined that no overflow has occurred, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. In step S210, “1” is added to the upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, “F004” and “F003” in FIG. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

Next, an advantageous section ratio calculation process will be described.
In the present embodiment, since the total number of games and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are stored, in order to calculate the ratio of advantageous sections, simply “value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games / total number of games” is simply calculated. Can be calculated. However, in the slot machine 10, a chip that satisfies the rules can only perform an operation with 2 bytes, and cannot perform a division of a numerical value with 2 bytes or more. Therefore, the ratio is calculated by the following subtraction.

Specifically, when the advantageous section game count corresponding value = x and the total game count = y, “x ÷ y” can be calculated by repeating the following subtraction.
xy = a (> 0)
a−y = b (> 0)
b−y = c (> 0)
cy = d (<0)
As described above, since the number of times “> 0 (greater than“ 0 ”)” is “3” as a result of repeating the subtraction of the total number of games y, the quotient of “x ÷ y” is “3”. It can be calculated that there is. In this embodiment, the fractional part is rounded down, and in the above example, the advantageous section ratio is calculated as “3”.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an advantageous interval ratio calculation process.
First, in step S301, the data of the RWM 53 is acquired in a register. Similarly to the above, seven registers A, B, C, D, E, H, and L are used.
In this step S301, each data of “F001” to “F007” shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the register. Specifically, it is as follows.
A register: Stores data of “F007” D register: Stores data of “F006” E register: Stores data of “F005” B register: Stores data of “F004” C register: Stores data of “F003” H register: Stores data of “F002” L register: Stores data of “F001”

Next, proceeding to step S302, the advantageous section ratio (RWM53) is initialized. In this process, the data stored in “F008” in FIG. 27 is cleared (set to “0”).
In step S303, the lower byte is subtracted. In this process, the data stored in the DE register (the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games) is subtracted from the data stored in the HL register (the lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the advantageous section game times), and the operation result is obtained. Store in the HL register.

In step S304, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred. As a result of the calculation in step S303 (a result of subtracting the DE register value from the HL register value), when the carry flag is not raised (when the carry flag ≠ “1”), it is determined as “No”.
When it is determined that the carry flag is set (there is a carry), the process proceeds to step S305, and when it is determined that there is no carry, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S305, it is determined whether the upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the BC register value is “0”. When it is “0”, since the subsequent subtraction cannot be performed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S306.
In step S306, “1” is subtracted from the upper byte of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the BC register value, and the calculation result is stored in the BC register.

In the next step S307, the upper byte is subtracted. Specifically, the A register value (the upper 1 byte of the total number of games) is subtracted from the BC register value (the upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the advantageous section game number), and the calculation result is stored in the BC register. In step S308, it is determined whether the calculation result in step S307 is less than “0”, that is, whether the carry flag is set by the calculation in step S307. If the carry flag is set, “Yes” is determined in step S308, and no further subtraction is possible, so the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if “No” is determined in step S308, the process proceeds to step S309.
In step S309, the HL register value is stored in the stack area (part of the storage area of the RWM 53).

In the next step S310, the data (favorable section ratio) stored in “F008” is stored in the HL register, and “1” is added to the data stored in the address (F008) indicated by the HL register. In step S311, the data stored in the stack area in step S309 is stored in the HL register. After step S311, the process returns to step S303, and the above processing (subtraction) is repeated.
Through the above processing, the total number of games is subtracted from the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio is incremented by “1” for each subtraction. Therefore, after the processing of FIG. 37, the advantageous section ratio calculated from the advantageous section game number correspondence value and the total number of games stored in “F001” to “F007” is stored in “F008”.
As is apparent from the above, every time the processing of steps S303 to S311 in FIG. 37 is executed, the advantageous section ratio is incremented by “1”. That is, the number of executions (the number of repetitions) of steps S303 to S311 is the advantageous section ratio.

  In the above, the quotient of the advantageous section game number corresponding value (value obtained by multiplying the advantageous section game number by 100) and the total number of games is calculated and used as the advantageous section ratio (%). (Repetition of subtraction) calculates the continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the character ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the character ratio (cumulative). be able to.

  Specifically, 6000 games (15 sets) corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous action (“F070” to “F06E” in FIG. 29) and the total payout numbers of 6000 games (15 sets) (in FIG. 28). , “F031” to “F02F”), by repeating the same subtraction as described above, the quotient of “corresponding number of coins to be paid out during continuous character operation for 6000 games / total number of coins to be paid out for 6000 games” is calculated. The value is stored as “F075” in FIG. 29 as the continuous accessory operating ratio (6000 games).

  In addition, from the cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous character operation (“F074” to “F071” in FIG. 29) and the total payout number of the total payout (“F034” to “F032” in FIG. 28), The quotient of “corresponding value of the total number of payouts at the time of continuous consecutive object operation / total number of payouts at the total” is calculated, and the value is stored as “F076” in FIG.

  Similarly, from the value corresponding to the number of paid-out 6000 games during operation (“F0B0” to “F0AE” in FIG. 30) and the total paid-out number of 6000 games (“F031” to “F02F” in FIG. 28). , The quotient of “corresponding value for the number of payouts at the time of operation of 6000 games divided by the total number of payouts of 6000 games” is calculated, and the value is stored as “F0B5” in FIG. .

  Further, from the cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of the actuating operation (“F0B4” to “F0B1” in FIG. 30) and the total payout number (“F034” to “F032” in FIG. 28), The quotient of “corresponding value for the number of payouts at the time of operating the object ÷ total number of payouts for the total” is calculated, and the value is stored as “F0B6” in FIG.

FIG. 38 shows the “advantageous section ratio”, “continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))”, “character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))”, “continuous characters” calculated as described above. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of "ratio (cumulative)" and "community ratio (cumulative)." These five pieces of information are displayed by information type and numerical value, and are displayed on the management information display LED 74.
Note that the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 are examples, and are not limited to these pieces of information. Information other than these pieces of information may be displayed, or some of the pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 may be displayed. Only information may be displayed. Further, the display order is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 38, and the display order is arbitrary.

The management information is displayed as described above for the following reason.
In the case of amusement machines, installation of halls is permitted if it conforms to the type test specified by the Feisei Law. Here, in the type test, the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate when the 6000 game is executed do not exceed a predetermined value (70% for the bonus rate and 60% for the continuous bonus rate). There are established rules.
In addition, at the time of the type test, a document stating the average value of the ratio of the applied game machines and the continuous character ratio will be attached (in the future, the average value of the advantageous section ratio will also be described. May be required).

In this case, the hall clerk or a third party can easily check whether or not the gaming machine installed in the hall is a gaming machine with the same specifications as the one that has been adapted (whether it is not fraudulent). It is hoped that.
For example, a gaming machine that has a value that deviates from a suitable gaming machine may be different from the matching gaming machine. In this case, request confirmation of the gaming machine from the manufacturer. Therefore, fraud etc. can be confirmed at an early stage.
Therefore, if a function for calculating and displaying management information is provided as in the present embodiment, it can be easily and reliably confirmed whether or not the information matches.

  In the present embodiment, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened (the door switch 15 is turned on), the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 12 is turned on. . This state is during so-called setting confirmation. For this reason, the set value display LED 73 displays the current set value. Since the setting confirmation is different from the setting change, the setting value is not changed even if the setting switch 13 is operated.

In this embodiment, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once during the setting confirmation, the “advantageous section ratio” is displayed in the digits 6 to 9 in FIG. First, the digits 6 and 7 display the information type. In the example of FIG. 38, the advantageous section ratio is displayed as “U7”. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the advantageous section ratio is “50 (%)”, and “50” is displayed in the digits 7 and 8. Therefore, “U750” is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9).
In addition, when displaying the numerical value of management information, it is a decimal number notation.

Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once again, “continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))” is displayed, and “y6” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is “45”. (%) ”.
Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once again, the display of “actual object ratio (6000 games (15 sets))” is displayed, and “y7” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is “60 (% ) ”Is displayed.

Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once again, “Continuous character ratio (cumulative)” is displayed, and “A6” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is “48 (%)”. it's shown.
Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once again, the display of “actual material ratio (cumulative)” is displayed, and “A7” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is “52 (%)”. it's shown.
Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display returns to the initial display and the advantageous section “U750” is displayed.
Further, the management information may be turned off when the setting switch 13 is not operated for a certain time (for example, 10 seconds). When the setting switch 13 is pressed after the light is turned off, the advantageous section ratio “U750”, which is the first display, is displayed.

While the door switch 15 detects the opening of the front door, the management information is continuously displayed (the digits 6 to 9 are continuously lit), and the door switch 15 detects that the front door is closed. In some cases, the digits 6 to 9 may be turned off.
In this case, when the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the advantageous section “U750” may be displayed before the setting key switch 12 or the setting switch 13 is turned on, or the door switch 15 When the opening of the front door is detected, the digits 6 to 9 are not turned on, and the advantageous section “U750” may be displayed when the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on.

Regardless of whether or not opening of the front door by the door switch 15 is detected, after the power switch 11 is turned on, a predetermined cycle (for example, about every 3 seconds (the number of interrupt processing is every 1500 interrupts). 38), the display contents shown in FIG. 38 may be sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74.
Here, the management information shown in FIG. 38 includes information whose ratio depends on a set value such as a continuous character ratio.
On the other hand, when the hall is open (when the player can play), the possibility of opening the front door is high.
a) An error that occurs when it is determined that the medal in the hopper 35 is empty,
b) An error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the medal selector.
c) An error that occurs when it is determined that a medal has accumulated in the payout port of the hopper 35.
d) An error that occurs when the hopper 35 is full of medals (the sub-storage that is provided next to the hopper 35 and stores medals overflowing from the hopper 35 is full). Error) and the like.

When such an error occurs, if the hall official opens the front door, the player may see the management information and guess the set value. In order to solve such a situation, when all of the errors a) to d) or at least one of the errors a) to d) occur, the management information display LED 74 is not lit. It is desirable to configure so that the light is extinguished. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned errors a) to d), and can be configured not to perform the lighting display by the management information display LED 74 when other errors occur.
In addition, when the above-mentioned non-recoverable error occurs, there is a doubt about the authenticity of the management information to be displayed, and after canceling the non-recoverable error, the data that is the basis of the management information to be displayed is cleared. Therefore, it is desirable not to display.

  In order to view the management information displayed on the main control board 50, the front door must be opened. If the front door is opened, a door open error will always occur. You can display the information.

Further, the above information types “U7”, “y6”, “y7”, “A6”, “A7” are examples, and arbitrary display is performed by a two-digit alphabet, symbol, numerical value, or a combination thereof. be able to.
Moreover, in the above example, the numerical examples differing between the continuous character ratio and the character ratio are shown. However, when only the continuous character is included as in this embodiment, the continuous character ratio and the character ratio are the same value. It becomes.

  When the above display is performed, for example, when the door switch 15 is turned on, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and the setting switch 13 is turned on, the mode shifts to the management information display mode, and “U7 (advantageous section) The segment data indicating “Ratio” is read and displayed in digits 6 and 7. Specifically, if “U7” is displayed, the segment data is “00111110 (B)” and “00100111 (B)”.

  Further, when displaying a numerical value, for example, if it is an advantageous section ratio, the data “F008” in FIG. 27 described above is read and converted into segment data. When the advantageous section ratio is “50 (D)”, the data stored in “F008” is “00110010”. When the value is converted into segment data, “01101101 (B)” and “00111111 (B)” are obtained.

  Further, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) is read to determine whether or not the total number of games has reached “175000 (D)”. When it is determined that the total number of games has not reached “175000”, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games has reached “175000”, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is lit up. In this way, the display pattern is made different depending on whether or not the total number of games has reached “175000 games”.

As a specific example of blinking display, for example, display is performed in a pattern in which the light is turned off and turned on at intervals of “0.5 seconds”, the turn-off time is “0.5 seconds”, and the turn-on time is repeated “1 second”. Display with a pattern. Compared to the case where the turn-off time and the turn-on time are set to the same time, if the turn-on time is longer than the turn-off time, the management information display time can be lengthened and the lighting of the hall etc. is dim. Visibility can be improved even under circumstances.
Since it is only necessary to change the display pattern so that it can be determined whether or not the game has reached “175000”, the display is not limited to blinking or lighting, for example, “U7” (“ For example, “U1” (less than “175000” game) may be displayed. Alternatively, “U7” may be blinked when the game is less than “175000”, and the numerical value may be lit.

Similarly to the above, when displaying the consecutive character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games), if the total number of games does not reach “6000” games, respectively, The numerical value of the percentage of an accessory is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached “6000” games, the numerical values of the continuous character ratio and the character ratio are respectively lit and displayed.
Therefore, when displaying the consecutive character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games), the value of the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) in FIG. It is read and it is determined whether or not the “6000” game has been reached, and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

Similarly, in the case of displaying the continuous character ratio (cumulative) and the character ratio (cumulative), if the total number of games does not reach “175000”, the consecutive character ratio (cumulative) and The numerical value of the ratio of totals (cumulative) is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached “175000”, the numerical values of the consecutive character ratio (cumulative) and the character ratio (cumulative) are respectively lit and displayed.
Therefore, when displaying the consecutive character ratio (cumulative) and the character ratio (cumulative), the value of the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) is read in FIG. It is determined whether or not the display pattern has been reached, and the display pattern is varied according to the result.

In particular, by displaying the advantageous section ratio, the consecutive character ratio, and the character ratio in such a manner that it can be discriminated whether or not it is 6000 games or more and whether or not it is 175,000 games or more (for example, different display modes). Has the following merits.
For example, when determining whether or not an illegal gaming machine is based on the currently displayed advantageous section ratio, continuous component ratio, and management ratio management information, how many games the management information has If it is referred to whether it is the value with respect to, it will become possible to judge more accurately whether it is an unauthorized gaming machine.

For example, it is assumed that the design value (average value) of the advantageous section ratio was 55 (%) at the time of game machine type application.
At this time, for example, when the advantageous section ratio in 1000 games is 80 (%) and when the advantageous section ratio is 80 (%) with 175,000 games or more, the judgment as to whether it is fraud is different. . There is a possibility that the value of the advantageous section ratio in 1000 games has not yet converged. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio in 175,000 games is a value for a sufficient number of games, and it is considered that the value has converged. For this reason, it can be judged that the latter has a high possibility of fraud.

Thus, even if they are the same value, the greater the number of games, the more the value converges to the design value. More accurate judgment can be made.
As described above, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games (6000 games or 175000 games), the display is blinking. Conversely, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be lit, and when the total number of games has reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be blinking.

  In the above example, the digits 6 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 and the management information display LED 74 is provided. However, for example, the management information may be displayed using the storage number display LED 76 or the acquired number display LED 78. Is possible. By setting in this way, it is not necessary to provide the digits 6 to 9 separately, so that the cost is reduced.

FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example in which management information is displayed using the storage number display LED 76.
In the example of FIG. 39, an example having nine medals as credits is shown. For this reason, initially, the display of the storage number display LED 76 is “09”.
Even when the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, the display of the storage number display LED 76 is not changed (because a door open error is displayed by an acquisition number display LED 78 described later).

  When the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the storage number display LED 76 displays “U7” indicating an advantageous section ratio. Then, when a certain time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, “50” which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed. If this state is left unattended, “U7” and “50” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed next time, the storage number display LED 76 displays “y6” indicating “continuous character ratio (6000 games)”. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value “45” of “continuous character ratio (6000 games)” is displayed. If this state is left as described above, “y6” and “45” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.
In the example of FIG. 39, an arrow is shown so as to shift from “50” display to “y6” display. However, even if the setting switch 13 is pressed while “U7” is displayed, “y6” is displayed. Of course, the same applies to the other figures.

  Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while “y6” or “45” is displayed, “y7” is displayed on the storage number display LED 76 to indicate that “the ratio of bonuses (6000 games)”. When the predetermined time elapses, the numerical value “60” of the “role ratio (6000 games)” is displayed. If this state is left as described above, “y7” and “60” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while “y7” or “60” is displayed, “A6” is displayed on the storage number display LED 76 to indicate “continuous character ratio (cumulative)”. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value “48” of “continuous character ratio (cumulative)” is displayed. If this state is left as described above, “A6” and “48” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.
Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while “A6” or “48” is displayed, “A7” is displayed on the storage number display LED 76 to indicate “a ratio of accumulated items (cumulative)”. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value “52” of the “composition ratio (cumulative)” is displayed. If this state is left as described above, “A7” and “52” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Further, when the setting switch 13 is further pressed in this state, the display returns to the first advantageous section ratios “U7” and “50”.
When the front door is closed and the door switch 13 is turned off during the display as described above, the storage number display is switched to “09”.

FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example in which management information is displayed using the acquisition number display LED 78.
In the example of FIG. 40, an example is shown in which “09” is displayed as the number of acquisitions.
When the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, a door open error is detected. As a result, “dE” indicating a door open error is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this state, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the acquired number display LED 78 displays “U7” indicating the advantageous section ratio. Then, when a certain time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, “50” which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed. If this state is left unattended, “U7” and “50” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

  Thereafter, as in the example of FIG. 39, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, predetermined management information (information type and numerical value) is displayed. Next, when the front door is closed and the door switch 15 is turned off, the error content “dE” is displayed again (the door open error cannot be solved by simply closing the front door). In order to eliminate this error display, an error canceling operation is performed. For example, an error is canceled by inserting a door key into a key hole provided in the front door and turning the door key counterclockwise, for example. When the error canceling operation is performed in this manner, the acquisition number display LED 78 again displays the acquisition number “09” before “dE” display.

  In the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the continuous character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games) are less than the total number of games “6000”, at least one of the information type and the numerical value blinks. indicate. Similarly, when the consecutive character ratio (cumulative) and the character ratio (cumulative) are less than the total number of games “175000”, at least one of the information type and the numerical value is displayed blinking.

Second Embodiment
Subsequently, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the second embodiment, the management information display LEDs 74 (digits 6 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50 (or the main control board 50B when divided into the main control boards 50A and 50B) are always displayed. The lighting state is set.
There are various ways of displaying the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 when the lamp is always lit. For example, the management information to be displayed is updated every five seconds. Specifically, “U750” (display for 5 seconds) → “y645” (display for 5 seconds) →... “A752” (display for 5 seconds) → “U750” (display for 5 seconds) →. Can be mentioned. A digit turn-off time of about 0.5 to 1 second may be provided between each information display.

FIG. 41 is an external perspective view showing the base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. In FIG. 41, illustration of the front door is omitted. The front door opens / closes the front surface of the base body 1 with a “front door opening / closing shaft” (left side in the drawing) in FIG. 41 as a support shaft. FIG. 41 is used in the description of the second embodiment, but the structure of the first embodiment is also the same as FIG.
As shown in FIG. 41, a power source unit including a power switch 11, a medal payout device including a hopper 35, a symbol display device including three reels 31, and the like are accommodated in the base body 1.
Further, the sub control board 80 is attached to the left side surface of the inner surface side of the base body 1. On the other hand, the substrate case 16 and the main control substrate 50 accommodated in the substrate case 16 are attached to the back surface inside the inner surface of the base body 1. Furthermore, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 are attached above the symbol display device so that the state of the caulking portion 16a of the board case 16 can be easily confirmed visually when the front door is opened. In order to do so, it is attached to a relatively easy-to-see position in the base body 1.
For this reason, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 can be confirmed relatively easily visually.

In the specification of the slot machine 10, in addition to a system in which medals are automatically supplied to the hopper 35a when medals in the hopper 35 run out, the hall clerk opens the front door each time the hopper 35 runs out of medals. A method of supplying medals to the hopper 35 is known.
However, since the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 when the front door is opened, the player can view the management information. . As a result, it is possible to know the advantageous section ratio, the continuous feature ratio, etc. of the table that the player is currently playing. For this reason, there is a possibility that the set value can be estimated based on these values.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50, but is not easily seen by the player.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the substrate case 16 and the main control substrate 50 (50A and 50B) in the second embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 3 of the first embodiment. In FIG. 42, example 1 in (a) shows an example in which the main control board 50 is composed of one piece, and example 2 in (b) is composed of two main control boards in the form of 50A and 50B. An example is shown (this is the same as FIG. 3 of the first embodiment).
42A, the management information display LED 74 is different from the first embodiment in that the management information display LED 74 is arranged on the left side as much as possible when viewed from the front of the main control board 50. In FIG. 41, the opening / closing axis of the front door is provided on the left side when viewed from the front in the figure. Therefore, if the management information display LED 74 is arranged as far left as possible when viewed from the front, the front door can be opened. , It becomes difficult to see from the player.

  In the example of FIG. 3B, the arrangement of the main control boards 50A and 50B is reversed from that of FIG. The management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50 </ b> B, but is located on the left side in the board case 16.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the interval (distance) between the management information display LED 74 and the caulking portion 16a is increased. 42, when the position of the management information display LED 74 is set to the left, when the caulking portion 16a of the substrate case 16 is moved away from the management information display LED 74, as shown in FIG. 42 (also in FIG. 3), the caulking portion 16a Is the right end of the substrate case 16.
In this way, even if the caulking portion 16a is destroyed and the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) is accessed, the management information display LED 74 is damaged or damaged when the caulking portion 16a is destroyed. Can be more effectively prevented.

  The caulking portion 16a is for breaking when the substrate case 16 is opened. In addition to the caulking portion 16a, a main body caulking portion (not shown) for fixing the gaming machine and the substrate case 16 is provided. You may have. At this time, it is necessary to destroy the caulking portion of the main body when removing the substrate case 16 from the gaming machine. Also in this case, as in the caulking portion 16a, the position where the main body caulking portion is provided is the first position in order to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being damaged or broken by mistake when the main body caulking portion is broken. When the position is the position (for example, the upper end portion of the substrate case 16), the position where the management information display LED 74 is provided is the second position away from the first position (for example, the lower portion, the right side with respect to the central portion of the main control substrate 50) It is desirable to provide it on the left or right side.

As described above, by disposing the management information display LED 74 in a position direction different from the position direction in which the caulking portion 16a and / or the main body caulking portion is provided, the management information display LED 74 can be effectively prevented from being damaged. it can.
In addition, although the position of the caulking portion 16a is the right end portion, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it can be designed as an upper end portion. At this time, the management information display LED 74 is a lower part, a right part, or a left part with respect to the central part of the main control board 50, so that the management information display LED 74 is accidentally damaged when the caulking part 16a is broken. Or being damaged.

As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, For example, the following various deformation | transformation are possible.
(1) Although the upper limit value of the number of games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 times, it is not limited to this. For example, the number of payouts is 3000, the difference is 2000, and the instruction function operation game (when winning the small role B group) It is also possible to set using a variable other than the total number of games such as 100 times of games. Alternatively, it is also possible to set a plurality of conditions, such as 1500 games or 3000, and determine that the upper limit has been reached when either one is satisfied.

(2) The advantageous section display LED 77 uses the segment DP of the storage number display LED 76, but is not limited to this, and a dedicated indicator (LED or the like) for displaying whether or not the advantageous section is present may be provided. However, if the existing LED can cover the cost as in the above embodiment, the cost can be reduced.
Here, the advantageous section is managed by the main control board 50 (main management), and the sub-control board 80 does not manage the advantageous section. For this reason, the lamp that displays the advantageous section needs to be electrically connected to the main control board 50. For example, the effect lamp 21 that is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 displays the advantageous section. It cannot be a lamp.
However, even a lamp that appears to be a kind of effect lamp can be used as a lamp that displays an advantageous section as long as it is controlled by the main control board 50.

  Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is constituted by the segment DP of the digit 2 in the storage number display LED 76, but may be constituted by the segment DP of the digit 4 in the acquisition number display LED 78, for example.

  Furthermore, when the player finishes the game, the menu button 25 may be operated to display the game history (two-dimensional code). Therefore, if an advantageous section display LED is arranged in the vicinity of the menu button 25, the player can be made aware that the advantageous section is in effect at the end of the game. For example, even if the storage number display LED 76 (digit 2 segment DP is set as the advantageous section display LED 77) or the acquired number display LED 78 (digit 4 segment DP is set as the advantageous section display LED 77) is arranged near the menu button 25. Good. Of course, as shown in FIG. 2, it is also effective to provide an advantageous section display LED 77 in the vicinity of the settlement switch 46. Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the menu button 25 is turned on by turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 before the menu button 25 becomes operable, so that the player does not notice the transition to the advantageous section. Can be prevented (displaying a game history (two-dimensional code)).

  (3) When the power switch 11 is turned off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, when the power switch 11 is turned on again, the advantageous section control means 69 turns the power on / off. In order to maintain the advantageous section before and after the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit again. Therefore, for example, when the store closes with the advantageous section display LED 77 lit in the hall, or when it is desired to turn off the advantageous section display LED 77 at the start of the next day, the setting is changed (including resetting of the same set value). Can be mentioned. By changing the setting, the predetermined area of the RWM 53 is initialized, and the display data (advantageous section data) of the storage number display LED 76 is also initialized. Therefore, in the segment data of the digit 2, the eighth bit is also “0”. "

  (4) During the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated in a game selected as a condition device capable of operating the instruction function. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not always necessary to activate the instruction function even in a game won by a conditional device capable of operating the instruction function during the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game, determine the number of games of the instruction function operation game by lottery, etc., execute the instruction function operation game for the determined number of games Also good. And even if the number of games is over, if the continuation conditions of the advantageous section are satisfied, it is possible to continue to stay in the advantageous section and again determine the number of games to execute the instruction function operation game by lottery etc. It is. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, based on the fact that the lottery that falls from the advantageous section to the normal section is won for each game or a specific condition device (for example, a single winning combination for the small role D or small role E1). To decide.

(5) In this embodiment, the value corresponding to the advantageous section game number is stored as a value obtained by multiplying the number of games by 100. Similarly, a value obtained by multiplying the number of payouts by 100 is stored as the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous action and the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of action. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games and the number of payouts can be stored without multiplying by 100 depending on the calculation method (the CPU to be used) of the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio. It is not necessarily limited to storing the value multiplied by 100.
Similarly, the value of the total number of games is stored as the number of games itself, but is not limited to this, and depending on the calculation convenience, a value obtained by adding a predetermined number to the total number of games or a value obtained by multiplying a predetermined value (total game number) (Times corresponding value) may be stored.
In this case, when the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio are calculated, the data of the storage area in which the number of games itself and the number of payouts itself are stored are multiplied by 100, and the above subtraction process is repeatedly executed. It is possible to calculate by executing the process (for example, FIG. 37).

  (6) The advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory operation ratio, and accessory operation ratio are calculated for each game or every predetermined number of games regardless of whether management information is displayed, and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, respectively. It may be left. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory operation ratio, and accessory operation ratio are calculated when the management information is displayed (when a display request is made), and the calculation result is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 and the calculation is performed. Results may be displayed.

(7) In the above embodiment, the management information is displayed in order each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. However, the switch is not limited to the setting switch 13 and may be another switch such as the bet switch 40 or a switch dedicated to display management information.
In the present embodiment, the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are provided separately, but it is conceivable that the setting switch and the reset switch are configured as a single switch as the setting change / reset switch. In this case, if the setting change / reset switch operation does not overlap with the reset (initialization) operation, the management information can be displayed by the setting change / reset switch operation. When the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are separately provided as in the present embodiment, the same applies to the case where the management information is displayed by operating the reset switch 14.

Specifically, when an error is detected, the mode is not shifted to the management information display mode, and the mode is shifted to the management information display mode on condition that no error has occurred.
For example, when a medal retention error has occurred in the medal selector among the recoverable errors, the management information display mode is not changed unless the error is removed.

  In the above embodiment, management information is displayed each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. That is, even after the setting switch 13 is turned on, even if the operator releases the operation switch 13, the management information remains displayed. On the other hand, the management information may be displayed only while the setting switch 13 is being pressed, and the management information display may be terminated when the operator releases the setting switch 13. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 3, when the setting switch 13 is first pressed, the first management information “U750” is displayed, but when the setting switch 13 is released, the display ends (digits 6 to 6). 9 is turned off). Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the second management information “y645” is displayed. However, when the setting switch 13 is released, the display can be controlled to end. The same control as described above is possible when a switch other than the setting switch 13 is used as a switch for displaying management information.

As described above, there are various variations on which switch is used to display the management information and how the operation of the switch that displays the management information is related to the display pattern (the displayed time). However, the present invention is not limited to those shown in this embodiment.
Furthermore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50, as a display pattern of the management information,
a) Display pattern for always displaying management information b) Pattern for displaying management information when the front door is opened (when the door switch 15 is turned on) c) The front door is opened and a predetermined switch D) A pattern for displaying management information when the front door is opened, a setting key is inserted, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and a predetermined switch is operated. It is done.
However, when an operation for shifting to the setting change mode is performed and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the management information is not displayed and the management information is not displayed. That is, in the setting change mode, the digit 5 is turned on, but the digits 6 to 9 are turned off.

(8) In the present embodiment, the total number of games is counted until the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full (“FFFFFF (H)”). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the cumulative total reaches a predetermined value, the count may be terminated even if the upper limit of the storage capacity has not been reached.
Further, when the total number of games reaches a predetermined value, the data value of the total number of games may be cleared and counting of the total number of games may be started again.
The same applies to the total payout number.

  (9) The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed so that the advantageous section ratio is “70” (%) or less. For this reason, it is not assumed that the ratio of advantageous sections exceeds “70” (%) in the market. However, the possibility that the advantageous section ratio exceeds “70” (%) cannot be denied when, for example, a goto action is performed. Therefore, for example, the data value of “F008” storing the advantageous section ratio is monitored, and when the value exceeds “70 (D)”, some warning is output or the advantageous section ratio is displayed. It can be different from the normal time (indicating that it is abnormal). For example, there is a method in which the upper digit “U” and the lower digit “7” are alternately flashed at high speed in the display of the information type “U7” of the advantageous section ratio.

Similarly, when the upper limit of the design value is set to, for example, “60 (%)” with respect to the continuous feature ratio or the accessory ratio, if the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the design value, Examples include outputting a warning and displaying the information type display in the same manner as described above.
Alternatively, the information on the advantageous section ratio or the like is transmitted to the hall computer 200 using the external signal transmitting means 70, and for example, when the advantageous section ratio exceeds “70” (%), information related to the warning may be transmitted. Can be mentioned.

(10) As described above, the advantageous section ratio can be set relatively freely as long as it is set to be “70” (%) or less with respect to all game sections.
In addition, winning from the normal section to the advantageous section may be set to less than “1/32”.
Furthermore, as described above, during the advantageous section, the instruction function may be activated whenever a condition device capable of operating the instruction function is selected. The instruction function may be activated when a lottery for whether to activate the function is won. Alternatively, whether to change to the advantageous section where the instruction function is always activated when shifting to the advantageous section, or whether the instruction function is activated only when the lottery of whether to operate the instruction function is won or not. It may be determined by lottery or the like.

  Furthermore, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section (end of the advantageous section) may be performed when the predetermined number of games is consumed at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or without determining the number of games. Each game or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a transition (falling) lottery from the advantageous section to the normal section may be performed, and when this lottery is won, the advantageous section may be shifted to the normal section. However, when the count value reaches the upper limit by the upper limit counter 69b, the advantageous section is unconditionally controlled so as to shift to the normal section.

  (11) In FIG. 3, the management information display LED 74 provided on the main control board 50 is composed of four digits, but may be composed of, for example, two digits. For example, as shown in the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the information type “U7” is displayed, the numerical value “50” is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and then the predetermined time is displayed. “U7” and “50” may be alternately and repeatedly displayed every time elapses.

(12) Since the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio are calculated by rounding off the decimal part, accurate values are not necessarily displayed. In that sense, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous feature ratio, and the accessory ratio correspond to the value corresponding to (equivalent to) the advantageous section ratio, the value corresponding to (equivalent to) the continuous feature ratio, and the feature ratio (corresponding respectively). ).
In addition, the advantageous section ratio, continuous feature ratio, and accessory ratio are not limited to the numbers rounded down to the nearest decimal place, but are rounded to the nearest decimal place, rounded up to the next decimal place, and the last digit is “5” or “ It may be a numerical value converted in increments of 10 ”.

(13) In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols that stop on the active line is the same when the small combination E1 is won and when the small combination E2 is won. For example, at the time of winning the small role E1 or E2, when the left or middle first stop, it becomes possible to stop the middle cherry (winning of the small role 36), and at the first right stop, the middle cherry will not appear (Winner of small role 38). Therefore, it is impossible to determine whether the small role E1 or E2 is won regardless of the appearance of the middle cherry.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the middle cherries are not allowed to appear, the stop appearance may be changed instead.
For example, when winning the small role E1 or E2, when the left or middle first stop, the middle cherry appears, and when the middle cherry appears, the player determines whether the small role E1 or E2 is won. I can't do it.

  On the other hand, when the small role E1 or E2 is won, when the right first stop is performed, the middle cherries are controlled not to appear in the same manner as described above, and instead of not causing the middle cherries to appear, the small roles E1 or E2 An example is a stop appearance that allows the player to determine which is won.

Specifically, for example, the following control can be given.
First, the small roles included in the winning of the small role E1 are the small roles 36 and 38 as in the above embodiment.
On the other hand, the small roles included in the winning of the small role E2 are small roles 36 and 41 (the small role 41 is newly added).
When the small combination E1 or E2 is won, the small combination 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped when the small combination E1 or E2 is first stopped, and the small combination 38 is stopped when the small combination E1 is won. On the other hand, the small combination 41 is stopped at the time of the first right stop when the small combination E2 is won.

  The combination of symbols of the small role 41 is, for example, “Bell A / Bell B” − “Replay” − “Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank”. As a result, the design of the middle reel 31 is different when the small combination 38 is stopped and when the small combination 41 is stopped. “Replay” does not stop at the middle reel 31 when the small role 38 stops, but “replay” always stops at the middle reel 31 when the small role 41 stops. As a result, the winning of the small combination 38 (small combination E1) or the small combination 41 (small combination E2) can be determined.

  Furthermore, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small role 38 is stopped when the middle cherries are not stopped when winning the small role E1, and the small role 41 is stopped when the middle cherries are not stopped when winning the small role E2. May be. In this way, it is possible to determine whether the small combination E1 or the small combination E2 is won when the middle cherry is not stopped even at the left or middle first stop.

In addition, for example, the following method can be mentioned.
The small roles included in the winning of the small role E1 are the small roles 36 and 38 as in the above embodiment. Further, the small roles included in the winning of the small role E2 are also defined as the small roles 36 and the small roles 37 and 38, as in the above embodiment. The small role 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped when the small role E1 or E2 is won at the left or middle first stop. The small combination 38 is stopped by the operation timing of the stop switch 42 at the time of the first right stop when the small combination E2 is won.
When the small combination E1 or E2 is won, the combination of different symbols is stopped. Thus, the winning combination E1 or E2 may be determined.

  (14) When 1BBA + small role E1 is elected and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit until the next timing of the next game arrives, no effect (continuous production etc.) indicating whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is output. It is preferable. This is because the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, so that it is known that the player has shifted to the advantageous section. However, it is possible to output a continuous effect whether or not 1BBA (special role) is won. In addition, when it is determined that 1BBA + small role E1 is won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not always lit even after a predetermined timing has elapsed (always illustrated in FIG. The timing 2) indicated by 23 is that the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit until the predetermined timing of the next game of the game in which the small role E1 wins, so that the small role E1 is elected alone, and the advantageous division is entered. Since it is understood that it has been decided to shift, in such a case, it is not necessary to output an effect or the like that tells whether or not 1BB has been won.

(15) In the present embodiment, it is assumed that a single combination can win a prize when the pressing order is incorrect when the small combination B group is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be any number of small combinations that can be awarded when the push order is incorrect when the small combination B group is won. Further, the missing rate at the time of winning the small role B group winning is incorrect 75% in the present embodiment, but is not limited to this, it can be variously set such as 50%.
Further, even when the push order is incorrect when winning the small role C group, it is possible to set the winning combination to be missed with a certain probability as in the case of winning the small role B group.

(16) In the above embodiment, during 1BBA operation, the number of games (expected value) of setting 6 is increased with respect to setting 1, for example, when the number of games during operation of 1BBA reaches a predetermined number of times. Added an extra section.
However, contrary to the above, during 1BBA operation, setting 6 has a higher chance of winning for small role A in setting 6 and lowering the winning probability for small role E2 than setting 1. You may make it become the frequency | count (expected value). In this case, for example, when the operation of 1 BBA is finished with a small number of games (setting 6 is easier to achieve than setting 1), an advantageous section is added.

  (17) In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the conditional device that does not include the special combination that can carry over the winning, for example, the small combination E1 is elected alone, to shift to the advantageous section, it is advantageous by the predetermined timing. The section display LED 77 is turned on. Here, the “predetermined timing” is not limited to the timing shown in the above embodiment, and various settings can be made. For example, in the game at the time of winning the small role E1, there are a case where the winning determination is finished, a case where the medal payout is finished in the game, a case where the medal payout is finished, and the like.

  In addition, although it does not occur in this embodiment, for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section in a game in which a replay is won, the automatic bet is ended based on the winning of the replay, or the next game (re-game) is started. For example, when the switch 41 is operated, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.

(18) When “1BBA + small role E1” is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the left or middle first stop, the small role 36 can be won, and the middle cherry can appear. However, when the winning flag is only the small role E1, only the middle cherries can appear. When the 1BBA winning flag is also set, the middle cherries do not appear in any pressing order (all win the small role 38). The stop control may be performed as described above.
When such control is performed, there is a demerit that even when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section when “1BBA + small role E1” is won, it is not possible to display the middle cherries and beat the player.

On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is elected alone after entering the inside of 1BBA, the standing winning flag is “1BBA + small winning combination E1”, so that the same stop control as described above can be adopted.
As described above, since it is not possible to decide to move to the advantageous section inside, even if the player knows that he is inside, he will win the small role E1 and the middle cherry will appear. , I have the impression that I was wasted. On the other hand, if the stop control as described above is performed, the middle cherries do not appear at all in the interior, so that it is not necessary to give the player the impression that the player has been wasted.

In particular, there are “Bell A / Bell B” − “Cherry” − “Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank” (FIG. 11) as a combination of symbols of the small role 38. The symbol 02 “Bell A / Bell B” − “Cherry” − “Bell A / Bell B” is similar. Therefore, by causing the combination of the above-mentioned symbols of the small role 38 to appear, it is possible to make it appear to be overlooked when the small role B group is won (not shown as a rare role).
The above is the same when “1BBA + small role E2” is elected, when 1BBB is in the interior, after the small role E1 is elected alone, or after being in the 1BBB, after the small role E2 is elected alone It is.

  (19) As shown in FIG. 17, non-RT and RT1 have the same replay winning probability (the number is “8978”). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of RT1 replay may be set higher than the winning probability of non-RT replay.

  (20) In the present embodiment, after the 1BBB operation is completed, the process shifts to RT1, the replay E lottery is performed at RT1, and the advantageous section is added by the winning of the replay E. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the transition is made to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to add the advantageous section and set it as a specialized zone (a state where the frequency of the addition is high and the number of games added is high). Then, the pattern symbol is displayed and the specialization zone is continued until the transition to RT2, and every time a predetermined condition is satisfied in this RT1 (not limited to winning Replay E), an additional advantageous section is executed. Also good.

  (21) In the present embodiment, the RT after the end of the 1BBA operation is set to non-RT, and the RT after the end of the 1BBB operation is set to RT1. However, instead of shifting to different RTs in this way, the same RT may be transferred. For example, you may make it transfer to non-RT after completion | finish of 1BBB operation | movement. In this case, after the end of the 1BBB operation in the advantageous section, it is possible to add the advantageous section and set it as a specialized zone.

(22) In the present embodiment, as the management information, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games and cumulative), and the bonus ratio (6000 games and cumulative) are displayed. Management information such as a payout rate can be calculated and displayed.
As a method for calculating the payout rate, for example, the following method can be cited.
a) “Total number of payouts × 100” ÷ “Total number of games excluding replay after replay winning”
b) “(total number of payouts + replay winning times × 3) × 100” ÷ “total number of games”
When a) is adopted, each buffer for storing “total payout number × 100” and “total number of games excluding replay after replay winning” is provided. When b) is adopted, a buffer for storing “(total payout number + replay winning times × 3) × 100” is provided. Note that a buffer of “total payout number × 100” and “number of replay winning times × 300” may be provided separately, and the values of both may be added.

Note that “3” of “replay winning times × 3” means the betting number of the game when the replay wins. For example, in the case where the number of bets varies depending on the gaming state or the like, it is not limited to “3”, but the value bet on the game when the replay is won (for example, “2” or “1”). There may be games to play.
In addition, a storage area for storing the total number of games itself, the total number of payouts itself, the number of replay winnings itself (“the number of replay winning times × the value bet on the game when the replay wins” may be provided), and a payout rate is provided. When calculating, the value may be multiplied by 100 and then calculated.

Further, as the calculation methods of a) and b), a method of repeating subtraction is adopted in the same manner as the calculation method described above.
If the payout rate is displayed as one piece of management information and compared with the payout rate in design, it is possible to determine whether or not the game machine is unauthorized. Furthermore, even in this case, if the lighting mode is changed depending on whether the total number of games is 6000 games or more or 175000 games or more, whether or not it is an unauthorized gaming machine more accurately. It becomes possible to judge whether.
The display of the information type indicating the payout rate may be any display as long as it can be distinguished from other management information. For example, the digit 6 is displayed as “P.” and the digits 7 to 9 are displayed. Is used to display the payout rate (a three-digit numerical value).

(23) In the present embodiment, it has been described that the upper limit counter 69b may be a decrement counter and may be an increment counter. Here, adopting an increment counter as the upper limit counter 69b has the following advantages.
When the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes the upper limit value, for example, when the count value is "1500" when the counter is an increment counter, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, and various parameters relating to the advantageous section (stored in the RWM 53) ) Is initialized. The parameters to be initialized include, for example, the advantageous section counter 69a, the upper limit counter 69b, the number of games in the instruction function operation game (when the instruction function is activated in the small role B group winning), and the like. Then, “0” is optimal as a value at the time of initialization. Furthermore, it is preferable that the addresses of the RWM 53 that stores parameters to be initialized are continuous. Specifically, for example, “F100”, “F101”, “F102”,.

Similar to the initialization process of the RWM 53 when the setting is changed, the process of adding “0” to the address of the RWM 53 within a predetermined range can be initialized by repeating the process while shifting the address one by one. This is because the process can be executed with a simplified process. Note that the parameters that are cleared when the advantageous interval is the upper limit value are also initialized when the setting is changed.
Note that the address of the RWM 53 that stores the parameters to be initialized is assigned with regularity (for example, “F100”, “F102”, “F104”,...), And “0” is assigned to the address. Even when the initialization process is performed by repeatedly performing the process of entering by shifting the address by a predetermined value (“2” in the above case), the process can be performed with a simplified process.

Here, when the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter, if the count value is “0”, it is “0” because of the initialization, or the advantageous section is the upper limit value (1500 games). ) And “0” is not known from the count value. Therefore, when determining whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous interval is based on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b and data indicating whether or not the advantageous interval is present (in a predetermined area of the RWM 53). It is necessary to do this based on
On the other hand, when the upper limit counter 69b is an increment counter, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is read, and if it is “1500”, it can be determined that it is the upper limit of the advantageous section. That is, it is possible to determine whether or not the upper limit is based only on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b.

(24) The update of the RWM 53 data shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 and the processes of FIGS. 32, 36 and 37 are executed at the end of each game, more specifically after the winning determination process. .
On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the management information such as the advantageous section ratio is continuously displayed. For example, the same management information (for example, the advantageous section ratio) may be displayed a plurality of times in one game. .
It is also conceivable to calculate the advantageous section ratio and the like each time it is displayed.
As described above, the same management information (for example, advantageous section ratio) may be calculated a plurality of times during one game.
(25) The above embodiment and various modified examples are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combination.

Subsequently, the third and subsequent embodiments of the present invention will be described.
In the third and subsequent embodiments, the meanings of terms are as follows.
The “instructed game section” refers to a game section in which an instruction function operation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch or an execution frequency is increased in an advantageous section.
The “instructed game section” is similar to a conventional AT (abbreviation of “assist time”. “ART” when executing AT in RT having a high replay winning probability). In the following description, “instruction game section” is referred to as “AT” as necessary.

“Always execute the instruction function operation game” means a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, specifically, when the replay group B is won, the replay group B is won, and the small role group B is won. , And when the small role C group is won, the instruction function must be activated.
Note that the AT of this embodiment is executed in principle at RT3 (high replay probability), so it is “ART” in principle. However, the AT may fall to RT2 due to a player's operation error of the stop switch. Even if it falls from RT3 to RT2, AT is continued. Furthermore, AT may be executed even in RTs other than RT3 and RT2. Therefore, the AT in the RT that does not have a high replay probability like the RT3 is not strictly “ART”. In addition, when it falls from RT3 to RT2 during the AT, in order to return to RT3 by operating the instruction function at the time of replay B group winning, the correct pressing order is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.

On the other hand, “higher execution frequency” means, for example, that the instruction function is not activated at “100%” when the small role B group is won or the small role C group is won, for example, the instruction function is activated at 95%. It is a concept that includes such cases.
As will be described later, in the designated game period, when the small role B group is won, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to activate the instruction function, and when the lottery is won, the instruction function may be activated. In such a case, it is defined that “the execution frequency is increased” because “the instruction function is not always activated”.

As described above, the instruction game section is a game section in which the instruction function operation game is executed. Therefore, the designated game section is always an advantageous section, and the designated game section is a normal section or a standby section (hereinafter, the normal section and the standby section may be collectively referred to as “non-advantage section”). There is no.
In addition, the start and end of the designated game section can be arbitrarily set. For example, the instruction game section may be started simultaneously with the start of the advantageous section. Alternatively, even if the advantageous section is started, the instruction game section is not started immediately, but the instruction game section is started when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied in the advantageous section.

Furthermore, the end condition of the instruction game section may be determined at the start of the instruction game section, or the end condition may not be determined at the start of the instruction game section.
When the end condition of the instruction game section is determined by the start of the instruction game section, the instruction game section may be extended after the instruction game section is started.
Here, various parameters (variables) can be used to determine the designated game section. For example, firstly, the end condition of the designated game section is set by the number of games. Specifically, at the start of the designated game section, the number of games in the designated game section may be set to “50” games or “100” games, for example.

  Secondly, the end condition of the designated game section is set by the number of payouts. If set in this way, the end condition is the same as that of the special game. Specifically, for example, the end condition of the designated game section may be set to “the number of payouts exceeds 300”.

Thirdly, it is possible to set the end condition of the designated game section with a difference number. Specifically, the end condition of the designated game section may be set to “the difference number has exceeded 200”.
Fourthly, the end condition of the instruction game section may be set by the number of times the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small role B group and the small role C group (only the small role B group may be selected). Specifically, in the game in which the end condition of the instruction game section is set to “the instruction function operation count is 50 times when winning the small role B group and the small role C group winning”, and the instruction function operation frequency is 50 times. For example, the instruction game section is ended.

In order to extend the instruction game section in the instruction game section determined as described above, the parameters defining the instruction game section are changed (also referred to as “extension”, “addition”, or “addition”).
For example, in the instruction game section of 100 games, when the instruction game section is extended to the 50th game and the number of games is added 30 times, the remaining number of games in the instruction game section is changed from 50 games to 80 games. Be changed.
Similarly to the above, when the instruction game section is set by the payout number, the difference number, or the instruction function operation number, when extending the instruction game section, the value to be added to these parameters is determined and the remaining parameters are determined. Add (add) the values obtained.

In addition, based on the transition of the gaming state, the designated gaming section (AT) may be started and ended.
Here, the “game state” may include a control state controlled by the main control board 50 in addition to the above-described RT (lottery state). That is, the gaming state is a concept including both a lottery state and a control state.
Further, the “control state” is a game state that can be determined regardless of the RT (as described later, there may be a control state linked to the RT).
Examples of the control state include concepts such as a precursor, CZ (abbreviation of “chance zone”), AT, and normal. More specifically, as a control state performed in the advantageous section, a state with a high transition probability (high probability state) or a low state (low probability state) to the instruction game section (AT), or an instruction game section (AT) Examples of the control state include various control states in consideration of game characteristics, such as a state where the winning probability of adding the designated game section (AT) is high (such as a special zone for addition) and a low state.
And the control state of a normal area is normal, and the control state of an advantageous area is a precursor, CZ, or AT.

For example, simultaneously with the transition to the advantageous section, the control state is changed from “normal” to “precursor”. In this precursor, there are a case of transition (promotion) to CZ and a case of transition (fall) to normal. When the condition for transition to CZ is satisfied in the precursor, the process proceeds to CZ, and when the condition for transition to normal is satisfied, the process proceeds to normal.
Moreover, when it transfers to CZ, it has the case where it transfers to AT (promotion), and the case where it transfers to a precursor or normal (fall). When the condition for transition to AT is satisfied during CZ, the process shifts to AT, and when the condition for transition to precursor or normal is satisfied, it shifts to precursor or normal, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, when the transition to the AT is performed, when the RT transition similar to that in the first embodiment (FIG. 22) is performed, the control is performed so as to stay at RT3. For example, when it is decided to shift to AT in RT2, the correct answer pressing order for shifting to RT3 by the operation of the instruction function is displayed at the time of replay B group winning. Further, after the transition to RT3, in order to prevent falling from RT3, the correct answer pressing order for maintaining RT3 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function when the replay group C is won.

Further, for example, a finite RT is provided, and AT is used while staying at the finite RT. In this case, the AT ends when the finite RT shifts to another RT.
Note that “finite RT” means that the player stays at the RT until the predetermined number of games is consumed, and when the predetermined number of games is consumed, the RT termination condition is satisfied and the process shifts to another RT.
For example, when transitioning to a finite RT after the end of a special game, an AT may be executed with this finite RT. Then, when the predetermined number of games is digested with the finite RT, the game proceeds to RT corresponding to the normal section, and the AT, that is, the designated game section and the advantageous section are ended.
In addition, as in the first embodiment, when a special combination is won, a transition is made to RT4 (internal RT). For example, when a special combination in a finite RT is won, RT transfer may be performed. In this case, the limited RT is ended by winning the special role, and after the special game is ended, it can be started from a predetermined RT (for example, non-RT in FIG. 59) different from the limited RT.
On the other hand, in the case of a specification that does not shift to RT due to the special role elected, even if the special role is elected during the finite RT, the finite RT is not terminated, and after the special game was finished, it was being executed until then. It can be resumed from the middle of the finite RT.

  Moreover, since the precursor and CZ are executed in the advantageous section, they are game sections in which the instruction function can be activated. Accordingly, whether or not to activate the instruction function is arbitrary, but since it is during AT that the instruction function is operated constantly or frequently, the instruction function is not activated during the precursor or CZ as during AT. During the warning or CZ, there are cases where the instruction function is activated at a small rate or the instruction function is activated only once. It should be noted that, in the specification in which the transition from the normal section to the prelude is made in accordance with the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and the normal section may fall to the normal (normal section) before the transition to the CZ or AT, the prelude or CZ (advantage It is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once during (section).

In particular, when shifting to the advantageous section, it is possible to activate the instruction function at the time of the first small role B group winning in order to quickly achieve “execute at least one instruction function operation game in the advantageous section”. .
Since AT is premised on an advantageous section, when the advantageous section ends, AT also ends. Therefore, for example, when the number of games remaining in the AT is reached, when the 1500 games that are the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section and the AT are terminated.

“Freeze” refers to delaying the progress of the game by pausing for a predetermined period of time. For example, receiving a medal, receiving a bet switch 40 operation, receiving a start switch 41 and a stop switch 42 The function related to (acceptance of the stop operation of the reel 31) is to temporarily stop. It is possible to execute such a freeze and output various effects during the freeze period.
Freezing is executed at the end of AT, for example. On the other hand, if only CZ is executed after the transition to the advantageous section (when AT is not executed), the freeze is not executed. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, there is a case where the freeze is performed and a case where it is not performed at the end of the advantageous section.

<Third Embodiment>
The third embodiment is characterized in that the number of AT games can be increased.
As described above, there are various AT parameters. In the third embodiment, the AT end condition is determined by the number of games.
In the third embodiment, FIG. 43 (Example 1) to FIG. 52 (Example 10) will be described as processing on the main control board 50 side.
Further, Example 1 (FIG. 53) and Example 2 (FIG. 54) will be described as processing on the sub-control board 80 side.
In the following example, AT is started simultaneously with the start of the advantageous section. Then, the advantageous section is ended simultaneously with the end of AT. That is, “AT = advantageous section”.
However, as in the first embodiment described above, the fourth embodiment described later, etc., of course, there are cases where it is an advantageous section but a non-AT period (for example, a precursor, CZ, a withdrawal period, a special game). (This point will be described later).

Furthermore, the upper limit counter described in the following example corresponds to the upper limit counter 69b of the first embodiment. Furthermore, in the following Examples 1 to 10, an AT counter, an additional counter, an advantageous section counter, and the like are provided (in all examples, these three counters are not always provided).
In the flowcharts of FIGS. 43 (Example 1) to 52 (Example 10), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes. The description of step numbers that are the same as those already described will be omitted as appropriate.
The count value by the counter is abbreviated as “counter value”.
Furthermore, “clearing” the counter value means initializing the counter value (setting the counter value to “0” in the increment counter).

In the third embodiment, during the AT, when the condition device (condition device shown in FIG. 17) corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section in the first embodiment is won, the AT game count is added. The number of games to be added may be determined in advance according to the condition device, or the number of games to be added may be determined by lottery when winning the condition device to be added.
For example, in FIG. 17, when winning the small role E1 with the number “250”, the number of extra games is determined as “50” (50%), “100” (40%), or “200” (10%). To do. In addition, when winning the small role E1 with the number “750”, the number of extra games is determined to be “30” (50%), “50” (30%), or “100” (20%). It is done.
Regardless of the above example, it is possible to predetermine the number of AT extra games based on the control state and the condition device, or to draw the AT extra game times based on the control state and the condition device. Good. In this case, for example, even when the same condition device is won, the number of extra games determined or drawn by the control state being executed can be varied.

In the third embodiment, “AT = advantageous section” as described above, and as in the first embodiment, the upper limit of the advantageous section is 1500 games. Therefore, the AT is 1500 games at the longest.
Here, when starting the AT, an initial value of the number of games of the AT is determined, and during the AT, the (remaining) number of games of the AT is added according to the selected condition device.
Regardless of whether the total number of AT games (the sum of the number of AT digestion games and the number of remaining games; the same shall apply hereinafter) exceeds “1500” when the number of AT games is added. There are a case where the addition is executed and a case where the addition exceeding “1500” is not executed.
As a result of adding the number of AT games, even if the total number of AT games exceeds “1500”, the number of AT games to be executed is limited to “1500”.

Furthermore, when adding the number of games during an AT, a method of executing the addition under the same conditions from the beginning to the end, and as the upper limit of 1500 games is approached, it is less likely to be added (the expected number of additions becomes smaller) ) Method. As an example of the latter, when the initial value of the number of games of the AT is “100”, for example, and no additional is performed at all, when the condition device to be added first is won, for example, 80 An additional number “100” is selected with a probability of%, but when the total number of AT games is “1000” or more, when the same condition device as above is won, for example, an additional 80% probability is added. This is the case where the number “50” is selected.
In addition, when controlling in this way, there are a case where the addition is continued even when the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500” and a case where the addition is stopped.
Furthermore, in the case where the addition is continued even if the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”, even if the value exceeds “1500”, the value is stored, and the amount exceeding “1500” Is a method of clearing the value.

FIG. 43 (Example 1) below is an example in which, even if the total number of AT games exceeds “1500” (regardless of the total number of games), the addition is performed without any limitation (added to the counter).
FIG. 44 (Example 2) to FIG. 46 (Example 4) are examples in which, when the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”, no extra is executed (not added to the counter). In this case, when the extra lottery itself is not executed and when the extra lottery itself is executed, after the extra lottery, it is determined whether or not the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”. The case of clearing the extra lottery result. The latter is adopted in FIG. 44 (Example 2) to FIG. 46 (Example 4).

In addition, when it is decided to add, a freeze may be generated. This is to generate a freeze and output an extra effect (such as the number of games to be added) during that time.
However, if it is decided that the number of games will be added and the freeze is generated, and the total number of games of AT exceeds “1500”, the added number will be cleared. It happens that it is not done.
For this reason, for example, after winning the condition device to be added in the current game and performing the extra lottery, it is decided to add, and after confirming that the additional number is added to the remaining number of games of the AT, For example, in the next game, there is a control that generates a freeze as well as an extra effect.

  Furthermore, FIG. 47 (Example 5) to FIG. 49 (Example 7) show that when the total number of games of AT becomes “1000” or more (that is, when the upper limit “1500” is approached), the expected value of the additional number is reduced. This is an example. Here, when making the expected value of the number of additions small, it is possible to reduce the probability of winning the addition, decrease the number of additions, and execute both of these.

Further, in FIG. 50 (Example 8) to FIG. 52 (Example 10), when the total number of games of the AT becomes “1000” or more (that is, when the upper limit “1500” is approached), the winning combination (the winning condition device) This is an example in which a lottery is performed by lowering the grade. Here, “reducing the grade of the winning combination” is, for example, the following method.
As shown in the first embodiment, as a condition device to be subjected to the extra lottery, as shown in FIG. 17, a small combination E1 having a set number “250” and a small combination E1 having a set number “750” are provided. It is assumed that
Here, the small combination E1 with the placement number “250” is a condition device that is less likely to win because the placement number is smaller than the small combination E1 with the placement number “750”. In such a case, the expected value of the additional number when winning the small role E1 with the number “250” is x1, and the expected value of the additional number when winning the small number E1 with the number “750” is x2 ( x2 <x1).
Further, as an example of changing the expected value of the extra number, a method is adopted in which a plurality of types of lottery tables are provided in advance and the lottery table used in the extra lottery is changed.

When the total number of AT games is less than “1000”, when winning the small role E1 with the number “250”, the lottery is performed with the expected value x1 and the small number E1 with the number “750” is won. In some cases, the lottery is performed with the expected value x2.
Next, when the total number of games of AT is “1000” or more, both when winning the small role E1 with the number “250” and when winning the small role E1 with the number “750”, The lottery is performed with the expected value x2.
As a result, when the winning combination E1 with the set number “250” is won, the grade is lowered to the winning combination E1 with the set number “750” and the lottery is performed.

Alternatively, when the total number of games of the AT is “1000” or more, when winning the small role E1 of the number “250”, the lottery is performed by adding the expected value x2 to the small number E1 of the number “750”. When winning, the lottery may be performed by adding the expected value x3 (x3 <x2).
In addition, although said expectation value x1-x3 assumes the value exceeding "0", it may be "0", for example. The extra lottery for the expected value “0” for the extra number includes, for example, setting the winning probability of the extra to “0”, or winning the extra number “0” even though the winner is won by the extra lottery. .

For example, it is assumed that the expected value of the additional number when winning the small role E1 is x11 and the expected value of the additional number when winning the small role D is x12 (x12 <x11).
In this case, if the total number of games of the AT is less than “1000”, when the small role E1 is won, the lottery is performed with the expected value x11, and when the small role D is won, the additional value is drawn with the expected value x12. .
Next, in the case where the total number of games of the AT is “1000” or more, when winning the small role E1, it is replaced with the winning of the small role D, and the lottery is performed with the expected value x12.
Even if the winning combination is replaced with a lower-ranking winning combination in order to lower the winning combination, the winning combination itself is not changed.

  Further, in the above example, the threshold value of the total number of games of the AT for which the expected value of the additional number is changed is set to “1000”, but is not limited thereto, and is not limited to “500”, “800”, “1200”. ”,“ 1300 ”,“ 1400 ”, etc., can be variously set according to the specifications of the slot machine.

(Example 1)
FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a first example of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
First, the main control board 50 includes, as counters, an AT counter that counts the number of digestion games during AT and an upper limit counter that counts the upper limit number of games “1500” in the advantageous section.
In the third embodiment, “100” is given as an initial value (number of games) at the start of AT. Therefore, “100” is set in the AT counter at the start of AT. Each game is decremented by “1” (decrement counter).

The upper limit counter is set to an initial value “1500” at the start of AT. Each game is decremented by “1” (decrement counter).
As described above, when the AT counter or the upper limit counter becomes “0”, the AT end condition is satisfied.
If 1BB is won during AT, the AT counter is not updated until the end of 1BB game (counting is interrupted). On the other hand, the upper limit counter is updated every game even during the 1BB game. In other words, the AT counter is not updated during the internal middle game and the 1BB game, and therefore, after the completion of 1BB, the game restarts from the AT counter value at the time of 1BB winning.
Furthermore, the advantageous section flag corresponds to the eighth bit in the segment data of the digit 2 in the first embodiment, and is set to “1” during the advantageous section and “0” when it is not the advantageous section. Is set.

  43 (a), in step S401, the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) performs a command transmission process at the start of the game on the sub control board 80. This process is a process shown in FIG. In step S402, control when the start switch 41 is operated is executed. In step S402, it is continuously detected whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to the next step S403.

In step S403, an internal lottery process is executed. This process is the same as the lottery of the combination by the combination lottery means 61 in the first embodiment. In the next step S404, an extra lottery is performed. Here, “addition” is an addition of the number of games played by the AT. Therefore, when the game is not in AT (in the normal section and in the advantageous section but non-AT), the extra lottery in step S404 is not executed. The extra lottery in step S404 is a process shown in FIG.
In this embodiment, it is assumed that an AT lottery is executed when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment is won.
Further, it is assumed that the additional number and the winning probability are determined in a lottery table to be described later.

In step S405, the main control board 50 transmits a command to the sub control board 80 when the start switch 41 is operated. This process is a process shown in FIG.
In the next step S406, it is continuously determined whether or not all the reels 31 are stopped. When it is determined that all the reels 31 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, variable update processing is performed as processing at the end of the game. This process is the process shown in FIG. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

If it progresses to step S401 of Fig.43 (a), the command transmission process at the time of the game start of the same figure (b) will be performed.
First, in step S411, an AT counter value is transmitted. In the next step S412, the upper limit counter value is transmitted. Further, in the next step S413, the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted. As the value of the advantageous section flag, “1” is transmitted when it is in the advantageous section, and “0” is transmitted when it is not in the advantageous section. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished. Through the above processing, the main control board 50 transmits three parameters, that is, an AT counter value, an upper limit counter value, and an advantageous section flag value, to the sub control board 80.

If it progresses to step S404 of Fig.43 (a), the addition lottery will be performed in the same figure (c).
First, in step S421, a lottery table is set. This lottery table is stored in the ROM 54 in advance, and determines the number of extras corresponding to the winning combination and the winning probability. Specifically, for example, when winning the number “250” when winning the small role E1 alone, the probability of determining the additional number as “50” is 60% and the probability of determining the additional number as “40”. Setting to 40% is mentioned. In addition, when winning the number “750” when winning the small role E1 alone, the probability of determining the additional number as “30” is set to 50%, and the probability of determining the additional number as “20” is set to 50%. Can be mentioned. For other condition devices, a winning probability and an additional number are also defined.

  In the next step S422, the lottery is performed using the lottery table set in step S421. Then, the process proceeds to step S423, and the result (the determined additional number) drawn in step S422 is added to the AT counter value. For example, when the AT counter value so far is “50” (the number of remaining games) and the additional number is determined to be “20”, the AT counter value is updated to “70”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

When the process proceeds to step S405 in FIG. 43A, the command transmission at the time of operating the start switch in FIG.
Here, in step S431, the AT counter value is transmitted. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished. Therefore, the AT counter value is transmitted in step S411 at the start of the game, but in step S431, the AT counter value is transmitted again. If it is not determined to increase the number of AT games in the game, the same value is transmitted in step S411 and step S431.

On the other hand, when it is determined to increase the number of games of AT, in step S431, the updated AT counter value is transmitted. In the sub control board 80, when the AT counter value is received again in step S431 after receiving the AT counter value in step S411, the AT counter value stored in the sub control board 80 side is received in step S431. Rewrite to AT counter value.
Before step S431, it is determined whether or not the AT is added in the game, and only when the AT is added and executed, the second AT counter value is transmitted in the game in step S431. Also good.

If it progresses to step S407 of Fig.43 (a), the variable update process of the same figure (e) will be performed.
First, in step S441, “1” is subtracted from the AT counter value. In step S442, the upper limit counter value is decremented by “1”. In the next step S443, it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0” (that is, when the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit “1500”), the process proceeds to step S445 and subsequent steps to end the AT and the advantageous section. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S444.

In step S444, it is determined whether or not the AT counter value is “0” and the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more. Here, when the AT counter value is “0”, it means that the remaining number of games of the AT is “0”.
In order to determine whether or not the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more, for example, an instruction function operation counter or an instruction function operation flag may be provided.
As the instruction function operation counter, for example, an increment counter that increments by “1” every time the instruction function is operated can be cited. It can be determined that it is “1” or more.

  In addition, the instruction function operation flag is turned off when the instruction function operation game has never been executed after executing the advantageous section and AT, and is turned on (afterwards) when the first instruction function operation game is executed. It is a flag. When the instruction function operation flag is on, it can be determined that the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more.

  In addition, as described in the first embodiment, when shifting to the advantageous section, at least one instruction function operation game (the winning combination with the largest payout number among the games having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch 42) is selected. In the first embodiment, the advantage section cannot be ended unless the small group B group winning game (the same applies hereinafter) is executed. In this way, executing at least one instruction function operation game during the advantageous section has priority over the AT end condition.

  However, when reaching the 1500 game which is the upper limit of the advantageous section without executing the instruction function operation game once, it is possible to end the advantageous section (see the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 69) described later). ). Therefore, in Example 1 of FIG. 43, it is first determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is “0” in Step S443. If it is “0”, the advantageous interval and the AT are determined without performing the determination in Step S444. To end.

  If it is determined in step S444 that “the AT counter value is“ 0 ”and the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is“ 1 ”or more” ”, the advantageous section and the end condition of the AT are satisfied. move on. On the other hand, when “No” is determined in step S444, the processing according to this flowchart ends (the next game also continues the AT and the advantageous section).

  In step S445, the AT counter value is cleared (set to “0”). In step S446, the upper limit counter value is cleared (set to “0”). In step S447, the value of the advantageous section flag is cleared (set to “0”). As described above, when the advantageous section ends, it is necessary to clear (reset) all parameters related to the advantageous section. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

(Example 2)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a second example of the control process on the main control board 50 side. 44 includes an AT counter (initial value “100”, a decrement counter), an extra counter (initial value “0”, an increment counter), and an upper limit counter (initial value “1500”, a decrement counter). . Further, as in Example 1, an advantageous section flag is provided.
The extra counter increments the extra number every time the number of games is added during AT.

44, (a) and (b) are the same as Example 1 in FIG.
Also, in the extra lottery process in FIG. 44 (c), after the extra lottery is executed in step S422, the process proceeds to step S451, and it is determined whether or not the extra counter value exceeds a specified number. Here, the specified number is set to “1400”. That is, “100” is set as the initial value of the AT game count, and when the AT additional game count reaches “1400”, the total AT game count becomes “1500” in total, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section. To reach. For this reason, it is set not to add an extra game number “1400”.

When it is determined in step S451 in FIG. 44C that the additional counter value has exceeded the specified number (“1400”), even if the additional number is determined in the lottery in step S422, the additional number is added. First, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the added counter value is equal to or less than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452. In step S452, the lottery result (determined number of additions) in step S422 is added to the addition counter value. The process in the next step S423 is the same as that in Example 1 described above. From the above, for example, when the AT counter value before adding lottery = “50”, the adding counter value = “200”, and the determined adding number is “30”, the AT counter value after adding is “80”, adding The counter value is “230”.

In addition, in the command transmission process when the start switch is operated as shown in FIG. In Example 1, the AT counter value is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, but in Example 2, the additional counter value is transmitted. The sub-control board 80 can determine that the addition has been performed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached when the addition counter value reaches “1400”.
Furthermore, in FIG. 4E, steps S441 to S447 are the same processing as in FIG. 43 (example 1). In addition, after step S447, the process proceeds to step S471, where the additional counter value is cleared. This is because at the end of the advantageous section, all parameters relating to the advantageous section are cleared.

(Example 3)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a third example of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 3 of FIG. 45, as counters, an AT counter (increment counter which is set to an initial value “0” and increments by “1” every time one AT is played), an extra counter (initial value “100”). , An increment counter) and an upper limit counter (same as in Example 1). Furthermore, the specified number is set to “1500” which is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section.

45, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
In FIG. 8C, steps S421 and S422 are the same processing as in the first example. After step S422, the process proceeds to step S451, where it is determined whether or not the additional counter value exceeds a specified number (“1500”). That the added counter value has exceeded the specified number “1500” means that, in Example 3, the total number of games of the AT has exceeded “1500”. Therefore, when the additional counter value exceeds the specified number “1500”, even if the additional number is determined in step S422, the additional number is not added, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S451 that the additional counter value is equal to or smaller than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452, and the determined additional number is added to the additional counter value. Note that step S423 (addition of an additional number to the AT counter value) shown in Example 1 of FIG. 43 is not performed. In this example 3, the AT counter is only for counting the number of games during the AT.

FIG. 4D is the same processing as FIG. 44 (Example 2).
Furthermore, in FIG. 4E, in step S481, “1” is added to the AT counter value. During AT, the AT counter value is incremented. In the next steps S442 and S443, the same processing as in Example 1 is performed. In the next step S482, it is determined whether or not the AT counter value is greater than or equal to the additional counter value. In Example 3, when the number of AT games exceeds the number of added games, it is determined that the end condition of the AT and the advantageous section is satisfied.

  In Example 3 of FIG. 45, the initial value of the AT counter value is “0”, and the initial value of the additional counter value is “100”. When the number of AT games reaches “100” without any additional AT games, the AT counter value becomes “100” and the additional counter value becomes “100”. ≧≧ addition counter value ”is satisfied. If “Yes” is determined in step S482, the process proceeds to step S483. On the other hand, when it is determined as “No”, the advantageous section and the end condition of the AT are not satisfied, and thus the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S483, it is determined whether the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more. If it is “1” or more, the advantageous section and the end condition of the AT are satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S445. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “1” or more, the next game also continues the AT and the advantageous section, so the processing according to this flowchart ends.
The processes after step S445 are the same as those in FIG. 44 (example 2).

(Example 4)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating a fourth example of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In the example 4 of FIG. 46, the counter is an additional counter (increment counter set to an initial value “100”), an advantageous interval counter (set to an initial value “0”, and during each AT, during an advantageous interval, (Incrementation counter incremented by “1”).
In Example 4, no AT counter is provided. The number of AT games is counted by an advantageous section counter. That is, the advantageous section counter of Example 4 has the same function as the AT counter (increment counter) of Example 3.
Further, in Example 4, the upper limit counter provided in Example 1 or the like is not provided. In Example 4, the advantageous section counter also serves as the upper limit counter. The specified number is “1500” as in the third example.

In Example 4 of FIG. 46, (a), (c), and (d) are the same processes as in FIG. 45 (Example 3).
Also, in FIG. 5B, when step S401 is started, an advantageous section counter value is transmitted to the sub control board 50 in step S491. Next, the process proceeds to step S413, and the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted to the sub control board 50 in the same manner as in Example 1 and the like.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 5E, in step S501, “1” is added to the advantageous section counter value. In the next step S502, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section counter value is “1500” or more. When it is determined that the advantageous section counter value is equal to or greater than “1500”, the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, and the process proceeds to step S504 to end the advantageous section and AT. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section counter value is not “1500” or more, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section counter value is greater than or equal to the added counter value. Similarly to step S482 in FIG. 45 (example 3), when the advantageous section counter value is greater than or equal to the additional counter value, it means that the AT has no remaining number of games. When it is determined “Yes” in step S503, the process proceeds to step S483. When it is determined “No”, the process according to this flowchart is ended (the next game also continues the advantageous section and AT).
Step S483 is the same process as in FIG. 45 (example 3). If “Yes” is determined in the step S483, the process proceeds to a step S504, and if “No” is determined, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S504, the advantageous section counter value is cleared. The next steps S447 and S471 are the same processing as in FIG. 45 (example 3).

(Example 5)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating Example 5 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 5 of FIG. 47, the counter is an AT counter (decrement counter that is set to an initial value “100” and decrements “1” by one during AT), and an additional counter (an initial value “0” is set and added). Increment counter for adding an additional number for each time) and an upper limit counter (set to an initial value “1500” and decremented by “1” for each game during the advantageous period). Furthermore, the specified number is set to “1000”.

In Example 5 of FIG. 47, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
Moreover, in the same figure (c), two types of lottery tables A and B are provided for the lottery of the additional number. Note that the lottery table is not limited to two types, and three or more types (for example, ultra-high accuracy, high accuracy, normal, low accuracy, etc.) may be provided.

The lottery table A is a lottery table in which the probability that the number of AT games will be added is set to a normal probability or a high probability. On the other hand, the lottery table B is a lottery table in which the probability that the number of AT games will be added is set lower than that of the lottery table A.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery table A may have an expected value of the additional number set to x1, and the lottery table B may have the expected value of the additional number set to x2 (x2 <x1).
Further, by combining the two, the lottery table A has a high extra probability and the expected value of the extra number is set to medium to large, and the lottery table B has a low extra winner probability and the expected value of the extra number It may be set to small.

  In FIG. 5C, first, in step S511, a lottery table A is set as a standard lottery table for addition. In the next step S451, it is determined whether or not the additional counter value is equal to or greater than a specified number (“1000”). When it is determined that the additional counter value is not equal to or greater than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S422. When it is determined that the additional counter value is equal to or greater than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S512.

In step S512, the lottery table A set in step S511 is reset to the lottery table B. Then, the process proceeds to step S422. By this process, when the number of additions is less than “1000”, the lottery table A is used for the addition lottery, and when the number of additions is “1000” or more, the lottery table B is used for the addition lottery. Therefore, the ease of addition is changed with the addition number “1000” as a threshold value.
The processes after step S422 are the same as those in FIG. 44 (example) 2. Also, FIGS. 4D and 4E are the same processing as in FIG. 44 (Example 2).

(Example 6)
FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating a sixth example of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In the example 6 of FIG. 48, the counter is set to an AT counter (initial value “0”, increment counter that increments by “1” during AT), and an additional counter (initial value “100”). Increment counter for adding an additional number for each time) and an upper limit counter (set to an initial value “1500” and decremented by “1” for each game during the advantageous period). Furthermore, the specified number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).

When Example 6 in FIG. 48 is compared with Example 5 in FIG. 47, the following points are different.
Similarly to FIG. 45 (example 3), the AT counter is an increment counter with an initial value “0”, and therefore, when the extra lottery is performed, the extra number is not added to the AT counter.
In Example 6 of FIG. 48, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In FIG. 48C, after the lottery in step S422, the process proceeds to step S452, where the number of additions is added to the additional counter value, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated (in step S423 in FIG. 47 (example 5)). No processing).
FIG. 4D is the same processing as FIG. 47 (Example 5). Furthermore, FIG. 5E is the same processing as FIG. 45 (example 3).

(Example 7)
FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a seventh example of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 7 of FIG. 49, the counter does not have an AT counter as in FIG. 46 (Example 4), and is an additional counter (initial value “100” is incremented to add the additional number each time it is added). Counter), and an upper limit counter (set to an initial value “0” and incremented every game, “1” during the advantageous period). Furthermore, the specified number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).
In Example 7 of FIG. 49, the upper limit counter also serves as an AT counter (counter that counts the number of AT games).

In Example 7 of FIG. 49, (a), (b), and (d) are the same processes as in FIG. 46 (Example 4). FIG. 8C is the same processing as FIG. 48 (Example 6).
Furthermore, in FIG. 5E, in step S521, “1” is added to the upper limit counter value. In step S522, it is determined whether the upper limit counter value is “1500” or more. When it is determined that the upper limit counter value is “1500” or more, since the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, the process proceeds to step S446 in order to terminate the advantageous section and AT.

  On the other hand, if “No” is determined in step S522, the process proceeds to step S523. In step S523, it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is greater than or equal to the additional counter value. While the upper limit counter is a counter that increments each game “1” during the advantageous period, the additional counter is a counter that increments the additional number as an initial value “100”. When “≧ additional counter value”, it means that the AT has no remaining number of games. When it is determined “Yes” in step S523, the process proceeds to step S483. When it is determined “No”, the next game is also continued in AT, so the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S483, in the same manner as described above, it is determined whether or not the instruction function operation game has been executed once or more. On the other hand, when “No” is determined in step S483, the next game is continued in AT, so the processing according to this flowchart ends.
The processes in steps S446, S447, and S471 are the same as those in FIG. 47 (example 3). And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

(Example 8)
FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an eighth example of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 8 of FIG. 50, the counter includes the same AT counter, additional counter, and upper limit counter as in FIG. 44 (Example 2). Further, the specified number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).
In Example 8 of FIG. 50, in the flowchart of (a), after the internal lottery in step S403, the process proceeds to step S531, and a conditional device group setting process is performed. The other processes in (a) are the same as those in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
FIG. 4B is the same processing as FIG. 44 (example 2).

FIG. 7C is a flowchart showing the condition device group setting process in step Sstep S531.
First, in step S541, “0” is set as the conditional device group number.
Here, the “condition device group number” is a number assigned to each group by dividing the condition devices that are the targets of the additional lottery among the plurality of condition devices lottered in the internal lottery.

In this example, two condition device group numbers “0” and “1” are illustrated. Each condition device group number has a lottery table for extra lottery.
Further, a lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number “0” is referred to as a lottery table A, and a lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number “1” is referred to as a lottery table B.
Further, the lottery table B is set so that the expected value of the additional number is smaller than that of the lottery table A.

Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the expected value of the additional number when winning the small role E1 is set to “x1”, and the expected value of the additional number when winning the small role D is set to “x2”. Suppose that Then, it is assumed that “x1> x2” (the expected value of the additional number is higher when winning the small role E1 than when winning the small role D).
In this case, the condition device group number corresponding to the small combination D is “1”, and the condition device group number corresponding to the small combination E1 is “0”.

Therefore, when the small combination D is won, the lottery table B is set because the condition device group number is “1”. On the other hand, when the small combination E1 is won, the lottery table A is set because the condition device group number is “0”.
Then, the expected value of the additional number when the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table A is “x1”, and the expected value of the additional number when the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table B is “x2”. .

The description returns to FIG.
When the condition device group number “0” is set in step S541, the process proceeds to step S542. In step S542, it is determined whether or not the additional counter value is equal to or greater than a specified number (“1000”). If it is determined that the number is not the specified number or more, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the additional counter value is equal to or greater than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S543, and the condition device group number “1” is set. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

  Therefore, in the above example, when the small combination D is won, the condition device group number corresponding to the small combination D is originally “1”, so it remains “1”. On the other hand, when the small role E1 is elected, the condition device group number “0” is set in principle. However, when the additional counter value is “1000” or more, the condition device group number “1” is reset. Set.

In the addition lottery in FIG. 4D, first, in step S551, a lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number is set. In the above example, the lottery table A (expected value “x1”) is set when the condition device group number is “0”, and the lottery table B (expected value “x2”) is set when the condition device group number is “1”. The The subsequent processing after step S422 is the same processing as in FIG. 44 (example 2).
50, (e) and (f) are the same processes as (d) and (e) in FIG. 44 (Example 2), respectively.

  In the above example, two types of condition device group numbers, “0” and “1”, are given, but three or more types may be provided. For example, if the expected value of the additional number is “x1> x2> x3”, if the additional counter value is less than “1000”, the lottery table of the expected value “x1” is used, and the additional counter value is “1000” or more and less than “1200” Then, the lottery table with the expected value “x2” is used, and when the additional counter value is “1200” or more, the lottery table with the expected value “x3” is used.

  As described above, in FIG. 50 (example 8), when winning the small combination E1, the additional lottery is performed so as to correspond to the expected value of the small combination E1, but when the additional counter value is “1000” or more. Will be added and the lottery will be performed so as to correspond to the expected value of the small role D. That is, when the number of added games increases and approaches the upper limit “1500” of the advantageous section, the winning combination grade is lowered and the lottery is performed.

(Example 9)
FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating a ninth example of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 9 of FIG. 51, the counter includes the same AT counter, additional counter, and upper limit counter as in FIG. 45 (Example 3). Also, the specified number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).
In FIG. 51, the processes of (a), (b), (e), and (f) are the same as those of (a), (b), (d), and (e) of FIG. 45 (example 3), respectively. It is processing.
In FIG. 51, the process of (c) is the same process as (c) of FIG. 50 (example 8).
Furthermore, in FIG. 51, the process of (d) is different from (d) of FIG. 50 (example 8) in that step S423 is not provided. The other processes are the same as those in (d) of FIG. 50 (Example 8).

(Example 10)
FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example 10 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 10 of FIG. 52, the counter includes an addition counter and an upper limit counter similar to FIG. 49 (Example 7) (no AT counter). Also, the specified number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 49 (example 7).
In FIG. 52, the processes of (a), (b), (e), and (f) are the same as those of (a), (b), (d), and (e) of FIG. 49 (Example 7), respectively. It is processing.
In FIG. 52, the process of (c) is the same process as (c) of FIG. 50 (example 8).
Furthermore, in FIG. 52, the process of (d) is the same as that of FIG. 51 (example 9).

As described above, FIG. 43 (Example 1) to FIG. 52 (Example 10) have been described. Basically, an AT counter that counts the number of AT games, an extra counter that counts the number of AT games, An upper limit counter (advantageous section counter) for counting the upper limit “1500” of the section is provided.
These counters may be incremented or decremented.
Furthermore, the AT counter need not be provided as shown in FIG. 46 (Example 4) or FIG. 49 (Example 7). In this case, the number of AT games is substantially counted by another counter.
Further, in Examples 1 to 10, the lottery is performed in accordance with the selected condition device. Here, when a condition device to be added is won, a predetermined number may be added unconditionally without performing a lottery.

When the extra lottery is performed, as shown in FIG. 43 (example 1), the extra number may be determined regardless of the extra number up to now.
On the other hand, when the extra lottery is performed, the extra number may be determined in consideration of the extra number up to the present time as shown in FIG. 47 (example 5) and FIG. 50 (example 8).
“Considering the number of additions” means that the larger the number of additions, the smaller the number of additions (the expected value of the addition number becomes smaller) in the subsequent addition lottery. As a result, the rate of increase of the additional number accompanying the progress of the game can be moderated.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43 (example 1), it is also possible to execute an unlimited addition. If unlimited additions are executed without limit, for example, the number of remaining AT games may be “2000”, “3000”, or the like. However, even if such a number of games is reached, priority is given to the upper limit number of games “1500” in the advantageous section (step S443 in FIG. 43 (e)), and the AT ends at that time.

However, in the case where an unlimited number of AT games is executed as shown in FIG. 43 (example 1), if the number of extra games is reported to the player as it is, an increase exceeding the upper limit number of games “1500” in the advantageous section will be made. The number may be reported. In this case, the player may misunderstand that he can play a game exceeding the upper limit number of games “1500”.
Accordingly, the sub-control board 80 performs various controls as described below regarding the notification of the number of AT games and the number of additional games corresponding to the above points.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example 1 of the control process related to the advantageous section and AT on the sub-control board 80 side and addition.
In Example 1 of FIG. 53, (a) is a process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50.
For example, taking FIG. 43 (example 1) as an example, processing for receiving commands transmitted in steps S411 to S413 in FIG. 43B and step S431 in FIG.
In Examples 1 to 10, the AT counter value or the additional counter value is transmitted. In the examples of FIGS. 53 and 54, the AT counter value and the additional number are transmitted.

  In FIG. 53A, in step S601, processing for receiving an AT counter value is executed. This process is a process for receiving the AT counter value and storing it in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80. In the next step S602, processing for receiving the additional number ((b) in the figure) is executed. In the next step S603, an advantageous section flag reception process is executed. This process is a process of receiving the value (“0” or “1”) of the advantageous section flag and storing it in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80 as in step S601. Further, in the next step S604, a process ((d) in the figure) for receiving the effect group number (see FIG. 21) is executed.

In step S602, the process (b) in the figure is executed.
First, in step S611, the received additional number is added to the additional counter. This extra counter is provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Next, proceeding to step S612, it is determined whether or not the additional counter value exceeds a specified number. Here, the specified number is set to “1500”. Accordingly, in this example, as in FIG. 45 (example 3), when the additional counter value exceeds “1500”, it is determined that the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached. If it is determined in step S612 that the added counter value exceeds the specified number (“1500”), the process proceeds to step S613. If it is determined that the added counter value is equal to or less than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S614.

In step S613, “1” is set to the additional effect suppression flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S614. Here, the “additional effect suppression flag” is used to output no additional effect when the additional number is already “1500” and to output the additional effect when the additional number is “1500” or less. This is a flag for making the determination.
In step S614, the additional number in the game is stored (in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80). And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In step S604, the process (c) in the figure is executed.
First, in step S621, it is determined whether or not the game has an additional number. This determination is made by determining whether or not the number of additions stored in step S614 is “0”. If it is determined that the additional number is included, the process proceeds to step S622. If it is determined that the additional number is not included, the process proceeds to step S625.
In step S622, it is determined whether or not the additional effect suppression flag is “1”. When it is determined that it is “1”, the process proceeds to step S623, and when it is determined that it is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S624.

  In step S623, an effect without an extra effect is selected. That is, since the added number has reached the specified number (“1500”), and even if the added lottery is won in the game, it is impossible to add more than the present, so control is performed so as not to output the added effect. The effect selected here is a normal effect or an effect corresponding to the received effect group number (for example, an effect that suggests a replay win (such as blue) when replay wins). And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

On the other hand, when “No” is determined in step S622 and the process proceeds to step S624, it is possible to select an effect with an added effect. For example, the effect which alert | reports all or one part of the addition number in the said game is mentioned. In addition, it is not always necessary to select an effect with an extra effect in the game for which the number of extras has been determined. For example, by switching to a continuous effect, and then selecting an effect with an additional effect for digesting several games. Also good.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S621 that there is no additional number in the game and the process proceeds to step S625, a normal effect is output. As described above, the normal effect includes outputting an effect corresponding to the winning combination (effect group number) in the game. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example 2 of the control process related to the advantageous section and AT on the sub-control board 80 side and addition.
In Example 2 of FIG. 54, (a) is a process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50. First, in step S631, a process of receiving a payout suppression flag is executed. Here, the ball-out suppression flag is a flag (command) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-control board 80, and when it is “1”, it means that the extra effect is suppressed. When it is “0”, it means that the additional effect is not suppressed. In other words, when the outgoing ball suppression flag “1” is transmitted from the main control board 50, it is a command to suppress the extra effect.
In the example 1 of FIG. 53, as shown in FIG. 53B, on the sub control board 80 side, an additional effect suppression flag is set. On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 54, it is determined by the main control board 60 whether to suppress the extra effect, and the determination result is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 as an out-ball suppression flag.

Examples of a method for the main control board 50 to transmit the output ball suppression flag include the following methods.
Taking FIG. 44 (example 2) as an example, when it is determined “Yes” in step S451 in FIG. Then, in FIG. 44D, after the step S461, the outgoing ball suppression flag is transmitted.

54 is the same as Example 1 of FIG. 53 except Step S631 and Step S632.
In step S631, the process (b) in the figure is executed.
First, in step S641, when a play-out suppression flag is received, it is determined whether or not the value is “1”. When it is determined that it is “1”, the process proceeds to step S642, and when it is determined that it is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S643.

In step S642, “1” is set to the additional effect suppression flag stored in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when the processing proceeds to step S643, “0” is set to the additional effect suppression flag, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Accordingly, when the received ball suppression flag is “1”, the additional effect suppression flag on the sub-control board 80 side is set to “1”, and when the received ball suppression flag is “0”, the additional effect suppression flag is set. Is set to “0”. Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 54, the additional effect suppression flag is switched according to the information transmitted from the main control board 60.

In FIG. 54 (c), as in FIG. 53 (example 1), it is not necessary to determine whether or not the additional counter value exceeds the specified number. Therefore, in step S611, the additional number is added to the additional counter, and the next step In step S614, the added number is stored.
In addition, the effect group number reception process in (d) in the figure is the same process as in FIG. 53 (Example 1).

  In the case where the sub control board 80 outputs an extra effect, for example, when the extra number determined in the game is “200”, all the extra numbers (“200”) may be reported in the effect of the game. However, it is also possible to notify in small increments (individual numbers are divided and notified) in a plurality of games (for example, continuous effects) including the game. Specifically, when the additional number is “200” in the game, the additional number “100” is notified in the game, “50” is notified in the next game, and “50” is displayed in the next game. For example.

FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an image display example of the image display device 23 by the sub-control board 80 regarding addition in AT, and is a diagram illustrating Examples 1 to 4. FIG.
First, in the first example, the image display device 23 before the addition includes “digestion G (meaning“ number of AT digestion games ”) 1200”, “remaining G (meaning“ number of AT remaining games ”) 300. "Is displayed. Therefore, since “AT digestion game count + remaining game count = 1500”, the number of executable AT games has already reached the upper limit.
In this case, in Example 1, even if 500 games are added internally (for example, the case like step S423 in FIG. 43 (c)), the display of the added number is changed and an effect related to the addition is performed. Absent. Therefore, the display after the addition remains the display before the addition.

Of course, “500” may be added to the counter (AT counter, extra counter, etc.) provided on the sub-control board 80 side when adding 500 games. For the number of AT games and the number of additions, real values may be managed by a counter, and only display may be performed as in Example 1. In the case of such control, an internal counter and a display counter are provided on the sub control board 80 side.
Alternatively, even if 500 games are added, the counter may not be updated.
If the image display is controlled as in Example 1, it is possible to suppress an effect related to unnecessary addition.

  In Example 2, when the number of AT digestion games is 1200 games and the remaining number of games is 200 games, when 500 games are added internally, the correct value (the remaining number of games after the addition) This is an example of switching to another display without displaying. In Example 2, the number of remaining games may be displayed as “celebration” or “congratulations”. In addition, a display such as “?” Can be cited.

  In Example 2, when the total number of AT digest games and the remaining number of games is “1500” or less, the remaining number of games is displayed. However, by further adding, the total number of AT games is “ If “1500” is exceeded, the remaining number of games is not displayed so that the player can grasp it. Since the display of the number of remaining games of the AT has changed from a specific numerical value to a display other than the numerical value, the player can grasp that the addition has been performed. However, since a specific numerical value is not displayed for the number of remaining games of the AT, the player cannot grasp the number of remaining games of the AT.

In addition, in the case where the number of digestion games of AT is “1200” and the remaining number of games is “200” before the addition, when “500” is added, the remaining number of games of AT may be set to “700” on the counter. Or “300”.
In addition, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is “celebration” or “congratulations”, if it is a specification that the AT will continue until the upper limit of 1500 times, “1500-AT digestion game” By calculating the “number of times” by the player, it becomes possible to grasp the remaining number of games of the AT.
In addition, the display of “celebration” or “congratulations” informs the player that the total number of games of the AT has exceeded “1500” and indicates that no further additions will be made. It becomes.

  As in Example 2, Example 3 shows an example in which “500” is added when the number of AT digestion games is “1200” and the remaining number of games is “200”. In Example 3, the number of remaining games of the AT is “+100” (not shown in FIG. 55) and becomes “300”. In other words, the total number of games of the AT has reached “1500” due to the addition this time.

In Example 3, when the total number of games of the AT becomes “1500” or more, the display of both the number of digest games and the remaining number of games of the AT is stopped and replaced with an ending effect (movie). The ending effect continues for at least a plurality of games (for example, several tens of games), and is executed until the number of AT digestion games reaches “1500”. If the final video of the ending effect prepared in advance is reached before the number of digestion games of the AT reaches “1500”, the final video is continuously displayed or the video is repeated by returning to the beginning of the ending effect. A method is mentioned.
By outputting the ending effect, it is possible to play a role of notifying the player that the number of games is not increased any more.

In Example 4, as shown in Example 2, when only the number of digest games of the AT is displayed and the number of remaining games is displayed as “celebration” or the like, as described above, the player determines that the remaining AT Although the number of games cannot be grasped, for example, when the remaining number of games of the AT becomes “10”, the game information indicating that the AT will not be executed beyond 1500 games, such as “It will end in 10 games.” To display. The “remaining 10 games” shown in Example 4 is an example, and the number of remaining games when the display of the game information is started is arbitrary. By displaying the game information indicating that the number of games played at the AT does not exceed “1500”, the player can know the remaining number of games played at the AT.
In addition, Example 4 can also be used in combination with Examples 1 to 3.

In addition, when an extra game over 1500 games occurs, the extra production itself may be displayed as “congratulations” or “celebration”.
Furthermore, when an extra game over 1500 games occurs, a privilege image that can be displayed only when an extra game over 1500 games occurs may be displayed.
Furthermore, “occurrence of surplus exceeding 1500 games” may be set as a mission in Myslo games. For example, when “occurrence of surplus exceeding 1500 games” is generated a predetermined number of times, the mission is achieved, and some privilege is given to the player.

In this way, even if an increase exceeding 1,500 games occurs, it is not possible to execute the additional game, but instead, a privilege (profit) for preventing a player's motivation from being lowered is set. It is preferable to keep it.
In particular, when a surplus exceeding 1500 games occurs, it is assumed that a rare role has been won, but when the rare role is won, the production is output because the total number of games is “1500” or more. This is because it is unnatural.
The “Myslo game” is, for example, as described in paragraph number “0680” of “Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-104442”.

FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining how the performance changes as the number of AT games increases in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, “AT = advantageous section” is set, so that the number of acquired sheets continues to increase during the advantageous section (AT). In the example of FIG. 56, for simplification of the graph, the AT continues from the number of games “0G” to “1500G”, and the acquired number continues to increase.
In FIG. 56, (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of AT games and effects.
In FIG. 56, the horizontal axis indicates the number of AT games, and the vertical axis indicates the number of acquired games. In the example of (a), as shown in Example 2 of FIG. 55, when the number of digestion games in the AT (advantageous section) becomes “1200”, 500 games are added.

When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the AT ends at the same time as the end of the advantageous section even if the number of remaining games is reached at that time.
In addition, the extra effect is performed up to 1200 games, but when the 500 games are won, the additional effect for the winning is not performed. In addition, even if it is elected for further extras after that, the extra presentation will not be performed.

  On the other hand, the performance related to the AT during the AT continues until the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games. Further, the number of AT digested games and the number of remaining games are displayed up to 1200 games, but at the time of winning 500 games in the 1200th game, the number of AT remaining games is displayed as shown in Example 2 in FIG. Or the display of both the number of digest games and the remaining number of games of the AT as in Example 3 of FIG. 55 is stopped, and other displays (“celebration” shown in Example 2 of FIG. Switch to the ending effect shown).

FIG. 56 (b) shows an example of (1) gradually increasing the lottery probability (shown by a solid line in the figure) when the AT continues for “1500” games, and (2) It is a figure which shows the example (it shows with a dotted line in the figure) which decreases instruction | indication frequency gradually.
In the above (1), for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the lottery table A is used until the number of AT games is less than “1000” games. Or, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), until the number of AT games is less than “1000” games, a lottery is performed with a grade corresponding to the winning combination, but “1000” games or more This corresponds to an example in which a lottery is performed by lowering the winning combination grade.

  Also, in the example of (1), when the number of AT games is less than “500” games, the extra lottery probability is high, and when the number is “500” games or more and less than “1000” games, the extra lottery probability is the normal probability. In the case of “1000” games or more, the extra lottery probability is set to a low probability. Even if the AT addition probability is gradually reduced as the number of games is digested, as long as the AT has the remaining number of games, the rate of increase in the number of games acquired with respect to the number of games does not change. This is the same as FIG. 56 (a).

On the other hand, in the example (2), the instruction frequency is controlled to be gradually lowered according to the digestion of the number of AT games.
Here, “instruction frequency” means how often the instruction function is activated when the small role group B or small role group C (push order bell) is won during AT (the correct answer push order is determined). Display). For example, when the number of AT games is less than “500” games, the instruction frequency is 100% (instruction frequency “high”), and when the number is “500” games or more and less than “1000” games, the instruction frequency is 90% (instruction The frequency is “medium”), and when the game is “1000” or more, the instruction frequency is set to 80% (instruction frequency “low”).

For example, when the instruction frequency is 90%, a lottery (winning with a probability of 90%) of whether or not to operate the instruction function is executed for the small role B group or the small role C group (push order bell). When the lottery is won, the instruction function is activated.
Also, when the instruction frequency is less than 100%, if the replay duplicate win for promotion or maintenance of RT is selected, the correct answer push order may always be indicated, or the same as the push order bell win. Whether or not to instruct may be determined by frequency.

If the instruction function does not work when replay overlaps, it may fall to disadvantageous RT. For example, in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), when Replay C group wins during RT3, Replay 03 is displayed and falls to RT2.
Further, as in the first embodiment, when a pattern symbol is displayed at RT3, it falls to RT2. Therefore, in the example as in the first embodiment, if the instruction function is not activated at the time of pressing the push-bell, there is a case where it falls to disadvantageous RT.
If the instruction frequency is gradually decreased as the number of AT games is exhausted, the number of cases where the push order is incorrect when the push order bell is won will gradually increase. It becomes difficult to increase. FIG. 56B (2) shows this state.

In the third embodiment, “AT = advantageous section”.
On the other hand, as in the first embodiment described above, the fourth embodiment described later, etc., it is an advantageous section but a non-AT period (a precursor, CZ, a withdrawal period, a special game, etc. The same shall apply hereinafter). Of course it has.
For example, an advantageous section is started and AT is started after “n” games are executed for the non-AT period.
In this case, at the start of the AT, the advantageous interval has already consumed “n” games.
In this case, when displaying the number of digestion games and the like as shown in FIG. 55, when displaying the number of digestion games in the advantageous section including part or all of the “n” game (example 1), “ The digestion of the “n” game is reflected in an internal counter (such as the upper limit counter shown in FIG. 43 and the like), but the image display is not performed (example 2).
In the case of Example 1, it is a specification that displays the number of digestion games in some or all of the advantageous sections other than AT to the player, and in the case of Example 2, only the number of digestion games of AT is displayed to the player. Become.
Further, in the case of Example 1, a) only the number of digestion games in the advantageous section is displayed (the number of digestion games of AT is not displayed), and b) both the number of digestion games in the advantageous section and the number of digestion games in the AT are displayed. The case of displaying is mentioned.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), when the number of games is less than “500”, the extra lottery probability is high, and when the number of games is “500” or more and less than “1000”, the extra lottery is performed. The probability is a normal probability, and when the number of games is "1000" or more, the lottery probability is a low probability.
Here, similarly to the above, it is assumed that the AT is started after a non-AT period of 600 games after the transition to the advantageous section.
When almost no instruction function operation game is executed from the start of the advantageous section to 600 games, the graph of FIG. 56 is a graph (lower right lowering) in which the acquired number decreases as the number of games is exhausted. Become. Then, when AT starts from 600 games, a graph (upper right corner) in which the number of acquired coins starts increasing at 600 games as a boundary.

  In the above example, since the advantageous section has already consumed 600 games at the start of AT, the maximum remaining number of games in the advantageous section at the start of AT is 900 games. Therefore, when this example is applied to FIG. 56 (b), for example, when the number of AT digestion games is less than “300”, the addition lottery probability is high, and when the number of AT digestion games is “300” or more and less than “600”, the addition lottery is performed. The probability is assumed to be a normal probability, and when the number of AT digestion games is “600” or more, it is added and the lottery probability is set to a low probability.

Furthermore, in the same manner as described above, when an AT is started after a non-AT period of 600 games after the transition to the advantageous section, for example, in “(c) extra lottery” in FIG. If it is more than or equal to (“Yes” in step S451), setting lottery table B may be used.
Here, the specified number is set to “600” when the maximum remaining number of games in the advantageous section at the start of the AT is “900” games as described above, when the number of games is consumed by “2/3”. Is set as a threshold value.
In this way, when the advantageous section is not necessarily AT, for example, when AT is not started at the beginning of the advantageous section and AT is started after a predetermined number of games, an additional expected value (such as an extra lottery probability) is added to the AT game. When changing based on the number of times, it is necessary to make a setting that also takes into account the remaining number of games in the advantageous section.

<Fourth embodiment>
Subsequently, a fourth embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the first embodiment, the main control board 50 includes an external signal transmitting unit 70, and external signals (sometimes referred to as “outer ends”) to the external concentrated terminal board 100. Send. The fourth embodiment is specifically characterized by what kind of external signal is output and at what timing it is turned on / off.
Further, BB in the fourth embodiment is 1BBA, 1BBB, or the like of 1 embodiment, and BB games are 1BBA games, 1BBB games, or the like.

FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating Example 1 (upper stage) and Example 2 (lower stage) of the external signal time chart in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating a third example of the time chart of the external signal.
In the example of FIGS. 57 and 58, an external signal 1 indicating that the BB is in operation (in BB game) and an external signal 2 indicating that the AT is being output are output as external signals. In addition to these external signals, it is possible to provide an external signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, a signal that is turned on when either AT or special game is satisfied). It is.

  In the third embodiment, the AT is started simultaneously with the start of the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is ended simultaneously with the end of the AT. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, even if the advantageous section is started, the AT is not always started immediately. For example, when the AT start condition is satisfied in the advantageous section, the AT is started. However, the point that the advantageous section is ended when the AT ends is the same as in the third embodiment.

In Example 1 of FIG. 57, AT is started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed after starting an advantageous section. When AT is started, the external signal 2 which means AT signal is turned on. It is assumed that BB is won during AT and BB game is started. As the BB game starts, the external signal 1 indicating that the BB game is in progress is turned on. Note that the AT is suspended based on the start of the BB game, and the AT is resumed after the BB game ends. However, the external signal 2 remains on during the BB game.
When the BB game ends, the external signal 1 is turned off. Thereafter, when the AT ends, the external signal 2 is turned off. With the end of AT, the advantageous section is also ended (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off). In this example, the AT and the advantageous section are finished before reaching 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section.
When 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is reached, the advantageous section and the AT are ended even if the game has the remaining number of games at that time.

  In Example 2 of FIG. 57, the AT is started after the lapse of a predetermined number of games after starting the advantageous section, which is the same as Example 1. In addition, the point which shifted to BB game during AT is the same as Example 1. Example 2 is an example in which the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the BB game. For this reason, when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, the BB game has not ended yet. And after progress of the termination conditions of an advantageous area, BB game is complete | finished.

In this case, both the external signal 1 indicating that the BB game is in progress and the external signal 2 indicating that the AT is in progress are kept on until the end of the BB game. Then, with the end of the BB game, the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are turned off. It should be noted that the advantageous section is terminated when the advantageous section termination condition is satisfied, so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is also turned off at the end of the advantageous section. In addition, since AT is executed within the advantageous section, AT is also terminated when the advantageous section ends.
As described above, in Example 2, the AT is terminated when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, but the external signal 2 is an example of turning on even after the end condition of the advantageous section has elapsed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the output of the external signal 2 from being turned off at an unnatural timing.

  As in Example 2, as an example of satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section during the BB game, for example, first, the AT game number is set in advance at the start of the AT, and the game number is in the BB game. Even if it is subtracted. Secondly, there is a case where the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached during the BB game. For example, when AT is started with the number of AT games set to “50” and the BB game is started during the AT, counting of the number of AT games is interrupted. However, the count of the upper limit “1500” game of the advantageous section is continued even during the BB game.

Example 3 shown in FIG. 58 is an example in which AT is started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed after the start of an advantageous section, as in Example 1 of FIG. When the AT is started, the external signal 2 is turned on. In Example 3, it is assumed that BB is not won during the advantageous section (does not shift to BB game).
In addition, the example 3 is an example in which the number of games is added during the AT, and the AT has the remaining number of games even when reaching the 1500 game which is the upper limit of the advantageous section. Even when the number of remaining AT games is reached when 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, are reached, the advantageous section and the AT are ended. Based on this, the external signal 2 is turned off when the 1500 game that is the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

  If a special role is won just before the end of the advantageous section, and the 1500 game of the advantageous section is finished while the special portion is inside, the special portion where the special role is won and transferred, An effect such as “how many times the special game inside” cannot be output. This is because the data related to the advantageous section is reset when 1500 games reach the advantageous section. However, although the actual advantageous section ends, it is possible to output an effect as if the advantageous section (AT) continues even during the special game.

At the end of the advantageous section, the data relating to the advantageous section stored on the main control board 50 side is cleared, but the data relating to the advantageous section stored on the sub control board 80 side (transmitted from the main control board 50). The data stored based on the incoming command) may be cleared or not cleared.
When not clearing, it is also possible to display a numerical value exceeding “1500” for the number of games in the advantageous section during the special game.
Further, when a special role is won at the end of the advantageous section, if an effect such as an ending effect is output, the ending effect may be stopped and the special role may be immediately notified.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Subsequently, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the AT is started or the AT is ended in accordance with the transition of the gaming state (RT or control state). In the fifth embodiment, the following Example 1 and Example 2 will be described.
FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating RT transition in Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 22 of the first embodiment.
In Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, the advantageous section starts simultaneously with the start of the BB game. Therefore, in the figure, the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation are advantageous sections.
Further, both the end of the 1BBA operation and the end of the 1BBB operation shift to non-RT (this point is different from the first embodiment).

  Non-RT maintains an advantageous interval. Further, in non-RT, the replay A alone is not drawn, and the replay C group is drawn (as in RT3 of the first embodiment). When replay group C is won, the instruction function is not activated. Therefore, Replay 01 or Replay 03 wins by the player's operation (luck) of the stop switch 42. When the replay 01 wins, the process shifts to RT5 (RT newly provided in the fifth embodiment), and when the replay 03 wins, the process shifts to RT2.

Note that when the replay group C is won in the non-RT, the instruction function may not be always operated, and the instruction function may be always operated (the order of pushing for winning the replay 01 is displayed). Or you may determine by lottery whether an instruction | indication function is operated at the time of winning of replay C group.
Or, when the transition is made to non-RT based on the end of the 1BBA operation, the instruction function is activated when the replay C group is elected. When the transition is made to non-RT based on the end of the operation of the 1BBB, the instruction function is performed when the replay C group is won. It is good also as not operating.

RT5 is a finite RT and 50 games continue. When 50 games are digested at RT5, the process proceeds to RT2.
In the fifth embodiment, RT5 is executed as an advantageous section and AT is executed. On the other hand, when a transition is made from non-RT or RT5 to RT2, a normal section (non-AT) is set.
For this reason, when Replay 01 wins in non-RT (advantageous section and non-AT), the next game moves to RT5, and the advantageous area and AT (50 games) are executed. And when 50 games are digested, it transfers to RT2 (normal section and non-AT).
On the other hand, when Replay 03 wins in non-RT (advantageous section and non-AT), the next game shifts to RT2 (normal section and non-AT).
In RT2, a lottery with an advantageous section and AT is performed.

FIG. 60 is a time chart showing the relationship between the RT transition and AT. (A) has shown the example which transferred to AT. The example of FIG. 60 shows an example in which 1BB is won at RT2 and the game moves to 1BB game without going through RT4 (inside). When shifting from RT2 to 1BB game, an advantageous section is started. Then, when the 1BB game ends, the process shifts to non-RT, and when the replay 01 wins in this non-RT, the process shifts to RT5. In RT5, an AT of 50 games is executed. When the AT of 50 games is finished, the advantageous section and AT are finished and the process proceeds to RT2.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 5B, the 1BB game is finished and the game is shifted to non-RT, and the replay 03 is won in this non-RT. In this case, it does not shift to RT5 (AT), shifts to RT2, and ends the advantageous section.

FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating Example 2 ((a) to (c)) of the fifth embodiment.
In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the advantageous section and AT start and end are RT (lottery state), or a control state controlled and managed by the main control board 50 (regardless of whether RT is different or the same). In Example 1 of FIG. 60 described above, the advantageous section and AT are started by RT transition, and the advantageous section and AT are ended by RT transition.
On the other hand, in the example 2 of FIG. 61, the advantageous section and the AT are started by the transition of the control state, and further, the advantageous section and the AT are terminated by the transition of the control state.

In FIG. 61, (a) includes control states of states 1 to 3. In this example, state 1 and state 2 are advantageous intervals, and state 3 is a normal interval.
The states 1 to 3 are mainly the states when going back and forth between RT2 and RT3 in the first embodiment (FIG. 22). State 3 is so-called normal, state 2 is a warning or pullback period after the end of AT, and state 1 is AT.

In state 3 (normal), a lottery of an advantageous section is executed. For example, the advantageous section lottery is the same as that shown in the first embodiment. And if it wins an advantageous section in state 3 and shifts to an advantageous section, it will shift to the precursor which is state 2. Therefore, when it shifts to a precursor, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
The precursor corresponds to a preparation period until the AT is started. For example, the number of games of the precursor is determined at the time of transition from the state 3 to the state 2, and the precursor of the state 2 stays until the number of games is consumed. To do. Note that the indication function does not operate during the warning. When the number of games in state 2 (precursor) is digested, the next game shifts to AT in state 1. During state 1 (AT), the indicating function is activated.

State 1 (AT) continues until the end condition of state 1 (AT) is satisfied. The number of games in state 1 (AT) may be fixed, for example, “50”, or may be added as shown in the third embodiment.
When the termination condition of state 1 (AT) is satisfied, the process proceeds to the AT pullback period which is state 2. In the withdrawal period, the maximum number of games is predetermined (for example, “20” games).

When a predetermined condition is satisfied during the period of this state 2 (retraction period) (for example, when winning a rare role or winning an AT lottery executed when winning a rare role, for example), state 1 ( AT). On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the pull-back period which is the state 2, the state 3 is shifted to the normal state. Then, at the same time as the transition to the state 3, the advantageous section is ended, and the transition to the normal section is performed.
As described above, when the normal state in the state 3 is set as the normal section, and the other states 1 and 2 are set as the advantageous sections, and the transition to the advantageous sections, depending on whether or not the transition condition is satisfied, Transition to AT (state 1) or transition to state 2 (AT pullback period).

  In the example of FIG. 61A, an upper limit can be set for the number of AT transitions. For example, when the upper limit number of ATs is set to “5”, the state 1 is shifted to the state 3 without shifting to the AT pullback period (state 2) after the end of the fifth AT. It is also possible to end the AT and the advantageous section.

FIG. 61B has AT, CZ (chance zone), precursor, and normal as control states.
Usually, it is a normal section, and the precursor, CZ, and AT are advantageous sections.
First, during normal times, a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and when winning an advantageous section, the next game is shifted to the advantageous section and a precursor is started. The number of precursors is 32 games at the maximum (the number of games of precursors is determined by lottery). And after digesting the number of games of the precursor, it shifts to CZ. The CZ is executed until the transition condition to the AT is satisfied or the CZ end condition is satisfied. If the conditions for transition to AT are satisfied during CZ, transition to AT is performed. Further, when the CZ end condition is satisfied before the transition condition to the AT is satisfied during CZ, the process shifts to normal.

Specifically, as conditions for shifting to AT during CZ, for example, (a) when winning a transfer lottery according to the winning combination, (b) when winning a transfer lottery performed for each game regardless of the winning combination, (C) When a predetermined specific combination is won, (d) When a predetermined specific combination wins exceeds the specified number, (e) When a specific RT is entered, (f) A predetermined number Various transition conditions according to game play can be defined, such as when a special role is won.
Similarly, the termination conditions for CZ are also (a) if the conditions for transitioning to AT are not met during CZ, (b) if a specific falling combination is won, (c) regardless of the winning combination for each game Various winning conditions according to game play can be defined, for example, when a falling lottery is won.
Furthermore, the transition condition to the AT in the CZ and the termination condition of the CZ mentioned here may be set as conditions opposite to each other.

  AT is executed in the same manner as (a) above. If the AT termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to CZ. The CZ after the end of the AT is positioned in the pull back period (a). If the transition condition to the AT is satisfied again during the CZ, the transition can be made to the AT. However, when the CZ end condition is satisfied without satisfying the transition condition to the AT, the transition is performed normally. At the same time as the transition to normal, the advantageous section is terminated and the transition to the normal section is performed.

Note that the instruction function operation game is executed during the AT in principle. However, since the state 2 in FIG. 61 (a) or the CZ and the precursor in FIG. It is possible to execute an operation game.
In particular, since it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game after the transition to the advantageous section, in the example of FIG. A game won for the role B group may be designated as an instruction function operation game.
Similarly, in the example of FIG. 61 (b), the first winning game in the small role B group within the 32 games of the precursor may be designated as an instruction function operation game.

FIG. 61 (c) is an example having control states of a precursor, CZ, and AT, as in FIG. However, in this example, unlike (b), an example in which the transition to AT was not possible is shown.
As shown in (c) in the figure, when the transition is made from normal to a precursor, the transition to CZ is made after a predetermined number of games (maximum of 32 games). If the transition condition to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, the transition is made to the AT as shown in (b). However, if the CZ end condition is satisfied before satisfying the transition condition to the AT (for example, a predetermined number of games (32 games) ) Digestion) shifts to the withdrawal period. In the pull-back period, the transfer lottery to CZ is performed again, and if the transfer condition to CZ is satisfied before the normal transfer condition (for example, the digestion of a predetermined number of games (32 games) is satisfied), the shift to CZ is performed ( In the figure, (c) shows an example of re-entering CZ (example of successful pullback).

  During the CZ, as described above, the lottery for the transition to the AT is performed. However, when the CZ end condition is satisfied before the condition for the transition to the AT is satisfied, the transition is made again to the withdrawal period. In the example of (c) in the figure, in the second pull-back period, the CZ end condition (for example, digestion of the predetermined number of games (32 games)) is satisfied (for example, the pull-back failure) before the condition for transition to CZ is satisfied. This is an example of normal transition.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the start and end of the advantageous section are controlled with the transition to RT, and AT and the like can be executed freely during the advantageous section.
Alternatively, when a plurality of control states not related to RT are provided, a control state corresponding to normal is set as a normal section, a transition lottery to an advantageous section is performed during this normal period, and a transition lottery to an advantageous section is won. Transition to one of the control states corresponding to the section. Then, in the control state corresponding to the advantageous section, the end condition is set (for example, digestion of a predetermined number of games), and the control state is shifted to another control state corresponding to the advantageous section, or the advantageous section is ended. The control state is shifted to the normal section.

  In the example of FIG. 61, when AT is executed, ART can be executed if AT is executed with RT having a high probability of replay. Therefore, for example, in the case of realizing the example of FIG. 61 in the RT transition of the first embodiment, when the transition condition to the AT is satisfied, the instruction function is activated at the time of replay B group winning in RT2, and the replay 02 is performed. It is possible to display the push order to be displayed and shift to RT3.

In this way, by arbitrarily determining the end condition of the advantageous section, a plurality of control states (precursors, CZ, AT) can be freely designed. Further, not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, it is possible to combine all of them. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a plurality of end conditions in one advantageous section, so that a wider range of game play can be designed.
For example, the example of FIG. 60 (a) shows that the advantageous period ends when the number of games played in RT5 during the advantageous period reaches 50 games.
Further, the example of FIG. 60B shows that the advantageous section is ended by shifting from non-RT to RT2 by displaying replay 03 during non-RT. That is, in the example of FIG. 60, two conditions of “distance of 50 games at RT5” and “transition from non-RT to RT2” are set as conditions for ending advantageous sections. In other words, non-RT is positioned like CZ which is promoted to AT (RT5) or falls to normal (RT2). The big concept is that the advantageous section is terminated when a specific RT transition is triggered.

Furthermore, the example of FIG. 61 shifts the advantageous section and the normal section depending on the control state regardless of which RT is staying.
In the example of FIG. 61A, state 1 and state 2 (precursor or AT pullback period) are advantageous intervals, and state 3 is set as a normal interval. Then, the transition from state 3 to state 1 or state 2 starts the advantageous section, and the transition from state 1 or state 2 to state 3 indicates that the advantageous section ends.
Similarly, in the examples of FIGS. 61B and 61C, the normal state of the control state is the normal section, and the precursor of the control state, CZ, and AT are the advantageous sections. Then, it is shown that the advantageous section starts by shifting from normal to the precursor, CZ, or AT, and the advantageous section ends by moving from the precursor, CZ, or AT to normal.

  As described above, in the example of FIG. 61, when the control state is normal, it is a normal section. However, if the control state is different from the normal state, the advantageous section is executed. However, the AT is not executed for the precursor or CZ even during the advantageous section, and the AT transition condition must be satisfied by the precursor or CZ or the like for the AT to be executed. On the other hand, even if it falls from AT to CZ (FIG. 61 (b)) or falls from CZ to the withdrawal period (precursor) (FIG. 61 (c)), the advantageous section does not end. The advantageous section ends when the control state shifts to normal.

In addition to the examples described in FIGS. 60 and 61, the following examples can be given.
(1) An example in which the first finite RT (20 games) and the second finite RT (60 games) are provided, and the end condition of the advantageous section is set to digest the first finite RT or the second finite RT. For example, a benefit to the player can be provided by setting a case where a transition is made from a non-RT in a favorable section to a first finite RT of 20 games and a case where a transition is made to a second finite RT of 60 games. Can be different.
More specifically, a specific replay is drawn in a non-RT during the advantageous section, and a symbol combination that shifts to the first finite RT or a symbol combination that shifts to the second finite RT is displayed according to the pressing order at the time of winning the specific replay. Let Then, according to the pressing order operated by the player at the time of winning the specific replay, by shifting to the first finite RT of 20 games or the second finite RT of 60 games, it is about 3 It is possible to make the gameability capable of generating a double profit difference.

Further, when the specific replay is won during non-RT, the main control board 50 may notify the player of the pressing order. In that case, considering the winning combination and the game situation before the specific replay winning in the non-RT, there is a specification that determines whether to notify the pushing order of transition to the first finite RT or the second finite RT. It is done. At this time, the winning probability of the specific replay may be either one having a setting difference or one having no setting difference.
Furthermore, the end condition of the advantageous section may be set only for the digestion of the first finite RT, and set so that the advantageous section is not terminated by the digestion of the second finite RT. As a result, when a transition is made from a non-RT to a second finite RT of 60 games, the second finite RT and the non-RT can be obtained by shifting to the non-RT again without ending the advantageous section even after the 60 games are digested. It is possible to play a game that loops.

  In this case, when the transition is made from the non-RT to the first finite RT, the advantageous period ends when the 20-game finite RT is digested, but when the transition is made from the non-RT to the second finite RT, the 60-game finite RT ends. After digesting RT, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to shift from non-RT to second RT again. As described above, it is not possible to add the advantageous section due to the winning of the role having the setting difference in the advantageous section. However, in the case of such a game, there is a case where there is a setting difference in the specific replay. However, there is no problem because it only serves as a transition to a finite RT with a different number of games. In this way, by devising the end condition of the advantageous section, it is possible to add a substantial 20 games or 60 games by a winning combination having a setting difference (transition of 20 games to the first finite RT, or the second game of 60 games) (Transition to finite RT) can be realized.

(2) An example where the end condition of the advantageous section is set to CZ digestion or transition from non-RT to RT1 after the end of the special game. By setting such an end condition of the advantageous section, for example, in the advantageous section A CZ of up to 32 games is executed, and the CZ clearing condition is determined in the special role winning. Then, if 32 games are digested without winning a special role during CZ, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, if the special role is won during CZ, after the special game is finished, the game is shifted to non-RT, and in the non-RT, the specific replay is drawn in the same manner as in the above (1), and the special replay is selected. According to the order, the symbol combination that shifts to RT1 or the symbol combination that shifts to RT2 is displayed.

  Then, “the transition from non-RT to RT1 after the end of the special game” is set as an advantageous section end condition. Therefore, when the specific replay win is made and the process shifts to RT1 in the pressing order, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, when the transition from non-RT to RT2 after the end of the special game, AT is started. Here, according to the control state and the winning combination, it is possible to notify the push order of shifting to RT2 when winning a specific replay that does not have a setting difference. This means that the special combination won during the CZ is not limited to a special combination having no setting difference, and may be a special combination having a setting difference. Gameability that can be given AT substantially by winning special roles regardless of the setting difference during CZ in the advantageous section (specify winning during non-RT after the end of special games) It is possible to realize the notification of the pressing order in which the symbol combination to be transferred to RT2 is displayed by replay.

Furthermore, in the above-described examples (1) and (2), the control state is exemplified using RT, but various control states may be used instead of RT. For example, in the example of (1), two types of finite RTs (the first finite RT and the second finite RT), which are different from the non-RT and the number of games, are adopted. These are the gaming state 1, the gaming state 2, and the gaming It may be replaced with state 3. Here, the gaming state is a control state executed during the advantageous section and is the above-described CZ, AT, etc., but the winning probability of replay does not change like RT.
By this replacement, it is possible to obtain a gaming state 1 in which the instruction function does not operate in the advantageous section, a gaming state 2 in 20 games in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section, and a 60 gaming state 3 in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section. . In addition, as with RT, there are no restrictions on the transition conditions (for example, specific symbol combinations are displayed, special role winning, special role winning, special game termination, game number of times, etc.), so various conditions can be freely set. Can be set to
Specifically, taking the above (1) as an example, in the gaming state 1 in the advantageous section, conditions such as “win a bell five times within 20 games” or “make a bell win three consecutive games” It is also possible to design so as to shift to the gaming state 2 when achieving the above.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the sixth embodiment, when the advantageous section and the upper limit of 1500 games are approached during the advantageous section and AT, the advantageous section is terminated before reaching the upper limit of 1500 games, and after the advantageous section ends, it is relatively advantageous. By providing a situation where it is easy to win a section and an AT, an advantageous section that does not reach the upper limit number of games and an AT can be repeatedly executed. As a result, it becomes possible to create an advantageous section that is executed up to the upper limit of 1500 games and a more advantageous state than the AT.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing RT transition in the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 22 of the first embodiment. The RT transition diagram of the sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it has RT6. RT6 is a finite RT and ends with the digestion of 50 games.
RT6 can be migrated only from RT3. Furthermore, after RT6 ends, the process shifts to non-RT.

  In the sixth embodiment, in any RT except the inside (RT4), the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is performed during the normal section. Further, the transition lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section is executed regardless of the winning of the condition device. That is, the lottery of the advantageous section is executed without being linked to the winning of the condition device having no setting difference. The winning probability is “1/32” common to all RTs.

  Also, after the end of 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation, it has the right to execute AT. After the operation of 1BBA is completed, the process shifts to non-RT, and after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process proceeds to RT1. If a pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT or RT1, the process proceeds to RT2. After that, it goes back and forth between RT2 and RT3 (here, it is assumed that a rare case in which RT3 is accidentally shifted to RT6 is not considered).

  In the above, in the non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, since the lottery to the advantageous section is executed with the winning probability of “1/32”, when the lottery to the advantageous section is won, 1BBA operation or 1BBB Under the circumstances where the AT has the right to execute based on the operation, the advantageous section and the AT are started. Since AT can be executed on the condition that it is an advantageous section (because it is necessary to activate the instruction function), it is advantageous even if the operation shifts to non-RT or RT1 after the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB, respectively. Before winning the section, the AT will not start even if you have AT rights.

  When the advantageous section and AT is started in the non-RT or RT1, the instruction function is not activated when the small role B group is won until the pattern symbol is displayed. This is because the pattern symbols are displayed so as to shift to RT2 as early as possible. When the small role C group is won, the instruction function is activated. After the transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, the instruction function is activated in both the small role B group and the small role C group winning. In addition, when the replay group B is won in RT2, the instruction function is operated so as to shift to RT3. In this way, the AT is executed until the AT termination condition is satisfied.

In the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, a replay D group is drawn in place of the replay C group in RT3. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of replay group D to be selected in RT3, the winning combination, and the pressing order and the display combination, and corresponds to FIG. 13 of the first embodiment.
The replay group D includes replays D1 to D3, and the replays D1 to D3 include a replay 01, a replay 03, and a replay 06, respectively.
If one of the replay groups D is won, replay 01 wins in one push order, replay 03 wins in another push order, and replay 06 takes place in another push order. Is set to win.

Here, RT3 is maintained when replay 01 is displayed in RT3, and falls to RT2 when replay 02 is displayed, similar to the replay C group of the first embodiment. On the other hand, when Replay 06 wins at RT3, the process proceeds to RT6 (see FIG. 62).
In the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, lottery of the replay 06 is not performed during the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation. In the sixth embodiment, the replay 06 is included only in the replay D group.

In the sixth embodiment, if the player stays at RT3 and is in the advantageous section and AT, and the number of games in the advantageous section is less than “1400”, and wins the replay D group, the replay 01 is won. The pushing order to be held, that is, the pushing order for maintaining RT3 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.
On the other hand, when staying at RT3 and in the advantageous section and AT, when the number of digestion games in the advantageous section becomes "1400" or more, that is, when the advantageous section remains "100" games or less In the game where the subsequent replay D group is won, the push order for winning the replay 06 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.

Thereby, since the replay 06 wins in the game, the game shifts to RT6 from the next game. The transition from RT3 to RT6 is set to an advantageous section and an AT end condition. For this reason, the advantageous section and the AT are terminated with the transition to RT6.
As described above, since the replay D group is a replay overlap winning with the possibility of shifting RT, it is desirable that there is no setting difference (of course, there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the replay D group. Does not prevent it).

RT6 is a finite RT and 50 games are executed. When 50 games are consumed in RT6, it is determined that the end condition of RT6 is satisfied, and the process shifts to non-RT.
In addition, as described above, in RT6, as in other RTs, an advantageous section is drawn with a winning probability of “1/32”. When the advantageous section is won at RT6, the right to execute AT is granted. In other words, when the number of games in the advantageous section becomes “1400” or more in RT3 and the game moves to RT6, the advantageous section and AT are terminated, and “the winning of the advantageous section lottery in RT6” is executed (resumed). ) The condition is set.
In RT6, since the winning probability of the advantageous section is “1/32” and the number of games is “50”, the probability of winning the advantageous section during RT6 is about 79.6%.

  When an advantageous section is won at RT6, it becomes an advantageous section from the next game, and the execution condition of AT is satisfied. In this case, the AT may start at any time. For example, the AT may be started during the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, that is, while staying at RT6. Alternatively, it may be started from non-RT when transitioning to non-RT, or AT may be started after transitioning from non-RT to RT2. Here, for simplification of explanation, it is assumed that the AT is started from the next game of the game won in the advantageous section.

  In RT6, if the advantageous section and the AT are started simultaneously from the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, the AT can be continued up to the limit of 1500 games which is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. Can do. Even in the control state such as precursors and CZs performed during the advantageous section, 1500 games in the advantageous section are counted, so AT is compared with the game performance in which AT is performed via such control state. It is possible to execute for a long time.

  When RT6 ends, the process shifts to non-RT. Non-RT continues until the pattern symbol is displayed. And if a pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT, it will transfer to RT2. When the advantageous section lottery is won at RT6, the instruction function is operated when the replay group B is won at RT2, and the push order to shift to RT3 is displayed.

Then, when the AT is won at RT6, the AT is executed while maintaining RT3 when shifting to RT3. AT is executed up to a predetermined number of games. When the AT is completed a predetermined number of games, the AT is terminated and the advantageous section is terminated, and the next game is shifted to the normal section.
Note that the number of AT games is determined at the time of AT winning, and the number of games is added by the above-described addition during AT execution. Then, during the execution of AT, when the advantage section becomes 1400 games or more after the start of the advantageous section, the process shifts to RT6 as described above.

  On the other hand, during the normal section, the advantageous section lottery is also performed at the winning probability of “1/32” at RT2 and RT3. That is, in the sixth embodiment, even when staying at any RT except RT4, the advantageous section lottery is performed with a probability of “1/32”, and when the advantageous section lottery is won, the advantageous section from the next game is played. Migrate to

In RT2 and RT3, when only transitioning to the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated at the time of the first small role B group winning. As a result, since the condition that allows the advantageous section of “execution of at least one instruction function operation game” to be completed is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated in the game, and the next game is shifted to the normal section.
Therefore, in RT2 or RT3 (normal section) that does not go through 1BBA game or 1BBB game, the advantageous section is drawn with the winning probability of “1/32”, and when the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section is started from the next game, and the advantageous section When the instruction function operation game is executed once in the section (when the small role B group is selected), the transition to the normal section from the next game is repeated.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a transition is made to the advantageous section, a predetermined number of games (for example, 32 games) may be continued, and the transition to the normal section may be made after the predetermined number of games has been consumed. In this case, it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game in a predetermined number of games.

In addition, AT lottery is separately executed in RT2 and RT3 (so-called normal). And when this AT lottery is won, he has the right to execute AT. For example, when winning the small role E1 shown in the first embodiment, it is possible to have an AT execution right. Alternatively, when the small role E1 is won, whether or not to grant the AT execution right may be determined by lottery, and when winning by the lottery, the AT execution right may be granted.
The AT game count is initially set to an initial value, and thereafter, as shown in the third embodiment, an extra lottery is performed and the game count is added.

Further, if the game won for the AT is an advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT can be started from the next game. Note that the AT may be started from the next game of the game won by the AT, or as shown in the fifth embodiment, the AT may be started after passing through the precursor or the CZ. After the AT is started, the AT is executed while staying at RT3 (ART) in the same manner as described above. If the AT continues even after 1400 games have been played since the transition to the advantageous section, the transition is made to RT6 as described above.
On the other hand, if the game won by the AT is a normal section, the player waits for winning an advantageous section while having the AT execution right. And if it wins an advantageous area, AT will be performed after that.

In addition, when the AT lottery is performed as described above during the stay of RT2 or RT3, it is possible to set the AT start condition to pass through RT6.
Therefore, in RT2 and RT3, the “right to execute AT” is granted based on winning of the small role E1 and the like. When this right is won, if it is not an advantageous section, it waits to win an advantageous section. The push order to move to RT3 when winning is displayed. Furthermore, when it is RT3, the push order which transfers to RT6 at the time of replay D group winning is displayed. When the process proceeds to RT6, the advantageous section ends as described above. Then, when an advantageous section is won among 50 games of RT6, the AT start condition is satisfied. The flow after the AT start condition is satisfied in RT6 is the same as described above.

  The advantageous section lottery is not limited to the above, and a special combination having a winning probability of “1/32” may be drawn in all RTs, and the advantageous division may be started based on winning the specific combination. . Note that the specific combination in this case is a combination having no setting difference as described in the first embodiment.

When the above sixth embodiment is arranged again, it has the following features (including effects).
(1) Before reaching the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is intentionally terminated and the advantageous section is redrawn, so that the 1500 games that are the upper limit of the advantageous section are effectively increased. Beyond that, it becomes possible to execute the advantageous section. For example, a game such as “advantageous section (1200 games) → non-advantageous section (50 games) → advantageous section (1200 games)” becomes possible.
In particular, since the transition to RT6 (finite RT) is set as the end condition of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends when the transition is made from RT3 to RT6, but during the RT6 50 games, the replay winning probability is A highly advantageous state can be maintained.
(2) In addition, during normal times, each game has a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section with a winning probability of “1/32”. In particular, as an opportunity to move to the advantageous section, a transition opportunity that does not have a setting difference is necessary. However, in both RT6 and normal time, the lottery to move to the advantageous section always with a winning probability of “1/32” It is possible to realize it.

Furthermore, depending on the design, it is possible to set “AT start = start of advantageous section” as in the third embodiment. Therefore, 1500 games that are the maximum number of games in the advantageous section are fully used, for example, 1500 games. The AT can be realized (except when the AT is started when the special role is elected).
(3) At the time of shifting to an advantageous section, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute AT with reference to the RT being executed. The winning lottery is drawn with the winning probability of each game “1/32”, but when winning the winning lottery, refer to the RT (RT6 or not) that was staying at that win. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute AT when shifting to the advantageous section.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment, as a result of adding the number of games during the AT, even when the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”, the player is benefited. As the number of times that the number of games exceeds “1500” is increased, the player is more advantageous.

The seventh embodiment includes a “greater than 1500 counter” that counts the number of times that the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500” due to the addition during the AT. At an advantageous interval and at the start of AT, the counter value exceeding 1500 is “0”.
In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (example 2) of the third embodiment, when the total number of games of AT exceeds “1500” as a result of the extra lottery, the determined extra number is displayed. It shall be cleared without adding.

  Accordingly, when the total number of games of the AT is “1500” or less, the counter exceeding 1500 remains “0”. Here, for example, if it is determined in step S451 in FIG. 44B that the added number exceeds the specified number, “over 1500 counter” is changed from “0” to “1”. Similarly, in step S451 of FIG. 44B, if it is determined that the added number exceeds the specified number, “over 1500 counter” is changed from “1” to “2”. In this way, the counter exceeding 1500 is incremented every time the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, after the advantageous section and AT is started, the game at the time of winning the first small role B group wins the instruction function. After that, when the counter exceeding 1500 is “0”, that is, when the total number of games of the AT has not exceeded “1500” by lottery, the instruction function is activated when winning the small role B group. Determine whether or not by lottery.
Here, the ratio of operating the instruction function when winning the small role B group is referred to as “instruction function operation rate”.

  The instruction function activation rate when the counter exceeding 1500 is “0” is set to “95%”. Therefore, during the advantageous section and AT, when the small role B group is won, for example, a lottery (lottery to win at 95%) of whether to operate the instruction function is performed. Thereby, the instruction function is activated with a probability of 95%, and the instruction function is not activated with a probability of 5%. Assuming that the winning rate of the small role B group when the instruction function is activated is 100% and that the winning rate of the small role B group when the instruction function is not activated is “1/3”, the instruction function operating rate is 95%. The winning rate of the small role B group at is about 96.7%.

  Next, it is assumed that the total number of AT games exceeds “1500” as a result of the addition during the AT. It is assumed that the counter exceeding 1500 becomes “1”. Here, the instruction function operating rate when the counter exceeding 1500 is “1” is set to “97.5%”. Accordingly, during the advantageous section and AT, when the small role B group is selected, the instruction function is activated with a probability of 97.5%, and the instruction function is not activated with a probability of 2.5%.

Thereafter, as a result of further addition, when the total number of AT games exceeds “1500” once again, the counter exceeding 1500 becomes “2”. In this case, the instruction function operating rate is set to “98.75%”. Therefore, during the advantageous section and AT, when the small role B group is selected, the instruction function is activated with a probability of 98.75%, and the instruction function is not activated with a probability of 1.25%.
As described above, the instruction function operation rate = “95”, “97.5”, “98.75” with respect to the counter value exceeding 1500 = “0”, “1”, “2”,. It is determined that ...

  If the setting is made as described above, the instruction function operating rate approaches 100% as much as the total number of AT games exceeds “1500”, that is, the counter value exceeding 1500 increases. Here, even if the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”, the upper limit of the advantageous section is actually “1500”, so it can be said that the games exceeding “1500” cannot be executed. It is. However, according to the seventh embodiment, when the AT total number of games exceeds “1500”, it is more advantageous to the player than before the addition (expected number of games to be acquired) It is possible to set so as to increase the value.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the eighth embodiment, BB wins that do not have a setting difference in winning probabilities (1BBA single win, 1BBA and small role D overlapping win, 1BBA and small role E1 overlapping, taking the first embodiment as an example) When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on (winning), the advantageous section is started after that. In addition, there is a case where AT is started after the end of the BB game.
Further, examples of the end of the advantageous section can include the following Examples 1 to 5.
(1) An example where the advantageous section ends before the end of 1BB game (example 1)
(2) An example where the advantageous section ends at the end of 1BB game (example 2)
(3) An example where the advantageous period does not end at the end of 1BB game and AT starts after the end of 1BB game, and the advantageous period also ends at the end of AT (example 3)
(4) An example where the advantageous period does not end when the 1BB game ends and the advantageous period ends after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) have elapsed since the end of the 1BB game (example 4)
(5) An example in which the advantageous period does not end at the end of 1BB game, and AT starts after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) after the end of 1BB game, and the advantageous period also ends at the end of AT (Example 5)
Then, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, it is simultaneously determined which of the first to fifth examples ends the advantageous section. Of course, it does not have to be determined from the five examples 1 to 5, but may be determined from the three examples 1 to 3, for example, or may be determined from the two examples 2 and 3. May be.

64 to 66 are time charts showing Examples 1 to 5 described above.
In Example 1 of FIG. 64, after winning 1BBA, an advantageous section is started from the start of 1BBA game (when 1BBA is activated). The start timing of this advantageous section is at the start of the 1BBA game, but as described in the first embodiment, the next game of the game won by 1BBA from the start of the next game of the game won by 1BBA ( The advantageous section may be started at any timing as long as it is until the start of the first game of the 1BBA game. Further, as described in the first embodiment, when starting an advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
In addition, the advantageous section is started simultaneously with the start of the 1BBA game, but since the 1BBA is being operated, the AT has not started (in the first example, the AT is not started during the advantageous section).

In Example 1, before the end of the 1BBA game, for example, at the end of the previous game of the final game of the 1BBA game, or at the start of the final game of the 1BBA game, the advantageous section is ended.
Furthermore, in this example 1, the output of continuous production is started from the middle of the 1BBA game. As in the first embodiment, the continuous production is a series of productions over a plurality of games (production that raises the expectation whether or not AT will be executed after the end of the 1BBA game), and at the end of the continuous production, An effect that informs the player whether or not to start the AT after the end of the 1BBA game is output. Further, the advantageous section ends with the end of the continuous performance.

Therefore, in Example 1, in the middle of the last game of the 1BBA game or in the previous game, the continuous performance is ended (finally, notification that AT is not started), and at the end of the game where the continuous performance is ended or continuously When the production ends, the advantageous section ends. In Example 1, the advantageous section is ended before the end of the 1BBA game, and the AT is not started after the end of the 1BBA game.
However, at the start of 1BBA game, even if it was decided to end the advantageous section before the end of 1BBA game, a rare role (for example, small role D) was won during 1BBA game, etc. If an advantageous section extension condition (also referred to as an advantageous section change condition; the same applies hereinafter) is satisfied, the advantageous section is not terminated before the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section may be continued after the end of the 1BBA game. Good. Of course, the AT may be started after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the end of the advantageous section can be changed from Example 1 to Example 3.

  Example 2 in FIG. 64 is an example in which the end of the 1BBA game and the end of the advantageous section are matched. In this example 2, as in example 1, the continuous production starts from the middle of the 1BBA game, and at the end of the game of the last game of the 1BBA game (the last stop switch 42 may be operated, etc.), the 1BBA game It is notified whether or not the AT game is to be started after the end of. In Example 2, since the advantageous section ends simultaneously with the end of the 1BBA game, the AT is not started after the end of the 1BBA game. Therefore, at the end of the continuous performance, a notification that AT is not started is notified.

In addition, as in Example 1 and Example 2, when the advantageous section ends by the end of the special game (1BBA game), the advantageous section is ended even if the instruction function operation game is not performed once. Making it possible. This is because during the special game (1BBA game), a large number of medals have already been acquired, and it is not necessary to extend the end of the advantageous section only for one instruction function operation game. Rather, it may increase player dissatisfaction.
Similarly to Example 1, when the 1BBA game is started, even when it is determined to end the advantageous section at the end of the 1BBA game, when the advantageous section extension condition is satisfied during the 1BBA game ( For example, when a rare combination is won), the advantageous section may not be ended at the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section may be continued after the end of the 1BBA game. Of course, the AT may be started after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the end of the advantageous section may be changed from Example 2 to Example 3.

In Example 3 of FIG. 65, as in Example 2, the continuous performance starts from the middle of the 1BBA game. Example 3 is an example in which AT is started after the end of 1BBA game. In this case, at the end of the game of the last game of the 1BBA game (may be when the last stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), the fact that the AT is started after the end of the 1BBA game is notified. Then, the AT is started from the next game of the last game of the 1BBA game. Of course, it is not necessary to start the AT immediately after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the AT may be started from a game that has transitioned to RT3, a next game that has transitioned to RT3, or a next game that has won one of the replay B groups. In this case, it is preferable to activate at least the instruction function for shifting to RT3 even before starting AT.
Note that the AT ends when an AT end condition is satisfied, such as digestion of a predetermined number of games, and the advantageous section ends simultaneously when the AT ends. However, even after the AT is finished, the advantageous section may be continued thereafter.

  It is not known at the start of 1BBA game whether the above example 1 or example 2 or example 3 is started, but at the start of 1BBA game, since the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section. When determined, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at the start of the 1BBA game (determined to shift to the advantageous section) or not lit (advantageous section), as was always made in Example 3. It is possible to increase the player's expectation even during the 1BBA game.

  Example 4 in FIG. 66 continues the advantageous section even after the end of the 1BBA game, and starts a continuous performance after the end of the 1BBA game. In the continuous performance, whether or not the AT is started from now on (the advantageous section continues) This is an example of notifying whether or not to do. After the end of the 1BBA game, a continuous effect is started, and Example 4 shows an example in which five continuous effects are performed. Of course, any number of games may be performed for the continuous performance. And it is alert | reported whether AT will be started by the last game of a continuous production. Example 4 shows an example in which AT is not started. The advantageous section ends with the game at the end of the continuous performance. Of course, the continuous performance may be started from the next game after the end of the 1BBA game, or may be started from one game after another.

As described above, in Example 4, the advantageous interval is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous interval is executed for 5 games during the normal game (the game after the end of the 1BBA game).
On the other hand, as described above, it is necessary to “execute at least one instruction function operation game during the advantageous section”.
Here, based on the winning of the BB, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and in the case where the advantageous section is started simultaneously with the start of the BB game (not necessarily at the same time), the end of the BB game is ended. Later, when ending an advantageous section in several games, the following control may be considered.

(1) If the small group B is never won in 5 games, the advantageous section is ended without executing the instruction function operation game once.
(2) When the small role B group is won in 5 games, the designated function operation game is executed in the game.
(3) Even when the small role group B is won for 5 games, the advantageous section is ended without executing the instruction function operation game.
(4) If you have never won the small role B group among 5 games, you will be extended until you win the first small role B group, and you will be instructed when you first win the small role B group A function-operated game is executed, and the advantageous section is terminated in the game.
Any control among the above may be used.
As described above, since it is necessary to “execute at least one instruction function operation game during the advantageous section”, the control of (1) to (3) may seem unfavorable. In this way, when a BB game is being played during an advantageous section, since many medals have already been acquired during the BB game, the end of the advantageous section can be terminated only for one instruction function operation game. This is because there is no need to extend it. Rather, it may increase player dissatisfaction.
In Example 4 of FIG. 66, a case where an instruction is given (execution of an instruction function operation game) is indicated between two games by a two-dot chain line.

In Example 5 of FIG. 66, similarly to Example 4, the advantageous section continues after the end of the 1BBA game, and after the end of the 1BBA game, the continuous effect is started, and whether or not the AT is started with the continuous effect is determined. This is an example of notification. In Example 5, the fact that the AT is to be started is notified in the final game of the continuous performance. Then, the AT is started from the next game. When the AT ends, the advantageous section also ends. Of course, it is not necessary to start AT from the next game. For example, the AT may be started from a game that has transitioned to RT3, a next game that has transitioned to RT3, or a next game that has won one of the replay B groups. In this case, it is preferable to activate at least the instruction function for shifting to RT3 even before starting AT.
It is not known at the start of the 1BBA game whether it is the above example 4 or 5, but at the start of the 1BBA game, since the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, both during the 1BBA game and after the end of the 1BB game It is possible to beat the player's expectation.

In the eighth embodiment, whether or not to execute AT (Examples 1 to 5), and the initial number of games of AT are before the start of 1BBA game (for example, when 1BBA is won) or the start of 1BBA game Sometimes it may be decided by lottery or the like, or it may be decided whether or not to execute AT based on the condition device won during the 1BBA game. For example, when 1BBA is won, it is decided to be Example 1, 2 or 4 and based on the condition device won during 1BBA game, it is decided whether to change to Example 3 or 5 . For example, when “1BBA + small role E1” in the first embodiment is won, AT determination may be made (example 3 or example 5).
Further, based on the conditions satisfied during the 1BBA game, whether or not to execute AT and the initial number of games of AT may be determined. After deciding to execute the AT (in the case of Example 3 or Example 5), the number of games played by the AT may be added during the 1BBA game or during the AT based on the winning of the condition device.
Furthermore, it was determined as in Example 4 at the start of the 1BBA game, but when the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the 1BBA game or during the continuous performance period of 5 games after the end of the 1BBA game (for example, You may change to Example 5 (performing AT) at the time of winning a rare role.

At the start of the 1BBA game, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the AT is executed after the end of the 1BBA game. In this case, whether or not AT is executed after the end of the 1BBA game is determined depending on whether or not the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the 1BBA game.
When determining whether or not to execute AT after the end of the 1BBA game during the 1BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is set at the end of the 1BBA game as in Example 2 of FIG. When it is determined that the AT is executed during the 1BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is extended (changed), and the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game, and the AT is executed.

<Ninth Embodiment>
The ninth embodiment defines when to start an advantageous section (timing to start the advantageous section) when starting an advantageous section based on the winning of a condition device including a special role (for example, 1BBA). In particular, it is characterized in that an advantageous section is started from a game in which the winning special role can be won.
In the ninth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the condition unit including the special role (1BBA) is won, and the advantageous section is started based on the decision to move to the advantageous section. Here, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the condition device including the special role is won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the betable state and the checkable state are set in the next game of the won game. The betting is possible in the next game of the game in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination stops (or the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination stops) The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until it becomes ready to be settled and ready to be settled.

Also, the advantageous section starts when the next game of the game won by the condition device including the special role (when the start switch 41 is operated) or when the first game of the special game (for example, 1BBA game) starts ( (When the start switch 41 was operated). Therefore, in the latter case, when the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special role, the start timing varies.
The ninth embodiment is characterized in that when the condition device including the special combination is won and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section starts from the game in which the special combination can be won. To do.

Therefore, for example, in the first embodiment, when 1BBA is elected alone, 1BBA can be won in the game, so an advantageous section starts from the game.
On the other hand, when “1BBA + small role E1” is won, the winning combination of the small role E1 is prioritized in the game, and the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA cannot be stopped. do not do. In particular, in the first embodiment, in the game won “1BBA + small role E1”, the winning of the small role E1 has priority over 1BBA, and the small role E1 is “PB = 1”. 1BBA will not win. The 1BBA won in the game is carried over to the next game.

  Furthermore, when “1 BBA + small role D” is won, the winning of the small role D is given priority in the game, but the small role 35 (watermelon) corresponding to the small role D is “PB ≠ 1”. Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the symbol ("Watermelon") relating to the small role 35 cannot be stopped and at a timing at which the symbol ("Red 7") relating to 1BBA can be stopped, Winning is possible. For example, in FIG. 5, the middle first switch is operated, and the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the third “red 7” can be stopped on the active line.

However, when the stop switch 42 is operated at a position where both the symbols of 1BBA and the small role 35 can be stopped, priority is given to stopping the symbols related to the small role 35. For example, it is the case where the right stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which both the second “red 7” and the fifth “watermelon” can be stopped on the active line in the right first stop.
On the other hand, even if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the “red 7” of No. 7 can be stopped on the active line at the time of the first stop at the left, the “watermelon” of No. 4 or 9 is stopped on the active line. Therefore, No. 7 “Red 7” does not stop at the active line.
For this reason, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the above-described timing, stop control that does not substantially stop No. 7 “Red 7” on the active line is executed. Thereby, the game at the time of winning “1BBA + small role D” in the first embodiment is set so as not to correspond to “a game that can win 1BBA”. Of course, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the middle first stop and the third “red 7” can be stopped on the active line, 1BBA can be won in the game, so “1BBA It is good also as a game which can win a prize.

  In the case where the condition device including the special role is elected and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the game does not fall into a game that can win the special role, in the lottery of the condition device in the next game, for example, When it is not won, a special role carrying over the winning can be won, so an advantageous section is started from the game. In the above example, the condition device lottery is performed when the start switch 41 is operated in the next game and is not won, so the advantageous section immediately after the start switch 41 is operated and the condition device lottery is performed. (At the same time or immediately before that, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit).

On the other hand, in the next game, for example, a small role or replay is won, and the winning of the small role or replay won in the game is given priority. As a result, in the game where the special role cannot be won, the advantageous section is not started.
Also, for example, in a game in which a special role is carried over, in a game in which a small role with “PB ≠ 1” is won and the special role cannot be won, As in the case of winning the “1BBA + small role D” described above, the advantageous section is not started in the game. Of course, in a game in which a special combination that has won the prize can be won, an advantageous section may be started in the game.

FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the flow of games in the ninth embodiment. In the example of FIG. 67, “1BBA + small role E1” is won in the “N” game, and 1BBA wins in the “N + 3” game.
First, when “1BBA + small role E1” is won in the “N” game, only the small role E1 can win a prize in the game, and 1BBA cannot win a prize.

  Next, after the “N + 1” game, 1BBA has been won. In the “N + 1” game, an example of winning Replay A is shown. When Replay A is won, Replay 01 wins with “PB = 1”, and 1 BBA overtaking the winning cannot be won, so the advantageous section is not started in the game.

  Next, in the “N + 2” game, an example is shown in which the winning lottery by the winning lottery means 61 is not won. Therefore, in the game, 1BBA carrying over the winning can be awarded. Therefore, the advantageous section starts from the “N + 2” game. Here, at the start of the “N + 2” game, that is, based on the fact that the start switch 41 is operated and the condition device lottery is performed, so that it is not won (1BBA can be won). Since the section is started, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 is also started when the start switch 41 is operated.

  A player who has won 1 BBA in the “N + 2” game can eliminate useless use of the number of games in the advantageous section. As described above, the player who won 1BBA in the “N + 2” game is an internal game that cannot be added (including whether or not to execute AT in the eighth embodiment) It is not necessary to start an advantageous section. Further, as described above, the upper limit game number (for example, 1500 games) is set for the advantageous section, and if the advantageous section starts in the internal middle game, the maximum advantageous that can be executed after the end of the 1BBA game. The number of games in the section is reduced by the amount consumed in the internal medium game. For example, if 10 games were played in the internal game, 1 game was won in 1BBA game, and 16 games were played in 1BBA game, the game after the end of 1BBA game is limited to a maximum of 1473 games. I can't do it.

  However, the player who won 1BBA in the “N + 2” game has no amount of spending in the internal game (0 games in the internal game, 1 game in the game in which 1BBA was won, 1 game in the 1BBA game) In the game after the end of the 1BBA game, a maximum of 1483 games can also be played in the advantageous section), so than the player who could not win 1BBA in the “N + 2” game May be advantageous. On the other hand, the player who could not win 1BBA in the “N + 2” game will continue the game in the inside while starting the advantageous section. The example of FIG. 67 shows an example where 1 BBA could not be won in the “N + 2” game.

  Further, in the case of the “N + 3” game, as in the case of the “N + 2” game, an example is shown in which the winning lottery by the winning lottery means 61 is not won. Therefore, in the game, 1BBA carrying over the winning can be awarded. The example shows that 1 BBA can be won in the “N + 3” game. Thereby, the 1BBA game is started from the “N + 4” game.

Here, for example, if the setting is made so that the advantageous section starts at the beginning of the 1BBA game, the number of games varies depending on the player's main skill from the time of winning the 1BBA until winning (the consumption of medals). However, there is no difference in the length of the advantageous section after the end of the 1BBA game.
On the other hand, by setting as in the ninth embodiment, the player's skill (whether or not he / she notices the winning of the special role or knows that the special role is won, becomes a special role without any mistakes. Depending on whether or not the corresponding symbol combination can be stopped on the active line, the number of games in the advantageous section that is wasted changes.

For example, if the special role can be won in the first game in which the special role can be won, after the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section is not wasted in the internal middle game.
On the other hand, in the first game where the special role can be won, if the special role cannot be won due to failure to push, etc., the game will be able to win the special role again after the next game. It is necessary to wait until. However, since the advantageous section starts from the first game in which the special combination can be won, the advantageous section is also consumed in the meantime.
In this way, the substantial number of games in the advantageous section (the number of games after the end of the special game) can be varied according to the skill of the player.

As modifications of the ninth embodiment, for example, the following examples are given.
(Modification 1)
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role (or when it shifts to the waiting section), the number of games until the transition to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. And, when the game that digests the number of games, the next game, or the special game starts (the next game of the game where the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped), whichever comes first, shifts to the advantageous section .
(Modification 2)
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role (or when it shifts to the waiting section), the number of games until the transition to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. Then, the game moves to the advantageous section in the earlier one of the game in which the number of games has been digested or the next game, or the first game in which the winning special role can be won.

(Modification 3)
Even when the advantageous section is started from the first game in which the selected special combination can be won, the end condition of the advantageous section may not be affected.
For example, it is assumed that an advantageous section in which an AT of 50 games is executed after the special game is won based on the winning of the special role. In this case, with respect to the AT of 50 games after the end of the special game, 50 games are counted simultaneously with the start of the AT. Therefore, even if the advantageous period starts from the first game in which the selected special combination can be won, the AT 50 games start counting simultaneously with the start of AT after the end of the special game. On the other hand, the “1500” game, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is counted from the first game in which the selected special combination can be won. In this way, as the number of games in the advantageous section approaches 1500 games (as the number of AT games is increased, etc.), the game is affected by the skill of the player.

(Modification 4)
In the ninth embodiment, when a conditional device including a special combination is won and it is determined to shift to an advantageous section, the advantageous section starts from a game in which the special combination can be won, The advantageous section may be started from the next game of the game in which the special role can be won (the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit until the next game can bet and settle. ). In this way, when the special role is won in the first game where the special role can be won, the game that won the special role is not counted as a game in the advantageous section. May be more advantageous than a non-skilled player.

  In the ninth embodiment, a game won in a condition device (for example, 1BBA + small role E1) including a special role (1BBA), or a continuous performance (special role (over 3 games) from the next game to multiple games (for example, 3 games). (1BBA) is an effect that tells whether or not it has been won, and an effect indicating that the special game (1BBA) has been won in the last game) may be output. Of course, a game won in a conditional device (for example, small role E1) that does not include a special role (1BBA), or a continuous performance (special role (1BBA)) from the next game to multiple games (for example, 3 games) is won. It is necessary to output an effect that indicates whether or not a special role (1BBA) is not won in the last game).

  And, when a continuous production is output (especially before the production showing that the special role (1BBA) is won, for example, 2 games when a continuous production over 3 games is output from the next game) When 1BBA can be won in the eye (that is, “N + 2” game)), it becomes clear that the player has won 1BBA by turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 for that game. Therefore, instead of this continuous effect, an effect indicating that 1 BBA has been won may be output. When it is the last game of the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be output as it is, or an effect indicating that 1BBA has been won may be output instead of the continuous effect.

  Alternatively, during a plurality of games in which continuous effects are output, even if 1 BBA can be won, the advantageous section may not be started and the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be lit. Specifically, a game that has won a conditional device (for example, 1 BBA + small role E1) including a special role (1BBA), or a predetermined number of games from the next game (the number of games equal to or greater than the number of games for which a continuous effect is output) During this period, even if the special role (1BBA) can win, the advantageous section is not started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on), but after the predetermined number of games, the special role (1BBA) can be won first. From this point on, an advantageous section may be started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is also lit).

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the tenth embodiment, when 1BBA is won during AT execution (that is, during an advantageous section) and the game shifts to 1BBA game, the game shifts from RT2 to RT3 (returns to AT) after the completion of the 1BBA game. Sometimes, it is possible to add the number of AT games (that is, the number of games in the advantageous section).
In the tenth embodiment, the RT transition diagram is the same as in the first embodiment (FIG. 22).
Here, when the AT is executed at RT3 (for example, when it is decided to shift to the AT of 100 games (ie, advantageous section) at the time of winning the small role E1 and the AT is executed), Assume that 1BBA has been won (either 1BBA single win or 1BBA and double win E1). When 1BBA is won, if 1BBA is not won in the game, the process proceeds to RT4 (inside). And when 1BBA wins, it shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game). When the end condition of 1BBA operation (1BBA game) is satisfied, the process shifts to non-RT.

  When the 1BBA game is finished and the game is shifted to non-RT, the AT is restarted from that point, or the AT is being prepared (for example, any of the game that has shifted to RT3, the next game of the game that has shifted to RT3, or the replay B group) The AT is resumed from the next game of the game that won the crab, etc. Therefore, it is preferable to activate at least the instruction function for shifting to RT3 even during the AT preparation even before the AT is started. Of course, it is an advantageous section even during AT preparation.) When the AT is set to start from that point, when the pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT, the process proceeds to RT2. When one of the replay B groups is won at RT2, the instruction function is activated to display the push order for winning the replay 02. When Replay 02 wins at RT2, the process proceeds to RT3. Thereafter, the AT is continued while maintaining RT3. When the setting is made during the AT preparation until RT2, the AT is basically resumed after the transition to RT3.

  Here, based on the transition from RT2 to RT3, the number of AT games (that is, an advantageous section) can be added. This addition may always be executed, or it may be determined whether or not to add by lottery. As an opportunity to add, the Replay B group wins (that is, it will be added even if it does not shift from RT2 to RT3. Of course, when AT is being prepared, AT can be started from this point in time) Preferable)), winning of Replay 02, and transition from RT2 to RT3.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, the addition can be executed based on the transition from RT2 to RT3 via non-RT after completion of the 1BBA game. For this reason, 1BBA winning, 1BBA game execution, or non-RT stay is stored. For example, it may be stored using a flag. Then, when shifting from RT2 to RT3 (when the Replay B group is won or when Replay 02 wins), it is determined whether or not the flag is on, and that it is on. It is possible to add the number of AT games to the condition. In addition, when an extra or extra lottery is executed, the flag is turned from on to off.

  In this way, if it is determined whether or not the addition is possible using the flag, for example, a state in which only RT2 and RT3 are going back and forth (simply pushing in the wrong order during execution of AT, transition to RT2, At the time of shifting to RT3 again), since the flag is off, it is not added when shifting from RT2 to RT3.

In the above example, 1BBA is taken as an example, but even when 1BBB, that is, a conditional device including a special combination having a setting difference is won, if it is added as described above, it can be executed.
Similarly to the above, the winning of 1BBB, the execution of 1BBB game, or the stay of RT1 is stored in the flag. Then, after the end of 1BBB game, the transition from RT1 to RT2 and further to RT3 (when replay B group is won or when replay 02 wins) may be added. . Thus, even when 1BBB having a setting difference that cannot be added during winning or during BB game is won (when transitioning to 1BBB game), the player is expected to add up. Can do.

Further, the addition may be performed based on the transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2. For example, it is possible to make the addition possible based on winning the small role B group in non-RT or RT1, or displaying a pattern symbol, or shifting from non-RT or RT1 to RT2.
Note that, as shown in FIG. 22, the process shifts to non-RT even when the RWM 53 is initialized. However, as the RWM 53 is initialized, the above-mentioned flag is turned off. Even if it does, the addition is not executed. In the first place, if it is a normal section, the addition is not executed.
In addition, when 1BBA or 1BBB is won during execution of AT and the game moves to RT4 (inside), the number of AT games is not added at RT4.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment (the first embodiment), after the end of the 1BBA game, the process shifts to non-RT, and after the end of the 1BBB game, the process shifts to RT1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following method is also possible.
After the end of the 1BBA game and after the end of the 1BBB game, the process shifts to RT5 (new addition). Then, in RT5, a condition device that becomes a winning combination of a plurality of replays is drawn in a lottery, the condition device is won, and it is possible to shift from RT5 to RT3 based on a predetermined replay winning. Alternatively, it is possible to shift from RT5 to RT3 based on the display of the pattern symbol. Further, the setting is made so as not to shift to RT5 from non-RT, RT2, or RT3.
In this way, the transition from RT5 to RT3 (the fact that the condition device was won in RT5, that a predetermined replay was displayed, that the small group B was won in RT5, and a pattern symbol was displayed. Or the transition from RT5 to RT3), it is possible to add the number of AT games, and there is no need to provide a flag as described above.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single winning of the small role E1, when winning in the normal section, the small role E1 (numerical value “250”) that shifts to the advantageous section and winning in the normal section Is also provided with a small part E1 (numerical value “750”) that does not shift to the advantageous section.
On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, when any of the small roles E1 is won in the normal section, it shifts to the advantageous section. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the small combination E1 with the set number “250” is referred to as “small combination E1a”, and the small combination E1 with the set number “750” is referred to as “small combination E1b”.
Further, the small roles E2, 1BBA and the small role E2 are deleted.
By doing in this way, in the game in which the small role 36 has won, the next game is surely shifted to the advantageous section (by that time, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit).

Further, the advantageous section when winning the small role E1b is an advantageous section that can be ended only by executing the instruction function operation game once (for example, the instruction function operation game is ended after five executions). is there. Such an advantageous section may be referred to as an AT gas precursor in the AT precursor.
On the other hand, the advantageous section when winning the small role E1a is an advantageous section in which the AT is executed after the AT omen, and the number of games is after the AT omen (by the way, the AT omen plays one instruction function operation game) It will be set to 50 games). The count of 50 games may be started immediately after the AT sign, may be started when transitioning to RT3 (or the next game), or when the replay group B is won (or the next game). You may start at the time of staying at RT3 (or the next game). Furthermore, during the 50 games, when the condition device (small role B group, small role C group, replay B group, or replay C group) having an advantageous operation mode is won, the instruction function operation game is executed in principle.

  In addition, there is a small combination E1 (place number “250”) that shifts to the advantageous section, a small combination E1 (place number “750”) that does not move to the advantageous section, and a small combination E2 that does not move to the advantageous section. When winning the small role E1 (number “250”) to shift to the advantageous section, when shifting to the advantageous section where the AT of 50 games can be executed, from the game where the small role 36 won or the next game Thus, there is no point in outputting a continuous effect for encouraging the player's sense of expectation as in the past. This is because it can be determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section by checking whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. The eleventh embodiment has been conceived for outputting a continuous performance for encouraging the player's expectation as in the prior art.

FIG. 68 is a time chart showing advantageous sections and the like at the time of winning the small combination E1b (example 1) and the small combination E1a (example 2) in the eleventh embodiment.
In Example 1 of FIG. 68, when the small role E1b is won, an advantageous section is started from the next game (the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit). Then, wait until the small role B group is won. After the start of the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated and the advantageous push order is displayed in the game won in the first small role B group (execution of the instruction function operation game). A continuous effect is output from the next game of the instruction function operation game (the AT sign is also present during the continuous effect). Of course, a continuous effect may be output from the instruction function operation game. In this example, the continuous effect is executed for 5 games. Then, in the fifth game, an effect is output as to whether or not the advantageous section (AT) continues thereafter. At the time of winning the small role E1b, it is possible to end the advantageous section (AT precursor) in one instruction function operation game, so the advantageous section (AT precursor) ends at the game where the continuous performance has ended, and the normal section is shifted to .
In addition, when the small role B group is further won among the five games in the continuous production, the instruction function operation game may be executed, but in this embodiment, the instruction function operation game is not executed.

On the other hand, in the example 2 of FIG. 68, when the small role E1a is won, the advantageous section is started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit), and the instruction function operation game is executed with the game won in the first small combination B group, A continuous performance (5 games) from the next game is output (the same as the case of winning the small role E1b). Then, when the small role E1a is won, an effect that means that the advantageous section (AT) is continued after the fifth game of the continuous effect is output. Then, the AT is started from the next game after the end of the continuous performance.
In addition, when the small role B group is further won among the five games during the continuous performance, the instruction function operation game is not executed as in the case of the small role E1b winning. Of course, after winning the small role E1b, if you play the designated function operation game when you win the small role B group among the 5 games in the continuous production after winning the small role E1b, It is preferable that the instruction function operation game is executed even when the small role group B is won among the five games during the continuous production. In this way, when the small role E1b is won and when the small role E1a is won, the instruction function operation game is executed or not executed during the continuous production, but accordingly, This is because it can be determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section (AT) thereafter.

Here, it is determined that an AT of 50 games is executed when the small role E1a is won. Instead of this, the advantageous section (AT with no AT sign) may be terminated at the 50th game from the start of the advantageous section (next game at the time of winning the small role E1a). Alternatively, after the transition to the advantageous section, 50 games may be counted by setting the first instruction function operation game as the first game (until the previous game of this game is an AT precursor, and AT is started from this game).
Also, 50 games may be counted from the next game of the game won in the winning combination (group of replay B including replay 02) that can be transferred to a specific RT (for example, RT3 in FIG. 22). In the case of 50 games from the next game winning the replay that can be transferred to a specific RT, the push order for transferring to the specific RT is notified in the game won in the replay B group. Furthermore, even if the player does not follow the notification in the game won in the replay B group (even if the replay 02 is not displayed), an AT of 50 games will be executed from the next game. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent a strategy such that the player performs a stop operation so as not to intentionally shift to a specific RT.

  Furthermore, in the specification that the advantageous section is started from the next game of the game won for the small role E1a, when the small role E1a is won in a situation where the player is staying at a specific RT, another game is started from the specific RT. Notification for maintaining a specific RT when winning a winning combination (Pattern symbols 01 to 03 or winning combination capable of displaying replay 03) that may shift to RT (for example, RT2 in FIG. 22) May be performed. The AT count may be started from a game that has been notified to maintain a specific RT, or may be a predetermined game after the notification to maintain a specific RT (next game may be used). ). By setting in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of games until a transition is made to a specific RT after a transition to another RT, so it is advantageous for the upper limit number of advantageous sections (1500 games). It is possible to increase opportunities to give games.

In the above example, although the small effect E1a and the small role E1b are both won, the continuous production is 5 games. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a game (1 game) which outputs the effect of whether or not to execute. Further, the number of AT games is not limited to 50 games, and may be determined by lottery or the like.
Furthermore, when the small role E1b (place number “750”) is won, an advantageous period (AT after the AT sign) is executed after the AT sign, and when the small role E1a (place number “250”) is won, 1 It is good also as the advantageous area (AT precursor) which can be complete | finished by the instruction | indication function action | operation game of 1 time.

Further, when the small role E1a is elected, the number of games “m” of the AT is determined, and when the small role E1a and the small role E1b are elected, the number of games “n” until the first instruction function operation game becomes executable Determine by lottery. When the number of games “n” is determined, the instruction function is not activated until the number of games “n” elapses even when the small group B is won. After the number of games “n” has elapsed, the instruction function operation game is executed in the game at the time of winning the first small role B group.
In addition, for example, “n1” and “n2” (n1 <n2) are included as the determined number of games “n”, and when the number of games of the determined AT is “m1” at the time of winning the small role E1a “N1” may be easily determined, and when the determined number of AT games is “m2” larger than “m1”, “n2” may be easily determined. Further, “n1” may be easily determined even when the small combination E1b is won. Furthermore, “n1” may be more easily determined when the small role E1b is won than when the determined number of AT games is “m1” when the small role E1a is won.
In this way, after the transition to the advantageous section, the longer the number of games “n” until the first instruction function operation game is executed, the higher the possibility that the number of AT games is determined, You can expect. Of course, as the number of games “n” until the first instruction function operation game is executed is shorter, the possibility that the number of games of a larger AT is determined may be increased.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a continuous performance is output from the next game at the time of winning the first small role B group. The reason for this is that, as in the prior art, a continuous effect is simply output from the next game of the game winning the small role E1a or the small role E1b (5 consecutive games are executed). The advantageous section (AT) when winning the small role E1a may be that the AT after the AT precursor (by the way, the AT precursor ends with 5 games) ends with 50 games. Even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) when E1b is won ends in 5 games, if the instruction function operation game is not executed once in 5 games, Thereafter, there is a possibility that inconvenience may occur that the advantageous section (AT precursor) does not end in spite of the output indicating that the advantageous section (AT) is not continued.

  Even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) when winning the small role E1b ends with one instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is always executed in the fifth game of the continuous performance. However, there is a possibility that inconveniences such as the end of the advantageous section (AT precursor) in the third game of the continuous production and the advantage section (AT precursor) of the fifth or subsequent game of the continuous presentation may not be completed. Because there is. Of course, even if the advantage section (AT precursor) when winning the small role E1b is ended in 5 games after the execution of the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is always executed in the first game of the continuous performance. This is because there is a possibility that an inconvenience such that the advantageous section (AT sign) does not end even after the fifth game of the continuous performance is not necessarily performed.

However, the advantageous section (AT) when winning the small role E1a is assumed that the AT after the AT precursor (by the way, the AT precursor ends with one execution of the instruction function operation game) ends with 50 games, If the advantageous section (AT precursor) when winning the small role E1b is to be ended in one instruction function operation game, the continuous production will start from the game that started the advantageous section, regardless of which is won. The continuous production continues until the first small role B group wins, and when the first small role B group wins, the instruction function is activated, and the advantageous section (AT ) May be notified whether or not to continue.
When this is done, since the number of games until the first small role B group is won is indefinite, the effect image means that the continuous effect used in the game that continues the continuous effect continues, and the advantageous section An effect image that means that (AT) is not continued and an effect image that means that the advantageous section (AT) is continued may be prepared and a continuous effect may be output.
In addition, when winning a small role E1a (possible a small role E1b) during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous performance) based on winning the small role E1b (for example, during a continuous performance), an AT of 50 games after the AT precursor It may be changed to execute (continue the advantageous section).

FIG. 69 is a time chart showing Example 3 and Example 4 of the eleventh embodiment.
As described above, when the small role E1 is won, the continuous effect is not output until the first small role B group wins, and the continuous effect is output from the next game when the small role B group is won.
On the other hand, Example 3 in FIG. 69 does not output a continuous production until the first small role B group wins, such as when the small role E1 wins, and from the next game at the time of the small role B group wins This is an example of starting an advantageous section that ends when an AT of 30 games is executed from the next game when winning the small role E1 instead of outputting a continuous effect. Of course, the end condition of the advantageous section in Example 3 is not limited to this, and an AT of 30 games (the number of games is free) is executed after the AT precursor (by the way, the AT precursor may end with five games, etc.) In addition, the above-described various advantageous section end conditions may be applied. Of course, it is also possible to start advantageous sections with different end conditions depending on when the small combination E1a is won and when the small combination E1b is won.

  Furthermore, when the small combination E1 is won, there may be a case where the advantageous section is started and a case where the advantageous section is not started. In Example 3 of FIG. 69, after the start of the advantageous section, until the end condition of the advantageous section that was initially set (for example, AT of 30 games is executed), the small role B group is never won. This is an example. If the small role B group is won before reaching the advantageous section end condition and the instruction function operation game is executed, as shown by the two-dot chain line in Example 3 of FIG. When the end condition is reached (when AT of 30 games is executed), the advantageous section is ended.

  On the other hand, when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, if the instruction function operation game has not been executed once (for example, the player has never won the small role B group), then the small role B At least the advantageous section will be extended until the group is won and the instruction function operation game is executed. Example 3 in FIG. 69 shows an example in which the advantageous section is extended, and thereafter the instruction function operation game is executed (winning the small role B group), and the advantageous section is ended in the game. In Example 3, the advantageous section ends after less than 1500 games from the beginning of the advantageous section.

On the other hand, in Example 4 of FIG. 69, since the advantageous section is started, the instruction function operation game is not executed once (without winning the small role B group) 1500, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section 1500 This is an example of reaching a game. In other words, the end condition of the advantageous section has been reached. It is an example when it reaches.
In the rare case as in Example 4, unlike the case of Example 3, even if the instruction function operation game is not executed once, the advantageous section is terminated when the upper limit is reached. This gives priority to "when the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached" the advantageous section is ended "rather than" at least one instruction function operation game is executed during the advantageous section ". It is to do. Because, as in the case of Example 3, when the upper limit of the advantageous section has not been reached, even if the advantageous section is extended, if a rare role such as the small part E1 is won in the meantime, Although it is possible to add an extra (of course, it is not necessary), as in Example 4, even if the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, even if the advantageous section is extended, depending on the rare role won during that period , Because it is not possible to add an advantageous section, for the player, the normal section will be more advantageous (if a rare role is won during the normal section, a new advantageous section will start. Because there is).

<Twelfth embodiment>
In the twelfth embodiment, when the advantageous section is continued until 1500 games whose upper limit is the upper limit (for example, when the small role E1 or the like is won and added, etc. are performed during the advantageous section that has been started and it is determined that the advantageous section will continue. Or when an ending effect is output from, for example, the 1450th game (when the upper limit is approached) It is characterized (the point of outputting an ending effect is the same as that of Example 3 in FIG. 55 (third embodiment)). The game is not limited to 1450 games, and various settings such as 1400 games and 1470 games can be set.
The ending effect starts from the 1450th game and ends at the 1500th game. Here, the “ending effect” is, for example, a moving image, which is also referred to as a movie image, and is not divided for each game (a moving image with a predetermined time instead of switching images for each unit game). .

  By the way, the length of the ending effect is set so that even if the player plays in the shortest time, it can be watched to the end in exactly 50 games (game where the advantageous section ends). When it reaches the end, it repeats from the beginning thereafter, or the last image is displayed as a still image. Thus, it is preferable to set the ending effect to such a length that the player can watch until the end of the advantageous section even if the player plays in the shortest time. At the end of the ending production (at the end of the 1500th game), the total number of medals won in the advantageous section, the difference between the total number of medals acquired and the total number of medals inserted, and the total number of games (1500 games) indicate. Of course, the total number of medals won in the advantageous section (total number of acquisitions), the difference between the total number of medals acquired and the total number of medals inserted (total number of acquisition differences), and the total number of games (1500 games) It may be displayed not as the last of the game, but as another effect that is output after that (such as an effect that is output during the freeze executed at the end of the advantageous section (at the end of the 1500th game)) .

FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example of starting an ending effect from the 1450th game in the advantageous section, ending the ending effect at the 1500th game, and ending the advantageous section.
In FIG. 70, (a) shows an example in which 1BB (1BBA, 1BBB, etc. of the first embodiment) is won in the middle of the advantageous section and 1BB game is executed. In the example of (a), at the end of the 1BB game, the 1450th game in the advantageous section has not been reached. In such a case, the execution of the 1BB game does not affect the end of the ending effect. Therefore, the ending effect is started from the 1450th game, and the ending effect is ended at the 1500th game (the ending effect ends together with the end of the advantageous section).

On the other hand, in FIG. 70, (b) shows an example in which, in the advantageous section, after starting the ending effect from the 1450th game, 1BB is won in the 1490th game and 1BB game is executed. And the example at the time of completion | finish of 1BB game exceeded 1500 game which is the upper limit of an advantageous area is shown.
Even in such a case, since there is no exception in the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is ended with 1500 games (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off). By the way, freezing is not executed even when the advantageous section ends. Accordingly, the advantageous section ends in the middle of the 1BB game, and the 1BB game continues after the advantageous section ends (which is a normal section).

  In such a case, the ending effect in the present embodiment ends at the end of the 1BB game (not at the end of the advantageous section). Because, as shown in (a), when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached when the 1BB game is not being played, it is advantageous that the effect is output at the end of the ending effect or during the freeze when the advantageous section ends. It is necessary to display the total number of games and the total number of games acquired in the section (particularly, the number of AT sets executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played in the AT, the total number of games acquired in the AT, etc.). On the other hand, as shown in (b), when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached during the 1BB game, since the 1BB game is executed after that (the normal section), the ending effect ends at this point. In this way, freeze is executed at the end of the ending effect or when the advantageous section ends, and the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the advantageous section are displayed in the effect that is output during the freeze. This is because it also hinders the game and is not preferable.

  In the first place, at the end of 1BB game, freeze is performed at the end of 1BB game or at the end of 1BB game, and in the output that is output during the freeze, the total number of games and total number of games during 1BB game Since the acquired number is displayed, in the case of (b), when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the ending effect is not ended at this point, and when the 1BB game is ended, End the ending effect, and execute freeze at the end of the ending effect or at the end of the 1BB game. In the effect that is output during the freeze, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired etc. It is more preferable to display the number of AT sets executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played during the AT, the total number of acquired games during the AT, etc. .

  In addition, since the 1BB game after reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is a 1BB game in the normal section, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired in the advantageous section (especially executed in the advantageous section) If you want to display the number of AT sets, total number of games during AT, total number of games acquired during AT, etc., the total number of games and total number of games acquired during that period (normal zone and 1BB game) should not be included. However, if the display is not strictly concerned, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired during that period (in the normal section and during the 1BB game) may be displayed. There is a player's satisfaction when the display is included. For example, the advantageous section can be executed only up to 1500 games, but since the display exceeds 1500 games, there is satisfaction.

  Furthermore, during the 1BB game, when the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the 1BB game are displayed together with the ending effect, the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the advantageous zone (especially the advantageous zone) Is displayed during the 1BB game after reaching the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section. Will continue. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (example 3) described above, at the time of outputting the ending effect, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired during 1BB game, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired during the advantageous section, etc. If the number of AT sets executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played in the AT, the total number of games acquired in the AT, etc.) are not displayed, during the 1BB game after reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, Do not display.

In addition, the length of the ending effect is generally set so that even if the player plays in the shortest, the game can be seen to the end by the game when the advantageous section ends ( Repeat from the beginning, or display the last image as a still image), but when the ending effect is output even after the advantageous section ends as in the example of (b), the ending effect is repeated from the beginning, or The last image of the ending effect can be displayed as a still image.
The ending effect is not to switch images for each unit game (separate for each game), but for a predetermined time, a moving image for each predetermined number of games, a still image for each game, or Any of still images divided for each predetermined number of games may be used.

<13th Embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, RT transition similar to that in FIG. 22 shown in the first embodiment is performed.
The thirteenth embodiment is characterized by the following points.
(1) The winning probabilities of the condition devices (replay B group, replay C group, and small role B group) related to the RT transition should not have a set difference.
(2) Based on having won the replay group B in the non-RT or RT2 that has shifted from RT1, an advantageous section is added (possible). On the other hand, when transitioning from RT3 to RT2, when transitioning from RT2 to RT3, the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.
(3) The winning probability of Replay A is set to have a set difference.
(4) The winning probability of the small role D is set to have a set difference.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a numeric table (2) of the thirteenth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 18 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the condition device for “small role D” is provided in FIG. 17, but in this embodiment, since the small role D has a setting difference, the small role D is stored in the numeric table (2 ). In the thirteenth embodiment as well, a table of numbers (1) similar to that shown in FIG. 17 shown in the first embodiment is provided (there is no number of small roles D).

  As in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), when transferring from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, it is necessary to win the small role B group and display the pattern symbols. Here, in order to display the pattern symbol, it is necessary to win the small role B group. And when there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small role B group, the ease of transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2 varies depending on the set value (the ease of transition from RT3 to RT2 also varies). ). Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the non-RT and RT1, the winning probability of the small role group B is set so as not to have a set difference. In the example of FIG. 71, the numbers of the small combination B1 to the small combination B12 are set to “770” in common for all settings (not limited to this value). In order to make the appearance rates of the small combinations B1 to B12 the same, all the small combinations B1 to B12 have the same number.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, the replay B group is drawn only at RT2, and the numbers of replays B1 to B3 are all “2800” common to all settings. Furthermore, the replay group C is drawn only at RT3, and the numbers of replays C1 to C3 are all “12000” common to all settings. These points are the same as in the first embodiment.
Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the RT 2 that has shifted from non-RT or RT 1, the advantageous section is added when the replay B group is won (it may be displayed when the replay 02 is displayed or when RT 2 is shifted to RT 3). It should be noted that the advantageous section may be added at any time, or whether or not to be added may be determined by lottery. Further, the added number of games may be a fixed number of games determined in advance, or the number of games may be determined by lottery.

  Note that “addition of advantageous section” can be replaced with “addition of AT” in all the embodiments. For example, when a special role is won during an AT (for example, the remaining number of games of the AT is “5”), and when the replay B group is won in the non-RT or RT2 after the special game is finished, When an extra lottery that increases the number of remaining AT games is executed and the lottery is won, the number of remaining AT games can be increased (for example, the number of remaining AT games can be set to “25”).

In addition, in RT2 which shifted from non-RT or RT1, it is similar to 10th Embodiment mentioned above to perform the addition of an advantageous area at the time of replay B group winning.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the replay group B is a conditional device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability (numerical value). Thereby, it can avoid having a setting difference in the probability to add.
Similarly to the tenth embodiment, when the transition is made from RT3 to RT2, even if the RT2 wins the replay group B (even if the replay 02 is displayed or the transition is made from RT2 to RT3) , Do not add the advantageous section.
Furthermore, at RT2, when the Replay B group is won, RT2 is maintained or the process proceeds to RT3. Therefore, the replay group B becomes a conditional device capable of shifting RT. Since the replay group B is a condition device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability, it is possible to prevent the setting probability from changing from RT2 to RT3 (ease of shifting).

  In RT3, when Replay C group is won, RT3 is maintained or the process proceeds to RT2. Therefore, the replay group C becomes a conditional device capable of shifting RT. Since the replay group C is a conditional device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability, it is possible to prevent the setting probability from changing from RT3 to RT2 (the ease of transfer).

Similarly, when the small role B group is won in non-RT, RT1, or RT3 and the pattern symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to RT2. Therefore, the small role group B becomes a conditional device capable of shifting RT. The small role group B is a conditional device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability, so that there is no setting difference in the probability (easy to move) from non-RT, RT1, RT3 to RT2. can do.
Note that the small role group C does not correspond to a conditional device capable of shifting RT, and thus may have a setting difference or may not have a setting difference. In the example of FIG. 71, there is a setting difference.

As described above, the RT transition rate is not affected by the setting difference by not giving a setting difference to the winning probability of the condition device (condition device related to RT transition) that enables RT transition. can do.
However, RT4 (inside) that shifts based on the winning of special role is excluded. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probabilities of “1BBA + small role E2”, 1BBB, and “1BBB + small role D” have a setting difference, but RT4 (internal ) Is an exception (may be affected by setting differences). This is because RT4 (inside the inside) shifts based on the winning of the special role, and does not shift according to the player's pushing order, and therefore has different properties from those described above. Furthermore, since RT4 (inside) is intended to stay only for a short period until 1BB is won, the property is different from that described above. In addition, RT4 (inside the interior) cannot determine the transition to the advantageous section even if it is in the normal section in the first place. This is because there is no setting difference in the probability of transition or the probability of addition.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, there is a set difference in the winning probability (number) of Replay A. Replay A has a different winning probability (number) for each RT. Since RT does not shift when Replay A is won, even if a setting difference is provided, the RT transition rate is not affected. Thus, the higher the winning probability of Replay A, the higher the probability of replaying. Therefore, when calculating the payout rate including replaying, the higher the winning probability of Replay A, the higher the payout rate. Get higher.
In the example of FIG. 71, the winning probability of Replay A is set higher in setting 6 than in setting 1. For this reason, setting 6 can make the non-winning probability (probability of losing) lower than setting 1, so that the payout rate can be increased accordingly.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single winning of the small role E1, when winning in the normal section, the small role E1 (numerical value “250”) that shifts to the advantageous section and winning in the normal section Is also provided with a small part E1 (numerical value “750”) that does not shift to the advantageous section. If a small role E1 with a number “250” is elected, an advantageous section in which an AT of 50 games is executed (a count of 50 games may start immediately, or when the game moves to RT3 (or the next game) ), You may start when you win the Replay B group (or the next game), or you may start with staying at RT3 (or the next game)) Suppose that it is determined to shift (otherly, the above-described various advantageous section end conditions may be applied). Even with the same 50 game ATs, a new medal is inserted when the winning probability of Replay A is high (low probability of non-winning) than when the winning probability of Replay A is low (high probability of non-winning) Since there is no need to (consume), the payout rate increases accordingly. Thus, even if there is no setting difference in the probability of determining to move to the advantageous section, it is possible to make a setting difference in the payout rate in the advantageous section.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 17, the small role D is a conditional device that has no setting difference. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the condition device has a setting difference. Further, although not shown in FIG. 71, the payout number when the small combination D is won and the small combination 35 (watermelon) wins is set to 15 (5 in the first embodiment). Therefore, the small combination D is a small combination having the maximum payout number among the small combinations.

  Further, since the small combination 35 related to the small combination D is “PB ≠ 1”, the small combination 35 cannot be won without winning. For this reason, for example, when the small role D is won, an effect indicating that the small role D has been won may be output, such as a green notification. In this case, when the winning combination “PB ≠ 1” wins the condition device that allows winning, outputting the effect suggesting the winning is not “operation of the instruction function”. It is true that there is a case where the small role 35 wins and a case where the small role 35 does not win at the timing of the push. However, the small role 35 is correct without being missed regardless of whether the small role D is won or not. If the stop switch 42 is operated at the operation timing, it is possible to always win. In this respect, unlike the small combination B group of the present invention, it differs from the small combination having different winning rates depending on whether or not the instruction function is activated. For example, in order to win the small role 01 at the time of winning the small role B1, if the player always operates with the left first, the small role 01 cannot be won at the time of winning the small role B5.

For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the “watermelon” of No. 4, 9, or 14 in FIG. If the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the “watermelon” of No. 8 or No. 13 can stop on the active line (the right reel 31 may be at any timing because “watermelon” is “PB = 1”), The small part 35 can always be won (without any notification).
In the invention of the present application, there is no “PB ≠ 1” role other than the small role 35 (not including the incorrect answer in the pushing order when winning the small role B group), so each game is stopped at the above timing. If the switch 42 is operated, no small portion 35 is lost.
From the above, the game at the time of winning the small role D does not correspond to the “game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch” in the present invention.

As a result, when the advantageous section is started, it is necessary to activate the instruction function at the time of winning the condition device that is the maximum payout by the operation of the instruction function at least once during the advantageous section. The “conditional device with the maximum payout” is not the small combination D but the small combination B group.
Although not shown in FIG. 71, as in the first embodiment, a small role E1 (two payouts) is provided as a conditional device that does not have a setting difference.

From the above, in the thirteenth embodiment,
Winning probability of small role D: Has a setting difference (15 payouts)
Winning probability of small role B group: no difference in setting (when pushing correct, 9 payouts)
Winning probability for small role E1: No difference in setting (2 payouts)
The relationship between the number of payouts
Small part D> Small part B group (at correct push order)> Small part E1
It becomes.

  Temporarily, if the game at the time of winning the small role D corresponds to the “game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch” in the present invention (the winning combination is different depending on whether the instruction function is activated or not) ), The “conditional device that gives maximum payout when the instruction function is activated” becomes the small combination D instead of the small combination B group. Then, since the winning probability of the small role D is low, it may happen that the small role D is not won frequently until the advantageous section end condition is satisfied (cannot be ended even though the advantageous section is desired to end). However, if the winning probability of the small role D is increased (if it is higher than the winning probability of the small role B group), it is highly likely that the small role D is simultaneously won with 1BBB (rare role). (In most cases, in the single winning of the small role D, there is no expectation of duplicate winning with 1BBB).

For this reason, the payout number when the small role D wins must be smaller than the payout number when the small role B group pushes the correct answer. Then, even if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small role D, there is no significant change in the payout rate. Because it will do). However, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small role B group with a large number of payouts in the correct push order, this will cause a setting difference in the ease of RT transition.
Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, using the small role D with a large number of payouts, the payout rate varies depending on the set value (the higher the setting, the higher the payout rate (the higher the payout rate depending on the set value). It is possible to prevent the RT transition from being affected by the setting difference.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the small part D is “PB ≠ 1”. However, for example, if “watermelon” is arranged in “PB = 1” for all reels 31, regardless of the player's intention (the player's You will be able to win a prize (regardless of skill).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, since the small role D has a case where the winning combination overlaps with 1BBB, the higher setting makes it easier for the small role 35 to appear, and when the small role 35 appears, the winning of 1BBB is expected. be able to. Specifically, when the set value is set to “1”, the probability that 1 BBB is elected when the small role 35 appears is “20/520” = “0.038 (about 3.8%). ) ”And the set value is set to“ 6 ”, the probability that 1 BBB is elected when the small role 35 appears is“ 25/625 ”=“ 0.040 (about 4.0%) ) ”. Therefore, when the small role 35 appears, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the 1BBB is won. Therefore, the player is provided with an element for estimating the set value, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is increased. You can also.

  In addition, as it can be said in all the embodiments, in FIG. 17, FIG. 18, and FIG. 71, it is free to place “X” in “○”, and “X”. It is free to set the location to “O” unless the condition device has a setting difference and is won only in a specific RT (RT4, during 1BBA game, except during 1BBB game). It is free to set “Δ” for the part that is marked as long as the condition device has no setting difference.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In the fourteenth embodiment, after an advantageous section is started and before the advantageous section ends (before the end condition is reached), a condition (an advantageous section extension condition) for changing the advantageous section ending condition is satisfied. Is characterized by extending the advantageous section.
For example, when the number of games (initial value) in the advantageous section is 30 games at the start of the advantageous section (for example, when the previous game is winning the small role D in the first embodiment), the advantageous section is advantageous. When a section extension condition (for example, winning of the small role E1 in the first embodiment) is satisfied, the number of games is further added to extend the advantageous section. In the fourteenth embodiment, the end condition of the advantageous section is set to 30 games, but various other end conditions of the advantageous section described above may be applied.

FIG. 72 is a time chart for explaining the fourteenth embodiment.
In the example 1 of FIG. 72, when the advantageous section is started, the instruction function operation game is executed in the game at the time of the first small role B group winning. In Example 1, the number of games in the advantageous section set first is 30 games. Example 1 shows an example in which “50” is added to the number of games while satisfying the extension condition of the advantageous section during these 30 games. When the extension condition is not satisfied between the first 30 games of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends at the 30th game as shown by a two-dot chain line in the figure. On the other hand, in Example 1, since the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section is extended by 50 games.

  In this case, when at least one instruction function operation game is executed at the end of the first 30 games, in the subsequent 50 games, even if the small role B group is never won, that is, 1 Even if the instruction function operation game is not executed once, the advantageous section can be ended. This is because one instruction function operation game is executed in a total of 80 games.

On the other hand, in FIG. 72, in Example 2, as in Example 1, the number of games in the advantageous section initially set is 30 games, and during this 30 games, the conditions for extending the advantageous section are satisfied and 50 games are extended. An example is shown.
In Example 2, in the first 30 games and the extended 50 games (total 80 games), the small role B group was never won (that is, the instruction function operation game was never executed). It is an example. In such a case, even if the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (80 games have been reached), the advantageous section is not terminated.

In Example 2 of FIG. 72, when winning the small role B group between the extended 50 games and executing the instruction function operation game (two-dot chain line A in the figure), it is advantageous for the extended 50 games Can be terminated (two-dot chain line B in the figure).
On the other hand, if there is a total of 80 games, that is, if the instruction function operation game has not been executed once from the start of the advantageous section, it waits for winning the small role B group, and if the small role B group is won, the instruction function is activated Run a game. Then, the advantageous section ends.

  In the example of FIG. 72, the number of games in the first advantageous section is set to 30 games, and the extended number of games is set to 50 games. However, in these advantageous sections, the Gasse AT precursor (for example, to CZ or AT) If the transition conditions are not met, the game ends in 32 games (the number of games is free), or ends in one (the number of times is free) instruction function operation game), AT precursor (for example, the transition conditions to AT Even if not satisfied, after AT 32 games (the number of games is free), it will be an AT of 50 games (the number of games is free, the start timing of the number of games may be applied to the above-mentioned various timings, etc.) , CZ (for example, a game that ends with 10 games (the number of games is free) if it does not meet the conditions for transition to AT, or a game that ends with one instruction function operation game) With signs In addition, it is easy to satisfy the conditions for transition to AT, and AT (if the extension condition is not satisfied, 30 games (the number of games is free, and the above-mentioned various timings may be applied to the start timing of the number of games) Etc.) and the like can be provided in various ways.

  For example, at the start of the advantageous section, it shifts to CZ (corresponding to “30” game in FIG. 72), and when the transition condition to AT (corresponding to “extension condition”) is satisfied in this CZ, AT (“50 (Equivalent to extending the game)) (extending the end condition of the advantageous section). On the other hand, when the conditions for transition to AT are not satisfied during CZ, the advantageous section is terminated when the termination condition for CZ is satisfied, and transition to a normal section (normal to CZ, AT, etc.) is performed (example). 1 and a two-dot chain line).

In addition to the above,
(1) If the first advantageous section is CZ (for example, the game ends in 30 games) and the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during this CZ, CZ with a longer number of games (add 20 times to the number of games) ).
(2) The first advantageous section is defined as “an advantageous section (GASE AT precursor or CZ) that ends with a predetermined number of times (for example, one time) instruction function operation game”, and an advantageous section until the first instruction function operation game is executed. When the extension condition (CZ transition condition or AT transition condition, for example, winning of the small role E1, etc.) is satisfied, CZ (the predetermined number of games, or the instruction function operation game ends at a predetermined number), Or, change to AT (one that ends with a predetermined number of games).
(3) The first advantageous section is defined as “an advantageous section (Gase AT precursor or CZ) that ends with a predetermined number of times (for example, one time) instruction function operation game”, and an advantageous section until the first instruction function operation game is executed. When an extension condition (extension condition or CZ transition condition) is satisfied, “an advantageous section (Gasse AT precursor or CZ) that ends with a plurality of (for example, three) instruction function operation games more than a predetermined number of times” Change to
(4) The first advantageous section is set as 30-game AT, and when the extended condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during this AT, it is changed to 100-game AT (the number of games is added by “70”).
And so on.

In FIG. 72, when the first 30 games of the advantageous section are CZ, the instruction function operation game is executed only when the first small role B group is won, and thereafter (30 games from the first game) is the small role B group. Even if the player wins, the instruction function operation game may not be executed.
On the other hand, two or more instruction function operation games may be executed during CZ (between 30 games).
Further, even when the transition condition to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, if the instruction function operation game is already executed once during the CZ, the instruction function operation game is not executed in the subsequent AT. May be. In addition, the same applies when the condition for transition to CZ or AT is satisfied during the GASE AT precursor. That is, it is only necessary to execute one instruction function operation game from the start to the end of the advantageous section.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment is characterized by having a case where freeze is executed and a case where it is not executed when the advantageous section is ended.
FIG. 73 is a time chart showing the relationship between advantageous sections and freezes in the fifteenth embodiment.
In the fifteenth embodiment, when it is decided to execute the advantageous section (for example, when the small role E1 is won), CZ is started at the beginning of the advantageous section. When the condition for transition to AT is satisfied during CZ, AT is started after CZ ends. Of course, it is not limited to this. Some start CZ as the beginning of the advantageous section, while others start AT from the beginning.

In FIG. 73, the first CZ (advantageous section) does not satisfy the transition condition to the AT, and the advantageous section ends only with CZ. The next CZ (advantageous section) is an example in which the conditions for transitioning to the AT are satisfied, AT is executed after the completion of CZ, and AT and the advantageous section are terminated. When the transition condition to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, the CZ may be immediately terminated and the AT may be performed, or the CZ may be terminated and the AT may be performed. Not limited to the embodiment).
Although not shown in FIG. 73, even when the process is ended only by CZ, since it has shifted to the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game.
In the fifteenth embodiment, when the first CZ ends (when AT is not executed after CZ ends and the advantageous section is ended), freezing is not executed (two-dot chain line in the figure). On the other hand, when shifting from CZ to AT, freeze is performed at the end of AT (advantageous section).
Further, at the time of freezing, at least the total number of AT games and the total number of acquired games are displayed as images. Of course, the image including the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the CZ may be displayed, and when shifting from the CZ to the AT via the AT precursor, during the CZ and / or during the AT precursor An image including the total number of games and the total number of acquired games may be displayed.

In this way, it is determined in advance in which advantageous section the freeze is executed at the end, and in which advantageous section the freeze is executed at the end.
For example, as expected values such as the total number of games and the total number of games acquired in the advantageous section, the first end condition (for example, the end of the advantageous section only with CZ (which may be a sign of GASE AT)) and the expected value than the first end condition Has a large second end condition (for example, when AT is executed after CZ or when only AT is executed), when the advantageous section is terminated with the first end condition, the freeze is not executed and the advantageous section is not executed. Is executed when the process is terminated under the second termination condition. This is because the freeze is executed until the expected value such as the total number of games and the total number of games acquired in the advantageous section is small (for example, the total number of games is 10 games, the total number of games acquired is 12 cards, etc.). If the image of the total number of images acquired or the like is displayed as an image, there is a high possibility that the player's feeling of regret will be increased (the interest will be reduced).
Even in advantageous sections, unlike AT, there are some that do not aim to give a lot of medals to a player (to increase the total number of winnings), such as GASE AT precursor, AT precursor, and CZ. It is not preferable to perform freezing uniformly at the end of the advantageous section.

  In addition, as determination of whether to perform freeze, providing a freeze flag is mentioned, for example. This freeze flag remains off only at the start of CZ, but is turned on when AT is executed. Then, at the end of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on. When it is on, the freeze is executed, and when the freeze is executed, the freeze flag is turned off. It is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on immediately before ending the advantageous section. If it is on, the freeze is executed. When the advantageous section is ended, information on the advantageous section including the freeze flag is displayed. It may be initialized.

By controlling in this way, an advantageous section is started, but in an advantageous section that does not bring much benefit to the player, such as when ending with only CZ, it is possible to prevent freezing at the end.
In addition, information (“1” to “4”, etc.) for specifying the type of advantageous section (CZ, Gasse AT precursor, AT precursor, AT, etc.) or “0” to “4” including the normal section, etc. For example, “0” is a normal section, “1” is a CZ, “2” is a Gase AT precursor, “3” is an AT precursor, “4” is an AT, and the like. Then, this information may be determined at the end of the advantageous section or immediately before the advantageous section is ended, and the freeze may be executed.

  The freeze is not limited to one time. For example, when an AT executes 50 games as one break, a freeze is executed every 50 games (for example, even if it is an AT of 100 games), and the AT continues after the next game during the execution of the freeze. An output of whether or not to perform is mentioned. In addition, for every 50 games, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired at that time can be displayed as an image, and an effect can be output as if the advantageous section has ended (it was an AT of 50 games).

In addition, when the AT reaches 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the freeze is executed, and during the freeze, the total number of games played during the AT, the total number of acquired games, etc. are displayed as images. .
Also in this case, if CZ or AT precursor is executed before AT is executed, an image including the total number of games and the total number of acquired games during CZ and / or AT precursor may be displayed as an image. Good.
In addition, during the execution of CZ and AT precursor, when the game reaches the upper limit of 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the freeze is executed, and during the freeze, during the advantageous section (part of the advantageous section such as CZ) Alternatively, the total number of games or the total number of acquired games may be displayed as an image.

However, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when the game reaches the upper limit of 1,500 games during the 1BB operation (for example, the 1BB operates during the AT and the 1BB operates. When the 1500 game is reached, etc.), the freeze is not executed when the 1500 game is reached (because the 1BB game is in progress), and the freeze is executed at the end of the 1BB game. The total number of images acquired is displayed as an image).
When the freeze is executed, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off after the freeze is completed. Of course, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned off before the freeze is performed, or the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned off during the freeze. The initialization timing is the same as the timing of turning off the advantageous section display LED 77.

In FIG. 73, it is also possible to provide a conditional device that ends the advantageous section only with CZ, and a conditional device that is determined to execute both CZ and AT. For example, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, when the small role E1 alone winning the set number “750” is selected as an advantageous interval that ends only with CZ, CZ and AT are selected when the small role E1 only winning the number “250” is selected. Is an advantageous interval for executing By setting in this way, it is possible to decide to execute AT without performing lottery of whether or not the transition condition to AT is satisfied during CZ.
Of course, even in this case, a lottery may be performed as to whether or not the transition condition to the AT is satisfied during CZ (may be performed only in an advantageous section that ends only with CZ). In addition, it is possible to output a continuous effect as to whether or not to execute AT before several games before CZ ends. In this case as well, whether or not to perform freeze is as described above.

The third to fifteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the third embodiment (FIGS. 43 to 52), an example of information (command) transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. 50 may transmit parameters necessary for display in the advantageous section (AT) on the side of the sub-control board 80 (digestion game count, remaining game count, additional number, acquired number, instruction function activation count, etc.). .

(2) In FIG. 43 to FIG. 52, parameters relating to the number of games (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) are transmitted to manage the advantageous section (AT) by the number of games. If the upper limit of (AT) is managed by, for example, the acquired number of sheets (for example, 3000 sheets), information on each game and the acquired number of sheets is transmitted.
In addition, each game, the main control board 50 transmits information indicating that it is in an advantageous section and information indicating that it is in an AT, and counts the number of games in the advantageous section and AT to the sub-control board 80 side. It is also possible to provide a counter and count the number of games on the sub-control board 80 side.

(3) In FIGS. 47 to 49 of the third embodiment, the lottery tables A and B are provided as the lottery tables used in the extra lottery, and the lottery used depending on whether or not the specified number is “1000” or more. Switched table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any number of lottery tables may be provided. Moreover, although the prescribed number “1000” is exemplified as the threshold value, it is not limited to this.
For example, four types of lottery tables A>B>C> D are provided as lottery tables having different expected values to be added. When the specified number (the number of AT games) is less than 500, the lottery table A is used. When the specified number is 500 or more and less than 1000, the lottery table B is used, and when the specified number is 1000 or more and less than 1300. Uses the lottery table C, and when the specified number is 1300 or more, the lottery table D can be used.

(4) As shown in Examples 1 to 3 in FIG. 55, when the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit, it is peculiar when the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit. Although the information is displayed, it is not limited to these examples 1 to 3,
a) Display that allows the player to identify that the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit b) Display different from the display before the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit What is necessary is just to be a thing, and it is not limited to the display content of Examples 1 to 3.

  (5) Further, in Example 1 of FIG. 55, when the total number of games of AT exceeds 1500 games due to the addition, the display of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games is not changed. Information on the number of digested games and the number of remaining games is not changed, such as changing the display font of the number of remaining games, changing the character size, or changing the display color, etc., but adding it by changing the display mode This may notify the player that the total number of AT games has exceeded 1500 games.

  (6) In Example 4 of FIG. 55, when there are only a few remaining advantageous sections (AT), a message such as “I will end in 10 games” was displayed, but at the beginning of the advantageous section (AT) , “This advantageous section (AT) can not be performed beyond 1500 games”, it is also possible to make a prior notification.

  (7) In the fourth embodiment, the AT signal is transmitted as the external signal 2. However, for example, when the slot machine has a specification in which the advantageous section does not match the AT, the advantageous section and the AT can be distinguished. An external signal may be transmitted. For example, it is possible to transmit an external signal capable of distinguishing between “non-favorable interval (non-AT)”, “advantageous interval and non-AT”, and “advantageous interval and AT” using two external signals.

(8) In the fourth embodiment, BB is won immediately before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, and when the BB game starts, the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (1500 games from the start of the advantageous section) or immediately after reaching the upper limit (for example, advantageous) When it is 1501 game from the start of the section), the BB game in the non-advantageous section is started, only the external signal 1 (BB) is turned on, and the external signal 2 (AT) is turned off (advantageous section and AT Is finished).
Also, when the end of the BB game is when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (1500 games from the start of the advantageous section) or immediately before the upper limit is reached (for example, 1499th game from the start of the advantageous section), For example, turning off the external signal 2 (AT) at the same time as turning off the signal 1 (BB) (terminating the advantageous period and AT).

  (9) In the fifth embodiment, AT, CZ, precursor, and normal are exemplified as the control state controlled by the main control board 50. For example, an additional special zone that shifts when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. It is also possible to provide. This additional specialization zone is continued until, for example, a predetermined number of games are digested or a predetermined combination is won a predetermined number of times, and during that period, every time a condition device (for example, small role B group) to be added is won. , Increase the number of AT games.

(10) In the fifth embodiment, in the example of (a) in FIG. 61, after the end of AT (state 1), the state is shifted to the AT withdrawal period (state 2), and AT cannot be pulled back in this state 2 Was transferred to normal (state 3). Further, in the example of (b), after the AT ends, the process shifts to CZ, and when the AT cannot be pulled back in this CZ, the process shifts to normal. Furthermore, in the example of (c), after the end of CZ, it is shifted to the CZ pullback period, and when CZ cannot be pulled back during this CZ pullback period, it is shifted to normal.
However, the state transition described above is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in FIG. 61A, after the end of AT (state 1), the state may be shifted to normal (state 3) without going through the AT pullback period (state 2).
In FIG. 61 (b), transition may be made from normal → CZ → AT, or from normal → predictive → AT. After the AT ends, the transition may be made from AT to normal, or from AT to the precursor (CZ pullback period) to normal.
Furthermore, in FIG. 61 (c), the process may be shifted from normal to CZ without going through the precursor. Further, it may be shifted from CZ to normal without going through a pullback period.

(11) In the eighth embodiment, the output of the continuous effect is started near the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the output of the continuous effect is started simultaneously with the start of the 1BBA game. You may continue to output the effect of whether or not to start.
Also, the output of the continuous effect may be started from the start of the 1BBA game, and the effect of finally informing whether or not the AT is started may be output until the first half of the 1BBA game. Alternatively, during the continuous effect, an effect that the execution of AT is confirmed when the effect is output may be provided, and the effect may be output in the middle of the continuous effect.
In the eighth embodiment, the continuous effect is not necessarily a necessary effect. For this reason, whether or not to output a continuous effect is arbitrary. Further, for example, it is possible to output only one game as to whether or not to continue the advantageous section.

(12) In the ninth embodiment, when an advantageous section is started based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination, for example, the instruction function may be activated when the small combination B group is selected in RT4 (inside). . When the instruction function is activated at RT4, the payout rate at RT4 exceeds "1". In such a case, it is necessary to start the advantageous section from the time of RT4 which is the next game of the game won for the special role.
On the other hand, if the instruction function is not activated even after the transition to RT4, an advantageous section may be started before the start of the special game.

(13) In the third embodiment, when the upper limit value of the advantageous section is approaching, it is designed so that the winning probability of the AT extra lottery on the main control board 50 is reduced, or the extra effect on the sub control board 80 is suppressed. By doing so, it is possible to achieve a game that does not discourage the player as much as possible even when the upper limit value of the advantageous section approaches.
As another method, there is a method of changing the execution probability of the freeze effect based on the number of executed games in the advantageous section so that the player is not discouraged as much as possible. For example, in FIG. 17, when the small role E1 with the number “250” is won, the added number of games is “50” (50%), “100” (40%), or “200” (10%). It is set to increase the possibility that the freeze effect is executed as the number of added games increases.

In such a specification, when the number of games in the advantageous section is less than a predetermined value (for example, 1300), if “200” is determined as the number of additional games, a freeze effect is performed with probability X (including 100%). When the number of games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, if “200” is determined as the additional number of games, the freeze effect is executed with a probability Y (including 0%) lower than the probability X.
By configuring in this way, when the upper limit value of the advantageous section is approaching, the execution probability of the freeze effect can be lowered, and the player can be prevented from being excessively beaten by the freeze effect. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged as much as possible when the freeze effect is executed.
(14) Each of the above-described embodiments is not limited to being implemented alone, and a plurality of embodiments can be combined and implemented as appropriate.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
Subsequently, a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the present embodiment, “advantageous section 1” and “advantageous area 2” are provided as advantageous areas. Then, if the winning section 1 is elected (decided to shift), the game state shifts to a game state that does not have the right to transition to ART, and if the winning section 2 is won, a gaming state (ART It moves to ART through a sign.

Although the contents partially overlap with those of the first embodiment, the meanings of terms in the present embodiment are as follows.
The “condition device” is a lottery target composed of one or more combinations. When one condition device is won, the combination included in the condition device is won.
The condition device related to the special combination (combination; bonus) is referred to as “combination condition device”, the condition device related to the small combination is referred to as “winning condition device”, and the condition device related to replay is referred to as “replay condition device”. . The winning condition device and the replay condition device are collectively referred to as “winning and replay condition device”.

The “condition device number” is a number for identifying a condition device, and is determined for each condition device.
A number for identifying an accessory condition device is referred to as an “object condition device number”, a number for identifying a winning condition device is referred to as a “winning condition device number”, and a number for identifying a replay condition device. This is referred to as “replay condition device number”. The winning condition device number and the replay condition device number are collectively referred to as “winning and replay condition device number”.
The “winning number” is a number determined based on the random number value acquired from the random number generation means. One winning number is determined based on one random value.

As described in the first embodiment, the role lottery means 61 is a means for performing lottery (decision or selection) of the condition device (winning role). Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as a conditional device lottery (decision or selection) means, a winning combination lottery (decision or selection) means, and the like.
Further, the combination lottery means 61 includes a random number generation means and a random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number generated by the random number generation means, as in the first embodiment.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the winning lottery means 61 includes a winning number determining means that determines a winning number based on the random number value acquired by the random number acquiring means, and a condition device that determines the condition device number based on the determined winning number. Number determination means.

  The random number generation means generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal number). For example, a counter that performs one count at 200 n (nano) sec with a range of “0” to “65535” as one cycle can be provided, and the count value of this counter can be a random number. This counter keeps counting random numbers while the slot machine 10 is powered on. This is the same as in the first embodiment.

The random number acquisition means acquires the random number generated by the random number generation means when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. This is the same as in the first embodiment.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on), the random number acquisition unit acquires (latches) a random value from the counter and stores (stores) it in the random value register.
Here, the random value register is a register built in the main CPU 55, and is a register that cannot be written and can only be read from the program.
When the program reads the random value stored in the random value register, the random value register is cleared.

The winning number determining means determines the winning number based on the random number value acquired by the random number acquiring means.
In the present embodiment, the winning number determination means corresponds to the internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and the lottery determination processing in FIG.
The condition device number determination means determines the condition device number based on the winning number determined by the winning number determination means.
In the present embodiment, the condition device number determination means corresponds to the processing of condition device number set 1 in FIG. 89 described later.

FIG. 74A shows the winning number definition (1) in the present embodiment. FIG. 75 (a) is a diagram showing the winning number definition (2) in the present embodiment and is a diagram following FIG. 74 (a).
The winning number definition defines the correspondence between the winning number and the condition device number.
As shown in FIG. 74 (b), “@NB_REP_A EQU 1; replay A condition device number” indicates that “@NB_REP_A” indicates “replay A condition device number” and “replay A condition device number” is “1”. "", And the winning number corresponding to "@NB_REP_A" is "1".
When the winning number is determined to be “1”, the “replay A condition device” is independently won. The winning numbers “2” to “9” are the same as the winning numbers “1”.

Also, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), “@NB_WIN_A EQO 10; small role A condition device number” indicates that “@NB_WIN_A” indicates “small role A condition device number”, “small role A condition device number” This means that the “number” is “10” and the winning number corresponding to “@NB_WIN_A” is “10”.
When the winning number is determined to be “10”, the “small role A condition device” is independently won. The winning numbers “11” to “30” are the same as the winning numbers “10”.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), “@ BBA_WIN_E2 EQU 31; 1BBA + small role E2 double winning” indicates that “@ BBA_WIN_E2” indicates “double winning of 1BBA and small role E2”, “@ BBA_WIN_E2 Means that the winning number corresponding to “31” is “31”.
When the winning number is determined to be “31”, “1 BBA condition device” and “small role E2 condition device” are overlapped.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), “@BBB EQU 32; 1BBB single winner” indicates that “@BBB” indicates “single winner of 1BBB”, and the winning number corresponding to “@BBB” is “ 32 ”.
When the winning number is determined to be “32”, the “1BBB condition device” is independently won.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 75 (d), “@BBA EQU 34; 1BBA single winning + addition” indicates that “@BBA” indicates “1BBA single winning and advantageous section addition”, “@BBA” This means that the winning number corresponding to is “34”.
When the winning number is determined to be “34”, it is determined that the “1BBA condition device” is won independently and the number of games in the advantageous section is added.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75 (e), “@ AT1_BBA_WD EQU 44; 1BBA + small role D overlapping winning + advantageous interval 1” is “@ AT1_BBA_WD” is “1BBA and small role D overlapping winning and advantageous interval 1” "Winning of" means that the winning number corresponding to "@ AT1_BBA_WD" is "44".
When the winning number is determined to be “44”, it is determined that the “1 BBA condition device” and the “small role D condition device” are won and the transition to the advantageous section 1 is made.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a) and FIG. 75 (a), in this embodiment, the winning numbers are determined from “1” to “52”. Then, the winning number determining means determines any one of the numerical values “0” to “52” as the winning number.
As shown in FIG. 74 (a), the winning numbers “1” to “9” correspond to the replay condition device numbers “1” to “9”, respectively, and the winning numbers “10” to “9” The “30” number corresponds to the winning condition device numbers “10” to “30”, respectively.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the winning numbers "31" to "33" are used for the single winning of the accessory condition device or the overlapping winning combination of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device. Correspondingly, the winning numbers “34” to “42” correspond to the addition of the advantageous section, and the winning numbers “43” to “47” correspond to the shift to the advantageous section 1 and the winning number “ Nos. 48 ”to“ 52 ”correspond to the transition to the advantageous section 2.

In the present embodiment, when the winning number is determined to be “34” to “42” during the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section is added, but the present invention is not limited to this. .
For example, when an ART is being executed during an advantageous section, if the winning number is determined to be “34” to “42”, a game that can execute ART during the advantageous section uniformly or by lottery. The number of times may be increased.

In addition, for example, in a case where a Gasse game (a game state in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit although there is no right to shift to ART) is executed during the advantageous section, the winning number is “34”- When the number is determined to be “42”, the right to move to ART may be granted uniformly or by lottery.
Thus, instead of adding the number of games in the advantageous section, the game state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section may be changed so as to be advantageous to the player.

Note that “when the winning number is determined as“ 34 ”to“ 42 ”” means when the winning number is determined as any of “34” to “42”.
Further, the number of games to be added to the number of games in the advantageous section and the change contents of the game state (the performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section can be appropriately set according to the type of the determined winning number.

FIG. 76A is a diagram showing a winning number conversion data definition.
The winning number conversion data definition defines the definition of data used when determining the condition device number from the winning number.
As shown in FIG. 76 (b), “@NB_TRNS EQ @ BBA_WIN_E2; conversion start number” indicates that “@NB_TRNS” indicates “conversion start number”, and the value corresponding to “@NB_TRNS” is “@ BBA_WIN_E2”. It means that.
As shown in FIG. 75A, “@ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
Therefore, “@NB_TRNS” = “@ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or greater than the “conversion start number”, the conditional device number is determined from the winning number using the winning number conversion table.

As shown in FIG. 76 (c), “@NB_TRNS_AT EQU @ AT1_BBA; advantageous section conversion start number” corresponds to “@NB_TRNS_AT” indicating “advantage section conversion start number” and “@NB_TRNS_AT”. It means that the value is “@ AT1_BBA”.
As shown in FIG. 75A, “@ AT1_BBA” = “43”.
Therefore, “@NB_TRNS_AT” = “@ AT1_BBA” = “43”.
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or greater than the “favorable section conversion start number”, the winning section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is won (determined to shift).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), “@ NB_1BBA EQU 1; 1BBA conditional device number” indicates that “@ NB_1BBA” indicates “1BBA conditional device number”, and the value corresponding to “@ NB_1BBA” It means “1”. That is, it means that “1BBA condition device number” is “1”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 76 (e), “@ NB_AT1 EQ 1; advantageous section number 1” indicates that “@ NB_AT1” indicates “advantageous section number 1”, and the value corresponding to “@ NB_AT1” is “ 1 ”.

FIG. 77A shows a winning number conversion table.
The winning number conversion table is a table that defines data used when determining the condition device number from the winning number, and is stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50.
As shown in FIG. 77 (a), the winning number conversion table corresponds to the winning numbers determined when the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means are "31" to "52". Used when determining the condition device number and advantageous section number.
Here, “DEFB” is a pseudo instruction “reserves an area of 1 byte (8 bits) on a memory and stores data therein” in an assembly language.
When multiple data are listed in the DEFB line separated by commas, multiple 1-byte areas are allocated in order of address on the memory, and each data separated by commas is sequentially stored in each allocated area. Means to do.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (c), “DEFB @ NB_1BBA, @ NB_WIN_E2, 0; winning number 31” stores “@ NB_1BBA” at address ## 0 (for example, address 1600 (H)), and address # This means that “@ NB_WIN_E2” is stored in ## 1 (for example, address 1601 (H)) and “0” is stored in address ## 2 (for example, address 1602 (H)).

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), “@ NB_1BBA” = “1”, and as shown in FIG. 74 (a), “@ NB_WIN_E2” = “28”.
Therefore, “1” is stored in the address ## 0, and “28” is stored in the address ## 1.

That is,
Address ## 0 (address 1600 (H)) 1: Equipment condition device number Address ## 1 (address 1601 (H)) 28: Winning and replay condition device number Address ## 2 (address 1602 (H)) ) 0: Advantageous section number.
Each data stored from address ## 0 to address ## 2 is used when the winning number is determined to be “31”.

As shown in FIG. 77 (d), “DEFB @ NB_1BBB, 0, 0; winning number 32” stores “@ NB_1BBB” at address ## 3 (for example, address 1603 (H)), and the address This means that “0” is stored in ## 4 (for example, address 1604 (H)) and “0” is stored in address ## 5 (for example, address 1605 (H)).
As shown in FIG. 76 (a), “@ NB_1BBB” = “2”.
Therefore, “2” is stored in the address ## 3.

That is,
Address ## 3 (address 1603 (H)) 2: Equipment condition device number Address ## 4 (address 1604 (H)) 0: Winning and replay condition device number Address ## 5 (address 1605 (H)) ) 0: Advantageous section number.
And each data memorize | stored from the address ## 3 to the address ## 5 is used when the winning number is determined to be “32”.

FIG. 78A is a diagram showing a winning number lottery data definition.
The winning number lottery data definition defines the definition of data used when the winning number is determined from a random value in the lottery determination.
The “winning number identifier” is an identifier indicating that the data includes winning number data.
“Winning number data” is data indicating a winning number determined in the lottery determination.

And “@LT_NUM EQU 10000000B; winning number identifier” means that “@LT_NUM” indicates “winning number identifier” and that data corresponding to “@LT_NUM” is “10000000 (B)”.
“@BT_NUM EQ 7” indicates that the bit corresponding to the winning number identifier is “bit 7”, and when the bit 7 is “1”, the winning number identifier is on and the bit 7 is “0”. In some cases, the winning number identifier is off.

The “repetition number identifier” is an identifier indicating that the data includes repetition number data.
“Repetition count data” is data indicating the number of times the determination process is repeated in the lottery determination.
And “@LT_LOP EQ 01000000B; repetition number identifier” means that “@LT_LOP” indicates “repetition number identifier” and that data corresponding to “@LT_LOP” is “01000000 (B)”.
Also, in “@BT_LOP EQ 6”, the bit corresponding to the repetition number identifier is “bit 6”. When bit 6 is “1”, the repetition number identifier is on, and when bit 6 is “0”. Means that the repetition count identifier is off.

“Identifier by setting value” is an identifier indicating that the probability data is determined for each setting value.
“Probability data” is data indicating a winning range out of the entire range of random values.
Therefore, winning probability = “probability data / entire range taken by random number value”.
For example, when the entire range of random values is “65536” and the probability data is “125”, the winning probability is “125/65536”.
The probability data may also be referred to as determination value, determination data, numeric value, or numeric data.

“@LT_RNK EQ 00100000B; identifier by setting value” means that “@LT_RNK” indicates “identifier by setting value” and that the data corresponding to “@LT_RNK” is “00100000 (B)”. To do.
In “@BT_LOP EQ 5”, the bit corresponding to the identifier for each set value is “bit 5”. When bit 5 is “1”, the identifier for each set value is on, and bit 5 is “0”. Means that the repetition number identifier is off.

The “2-byte data identifier” is an identifier indicating that the probability data is 2-byte data.
“@LT_WRD EQ 00010000B; 2-byte data identifier” means that “@LT_WRD” is “2-byte data identifier” and that the data corresponding to “@LT_WRD” is “00010000 (B)”. To do.
In “@BT_WRD EQU 4”, the bit corresponding to the 2-byte data identifier is “bit 4”, and when the bit 4 is “1”, the 2-byte data identifier is on, and the bit 4 is “0”. Means that the 2-byte data identifier is off.

The “1-byte data identifier” is an identifier indicating that the probability data is 1-byte data.
“@LT_BYT EQ 00001000B; 1-byte data identifier” means that “@LT_BYT” is “1-byte data identifier” and that the data corresponding to “@LT_BYT” is “00001000 (B)”. To do.
In “@BT_BYT EQU 3”, the bit corresponding to the 1-byte data identifier is “bit 3”. When bit 3 is “1”, the 1-byte data identifier is on, and bit 3 is “0”. Means that the 1-byte data identifier is off.

The “determination end identifier” is an identifier indicating that the lottery determination ends.
“@LT_END EQU 00H” means that “@LT_END” is “determination end identifier” and that data corresponding to “@LT_END” is “00H”.

  FIG. 79 shows an all RT common lottery table (1). FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (2) and is a diagram following FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (3) and is a diagram following FIG. Further, FIG. 82 (a) is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (4) and is a diagram following FIG.

FIG. 82B shows a non-RT lottery table. FIG. 82 (c) shows an RT1 lottery table. Further, FIG. 83 (a) shows the RT2 lottery table. FIG. 83 (b) shows the RT3 lottery table. FIG. 84 (a) shows the RT4 lottery table. Further, FIG. 84 (b) is a diagram showing a 1BBA lottery table. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a 1BBB lottery table.
These lottery tables are used in internal lottery (lottery for determining a winning number from a random value) and are stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50.

  The all-RT common lottery table is commonly used in non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4. In other words, all RT common lottery table is a lottery table used when determining the winning number regardless of the RT state except when 1BB (first-type accessory continuous operation device; first-type big bonus) is operated. Means. Furthermore, the non-RT lottery table is used in non-RT, the RT1 lottery table is used in RT1, the RT2 lottery table is used in RT2, and the RT3 lottery table. The table is used in RT3, and the RT4 lottery table is used in RT4.

At the time of non-RT, first, lottery determination is performed using the common RT common lottery table. At this time, if the winning number is determined to be “00 (H)”, then a lottery determination is performed using the non-RT lottery table.
On the other hand, when the winning number is determined to be a value other than “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table, the internal lottery ends without using the non-RT lottery table.
Although details will be described later, the fact that the winning number is “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table means that the winning number is not determined in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table. Means that.
In addition, the fact that the winning number is a value other than “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table means that one of the winning numbers is determined in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table. Means that.

At RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4, as in the case of non-RT, first, lottery determination is performed using all RT common lottery tables. At this time, if the winning number is determined to be “00 (H)”, then a lottery determination is performed using a lottery table corresponding to RT.
On the other hand, when the winning number is determined to be a value other than “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the common RT common lottery table, the internal lottery ends without using the lottery table corresponding to the RT. .
In 1BBA, lottery determination is performed using the 1BBA lottery table, and in 1BBB, lottery determination is performed using the 1BBB lottery table.

“TBL_LOT_DAT1” in FIG. 79 indicates an all-RT common lottery table.
When all RT common lottery tables are set as the lottery table, first, “1BBA + small role E2 condition device lottery data” is used to determine whether or not the lottery is true. At this time, when winning, the winning number is determined as “@ BBA_WIN_E2” (= “31”), and the lottery determination ends.
On the other hand, if the winning / non-winning determination using “1BBA + small role E2 conditional device lottery data” is made, the winning / non-winning determination is performed using “1BBB conditional device lottery data”.

Further, whether or not the winning is determined using “1BBB condition device lottery data”. At this time, if winning is determined, the winning number is determined to be “31 + 1” (= “32”), and the lottery determination ends.
On the other hand, if the winning / non-winning determination using “1BBB condition device lottery data” is made, the winning / non-winning determination is performed using “1BBB + small role D condition device lottery data”.
When winning number data is included, such as “1BBA + small role E2 condition device lottery data”, the winning / no-go determination is performed using the winning number data.
Further, when the winning number data is not included as in “1BBB condition device lottery data”, the current winning / failing is determined using data obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data used in the previous winning / failing determination. Make a decision.

As described above, when the winning number data is a serial number, data obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data used in the previous determination of success / failure can be used for the current determination of success / failure. Since it is not necessary to determine the winning number data, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.
In addition, when the winning number data is not a sequential number, the winning number data is determined in the lottery table, and the winning / notifying determination is performed using the winning number data, so that even if the winning number data is not a sequential number (for example, jumping) Or return), you can get the appropriate lottery results.

“1BBB + small role D condition device lottery data” and thereafter are the same as “1BBA + small role E2 condition device lottery data” and “1BBB condition device lottery data”.
Then, when the determination is “no end” and the determination is “no end”, the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table ends.

In addition, “DEFB @LT_NUM OR @ BBA_WIN_E2; winning number identifier ;; + winning number data” in FIG. 79 is obtained by ORing “@LT_NUM” and “@ BBA_WIN_E2”. It is stored in the first line of “E2 condition device lottery data”.
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, “@LT_NUM” indicates a winning number identifier, and its value is “10000000 (B)”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), “@ BBA_WIN_E2” indicates a winning number corresponding to 1BBA + small role E2 duplicate winning, and its value is “31” (binary number “00011111 (B)”). is there.

Furthermore, when “@LT_NUM” and “@ BBA_WIN_E2” are ORed,
10000000 (B): @LT_NUM
00011111 (B): @ BBA_WIN_E2
10011111 (B): Data after OR operation.
In other words, “DEFB @LT_NUM OR @ BBA_WIN_E2” indicates that “10011111 (B)” is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54.

Thus, the winning number identifier and the winning number data can be represented by one 8-bit data. In this case, among the 8-bit data, bits 0 to 6 indicate winning number data, and bit 7 indicates a winning number identifier.
Further, the comment “; winning number identifier ;; + winning number data” indicates that the data includes the winning number identifier and the winning number data.
When bit 7 is “1” as in “10011111 (B)”, it is determined that the winning number identifier is on, and it is determined that the data includes winning number data, and bits 0 to 0 are determined. Bit 6 is used as winning number data.

In addition, “DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_RNK; 1-byte data identifier;; + identifier for each set value” in FIG. It is stored in the second row of the “small E2 condition device lottery data”.
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, “@LT_BYT” indicates a 1-byte data identifier, and its value is “00001000 (B)”.
“@LT_RNK” indicates an identifier for each set value, and the value is “00100000 (B)”.

Furthermore, when “@LT_BYT” and “@LT_RNK” are ORed,
00001000 (B): @LT_BYT
00100000 (B): @LT_RNK
00101000 (B): Data after OR operation.

In other words, “DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_RNK” indicates that “00101000 (B)” is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54.
Thus, the 1-byte data identifier and the setting value-specific identifier can be represented by one 8-bit data.
Further, the comment “; 1-byte data identifier;; + + identifier by setting value” indicates that the data includes a 1-byte data identifier and an identifier by setting value.

When the probability data is 1 byte, the data with the 1-byte data identifier turned on (bit 3 is set to “1”) is stored. When the probability data is 2 bytes, the 2-byte data identifier is turned on. (Bit 4 is set to “1”).
In this way, data in which either the 1-byte data identifier or the 2-byte data identifier is turned on is stored, and data in which both the 1-byte data identifier and the 2-byte data identifier are turned on is not stored.
Further, when probability data is determined for each set value, data in which the identifier for each set value is turned on (bit 5 is set to “1”) is stored, and common probability data is determined for all the set values. At this time, the data in which the identifier for each set value is turned off (bit 5 is set to “0”) is stored.

As described above, when the probability data is different between the setting 1 and the setting 6, the probability data for each setting value is set in the lottery table, and the data in which the identifier for each setting value is turned on is stored. Thereby, the winning number can be drawn with a different probability for each set value.
When the probability data is common to the settings 1 to 6, one probability data is set in the lottery table, and data with the setting value identifier turned off is stored. Thus, since one probability data need only be determined in the lottery table, the amount of ROM 54 used by the lottery table can be reduced.

Further, “DEFB 10; probability data (setting 1)” in FIG. 79 indicates that “10” (“00001010 (B)” in binary number) is stored as the probability data used in setting 1. Show.
Actually, the probability data is determined for each setting value of setting 1 to setting 6, but in FIG. 79, the probability data of setting 1 and setting 6 are representatively illustrated, and the probability of setting 2 to setting 5 is shown. The data is not shown. In FIG. 79, “:” means that the probability data of setting 2 to setting 5 is not shown. The same applies to the lottery tables after FIG.

Based on the setting value, whether the 1-byte data identifier or the 2-byte data identifier is on, the setting value-specific identifier is on or off, and the setting value-specific identifier is on, The address of the probability data to be used is calculated (designated), and the probability determination is performed using the probability data corresponding to the calculated (designated) address.
A method for acquiring the probability data will be described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, the information regarding the setting value is stored in a predetermined storage area (setting value data storage area “_NB_RANK”) of the RWM 53.
In addition, as information regarding the set value, any one of “0” to “5” is stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”.
When “0” is stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”, “1” is displayed on the set value display LED 73 and “5” is stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”. Is displayed, the set value display LED 73 displays “6”.

That is, when “N” (N is an integer) is stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”, the control value is controlled by the main control board 50 so that “N + 1” is displayed on the set value display LED 73. The
Therefore, the description about the set value such as the set value “1” and the set value “6” is a numerical value displayed on the set value display LED 73, and is not necessarily the information stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”. Is not limited.
Of course, the setting value data storage area “_NB_RANK” may be set such that any one of “1” to “6” is stored as information about the setting value.

Further, “DEFB @LT_LOP OR 12; repetition number identifier;; + repetition number data” in FIG. It is shown that the data obtained by the calculation is stored in the first row of “small role B1 condition device lottery data to small role B12 condition device lottery data”.
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, “@LT_LOP” indicates the repetition count identifier, and its value is “01000000 (B)”.

Also, when “@LT_LOP” and “12 (D)” (binary “00001100 (B)”) are ORed,
01000000 (B): @LT_LOP
0000100 (B): 12 (D)
0100100 (B): Data after OR operation.
In other words, “DEFB @LT_LOP OR 12” indicates that “01001100 (B)” is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54.

Thereby, the repetition number identifier and the repetition number data can be represented by one 8-bit data. In this case, among the 8-bit data, bit 0 to bit 5 indicate the repetition count data, and bit 6 indicates the repetition count identifier.
The comment “; repetition number identifier ;; + repetition number data” indicates that the data includes a repetition number identifier and repetition number data.
When bit 6 is “1” as in “01100100 (B)”, it is determined that the repetition count identifier is on, and it is determined that the data includes repetition count data. Bit 5 is used as the repetition count data.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the flow of lottery processing such as the condition device number.
In step S1001, the main CPU 55 continues to determine whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated in a state where a specified number of game media are bet (betted). If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to the next step S1002.
In step S1002, the main CPU 55 acquires (latches) a random number value from a random number generation means (counter), and stores (stores) the acquired random value in a random value register. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1003.
In step S1003, the main CPU 55 controls the blocker 45 so that insertion of medals is not permitted. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1004.

In step S1004, the main CPU 55 executes internal lottery 1 (FIG. 87). The internal lottery 1 is a process for determining a winning number from a random value. When the internal lottery 1 is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1005.
In step S1005, the main CPU 55 executes condition device number set 1 (FIG. 89). Condition device number set 1 is a process for determining a condition device number and an advantageous section number from a winning number. When the conditional device number set 1 is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1006.
In step S1006, rotation of all the reels 31 is started, and the rotating reels 31 can be stopped by operating the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the flow of the internal lottery 1 process.
The internal lottery 1 is a process for determining a winning number from a random value. Note that the internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and the lottery determination process in FIG. 88 to be described later correspond to winning number determination means.
When the process proceeds to the internal lottery 1 in step S1004, first, in step S1011, the main CPU 55 stores the random number value stored in the random number value register in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1012.

In step S1012, the main CPU 55 stores in the HL register the top address of the lottery table corresponding to the operating state of the accessory (when 1BBA is operating, when 1BBB is operating, or when the accessory is not operating).
Specifically, at the time of 1BBA operation, the leading address of the 1BBA lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_1BBA) shown in FIG. 84B is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the data storage area of “DEFB @LT_NUM OR @NB_REP_D” in FIG. 84B is stored in the HL register.

When the 1BBB is operated, the leading address of the 1BBB lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_1BBB) shown in FIG. 85 is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the data storage area of “DEFB @LT_NUM OR @NB_REP_D” in FIG. 85 is stored in the HL register.
Furthermore, when the accessory is not in operation, the start address of all RT common lottery tables (TBL_LOT_DAT1) shown in FIGS. 79 to 82A is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the data storage area of “DEFB @LT_NUM OR @ BBA_WIN_E2” in FIG. 79 is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1013, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not an accessory is operating.
Here, “_FL_ACTION” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores a flag indicating the operating state of the accessory.
Further, when the value of a predetermined bit (eg, bit 2) of “_FL_ACTION” is “1”, it indicates that the accessory is operating, and when it is “0”, it indicates that the accessory is not operating.

In step S <b> 1013, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value of the predetermined bit in the storage area “_FL_ACTION” of the RWM 53 is “0”, thereby determining whether the accessory is operating.
Here, when the value of the predetermined bit of “_FL_ACTION” is “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the accessory is not in operation (No), and proceeds to the next step S1014.
On the other hand, when the value of the predetermined bit of “_FL_ACTION” is “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that the accessory is operating (Yes), skips steps S1014 to S1016, and proceeds to step S1017. move on.

In step S1014, the main CPU 55 executes a lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1012. The lottery determination is a process of determining whether or not the winning is made using the probability data. And if lottery determination is performed, it will progress to following step S1015.
In step S1015, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a lottery determination has been won.
Here, at the end of the lottery determination, the C register stores a value indicating the winning number. In addition, when the value stored in the C register is “00 (H)”, it indicates that the lottery determination has not been won, and the value stored in the C register is other than “00 (H)”. When it is, it indicates that the lottery determination has been won.

In step S1015, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in the C register is “00 (H)”, thereby determining whether or not the lottery determination is won.
Here, when the value stored in the C register is “00 (H)”, the main CPU 55 determines that it has not won in the lottery determination (No), and proceeds to the next step S1016.
On the other hand, when the value stored in the C register is other than “00 (H)”, the main CPU 55 determines that the lottery determination has been won (Yes), skips steps S1016 and S1017, The process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S1016, the main CPU 55 stores the top address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4) in the HL register.
Specifically, at the non-RT time, the leading address of the non-RT time lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT0) shown in FIG. 82B is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the data storage area of “DEFB @LT_NUM OR @NB_REP_A” in FIG. 82B is stored in the HL register.

At RT1, the start address of the RT1 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT1) shown in FIG. 82 (c) is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the data storage area of “DEFB @LT_NUM OR @NB_REP_A” in FIG. 82C is stored in the HL register.
RT2 time, RT3 time and RT4 time are the same as in non-RT time and RT1 time.
Then, when the leading address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is stored in the HL register, the process proceeds to the next step S1017.

In step S1017, the main CPU 55 executes lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1012 or S1016.
Specifically, the lottery determination is executed using the lottery table set in step S1012 when the accessory is activated, and if the lottery determination in step S1014 is not won when the accessory is not activated, the lottery table is determined in step S1016. A lottery determination is executed using the set lottery table. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

As described above, when the accessory is not in operation (“No” in step S1013), the lottery determination is performed at least once in step S1014, and the lottery determination is performed twice in steps S1014 and S1017 at the maximum. .
On the other hand, at the time of operating the accessory (when “Yes” in step S1013), the lottery determination is performed only once in step S1017.

In addition, when the accessory is not operated, the first lottery determination is performed using all RT common lottery tables in step S1014. If the winning combination is not won at this time, then in step S1017, the lottery table corresponding to the RT is determined. Is used for the second lottery determination.
As described above, in any of the non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4, probability data is defined in all RT common lottery tables for condition devices having the same winning probability. Thereby, since a lottery table can be made common, the usage-amount of ROM54 by a lottery table can be reduced.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the flow of lottery determination processing.
The lottery determination is a process of determining whether or not the winning is made using the probability data.
When proceeding to the lottery determination in step S1014 or S1017, first, in step S1021, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number identifier is on (data including the winning number identifier).
Here, at the start of the lottery determination process, the start address of the lottery table corresponding to the operating state of the accessory is stored in the HL register (step S1012 in FIG. 87). For example, when the accessory is not in operation, the HL register stores an address indicating a data storage area of “DEFB @LT_NUM OR @ BBA_WIN_E2” in FIG.

When bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, the winning number identifier is on. When bit 7 is “0”, the winning number identifier is off. It shows that.
In step S1021, the main CPU 55 determines whether the bit number 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, so that the winning number identifier is on (including the winning number identifier). Data).

Here, when the bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number identifier is ON (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1022.
On the other hand, when the bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number identifier is not on (No), skips step S1022, The process proceeds to S1023.
If “No” in step S1021, the main CPU 55 maintains the value of the C register. At this time, the value stored in the C register is, for example, the value updated in step S1028 described later. Further, the value stored in the C register is determined as a winning number when it is determined to be winning (Yes) in step S1027 described later.

In step S1022, the main CPU 55 acquires winning number data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets bit 7 of data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register to “0” and stores it in the C register.

For example, the data of “DEFB @LT_NUM OR @ BBA_WIN_E2” in FIG. 79 is “10011111 (B)”.
Of “10011111 (B)”, bit 0 to bit 6 indicate winning number data, and bit 7 indicates a winning number identifier.
Then, the main CPU 55 sets bit 7 of “10011111 (B)” to “0” and stores “00011111 (B)” as winning number data in the C register.
Thereafter, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. That is, the value of the HL register (data address for lottery) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1023.

In step S1023, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the repetition number identifier is ON (data including the repetition number identifier).
Here, when bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, it indicates that the repetition number identifier is on, and when bit 6 is “0”, the repetition number identifier is off. Indicates that there is.
In step S1023, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, thereby turning on the repetition count identifier (including the repetition count identifier). Data).

Here, when the bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that the repetition number identifier is on (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1024.
On the other hand, when bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the repetition number identifier is not on (No), skips step S1024, The process proceeds to S1025.
If “No” in the step S1023, the main CPU 55 sets “1” in the B register. Note that “1” set in the B register at this time indicates that the number of times of determination (the number of repetitions) is one.

In step S1024, the main CPU 55 acquires repetition count data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets bit 6 of data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register to “0” and stores it in the B register.

For example, the data of “DEFB @LT_LOP OR 12” in FIG. 81 is “01001100 (B)”.
Of “01100100 (B)”, bits 0 to 5 indicate repetition count data, and bit 6 indicates a repetition count identifier.
Then, the main CPU 55 sets bit 6 of “01100100 (B)” to “0” and stores “00001100 (B)” as repetition count data in the B register. In other words, data indicating that the process is repeated 12 times is stored in the B register.
Further, “0” is stored in the A register as an initial value.
Thereafter, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. Thereby, the value of the HL register includes an identifier (1 byte data identifier or 2 byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and an identifier (setting) indicating whether the probability data is different according to the set value. This indicates the address of the storage area where the data including the identifier by value is stored. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1025.

In step S1025, the main CPU 55 acquires probability data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 first saves the value of the HL register and the value of the BC register in the stack area of the RWM 53.
Next, data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the B register. Thereby, the B register has an identifier (1 byte data identifier or 2 byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and an identifier (setting value) indicating whether the probability data is different depending on the setting value. Data including another identifier is stored.

Thereafter, “1” is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the head address of the storage area in which the probability data is stored.
After that, based on the data stored in the B register (data indicating whether the probability data is 1-byte data or 2-byte data and whether the probability data differs depending on the set value), the probability data Is calculated (designated), and probability data corresponding to the computed (designated) address is acquired from the lottery table and stored in the HL register or the A register. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1026.

Here, the acquisition method of probability data is demonstrated in detail.
As described above, in the predetermined storage area (setting value data storage area “_NB_RANK”) of the RWM 53, any value from “0” to “5” is stored as information regarding the setting value.
The A register stores “0” as an initial value.

Example 1) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the setting value-specific identifier is off: The value of the A register (“0”) is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. In this case, the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). Then, the value of the HL register is set as an address of probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is acquired from the lottery table.
When the probability data is 1-byte data, the acquired probability data is stored in the A register.

Example 2) When the 1-byte data identifier is ON and the identifier for each set value is ON Since the identifier for each set value is ON, the value of the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK” is stored in the A register. As a result, “N” (N is a value corresponding to the set value; any value from “0” to “5”) is stored in the A register.
Thereafter, the value of the A register (“N”) is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.

  Here, when “0” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “1”), the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area in which the first probability data is stored. For example, in the case of 1BBA + small role E2 condition device lottery data in all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79, the address of “DEFB 10; probability data (setting 1)” is indicated.

Further, when “5” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “6”), “5” is added to the value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area in which the sixth probability data is stored. For example, in the case of 1BBA + small role E2 condition device lottery data in all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79, the address of “DEFB 20; probability data (setting 6)” is indicated.
Then, the value of the HL register is set as an address of probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is acquired from the lottery table.
Note that storing the acquired probability data in the A register is the same as in Example 1.

Example 3) When the 2-byte data identifier is ON and the identifier for each set value is OFF, the value of the A register (“0”) is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value. Further, the value of the A register (“0”) is added to the value to obtain a new value of the HL register. That is, adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register is repeated twice. In this case, the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). Then, the value of the HL register is set as an address of probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is acquired from the lottery table.
When the probability data is 2-byte data, the acquired probability data is stored in the HL register.

Example 4) When the 2-byte data identifier is on and the set value specific identifier is on Since the set value specific identifier is on, the value of the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK” is stored in the A register. As a result, “N” (N is a value corresponding to the set value; any value from “0” to “5”) is stored in the A register.
Further, the value of the A register (“N”) is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register, and the value of the A register (“N”) is further added to the value of the new HL register. The value of That is, adding the value of the A register (“N”) to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register is repeated twice.

  Here, when “0” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “1”), the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area in which the first probability data is stored. For example, in the case of the small role A condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81, the address of “DEFW 1000; probability data (setting 1)” is indicated.

Further, when “5” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “6”), “10” is added to the value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area in which the sixth probability data is stored. For example, in the case of the small role A condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (3) of FIG. 81, the address of “DEFW 1250; probability data (setting 6)” is indicated.
Then, the value of the HL register is set as an address of probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is acquired from the lottery table.
Note that storing the acquired probability data in the HL register is the same as in Example 3.

  As described above, the HL register stores the start address (address of the first probability data) of the storage area in which the probability data is stored, and uses the value stored in the A register as the offset value. The probability data corresponding to the set value is acquired by adding to the value.

Here, when the identifier by setting value is OFF, the initial value (“0”) stored in the A register is added to the value of the HL register as an offset value.
When the identifier by setting value is ON, the value of the setting value data storage area “_NB_RANK” is stored in the A register, and the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register as an offset value.
As a result, the processing can be made common when the probability data is common to all the setting values and when the probability data differs depending on the setting values, so that the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

When the probability data is 1-byte data, the value of the A register is added once to the HL register. When the probability data is 2-byte data, the value of the A register is added to the HL register twice.
As a result, the process of calculating (designating) the address of the probability data can be simplified, so that the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

When the processing proceeds to step S1026, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not it is correct.
Here, when the lottery determination is performed using the probability data of the 2-byte data and the random value, the main CPU 55 first subtracts the value of the HL register from the value of the DE register to obtain a new value of the DE register. .
When the lottery determination is performed using the probability data of the 1-byte data and the random number value, the main CPU 55 first subtracts the value of the A register from the value of the DE register to obtain a new value of the DE register.
In this way, the value of the DE register is updated.
As described above, random numbers are stored in the DE register (step S1011 in FIG. 87). In step S1026, the probability data is subtracted from the DE register value to obtain a new DE register value.

Thereafter, the value of the HL register and the value of the BC register saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 are restored.
Thereby, the value of the HL register includes an identifier (1 byte data identifier or 2 byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and an identifier (setting) indicating whether the probability data is different according to the set value. This indicates the address of the storage area where the data including the identifier by value is stored. The value of the B register indicates the number of repetitions, and the value of the C register indicates the winning number.

In the next step S1027, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not it has been won.
Here, by subtracting the probability data from the value of the DE register, when the value of the DE register becomes smaller than “0” (when a carry occurs), “1” is set to the carry flag of the flag register. That is, the carry flag is set. “Carry occurs” means that the carry flag is set to “1”.
In step S1027, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning is made by determining whether or not “1” is set in the carry flag.

Here, when “1” is not set in the carry flag, the main CPU 55 determines that it has not won (No), and proceeds to the next step S1028.
On the other hand, when “1” is set in the carry flag, the main CPU 55 determines that it has been won (Yes), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the processing according to this flowchart.
In addition, the value stored in the C register when “Yes” in step S1027 indicates the winning number determined in the lottery determination.

In the next step S1028, the main CPU 55 updates the winning number data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the C register to obtain a new value of the C register. That is, the value of the C register is updated. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1029.
In step S1029, the main CPU 55 updates the repetition count data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register. That is, the value of the B register is updated. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1030.

In step S1030, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the B register is “0”.
Here, when the value of the B register is “0”, it indicates that the number of repetitions has ended, and when the value of the B register is not “0” (greater than “0”), the number of repetitions has ended. Indicates no.
In step S1030, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended by determining whether or not the value of the B register is “0”.

Here, when the value of the B register is “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the number of repetitions has ended (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1031.
On the other hand, when the value of the B register is not “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the number of repetitions has not ended (No), and returns to step S1025.

If “No” in step S1030, the value of the HL register is maintained, so that the determination of whether or not the determination is made in step S1026 is performed again using the same probability data as in the previous time.
As described above, since it is determined that the same probability data as the previous one is repeatedly used, it is not necessary to repeatedly determine the same probability data in the lottery table, so that the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

In step S1031, the main CPU 55 sets the address of the next lottery data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 updates the value of the HL register according to the following Example 1) to Example 4).
Example 1) When the 1-byte data identifier is ON and the setting value-specific identifier is OFF, “1 + 1” (= “2”) is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.

Example 2) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the identifier for each set value is on, “6 + 1” (= “7”) is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
Example 3) When the 2-byte data identifier is on and the identifier for each set value is off, add “1 × 2 + 1” (= “3”) to the value of the HL register, and To do.
Example 4) When the 2-byte data identifier is ON and the identifier for each set value is ON, “6 × 2 + 1” (= “13”) is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value To do.

As described above, in step S1026, the value of the HL register saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 is restored.
For this reason, at the time of proceeding to step S1031, the value of the HL register is an identifier (1 byte data identifier or 2 byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and whether the probability data differs according to the set value. It shows the address of a storage area in which data including an identifier indicating whether or not (identifier by setting value) is stored.

When the 1-byte data identifier is ON and the setting value-specific identifier is OFF, in the lottery data (for example, 1BBA condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79). The number of bytes of probability data is 1 byte.
Therefore, by adding “2” to the value of the HL register, the new value of the HL register is changed to the next lottery data (for example, 1BBA + small part D condition device in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79). This indicates the start address of the storage area of the lottery data (for example, the address of the storage area in which the data “DEFB @LT_BYT; 1-byte data identifier” is stored).

When the 1-byte data identifier is ON and the setting value-specific identifier is ON, the lottery data (for example, 1BBA + small E2 condition device lottery in all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79) The number of bytes of probability data in (data) is 6 bytes.
Therefore, by adding “7” to the value of the HL register, the new value of the HL register becomes the next lottery data (for example, 1BBB condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79). ) Storage area start address (for example, “DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_RNK; 1-byte data identifier;; + address of storage area in which data for each set value is stored” is stored).

Furthermore, when the 2-byte data identifier is on and the identifier by setting value is off, the lottery data (for example, for the small role D condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79). The number of bytes of probability data in (data) is 2 bytes.
Therefore, by adding “3” to the value of the HL register, the new value of the HL register is changed to the next lottery data (for example, the small role E1 condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79). For example, the address of the storage area where the data “DEFB @LT_WRD; 2-byte data identifier” is stored).

Further, when the 2-byte data identifier is ON and the setting value-specific identifier is ON, the lottery data (for example, the small role A condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81). The number of bytes of probability data in) is 12 bytes.
Therefore, by adding “13” to the value of the HL register, the new value of the HL register is changed to the next lottery data (for example, the small roles B1 to B1 in the all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81). B12 condition device lottery data) indicates the start address of the storage area (for example, “DEFB @LT_LOP OR 12; address of the storage area where the data of the repetition number identifier” is stored).

In the next step S1032, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is a determination end identifier (“00 (H)”).
Here, when the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “00 (H)”, the main CPU 55 determines that it is a determination end identifier (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1033.
On the other hand, when the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is not “00 (H)”, the main CPU 55 determines that it is not the determination end identifier (No), and returns to step S1021.

In the next step S1033, the main CPU 55 sets non-winning data.
Here, at the time of proceeding to step S1033, the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “00 (H)” (determination end identifier). In step S1033, the main CPU 55 stores “00 (H)”, which is data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register, in the C register as non-winning data. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In addition, the value stored in the C register at the end of the flowchart (lottery determination) indicates the winning number determined by the lottery determination.
When the process proceeds to step S1033, the value stored in the C register at the end of this flowchart is “00 (H)”. In this case, it will not be won (it will not win any conditional device).

In this way, by setting the data of the determination end identifier indicating the end of the lottery determination process to “00 (H)”, if any of the condition devices is not won in the lottery determination process, it is not won. The winning number “0” indicating (losing) is stored in the C register, and this flowchart is ended. The winning number less than “31” matches the winning and replay condition device number.
In other words, the winning number indicating non-winning can be stored in the C register by acquiring the data of the determination end identifier without newly setting the winning number indicating non-winning.
On the other hand, when “Yes” is obtained in step S1027, the value stored in the C register at the end of this flowchart is other than “00 (H)”. In this case, the winning of any condition device is determined (determined by a winning number other than “0”).

  Here, for example, as in the small role B1 condition device to the small role B12 condition device, a lottery result (also referred to as a push order small role) with a different degree of advantage (payout number) depending on the operation mode (push order) of the stop switch 42, As with the replay B1 condition device to the replay B3 condition device, with regard to the lottery result accompanied by the RT transition depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the advantage degree and the ratio of the RT transition are not biased depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. It is preferable to do so. That is, it is preferable not to bias the appearance frequency of correct answers depending on the pressing order.

For this reason, it is preferable to define the same probability data so that advantageous operation modes corresponding to the types of lottery results (condition devices) are equalized in each operation mode. That is, it is preferable to determine the same probability data so that the correct answer appearance frequency is equal in each pressing order.
In such a case, by determining the number of repetitions and performing lottery determination using the same probability data repeatedly, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table is reduced, and the frequency of appearance of correct answers is made equal in each pressing order. Therefore, a greater effect can be exhibited.

Furthermore, as described in step S1028, since the process for updating the winning number data is in the lottery determination process, it is not necessary to store the winning number data in the lottery table.
Then, by determining the winning number using the number of repetitions and the same probability data, the relevant condition devices (for example, the small role B1 condition device to the small role B12 condition device or the replay B1 condition device to the replay B3 condition). Device), consecutive winning numbers (the winning numbers from the small B1 condition device to the small B12 conditional device are “12” to “22”, and the winning number from the replay B1 conditional device to the replay B3 conditional device is “2”). No. “4”) can be obtained.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning number less than “31” matches the winning and replay condition device number.
Further, at least in the normal section, the winning and replay condition device numbers are not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 but are transmitted as the effect group numbers.
In such a case, consecutive winning numbers (for example, “12” to “22”) can be obtained for related condition devices (for example, the small role B1 condition device to the small role B12 condition device). Thus, when executing the process of converting the winning number into the effect group number, it is possible to determine the effect group number by determining to which range the acquired winning number belongs.
For this reason, since it is not necessary to have a table for determining which effect group number the acquired winning number is, the usage amount of the ROM 54 can be further reduced.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of the condition device number set 1.
The condition device number set 1 is a process for determining the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number. The processing of the conditional device number set 1 corresponds to conditional device number determination means.
When proceeding to the condition device number set 1 in step S1005, first, in step S1041, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is smaller than the conversion start number.

Here, at the start of processing of the conditional device number set 1, a value indicating the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is stored in the C register.
In step S1041, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts “@NB_TRNS” from the value of the A register. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), “@NB_TRNS” indicates a conversion start number, and its value is “@ BBA_WIN_E2”. Also, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), “@ BBA_WIN_E2” indicates that 1BBA and the small combination E2 have been won simultaneously, and the value thereof is “31”. Therefore, “@NB_TRNS” = “31”.

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts “31” from the value of the A register, and when a carry occurs due to the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), and skips steps S1042 to S1046. The process proceeds to step S1047.
On the other hand, when no carry occurs due to subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), and proceeds to the next step S1042.
In step S1041, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by subtracting “31” from the value of the A register (winning number). However, even if the carry is subtracted, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates “winning number”.

In step S1042, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 first stores the calculation result of “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” − “@ NB_TRNS” × 3 in the HL register.
Here, “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” indicates the head address of the winning number conversion table (FIG. 77 (a)).
For example, “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” = “1600 (H)” is set.
Further, as described above, “@NB_TRNS” = “31”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1600 (H)"-"31 (D)" x 3
= "1600 (H)"-"5D (H)"
= "15A3 (H)"
It becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register three times.
For example, it is assumed that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is “32”.
Further, “32 (D)” = “20 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
“15A3 (H)” + “20 (H)” = “15C3 (H)” (first time)
“15C3 (H)” + “20 (H)” = “15E3 (H)” (second time)
“15E3 (H)” + “20 (H)” = “1603 (H)” (third time)
It becomes.
As a result, “the address of the condition device number and the advantageous section number corresponding to the winning number” is set in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the C register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1603 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “@ NB_1BBB” (= “2”). Further, this data indicates the “object condition device number” (FIGS. 77A and 77D).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “2” in the C register. As a result, “2” indicating “object condition device number” is stored in the C register. Thereafter, the value of the C register is maintained until this flowchart (condition device number set 1) is terminated.
Thereafter, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes “1604 (H)”.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the A register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1604 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “0”. In addition, this data indicates “winning and replay condition device number” (FIGS. 77A and 77D).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “0” in the A register. Accordingly, “0” indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register. Thereafter, the value of the A register is maintained until this flowchart (condition device number set 1) is terminated.

Thereafter, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes “1605 (H)”. Thereafter, the value of the HL register is maintained until this flowchart (condition device number set 1) is terminated.
When the value of the HL register is “1605 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “0”. Further, this data indicates an “advantageous section number” (FIGS. 77A and 77D).

In step S1043, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
Here, “_NB_CND_BNS” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores the accessory condition device number.
In addition, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, it indicates that the accessory condition device has not been won, and when it is not “0”, it indicates that the accessory condition device has been won.

Furthermore, when the previous game is a non-internal game, and when the game condition device is won in the current game, the main CPU 55 stores the character condition device number in “_NB_CND_BNS” in step S1046 described later.
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination included in the selected combination condition device is stopped on the active line, the main CPU 55 clears the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (sets it to “0”).

For this reason, the previous game is a non-inside game, and when the game condition device is won in the current game, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” in step S1043.
In step S1043, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is other than “0”, the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination included in the selected combination condition device is won for the combination condition device before the previous game. Means that has not yet stopped at the active line. In other words, it means that the game is inside the game carrying the winning information of the special role.

In step S1043, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device is won by determining whether or not the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 is “0”. That is, it is determined whether it is inside.
Here, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the accessory condition device has not been won, and proceeds to the next step S1044.
On the other hand, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is other than “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the accessory condition device is won, skips steps S1044 to S1046, and performs step S1047. Proceed to

In step S1044, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
Here, “_NB_CND_AT” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores the advantageous section number.
In addition, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0”, it indicates that the advantageous section is not won (decided to shift), and when it is “1”, it indicates that the advantageous section 1 is won. “2” indicates that advantageous section 2 is won.

Furthermore, the previous game is a game in the normal section, and when the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is won in the current game, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT” in step S1045 described later.
Furthermore, when the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is won, the main CPU 55 shifts to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 and then returns to the normal section after the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 ends. The value of “_NB_CND_AT” is cleared (set to “0”).

Therefore, the previous game is a game in the normal section, and when the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is won in the current game, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0” in step S1044.
In step S1044, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is other than “0”, the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 that has been elected to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 before the previous game and has shifted based on the winning is obtained. Means that has not finished yet. That is, it means that the game is in the waiting section, the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2.

In step S1044, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is won by determining whether or not the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 is “0”. To do.
Here, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 has not been won, and proceeds to the next step S1045.
On the other hand, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is other than “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is won, skips step S1045, The process proceeds to S1046.

In step S1045, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1045, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of the advantageous section number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. This saves the advantageous section number.

In step S1046, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1046, a value indicating the accessory condition device number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the accessory condition device number is stored.

In step S1047, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in step S1041 and the process proceeds to step S1047, a value indicating “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is determined in step S1041 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. 74A, “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number” is set. It is stipulated in. Therefore, when “Yes” is determined in step S1041 and the process proceeds to step S1047, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1042, a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register. Therefore, also when the process proceeds to step S1047 through step S1042, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1047, the A register stores a value indicating the winning and replay condition device number.

“_NB_CND_NOR” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.
As described above, when the answer is “Yes” in step S1041 and the process proceeds to step S1047, and “No” is determined in step S1041 and the process proceeds to step S1047 through step S1042, the winning and replay condition device numbers are set. The processing stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be made common, and the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
The main CPU 55 clears the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” (sets it to “0”) at the end of the game or before it becomes possible to accept the operation of the start switch 41 in the next game.

As described above, in the condition device number set 1, it is determined whether or not the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” before the timing (step S1046) of storing the accessory condition device number in “_NB_CND_BNS”. (Step S1043).
As a result, even if it does not have a flag indicating whether or not it is inside, whether or not it is inside (whether it was won for the equipment condition device in this game, or the equipment condition device was won before the previous game) It is possible to reduce the usage amount of the RWM 53 accordingly.

In the condition device number set 1, it is determined whether or not the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (step S1043). If it is determined that the value is “0”, the advantageous section number is set to “_NB_CND_AT”. Store (step S1044), and then store the accessory condition device number in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1046), and store the winning and replay condition device number in “_NB_CND_NOR” (step S1047).
Thereby, it is possible to decide to shift to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 without requiring a complicated process in the game selected as the accessory condition device.

In the game, when the winning number is determined to be “31” to “36”, “43” to “45”, or “48” to “50”, the accessory condition device Will be won.
In this case, when it is determined in step S1043 that “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, the process proceeds to step S1044, so that the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1043 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped, so the values of “_NB_CND_BNS” and “_NB_CND_AT” are maintained. Will be.

Thus, when “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated, and a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”. The value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” are maintained.
This makes it possible to appropriately process the selection of the accessory condition device and the decision to shift to the advantageous section within a certain range of the usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

Also, in the game, when the winning number is determined from “43” to “47”, the winning section 1 is won (decided to shift), and the winning numbers are “48” to “52”. When it is determined to be the number, it is won (determined to shift) to advantageous section 2.
In this case, if it is determined in step S1044 that “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, the process proceeds to step S1045, so that the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1044 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, step S1045 is skipped, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained.

Thus, when “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated, and when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, “_NB_CND_AT” Maintain the value of.
Thereby, the determination to shift to the advantageous section can be appropriately processed within the range of the usage amount of the certain RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

In the present embodiment, by skipping the process of storing the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT” (step S1044) or skipping the process of storing the accessory condition device number in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1046), The value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” were maintained.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, by storing (overwriting) the same advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT” or by storing (overwriting) the same accessory condition device number in “_NB_CND_BNS”, the “_NB_CND_BNS” The value or the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be maintained.

If the winning number is determined to be less than “31” in this game, “Yes” is determined in the step S1041, and the process proceeds to a step S1047. At this time, the winning number is stored in the A register. In step S1047, the value of the A register is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” as the winning and replay condition device number.
That is, when the winning number is less than “31”, it is determined that “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”.

Then, only when the winning number is “31” or more, the conditional device number is determined from the winning number using the winning number conversion table that defines the correspondence between the winning number and the conditional device number.
For this reason, for less than “31”, it is not necessary to define the correspondence between the winning number and the condition device number in the winning number conversion table, so that the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the winning number conversion table can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described. For example, a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (an advantageous section number storage area) at the start of the current game. Even if it is, it is related to the addition of the advantageous section (including changing the performance so that the gaming state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player or adding the number of games of the AT in the advantageous section) A lottery may be executed, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, when “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the accessory condition device number) is “0”, the winning number is determined to be “37”. Based on the above, a control process of storing “2” in “_NB_CND_AT” may be executed.
In addition, “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”. Based on the fact that the winning number is determined to be “37”, the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section May be executed.

In addition, the winning numbers “43” to “52” were handled as lottery related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. However, even when these winning numbers are determined in the advantageous section, it is advantageous. You may perform the lottery regarding the addition of a section.
As described above, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called inside), for example, even if the winning number is determined to be “37”, the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

<Modification of Sixteenth Embodiment>
Then, the modification of 16th Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated.
The modification of the sixteenth embodiment is different from the sixteenth embodiment in the condition device number set processing.
In the processing of the condition device number set 1 of the sixteenth embodiment, the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, and then the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”.
On the other hand, in the condition device number set 2 of the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and thereafter the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the flow of a lottery process such as a condition device number in a modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In the present embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1051.

Furthermore, if it progresses to step S1051, the condition apparatus number set 2 (FIG. 92) will be performed and it will progress to step S1006.
Further, in step S1006, the rotation of all the reels 31 is started, and the rotating reels 31 can be stopped by the operation of the stop switch 42 by the player. When the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the process proceeds to step S1052, and the all reels stop process (FIG. 91) is executed.
In step S1052, when all reels stop processing is executed, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing when all reels are stopped in a modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
The all-reel stop process is a process for controlling on / off of an internal medium flag indicating that the special combination winning information is carried over after the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped.
When the process proceeds to the all-reel stop process in step S1052, first, in step S1061, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped on the active line.

If it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the active line (Yes), the process skips steps S1062 and S1063 and proceeds to step S1064.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is not stopped on the active line (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1062.

In step S1062, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device is won by determining whether or not the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 is “0”.
Here, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is other than “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the accessory condition device has been won, and proceeds to the next step S1063.
On the other hand, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the accessory condition device has not been won and ends the processing according to this flowchart.

In step S1063, the main CPU 55 turns on the internal medium flag.
Here, “_FL_PRD_LOT” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores the internal medium flag.
Further, the “inside inside flag” is a flag indicating that the game is inside in which the winning information of the special role is carried over.
Furthermore, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”, it indicates that the internal medium flag is on, and when it is “0”, it indicates that the internal medium flag is off.

In step S1063, the main CPU 55 stores “FF (H)” in the storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
In step S1064, the main CPU 55 clears the internal medium flag.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets the value of the storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53 to “0”. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1065.
In step S1065, the main CPU 55 clears the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 to “0”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the process flow of the condition device number set 2.
The condition device number set 2 is a process for determining the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
When the process proceeds to the condition device number set 2 in step S1051, first, in step S1071, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
The specific processing content in step S1071 is the same as that in step S1041 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1071 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1072 to S1074 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1075.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1071 that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1072.
In step S1071, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by subtracting “31” from the value (winning number) of the A register. However, even if the carry is subtracted, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates “winning number”.

In step S1072, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1042 of FIG. 89, a value indicating “object condition device number” is stored in the C register.
On the other hand, in step S1072, a value indicating the “object condition device number” is stored in the E register.
In the condition device number set 2, the value of the C register (winning number) is used in steps S1071 and S1076, so that the value of the C register (winning number) is not destroyed in step S1072.
Other than that, the specific processing content in step S1072 is the same as that in step S1042 in FIG.

In step S1073, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
The specific processing content in step S1073 is the same as that in step S1043 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1073 that the accessory condition device number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1074.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1073 that the accessory condition device number is other than “0” (No), step S1074 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1075.

In step S1074, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1074, a value indicating the accessory condition device number is stored in the E register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the E register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the accessory condition device number is stored.

In step S1075, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075, a value indicating “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is determined in step S1071 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. 74A, “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number” is set. It is stipulated in. Therefore, when “Yes” is determined in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1072, a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. For this reason, when the process proceeds to step S1075 through step S1072, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1075, the A register stores a value indicating the winning and replay condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.

  In this way, when the answer is “Yes” in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075, and “No” is determined in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075 via step S1072, the winning and replay condition device numbers are set. The processing stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be made common, and the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

In step S1076, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1076, a value indicating the winning number is stored in the C register.
In step S1076, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts “@NB_TRNS_AT” from the value of the A register. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), “@NB_TRNS_AT” indicates an advantageous section conversion start number, and its value is “@ AT1_BBA”. Also, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), “@ AT1_BBA” indicates a single winner of 1BBA and a winner of advantageous section 1, and its value is “38”. Therefore, “@NB_TRNS_AT” = “38”.

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts “38” from the value of the A register, and when a carry occurs due to the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number (Yes), and skips steps S1077 to S1079. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when no carry occurs due to the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or greater than the advantageous section conversion start number (No), and proceeds to the next step S1077.

In step S1077, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
The specific processing content in step S1077 is the same as that in step S1044 in FIG.
When it is determined in step S1077 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1078.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1077 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), steps S1078 and S1079 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S1078, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the internal medium flag is on.
Specifically, in step S1078, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value of the storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53 is “FF (H)”, thereby determining whether the internal medium flag is on. Judging.
Here, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the internal medium flag is on, skips step S1079, and performs the processing of this flowchart. finish.
On the other hand, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the internal medium flag is off, and proceeds to the next Step S1079.

In step S1079, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1079, the value indicating the address of the advantageous section number is stored in the HL register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. This saves the advantageous section number. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

As described above, in the condition device number set 2, it is determined whether the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (step S1073), and when it is determined to be “0” (Yes), the accessory condition device number Is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1074), and then the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (step S1079).
For this reason, in the condition device number set 2, even if it is determined whether or not the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” in the step before storing the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT”, It is not possible to determine whether the player has been won or the player has won the accessory condition device before the previous game.

Therefore, in the condition device number set 2, whether or not the internal medium flag is on (whether or not the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”) in step S1078 before storing the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT”. By determining the above, it is determined whether the accessory condition device has been won in the current game or whether the accessory condition device has been won before the previous game.
Then, when the internal medium flag is off (the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0”), it is determined that the character condition device is won in this game, and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (step S1079). ).

Here, in the condition device number set 2, in step S1072, a value indicating the “object condition condition device number” is stored in the E register, and a value indicating the “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register. Thereafter, in step S1074, the value of the E register (the accessory condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and in step S1075, the value of the A register (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.
Therefore, even if the value of the E register is destroyed after step S1074, the accessory condition device number is not lost, and even if the value of the A register is destroyed after step S1075, winning and replaying are not performed. Conditional device numbers are never lost.

Also, in step S1076, the value of the C register is stored in the A register, and then the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number by subtracting “@NB_TRNS_AT” (= “43”) from the value of the A register. Determine whether or not.
For this reason, even if the value of the C register is destroyed after step S1076, there is no problem in the process of storing the advantageous section number.

As described above, in the conditional device number set 2, the E register can be used for other processing after step S1074. Similarly, the A register can be used for other processes after step S1075, and the C register can be used for other processes after step S1076.
As another process, for example, an AT (instruction game section) in an advantageous section can be added and a lottery.

In the condition device number set 2, in step S1078, it is determined whether or not the internal medium flag is on (whether or not the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”). It was determined whether the device was won or whether the equipment condition device was won before the previous game.
However, it is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, the inside shifts to RT4. For this reason, for example, in step S1078, it is determined whether or not the RT4 corresponding to the inside has been selected, so that the player has won the accessory condition device in the current game or won the player condition device before the previous game. You may judge whether.

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
Subsequently, a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
FIG. 93A shows the winning number definition (3) in the present embodiment.
Here, the winning number definition (3) in FIG. 93 (a) shows the winning number definitions for the winning numbers "31" to "42".
Note that the winning number definitions for the winning numbers “1” to “30” are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 93 (b), “@BBA EQU 38; 1BBA single winner + transfer lottery” indicates that “@BBA” indicates “1BBA single winner” and “execution of transfer lottery”, “@BBA Means that the winning number corresponding to “38” is “38”.
When the winning number is determined to be “38”, it becomes the single winning of “1BBA condition device”, and whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, and from the normal section to any type of advantageous section The transfer lottery for determining whether to perform the operation can be executed.
Note that there are an advantageous section 1 and an advantageous section 2 as the types of advantageous sections. Then, if the winning section 1 is elected (decided to shift), the game state shifts to a game state that does not have the right to transition to ART, and if the winning section 2 is won, a gaming state (ART It moves to ART through a sign.

As shown in FIG. 93 (c), “@BBA_WD EQU 39; 1BBA + small role D double winning + transfer lottery” is “@BBA_WD” is “1BBA and small role D double winning” and “execution of transfer lottery”. Indicating that the winning number corresponding to “@BBA_WD” is “39”.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “39”, “1BBA condition device” and “small role D condition device” are overlapped and whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, from the normal section A transfer lottery for determining which type of advantageous section to shift to can be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 93 (a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers are determined from “1” to “42”. Then, the winning number determining means determines any one of the numerical values “0” to “42” as the winning number.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers “31” to “33” are the single winning of the accessory condition device, or the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device. The winning numbers “34” to “37” correspond to the addition of the advantageous section, and the winning numbers “38” to “42” correspond to the execution of the transfer lottery. .

Note that the winning numbers “38” to “42” may also be associated with an additional advantageous section. Then, when the winning number is determined to be “38” to “42”, the transition lottery may be executed and the advantageous section may be added.
Further, “when the winning number is determined as“ 38 ”to“ 42 ”” means when the winning number is determined as any of “38” to “42”.
Further, the number of games to be added to the number of games in the advantageous section and the change contents of the game state (the performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section can be appropriately set according to the type of the determined winning number.

FIG. 93 (d) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion data definition in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 93 (d), “@NB_TRNS EQU @ BBA_WIN_E2; conversion start number” indicates that “@NB_TRNS” indicates “conversion start number”, and the value corresponding to “@NB_TRNS” is “@ BBA_WIN_E2”. It means that. As shown in FIG. 93A, “@ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”. Therefore, “@NB_TRNS” = “@ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or greater than the “conversion start number”, the winning number conversion table is used to determine the character condition device number and the winning and replay condition device number from the winning number. Is acquired (stored).

Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), “@NB_TRNS_UP EQU @RE; addition conversion start number” indicates that “@NB_TRNS_UP” indicates “addition conversion start number” and a value corresponding to “@NB_TRNS_UP”. It means “@RE”. As shown in FIG. 93A, “@RE” = “34”. Therefore, “@NB_TRNS_UP” = “@ RE” = “34”.
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or greater than the “additional conversion start number”, the advantageous section may be added.

Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), “@NB_TRNS_AT EQ @BBA; advantageous section conversion start number” corresponds to “@NB_TRNS_AT” indicating “advantage section conversion start number” and “@NB_TRNS_AT”. It means that the value is “@BBA”. As shown in FIG. 93A, “@BBA” = “38”. Therefore, “@NB_TRNS_AT” = “@ BBA” = “38”.
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or greater than the “favorable section conversion start number”, a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is executed.

FIG. 94A shows a winning number conversion table in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 94 (a), the winning number conversion table corresponds to the winning numbers determined when the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means are "31" to "42". This is used when determining the “object condition device number” and the “winning and replay condition device number”.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (b), “DEFB @ NB_1BBA, @ NB_WIN_E2; winning number 31” stores “@ NB_1BBA” at address ## 0 (for example, address 1600 (H)), and address #### This means that “@ NB_WIN_E2” is stored in 1 (for example, address 1601 (H)). As shown in FIG. 93 (d), “@ NB_1BBA” = “1”, and as shown in FIG. 74 (a), “@ NB_WIN_E2” = “28”. Therefore, “1” is stored in the address ## 0, and “28” is stored in the address ## 1.

That is,
Address ## 0 (address 1600 (H)) 1: Equipment condition device number Address ## 1 (address 1601 (H)) 28: Winning and replay condition device number
Each data stored in the address ## 0 and the address ## 1 is used when the winning number is determined to be “31”.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (c), “DEFB @ NB_1BBB, 0; winning number 32” stores “@ NB_1BBB” at address ## 2 (for example, address 1602 (H)), and address ## 3 This means that “0” is stored in (for example, address 1603 (H)). As shown in FIG. 93 (d), “@ NB_1BBB” = “2”. Therefore, “2” is stored in the address ## 2.

That is,
Address ## 2 (1602 (H) address) 2: Equipment condition device number Address ## 3 (1603 (H) address) 0: Winning and replay condition device number
Each data stored in the address ## 2 and the address ## 3 is used when the winning number is determined to be “32”.
The winning number lottery data definition is the same as the winning number lottery data definition of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG.

FIG. 94D, FIG. 95, and FIG. 96 are diagrams showing all RT common lottery tables in the present embodiment.
FIG. 94 (d) is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (5). FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (6) and is a diagram following FIG. 94 (d). Furthermore, FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (7) and is a diagram following FIG.
The non-RT lottery table, the RT1 lottery table, the RT2 lottery table, the RT3 lottery table, the RT4 lottery table, the 1BBA lottery table, and the 1BBB lottery table are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.

Further, at the time of non-RT, at RT1, at RT2, at RT3, or at RT4, first, lottery determination is performed using all RT common lottery tables, and when the winning number is determined to be “00 (H)”, Next, lottery determination is performed using a lottery table corresponding to RT, and when the winning number is determined to be a value other than “00 (H)”, the internal lottery is terminated without using the lottery table corresponding to RT. Is the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBA lottery table at the time of 1BBA, and the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBB lottery table at the time of 1BBB, as in the sixteenth embodiment.

FIG. 97A shows a two-stage lottery address table. 97 (b) is a diagram showing the two-stage lottery table 1, FIG. 97 (c) is a diagram showing the two-stage lottery table 2, and FIG. 97 (d) is a diagram showing the two-stage lottery table 3. FIG. 97 (e) is a diagram showing the two-stage lottery table 4, and FIG. 97 (f) is a diagram showing the two-stage lottery table 5.
Here, the two-stage lottery address table and the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 are used in the two-stage lottery of FIG. 100 described later and the lottery without setting difference of FIG. 101, and are stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50. ing. In the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference, it is determined whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section. That is, the transfer lottery for determining whether or not to shift from the normal zone to the advantageous zone corresponds to a two-step lottery and a lottery without setting difference.

The two-stage lottery address table defines which of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 is used.
As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when the winning number is determined to be "38", "TBL_2NDAT_LOT1" (two-stage lottery table 1) is used.
Similarly, when the winning number is determined to be “39”, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT2” (2-step lottery table 2) is used, and when the winning number is determined to be “40”, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT3” (2 steps) The lottery table 3) is used.
When the winning number is determined to be “41”, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT4” (two-stage lottery table 4) is used, and when the winning number is determined to be “42”, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT5” (two-stage lottery) Table 5) is used.

The two-stage lottery table 1 is used when the winning number is determined to be “38” and defines winning data and probability data.
“DEFB 2; Winning data” on the first line indicates that the winning data is “2”.
“DEFB 85; Probability data (winning data 2)” on the second line indicates that “85” is defined as the probability data, and when winning using this probability data, the winning data is “2”. It is shown to be determined.

“DEFB 85; Probability data (winning data 1)” on the third line indicates that “85” is defined as the probability data, and when winning using this probability data, the winning data is “1”. It is shown to be determined.
"; // DEFB 86; probability data (winning data 0)" on the fourth line is a comment indicating that the probability that the winning data is determined to be "0" is "86/256". Not remembered as.
The two-stage lottery tables 2 to 5 are the same as the two-stage lottery table 1.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the flow of a lottery process for condition device numbers and the like in the seventeenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In this embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1101.
Further, when the process proceeds to step S1101, the condition device number set 3 (FIG. 99) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
In step S1006, the rotation of all the reels 31 is started, and the rotating reels 31 can be stopped by the operation of the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the process flow of the condition device number set 3.
The condition device number set 3 is a process for determining (acquiring, storing, and determining) the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
When proceeding to the condition device number set 3 in step S1101, first, in step S1111 the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the specific processing content in step S1111 is the same as that in step S1041 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1111 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1112 to S1118 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1119.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1111 that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1112.
In step S1111, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by subtracting “31” from the value (winning number) of the A register. However, even if the carry is subtracted, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates “winning number”.

In step S1112, the main CPU 55 acquires a condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 first stores the calculation result of “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” − “@ NB_TRNS” × 2 in the HL register.
For example, “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” = “1600 (H)” is set.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 93A and 93D, “@NB_TRNS” = “@ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1600 (H)"-"31 (D)" x 2
= "1600 (H)"-"3E (H)"
= "15C2 (H)"
It becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats twice that the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
For example, it is assumed that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is “32”.
Further, “32 (D)” = “20 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
“15C2 (H)” + “20 (H)” = “15E2 (H)” (first time)
“15E2 (H)” + “20 (H)” = “1602 (H)” (second time)
It becomes.
Thereby, “the address of the condition device number corresponding to the winning number” is set in the HL register.

In other words, the address stored in the HL register (“15C2 (H)” in this embodiment) is used as the reference address, and the winning number stored in the A register is used as the offset value (in this embodiment, stored in the A register). Thus, an address in which the condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored can be calculated (designated).
Here, the value of the A register is added twice (the value obtained by doubling the winning number is used as an offset value) is that two pieces of data (data indicating the accessory condition device number, This is because two data indicating winning and replay condition device numbers are stored in the winning number conversion table.

  As in the sixteenth embodiment, three data (data indicating the equipment condition device number, data indicating the winning and replay condition device number, and data indicating the advantageous section number) are assigned to one winning number. If it is stored in the winning number conversion table, the condition device number corresponding to the winning number is stored by adding the value of the A register three times (the value obtained by multiplying the winning number by 3 is used as the offset value). Can be calculated (designated).

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the E register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1602 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “@ NB_1BBB” (= “2”). In addition, this data indicates the “object condition device number” (FIGS. 94A and 94C).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “2” in the E register. As a result, “2” indicating “object condition device number” is stored in the E register. Thereafter, the value of the E register is maintained until this flowchart (condition device number set 3) is terminated.
Thereafter, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes “1603 (H)”.

Note that in step S1042 in FIG. 89, a value indicating the “object condition device number” is stored in the C register.
On the other hand, in step S1112, a value indicating the “object condition device number” is stored in the E register.
In the conditional device number set 3, the value of the C register (winning number) is used in steps S1111 and S1115, so that the value of the C register (winning number) is not destroyed in step S1112.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the D register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1603 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “0”. In addition, this data indicates “winning and replay condition device number” (FIGS. 94A and 94C).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “0” in the D register. Accordingly, “0” indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the D register. Thereafter, the value of the D register is maintained until this flowchart (condition device number set 3) is terminated.

In step S1042 of FIG. 89, a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register.
On the other hand, in step S1112, a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register.
In the condition device number set 3, the A register is used in step S1115 described later. Therefore, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is not lost before the winning and replay condition device number is stored in step S1119 described later.

In step S <b> 1113, the main CPU 55 determines whether “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the accessory condition device number) of the RWM 53.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game inside the bonus.
When “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53, it is determined that the current game is a non-internal bonus game, and when a value other than “0” is stored, the current game Is determined to be a game inside the bonus.
Of course, other information such as the RT number may be referred to in order to determine whether or not the current game is a game inside the bonus.

The specific processing content in step S1113 is the same as that in step S1043 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1113 that the accessory condition device number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1114.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1113 that the accessory condition device number is other than “0” (No), steps S1114 to S1117 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1118.

In step S1114, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
The specific processing content in step S1114 is the same as that in step S1044 in FIG.
When it is determined in step S1114 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1115.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1114 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1117.

In step S1115, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1115, a value indicating the winning number is stored in the C register.
In step S1115, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts “@NB_TRNS_AT” from the value of the A register. As shown in FIGS. 93A and 93D, “@NB_TRNS_AT” = “@ BBA” = “38”.

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts “38” from the value of the A register, and when a carry occurs due to the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number (Yes), and skips step S1116. The process proceeds to step S1117.
On the other hand, when no carry occurs due to subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or greater than the advantageous section conversion start number (No), and proceeds to the next step S1116.
In step S1115, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by subtracting “38” from the value (winning number) of the A register. However, even if the carry is subtracted, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates “winning number”.

In step S1116, the main CPU 55 executes a two-stage lottery (FIG. 100). When the two-stage lottery is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S1117.
In step S1117, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1117, a value indicating the accessory condition device number is stored in the E register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the E register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the accessory condition device number is stored.

In the next step S1118, the main CPU 55 moves the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, in step S1112, a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the D register. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S1118 via step S1112, the value of the D register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1118, the D register stores values indicating winning and replay condition device numbers.
In step S1118, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the D register in the A register.

In the next step S1119, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in step S1111 and the process proceeds to step S1119, a value indicating “winning number” is stored in the A register. If “Yes” is determined in step S1111 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number” is set as shown in FIG. It is stipulated in. Therefore, when “Yes” is determined in step S1111 and the process proceeds to step S1119, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

Also, when the process proceeds from step S1118 to step S1119, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
In step S 1119, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.
And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

As described above, in the condition device number set 3, in step S1118, the value of the D register (indicating the winning and replay condition device numbers) is stored in the A register.
In this way, when the answer is “Yes” in step S1111 and the process proceeds to step S1119, and “No” is determined in step S1111 and the process proceeds from step S1118 to step S1119 via step S1112, the winning and replay conditions are determined. The process of storing the device number in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be made common, and the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the flow of the two-stage lottery process.
In addition, the two-stage lottery is a process of acquiring an advantageous section number from the winning number.
When proceeding to the two-stage lottery in step S1116, first, in step S1121, the main CPU 55 sets a two-stage lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 first stores the calculation result of “TBL_2NDDAT_ADR” − “@ NB_TRNS_AT” in the HL register.

Here, “TBL_2NDDAT_ADR” indicates the head address of the two-stage lottery address table (FIG. 97 (a)).
For example, “TBL_2NDDAT_ADR” = “1700 (H)” address.
Also, as shown in FIGS. 93A and 93D, “@NB_TRNS_AT” = “@ BBA” = “38”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1700 (H)"-"38 (D)"
= "1700 (H)"-"26 (H)"
= "16DA (H)"
It becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 adds the value of the A register (winning number) to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
As described above, in step S1115 of FIG. 99, “38” is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. Keep without. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates “winning number”. Therefore, even when the process proceeds to step S1121, the value of the A register indicates “winning number”.

For example, assume that the value of the A register (winning number) is “39”.
Further, “39 (D)” = “27 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
“16DA (H)” + “27 (H)” = “1701 (H)”
It becomes.

In other words, the address indicated by the HL register (in this embodiment, “16DA (H)”) is used as the reference address, and the winning number stored in the A register is used as the offset value, thereby corresponding to the determined winning number “ It is possible to calculate (specify) the address of “address designation data”.
The “address designation data” is data stored in the two-stage lottery address table, and is data for calculating (designating) the top addresses of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5.

“DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT1-$; winning number 38” on the two-stage lottery address table of FIG. 97A is address designation data for calculating (designating) the leading address of the two-stage lottery table 1.
Similarly, “DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT2− $; winning number 39” is address specifying data for calculating (specifying) the top address of the two-stage lottery table 2, and “DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT3− $; winning number 40” is 2 This is address designation data for calculating (designating) the head address of the stage lottery table 3.
"DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT4- $; winning number 41" is address specifying data for calculating (specifying) the leading address of the two-stage lottery table 4, and "DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT5- $; winning number 42" is two-stage. This is address designation data for calculating (designating) the leading address of the lottery table 5.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data (address designation data) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the A register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1701 (H)”, the data (address designation data) corresponding to this address is “DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT2- $; winning number 39” as shown in FIG. 97 (a). It is.

Here, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT2” indicates the head address of the two-stage lottery table 2 (FIG. 97 (c)).
For example, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT2” = “1708 (H)” is set.
“$” Indicates the current address. As described above, the current address is “1701 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the A register is
"TBL_2NDAT_LOT2"-"$"
= "1708 (H)"-"1701 (H)"
= "7 (H)"
It becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 adds the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
When the value of the HL register is “1701 (H)” and the value of the A register is “7 (H)”, the value of the new HL register is
"1701 (H)" + "7 (H)"
= "1708 (H)"
It becomes.

Then, “1708 (H)” which is a value of the HL register indicates the head address of the two-stage lottery table used in the lottery without setting difference in the next step S1122.
The address “1708 (H)” indicates the head address of the two-stage lottery table 2 in FIG.
Thus, in step S1121, a two-stage lottery table is set. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1122.

In step S1122, the main CPU 55 executes a lottery without setting difference (FIG. 101). When the lottery without setting difference is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S1123.
In step S1123, the main CPU 55 stores the winning value in the lottery without setting difference as the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1123, the winning value in the lottery without setting difference is stored in the A register.
In step S1123, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register as an advantageous section number in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. This saves the advantageous section number.
And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

Here, as a merit of calculating (designating) the top address of the two-stage lottery table using the two-stage lottery address table, the following points can be cited.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 97B to 97F, the 2-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 each store (store) 3 bytes of data.
Therefore, the leading address (“1705 (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 1 and the leading address (“1708 (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 2 are 3 bytes apart.

Similarly, the leading address (“1708 (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 2 and the leading address (“170B (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 3 are 3 bytes apart.
The leading address (“170B (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 3 and the leading address (“170E (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 4 are 3 bytes apart.
Further, the leading address (“170E (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 4 and the leading address (“1711 (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 5 are 3 bytes apart.

In such a case, for example, “72 (H)” is a value obtained by multiplying “@NB_TRNS_AT” (“26 (H)”) by 3 from the top address (“1705 (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 1. ) "Is subtracted to calculate" 1693 (H) ", which is stored in the HL register as a reference address. The reason why “@NB_TRNS_AT” is tripled is that the data stored in each two-stage lottery table is 3 bytes. When N bytes of data are stored in each two-stage lottery table, “@NB_TRNS_AT” is multiplied by N.
Then, the address of the two-stage lottery table corresponding to the winning number is calculated (designated) by adding the value obtained by multiplying the winning number data stored in the A register by three times to the reference address. You can also. When N bytes of data are stored in each of the two-stage lottery tables, the value obtained by multiplying the winning number data by N is added.

That is, the calculation result of “1705 (H)” − “@ NB_TRNS_AT” × 3 is stored in the HL register as a reference address.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1705 (H)"-"@NB_TRNS_AT" x 3
= "1705 (H)"-"26 (H)" x 3
= "1693 (H)"
It becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register three times.
For example, it is assumed that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is “39”.
Further, “39 (D)” = “27 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
“1693 (H)” + “27 (H)” = “16BA (H)” (first time)
“16BA (H)” + “27 (H)” = “16E1 (H)” (second time)
“16E1 (H)” + “27 (H)” = “1708 (H)” (third time)
It becomes.
As a result, “the address of the condition device number and the advantageous section number corresponding to the winning number” is set in the HL register.

However, the contents of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 may be changed at the development stage of the slot machine 10.
For example, for the two-stage lottery table 1, the winning probability of the advantageous section number “1” may be set to 0% and the winning probability of the advantageous section number “2” may be set to 100%.
In this case, in the two-stage lottery table 1, since the advantageous section number to be won is one type, the interval between the top addresses of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 is not 3 bytes.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), a two-stage lottery address table for designating the start address of the two-stage lottery table corresponding to the winning number is provided. Even if the intervals between the head addresses of the tables 1 to 5 are not equal, it is possible to specify the head address of the two-stage lottery table, so that it is possible to flexibly cope with specification changes.

Further, the start address of the corresponding two-stage lottery table can be designated from the determined winning number without using the two-stage lottery address table.
However, in this case, in step S1121 of FIG. 100, it is first determined whether or not the winning number is “38”. If it is determined that it is “38”, the top address of the two-stage lottery table 1 is determined. When “1705 (H)” is designated and it is determined that the number is not “38”, it is next determined whether or not the winning number is “39”.

When it is determined that the winning number is “39”, “1708 (H)” which is the head address of the two-stage lottery table 2 is designated, and when it is determined that the winning number is not “39”, Then, it is determined whether or not the winning number is “40”.
Such a process is repeated until the head address of the two-stage lottery table corresponding to the winning number is designated.

For this reason, the process until the start address of the two-stage lottery table is designated becomes longer.
In addition, a program for designating the top address of the two-stage lottery table is required.
On the other hand, if the start address of the two-stage lottery table is specified using the two-stage lottery address table, the process until the start address of the two-stage lottery table is specified can be shortened, and the head of the two-stage lottery table can be shortened. Since it is not necessary to define a program for designating an address, the amount of ROM 54 used by the program can be reduced.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the flow of a lottery process without setting difference.
Further, the lottery without setting difference is processing for determining an advantageous section number based on the two-stage lottery table set in step S1121 of FIG.
When the process proceeds to the lottery without setting difference in step S1122, first, in step S1131, the main CPU 55 acquires a random number value.
In the present embodiment, a counter is provided that counts the range of “0” to “255” as one cycle. Then, the main CPU 55 obtains a 1-byte random number value from this counter for a lottery without setting difference, and stores it in the A register.
Note that the lower 1 byte of the 2-byte counter may be acquired as a random value.

In the next step S1132, the main CPU 55 acquires winning data from the two-stage lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores data in which the bit 7 of data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is set to “0” in the B register. At this time, the data itself corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is data before bit 7 is set to “0”.
Here, in the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 in FIGS. 97B to 97F, “2 (D)” is defined as the winning data.

However, when the winning data is confirmed with “2”, “10000010 (B)” can be set as the winning data.
Similarly, when the winning data is determined as “1”, “10000001 (B)” can be set as the winning data.
In this case, among the 8-bit data, bits 0 to 6 indicate winning data, and bit 7 indicates “winning confirmation data”.
“Winning confirmation data” is data indicating that the winning data is confirmed as a winning value.

In the next step S1133, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not winning determination data is included.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”.
If bit 7 is “1”, it is determined that the winning decision data is included (Yes), and steps S1134 to S1138 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1139. As a result, among the 8-bit data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register, bits 0 to 6 (winning data) are determined as winning values.
On the other hand, if the bit 7 is “0”, it is determined that the winning decision data is not included (No), and the process proceeds to the next step S1134.

In step S1134, the main CPU 55 acquires probability data from the two-stage lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the probability data.
In the next step S1135, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not it is correct.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register from the value of the A register, and stores the subtraction result in the HL register.

In the next step S1136, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not it has been won.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a carry has occurred due to the subtraction in step S1135.
Here, when a carry is generated by subtraction, it is determined that the winning has been made (Yes), and steps S1137 and S1138 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1139.
On the other hand, when no carry occurs due to the subtraction, it is determined that the winning is not made (No), and the process proceeds to the next step S1137.

In step S1137, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the winning data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register.
In the next step S1138, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning data is “0”.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the B register is “0”.

If it is determined that the value of the B register is not “0” (No), the process returns to step S1134.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the B register is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1139.
In step S1139, the main CPU 55 acquires winning data as a winning value.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the A register. In this way, winning data is stored in the A register as a winning value. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

As described above, in the condition device number set 3, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are “38” to “42”, “No” is set in step S1111 of FIG. Therefore, the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference (transition lottery) can be executed.
In this case, when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (when “No” in step S1114 in FIG. 99; an advantageous section number is stored), steps S1115 and S1116 are performed. Since the process skips to step S1117, the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference are not executed.
Thereby, the process regarding the shift to the advantageous section can be appropriately performed within the range of the usage amount of the certain RWM 55 without requiring a complicated process.

When “No” is determined in step S1114 in FIG. 99 (when “_NB_CND_AT” is stored with a value other than “0”), steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped to change from the normal section to the advantageous section. The lottery regarding the transition (two-stage lottery and lottery without setting difference) is not executed.
And even if it is “No” in step S1114 in FIG. 99 (when “_NB_CND_AT” is stored with a value other than “0”), it is added to the advantageous section (the gaming state in the advantageous section is the player). It is possible to carry out a lottery with respect to a change in performance so as to be advantageous to the player or an increase in the number of games played by the AT in the advantageous section.

When the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are “38” to “42”, when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (the advantageous section number is 99), the process may proceed to step S1116 in FIG. 99 to execute a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference. In this case, step S1123 in FIG. 100 is skipped. Thereby, the value stored in “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained.
Even if it does in this way, the process regarding the transfer to an advantageous area can be appropriately performed within the range of the usage-amount of the fixed RWM55, without requiring a complicated process.

Further, as described above, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are “38” to “42”, the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference can be executed. In this case, when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (when “No” in step S1113 in FIG. 99; an accessory condition apparatus number is stored), steps S1114 to Since step S1117 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1118, the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference are not executed.
Thereby, the process regarding the shift to the advantageous section can be appropriately performed within the range of the usage amount of the certain RWM 55 without requiring a complicated process.

When the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are “38” to “42”, a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (an accessory condition device) When the number is stored), the process may proceed to step S1116 in FIG. 99 to execute a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference. In this case, step S1123 in FIG. 100 is skipped. Thereby, the value stored in “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained.
Even if it does in this way, the process regarding the transfer to an advantageous area can be appropriately performed within the range of the usage-amount of the fixed RWM55, without requiring a complicated process.

  In addition, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are “38” to “40”, it becomes the winning of the equipment condition device, and the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference can be executed. Become. In this case, a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference are executed (step S1116), and then the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1117).

In addition, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is “39” or “40”, the winning condition device and the winning condition device are duplicated, and there is no difference between the two-stage lottery and the setting. The lottery can be executed. In this case, a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference are executed (step S1116), after which the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1117), and the winning condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” ( Step S1118).
Thereby, it is possible to execute the process related to the transition to the advantageous section without requiring a complicated process in the game selected as the accessory condition device.

<Modification of 17th Embodiment>
Subsequently, a modification of the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The modification of the seventeenth embodiment is different from the seventeenth embodiment in the processing of the conditional device number set.
In the process of the condition device number set 3 of the seventeenth embodiment, a two-stage lottery is performed and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, after which the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and winning and winning The replay condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.

  On the other hand, in the condition device number set 4 of the modification of the seventeenth embodiment, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and the winning and replay condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”. A two-stage lottery is performed and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the flow of a lottery process such as a condition device number in a modification of the seventeenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Step S1052 is the same as that of the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1141.
In step S1141, the condition device number set 4 (FIG. 103) is executed, and the flow advances to step S1006.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of the condition device number set 4.
The condition device number set 4 is a process for determining the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
When the process proceeds to condition device number set 4 in step S1141, first, in step S1151, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the specific processing content in step S1151 is the same as that in step S1041 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1151 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1152 to S1154 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1155.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1151 that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1152.
In step S1151, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by subtracting “31” from the value of the A register (winning number). However, even if the carry is subtracted, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates “winning number”.

In step S1152, the main CPU 55 obtains the condition device number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1112 of FIG. 99, a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the D register.
In contrast, in step S1152, a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register.
Other than that, the specific processing content in step S1152 is the same as that in step S1112 of FIG.

  In the condition device number set 3 of FIG. 99, the value indicating the winning number is stored in the A register in step S1115 before the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored in step S1119. Therefore, in order to prevent the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number from being lost, in step S1112, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the D register instead of the A register.

In step S1153, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
The specific processing content in step S1153 is the same as that in step S1043 in FIG.
When it is determined in step S1153 that the accessory condition device number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1154.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1153 that the accessory condition device number is other than “0” (No), step S1154 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1155.

In step S1154, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number, and in the next step S1155, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device number.
Also, the specific processing content in step S1154 is the same as that in step S1074 in FIG. 92, and the specific processing content in step S1155 is the same as in step S1075 in FIG.

  It should be noted that when “Yes” is determined in step S1151 and the process proceeds to step S1155, “No” is determined in step S1151, and the process proceeds to step S1155 via step S1152. Can be shared, and the amount of ROM 54 used by the program can be reduced.

In step S1156, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number.
The specific processing content in step S1156 is the same as that in step S1115 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1156 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1157 to S1116 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1156 that the winning number is greater than or equal to the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1157.

In step S1157, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
The specific processing content in step S1157 is the same as that in step S1044 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1157 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), steps S1158 and S1116 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1157 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1158.

In step S1158, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the internal medium flag is on.
The specific processing content in step S1158 is the same as that in step S1078 of FIG.
If it is determined in step S1158 that the internal medium flag is on, step S1116 is skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1158 that the internal medium flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step S1116.

In step S1116, the main CPU 55 executes a two-stage lottery (FIG. 100). When the two-stage lottery is completed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
The contents of the two-stage lottery process in step S1116 are the same as those in the seventeenth embodiment.

As described above, in the condition device number set 4, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are “38” to “40”, the feature condition device is won, and 2 Step-by-step lotteries and lotteries without setting differences can be executed.
In this case, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (“Yes” in step S1153), the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1154), and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “ When it is other than “0” (when “No” in step S1153), the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is maintained (step S1154 is skipped).

In addition, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is “39” or “40”, the winning condition device and the winning condition device are duplicated, and there is no difference between the two-stage lottery and the setting. The lottery can be executed.
In this case, according to the value of “_NB_CND_BNS”, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, or the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is maintained, and then the winning condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” ( Step S1155).

After that, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0” (“No” in step S1158), a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference (transition lottery) are executed (step S1116), and the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” Is “FF (H)” (“Yes” in step S1158), the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference are not executed (step S1116 is skipped).
Thereby, it is possible to execute the process related to the transition to the advantageous section without requiring a complicated process in the game selected as the accessory condition device.

In the condition device number set 4, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (when “Yes” in step S1153), the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1154), Thereafter, a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference are executed (step S1116).
For this reason, in the condition device number set 4, even if it is determined whether or not the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” in the step before executing the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference, It is not possible to determine whether the device has been won or whether the equipment condition device has been won before the previous game.

Therefore, in the condition device number set 4, in step S1158 before executing the two-step lottery and the lottery without setting difference, it is determined whether or not the internal medium flag is turned on, so that the player is selected as the equipment condition device in this game. It is determined whether or not the equipment condition device was won before the previous game.
Then, when the internal medium flag is off, it is determined that the game condition device has been won in this game, and a two-step lottery and a lottery without setting difference are executed (step S1116).

Further, in the condition device number set 4, in step S1152, a value indicating the “object condition condition device number” is stored in the E register, and a value indicating the “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register. Thereafter, in step S1154, the value of the E register (the accessory condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and in step S1155, the value of the A register (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.
Therefore, even if the value of the E register is destroyed after step S1154, the accessory condition device number is not lost, and even if the value of the A register is destroyed after step S1155, winning and replaying are performed. Conditional device numbers are never lost.

Also, in step S1156, the value of the C register is stored in the A register, and then the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number by subtracting “@NB_TRNS_AT” (= “38”) from the value of the A register. Determine whether or not.
As described above, in the conditional device number set 4, the E register can be used for other processing after step S1154. Similarly, the A register can be used for other processes after step S1155, and the C register can be used for other processes after step S1156.
As another process, for example, an AT (instruction game section) in an advantageous section can be added and a lottery.

  In the condition device number set 4, in step S1158, it is determined whether or not the internal medium flag is on, so that the player has won the accessory condition device in the current game or won the player condition device before the previous game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by determining whether the RT4 corresponding to the inside is determined, it is determined that the player has won the player condition device in this game, or the player condition device before the previous game. You may decide whether you won.

  In this embodiment, the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference have been described as the transition lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section. For example, “_NB_CND_AT” (advantageous section number storage area) is set at the start of the current game. Even if a value other than “0” is stored, it is added to the advantageous section (the performance is changed so that the game state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player, or the AT game in the advantageous section A lottery (including adding the number of times) may be executed, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, when “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the accessory condition device number) is “0”, the winning number is determined to be “37”. Based on the above, a control process of storing “2” in “_NB_CND_AT” may be executed.
In addition, “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”. Based on the fact that the winning number is determined to be “37”, the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section May be executed.

Furthermore, the winning numbers “38” to “42” were handled as a lottery for the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, but even when these winning numbers are determined in the advantageous section, the advantageous section You may perform the lottery regarding addition.
As described above, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called inside), for example, even if the winning number is determined to be “37”, the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
Subsequently, an eighteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The winning number definitions for the winning numbers “1” to “30” are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG.
The winning number definitions for the winning numbers “31” to “42” are the same as the winning number definition (3) of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG.
Furthermore, the winning number conversion data definition is the same as the winning number conversion data definition of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG.
Further, the winning number conversion table is the same as the winning number conversion table of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG.

FIG. 104 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number lottery data definition in the present embodiment.
The winning number identifier, the repetition count identifier, the setting value-specific identifier, the 2-byte data identifier, the 1-byte data identifier, and the determination end identifier are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
The “favorable section number 1 identifier” is an identifier indicating that the advantageous section 1 has been won (determined to be transferred).

The “favorable section number 2 identifier” is an identifier indicating that the advantageous section 2 has been won (determined to be transferred).
The advantageous section number 1 identifier and the advantageous section number 2 identifier are collectively referred to as “advantageous section number identifier”.
The “favorable section number mask data” is data for masking (setting “0”) bit data (bits 3 to 7) corresponding to identifiers other than the advantageous section number identifier.

"@ LT_AT1 EQU 00000001B; advantageous section number 1 identifier" indicates that "@ LT_AT1" indicates "advantageous section number 1 identifier", and the data corresponding to "@ LT_AT1" is "00000001 (B)" Means.
In addition, “@ LT_AT2 EQ 00000010B; advantageous section number 2 identifier” indicates that “@ LT_AT2” indicates “advantageous section number 2 identifier” and that data corresponding to “@ LT_AT2” is “00000010 (B)” Means.
Furthermore, “@MSK_AT EQ 00000111B; advantageous section number mask data” indicates that “@MSK_AT” indicates “advantageous section number mask data”, and the data corresponding to “@MSK_AT” is “00000111 (B)”. Means that.

105 to 108 are diagrams showing all RT common lottery tables in the present embodiment.
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (8). FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (9) and is a diagram following FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (10) and is a diagram following FIG. Further, FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (11), and is a diagram following FIG.
The non-RT lottery table, the RT1 lottery table, the RT2 lottery table, the RT3 lottery table, the RT4 lottery table, the 1BBA lottery table, and the 1BBB lottery table are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.

Further, at the time of non-RT, at RT1, at RT2, at RT3, or at RT4, first, lottery determination is performed using all RT common lottery tables, and when the winning number is determined to be “00 (H)”, Next, lottery determination is performed using a lottery table corresponding to RT, and when the winning number is determined to be a value other than “00 (H)”, the internal lottery is terminated without using the lottery table corresponding to RT. Is the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBA lottery table at the time of 1BBA, and the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBB lottery table at the time of 1BBB, as in the sixteenth embodiment.

Here, “DEFB @LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1; 1-byte data identifier;; + advantageous section number 1 identifier” in FIG. 106 is obtained by ORing “@LT_BYT” and “@ LT_AT1”. It is stored in the second row of “1BBA condition device lottery data”.
Here, as shown in FIG. 104A, “@LT_BYT” indicates a 1-byte data identifier, and its value is “00001000 (B)”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), “@ LT_AT1” indicates an advantageous section number 1 identifier, and its value is “00000001 (B)”.

Furthermore, when “@LT_BYT” and “@ LT_AT1” are ORed,
00001000 (B): @LT_BYT
00000001 (B): @ LT_AT1
00000101 (B): Data after OR operation.

In other words, “DEFB @LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1” indicates that “00000101 (B)” is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54.
Thereby, the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier can be represented by one 8-bit data.
Further, the comment “; 1-byte data identifier; ;; + advantageous section number 1 identifier” indicates data including a 1-byte data identifier and an advantageous section number 1 identifier.

Further, when “00000101 (B)” and “@MSK_AT” are ANDed,
00000101 (B): @LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1
00000111 (B): @MSK_AT
00000001 (B): Data after AND operation.
Thereby, “00000001 (B)” = “@ LT_AT1” (advantageous section number 1 identifier) can be acquired.

When the probability data is 1 byte and the winning section 1 is won, data including the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.
Further, when the probability data is 1 byte and the winning section 2 is won, data including the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 2 identifier is stored in the lottery table.

Furthermore, when the probability data is 2 bytes and the winning section 1 is won, data including the 2-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.
Further, when the probability data is 2 bytes and the winning section 2 is won, data including the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.

Further, the decision to shift to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 must be linked to a condition device having no setting difference. That is, the probabilities of shifting to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 should not differ depending on the set value.
For this reason, one 8-bit data including the identifier by setting value and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is not stored in the lottery table.
Similarly, one 8-bit data including the identifier for each set value and the advantageous section number 2 identifier is not stored in the lottery table.

“1BBA condition device lottery data” is defined in the all RT common lottery table (8) of FIG. 105, and “1BBA condition device lottery data” is also defined in the all RT common lottery table (9) of FIG. In addition, “1BBA condition device lottery data” is also defined in the all RT common lottery table (10) of FIG.
Here, when “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 105 is used, “@BBA” = “38” is set as the winning number data, and “10” is set as the probability data. At this time, if it is determined that the winning / non-winning determination is made, the winning number is determined to be “38”, but since the advantageous section number identifier is not defined, the advantageous section is not won.

Also, when “1BBA conditional device lottery data” in FIG. 106 is used, “@BBA” = “38” is set as the winning number data, and “10” is set as the probability data. At this time, if it is determined that the win is determined, the winning number is determined to be “38” and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is determined, so that the advantageous section 1 is won.
Furthermore, when “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 107 is used, “@BBA” = “38” is set as the winning number data, and “10” is set as the probability data. At this time, if it is determined that the winning / non-winning determination is made, the winning number is determined to be “38” and the advantageous section number 2 identifier is determined, so that the advantageous section 2 is won.

As described above, in this embodiment, the RT common lottery table associates the winning number data “38” with the probability data “10”, and the 1BBA condition device lottery data (not associated with the advantageous section number identifier) ( 105), 1BBA condition device lottery data (FIG. 106) in which winning number data “38”, probability data “10”, and advantageous section number 1 identifier are associated with each other, winning number data “38” and probability data “10”. 1BBA condition device lottery data (FIG. 107) that associates an advantageous section number 2 identifier.
That is, a plurality of pieces of probability data are defined corresponding to one winning number data. Of the plurality of probability data corresponding to one winning number data, one probability data is associated with data indicating that the normal section shifts to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2, and the other one The probability data is not associated with data indicating that the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section.

For this reason, as described above, even if the winning number is determined to be the same number “38” (single winning of the 1BBA condition device), when the winning section is not won, the winning section 1 When winning, and when winning in advantageous section 2.
For “1BBA + small role D condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small role E1 condition device lottery data”, “small role D condition device lottery data”, and “small role E1 condition device lottery data”, Same as “1BBA condition device lottery data”.

In FIG. 105, “1BBA condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small role D condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small role E1 condition device lottery data”, “small role D condition device lottery data”, In addition, regarding the “small role E1 condition device lottery data”, a group that is not won in the advantageous section is defined as a group.
Furthermore, in FIG. 106, “1BBA condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small role D condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small role E1 condition device lottery data”, “small role D condition device lottery data”. , And “data for lottery E1 condition device lottery”, the winning section in the advantageous section 1 is determined as a group.

Further, in FIG. 107, “1BBA condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small role D condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small role E1 condition device lottery data”, “small role D condition device lottery data”, As for the “small role E1 condition device lottery data”, the winning section in the advantageous section 2 is determined as a group.
In this way, “a group of lottery data to be won in the advantageous section” → “a group of lottery data to be won in the advantageous section 1” → “a group of lottery data to be won in the advantageous section 2”. By determining the data in the lottery table, it is sufficient to determine the winning number data only in “1BBA condition device lottery data”, so that the amount of ROM 54 used by the lottery table can be reduced.

Specifically, the winning number definitions for the winning numbers “31” to “42” in the present embodiment are the same as the winning number definition (3) of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG.
That is, the winning number corresponding to “1BBA single winning” is “38”, the winning number corresponding to “1BBA + small role D overlapping winning” is “39”, and corresponds to “1BBA + small role E1 overlapping winning”. The winning number is “40”, the winning number corresponding to “small role D single winning” is “41”, and the winning number corresponding to “small role E1 single winning” is “42”.

As described above, the corresponding winning numbers are consecutive from “1BBA single winning” to “small role E1 single winning”.
For this reason, as shown in FIG. 105, if “@BBA” (= “38”) is defined as the winning number data for “1BBA condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small role D condition device lottery” As for “data”, a value (“39”) obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data (“38”) of “1BBA condition device lottery data” can be used as the winning number data.

Similarly, for “1BBA + small role E1 condition device lottery data”, a value obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data (“39”) of “1BBA + small role D condition device lottery data” (“ 40 ") can be the winning number data.
In addition, for the “small role D condition device lottery data”, a value obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data (“40”) of “1 BBA + small role E1 condition device lottery data” (“41”) ) Can be used as winning number data.
Further, for the “small role E1 condition device lottery data”, a value obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data (“41”) of the “small role D condition device lottery data” (“42”). Can be used as winning number data.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 105, if winning number data is determined only for “1BBA condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small role D condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small role E1 condition device lottery For “data”, “small role D condition device lottery data”, and “small role E1 condition device lottery data”, it is not necessary to determine the winning number data, so the amount of ROM 54 used by the lottery table should be reduced. Can do.
The “1BBA condition device lottery data” from “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 106 and the “1BBA condition device lottery data” to “small role E1 condition device lottery data” in FIG. From “1BBA condition device lottery data” 105 to “small role E1 condition device lottery data”.

In addition, for example, “1BBA condition device lottery data that is not won in advantageous section” → “1BBA condition device lottery data that is won in advantageous section 1” → “1BBA condition device lottery data that is won in advantageous section 2” The data can also be determined in the lottery table in the order of "."
However, in this case, since it is necessary to determine the winning number data for each lottery data, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table increases accordingly.

Specifically, for example,
; 1BBA condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA; Winning number data identifier
; + Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT; 1 byte data identifier DEFB 10; probability data (common to all settings)

; 1BBA condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA; Winning number data identifier
; + Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1; 1 byte data identifier
; + Advantageous section number 1 identifier DEFB 10; probability data (common to all settings)

; 1BBA condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA; Winning number data identifier
; + Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT2; 1 byte data identifier
; + Advantageous section number 2 identifier DEFB 10; probability data (common to all settings)
As described above, three types of “1BBA condition device lottery data” can be determined in succession.

Then, for example,
; 1BBA + small role D condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA_WD; winning number data identifier
; + Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT; 1 byte data identifier DEFB 5; probability data (common to all settings)

; 1BBA + small role D condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA_WD; winning number data identifier
; + Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1; 1 byte data identifier
; + Advantageous section number 1 identifier DEFB 2; probability data (common to all settings)

; 1BBA + small role D condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA_WD; winning number data identifier
; + Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT2; 1 byte data identifier
; + Advantageous section number 2 identifier DEFB 3; probability data (common to all settings)
As described above, three types of “1 BBA + small role D condition device lottery data” can be determined in succession.
However, in this case, since it is necessary to determine the winning number data for each lottery data, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table increases accordingly.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a flow of lottery processing for condition device numbers and the like in the eighteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In this embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1201.

Furthermore, if it progresses to step S1201, an advantageous area number acquisition (FIG. 110) will be performed and it will progress to step S1202.
Further, when the process proceeds to step S1202, the condition device number set 5 (FIG. 111) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
In step S1006, rotation of all the reels 31 is started, and the rotating reels 31 can be stopped by operating the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing for obtaining an advantageous section number.
Moreover, advantageous section number acquisition is a process which acquires an advantageous section number from the data defined in the lottery table.
When the process proceeds to obtaining an advantageous section number in step S1201, first, in step S1211, the main CPU 55 obtains data corresponding to the winning number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of data on the lottery table used in the internal lottery 1 (FIG. 87) and the lottery determination (FIG. 88).

For example, when “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 105 is used, it is determined that the winning / non-winning determination is made. In this case, at the time of proceeding to step S1211, a value indicating the address of “DEFB @LT_BYT” is stored in the HL register.
Further, it is assumed that when the “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. In this case, at the time of proceeding to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of “DEFB @LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1”.

Furthermore, when “1BBA conditional device lottery data” in FIG. 107 is used, it is assumed that the winning / non-winning determination is made. In this case, at the time of proceeding to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of “DEFB @LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT2”.
Further, it is assumed that the process proceeds to “end of determination” in FIG. In this case, at the time of proceeding to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of “DEFB @LT_END”.

In step S1211, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the B register.
For example, when a value indicating the address of “DEFB @LT_BYT” in FIG. 105 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @LT_BYT” = “00001000 (B)” is stored in the B register.
When the value indicating the address of “DEFB @LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1” in FIG. 106 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1” = “00000101 (B)” is stored in the B register. .

Furthermore, when the value indicating the address of “DEFB @LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT2” in FIG. 107 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT2” = “00001010 (B)” is stored in the B register. To do.
Further, when the value indicating the address of “DEFB @LT_END” in FIG. 108 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @LT_END” = “00 (H)” is stored in the B register.
Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1212.

In step S1212, the main CPU 55 generates an advantageous section number from the acquired data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 performs an AND operation on the data in the B register and “@MSK_AT” (advantageous section number mask data = “00000111 (B)”), and the obtained data is used as a new B register. Data.

For example, when the data in the B register is “00001000 (B)”, “0000000000 (B)” is obtained by performing an AND operation on “00001000 (B)” and “00000111 (B)”. The obtained “00000000 (B)” is stored in the B register. In this case, the winning section is not won.
When the data in the B register is “00000101 (B)”, “00000001 (B)” is obtained by performing an AND operation on “00000101 (B)” and “00000111 (B)”. Then, the obtained “00000001 (B)” (= “@ LT_AT1”: advantageous section number 1) is stored in the B register. In this case, winning section 1 is won (decided to shift).

  Furthermore, when the data in the B register is “00001010 (B)”, “00000010 (B)” is obtained by performing an AND operation on “000001010 (B)” and “00000111 (B)”. Then, the obtained “00000010 (B)” (= “@ LT_AT2”: advantageous section number 2) is stored in the B register. In this case, the advantageous section 2 is won (decided to shift).

Further, when the data in the B register is “00 (H)”, “00000000 (B)” is obtained by performing an AND operation on “00 (H)” and “00000111 (B)”. The obtained “00000000 (B)” is stored in the B register. In this case, the winning section is not won.
And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
In the present embodiment, even when the winning number is determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination, the advantageous section number acquisition of FIG. 110 is executed, and the advantageous section number is generated by proceeding to step S1212. This is stored in the B register.

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the process flow of the condition device number set 5.
When the process proceeds to the condition device number set 5 in step S1202, first, in step S1221, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
The specific processing content in step S1221 is the same as that in step S1041 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1221 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1222 to S1226 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1227.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1221 that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1222.
In step S1221, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by subtracting “31” from the value (winning number) of the A register. However, even if the subtraction is performed, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates “winning number”.

In step S1222, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1112 of FIG. 99, a value indicating “object condition condition device number” is stored in the E register, and a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the D register.
On the other hand, in step S1222, a value indicating the “object condition condition device number” is stored in the C register, and a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register.
Other than that, the specific processing content in step S1222 is the same as that in step S1112 of FIG.

In step S1223, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the accessory condition device number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game inside the bonus.
When “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53, it is determined that the current game is a non-internal bonus game, and when a value other than “0” is stored, the current game Is determined to be a game inside the bonus.

The specific processing content in step S1223 is the same as that in step S1043 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1223 that the accessory condition device number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1224.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1223 that the accessory condition device number is other than “0” (No), steps S1224 to S1226 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1227.

In step S1224, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (the storage area for the advantageous section number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game in the normal section.
When “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53, it is determined that the current game is a game in the normal section, and when “1” is stored, the current game is in the advantageous section 1. When it is determined that the game is “2”, it is determined that the current game is a game in the advantageous section 2.

The specific processing content in step S1224 is the same as that in step S1044 in FIG.
When it is determined in step S1224 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1225.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1224 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), step S1225 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1226.

In step S1225, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S125, a value indicating an advantageous section number is stored in the B register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. This saves the advantageous section number.

In step S1226, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1046, a value indicating the accessory condition device number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the accessory condition device number is stored.

In step S1227, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in step S1221, the process proceeds to step S1227, and a value indicating “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is determined in step S1221 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. 74A, “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number” is set. It is stipulated in. Therefore, when “Yes” is determined in step S1221, the process proceeds to step S1227, and the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1222, the A register stores a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number”. Therefore, also when the process proceeds to step S1227 via step S1222, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1227, the A register stores a value indicating the winning and replay condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.

As described above, when “Yes” is determined in step S1221, the process proceeds to step S1227, and “No” is determined in step S1221, and the process proceeds to step S1227 via step S1222. The processing stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be made common, and the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described. For example, a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (an advantageous section number storage area) at the start of the current game. Even if it is, it is related to the addition of the advantageous section (including changing the performance so that the gaming state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player or adding the number of games of the AT in the advantageous section) A lottery may be executed, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, in the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (the storage area of the accessory condition device number) is “0”, the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section may be executed. .
In addition, in the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is executed, and “_NB_CND_AT” is set to “2” according to the result. A control process may be executed so as to store.
In addition, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called inside), the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
Subsequently, a nineteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
FIG. 112A is a diagram showing a winning number definition (4) in the present embodiment.
Here, the winning number definition (4) in FIG. 112 (a) shows the winning number definitions for the winning numbers "31" to "36".
Note that the winning number definitions for the winning numbers “1” to “30” are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a) and FIG. 112 (a), in this embodiment, the winning numbers are determined from “1” to “36”.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), in this embodiment, the winning numbers “31” and “35” correspond to the single winning of the accessory condition device, and the winning numbers “32” to “34”. "No." and "36" correspond to overlapping winnings of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device.

FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing the winning number conversion and advantageous section transition determination data definition in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 112 (c), “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1 EQU 167 + @ LOT_TRNS_AT2; advantageous section 1 transition determination random number” corresponds to “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” indicating “advantage section 1 transition determination random number” and “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” This means that the value to be “167 + @ LOT_TRNS_AT2”.
Further, “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” = “178”.
Therefore, “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” = “167 + 178” = “345”.

As shown in FIG. 112 (d), “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2 EQU 178; advantageous section 2 transition determination random number” indicates that “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” indicates “advantage section 2 transition determination random number”, and a value corresponding to “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” Means “178”. That is, “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” = “178”.
The advantageous section 1 transition determination random number and the advantageous section 2 transition determination random number are collectively referred to as “advantage section transition determination random number”.

FIG. 113A shows a winning number conversion table in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 113 (a), when the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means are “31” to “36”, the winning number conversion table corresponds to the determined winning numbers. This is used when determining the “object condition device number” and the “winning and replay condition device number”.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (b), “DEFB @ NB_1BBA, 0; winning number 31” stores “@ NB_1BBA” at address ## 0 (for example, address 1600 (H)), and address ## 1 This means that “0” is stored in (for example, address 1601 (H)). As shown in FIG. 112 (b), “@ NB_1BBA” = “1”. Therefore, “1” is stored in the address ## 0, and “0” is stored in the address ## 1.

That is,
Address ## 0 (address 1600 (H)) 1: Equipment condition device number Address ## 1 (address 1601 (H)) 0: Winning and replay condition device number
Each data stored in the address ## 0 and the address ## 1 is used when the winning number is determined to be “31”.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (c), “DEFB @ NB_1BBB, @NB_WIN_D; winning number 32” stores “@ NB_1BBB” at address ## 2 (for example, address 1602 (H)), and address #### This means that “@NB_WIN_D” is stored in 3 (for example, address 1603 (H)). As shown in FIG. 112B, “@ NB_1BBB” = “2”. Also, as shown in FIG. 74, “@NB_WIN_D” = “26”. Therefore, “2” is stored in the address ## 2 and “26” is stored in the address ## 3.

That is,
Address ## 2 (1602 (H) address) 2: Equipment condition device number Address ## 3 (1603 (H) address) 26: Winning and replay condition device number
Each data stored in the address ## 2 and the address ## 3 is used when the winning number is determined to be “32”.

The winning number lottery data definition is the same as the winning number lottery data definition of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG.
114, 115, and 116 are diagrams showing all RT common lottery tables in the present embodiment.
FIG. 114 shows the common RT common lottery table (12). FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (13) and is a diagram following FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 116 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (14), which is a diagram following FIG.
The non-RT lottery table, the RT1 lottery table, the RT2 lottery table, the RT3 lottery table, the RT4 lottery table, the 1BBA lottery table, and the 1BBB lottery table are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.

Further, at the time of non-RT, at RT1, at RT2, at RT3, or at RT4, first, lottery determination is performed using all RT common lottery tables, and when the winning number is determined to be “00 (H)”, Next, lottery determination is performed using a lottery table corresponding to RT, and when the winning number is determined to be a value other than “00 (H)”, the internal lottery is terminated without using the lottery table corresponding to RT. Is the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBA lottery table at the time of 1BBA, and the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBB lottery table at the time of 1BBB, as in the sixteenth embodiment.

FIG. 117 (a) is a diagram showing an advantageous section transition determination random number table.
The advantageous section transition determination random number table is used in the advantageous section transition lottery of FIG. 121 to be described later, and “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” is defined as a reference when determining that the advantageous section 2 is won (decided to shift). In addition, “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” is defined as a reference for determining that the advantageous section 1 is won.
When the random value obtained from the random number generation means (counter) is smaller than “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” (= “178”), it is determined that the advantageous section 2 is won, and from “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” (= “345”) When it is small, it is determined that the advantageous section 1 is won.

Here, “DEFW” is an assembly language “reserves two 1-byte (8-bit) areas in memory in the order of addresses, stores the lower-order 1 byte of 2-byte data at the previous address, and the subsequent address. This is a pseudo-instruction that stores the upper 1 byte of 2-byte data.
As shown in FIG. 117 (c), “DEFW @ LOT_TRNS_AT2; advantageous section number 2” is “# LOT_TRNS_AT2” (= “178 (D)” = “178” at address ### 0 (for example, address 1700 (H)). “B2 (H)” which is the lower 1 byte of “00B2 (H)”) is stored, and “00 (H) which is the upper 1 byte of“ @ LOT_TRNS_AT2 ”is stored at address ## 1 (for example, address 1701 (H)). ) ".

  As shown in FIG. 117 (d), “DEFW @ LOT_TRNS_AT1; advantageous section number 1” is “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” (= “345 (D)” = “345” at address ## 2 (for example, address 1702 (H)). “59 (H)” which is the lower 1 byte of “0159 (H)”) is stored, and “01 (H) which is the upper 1 byte of“ @ LOT_TRNS_AT1 ”is stored at address ## 3 (for example, address 1703 (H)). ) ".

That is,
Address ## 0 (address 1700 (H)) B2 (H): lower 1 byte Address ## 1 (address 1701 (H)) 00 (H): upper 1 byte Address ## 2 (1702 (H) Address) 59 (H): Lower 1 byte Address ## 3 (address 1703 (H)) 01 (H): Upper 1 byte

FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the flow of lottery processing for condition device numbers and the like in the nineteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1003 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In this embodiment, if the blocker 45 is controlled so that the insertion of medals is not permitted in step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1301.

Furthermore, if it progresses to step S1301, the internal lottery 2 (FIG. 119) will be performed and it will progress to step S1302.
Further, when the process proceeds to step S1302, the condition device number set 6 (FIG. 120) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
In step S1006, rotation of all the reels 31 is started, and the rotating reels 31 can be stopped by operating the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the flow of the internal lottery 2 process.
When the process proceeds to the internal lottery 2 in step S1301, first, in step S1311, the main CPU 55 stores a random value in “_BF_RAND” (random number buffer).
Here, “_BF_RAND” is a 2-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores a random value.
In step S1301, the main CPU 55 first stores the random value stored in the random value register in the HL register, and then stores the random value stored in the HL register in the storage area “_BF_RAND of the RWM 53. To remember. As a result, the random number value is stored in the random number buffer. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1312.

In step S1312, the main CPU 55 stores a random value.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the random number value stored in the HL register in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1313.
In step S1313, the main CPU 55 sets a lottery table according to the operating state of the accessory (when the 1BBA is operating, when the 1BBB is operating, or when the accessory is not operating).
The specific processing content in step S1313 is the same as that in step S1012 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1314.

In step S1314, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not an accessory is operating.
The specific processing content in step S1314 is the same as that in step S1013 in FIG.
If it is determined that the accessory is operating (Yes), steps S1315 to S1317 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1318.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the accessory is not operating (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1315.

In step S1315, the main CPU 55 executes a lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1313. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1316.
In step S1316, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a lottery determination has been won.

The specific processing content in step S1316 is the same as that in step S1015 in FIG.
Then, when it is determined that the lottery determination is made (Yes), steps S1317 and S1318 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in the lottery determination that the winning is not made (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1317.

In step S1317, the main CPU 55 sets a lottery table corresponding to the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 or RT4).
The specific processing content in step S1317 is the same as that in step S1016 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1318.
In step S1318, the main CPU 55 executes lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1313 or S1317. Specifically, the lottery determination is executed using the lottery table set in step S1313 when the accessory is activated, and the lottery determination is executed using the lottery table set in step S1317 when the accessory is not activated. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of the condition device number set 6.
When the process proceeds to the conditional device number set 6 in step S1302, first, in step S1321, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
The specific processing content in step S1321 is the same as that in step S1041 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1321 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), step S1322 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1323.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1321 that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1322.
In step S1321, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by subtracting “31” from the value of the A register (winning number). However, even if the carry is subtracted, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates “winning number”.

In step S1322, the main CPU 55 acquires a condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG. 113 (a).
The specific processing content in step S1322 is the same as that in step S1222 of FIG. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1323.

In step S1323, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not an accessory is operating.
The specific processing content in step S1323 is the same as that in step S1013 in FIG.
If it is determined that the accessory is operating (Yes), Steps S1324 to S1327 are skipped, and the process proceeds to Step S1328.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the accessory is not operating (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1324.

In step S1324, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the accessory condition device number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game inside the bonus.
The specific processing content in step S1324 is the same as that in step S1043 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1324 that “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53 stores “0” (Yes), it is determined that the current game is a bonus non-internal game, and the process proceeds to next step S1325. .
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1324 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 (No), it is determined that the current game is a bonus internal game, and step S1325 is performed. -S1327 is skipped and it progresses to step S1328.

In step S1325, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (an advantageous section number storage area) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game in the normal section.
The specific processing content in step S1325 is the same as that in step S1044 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1325 that “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 (Yes), it is determined that the current game is a game in the normal section, and the process proceeds to the next step S1326.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1325 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 (No), it is determined that the current game is an advantageous section game, and step S1326 is performed. Skip to step S1327.

When the processing proceeds to step S1326, the main CPU 55 executes an advantageous section transition lottery (FIG. 121). Then, when the advantageous section shift lottery is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1327.
In step S1327, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1327, a value indicating the accessory condition device number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the accessory condition device number is stored. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1328.

In step S1328, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when “Yes” is set in step S1321, step S1322 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1328, a value indicating “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is determined in step S1321 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number” is set as shown in FIG. It is stipulated in. Therefore, “Yes” is set in step S1321, and when step S1322 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1328, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In addition, if “No” is determined in the step S1321, and the process proceeds to the step S1322, a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register. Therefore, “No” is determined in step S1321, and when the process proceeds to step S1328 via step S1322, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1328, the A register stores values indicating winning and replay condition device numbers.

In step S1328, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.
As described above, “Yes” is determined in step S1321, the step S1322 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1328, and “No” is determined in step S1321, and the process proceeds to step S1328 via the step S1322. In addition, the process of storing the replay condition device number in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be made common, and the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the process flow of the advantageous section shift lottery.
In addition, the advantageous section transition lottery includes the random value obtained from the random number generation means (counter), “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” (advantageous section 1 transition determination random number) and “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” (advantageous section) defined in the advantageous section transition determination random number table. 2 transition determination random number) to determine whether to shift to the advantageous section 1, to shift to the advantageous section 2, or not to shift to the advantageous section.

When proceeding to the advantageous section transition lottery in step S1326, first, in step S1331, the main CPU 55 sets an initial value of the number of determinations.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores “2” in the B register as the initial value of the number of determinations. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1332.
In step S1332, the main CPU 55 sets an address of an advantageous section transition determination random number.

Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the head address of “TBL_AT_RAND” (advantageous section transition determination random number table) in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1333.
In step S1333, the main CPU 55 obtains a random value.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S 1333, the random number value obtained from the random number generation means (counter) is stored in the storage area “_BF_RAND” (random number buffer) of the RWM 53. Then, the main CPU 55 stores the random value stored in “_BF_RAND” in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1334.

In step S1334, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the acquired random number value is smaller than the advantageous section transition determination random number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register (advantageous section transition determination random number) from the data (random number value) in the DE register, and determines whether or not a carry has occurred due to the subtraction. To do.

Here, when it is determined that a carry has occurred due to the subtraction, it is determined that the random value is smaller than the advantageous interval transition determination random number (Yes), and steps S1335-S1337 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1338.
On the other hand, when it is determined that no carry has occurred due to the subtraction, it is determined that the random number value is equal to or greater than the advantageous section transition determination random number (No), and the process proceeds to the next step S1335.
In step S1334, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by subtracting data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register (advantageous transition determination random number) from the data (random number value) in the DE register. However, the data in the DE register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the data in the DE register indicates “random value”.

In step S1335, the main CPU 55 updates the address of the advantageous section transition determination random number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 repeats adding “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register twice. That is, “2” is added to the value of the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1336.
In step S1336, the main CPU 55 updates the determination count.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1337.

In step S1137, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not to end the determination.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the B register is “0”.
When it is determined that the value of the B register is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1338.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the B register is not “0” (No), the process returns to step S1334.
Thus, the first time subtracts the advantageous section 2 transition determination random number from the random value to determine whether or not a carry has occurred, and the second time subtracts the advantageous section 1 transition determination random number from the random value to carry the carry. It will be determined whether or not it has occurred.

In step S1338, the main CPU 55 stores the number of determinations as an advantageous section number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. This saves the advantageous section number.
And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (not when an accessory is activated (“No” in step S1323 in FIG. 120)) and not in the interior (“Yes” in step S1324). ) And when it is not an advantageous section (“Yes” in step S1325)), an advantageous section shift lottery is executed (proceeds to step S1326).

Further, in the advantageous section transition lottery, if the random number value obtained from the random number generation means is smaller than “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” (advantage section 2 transition determination random number = “178”), it is elected (decided to shift to the advantageous section 2). )
That is, when the random number value acquired from the random number generation means belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, it is won in the advantageous section 2.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 114, the “probability data” is totaled from “small role D condition device and advantageous section number 2 lottery data” to “1BBA + small role E1 conditional device and advantageous section number 2 lottery data”. Then, “30” + “125” + “10” + “3” + “10” = “178”.
For this reason, in the lottery of the condition device, when the random value acquired from the random number generation means belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, as shown in FIG. The winning combination of the combination E1 condition device is the single selection of the 1BBA condition device, the overlapping selection of the 1BBA condition device and the small role D condition device, or the overlapping selection of the 1BBA condition device and the small role E1 condition device.

Further, in the advantageous section transition lottery, if the random number value obtained from the random number generation means is smaller than “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” (advantage section 1 transition determination random number = “345”), it is elected (decided to shift to the advantageous section 1). )
However, as described above, when the random value acquired from the random number generation means falls within the range of “0” to “177”, the advantageous section 2 is won.
Therefore, when the random value acquired from the random number generation means falls within the range of “178” to “344”, the advantageous section 1 is won.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 114, the “probability data” is totaled for “1 BBA + small role E1 condition device and advantageous section number 1 lottery data” up to “small role D condition device and advantageous section number 1 lottery data”. Then, “20” + “125” + “10” + “2” + “10” = “167”.
Furthermore, the sum of the “probability data” for “1 BBA + small role E1 condition device and advantageous section number 2 lottery data” from “small role D condition device and advantageous section number 2 lottery data” is “178”. When “167” is added to “345”, “345” is obtained.

  For this reason, in the lottery of the condition device, when the random value acquired from the random number generation means belongs to the range of “178” to “344”, as shown in FIG. The winning combination of the combination E1 condition device is the single selection of the 1BBA condition device, the overlapping selection of the 1BBA condition device and the small role D condition device, or the overlapping selection of the 1BBA condition device and the small role E1 condition device.

The all RT common lottery table is commonly used in non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4. When this all RT common lottery table is used, Single winning, single winning of small role E1 condition device, single winning of 1BBA condition device, overlapping winning of 1BBA condition device and small role D condition device, or overlapping winning of 1BBA condition device and small role E1 condition device.
For this reason, in this embodiment, although the replay condition device has non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 having different winning probabilities, the random number value acquired from the random number generating means is in the range of “0” to “344”. The condition device that is won when it belongs is the same for any of non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described. For example, a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (an advantageous section number storage area) at the start of the current game. Even if it is, it is related to the addition of the advantageous section (including changing the performance so that the gaming state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player or adding the number of games of the AT in the advantageous section) A lottery may be executed, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, in the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (the storage area of the accessory condition device number) is “0”, the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section may be executed. .
In addition, in the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is executed, and “_NB_CND_AT” is set to “2” according to the result. A control process may be executed so as to store.
In addition, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called inside), the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

<Modification of 19th Embodiment>
Subsequently, a modification of the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The modification of the nineteenth embodiment differs from the nineteenth embodiment in the processing of the conditional device number set.
In the processing of the conditional device number set 6 of the nineteenth embodiment, the advantageous zone shift lottery is performed and the advantageous zone number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, and then the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” and a prize is awarded. The replay condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.

  In contrast, in the condition device number set 7 of the modified example of the nineteenth embodiment, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and the winning and replay condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”. The advantageous section shift lottery is performed and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the flow of a lottery process such as a condition device number in a modification of the nineteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1003 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Step S1301 is the same as that in the nineteenth embodiment, and step S1052 is the same as the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the internal lottery 2 is executed in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1341.
In step S1341, the condition device number set 7 (FIG. 123) is executed, and the flow advances to step S1006.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the process flow of the condition device number set 7.
When the process proceeds to the condition device number set 7 in step S1341, first, in step S1351, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
The specific processing content in step S1351 is the same as that in step S1041 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1351 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1352 to S1354 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1355.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1351 that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1352.
In step S1351, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by subtracting “31” from the value of the A register (winning number). However, even if the carry is subtracted, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates “winning number”.

In step S1352, the main CPU 55 acquires a condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG. 113 (a).
The specific processing content in step S1352 is the same as that in step S1222 of FIG. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1323.

In step S1353, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
Also, the specific processing content in step S1353 is the same as that in step S1043 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1353 that the accessory condition device number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1354.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1353 that the accessory condition device number is other than “0” (No), step S1354 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1355.

In step S1354, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1354, a value indicating the accessory condition device number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the accessory condition device number is stored. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1355.

In step S1355, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when “Yes” is set in step S1351, and step S1352 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1355, a value indicating “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is determined in step S1351 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. 74A, “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number” is set. It is stipulated in. Therefore, “Yes” is set in step S1351, and when step S1352 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1355, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

Further, “No” is determined in step S1351, and when the process proceeds to step S1352, a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register. Therefore, “No” is determined in step S1351, and when the process proceeds to step S1355 through step S1352, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1355, the A register stores values indicating winning and replay condition device numbers.

In step S 1355, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.
As described above, when the answer is “Yes” in step S1351 and the process proceeds to step S1355, and “No” is determined in step S1351 and the process proceeds to step S1355 via step S1352, the winning and replay condition device numbers are set. The processing stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be made common, and the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

In step S1356, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not an accessory is operating.
Also, the specific processing content in step S1356 is the same as that in step S1013 in FIG.
If it is determined that the accessory is not operating (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1357.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the accessory is operating (Yes), steps S1357 to S1326 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S1357, the main CPU 55 determines whether the internal medium flag is on.
The specific processing content in step S1357 is the same as that in step S1078 of FIG.
If it is determined in step S1357 that the internal medium flag is off (No), the process proceeds to next step S1358.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1357 that the internal medium flag is on (Yes), steps S1358 and S1326 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S1358, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
The specific processing content in step S1358 is the same as that in step S1044 in FIG.
When it is determined in step S1358 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to an advantageous section transition lottery (FIG. 121) in step S1326.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1358 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), the advantageous section transition lottery (FIG. 121) in step S1326 is skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. .

When the processing proceeds to step S1326, the main CPU 55 executes an advantageous section transition lottery (FIG. 121). Then, when the advantageous section shift lottery ends, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Note that the contents of the advantageous section shift lottery process in step S1326 are the same as those in the nineteenth embodiment.

Here, in the condition device number set 7, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 2 and the lottery determination are the numbers “31” to “36”, the equipment condition device is won.
In this case, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (“Yes” in step S1353), the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1354), and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “ When it is other than “0” (“No” in step S1353), the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is maintained (step S1354 is skipped).

Further, in the condition device number set 7, when the accessory is operating (the value of “_FL_ACTION” is not “0”), the internal flag is on (the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”). If it is, and if the advantageous section number is not “0” (the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is not “0”), the advantageous section shift lottery is not executed (step S1326 is skipped).
And when the accessory is not in operation (the value of “_FL_ACTION” is “0”), the internal medium flag is off (the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0”), and the advantageous section number is When it is “0” (the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0”), the advantageous section shift lottery is executed (proceeds to step S1326).
Thereby, the process regarding the advantageous section shift lottery can be executed without requiring a complicated process.

Further, in the condition device number set 7, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 2 and the lottery determination are the numbers “31” to “36” that are the winning items of the accessory condition device, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” Is “0” (when “Yes” in step S1353), the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1354), and thereafter, an advantageous section shift lottery is executed (step S1326).
For this reason, in the condition device number set 7, even if it is determined whether or not the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” in the step before the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, the player is selected as the equipment condition device in this game. It is impossible to determine whether or not the equipment condition device has been won before the previous game.

Therefore, in the condition device number set 7, whether or not the game condition device has been won in the current game by determining whether or not the internal medium flag is turned on in step S1357 before executing the advantageous section transition lottery or the previous time It is determined whether the equipment condition device is won before the game.
Then, when the internal medium flag is off, it is determined that the game condition device has been won in the current game, and an advantageous section transition lottery is executed (step S1326).

  Further, in the condition device number set 7, in step S1352, a value indicating the “object condition condition device number” is stored in the C register, and a value indicating the “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register. Thereafter, in step S 1354, the value of the C register (the accessory condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and in step S 1355, the value of the A register (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.

Therefore, even if the value of the C register is destroyed after step S1354, the accessory condition device number is not lost, and even if the value of the A register is destroyed after step S1355, winning and replaying are performed. Conditional device numbers are never lost.
Therefore, in the conditional device number set 7, the C register can be used for other processes after step S1354, and the A register can be used for other processes after step S1355. it can.
As another process, for example, an AT (instruction game section) in an advantageous section can be added and a lottery.

In the condition device number set 7, in step S1357, it is determined whether or not the internal medium flag is on, so that the player has won the accessory condition device in the current game or won the player condition device before the previous game. Judged whether or not.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in step S1357, it is determined whether or not the RT4 corresponding to the inside of the game has been won. You may judge whether you have won.

Furthermore, in the condition device number set 7, the accessory is not operating (“No” in step S 1356), the internal medium flag is off (“No” in step S 1357), and the advantageous section number is “0”. "(" Yes "in step S1358), an advantageous section shift lottery was executed (step S1326).
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when an accessory is operating, when the internal medium flag is on, and when the advantageous section number is not “0”, the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed. In this case, even if the advantageous section shift lottery is executed, the advantageous section number is maintained (the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained) by skipping step S1338 of FIG.

As described above, the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, two types of advantageous intervals 1 and advantageous intervals 2 are provided as advantageous intervals. In the normal section, it was determined whether to shift to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2. Then, when winning the advantageous section 1 (decided to shift), the game state is shifted to the game state that does not have the right to transfer to ART, and when winning the advantageous section 2, the gaming state (ART It was moved to ART after a sign. However, it is not limited to this.

For example, only one type of advantageous section may be used, and in the normal section, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section.
And if it wins (decides to shift) to an advantageous section, you may make it transfer to the advantageous area of 1500 games which is an upper limit uniformly.
In this case, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is, for example, “00000000 (B)” in the normal section and “00000001 (B)” in the advantageous section. Thereby, it is possible to manage the normal section or the advantageous section with 1-bit data.

Furthermore, in the advantageous section game, the conditions for falling to the normal section (for example, the number of games executed for ART has reached a specific value, winning a lottery for falling, executing a predetermined number of games, etc.) are satisfied. May be shifted to the normal section.
Further, for example, three types of advantageous intervals 1 to 3 may be provided as the advantageous intervals, and in the normal interval, it may be determined which of the advantageous intervals 1 to 3 is to be transferred. Then, when winning the advantageous section 1, it shifts to the advantageous section of 500 games. When winning the advantageous section 2, it shifts to the advantageous section of 1000 games. When winning the advantageous section 3, it shifts to the advantageous section of 1500 games. Also good.

(2) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, it is determined whether or not to increase the number of games in the advantageous section. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, when an ART is executed during an advantageous section, if the winning number corresponding to the additional advantageous section is determined, the number of games that can be executed in the advantageous section is increased uniformly or by lottery. You may let them.

In addition, for example, in the case where a Gasse game (a game state in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit although there is no right to shift to ART) is executed during the advantageous section, the winning corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section is performed. When the number is determined, the right to move to ART may be granted uniformly or by lottery.
Thus, instead of adding the number of games in the advantageous section, the game state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section may be changed so as to be advantageous to the player.

(3) In the normal section, when the winning section is elected (decided to shift), the next game may be shifted to the advantageous section, or the next game may be shifted to the standby section, and then the standby section. May be shifted to an advantageous section.
That is, in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, “winning the advantageous section” is not limited to the transition from the next game to the advantageous section, but the transition from the next game to the standby section, and then from the standby section. It is a concept including shifting to an advantageous section.
Further, when the transition from the normal section to the standby section is performed, information indicating the standby section is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and when the transition from the standby section to the advantageous section is performed, information indicating the advantageous section is stored. May be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

(4) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, when the value of bit 2 of “_FL_ACTION” is “1”, it indicates that the accessory is operating, and when it is “0”, the accessory is not operating. Showed that.
Further, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, it indicates that the accessory condition device is not won, and when it is not “0”, it indicates that the accessory condition device is won.
Furthermore, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0”, it indicates that the advantageous section is not won (decided to shift), and when it is “1”, it indicates that the advantageous section 1 is won. , “2” indicates that advantageous section 2 is won.

Further, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”, it indicates that the internal medium flag is on, and when it is “0”, it indicates that the internal medium flag is off.
However, when the accessory is activated / not activated, the value is not limited to “1” / “0” of the bit 2 of “_FL_ACTION”, and can be set as appropriate.
Similarly, the winning / non-winning of the accessory condition device, the winning / non-winning of the advantageous section, and the on / off of the internal medium flag are not limited to the above-described modes and can be set as appropriate.

(5) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 is secured as “_NB_CND_AT”. However, the storage area for storing the advantageous section number is not limited to a 1-byte storage area.
As described above, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section with only one kind of advantageous section. In this case, a specific bit (for example, bit 0) in the 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 can be used as a storage area for storing an advantageous section number. That is, the 1-bit storage area may be a storage area for storing information indicating that the advantageous section number or the current game section is the advantageous section.

Similarly, “_NB_CND_BNS” is not limited to a 1-byte storage area.
For example, in a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53, a specific bit (for example, bit 0) is used as a storage area for storing an advantageous section number, and a predetermined bit (for example, bit 1) is stored for storing an accessory condition device number. Can be an area.
Thereby, the usage-amount of RWM53 by a program can be reduced.

  (6) In the sixteenth embodiment, when it is determined in step S1043 in FIG. 89 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped, and “_NB_CND_BNS” Value and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” were maintained. However, it is not limited to this.

For example, when “00000001 (B)” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” and “00000001 (B)” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, “00000001 (B)” is overwritten in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and The value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be maintained by overwriting “00000001 (B)” on “_NB_CND_AT”.
As described above, in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, when maintaining the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” or the value of “_NB_CND_AT”, the same value is overwritten, not only when maintaining by skipping (not updating). It may be maintained by doing.

  (7) In the sixteenth embodiment, the winning numbers are determined as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 75 (a). In the seventeenth embodiment, the winning numbers are determined as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 93 (a). Furthermore, in the eighteenth embodiment, winning numbers are determined as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 112 (a). These have regularity as shown below, thereby producing the following effects.

  A. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), for the winning numbers less than “31”, the “winning number” and the “winning and replay condition device number” are determined to match, and “1” to “ No. 30 ”is continuous.

In this way, for the winning number less than a specific value (for example, “31”), it is determined that the “winning number” and the “winning and replay condition device number” coincide with each other. When it is determined that the number is less than the specific value, the “winning number” determined in the lottery determination can be used as a “winning and replay condition device number” as a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 (“_NB_CND_NOR”). .
Therefore, since the process of storing the “winning and replay condition device number” in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be simplified, the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

B. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), for the winning numbers less than “31”, the “winning number” and the “winning and replay condition device number” are determined to coincide with each other. As shown in the drawing, for the winning number of “31” or more, it becomes a lottery result including the accessory condition device (single winning of the accessory condition device or duplicate winning of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device) To be).
In this way, for a winning number less than a specific value (for example, “31”), the “winning number” and the “winning and replay condition device number” are determined so as to coincide with each other. The lottery result including the accessory condition device can be determined.

In this case, it is determined whether or not the winning number determined in the lottery determination is less than a specific value.
When it is determined that the value is less than the specific value, the “winning number” determined in the lottery determination is stored in the predetermined storage area (“_NB_CND_NOR”) of the RWM 53 as the “winning and replay condition device number”.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is greater than or equal to the specific value, for example, using the “winning number conversion table” shown in FIG. 113 (a), from the “winning number” determined by the lottery determination, "Device number" and "winning and replay condition device number" are acquired. Then, the acquired “object condition device number” is stored in a specific storage area (“_NB_CND_BNS”) of the RWM 53, and the acquired “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in a predetermined storage area (“_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. ).

In this way, the winning number that matches the winning and replay condition device number and the winning number that will be the lottery result including the accessory condition device are determined separately based on the specific value, so that the winning number greater than the specific value is determined. Since the winning number conversion table only needs to be determined, the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the winning number conversion table can be reduced.
In addition, since it is possible to determine whether the winning number determined in the lottery determination is less than a specific value, it is possible to determine whether the winning number requires a winning number conversion table. Therefore, the amount of ROM 54 used by the program can be reduced.

  Furthermore, by determining one winning number based on one random number value by lottery determination, the lottery result that becomes the single winning of the winning and replay condition device, the lottery result that becomes the single winning of the accessory condition device, and It is possible to obtain a lottery result for overlapping winnings between the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device. Therefore, since the lottery determination process (the process of determining the winning number from the random number value) can be simplified, the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

C. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the winning numbers “34” to “42” are determined to be able to execute processing related to the addition of the advantageous section.
Further, in FIG. 75 (a), the winning numbers “43” to “52” are determined so that the processing related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2) can be executed. However, when the winning number is determined to be “43” to “52” in the advantageous section, it may be determined so that the processing related to the addition of the advantageous section can be executed.

  Further, the addition of the advantageous section is to add (addition or increase) the number of games in the advantageous section. When ART is executed during the advantageous section, the number of games of ART in the advantageous section is added (addition, If you are running a Gasse game (a game state where you do not have the right to go to ART, but the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit) during the advantageous zone, you will move to the ART in the advantageous zone It is a concept that includes

In this way, by setting the winning number that is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, “34”) so that the processing related to the addition of the advantageous section can be executed, the winning number determined in the lottery determination is greater than or equal to the predetermined value. When it is determined that there is, it is possible to execute processing relating to the addition of the advantageous section.
Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the processing related to the addition of the advantageous section by determining whether or not the winning number determined in the lottery determination is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, thereby simplifying the program Therefore, the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

D. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the winning numbers “43” to “52” are determined so that the processing related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2) can be executed. ing.
In addition, if the winning section 1 is elected (decided to transition), the gaming state shifts to a game state that does not have the right to transition to ART, and if the winning section 2 is won, the gaming state (ART It moves to ART through a sign.

As described above, the winning number determined in the lottery determination is determined by determining that the winning number equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “43”) can be executed regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. When it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the specified value, processing related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be executed.
Therefore, by determining whether or not the winning number determined in the lottery determination is equal to or greater than a specified value, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute processing related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. Since the program can be simplified, the amount of ROM 54 used by the program can be reduced.

  (8) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, all RT common lottery tables (for example, FIG. 79 to FIG. 79) are used regardless of the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4) except during 1BB operation. The lottery determination was performed using FIG. When the winning number is determined to be “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the common RT common lottery table, the lottery determination is performed using the lottery table corresponding to the RT state.

Specifically, in non-RT, lottery determination is performed using the non-RT lottery table (FIG. 82 (b)), and in RT1, lottery determination is performed using the RT1 lottery table (FIG. 82 (c)). It was.
At RT2, lottery determination is performed using the RT2 lottery table (FIG. 83 (a)), at RT3, lottery determination is performed using the RT3 lottery table (FIG. 83 (b)), and at RT4, RT4 is determined. The lottery determination was performed using the hour lottery table (FIG. 84 (a)).

In this regard, for example, an RT state-specific lottery address table (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) as shown below is provided, and the RT address lottery address table is used to calculate (designate) the lottery table start address corresponding to the RT state. be able to.
TBL_LOT_RTTBL:
DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT0-$; non-RT lottery table DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT1-$; RT1 lottery table DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT2-$; RT2 lottery table DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT3-$ 3 RTD

Here, the RT state-specific lottery address table can be stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50, for example.
“TBL_LOTDAT_RT0” indicates the top address of the non-RT lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT1” indicates the top address of the RT1 lottery table.
Similarly, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT2” indicates the start address of the RT2 lottery table, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT3” indicates the start address of the RT3 lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT4” indicates the start address of the RT4 lottery table.

“$” Indicates the current address.
Therefore, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT0− $” indicates a difference (data number, byte number) from the current address to the top address of the non-RT lottery table.
Similarly, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT1− $” indicates a difference from the current address to the start address of the RT1 lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT2− $” indicates a difference from the current address to the start address of the RT2 lottery table. .
Further, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT3− $” indicates a difference from the current address to the start address of the RT3 lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT4− $” indicates a difference from the current address to the start address of the RT4 lottery table.

Further, the information regarding the RT state can be stored, for example, in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 (RT state data storage area “_NB_RT”).
Furthermore, any one of “0” to “4” is stored in “_NB_RT” as information regarding the RT state.
Specifically, “0” is stored in “_NB_RT” at non-RT, and “1” is stored in “_NB_RT” at RT1.
Also, “2” is stored in “_NB_RT” at RT2, “3” is stored in “_NB_RT” at RT3, and “4” is stored in “_NB_RT” at RT4.

Then, calculation (designation) of the top address of the lottery table according to the RT state can be performed as follows.
First, “TBL_LOT_RTTBL” is stored in the HL register. As a result, the leading address of the RT state lottery address table is stored in the HL register.
Next, the value of “_NB_RT” is stored in the A register. As a result, a value indicating the RT state is stored in the A register.

Next, the value of the A register (value indicating the RT state) is added to the value of the HL register (the start address of the RT state-specific lottery address table) to obtain a new value of the HL register. Thereby, the address of “address designation data” corresponding to the RT state is stored in the HL register.
Here, the “address designation data” is data stored in the RT state lottery address table, and is data for calculating (designating) the top address of the non-RT lottery table to the RT4 lottery table. .
Specifically, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT0- $” is address designation data for calculating (designating) the leading address of the non-RT lottery table.

Similarly, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT1- $” is address designation data for calculating (designating) the start address of the RT1 lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT2- $” is computing (designating) the RT2 lottery table start address. Addressing data to be used.
“TBL_LOTDAT_RT3- $” is address designation data for calculating (specifying) the start address of the RT3-lot lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT4- $” calculates (specifies) the RT4-lot lottery table start address. Address designation data.

Next, data (address designation data) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the A register. As a result, “address designation data” corresponding to the RT state is stored in the A register.
Next, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. Thereby, the head address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is stored in the HL register.

Here, the leading address of the RT state-specific lottery address table (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) is set to “1500 (H)”. In this case, the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT0- $; non-RT lottery table” is also “1500 (H)”.
Further, the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT1- $; RT1 lottery table” is set to “1501 (H)”, and the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT2- $; RT2 lottery table” is set to “1502 (H)”.
Furthermore, the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT3- $; RT3 lottery table” is set to “1503 (H)”, and the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT4- $; RT4 lottery table” is set to “1504 (H)”.

The leading address of the non-RT lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT0) is set to “1505 (H)”.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 82B, since the non-RT lottery table stores 5 bytes of data, the start address of the RT1 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT1) is “1505 (H)”. + “5 (H)” = “150 A (H)”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), 9-byte data is stored in the RT1 lottery table. For this reason, the leading address of the RT2 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT2) is “150A (H)” + “9 (H)” = “1513 (H)”.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), 9-byte data is stored in the RT2 lottery table. For this reason, the leading address of the RT3 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT3) is “1513 (H)” + “9 (H)” = “151 C (H)”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), 10-byte data is stored in the RT3 lottery table. For this reason, the leading address of the RT4 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT4) is “151C (H)” + “A (H)” = “1526 (H)”.

Hereinafter, taking RT3 as an example, the calculation (designation) of the top address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state will be described in detail.
First, the head address of “TBL_LOT_RTTBL” = “1500 (H)” is stored in the HL register.
Next, the value of “_NB_RT” = “3 (H)” is stored in the A register.
Next, the value “3 (H)” of the A register is added to the value “1500 (H)” of the HL register to obtain a new value “1503 (H)” of the HL register.

Next, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT3− $” corresponding to the value “1503 (H)” of the HL register is stored in the A register.
Here, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT3” = “151C (H)”.
When the value of the HL register is “1503 (H)”, “$” = “1503 (H)”.
Therefore, the value stored in the address corresponding to the value “1503 (H)” of the HL register is “19 (H)” (= “151C (H)” − “1503 (H)”). “19 (H)” is the value of the A register.

Next, the value “19 (H)” of the A register is added to the value “1503 (H)” of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
Here, “1503 (H)” + “19 (H)” = “151 C (H)”.
Therefore, the value of the new HL register is “151C (H)”.
The value “151C (H)” of the HL register indicates the head address of the RT3 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT3).
In this way, it is possible to calculate (specify) the leading address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state based on the RT state-specific lottery address table (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) and the value of the RT state data storage area “_NB_RT”.

The RT state-specific lottery address table defines which one of the lottery tables (non-RT lottery table to RT4 lottery table) corresponding to the RT state to be used. Non-RT lottery table to RT4 hour “Address designation data” for calculating (designating) the top address of the lottery table is defined.
For this reason, the lottery address table classified by RT state may also be referred to as “address designation data selection table” or “address designation data table”.

Further, the two-stage lottery address table of the seventeenth embodiment defines which one of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 is used, and calculates (specifies) the top address of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5. “Addressing data” is defined.
For this reason, the two-stage lottery address table may also be referred to as an “address designation data selection table”, an “address designation data table”, or the like, similar to the lottery address table classified by RT state.

It is also possible to specify the top address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state from the value indicating the RT state without using the RT state lottery address table.
However, in this case, first, it is determined whether or not the value indicating the RT state is “0”. If it is determined that the value is “0”, “1505 (H)” which is the leading address of the non-RT lottery table. When it is determined that it is not “0”, it is next determined whether or not the value indicating the RT state is “1”.

When it is determined that the value indicating the RT state is “1”, “150A (H)” that is the leading address of the RT1 lottery table is designated, and when it is determined that the value is not “1”, Then, it is determined whether or not the value indicating the RT state is “2”.
Furthermore, when it is determined that the value indicating the RT state is “2”, “1513 (H)” that is the start address of the RT2 lottery table is designated, and when it is determined that the value is not “2”, the next Then, it is determined whether or not the value indicating the RT state is “3”.

Furthermore, when it is determined that the value indicating the RT state is “3”, “151C (H)” that is the start address of the RT3 time lottery table is specified, and when it is determined that the value is not “3”, the RT4 time “1526 (H)” which is the top address of the lottery table is designated.
Since such a process is performed, the process until the start address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is specified becomes longer.
In addition, a program for designating the top address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is also required.

  On the other hand, if the lottery table start address corresponding to the RT state is specified using the RT state lottery address table, the processing until the start address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is specified can be shortened. At the same time, since it is not necessary to define a program for designating the top address of the lottery table according to the RT state, the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

(9) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, all RT common lottery tables (for example, FIG. 79 to FIG. 79) are used regardless of the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4) except during 1BB operation. The lottery determination was performed using FIG. When the winning number is determined to be “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the common RT common lottery table, the lottery determination is performed using the lottery table corresponding to the RT state. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the lottery determination may be performed using a lottery table corresponding to the RT state, except when 1BB is activated. Then, when the winning number is determined to be “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the lottery table corresponding to the RT state, the lottery determination may be performed using the all RT common lottery table. .

(10) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, when “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (favorable section number storage area) at the start of the current game, lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section When winning (determined to shift to an advantageous section), a value other than “0” was stored in “_NB_CND_AT”. That is, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, even if a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” at the start of the current game, it is possible to add an advantageous section (change the performance so that the gaming state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player, It is also possible to execute a lottery (including adding the number of AT games in the advantageous section) and change the value of “_NB_CND_AT” according to the result.

For example, in the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (the storage area of the accessory condition device number) is “0”, the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section may be executed. .
In addition, in the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is executed, and “_NB_CND_AT” is set to “2” according to the result. A control process may be executed so as to store.
In addition, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called inside), the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

(11) For example, as shown in FIG. 79, in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, lottery data relating to the accessory condition device (1BBA, 1BBB, etc.) is set in the all RT common lottery table.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery data related to the accessory condition device may be determined not only in the all RT common lottery table but only in the lottery table corresponding to the RT state.
More specifically, since the RT4 lottery table is a lottery table used in RT4 (inside), the lottery data related to the accessory condition device is not defined in the all RT common lottery table and the RT4 lottery table, It may be determined only in the RT1 lottery table, the RT2 lottery table, and the RT3 lottery table.

(12) For example, when the probability data is different for each set value, it is preferable to align the number of bytes of each probability data.
For example, in the 1BBA + small role E2 condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79, the probability data differs for each set value. Each probability data is set to 1 byte.
In addition, in the small role A condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81, the probability data is different for each set value. Each probability data is set to 2 bytes.

Thus, when the probability data is different for each set value, either probability data is set to 1 byte or 2 bytes so that 1-byte probability data and 2-byte probability data are mixed. Do not set to.
Thereby, since the lottery determination process can be simplified, the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

(13) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, a counter is provided in which the range from “0” to “65535” is one cycle, and one count is performed at 200 n (nano) sec, and the count value of this counter is a random value. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a value obtained by calculating (for example, adding or subtracting) a predetermined value (for example, another random value or a specific value) for the count value acquired from the counter may be used as the random number value. Good.

(14) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the carry flag is turned on (“1”) by storing the random value in a predetermined register and subtracting the probability data from the value of the predetermined register ( When the carry flag is turned on, it is determined that the player has been elected.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the carry flag is turned on by storing a random value in a predetermined register and adding probability data to the value of the predetermined register. Good.

When the carry flag is turned on, it is determined that the player has won.
On the other hand, when the carry flag is not turned on, a value obtained by adding probability data to a predetermined register value is stored as a new predetermined register value. That is, the value of a predetermined register is updated. Thereafter, by adding new probability data to the updated value of the predetermined register, it is repeated until the carry flag is turned on to determine whether or not the carry flag is turned on.
As described above, determining whether or not a winning is made based on a value stored in a predetermined register and probability data may be referred to as a comparison operation.

(15) How to determine the winning number, how to determine the condition device number, the correspondence between the winning number and the condition device number, and the correspondence between the condition device number and the condition device (winning role) shown in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments Relationship, type of condition device (winning role) corresponding to winning number, correspondence between winning number and probability data, probability data to be won (decided to move) to the advantageous section, winning to the advantageous section (transfer) The winning number to be determined), the winning number to be selected for adding to the advantageous section (determined to be added), etc. are merely examples, and can be set as appropriate according to the game content.
For example, when winning a 1BBA condition device, winning an advantageous section with a probability of 100% (deciding to move), etc. When winning a predetermined winning number, winning an advantageous section with a probability of 100% As described above, probability data and the like can be determined.

(16) In the flowcharts shown in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the figure. If the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing is changed. Is also possible.
(17) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described. However, the lottery other than the lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (for example, the lottery of the role, the condition device) It can also be applied to lottery, AT lottery, and RT transition lottery.
(18) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the slot machine 10 is given as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a ball game machine, an enclosed game machine, and the like.
(19) The sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments and the various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combination.

<20th Embodiment>
Subsequently, twentieth to twenty-fourth embodiments of the present invention will be described.
The twentieth to twenty-fourth embodiments relate to lighting control of LEDs such as the management information display LED 74.
FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating a more detailed configuration of the main CPU 55, the ROM 54, and the RWM 53 in the twentieth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55, the RWM 53, and the ROM 54 are provided on the main control board 50.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as “chip”) is mounted on the main control board 50, and the main control board 50 includes a main chip. A CPU 55 is provided. Further, the main CPU 55 has a built-in memory, and this built-in memory has a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53. The addresses of the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 are continuous.

The storage capacity of the ROM 54 is set to “16 KB or less” in the present embodiment, and has a use area with a capacity of “7.5 KB or less” and other areas outside the use area. Further, the use area includes a control area having a capacity “4.5 KB or less” and a data area having a capacity “3.0 KB or less”.
Here, the “use area” refers to a storage area in which information other than information necessary for preventing unauthorized modification or other changes is stored or stored (the same applies to the ROM 54 and the RWM 53).
The “control area” refers to a storage area other than the data area in the use area, and stores various programs executed by the main control means 50. The control area may be referred to as a “program area”.
Furthermore, the “data area” refers to a storage area in which only information other than the program is stored in the use area, or data used when the program is executed is stored.

Further, “outside the use area” is composed of a control area and a data area in the same manner as the use area. The control area of the use area may be referred to as a first control area, and the control area outside the use area may be referred to as a second control area. In the control area (second control area) outside the use area, a program not related to the progress of the game (for example, a program used during a test, a program for preventing fraud, etc.) is stored. This point will be described later.
Further, the storage capacity of the RWM 53 is “1,024K or less” in the present embodiment, and has a use area having a capacity of “512 KB or less” and other use areas.
Both the use area and the outside of the use area include a work area and a stack area. The use area of the RWM 53 stores an LED display counter and the like which will be described later.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 124, the ROM 54 includes a program management area and the like as other areas in addition to the use area and the use area.
Further, the RWM 53 includes an unused area as another area in addition to the used area and the used area.
In addition, the storage area of the entire internal memory includes an internal register area, an unused area, and the like as areas other than the ROM 54 and the RWM 53.
As described above, for example, an A register to an L register, a transmission register, and the like are provided in the built-in register area.

  FIG. 125A is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate 75 in the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 125B is a diagram more specifically showing the management information display LED 74 in the twentieth embodiment. . 125A is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 2 of the first embodiment, and FIG. 125B is a diagram corresponding to the management information display LED 74 shown in FIG. 3A of the first embodiment. .

In FIG. 125 (A), in the twentieth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a storage number display LED 76 composed of digit 1 (upper digit) and digit 2 (lower digit) and digit 3 (upper digit). And an acquisition number display LED 78 composed of digit 4 (lower digit).
However, unlike the first embodiment, each of the digits 1 to 4 uses a 7-segment display that does not include a dot segment (segment DP (hereinafter simply referred to as “segment P”). 2, the segment P of the digit 2 does not constitute the advantageous section display LED 77. In the twentieth embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is provided separately and independently. I will not explain this point.

In addition, seven LEDs are mounted on the display substrate 75, and these seven LEDs are collectively referred to as a status display LED 79.
First, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs for displaying the number of medals bet at that time. When one medal is bet, only the 1-bet display LED 79a is lit. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are lit. When three medals are bet, all of the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c are lit.

The game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 can be operated. Therefore, it does not light up when no medal is bet (or when replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. That is, it lights up before the game is finished and a medal for shifting to the next game is inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. Even after the replay is activated, it lights up when betting is possible according to the number of stored items.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that is lit when a replay is won, and when an automatic bet is made based on the replay winning, the replay display LED 79f is lit to notify the player that the bet state is automatic.
The effect display LED 79g is an LED that is used when displaying various effects, and may also be used as an adjustment display LED (an LED that is lit during the adjustment process).

In FIG. 125 (B), the four digits 6 to 9 used for the management information display LED 74 are different from the above digits 1 to 4, and are all 7-segment displays including dot segments (segments P). The digits 6 to 9 are the same as in the first embodiment in that the upper information type, the lower information type, the upper numerical value, and the lower numerical value are displayed.
Further, the segment P of the digit 7 (lower information type) functions as a digit separator LED. The digit separator LED is used to clarify the separator between the information type and the numerical value.

  The segment P of the digits 6, 8, and 9 is an LED that lights when an unrecoverable error occurs. Unlike the digits 1 to 4, the digits 6 to 9 are provided with the segment P. However, when the segment is physically provided in this way, it is required to be lit at any timing. Therefore, in this embodiment, when an unrecoverable error occurs, control is performed so that all the segments P of the digits 6 to 9 are lit.

FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining details of digits and segments in the twentieth embodiment and corresponds to FIG. 4 of the first embodiment.
In the twentieth embodiment, as described above, the seven segments of the digits 1 to 4 are composed of the segments A to G, and no dot segment (segment P) is provided.
However, the segments P of the digits 1, 3, and 4 constitute any one of the above-described status display LEDs 79. As shown in FIG. 126, for example, the segment P of the digit 1 constitutes a game start LED 79d.
Further, the segment P of the digit 3 constitutes a closing display LED 79e.
Furthermore, the segment P of the digit 4 constitutes a replay display LED 79f.

Although not shown, in the twentieth embodiment, the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) uses a 7-segment display having no dot segment (segment P) as in the digits 1 to 4. The segment P of the digit 5 constitutes an effect display LED 79g.
Note that the segment P of the digit 2 is unused in the twentieth embodiment.
Furthermore, the segment P of the digits 6 to 9 is as described above.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a data table stored in the ROM 54. The data table is a table for storing display data and display offset data when the digits 1 to 9 are turned on.
As shown in FIG. 127, the data table includes an in-use area data table stored in the data area (address “1200H” in FIG. 124) of the use area of the ROM 54, and a data area outside the use area of the ROM 54 (see FIG. 127). 124, an out-of-use area data table stored at an address “2300H˜”.

The in-use area data table includes an LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and an LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2).
The LED segment table 1 is a table that stores display data (English character data) used when error information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4).
The LED segment table 2 is a table that stores data for displaying “=” when displaying numeric display data and push order instruction information.
In FIG. 127, “DEFB” indicates storing 1 byte (8 bits) data in the assembler language.

In FIG. 127, for example, “C” display data is “00111001B”. That is, the segments A, D, E, and F are “1 (on; lit)”, and the segments B, C, and G are “0 (off, unlit)”. Therefore, in FIG. 126, when segments A, D, E, and F are lit, “C” is displayed by 7 segments.
The “=” display data is “01001000B”. That is, in FIG. 126, the segments D and G are “1 (ON; lit)”, the center and lower horizontal segments are lit, and “=” is displayed by 7 segments.

  LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2) are stored at consecutive addresses. For example, assuming that the head address of “C” display data is “1811”, each display data of the LED segment table 1 is stored in order from “1811”. In this case, the head address of the LED segment table 2 is “1816”, and each display data of the LED segment table 2 is stored in order from “1816”.

Thereby, each display data of the LED segment table 1 can be represented by an offset value from the head address “1811”. Similarly, each display data in the LED segment table 2 can be represented by an offset value from the head address “1816”.
For example, when reading the display data of the LED segment table 2, the head address “1816” is designated, and when the content to be displayed is “5”, the address obtained by adding the offset value “5” to the head address “1816” That is, if the data “181B” is read, the display data “5” can be read.

On the other hand, the out-of-use data table is a data table storing data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9), and includes an identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) and a ratio display segment data table (TBL_SEGRATE_DATA). ). The identification segment offset table and the ratio display segment data table are stored at successive addresses, similar to the LED segment tables 1 and 2 described above.
“Identification segment” is used as an abbreviation for “information type”.

In addition, in the identification segment of the twentieth embodiment, English characters and numerical values are set opposite to the information types shown in FIG.
In particular,
Advantageous section ratio: U7 → 7U
Consecutive character ratio (6000 games): y6 → 6y
Character ratio (6000 games): y7 → 7y
Consecutive character ratio (cumulative): A6 → 6A
Property ratio (cumulative): A7 → 7A
And

For example, the display offset data “7U” indicating the identification segment of the advantageous section ratio is “07AH” as shown in FIG. 127, but “7” indicates the offset value of the upper digit (digit 6; 1000 digits). , “A” indicates the offset value of the lower digit (digit 7; 100 digits). Further, the offset value here indicates an offset value from the head address of the ratio display segment data table.
Therefore, the offset value “7” designates “7” display data (for ratio), and the offset value “A” designates “U” display data.
In order to distinguish “7” displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) from “7” displayed on the digits 1 to 5, the display data is different. “7” displayed in the digits 6 to 9 is data determined to light the segment F in FIG. 126 (the fifth bit is set to “1”).

As described above, except for “7” display data, the numerical display data is the same data as the LED segment table 2. Nevertheless, the reason why the data table in the use area and the data table outside the use area are stored separately is as follows.
Control of lighting display of the storage number display LED 76 (digits 1 and 2), the acquired number (or error) display LED 78, and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is performed in the use region. For this reason, data of control performed in the use area is stored in the data area in the use area.
On the other hand, the lighting display of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6-9) is controlled outside the use area. For this reason, data for control performed outside the use area is stored in a data area outside the use area.

FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating output ports 2 to 5 provided on the main control board 50 and respective signals in the twentieth embodiment. In FIG. 128, the left column is the twentieth embodiment, and the right column is shown as “Reference Example” before the present invention.
The “reference example” is an example when the digits 6 to 9 are not included, and is an example described for comparison with the twentieth embodiment, and means a known technique or a known technique for the present invention. It is not a thing.
In FIG. 128, output ports 2 to 5 are illustrated as output ports, but more output ports are actually provided. The other output ports are not shown (the same applies to the drawings of output ports of other embodiments).
As shown in FIG. 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 50 is provided with an input port 51 and an output port 52.

Examples of the input port 51 include input ports 0 to 2 (in fact, other input ports are also provided).
The input port 0 is a port to which signals of the settlement switch 46, the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42 are input.
The input port 1 is a port to which signals such as the passage sensor 43a, the setting key switch 12, the setting switch 13, the reset switch 14, the (left, middle, and right) reel sensor 39 are input.
Furthermore, a power interruption signal (a signal output when a power interruption occurs), the input sensor 44, the payout sensor 37, and the like are input to the input port 2.

  And as main information processing which advances a game, the main process performed once per game is provided. The main process is a process in which inserted medals are detected or a winning process is performed after all reels 31 are stopped.

  During this main process, the main process is temporarily exited and an interrupt process (timer interrupt process) is executed (FIG. 133 described later; I_INTR). In the interrupt process, a process of detecting the input ports 0 to 2 (step S1407 in FIG. 133) is executed, and after the process is executed, a process of returning to the main process is periodically performed again. The interval of the interrupt time is 2.235 ms in this embodiment. That is, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is acquired for each interrupt process at intervals of 2.235 ms.

  Based on the acquired data, for each of the input ports 0 to 2, level data (data indicating ON / OFF of each bit), rising data of the input port (when the previous interrupt is off, this interrupt is on) Data indicating which bit the data has become), and falling data of the input port (data indicating which bit is the data that was on at the time of the previous interrupt and turned off at the time of the current interrupt) And remember. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms.

For example, output ports 0 to 10 are provided as output ports. In FIG. 128, among these output ports, output ports 2 to 5 related to the twentieth embodiment are illustrated.
The feature of the output port of the twentieth embodiment is that there are two output ports (digit ports) for transmitting digit signals (output ports 2 and 4) and one output port (segment port) for transmitting segment signals. (Output port 3).

First, the output port 2 is a port that outputs three bet display signals and digits 1 to 5 signals. The 1-bet display signal to the 3-bet display signal are signals for lighting the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c, respectively.
Digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal are drive signals for digit 1 to digit 5, respectively.
For example, when the signal “01111001” is output from the output port 2, it means that the drive signals for the digits 1 to 4 and the 1-bet display signal are output.

The output port 3 is a port for outputting a segment A signal to a segment P signal. For example, as shown in FIG. 127, when “0” is displayed, “00111111” is output.
The segment signal of the output port 3 is a segment signal that also serves as all the digits 1-9.
The output port 4 is a port for outputting drive signals of the digit 6 signal (D0) to the digit 9 signal (D3).
Therefore, which digit is lit is determined by the signal output from the output port 2 or 4, and which segment is lit is determined by the signal output from the output port 3.

  Here, the output port of the present embodiment can output signals of two consecutive output ports (one byte each, a total of 2 bytes) at a time. Therefore, the signals of the output ports 2 and 3 can be output simultaneously, and the signals of the output ports 3 and 4 can be output simultaneously. For this reason, the output port 2 and the output port 4 are used as output ports for the digit 1-5 signal and the digit 6-9 signal, respectively, and the output port 3 between them is set as a segment signal output port. .

  Thus, for example, when outputting a signal indicating digit 1 as “1”, the signal output from the output port 2 becomes “00001000 (assuming other than the digit 1 signal is“ 0 ”)”, and the output port The signal output from 3 is “00000110”. Therefore, “00001000/00000110” (“/” indicates the boundary between the signal output from the output port 2 and the signal output from the output port 3) is output from the output ports 2 and 3.

The output port 5 outputs an external (outer end) signal to the external concentration terminal board 100, and in this embodiment, external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal are output.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external concentration terminal board 100. Specifically, for example, AT, specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that a specific special game is being performed, external signal 4 indicating that an error or power failure has occurred in the slot machine 10, etc., slot An external signal 5 indicating opening of the front door of the machine 10 is provided.

The data strobe signal is a signal transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When receiving the data strobe signal, the sub control board 80 controls to acquire the sub control data signal from the buffer provided in the sub control board 80 based on the rising edge of the data strobe signal.
From the output ports other than the output ports 2 to 5 described above, for example, a signal of the motor 32, a signal of the blocker 45, a drive signal of the hopper motor 36, a condition device signal (so-called winning number), a sub control data signal, a test signal, etc. Is output.

129 to 131 are circuit diagrams showing wiring of electric signals of the main control board 50, the display board 75, the digits 1 to 9, and the status display LED 79. FIG.
FIGS. 129 and 130 show the wiring of electric signals on the main control board 50, and FIG. 131 shows the wiring of electric signals on the display board 75.
As shown in FIG. 125, the digits 1 and 2 constituting the storage number display LED 76, the digits 3 and 4 constituting the acquisition number display LED 78, and the seven status display LEDs 79 are mounted on the display substrate 75. Yes. On the other hand, the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) and the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) are mounted on the main control board 50 as shown in FIG. 3 of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 129, the main CPU 55 and three ICs (IC2, IC3, and IC4) are mounted on the main control board 50. The main control board 50 is actually provided with ICs in addition to these three, but is not shown in the present embodiment.
The outputs from the D0 to D7 output terminals of IC2 to IC4 continue until the input of the clock input terminal is turned from on to off.

IC2 is an IC related to the control of the bet display signal and the digits 1 to 5, and IC3 is an IC related to the control of the segment signal. IC4 is an IC related to control of digit 6-9 signals.
Each of the IC2 to IC4 includes a clock signal input terminal. On the other hand, the main CPU 55 has XCS2, XCS3, and XCS4 output terminals, the XCS2 output terminal and the clock input terminal of IC2 are connected, the XCS3 output terminal and the clock input terminal of IC3 are connected, and the XCS4 output terminal Are connected to the clock input terminal of the IC4.

The main CPU 55 has D0 to D7 output terminals. The D0 to D7 input terminals of the IC2 and the D0 to D7 output terminals of the main CPU 55 are connected.
Furthermore, the D0 to D7 output terminals of the main CPU 55 are connected to the D0 to D7 input terminals of the IC3, respectively.
Further, the D0 to D3 output terminals of the main CPU 55 and the D0 to D3 input terminals of the IC 4 are connected to each other. The D4 to D7 input terminals of the IC 4 are connected to the ground.

IC2 has an output port 2 (see FIG. 128) consisting of D0 to D7 output terminals, and D0 to D7 input terminals and D0 to D7 output terminals correspond to each other. Then, a 1-bet display signal line to a 3-bet display signal line are respectively output from the D0 to D2 output terminals. In FIG. 131, a 1-bet display signal line (16th terminal) and a 2-bet display signal line (17 No. terminal) and connected to a 3-bet display signal line (No. 18 terminal).
In addition, among the output ports 2, the digit 1 signal line to the digit 5 signal line are respectively output from the D3 to D7 output terminals, and these five signal lines are connected to the display substrate 75 (the third terminal to the seventh terminal in FIG. 131). In addition, the digit 5 signal line is connected to the drive signal line of the digit 5 (set value display LED 73) mounted on the main control board 50.

IC3 has an output port 3 (see FIG. 128) composed of D0 to D7 output terminals, and D0 to D7 input terminals correspond to D0 to D7 output terminals, respectively. Then, the segment A signal line to the segment P signal line are respectively output from the D0 to D7 output terminals, and these signal lines are first connected to the segment A to the segment P of the digit 5, respectively, and secondly the digit. 6 to 9 are connected to the segments A to P (FIG. 130), and thirdly, connected to the display substrate 75 (8th to 15th terminals in FIG. 131).
Furthermore, the IC 4 has an output port 4 (see FIG. 128) composed of D0 to D3 output terminals, and the D0 to D3 input terminals correspond to the D0 to D3 output terminals, respectively. As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the output terminals D4 to D7 of the output port 4 are unused (NC).

Then, the digit 6 signal line to the digit 9 signal line are respectively output from the D0 to D3 output terminals, and these signal lines are connected to the drive signal lines of the digits 6 to 9, respectively.
In FIG. 129, for example, the signal lines output from the D0 to D2 output terminals of the output port 2 and the signal lines output from the D0 to D7 of the output port 3 are respectively connected to the digit and the display substrate 75 through transistors and resistors. Although connected, these transistors and resistors are not shown in FIG.

In FIG. 130, the digit 6 signal to the digit 9 signal are connected to the drive signal lines of the digits 6 to 9, respectively.
The digits 6 to 9 each have 8 LEDs (LEDs constituting the segments A to G and P). The LEDs constituting the segments A to G and P of the digits 6 to 9 are connected to the segments A to G and the P signal line, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 131, digits 1 to 4 are provided on the display substrate 75. The output terminals (No. 3 terminal to No. 6 terminal) of the digit 1 signal line to the digit 4 signal line of the display substrate 75 and the respective drive signal lines of the digits 1 to 4 are connected.
Each of the digits 1 to 4 has seven LEDs (LEDs constituting the segments A to G) similarly to the digit 5 described above. The LEDs of the segments A to G of the digits 1 to 4 are connected to output terminals (8th terminal to 14th terminal) of the segment A to G signal lines, respectively.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the display board 75 has seven LEDs (see FIG. 125) constituting the status display LED 79, specifically, a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, and a 3-bet display LED 79c. A game start display LED 79d, a throw-in display LED 79e, a replay display LED 79f, and an effect display LED 79g are provided.

The game start display LED 79d, the input display LED 79e, the replay display LED 79f, and the effect display LED 79g are connected to the output terminal (No. 15 terminal) of the segment P signal line.
Further, the game start display LED 79d is connected to the output terminal (No. 3 terminal) of the digit 1 signal line, the input display LED 79e is connected to the output terminal (No. 5 terminal) of the digit 3 signal line, and the replay display LED 79f is a digit 4 signal. The output display LED 79g is connected to the output terminal (No. 7 terminal) of the digit 5 signal line.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the output terminals (No. 16 terminal to No. 18 terminal) of the 1st to 3rd bed display signal lines of the display board 75 are connected to the 1st to 3rd bed display LEDs 79a to 79c, respectively. Yes. Further, a + 5V power supply voltage terminal (the first terminal and the second terminal) of the display substrate 75 is connected to the 1-bet to 3-bet display LEDs 79a to 79c.

  In the above configuration, in FIG. 129, the main CPU 55 normally applies a high level (about 5V, the same applies hereinafter) voltage to the XCS2 to XCS4 output terminals, and from the high level to the low level (approximately zero V). The same applies to the following (when the voltage is changed by a switch (circuit) provided in the main CPU 55). For example, when it is desired to drive (select or designate) IC2, the XCS2 output terminal is activated. As a result, an active signal (chip select signal) is output from the XCS2 output terminal and input to the clock input terminal of IC2. As a result, the IC 2 enters a driving state (also referred to as a selection state or a designation state). If the XCS3 and XCS4 output terminals are activated in the same manner as described above, the IC3 and IC4 are driven.

In addition, a low level voltage is normally applied to the D0 to D7 output terminals of the main CPU 55, and a high level voltage is applied when outputting "1" data (data signal).
For example, when a data signal of “1” is output from the D0 output terminal of the main CPU 55, the data signal is input to the D0 input terminals of the IC2 to IC4, respectively. At this moment, when the XCS2 output terminal is active, the IC2 The data signal is input to the D0 input terminal.

  Furthermore, a high level voltage is normally applied to the output port 2 of the IC 2, and a low level voltage is applied to the output terminal corresponding to the input terminal to which the data signal is input. For example, a data signal of “1” is output from the D7 output terminal of the main CPU 55, and at this moment, when the XCS2 output terminal is active, the data signal is input to the D7 input terminal of IC2. When the D7 output terminal of IC2 is set to the low level, current can flow through the LEDs of the segments A to G of the digit 5.

Furthermore, when the data signal “1” is output from the D0 and D1 output terminals of the main CPU 55 and the XCS3 output terminal is activated, the data signal is input to the D0 and D1 input terminals of the IC3.
A high level voltage is normally applied to the output port 3 of the IC 3. When a high level voltage is applied, the circuit after the transistor (not shown) in FIG. 129 is in a high impedance state (a state that is neither low nor high).

When the D0 and D1 output terminals of IC3 are set to the low level, a current flows from the emitter to the collector of the transistor connected to the high level (+ 5V) with the change in the current between the emitter and the base, and the segment A and B signal lines are connected. Current flows.
Therefore, as described above, when the D7 output terminal of IC2 is set to the low level and the current can flow through the LEDs of the segments A to G of the digit 5, D0 and D1 of IC3 as described above. When the output terminal is set to the low level, a current flows through the segment A and B signal lines, and the LEDs of the segments A and B of the digit 5 are turned on.

  In other words, although a current flows in the segment A and B signal lines of all the digits, a voltage of about 5 V is applied to the digits other than the digit 5, so that no potential difference occurs and the digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 are not generated. The LEDs of segments A and B corresponding to are not lit. That is, current flows only to the digit 5 to which about 0 V is applied, and the LEDs of the segments A and B of the digit 5 are turned on.

For example, the D3 output terminal (digit 1 signal) of IC2 is set to low level.
Further, when the D7 output terminal (segment P signal) of IC3 is set to the low level, a current flows from the emitter connected to the high level to the collector and a current flows to the segment P signal line in accordance with a change in the current between the emitter and the base. As a result, the game start display LED 79d is turned on in FIG.

  In other words, although a current flows through the segment P signal lines of all the digits, a voltage of about 5 V is applied to the digits other than the digit 1, so there is no potential difference and it is associated with the digits other than the digit 1. The input display LED 79e, the replay display LED 79f, and the effect display LED 79g are not lit. That is, a current flows only to the digit 1 to which approximately 0 V is applied, and the game start display LED 79d associated with the digit 1 is turned on.

Further, a low level voltage is normally applied to the output terminals D0 to D7 of the output port 2 of the IC2. When a high level voltage is applied to any one of the D0 to D2 output terminals of IC2, a current flows from the collector of the transistor to the emitter, and the collector side of the transistor becomes low level.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 131, a high level voltage is always applied to the power supply voltage terminals (No. 1 terminal and No. 2 terminal) connected to the upstream side of the 1 to 3 bet display LEDs 79a to 79c. Yes. Therefore, in FIG. 129, for example, if the D0 output terminal of IC2 is set to the high level, the 16th terminal of the 1-bet display signal in FIG. To do.

In the present embodiment, only one of the digits 1 to 9 is set to be lit. Here, in order to be able to light all digits individually, it is necessary to provide independent wiring for each digit and for each segment. However, with this setting, the number of wires increases, the cost increases, and the assembly burden also increases.
On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 129 to 131, for example, in the case of a segment A signal, the number of wirings can be reduced if the circuit configuration is connected to the segment A signals of all the digits 1 to 9.

And even with the circuit configuration as in this embodiment, if the digits to be turned on for each interrupt process are sequentially switched, virtually no change is made from the state in which all the digits are turned on at the same time. Can be shown).
In addition, if the LED to be lit is different for each interrupt process, power consumption can be suppressed and LED burn-in can also be suppressed.
Further, the luminance can be increased by repeating the point emission as compared with the LED that is always lit.

FIG. 132A is a diagram illustrating a relationship among an interrupt, an LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP), and an output signal in the twentieth embodiment.
FIG. 5B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP).
As described above, in this embodiment, in parallel with the main process, the interrupt process is executed once every 2.235 ms.
On the other hand, a storage area of the LED display counter is provided at a predetermined address in the use area of the RWM 53. The LED display counter is 1-byte data and is a counter that is continuously updated for each interrupt.

  The LED display counter of the twentieth embodiment takes a value of “00000001” as an initial value. Then, for each interrupt process, updating is performed by shifting bit “1” to the left by one digit. When this update is continued, in FIG. 132, when the interrupt becomes “9” from “8”, the bit “1” overflows to “00000000”. When the LED display counter value becomes “00000000”, the initialization process of the LED display counter is executed in the next interrupt process. This initialization process is to set the D0 bit to “1”, that is, to set the LED display counter to “00000001”. Therefore, for each interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 132, “1” → “2” →... → “9” → “1” →. For this reason, the LED display counter is a counter with nine interrupts in one cycle.

  First, when the LED display counter value is “00000001”, the output signals are the 1-bet display signal and the digit 6 signal, and therefore, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the digit 6 are to be turned on (this) At this time, the LED display request flag described later is not considered (hereinafter the same). For this reason, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “00000001”, a signal “00000001” is output from the output ports 2 and 4. As a result, a 1-bet display signal is output from the D0 output terminal of the output port 2, and a digit 6 signal is output from the D0 output terminal of the output port 4. Therefore, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the digit 6 can be turned on.

  In FIG. 132, “in use area” and “out of use area” are displayed as programs and data for controlling lighting of the 1 to 3 bet display LEDs 79a to 79c and the digits 1 to 5. Is stored in the use area of the ROM 54, and the program and data for controlling the lighting of the digits 6 to 9 are stored outside the use area of the ROM 54. The inside and outside of the usage area are displayed separately.

Similarly, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “00000010”, a signal “00000010” is output from the output ports 2 and 4. As a result, a 2-bet display signal is output from the D1 output terminal of the output port 2, and a digit 7 signal is output from the D1 output terminal of the output port 4. Accordingly, the 2-bet display LED 79b and the digit 7 can be turned on. Further, when the digit 7 is lit, the segment P (digit separator display LED) is always lit.
For the digits 6, 8 and 9 other than the digit 7, the segment P is not lit in the interrupt processing. These digit segments P are turned on at the time of an unrecoverable error in which interrupt processing is prohibited (details of this point will be described later).

Next, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “00000100”, a signal “00000100” is output from the output ports 2 and 4. As a result, a 3-bet display signal is output from the D2 output terminal of the output port 2, and a digit 8 signal is output from the D2 output terminal of the output port 4. Therefore, the 3-bet display LED 79c and the digit 8 can be turned on.
Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “00001000”, a signal “00001000” is output only from the output port 2 (there is no output from the output port 4). As a result, the digit 1 signal is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 2. Therefore, the digit 1 and the game start display LED 79d corresponding to the segment P of the digit 1 can be turned on.

Furthermore, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value becomes “00010000”, a signal “00010000” is output only from the output port 2. As a result, the digit 2 signal is output from the D4 output terminal of the output port 2. Therefore, the digit 2 can be turned on. There is no LED assigned to segment P of digit 2 (FIG. 126).
Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “00100000”, a signal “00100000” is output only from the output port 2. As a result, the digit 3 signal is output from the D5 output terminal of the output port 2. Therefore, the digit 3 and the input display LED 79e corresponding to the segment P of the digit 3 can be turned on.

Further, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value becomes “01000000”, a signal “01000000” is output only from the output port 2. As a result, the digit 4 signal is output from the D6 output terminal of the output port 2. Therefore, the digit 4 and the replay display LED 79f corresponding to the segment P of the digit 4 can be turned on.
Furthermore, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value becomes “10000000”, a signal “10000000” is output from only the output port 2. As a result, the digit 5 signal is output from the D7 output terminal of the output port 2. Therefore, the digit 5 and the effect display LED 79g corresponding to the segment P of the digit 5 can be turned on.

Next, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “00000000”, a signal “00001000” is output only from the output port 4 (there is no output from the output port 2). As a result, the digit 9 signal is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 4. Therefore, the digit 9 can be turned on.
Note that the LED display counter is 8-bit data. If 9 digits are managed using 8-bit data, one digit cannot be assigned to each bit, and one bit is insufficient. . For this reason, in this embodiment, when the LED display counter is “0”, the output timing of the digit 9 signal is set.

The LED display request flag shown in FIG. 132 (B) is a flag indicating which LED has a lighting request, and is a predetermined address in the use area of the RWM 53 as 1-byte data consisting of 8 bits (D0 to D7). Is remembered.
Digits 1 to 5 and digits 6 to 8 corresponding to the respective bits of the LED display request flag are set to the same bits as the LED display counter. The D0 to D2 bits of the LED display request flag correspond to 1 to 3 bets.
There is no bit corresponding to the digit 9 in the LED display request flag. This is because the bit corresponding to the digit 9 cannot be provided as described above.

In the LED display request flag, for example, during normal (during gaming and waiting for game), the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is turned off, and 1 to 3 bets and digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 8 can be lit. Because there is, it becomes “0111111111”. Bit “1” of the LED display request flag indicates that lighting is possible, and bit “0” indicates that lighting is not possible.
While the setting is being changed, the set value is displayed in the digit 5, so that the D7 bit is “1”, and the digits 1 and 2 (reserved number display LED 76) are not displayed, so the D3 and D4 bits are “0”. Since the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78) indicate “88” indicating that the setting is being changed, the D5 bit and the D6 bit are “1”. Therefore, the LED display request flag during the setting change is “11100000B”.

  Further, during the setting confirmation, the set value is displayed in the digit 5 as in the case of changing the setting, so the D7 bit becomes “1”. Further, “8” is displayed in the digits 1 to 4. Therefore, the LED display request flag during setting confirmation is “11111000B”.

When actually performing LED display control (“I_LED_OUT”, which will be described later) in interrupt processing, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter and the LED display request flag, and a digit signal is output corresponding to the result of the operation ( Lights the digit).
For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), in the case of interrupt “4”, the LED display counter is “00001000”, and if that time is normal, the LED display request counter is “01111111”. Therefore, when both are AND-operated, “00001000” is obtained, and therefore, the signal output at the time of the interrupt processing is only the digit 1 signal (the upper digit of the storage number display LED 76).
In the case of the interrupt “8”, the LED display counter is “10000000”. If the time is normal, the LED display request counter is “01111111”. Therefore, when both are AND-operated, “00000000” is obtained, and there is no signal to be output during the interrupt processing.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt process shown in FIG. 133 at a period of 2.235 ms (but not limited to this period) in parallel with the main process.
First, when the process proceeds to the interrupt process of step S1401, in step S1402, a register value saving process and a duplicate interrupt prohibition process are performed as an initial process. Here, since the register of the main CPU 55 used in the main process is used in the interrupt process, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Further, the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is because, for example, an interrupt process execution request may be made during the power-off process.

In the next step S1403, it is determined whether or not a power-off is detected. Here, when a power monitoring voltage (not shown) provided on the main control board 50 (not shown) causes the power supply voltage to fall below a predetermined value, a power-off detection signal is sent to a predetermined bit of a predetermined input port. Therefore, it is detected whether or not the signal is input.
Then, when power-off is detected, the process proceeds to power-off processing in step S1419, and when it is determined that power-off is not detected, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the interrupt counter value is updated.
In the next step S1405, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed is mentioned.
Next, it progresses to step S1406 and LED display control (I_LED_OUT; FIG. 134) is performed. Here, it is a process of lighting the LEDs (digits 1 to 5) according to the state of the slot machine 10. Details of this processing will be described later.

  Errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include an unrecoverable error and a recoverable error. In the unrecoverable error, an error display is output by the main process as will be described later. This LED display control is performed every hour.

  In step S1407, the input port 51 is read. As a result, whether or not the operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, etc. has been performed, the switch signals and the input signals of various sensors are read, and the data (level data, rising data, (Falling data) is generated and stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.

  In the next step S1408, it is determined whether or not the set value is in a normal range. Here, the setting value data stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 is read, and it is determined whether or not the range of the setting value is a normal range (a range of “1” to “6”). When it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S1409. When it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S1420, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error process 2 (FIG. 137 described later). In this embodiment, the error in this case is referred to as an “E6” error, and “E6” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, a recoverable error and a non-recoverable error will be described.
The recoverable error is an error that can be recovered without turning on / off the power supply, and includes, for example, a front door open error, a medal clogging error, etc. when there is no medal in the hopper 35.
On the other hand, an unrecoverable error is an error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and the power is turned on again. Specific errors that cannot be recovered include the following. However, it is not limited to these unrecoverable errors.
“E1” error: When it is determined that the recovery from power failure is not normal. “E5” error: When it is determined that a display (stop symbol) error has occurred when the reel 31 is stopped. “E6” error: Step S1408 In step S1410, it is determined that a random number error has occurred in step S1410.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the E1 error and the E5 error are referred to as an unrecoverable error 1, and the E6 error and the E7 error are referred to as an unrecoverable error 2.
A program for determining the unrecoverable error 1 is stored in the use area. Further, the program (FIG. 136; SS_ERROR_STOP1 described later) when the unrecoverable error 1 occurs is stored in the control area in the use area of the ROM. For this reason, this processing is also referred to as in-use region processing.
On the other hand, the program for determining the unrecoverable error 2 is stored outside the use area. A program for executing steps S1408 and S1410 in the above-described interrupt processing corresponds to this. Furthermore, the program processing (FIG. 137 described later; SS_ERROR_STOP2) when the non-recoverable error 2 occurs is stored in the control area outside the use area of the ROM 54. For this reason, this processing is also referred to as out-of-use region processing.

Return to the description of the flowchart.
In step S1409, a built-in random number check process is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the internal random number is provided, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random numbers for the lottery (for example, when the random number update is late), the error flag is turned on.
The process advances to step S1410 to determine whether or not an error has occurred in the internal random number (whether or not the error flag is on). If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1420, and the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error process 2. The error display content at this time is “E7”.

  In step S1411, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed in units of 31 reels (left, middle, and right), and includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby according to the operation state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1412 to perform port output processing. In this process, the excitation output of the motor 32 (for reel) and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S1413, an input error check process is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not various sensors are abnormal.
In the next step S1414, control command transmission processing is performed. This process is a process for transmitting the set control command (the untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer of the RWM 53) to the sub-control board 80.
Specifically, when the control command is set in the command buffer, in the interrupt processing after that time (in the case where the command buffer is empty, in principle, the interrupt processing that comes next after that time), this step S1414. As a result, the control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

In the next step S1415, the data for the external signal stored in the RWM 53 is stored in the register. In the next step S1416, data is written (set) to the output port 5 to output an external signal (transmission of a signal to the external concentrated terminal board 100).
In step S1417, random number update processing is performed. In the next step S1418, the register value saved in step S1402 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

As shown in the above processing, the ON / OFF of the storage number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, the status display LEDs 79 (79a to 79g), and the set value display LED 73 is controlled by the interrupt processing every 2.235 ms.
Furthermore, when an untransmitted control command is stored in the command buffer for each interrupt process, the transmission process is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed during non-recoverable error processing (interrupt processing is interrupted until normal recovery).
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and performs processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 53 based on data from the input port, transmission of a control command to the sub-control board 80), etc. To prevent it from happening, interrupts themselves are prohibited.
If an untransmitted command is stored in the control command buffer when an unrecoverable error occurs, the command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S1406 of FIG.
First, in step S1431, the output ports 2 and 3 are turned off. The output port 2 is an output port corresponding to the digit 1 signal to the digit 5 signal, and the output port 3 is an output port corresponding to the segment A to segment P signals. By outputting “00000000” to these output ports 2 and 3, the output of the digits 1 to 5 is temporarily not performed. Thereby, when switching the display of the LEDs, it is possible to prevent the different LEDs from being turned on and viewed at the same time (to be displayed) (afterimage prevention).

  In the next step S1432, the output port 4 is turned off as in step S1431. The output port 4 is an output port corresponding to the digit 6 signal to the digit 9 signal. Also for this output port 4, by outputting “00000000”, the management information display LED 74 is temporarily not output. Thereby, the same effect (afterimage prevention) as the above is exhibited.

In the next step S1433, the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) is updated. The update of the LED display counter is a process of shifting the bit “1” to the left by one digit. The updated value is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S1434.
In step S1434, it is determined whether the LED display counter has been updated nine times. Here, when the LED display counter before the update is “00000000”, it is determined that the update has been performed nine times. When the LED display counter before the update is “00000000”, the process proceeds to step S1435. On the other hand, when the LED display counter is not “00000000”, the process proceeds to step S1436.

In step S1435, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, the LED display counter value is set to “00000001” and stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S1436.
In step S1436, an LED display counter and an LED display request flag are acquired. The LED display counter and the LED display request flag are both stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the E register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S1437, a segment display confirmation set for the digit to be displayed this time is performed. In this process, an AND operation is performed on the LED display request flag value and the LED display counter value, and data of the LED that is turned on this time is created.

For example,
LED display counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 01111111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
It becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 10000000B
LED display request flag value: 01111111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
It becomes.
Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register. Further, the value stored in the A register is stored in the D register.

In step S1438, it is determined whether the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the LED display counter value and the LED display request flag value) is “0”. When it is determined that the value is “0”, it is determined that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S1456. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, it is determined that there is a display request, and the process proceeds to step S1439.
In step S1439, error display data is acquired. When an error occurs, the error display data is stored at an address indicating the error display data in the RWM 53, so that processing for reading the data and storing it in the B register is executed.
In the next step S1440, the LED segment table 2 is set. The LED segment table 2 is “TBL_SEG_DATA2” shown in FIG. 127, and is stored in the use area of the ROM 54. The head address of this data is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

  In step S1441, set value display data is acquired. Here, the current set value stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 is read and stored in the A register. Next, proceeding to step S1442, it is determined whether there is a set value display request. This determination is made as to whether or not the D7 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 5) of the AND operation value stored in the D register is “1” (“10000000B”). If it is “1”, it is determined that there is a set value display request, and the process advances to step S1455. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no set value display request, the process advances to step S1443.

In step S1443, the stored number data stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S1444, an upper digit offset is obtained. This process is a process of executing the calculation of dividing the stored number data acquired in step S1443 by “10 (decimal number)”, storing the quotient value in the A register, and storing the remainder value in the C register.
In the next step S1445, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the upper digit of the stored number. This process determines whether or not the D3 bit (bit corresponding to digit 1) of the AND operation value stored in the D register is “1”. If it is “1”, the determination is “Yes”. To do. When it is determined that there is a display request for the upper digits of the stored number, the process proceeds to step S1455, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1446.

  In step S1446, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the lower digit of the stored number. This process determines whether or not the D4 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 2) of the AND operation value stored in the D register is “1”. If it is “1”, it is determined as “Yes”. Then, the process proceeds to step S1454. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display request for the lower digit of the stored number, the process proceeds to step S1447.

  In step S1447, display data during setting change, acquired number data, or push order instruction number is acquired and stored in the A register. This process is a process of reading the acquired number data stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 and storing it in the A register. The acquired number data is stored at the predetermined address at the timing of displaying the acquired number, and the pressing order instruction number is stored at the predetermined address at the timing of displaying the pressing order instruction number during ART. Yes. Further, when the setting is being changed, data indicating “8” is stored.

  In the next step S1448, it is determined whether or not the error display is applicable. This process determines whether or not the B register value is “0”. If it is “0”, it is determined “No”. If it is determined in step S1448 that the error is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S1450. If it is determined that an error is being displayed, the process advances to step S1449.

In step S1449, the LED segment table 1 (“TBL_SEG_DATA1” in FIG. 127) is set. This process executes a process of storing the head address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S1450, an offset for the upper digit is obtained. In this process, when no error has occurred, an operation is performed to divide the acquired number data stored in the A register or the push order instruction number by “10 (decimal number)” at this time, and the quotient is calculated. Store in the A register and store the remainder in the C register. On the other hand, when an error occurs, an operation of dividing the B register value by “10 (decimal number)” is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

  In the next step S 1451, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78. This process determines whether or not the D5 bit (bit corresponding to digit 3) of the AND operation value stored in the D register is “1”. If it is “1”, there is a display request. Judge. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S1455, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1452.

  In step S1452, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the lower digits of the acquired number display LED 78. This process determines whether or not the D6 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 4) of the AND operation value stored in the D register is “1”. to decide. If it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S1454. If it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1453.

In step S1453, bet signal data is acquired. In this process, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter and the bet number display data, and the calculation result is obtained.
Here, the bet number display data is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 and is as follows.
0 bets: 00000000B
1 bet: 00000001B
2 bets: 00000011B
3 bets: 00000111B
Therefore, for example, when the LED display counter value is “00000100B” and the bet number display data is “00000111B”, when AND operation is performed on both, “00000100B” is obtained and the D2 bit (bit corresponding to the 3-bet display LED) is set. Data that is “1” is created. Then, the process proceeds to step S1456.

If “Yes” in step S1446 or “Yes” in step S1452, the process proceeds to step S1454, and an offset for the lower digit is acquired. This process is a process for storing the data stored in the C register in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S1455, segment output data is obtained. This process adds the data stored in the HL register (the head address of the LED segment table 1) and the data stored in the A register (the offset value corresponding to the display data), and corresponds to the address after the addition. This is a process of storing data in the D register.
For example,
HL register value = 1816H (before addition)
A register value = 1H
HL register value = 1817H (after addition)
D register value = 00000110 (B): “1” display data.
When the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data, “=” display data is acquired.

Next, proceeding to step S1456, it is determined whether there is a segment P display request. Here, data indicating ON / OFF of the status display LEDs 79d to 79g is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Specifically, it is as follows.
D0 bit: Not used D1 bit: Not used D2 bit: Not used D3 bit: “1” when the game can start, “0”, etc.
D4 bit: Not used D5 bit: “1” when a medal can be inserted, other “0”
D6 bit: “1” at the time of replay winning, other “0”
D7 bit: “1” when effect display is possible, “0” in others
The relationship between the bit and the status display LED 79 is the same as that shown in FIG.

  This data is read and stored in the A register, and the value and the value (LED display counter) stored in the E register are ANDed. When the result of the calculation is “0”, it is determined that there is no display request. . If it is determined that there is a segment P display request, the process proceeds to step S1457. If it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1458.

  In step S1457, segment P output data is set. This processing is processing for setting the D7 bit (bit corresponding to the segment P) of the data (display data) stored in the D register to “1”. In step S 1458, the LED digit and segment signal are output from the output ports 2 and 3. Specifically, the data (digit data) stored in the E register is output from the output port 2, and the data (segment data) stored in the D register is output from the output port 3. Then, the process proceeds to the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S1459.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S1459.
The “ratio” is an abbreviation for management information displayed by the management information display LED 74 in the present embodiment, and is displayed by the digits 6 to 9.
The interrupt processing shown in FIG. 133 and the LED display control program shown in FIG. 134 are stored in the use area of the ROM 54. In contrast, the ratio display processing program of FIG. 135 is stored outside the use area of the ROM 54.
In FIG. 134, in the LED display control that is a program in the use area, when the process proceeds to step S1458, the process proceeds to a ratio display process that is a program outside the use area. It returns and complete | finishes LED display control (step S1460).

  As described above, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed by a program stored in the use area of the ROM 54, while the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) is executed by a program stored outside the use area of the ROM 54. This is because the lighting control of the digits 1 to 5 is executed by a program in the use area, and the lighting control of the digits 6 to 9 (management information (ratio)) is executed by a program outside the use area. As shown in FIG. 127, the data used in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is also stored in the data area in the use area of the ROM 54, and the data used in the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) is stored in the ROM 54. It is stored in a data area outside the use area.

In FIG. 135, in step S1471, an LED display counter is acquired. This process is the same as the LED display counter acquisition process in step S1436. The LED display counter acquired here is stored in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether or not there is a ratio display request. Here, it is determined whether there is any display request for digits 6-9. Specifically, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter value stored in the D register and “11111000”. If the AND operation result is not “0”, it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated (ie, the process proceeds to step S1460 in FIG. 134 to return to the process in the use area). On the other hand, when the AND operation result is “0”, it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process proceeds to step S 1473.

In particular,
LED display counter value: 00010000 (digit 2 signal is on)
After AND operation: 00010000 (≠ “0”) → No ratio display request.
Or
LED display counter value: 00000001 (digit 6 signal is on)
After AND operation: 00000000 → ratio display requested.

In the next step S 1473, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter value stored in the D register is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1474, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1475.
In step S1474, a ratio (one digit) display request is set.
Here, the management information display LED 74 displays four digits with digits 6 to 9, as shown in FIG.
Digit 9: Ratio (1 digit)
Digit 8 position: Ratio (10 digits)
Digit 7: Ratio (100 digits)
Digit 6: Ratio (1000 digits)
Called.

As shown in FIG. 132, when the D0 bit of the LED display counter is “1”, the digit 6 signal is “1”, and when the D1 bit is “1”, the digit 7 signal is “1”. When the bit is “1”, the digit 8 signal is “1”. When the LED display counter is “0”, the digit 9 signal is on.
However, since the nine digits 1 to 9 are managed by the 8-bit LED display counter, even if the digit 9 signal is on, all bits become “0” data, and the digit 9 is supported. It is not data in which the bit to be set is “1”. Therefore, when the LED display counter is “00000000B” (when the digit 9 signal is ON), the digit 9 signal is assigned to the D3 bit, so the digit data “00001000B” with the D3 bit set to “1” is created. . In step S1474, this process is executed, and "00001000B" is stored in the D register as the digit data. Then, the process proceeds to step S1475.
In the above steps S1471 or S1474, digit data in which any one of the digit 6 (D0) to digit 9 (D3) signals is “1” (ON) is stored in the D register.

In the next step S1475, a ratio display number is acquired. Here, the ratio display number refers to the numbers “1” to “5” shown in FIG. Since the switching display is executed every predetermined time from the advantageous section ratio of “1” to the ratio of the “5” accessory (cumulative), it is determined which number of management information is displayed in this interruption. get. The acquired ratio display number is stored in the E register.
In step S1476, the identification segment offset table is set. This process is a process of storing the head address of the identification segment offset table (“TBL_SEGID_DATA” in FIG. 127) in the HL register. In the next step S1477, an identification segment offset value is acquired. Specifically, this is a process of reading the offset value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register in step S1475 from the identification segment offset table. For example, the display offset data when the ratio display number is “1” is “7U”, and the offset value at this time is “07AH”. The display offset data when the ratio display number is “2” is “6y”, and the offset value at this time is “06BH”. This identification offset value is acquired and stored in the A register.

  In the next step S1478, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for a ratio (1000 digits) (display request for digit 6). Here, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”. If it is “1”, it is determined that there is a display request. Specifically, for example, an AND operation is performed on the D register value and “00000001”, and if the calculation result is “0”, it is determined that there is no display request, and if it is not “0”, it is determined that there is a display request. When there is a display request for the ratio (1000 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and when there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1479.

  In step S1479, it is determined whether there is a display request for a ratio (100 digits) (display request for digit 7). Here, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”. If it is “1”, it is determined that there is a display request. Specifically, for example, an AND operation is performed on the D register value and “00000010”, and if the operation result is “0”, it is determined that there is no display request, and if it is not “0”, it is determined that there is a display request. When the display request for the ratio (100 digits) is requested, the process proceeds to step S1483, and when there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1480.

The process proceeds to step S1480 when there is no display request for the ratio (1000 digits) and the ratio (100 digits), that is, when there is no display request for the identification segment (information type). Therefore, in step S1480, ratio data is acquired. Here, the “ratio data” corresponds to the advantageous section ratio “50 (%)” in the example of FIG. 38, for example.
In this step S1480, a numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register is acquired. For example, when the ratio display number acquired in step S1475 is “1”, ratio ratio ratio ratio data is acquired. Since the method for acquiring the ratio data is the same as that in the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

Next, proceeding to step S1481, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for a ratio (one digit) (display request for digit 9). This process is a process for determining whether or not the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”. Specifically, an AND operation is performed on the D register value and “00000100”, and if the calculation result is “0”, it is determined that there is no display request, and if it is not “0”, it is determined that there is a display request. When there is a display request for the ratio (one digit), the process proceeds to step S1483, and when there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1482.
Note that when there is no ratio (one digit) display request in step S1481, there is a request to display a ratio (10 digits).

With the above processing, when there is a display request for a ratio (1000 digits) or a ratio (10 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and when there is a display request for a ratio (100 digits) or a ratio (one digit), the process proceeds to step S1483. .
In step S1482, an upper digit offset is set. At this time, the identification A segment offset value (step S1477) or ratio data (step S1480) is stored in the A register. And the process which memorize | stores the upper digit in an A register and memorize | stores a lower digit in a C register is performed. For example, assuming that an advantageous segment ratio identification segment offset value “07AH” is stored in the A register, “7” is stored in the A register, and “A” is stored in the C register.
When “50” is stored as the ratio data in the A register, a process of storing “5” in the A register and storing “0” in the C register is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1483.

In the next step S1483, a ratio display segment data table (TBL_SEGRATE_DATA) is set. This process is a process of storing the head address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register in FIG.
Next, proceeding to step S1484, segment output data is obtained. In this process, the value stored in the HL register (the head address of the ratio display segment data table) and the value stored in the A register are added, and the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after the addition is added. This is a process of storing in the E register.

Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 1810H (before addition; start address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5H
When
HL register value = 1815H (after addition)
E register value = 0101101101B: “5” display data.

Next, proceeding to step S1485, it is determined whether or not there is a display of segment P. In this embodiment, when the digits 6 to 9 are displayed, the segment P (dot) of the digit 7 is always displayed. Therefore, when there is a display request for the ratio (100 digits), it is determined that the segment P is displayed. . On the other hand, when there is a display request for the ratio (1 digit), the ratio (10 digits), and the ratio (1000 digits), it is determined that there is no segment P display request.
Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”. When it is “1”, it is determined that there is a display request for the segment P, and when it is not “1”. Determines that there is no display request for segment P.
When it is determined that there is a display request for the segment P, the process proceeds to step S1486, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S1486, output data corresponding to segment P is set. Since segment P corresponds to D7 bit of 8-bit data, OR operation is performed on the segment data (E register value) acquired in step S1484 and “10000000”, and the operation result is acquired and stored in the E register. Remember.
In the next step S1487, in order to output the digit signal and the segment signal, the segment signal is output from the output port 3, and the digit signal is output from the output port 4. At this time, the data corresponding to the digit signal is stored in the D register, and the data corresponding to the segment signal is stored in the E register. Therefore, the E register value is output from the output port 3 and output. The D register value is output from port 4.
After execution of step S1487, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. That is, it progresses to step S1460 and complete | finishes LED display control.

Subsequently, the non-recoverable error process will be described. In the present embodiment, non-recoverable error processing 1 and non-recoverable error processing 2 are included as non-recoverable error processing.
As described above, the types of unrecoverable errors (not limited to the errors exemplified here)
“E1” error: When it is determined that the recovery from power failure is not normal. “E5” error: When it is determined that a display (stop symbol) error has occurred when the reel 31 is stopped. “E6” error: Step S1408 In step S1410, it is determined that a random number error has occurred in the case where it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range.

  Even if any unrecoverable error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. For example, when an “E1” error occurs, “E” is displayed on the digit 3 and “1” is displayed on the digit 4. The same message is displayed for other unrecoverable errors.

Further, it is determined that the recovery from the power interruption is not normal and the “E1” error is determined during “program start processing (stored in the use area of the ROM 54)” (not shown).
Further, it is determined that a display (stop symbol) error has occurred, and the “E5” error is determined during “main processing (stored in the use area of the ROM 54)” (not shown).

  On the other hand, the “E6” error is an error when it is determined in step S1408 during the interrupt processing that the set value is not within the normal range, but the actual program (set value error (outside the set value range) in step S1408 ) Determination program) is stored outside the use area of the ROM 54. In FIG. 133, when the process proceeds to step S1408, the setting value error (outside the set value range) determination program stored outside the use area is executed, and then the process returns to step S1408.

  Similarly, the “E7” error is an error when it is determined in step S1410 during interrupt processing that the random number value is an error. The actual program in step S1410 (random number abnormality check program) is stored in the ROM 54. Stored outside the use area. When the process proceeds to step S1410, the random number abnormality check program stored outside the use area is executed, and then the process returns to step S1410.

When the program in the use area is determined to be a non-recoverable error, the non-recoverable error process 1 is executed. Process 2 is executed.
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing non-recoverable error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1). FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing non-recoverable error processing 2 (SS_ERROR_STOP2).
The non-recoverable error processing 1 program is stored in the use area of the ROM 54, and the non-recoverable error processing 2 program is stored outside the use area of the ROM 54.
In the non-recoverable error process 1, only the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78) are controlled to be lit. On the other hand, in the non-recoverable error process 2, the lighting control is performed on the segments P of the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78) and the digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 754).

In FIG. 136, in step S1491, error display data (lower digit) is set. In this process, data (01000000B) in which only the digit 4 is set to “1” is stored in the H register. This value corresponds to data in which the D6 bit of the output port 2 is “1”.
In step S1492, the upper digit is set as error display data. In this process, data (00100000B) in which only the digit 3 is set to “1” is stored in the D register. This value corresponds to data in which the D5 bit of the output port 2 is “1”.

Further, in step S1492, segment data for displaying the upper digit “E” of the unrecoverable error, that is, “01111001B” is stored in the E register.
Note that, before shifting to the non-recoverable error process, the L register stores segment data for displaying the lower digit of the current non-recoverable error. For example, when the current unrecoverable error is an “E1” error, since the lower digit is “1”, the segment data, that is, “00000110B” is stored.
In the following example, it is assumed that the current unrecoverable error 1 is an E1 error.

From the above, the D, E, H, and L register values are as follows:
D register value: Data in which only the upper digit (digit 3) of the unrecoverable error is set to “1” (00100000B)
E register value: Display data indicating the upper “E” of the unrecoverable error (01111001B)
H register value: Data (01000000B) in which only the lower digit (digit 4) of the unrecoverable error is “1”
L register value: Display data (00000110B) indicating the lower order “1” of the current unrecoverable error
It becomes.

In the next step S1493, the output port address and the number of output ports to be cleared are set. In the present embodiment, the output ports to be cleared in the non-recoverable error processing 1 are the output ports 0 to 6, and the address is set for each port. set.
In the next step S1494, the output ports 0 to 6 are sequentially turned off. Specifically, all “0” (“00000000”) is output from each address indicating the output ports 0 to 6 for each output port. In step S1495, the next output port address is set. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by “1”. For example, when the address of the output port 0 is “0F1H”, the address “0F2H” of the output port 1 is set as the next address.
Next, proceeding to step S1496, it is determined whether all output ports have been completed, that is, whether output port 6 has been completed. If it is determined that the process has not been completed, the process returns to step S1494. If it is determined that the process has been completed, the process proceeds to step S1497.

As described above, by turning off all the output ports 0 to 6, the active signal output before the processing is executed is turned off. This can prevent LED burn-in, motor 32 burn-in, and medal swallowing. For example, if the power is cut off in a situation where a blocker signal is being output, the blocker 45 will remain on (the medal flow path is formed) unless the processing is executed (medal detection). Since no processing takes place, medals are swallowed).
Further, if the power is cut off in a situation where the excitation signal of the motor 32 is being output, the excitation signal of the motor 32 will continue to be output until the reset signal is input unless the processing is executed.

  In the next step S1497, display data is output from the output ports 2 and 3 in order to display the upper error digits. From the output port 2, the data stored in the D register is output, and from the output port 3, the data stored in the E register is output.

In step S 1498, standby (wait) for preventing LED flickering is executed. Here, although how much standby is performed depends on the performance of the LED, for example, it is set to about “0.1 ms”. Here, for example, a predetermined value (for example, “255”) is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by, for example, the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes “0”, it is determined that the standby time has elapsed. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1499.
In step S 1499, “0” is output from the output ports 2 and 3. This process is a process for preventing afterimages as in step S1431 of FIG. 134 described above.

In step S1500, standby (wait) for preventing flickering of the LED is executed. This is a process for surely extinguishing the LED after outputting “0” from the output ports 2 and 3. In step S1501, the upper digit and the lower digit are switched.
Specifically, the DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged. This
<Before replacement>
D register value: Data in which only the upper digit (digit 3) of the unrecoverable error is “1” E register value: Display data indicating the upper “E” of the unrecoverable error H register value: Lower order of the unrecoverable error Data in which only the digit (digit 4) is “1” L register value: Display data indicating the lower “1” of the current unrecoverable error <After replacement>
D register value: Data in which only the lower digit (digit 4) of the unrecoverable error is “1” E register value: Display data indicating the lower “1” of the current unrecoverable error H register value: Unrecoverable error Data with only the high-order digit (digit 3) of “1” L register value: Display data indicating the high-order “E” of the unrecoverable error.

In step S1502, display data is output from the output ports 2 and 3 in order to display the lower error digits. As in step S1497, the output port 2 outputs the D register value, and the output port 3 outputs the E register value. As a result, “01000000” in which the digit 4 signal is “1” is output from the output port 2, and display data “00000110” indicating “1” is output from the output port 3.
In step S1503, a flicker prevention standby is executed. This process is the same as step S1498. In step S1504, “0” is output from the output ports 2 and 3 in the same manner as in step S1499. In the next step S1505, a flicker prevention standby is executed. This process is the same as step S1500. Then, the process returns to step S1497.

By the above processing, for example, when an “E1” error occurs, the display of “E” by the digit 3 and the display of “1” by the digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly displayed at predetermined time intervals.
As described above, the LED display control (and the ratio display process) is executed in the timer interrupt process, but the timer interrupt process is not executed (prohibited) at the time of an unrecoverable error, as shown in FIG. Thus, the display of the unrecoverable error is executed by the arithmetic processing using the register and the hardware configuration.

Next, the non-recoverable error process 2 (SS_ERROR_STOP2) in FIG. 137 will be described. As described above, the non-recoverable error process 2 is a process that is executed when a non-recoverable error is determined by a program outside the use area of the ROM 54 (for example, an “E6” error or “E7” error). .
In FIG. 137, the same processing steps as those in FIG. 136 are denoted by the same step numbers.
Steps S1491 to S1505 are the same as those in FIG.
In the non-recoverable error process 1, an error number is displayed on the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78). On the other hand, the unrecoverable error process 2 includes a process of displaying an error number on the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78) and displaying predetermined information on the management information display LED 74.

  In FIG. 137, after step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1506. In step S1506, a process of lighting the segment P of the digit 6 is executed. Specifically, a signal of “10000000B” (only segment P is ON) is output from the output port 3, and a signal of “00000001B” (only digit 6 is ON) is output from the output port 4. In step S1507, standby processing for preventing flicker is executed. This process is the same as step S1498 and the like. In step S 1508, a signal “0” is output from the output ports 3 and 4. This process is the same as step S1499.

In step S1509, a flicker prevention standby process is executed. This process is the same as step S1500.
The above processing is repeated for the digits 7-9. That is,
(1) Output a signal of “10000000B” (only segment P is ON) from the output port 3 and output a signal with the corresponding digit turned ON (“1”) from the output port (2) To prevent flickering Standby processing (3) Turn off output ports 3 and 4 (output "0")
(4) Execute standby processing for flicker prevention.
Through the above processing, the segments P of the digits 6, 7, 8, and 9 are sequentially turned on. After the process of step S1521, the process returns to step S1497.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the configuration of the output port in the twenty-first embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 128 in the twentieth embodiment.
The feature of the output port of the twenty-first embodiment is that when it is assumed that no digit 5 is provided, there is one output port (digit port) for transmitting a digit signal (output port 3), and an output for transmitting a segment signal. There is one port (segment port) (output port 4).
In the twenty-first embodiment shown in FIG. 138, unlike the twentieth embodiment, no digit signal is assigned to the output port 2 (of course, no segment signal is assigned).

The output port 3 is set as an output port dedicated to digit signals. Digit 1-4 signals and digit 6-9 signals are assigned to 8 bits of output port 3.
Therefore, the digit 5 signal is not assigned to the output port 3. When the number of digits including the digit 5 is nine, if one is assigned to the 8-bit signal, one bit is insufficient. Therefore, the digit 5 is not provided, or when the digit 5 is provided, it is assigned to another port (for example, the output port 5), and the digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 signals are assigned to one output port 3. Even when the digit 5 is provided, the digit 5 is a digit that does not need to be lit during normal operation (other than during setting change or setting confirmation). Nine signals are set to be managed by one output port 3.

The output port 4 is a segment-dedicated output port and is the same as the output port 3 of the twentieth embodiment.
In the twenty-first embodiment, when the digit 5 is not provided, during the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value is displayed as the storage number display LED 76 (either digit 1 or 2) or the acquired number display LED 78 (digit 3 or 4). To display). In this way, there is no need to assign a dedicated bit for the digit 5 signal to the output port. In this case, the D5 bit of the output port 5 in FIG. 138 is an unused (empty) bit.
However, when the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is provided and the digit 5 signal is output as in the twentieth embodiment, it can be assigned to the D5 bit of the output port 5, for example, as shown in FIG. .

Also in the twenty-first embodiment, since the output port 3 for outputting the digit signal and the segment output port 4 for outputting the segment signal are continuous output ports, the digit data and the segment data (2 bytes in total) can be obtained at a time. It becomes possible to output.
Further, when the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is not provided, there are a total of eight digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9. Therefore, a digit can be assigned to each bit of 8-bit data. The number of output ports for outputting signals can be reduced to one, which has the advantage of being easy to manage.

FIG. 139 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-first embodiment, and FIG. 139 (B) is a diagram showing an LED display counter in the twenty-first embodiment. The example of FIG. 139 shows an example in which the digit 5 is not provided.
In the twenty-first embodiment, the assignment of digits and segments is the same as in the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 126) except that the digit 5 is not provided. Therefore, in the twenty-first embodiment, the effect display LED 79g is not provided among the status display LEDs 79. If the effect display LED 79g is provided, it can be assigned to the segment P of the digit 2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, the signal assigned to the bit of the LED display counter is matched with the signal assigned to the bit of the output port 3. In FIG. 5B, when bit “1” is shifted one digit to the left at the interrupt next to interrupt “8”, the LED display counter becomes “0”. The LED display counter is initialized to “00000001”. Thereby, the LED display counter becomes a counter in which one cycle is 8 interrupts.
Furthermore, the 1-bet display signal to the 3-bet display signal are not assigned to the LED display counter as in the twentieth embodiment. In the twenty-first embodiment, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c perform static lighting instead of dynamic lighting.
As described above, since the bet number display data is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53, this data may be periodically read and a bet display signal output from the output port 2 at all times.
Furthermore, the assignment of the segment P to the digit signal is the same as in the twentieth embodiment.
In the twenty-first embodiment, illustration of the circuit wiring diagrams (FIGS. 129 to 131) shown in the twentieth embodiment is omitted.

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twenty-first embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 134 in the twentieth embodiment. In the flowchart described below, steps that execute the same processing as in the twentieth embodiment are assigned the same step numbers, and redundant descriptions are omitted. Also, steps having contents different from those of the twentieth embodiment are underlined with step numbers.
First, step S1531 corresponds to step S1431 in FIG. 134, and here, output port 3 (digit port) and output port 4 (segment port) are turned off. By outputting “00000000B” from these output ports 3 and 4, the digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 are not temporarily output. As in the twentieth embodiment, this is to prevent different LEDs from turning on and appearing at the same time (to be displayed) when switching the display of LEDs (preventing afterimages). ).

In the next step S1433, the LED display counter is updated. Here, as described above, a process of shifting the bit “1” to the left by one digit is executed. Next, proceeding to step S1532, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1435, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1436.
In step S1435, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, processing for setting the LED display counter to “00000001” is executed.

Steps S1435 to S1446 are the same as those in FIG. 134 (20th embodiment). However, in the twenty-first embodiment, there is no processing of steps S1441 and S1442 in FIG. In the twentieth embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the digit 5 (setting value display LED 73). In the twenty-first embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78). In step S1533, set value display data is acquired.
After step S1446, the process proceeds to step S1533, and setting value display data, acquired number data, and a pressing order instruction number are acquired. If the setting is being changed, the set value data acquired in step S1533 is displayed in digits 3 or 4 (which is optional).

Further, in the twenty-first embodiment, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c execute static lighting, and thus the processing of steps S1452 and S1453 is not executed in FIG.
In FIG. 140, if “No” is determined in step S 1451, it is determined that there is a display request for the acquired lower digit (digit 4), and the process proceeds to step S 1454.
Further, step S1534 is a step corresponding to step S1458 in FIG. 134, in which the digit signal is output from the output port 3 and the segment signal is output from the output port 4. Then, the process proceeds to step S1535 to proceed to the ratio display process.
Except for the above, this embodiment is the same as the twentieth embodiment.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the ratio display process in the twenty-first embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 135 in the twentieth embodiment.
141 differs from FIG. 135 in that step S1473 and step S1474 are not provided. That is, after step S1472, the process proceeds to step S1475.
As shown in FIG. 139, the LED display counter of the twenty-first embodiment is a counter in which one cycle is 8 interrupts, and when the LED display counter becomes “0” as in the twentieth embodiment. Since it is not determined that there is a specific ratio display request, these steps are not required.
Except for the above, this embodiment is the same as the twentieth embodiment.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
FIG. 142 (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate 75 in the twenty-second embodiment, and FIG. 142 (B) is a diagram more specifically showing the management information display LED 74 in the twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 8C is a diagram showing a set value display LED 73 in the twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 142 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 125 of the twentieth embodiment.
In the twentieth embodiment (the same applies to the first embodiment), each LED is divided into digits 1 to 9, but in the twenty-second embodiment, the relationship between the digits and the LEDs is as follows.
Digit 1a: Upper digit of stored number display LED 76 Digit 2a: Lower digit of stored number display LED 76 Digit 3a: Upper digit of acquired number display LED 78 Digit 4a: Lower digit of acquired number display LED 78 Digit 5a: Status display LED 79
Digit 1b: Management information display LED 74 (higher information type (1000 digits))
Digit 2b: Management information display LED 74 (information type lower order (100 digits))
Digit 3b: Management information display LED 74 (numerical value upper digit (10 digits))
Digit 4b: Management information display LED 74 (numerical value lower digit (one digit))
Digit 5b: Set value display LED 73
Furthermore, as will be described later, the segments of the digits 1a to 5a are the segments 1A to 1P, and the segments of the digits 1b to 5b are the segments 2A to 2P.

As shown in FIG. 142 (A), the digits 1a to 4a are all 7-segment displays including dot segments (segment 1P) in 7 segments (in this respect, the digits 1 to 4 in the twentieth embodiment and Different). Therefore, in the twenty-second embodiment, the digits 1a to 4a and 1b to 5b can use the same 7-segment display.
Furthermore, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the digit 2, that is, the dot segment (segment P) of the lower digit of the stored number display LED 76 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77. In contrast, in the twenty-second embodiment, the dot segment (segment 1P) of the digit 4a indicating the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77.

In the management information display LED 74, the dot segment (segment 2P) of the digit 2b functions as a digit separator LED as in the twentieth embodiment.
Furthermore, the dot segments (segment 2P) of the digits 1b, 3b, and 4b function as non-recoverable error display LEDs as in the twentieth embodiment.

FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-second embodiment.
As described above, the segments of digits 1a to 5a are segments 1A to 1P, and the segments of digits 1b to 5b are segments 2A to 2P.

In FIG. 143, the segment 1P of the digits 1a to 3a is unused. On the other hand, the segment 1P of the digit 4a (the digit indicating the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) is used as the advantageous section display LED 77 as described above.
Further, the digit 5a constitutes a status display LED 79, and the segments 1A to 1G and 1P of the digit 5a are as shown in FIG.
Segment 1A: 1-bet display LED 79a
Segment 1B: 2-bet display LED 79b
Segment 1C: 3-bet display LED 79c
Segment 1D: Game start display LED 79d
Segment 1E: Input display LED 79e
Segment 1F: Replay display LED 79f
Segment 1G: Not used Segment 1P: Not used is assigned.
Therefore, for example, when the digit 5 signal is output and the segment 1A signal is output, the 1-bet display LED 79a is lit.
Further, the segment 2P of the digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) is unused.

FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating output ports in the twenty-second embodiment.
The feature of the output port of the twenty-second embodiment is that there is one output port for transmitting a digit signal (output port 2) and two output ports for transmitting segment signals (output ports 3 and 4). It is.
Therefore, the difference from the twentieth embodiment described above is that the output port for transmitting the segment signal of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the segment signal of the storage number display LED 76 and the like (digits 1a to 4a) Is provided separately from an output port for transmitting.

  First, in the output port 2, the digits 1 to 5 are assigned to the D0 to D4 bits, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digits 2 to 5 signal. Therefore, for example, when a “1” signal is output from the D0 bit of the output port 2, it is driven to both the digits 1a (stored number display LED 76 (upper digit)) and 1b (management information display LED 74 (information type upper)). A signal is supplied.

In the output port 2, bits D5 to D7 are unused.
The output port 3 is an output port for the segments 1A to 1P signals, and the segments 1A to 1P signals are assigned to the D0 to D7 bits, respectively.
Similarly, the output port 4 is an output port for the segments 2A to 2P signals, and the segments 2A to 2P signals are assigned to the D0 to D7 bits, respectively.
The output port 5 is the same as that in the twentieth embodiment.

FIGS. 145 to 147 are circuit diagrams showing wiring of electric signals of the main control board 50, the display board 75, and the digits 1 (1a, 1b) to 5 (5a, 5b), respectively, and are diagrams of the twentieth embodiment. It is a figure corresponding to FIG.
In FIG. 145, like the twentieth embodiment of FIG. 129, illustration of transistors and the like is omitted.
FIG. 145 and FIG. 146 show wiring of electric signals on the main control board 50, and FIG. 147 shows wiring of electric signals on the display board 75.

As shown in FIG. 146, on the main control board 50, digits 5b constituting the set value display LED 73 and digits 1b to 4b constituting the management information display LED 74 are provided.
As shown in FIG. 147, on the display substrate 75, the digits 1a and 2a constituting the storage number display LED 76, the digits 3a and 4a constituting the acquired number display LED 78, and the six pieces constituting the digit 5a are displayed. A status display LED 79 is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 145, a main CPU 55 is provided on the main control board 50, and IC2 to IC4 having output ports 2 to 4 are provided. The main control board 50 is actually provided with ICs in addition to these three, but is not shown in the present embodiment.

IC2 is an IC related to the control of the digits 1 to 5 signals, and IC3 is an IC related to the control of the segments 1A to 1P signals. IC4 is an IC related to control of the segment 2A to 2P signals.
Since the IC2 to IC4 are each provided with a clock signal input terminal, etc., it is the same as that of the twentieth embodiment, and the description is omitted.

Digit 1 to 5 signal lines are output from the D0 to D4 output terminals of the output port 2, respectively, and one is connected to the digits 1b to 5b of the main control board 50 and the other is connected to the display board 75.
Further, the segment 1A to 1P signal lines are respectively output from the D0 to D7 output terminals of the output port 3, and these signal lines are connected to the display substrate 75.
Furthermore, the segment 2A-2P signal lines come out from the D0-D7 output terminals of the output port 4, respectively, and these signal lines are connected to the digits 1b-5b of the main control board 50.

In FIG. 146, the digits 1 to 5 signals are connected to the drive signal lines of the digits 1b to 5b, respectively.
Digits 1b to 5b are LEDs each having eight segments (segments 2A to 2G and 2P). The LEDs constituting the segments 2A to 2G and 2P of the digits 1b to 5b are connected to the segments 2A to 2G and the 2P signal lines, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 147, digits 1 a to 5 a are connected to the display substrate 75. The output terminals of the digit 1 signal line to the digit 4 signal line of the display substrate 75 are connected to the drive signal lines of the digits 1a to 4a.
Moreover, all of the digits 1a-4a are LED which has seven segments (segment 1A-1G and 1P) similarly to the digits 1b-5b. The LEDs of the segments 1A to 1G of the digits 1a to 3a are connected to the output terminals of the segment 1A to 1G signal lines, respectively. Since each segment 1P of the digits 1a to 3a is unused, it is not connected to the segment 1P signal line.
On the other hand, the segments 1A to 1G and 1P of the digit 4a are connected to the output terminals of the segment 1A to 1G signal lines.
Furthermore, six status display LEDs 79, specifically a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, a 3-bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, a throw-in display LED 79e, and a replay display LED 79f are connected to the digit 5 signal line. Has been.

The 1-bet display LED 79a is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1A signal line, the 2-bet display LED 79b is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1B signal line, and the 3-bet display LED 79c is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1C signal line. Yes.
The game start display LED 79d is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1D signal line, the input display LED 79e is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1E signal line, and the replay display LED 79f is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1F signal line.

In the above configuration, for example, when a data signal of “1” is output from the D0 output terminal of the main CPU 55, the data signal is input to the D0 input terminals of the IC2 to IC4. At this moment, the XCS2 output terminal is active. The data signal is input to the D0 input terminal of IC2.
Thereby, since the digit 1 signal is output, the drive signal is supplied to both the digit 1a (the upper digit of the stored number display LED 76) and the digit 1b (the upper information type of the management information display LED 74).

When the digit 1 signal is output as described above, for example, the data signal of “1” is output from the D0 and D1 output terminals of the main CPU 55, and at this moment, when the XCS3 output terminal is active, The data signal is input to the D0 and D1 input terminals of IC3. As a result, since the segment 1A and 1B signals are output to the display substrate 75, current can flow through the segments 1A and 1B of the digit 1a.
Of course, even if the segment 1A and 1B signals are output, the segments 2A and 2B of the digit 1b are not turned on.

On the other hand, when the digit 1 signal is output as described above, for example, the data signal of “1” is output from the D0 and D1 output terminals of the main CPU 55, and at this moment, when the XCS4 output terminal is active, The data signal is input to the D0 and D1 input terminals of the IC4. As a result, since the segment 2A and 2B signals are output to the digit 1b, a current can flow through the segments 2A and 2B of the digit 1b.
Of course, even if the segment 2A and 2B signals are output, the segments 1A and 1B of the digit 1a are not lit.

For example, if the digit 5 signal is output from the D4 output terminal of the IC2, and the segment 1A, 1B and 1C signals are output from the D0, D1 and D2 output terminals (segments 1A, 1B and 1C signals) of the IC3, one bet The display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c can be turned on.
Even if the digit 5 signal is output, the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) does not light unless the segment 2A to 2G signal is output.
As described above, in the twenty-second embodiment, nine 7 segments and six status display LEDs 79 are represented by the digits 1 to 5 signal, the segments 1A to 1G and 1P signals, and the segments 2A to 2G and 2P signals. Control lighting.

FIG. 148A is a diagram showing the relationship among interrupts, LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) values, digit signals, and segment signals in the twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 5B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). FIG. 148 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 132 of the twentieth embodiment.
In FIG. 148 (A), the LED display counter of the twenty-second embodiment sets the bit “1” of the LED display counter value as it proceeds from interrupt “1” → “2” →. Update to shift right by one digit. In the figure, at the interrupt next to interrupt “5”, the LED display counter shifts to the right by one digit and becomes “00000000”. At the time of the interrupt, the LED display counter is initialized and the LED display counter is Set to "00010000". As a result, the LED display counter repeats the values “5” → “4” →... → “1” → “5” → “4” →. That is, one cycle is made up of 5 interrupts.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt eyes: 00010000
“N + 1” interrupt: 00001000
“N + 2” interrupt: 00000100
“N + 3” interrupt: 00000010
“N + 4” interrupt: 00000001
“N + 5” interrupt: 0000000 → 00010000 (initialization; same value as “N” interrupt)
"N + 6" interrupt: 00001000
:
It becomes.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, five interrupts are one cycle, and digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b are turned on. Specifically, in FIG. 148 (A), for example, when the interrupt is “1”, that is, when the LED display counter value is “00010000”, the digit 5 signal is output, and the status display LED 79 and the set value display LED 73 are displayed. It can be lit. At the next interrupt “2”, the LED display counter becomes “00001000” and outputs a digit 4 signal, and the lower digit of the acquired number display LED D78 and the lower digit of the numerical value of the management information display LED 74 can be turned on.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 4B, the LED display request counter has 8 bits corresponding to the digit 1 signal in the D0 bit, the digit 2 signal in the D1 bit,..., The D4 bit in the digit 5 signal. It is data. Each bit of the LED display request counter matches the bit of the output port 2.
The LED display request counter differs from the twentieth embodiment in that the D4 bit (bit corresponding to digit 5) is “1” even during normal operation. During normal operation, the segment 1A to 1G signals of the digit 5a are output and the status display LED 79 is turned on.
In the twentieth embodiment, since one cycle is 5 interrupts, the time during which the LED is turned off can be shortened, and the flickering of the LED can be further reduced.

  For example, if the LED display counter is “00010000” and the LED display request flag is “00011111 (normally)”, when AND operation is performed on both, “00010000” is obtained, and only the digit 5 signal is turned on. However, during normal operation, only the segment 1 signal is output so that the status display LED 79 can be lit, but the segment 2 signal is not output and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is controlled not to be lit.

On the other hand, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is “00010000”), the segment 2 signal is output, and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) can be turned on.
During the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is “00000100”), the segment 1 signal is output for the digit 3a (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78). "Is displayed.

  Furthermore, when the segment 1 signal is generated at the interrupt timing (interrupt “2” in the figure) when the LED display counter is “00001000”, it is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section. Whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous zone is determined by, for example, determining whether or not an advantageous zone flag that is turned on during the advantageous zone is ON / OFF (the advantageous zone flag is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53). When it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, a value obtained by ORing the generated segment 1 signal and “10000000” is output from the output port 3 as a segment 1 signal. Thereby, when it is in the advantageous section, the segment 1P (advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a can be turned on.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the 22nd embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 134 of the 20th embodiment. As described above, steps different from the twentieth embodiment are underlined with step numbers. Moreover, the same step number is attached | subjected to the step which performs the same process as 20th Embodiment, and description is omitted.
In FIG. 149, in step S1541, the LED digit and segment 1 (output ports 2 and 3) are turned off. This process is a process common to step S1431 in FIG. 134, and is a process of outputting “00000000B” from the output ports 2 and 3. In the next step S1542, segment 2 (output port 4) is turned off. This process is also a process of outputting “00000000B” from the output port 4 as in the above process.

In step S1453, the LED display counter is updated. In the twenty-second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, updating is performed by shifting bit “1” to the right by one digit.
In the next step S1544, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1545, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1436. .
In step S1545, the LED display counter is initialized. That is, when the LED display counter is “00000000” in the determination in step S1544, a process of setting “00010000” is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1436.

Step S1436 is the same processing as that in the twentieth embodiment. In the next step S1546, error display data, LED display data, and bet signal data are acquired. Acquisition of the error display data is the same as the processing in step S1439 in FIG. The LED display data is data indicating ON / OFF of the status display LED 79, and is stored at a predetermined address in the use area of the RWM 53. Specifically, the data is as follows.
D0: Not used D1: Not used D2: Not used D3: “1” when the game can be started, “0” when the game cannot be started
D4: “1” when a medal can be inserted, “0” when a medal cannot be inserted
D5: “1” when replay is won, “0” when no replay is won
D6: Not used D7: Not used

In the above data, the bits D0 to D7 correspond to the segments 1A to 1P of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG. 143, and this value is acquired.
The bet signal data is the same as the data acquired in step S1454 in FIG.
0 bets: 00000000
1 bet: 00000001
2 bets: 00000011
3 bets: 00000111
Is stored at a predetermined address in the use area of the RWM 53, the value is acquired.

In step S1547, the LED display data and the bet signal data are combined and data for the output port 3 is set. This process is an OR operation of the LED display data and the bet signal data and stores the calculation result.
In step S1548, the segment 2 data for the output port 4 is cleared. This process is a process of clearing a register for setting segment 2 data.
Steps S1438 to S1455 are the same as those in FIG. However, in FIG. 149, step S1439 is not included in FIG. This is because the error display data has already been acquired in step S1546.
If it is determined in step S1451 that there is no display request for the upper digits of the acquired number, there is a display request for the lower digits of the acquired number, and therefore there is no determination branch in step S1452 of FIG.

After step S1455, the process proceeds to step S1549, where segment 2 data for the output port 4 is set. The data set here is segment 2 data (segments 2A to 2G) corresponding to the set value display data. This is because the digits 1b to 4b are turned on in the ratio display process described later, and therefore the segment 2 data of the digits 1b to 4b are not set in this flowchart.
In step S1550, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the digit 5b (setting value display LED 73). Here, there is a display request for the digit 5b when the LED display counter value is "00010000" and the setting is being changed or confirmed. When it is determined that there is a display request for the digit 5b, the process proceeds to step S1554, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1551.

  In step S1551, segment 1 (1A-1G) data for output port 3 is set. The segment 1 data for the output port 3 is stored in a predetermined register in step S1547. Next, proceeding to step S1552, the data of the advantageous section display LED 77 is set. Here, whether or not the game is in the advantageous section is determined by, for example, an advantageous section flag that is turned on during the advantageous section. Then, when it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the digit that is lit in the current interrupt processing is the digit 4. When the LED display counter value is “00001000”, it is determined that the digit 4 is on. In this case, the segment 1 data set in step S1551 and the data obtained by ORing “10000000” are set as the segment 1 data for the output port 3. Thereby, data capable of lighting the segment 1P of the digit 4a is set.

Next, proceeding to step S1553, the segment 2 data for output port 4 set at step S1549 is cleared. This is to prevent the digit 5b from being turned on when there is no display request for the digit 5b (the set value display LED 73) (when "No" in step S1550).
In step S 1554, the digit signal is output from the output port 2 and the segment 1 signal is output from the output port 3. In step S 1555, the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 4. If the segment 2 data is cleared in step S1553, “00000000” is output from the output port 4. Then, the process proceeds to step S1556 to shift to a ratio display process outside the use area.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the ratio display processing in the 22nd embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 135 in the 20th embodiment.
150 and FIG. 135 are different in that step S1473 and step S1474 are not provided.
In step S 1561, the digit signal is output from the output port 2 and the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 4.
Points other than the above are the same as in the twentieth embodiment.

<23rd Embodiment>
FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating the output ports 2 to 6 in the 23rd embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 144 in the 22nd embodiment.
In the twenty-third embodiment, as in the twenty-second embodiment, there is one output port (output port 3) for transmitting a digit signal and two output ports (output ports 4 and 6) for transmitting a segment signal. is there. .
The output port 2 of the twenty-third embodiment is a port for outputting a bet display signal and a data strobe signal.
In the twenty-second embodiment, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are included in the digit 5a to perform dynamic lighting. On the other hand, in the twenty-third embodiment, static lighting is performed for the 1-bet display LEDs 79a to the 3-bet display LEDs 79c as in the 21st embodiment.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 152, in the twenty-third embodiment, as described above, there are digits 1 to 5, which are divided into digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 4b.
The digit 1a includes a storage number display LED 76 (upper digit) and a game start display LED 79d. The former includes segments 1A to 1G, and the latter includes a segment 1P.
The digit 2a includes a storage number display LED 76 (lower digit) and an input display LED 79e. The former includes segments 1A to 1G, and the latter includes a segment 1P.

The digit 3a includes an acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digit) and a replay display LED 79f. The former is composed of segments 1A to 1G, and the latter is composed of segment 1P.
The digit 4a includes an acquisition number display LED 78 (lower digit) and an advantageous section display LED 77. The former is composed of segments 1A to 1G, and the latter is composed of segment 1P.
The digit 5a includes a set value display LED 73. The segment 1P of the digit 5a is unused.
On the other hand, the digits 1b to 4b are the same as those in the twenty-second embodiment (FIG. 143). The digit 5b is not provided in the twenty-third embodiment.

FIG. 153A is a diagram illustrating a relationship among an interrupt, an LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) value, a digit signal, and a segment signal in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 5B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). FIG. 153 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 148 of the twenty-second embodiment.
In the twenty-third embodiment, an LED display counter that uses one cycle with five interrupts is used. As in the twenty-second embodiment (FIG. 148), this LED display counter shifts the bit “1” to the right by one digit for each interrupt, and when it becomes “0”, the initial value “00010000” is set during the interrupt processing. ". As a result, as in the twenty-second embodiment, the counter has one cycle with five interrupts.

As shown in FIG. 153 (A), when the interrupt is “1”, the digit 5 signal is output, and the set value display LED 73 becomes the LED to be lit.
When the interrupt is “2”, the digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78 and the lower digit of the numerical value of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
Furthermore, when the interrupt is “3”, the digit 3 signal is output, and the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78 and the upper numeric digit of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
Further, when the interrupt is “4”, the digit 2 signal is output, and the lower digit of the storage number display LED 76 and the lower information type of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
When the interrupt is “5”, the digit 1 signal is output, and the upper digit of the storage number display LED 76 and the upper information type of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.

  Furthermore, as described above, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c among the status display LEDs 79 are not lit up during interruption processing because they perform static lighting. Among the status display LEDs 79, the game start display LED 79d is assigned to the upper digit segment 1P of the stored number display LED 76, and the insertion display LED 79e is assigned to the lower digit segment 1P of the stored number display LED 76. Further, the replay display LED 79f is assigned to the upper digit segment 1P of the acquired number display LED 78. Moreover, the advantageous section display LED 77 is assigned to the lower-digit segment 1P of the acquired number display LED 78, as in the twenty-second embodiment (FIG. 143). In the twenty-third embodiment, as in the twenty-second embodiment, the effect display LED 79g is not provided.

  As described above, if the status display LED 79 and the advantageous section display LED 77 excluding the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are assigned to the segment 1P of the digits 1a to 4a, an LED display counter having one interrupt of 5 interrupts is used. The status display LED 79 and the advantageous section display LED 77 can be dynamically turned on.

<24th Embodiment>
FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating the output ports 2 to 7 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 128 in the twentieth embodiment.
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, two output ports for outputting digit signals (output ports 3 and 6) are provided, and two output ports for outputting segment signals (output ports 4 and 7) are provided. It is characterized by.
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, as in the twentieth embodiment, digits 1 to 9 are provided.
The segments of digits 1 to 5 are defined as segments 1A to 1P.
Furthermore, the segments of digits 6-9 are designated as segments 2A-2P.
The digit 5 may or may not be provided as in the twenty-third embodiment. If the digit 5 is not provided, the D4 bit of the output port 3 is an empty bit. In this case, as described above, any one of the digits 1 to 4 is used as the set value display LED.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the 1-bet display signal to the 3-bet display signal are assigned to the D0 to D2 bits of the output port 2 as in the twentieth embodiment.
The digit port is composed of an output port 3 that outputs digits 1 to 5 signals and an output port 6 that outputs digits 6 to 9 signals.
The segment port includes an output port 4 that outputs segment 1A to 1P signals corresponding to digits 1 to 5, and an output port 7 that outputs segment 2A to 2P signals corresponding to digits 6 to 9.

Therefore, for example, when the digits 1 to 5 are turned on, the digit signal is output from the output port 3 and the segment 1 signal is output from the output port 4.
When the digits 6 to 9 are turned on, a digit signal is output from the output port 7 and a segment 2 signal is output from the output port 6.

FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-fourth embodiment. The relationship between the digits 1 to 5 and the segments 1A to 1P is the same as the relationship between the digits 1a to 5a and the segments 1A to 1P in the twenty-third embodiment (FIG. 152).
The relationship between the digits 6 to 9 and the segments 2A to 2P is the same as the relationship between the digits 1b to 4b and the segments 2A to 2P in the twenty-third embodiment (FIG. 152).

FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating Example 1 of the LED display counter according to the twenty-fourth embodiment. This LED display counter is the same as the LED display counter of the twenty-third embodiment shown in FIG. 153 (A), and is a counter that makes one cycle with five interrupts.
For example, a digit 5 signal is output at interrupt “1”, and a digit 4 signal and a digit 9 signal are output at interrupt “2”. In interrupt “3”, a digit 3 signal and a digit 8 signal are output. Furthermore, the interrupt “4” outputs the digit 2 signal and the digit 7 signal. Further, the interrupt “5” outputs the digit 1 signal and the digit 6 signal.

FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating Example 2 of the LED display counter according to the twenty-fourth embodiment. In Example 2, the LED display counter 1 is provided in the usage area of the RWM 53, and the LED display counter 2 is further provided outside the usage area of the RWM 53.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for outputting a digit 1 signal to a digit 5 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter with 5 interrupts in one cycle.
On the other hand, the LED display counter 2 is a counter for outputting the digit 6 signal to the digit 9 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter having 4 interrupts in one cycle.
As described above, the LED display counter for lighting the digits 1 to 5 and the LED display counter for lighting the digits 6 to 9 may be provided separately and independently. In addition, since one LED display counter has a different cycle, the lighting timing of digits 1 to 5 and the lighting timing of digits 6 to 9 are different. There is no particular problem even if the lighting timing is different.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 134 in the twentieth embodiment.
The LED display counter is assumed to be Example 1 (FIG. 156).
First, in step S1571, “0” is output from the output ports 3 and 4 to turn off the output ports 3 and 4. This is because the digits 1 to 5 are once completely extinguished.
In step S 1572, “0” is output from the output ports 6 and 7 to turn off the output ports 6 and 7. This is because the digits 6 to 9 are once completely extinguished.

  In step S1573, the value is updated so that the bit “1” of the LED display counter is shifted to the right by one digit. In the next step S1574, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is “0”. When it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1436, and when it is determined that it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1475. In step S1475, the LED display counter is initialized. That is, as shown in FIG. 156, the value is “00010000”. Then, the process proceeds to step S1436.

Steps S1436 to S1451 are the same as those in FIG. 134 (20th embodiment).
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 156, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c perform static lighting, and thus do not have the process of step S1453 in FIG.
If “No” is determined in step S 1451, there is a display request for the acquired lower digit, and therefore there is no determination branch as to whether there is a display request for the acquired lower digit, and step S 1454. Proceed to Steps S1454 to S1457 are the same as those in FIG. 133 (the twentieth embodiment).
After step S1457, the process proceeds to step S1576, where a digit signal (any one of digits 1 to 5) is output from the output port 3, and a segment 1 signal is output from the output port 4. Then, the process proceeds to step S1577.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 135 in the twentieth embodiment.
If it is determined in step S1472 that there is a ratio display request, the process proceeds to step S1475 as in the twenty-first embodiment (FIG. 141).
The processing from step S1475 to step S1486 is the same as that in FIG. 135 (20th embodiment). After step S1486, the process proceeds to step S1581, where a digit signal is output from the output port 6 and a segment 2 signal is output from the output port 7. Then, the process returns to step S1460 in FIG.

Although the twentieth to twenty-fourth embodiments have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications as described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) program is stored in the use area, and the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) program is stored outside the use area. This setting is made so as not to compress the capacity in the use area. Therefore, if there is a sufficient capacity in the use area, the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) program can be stored in the use area.
Similarly, the out-of-use area data table shown in FIG. 127 can also be stored in the use area.
In other words, the program and data for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 do not necessarily have to be stored outside the use area.

In general, a program for preventing fraud may be stored outside the use area. Since it can be said that the display of the management information such as the advantageous section ratio is for preventing fraud, in the above embodiment, it is stored outside the use area.
In addition to the above, the programs stored outside the use area include, in FIG. 133, a set value error (outside the set value range) determination program used in the process of step S1408 and the random number error used in the process of step S1410. Examples include a check program and a medal selector backflow check program.

  (2) Taking the twentieth embodiment as an example, as shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, for example, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) (lighting control of digits 1 to 5) is first executed, and then ratio display processing is performed. Although (S_LED_OUT) (lighting control of digits 6 to 9) is executed, it is not limited to this order. For example, after executing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) that is lighting control outside the use area, it is possible to shift to LED display control (I_LED_OUT) that is lighting control within the use area.

(3) The segment P (or segment 2P) of the digits 6 to 9 (digits 1b to 4b in the twenty-third embodiment) is a segment that is lit when an unrecoverable error occurs.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segment may be set to be turned on when a predetermined condition other than the unrecoverable error is satisfied. Alternatively, the segment may be physically unused but unused.

<25th Embodiment>
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when a specific symbol combination (a symbol combination in which “cherry” stops in the middle left when the left reel 31 is stopped: middle cherry) is a lottery result that can be stopped (winning a small role E1) Always displays the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 indicates that it is the advantageous section.

  In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when 1BBA is won, it is possible to shift to an advantageous section, and when 1BBB is won, it is not shifted to an advantageous section. Further, the winning probability of 1BBA is set to be the same for all set values, and the winning probability of 1BBB is set to increase as the set value increases. As a result, the probability of transition to the advantageous section at the time of winning 1BB (the sum of 1BBA and 1BBB) increases as the set value decreases.

  Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the advantageous section ends, the first initialization process (initialization process at the end of the advantageous section) is executed, and when the set value is changed, the second initialization process. (Initialization processing when changing settings). Further, in the first initialization process, the transition to the normal section is performed while maintaining the RT at the end of the advantageous section, and in the second initialization process, the transition to the non-RT and the transition to the normal section are performed. Further, in the first initialization process and the second initialization process, information regarding the advantageous section is cleared. Thereby, when the 1st initialization process is performed and when the 2nd initialization process is performed, it shifts to the usual section where the information about an advantageous section is the same state.

  Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the advantageous section can be ended when the instruction function is activated at least once in the advantageous section. Further, in the advantageous section, when 1BB (1BBA or 1BBB) is won before the first instruction function is activated, the advantageous section can be terminated without activating the instruction function. After the transition to the advantageous section, until the specified condition is satisfied, the instruction function is activated even if the game has the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 (the game when the push order bell (small role B group) is won). I won't let you.

160 to 167 are diagrams showing the numbers of the accessory condition devices and winning and replay condition devices for each RT, and correspond to FIGS. 17 and 18 in the first embodiment.
When the numerical values shown in FIGS. 160 to 167 are divided by “65536”, the winning probability is obtained. For example, in FIG. 160, the number of 1BBA single winners is set to “70” for both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the probability of winning 1 BBA alone is “70/65536”.

FIG. 160 is a numerical table of condition devices that are common to settings and can be shifted to an advantageous section, and corresponds to FIG. 17 of the first embodiment.
Here, “setting common” indicates that there is no setting difference, that is, that it has the same numerical value in setting 1 to setting 6 as in the first embodiment.
Further, in FIG. 160, in the normal section, “◯” means to shift to the advantageous section, “×” means not to shift to the advantageous section, and “△” in the advantageous section indicates the game in the advantageous section. It means that the number of times can be added, and “x” means that the number of games in the advantageous section is not added, as in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment.

In FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, 1BBA has a time when winning alone, a time when double winning with small role D, and a time when double winning with small role E1, but in the 25th embodiment, 1BBA is It is only a single election, and there is no case of overlapping with a small role. As shown in FIG. 160, the number of 1BBA single winners is “70” common to all settings.
Also, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, the small role E1 has a time when winning alone and a time when double winning with 1BBA, but in the 25th embodiment, the small role E1 only wins alone. There is no case of overlapping with special roles.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, when the small role E1 is elected, there are a case where the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section and a case where the normal section is not shifted to the advantageous section. When winning the role E1, the normal section is always shifted to the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 160, the number of the single winning combination of the small combination E1 is “1000” common to the settings. And, in the normal section, when the small combination E1 is won, it always shifts to the advantageous section.

  Furthermore, the small role D is divided into a number that shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section and a number that does not shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, as in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 160, the total number of single winning prizes for the small role D is “550”, of which “50” is the number of places that shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, and from the normal section to the advantageous section. The number not to be transferred is “500”. In other words, in the normal section, when the small role D is elected alone, if it is elected with the number “50”, it shifts to the advantageous section, but when the number “500” is won. , Do not shift to the advantageous section.

161 to 167 are numerical tables of condition devices that do not shift to the advantageous section and do not add the advantageous section, and correspond to FIG. 18 of the first embodiment.
In FIG. 18 of the first embodiment, the numbers of setting 1 and setting 6 are representatively illustrated, but in the 25th embodiment, the numbers of setting values of setting 1 to setting 6 are illustrated.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the transition to the advantageous section or the addition of the advantageous section is limited to the time when the condition device shown in FIG. 160 is won, and when the condition device shown in FIGS. However, it does not shift to the advantageous section and does not add the advantageous section.

FIG. 161 illustrates the numbers of setting 1 to setting 6 at the non-RT time. Similarly, FIG. 162 illustrates the numbers of settings 1 to 6 at RT1, FIG. 163 illustrates the numbers of settings 1 to 6 at RT2, and FIG. 164 illustrates settings 1 at RT3. FIG. 165 illustrates the numbers of setting 1 to setting 6 at RT4.
Also, FIG. 166 illustrates the numbers of setting 1 to setting 6 during 1BBA game (when 1BBA is activated), and FIG. 167 illustrates the number of settings 1 to setting 6 during 1BBB game (when 1BBB is activated). Show.

In FIG. 18 of the first embodiment, 1BBA wins the small combination E2 with a different probability for each set value. In addition, 1BBB has a case of winning a single winning and a case of overlapping winning with a small combination D with different probabilities for each set value.
On the other hand, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, 1BBA only wins a single setting in common, does not win a small role and overlaps, and draws with a different probability for each set value. There is nothing. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 161 to 164, 1BBB only wins alone with a different probability for each set value, and does not have a case of overlapping winning with a small role.

As described above, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the numbers of the accessory condition device for each RT and the winning and replay condition devices are determined as shown in FIGS. 160 to 167.
For this reason, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the small combination D (watermelon) is won by the combination lottery means 61, the advantageous section is displayed, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit (indicating that it is an advantageous section). ) And when the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light (does not indicate that it is an advantageous section).
On the other hand, when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins the small role E1 (middle cherries), it always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.

In addition, when winning the small role D by the winning lottery means 61, the game moves to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the transition to the designated game section and the transition to the designated game section Have
Furthermore, when the small lot E1 is won by the combination lottery means 61 and the advantageous section is shifted to and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the transition to the designated gaming section and the transition to the designated gaming section are not performed. Have

FIG. 168 (a) is a diagram showing the presence or absence of advantageous section transition and advantageous section display LED 77 lighting at the time of rare role winning in the first embodiment, and FIG. 168 (b) is at the time of rare role winning in the 25th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of advantageous area transition and advantageous area display LED77 lighting.
As shown in FIG. 168 (a), in the first embodiment, when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins the small role E1 (middle cherries), it shifts to the advantageous section with a probability of “250/65536”, and The advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, but with the probability of “750/65536”, it does not shift to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit.

Similarly, in the first embodiment, when the small combination D (watermelon) is won by the combination lottery means 61, it shifts to the advantageous section with the probability of “50/65536”, and the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up. , With a probability of “500/65536”, it does not shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up.
Here, in the game won in the small role E1, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “cherry” (that is, “middle cherry”) can be stopped in the middle left. Further, when the small role E1 is won, there is a case where the game moves to the designated game section. For this reason, when the middle cherry stops, the player expects a transition to the designated game section. Thus, the small combination E1 is a rare combination with a high expectation degree of transition to the designated game section.

However, when the small role E1 is elected, when the transition to the advantageous section and the case where the small section E1 is not transitioned are provided, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the game selected for the small role E1, and the advantageous section is displayed. The player knows whether or not to move. This makes it impossible to maintain the player's expectation for the transition to the designated game section by winning the small role E1.
On the other hand, if the small role E1 always wins and shifts to the advantageous section, and in this advantageous section always shifts to the designated game section, the small role E1 winning means that the game is played. It becomes monotonous.

Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the winning combination lottery means 61 wins the small role E1 (middle stage cherry) with a probability of “1000/65536”. And the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
Furthermore, when winning the small role E1 by the winning lottery means 61, when it shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, it shifts to the designated gaming section (AT) with a probability of “64/256”. However, with the probability of “192/256”, the game does not enter the designated game section. As a result, the probability of transition to the designated game section (AT) when the middle cherry can be stopped is 25%.

  In this way, when the small role E1 (middle cherry) is elected, it is always understood that the advantageous section is displayed and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, but it is understood that the advantageous section is shifted to. Since it is not known whether or not, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition to the designated game section over a plurality of games.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), when winning the small role D (watermelon) by the winning lottery means 61, it shifts to the advantageous zone with a probability of “50/65536” and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is displayed. Although it is lit, with a probability of “500/65536”, it does not shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light.
Further, when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins the small role D and shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it shifts to the designated gaming section (AT) with a probability of “32/256”. However, with the probability of “224/256”, the game does not enter the designated game section.

  As described above, when the small role D (watermelon) is won, the player can be informed of whether or not to shift to the advantageous section depending on whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. In addition, when winning the small role D, when it shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it is not known whether or not to shift to the designated gaming section, so the expectation for the transition to the designated gaming section Can be given to the player over a plurality of games.

Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when winning the small role E1 (middle cherries) by the winning lottery means 61, the AT that determines whether or not to shift to the designated game section (AT) separately from the winning lottery means 61. A lottery (two-stage lottery) is performed.
Furthermore, when the small number D (watermelon) is won by the number “50”, the AT lottery is performed in the same manner as when the small role E1 is won.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, an AT lottery counter is provided on the main control board 50 for counting in the range of “0” to “255” as one cycle. Then, an AT lottery is performed using a 1-byte random value acquired from the AT lottery counter.

In addition, when winning the small role E1, when winning by AT lottery (decided to shift to the designated game section), after moving to the advantageous section, until the specified number of games (for example, 32 games) is consumed, the designated game section If the predetermined number of games is exhausted without going to, the game moves to the designated game section. In other words, after the transition to the advantageous section, until the predetermined number of games is consumed, it is in the precursor (this precursor), and when the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the AT is entered.
On the other hand, when the small role E1 is won, if the AT lottery is not won (determined not to shift to the designated game section), the advantageous section can be ended by operating the instruction function at least once. It becomes possible. In other words, it becomes a so-called harse precursor.

In addition, when winning the small role D with the number “50” and winning in the AT lottery, as in the case of the small role E1 winning in the AT lottery, after the transition to the advantageous section, After going through the precursors (the precursors), we enter the AT.
Furthermore, when the small number “50” wins the small role D and is not elected in the AT lottery, the so-called “gasse sign” is also displayed in the same manner as when the small role E1 is elected and not elected in the AT lottery. It becomes.

In this way, for a role (small role E1) having a high expectation of transition to the designated game section (AT), the advantageous section display LED 77 is always lit at the time of winning, regardless of whether or not there is a transition to the designated game section, By designing to play a game in an advantageous section (this precursor or a pre-gase sign), it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation for the transition to the designated game section over a plurality of games.
On the other hand, for a role (small role D) that has a low expectation of transition to the designated game section (AT), it is designed to have a case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on and a case where it is not turned on when winning. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from holding excessive expectations for the transition to the designated game section.

Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when winning the small role D with the number “50”, as in the case of winning the small role E1, the transition to the case of shifting to the designated game section according to the result of the AT lottery is made. However, it may be designed to always shift to the designated game section when the small role D is won in the place of “50”.
In this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 is always turned on at the time of winning, and the small role E1 that can make a transition to the designated gaming section in the game (precursor or gasse precursor) in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 at the time of winning. The role of the small role D, which can immediately determine whether or not to shift to the designated game section depending on whether or not is lit, becomes clearer, and it is possible to design a sharp game.

FIG. 169 is a diagram illustrating a 1BB winning probability for each set value and an advantageous section transition probability at the time of 1BB winning in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, there are two types of special roles, 1BBA and 1BBB.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the 1BBA is won in the normal section, it always shifts to the advantageous section. On the other hand, when 1BBB is won in the normal section, it does not shift to the advantageous section.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the number of 1BBA winning numbers is set to “70” in common for both non-RT and RT1 to RT3.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 169, the winning probability of 1BBA is “70/65536” for both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. That is, the winning probability of 1 BBA is set to be the same for all set values.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 to 164, the number of 1BBB winning numbers is “80” for setting 1 and setting 2 for both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Is set to “88”, “96” for setting 3, “104” for setting 4, “112” for setting 5, and “120” for setting 6.
Therefore, the winning probability of 1BBB is as shown in FIG. 169, and increases as the set value increases.

Also, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the number of 1BB winning numbers, that is, the combined value of the number of 1BBA winning numbers and the number of 1BBB winning numbers is “150” for setting 1, and “158” for setting 2. ”,“ 166 ”for setting 3,“ 174 ”for setting 4,“ 182 ”for setting 5, and“ 190 ”for setting 6.
Therefore, the winning probability of 1BB (winning probability in the sum of 1BBA and 1BBB) is as shown in FIG. 169, and increases as the set value increases.

Therefore, the probability of transition to the advantageous section at the time of winning 1BB is (70 ÷ 150 × 100≈) “46.7”% when setting is 1. Similarly, “44.3”% for setting 2, “42.2”% for setting 3, “40.2”% for setting 4, and “38.5”% for setting 5 In the case of setting 6, it is “36.8”%.
In other words, the probability of transition to an advantageous section when 1BB is won increases as the set value decreases.

Here, in the slot machine 10, it is common that the winning probability of the special combination (1BB) increases as the set value increases.
However, in addition to making it possible to shift to special games when winning a special role, in addition to making it possible to shift to an advantageous section, the difference in the player's advantage increases at low and high settings. There is a risk that it will be too much.

Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169, the winning probability of 1 BBA that can be shifted to the advantageous section is made the same for all the set values, and the winning probability of 1 BBB that does not shift to the advantageous section is increased. To be higher.
As a result, the winning probability of 1BB, that is, the winning probability in the sum of 1BBA and 1BBB increases as the set value increases, and the transition probability to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB winning increases as the set value decreases. Become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the difference in the player's advantage from becoming too large between the low setting and the high setting.

  In addition, the winning probability of 1BB increases as the set value increases, but the transition probability to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB winning increases as the set value decreases. Although there is no setting difference, it is possible to give the player an impression that there is a setting difference in the transition probability to the advantageous section.

Furthermore, it is possible to cause the player to guess the set value from the probability of transition to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB winning. That is, an element for estimating the set value can be provided to the player.
Furthermore, the decision not to shift to the advantageous section originally disappoints the player, but the higher the probability of deciding not to move to the advantageous section when winning 1BB, the higher the set value is. Therefore, even if it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section when 1BB is won, the player can be expected to have a high set value, and the player can be prevented from being disappointed.

Further, when the instruction function is activated at least once in the advantageous section, the advantageous section can be ended. In particular, in an advantageous section that does not shift to the instruction game section (AT), the instruction function is activated at least once in order to allow the advantageous section to end.
Here, “at least one instruction function is activated” is a condition device (group B) that can acquire the maximum payout number (“9”) among games having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42. It is necessary to play in the game won.
Therefore, even if the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small role C group (maximum of three), it does not fall under “at least one instruction function activation”.
Hereinafter, when the push order bell of the small role B group is meant, it is described as “push order bell (small role B group)”.

It should be noted that the operation of at least one instruction function that is required to make it possible to end an advantageous section that does not have an instruction game section may be referred to as “collateral navigation” or the like.
Further, when the special role (1BBA or 1BBB) is won before the first instruction function is activated, the advantageous section can be ended without activating the instruction function.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, only 1BB (first-type accessory continuous operation device) is provided as a special role, and 2BB (second-type accessory continuous operation device) is not provided. Even when 2BB is won before the operation, the advantageous section can be terminated without operating the instruction function.

In addition, the “one-time instruction determination flag” is a flag indicating that at least one instruction function for enabling the advantageous section to end is activated.
On the RWM 53, a storage area for storing a one-time instruction determination flag is provided.
When the one-time instruction determination flag is on, “1” is stored in the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53, and when the one-time instruction determination flag is off, “0” is stored. .

FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the flow of an instruction function operation process in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
When proceeding to the instruction function operation processing of FIG. 170, first, in step S2001, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the push order bell (small role B group) has been won. If it is determined that the push order bell (small role B group) has been won, the process proceeds to the next step S2002. On the other hand, if it is determined that the push order bell (small role B group) has not been won, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the next step S2002, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the user is staying in the advantageous section. If it is determined that the user is staying in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to the next step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined that the user is not staying in the advantageous section (staying in the normal section), the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S2003, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the user is staying in the designated game section (AT). If it is determined that the user is staying in the designated game section, the process proceeds to the next step S2004. On the other hand, when it is determined that the user is not staying in the designated game section, the process proceeds to step S2007.

In step S2004, the main CPU 55 displays push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 by operating the instruction function. At this time, on the side of the sub-control board 80, the image display device 23 notifies the correct answer pressing order. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S2005.
In step S2005, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not an advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Specifically, the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes “0”) and the instruction function is activated at least once (the correct push order is notified at least once). ) Or a special role (1BBA or 1BBB). Here, when it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process proceeds to the next step S2006. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section termination condition is not satisfied, step S2006 is skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S2006, the main CPU 55 executes an initialization process (RAM clear process) at the end of the advantageous section. In the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section, the information related to the advantageous section and stored in the storage area on the RWM 53 is cleared including the instruction determination flag once. And if the initialization process at the time of the end of an advantageous area is performed, the process by this flowchart will be complete | finished.
In step S2007, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a special combination (1BBA or 1BBB) has been won. If it is determined that the special combination is won, the process proceeds to the next step S2008. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special combination is not won, step S2008 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2008, the main CPU 55 turns on the instruction determination flag once. Specifically, in step S2008, the main CPU 55 does not activate the instruction function, but sets “1” in the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2005.
In step S2009, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53 is “1”. Here, when it is “1”, that is, when it is determined that the one-time instruction determination flag is ON, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is “0”, that is, when it is determined that the one-time instruction determination flag is OFF, the process proceeds to the next step S2010.

In step S2010, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a specific condition (one-time instruction operation condition) is satisfied.
Here, the “one-time instruction operation condition” is a condition that permits the operation of at least one instruction function for enabling the advantageous section to end.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, “a one-time instruction operation condition” is defined as “digested a predetermined number of games (for example,“ 15 games ”) after shifting to an advantageous section”.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, a digest game number counter is provided on the main control board 50 for counting the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section.

  In step S2010, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the count value of the digestion game number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (eg, “15”). It is determined that the operating condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S2011. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is less than the predetermined value, it is determined that the one-time instruction operation condition is not satisfied, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S2011, the main CPU 55 displays push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 by operating the instruction function. In addition, the operation of the instruction function in step S2011 is for enabling the advantageous section to end. At this time, on the side of the sub-control board 80, the image display device 23 notifies the correct answer pressing order. Then, when the instruction function is activated, the process proceeds to the next step S2012.
In step S2012, the main CPU 55 sets “1” in the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2005.

FIG. 171 is a time chart showing an example in which the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the first push order bell (group B) after shifting to an advantageous section having no instruction game section (AT).
An advantageous section that does not have an instruction game section can be ended if the instruction function is activated at least once or if a special role is won before the first instruction function is activated.
As shown in FIG. 171, before the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell (small role B group) is won. Then, after the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated in the game that is won first by the push order bell (small role B group). At this time, the instruction determination flag is turned on once on the main control board 50 side, and the correct pressing order is notified by the image display device 23 on the sub control board 80 side.

When the one-time instruction determination flag is turned on, thereafter, the one-time instruction determination flag remains on until the advantageous section ends.
Further, when the one-time instruction determination flag is on, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell (small role B group) is won.
Then, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended and an initialization process (RAM clear process) at the end of the advantageous section is executed to turn off the instruction determination flag once.

FIG. 172 is a time chart illustrating an example in which the operation of the instruction function is canceled by winning a special role before the operation of the first instruction function after the transition to the advantageous section having no instruction game section.
As shown in FIG. 172, before the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not operated even if the pushing order bell (small role B group) is won. In FIG. 172, after the transition to the advantageous section, the special combination is won before the first push order bell (small role B group) is won, that is, before the first instruction function is activated. At this time, the instruction function is not activated, but the instruction determination flag is turned on once. Thereafter, the instruction determination flag remains on once until the advantageous section ends.

In addition, when the special role is won, the special role winning information is turned on, and when the selected special role is won, the special role winning information is turned off. Furthermore, during the period from winning the special role until winning, the inside of the special role is kept, and the winning information of the special role is kept on.
Further, when the one-time instruction determination flag is on, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell (small role B group) is won.
Then, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended and an initialization process (RAM clear process) at the end of the advantageous section is executed to turn off the instruction determination flag once.

FIG. 171 shows an example in which the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the first push order bell (group B) after the transition to the advantageous section without the instruction game section (AT).
Here, in order to be able to end an advantageous section that does not have an instruction game section at an early stage, after shifting to an advantageous section that does not have an instruction game section, at the earliest possible stage, when the push order bell (small role group B) is won It is preferable to activate the indicating function.

However, in order to pay out as many game media (medals) as possible in the advantageous section having the designated game section, from the viewpoint of the design of the game, the payout of the game medium is suppressed as much as possible in the advantageous section that does not have the designated game section. It is preferable.
In other words, the advantageous section that does not have the designated game section is a game section that gives a pretend that there is no need to pay out a medal to the player when the push order bell (group B) is elected, and collateral navigation is executed in that game section To do so means that the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section having the designated game section must be set lower.
Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, after shifting to an advantageous section that does not have an instruction game section, until the specific condition (one-time instruction operation condition) is satisfied, even if the push order bell (small role B group) is won, The instruction function is not activated. In addition, as “one-time instruction operation condition”, “having consumed a predetermined number of games (for example,“ 15 games ”) after shifting to an advantageous section” is defined.

Here, as shown in FIG. 172, when the special role is won before the operation of the first instruction function in the advantageous section having no instruction game section, the advantageous section is terminated without operating the instruction function. It becomes possible to make it.
For this reason, even after winning the push order bell (group B), the instruction function is not activated until the specific condition (one-time instruction operation condition) is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous section without the instruction game section. By doing so, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the special role before the first instruction function is activated. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability that the advantageous section can be terminated without operating the instruction function, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the payout of game media as much as possible in the advantageous section that does not have the instruction game section. it can.
In this way, by suppressing the payout of game media at unnecessary timing (advantageous section that does not have an instruction game section: a prelude to the game), it is possible to expect a medal to be paid out at an appropriate timing (instruction game section: AT). Ball design is possible.

In addition, the number of games less than the number of games in the advantageous section (the initial value of the advantageous section counter 69a) can be determined as the number of games in the one-time instruction operation condition. For example, “32 games” can be defined as the number of games in the advantageous section and “15 games” can be defined as the number of games in the one-time instruction operation condition.
In this case, when the special role is won before the number of games of the one-time instruction operation condition is exhausted, the advantageous section can be ended without operating the instruction function.
In addition, after the number of games in the one-time instruction operation condition is digested and before the number of games in the advantageous section is digested, if the winning order bell (group B) is won, the instruction function can be activated at this time. Therefore, the advantageous section can be ended simultaneously with the digestion of the number of games in the advantageous section.

FIG. 173 is a time chart showing an example in which the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the first push order bell (group B) after satisfying the instruction operation condition once in the advantageous section having no instruction game section. .
As shown in FIG. 173, the instruction function is not activated even if the winning order bell (small role B group) is won before the shift to the advantageous section. In addition, even after the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the winning order bell (group B) is won until the instruction operation condition is satisfied once (the predetermined number of games are consumed).

And after satisfy | filling instruction | indication operation | movement conditions once, an instruction | indication function is operated by the game which won first the pushing order bell (small part B group). At this time, the instruction determination flag is turned on once. Thereafter, the instruction determination flag is kept on until the advantageous section ends.
In addition, when the one-time instruction determination flag is on, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell (small role B group) is won.
Then, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended and an initialization process (RAM clear process) at the end of the advantageous section is executed to turn off the instruction determination flag once.

FIG. 174 is a time chart showing an example in which the operation of the instruction function is canceled by winning a special role before the instruction operation condition is satisfied once in the advantageous section having no instruction game section.
As shown in FIG. 174, before shifting to the advantageous section, even if the push order bell (small role B group) is won, the instruction function is not activated. In addition, even after the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the winning order bell (group B) is won until the instruction operation condition is satisfied once (the predetermined number of games are consumed).
In FIG. 174, after the transition to the advantageous section, the special combination is won before the instruction operation condition is satisfied once. At this time, the instruction function is not activated, but the instruction determination flag is turned on once. Thereafter, the instruction determination flag remains on once until the advantageous section ends.

In addition, when the special role is won, the special role winning information is turned on, and when the selected special role is won, the special role winning information is turned off. Furthermore, during the period from winning the special role until winning, the inside of the special role is kept, and the winning information of the special role is kept on.
Further, when the one-time instruction determination flag is on, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell (small role B group) is won. In FIG. 174, when the one-time instruction determination flag is in the ON state, the push order bell (small role B group) is won three times, but the instruction function is not activated in any case.
Then, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended and an initialization process (RAM clear process) at the end of the advantageous section is executed to turn off the instruction determination flag once.

Note that the “single instruction operating condition” is not limited to “having consumed a predetermined number of games after shifting to an advantageous section”. For example, “having consumed the number of games in the advantageous section (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a has become“ 0 ”)” can be defined as the “single instruction operating condition”.
Here, the advantageous section that does not have the designated game section digests the number of games in the advantageous section (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes “0”) and activates the instruction function at least once, or If a special role is won before the first instruction function is activated, it can be terminated.
In addition, for example, “32 games” can be set as the number of games in the advantageous section that does not have the designated game section.

FIG. 175 shows an example in which, in an advantageous section that does not have an instruction game section, after the number of games in the advantageous section is digested, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the push order bell (group B), and the advantageous section is terminated. It is a time chart.
As shown in FIG. 175, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell (small role B group) is won before shifting to the advantageous section. Even after the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell (small role B group) is won until the number of games (for example, “32 games”) in the advantageous section is exhausted.

Further, in FIG. 175, when the number of games in the advantageous section is digested, the instruction function is not activated and the special role is not won. Does not end.
In FIG. 175, after the number of games in the advantageous section is digested, the instruction function is activated in the game that is first won the push order bell (small role B group). At this time, the instruction determination flag is turned on once. When the instruction function is activated, the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, the advantageous section is terminated, and the initialization process (RAM clear process) at the end of the advantageous section is executed to indicate once. Turn off the judgment flag.
In this case, when the instruction function is activated (the correct push order is notified), the advantageous section is ended, so that the player can play a game while expecting that the correct push order is not notified. Can be provided.

FIG. 176 is a time chart showing an example of canceling the operation of the instruction function by winning a special role before the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted in the advantageous section having no instruction game section.
As shown in FIG. 176, the instruction function is not activated even if the winning order bell (small role B group) is won before shifting to the advantageous section. Even after the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell (small role B group) is won until the number of games (for example, “32 games”) in the advantageous section is exhausted.
In FIG. 176, after the transition to the advantageous section, the special combination is won before the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted. At this time, the instruction function is not activated, but the instruction determination flag is turned on once. Thereafter, the instruction determination flag remains on once until the advantageous section ends.

In addition, when the special role is won, the special role winning information is turned on, and when the selected special role is won, the special role winning information is turned off. Furthermore, during the period from winning the special role until winning, the inside of the special role is kept, and the winning information of the special role is kept on.
Further, when the one-time instruction determination flag is on, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell (small role B group) is won. In FIG. 176, when the one-time instruction determination flag is ON, the push order bell (small role B group) is won twice, but the instruction function is not activated in any case.

In FIG. 176, since the special role is won before the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted, if the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted, the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. For this reason, when the number of games in the advantageous section is digested, the advantageous section is ended and an initialization process (RAM clear process) at the end of the advantageous section is executed to turn off the instruction determination flag once.
In this way, by determining that “the number of games in the advantageous section has been digested” as the “one-time instruction operation condition”, the probability that the advantageous section can be terminated without activating the instruction function is as much as possible. Can be high.

Here, although the contents partially overlap with those of the first embodiment, setting / changing of setting values will be described. In order to set / change the set value, the power switch 11, the setting key switch 12, and the setting switch 13 are used.
Specifically, when the power switch 11 is turned on while the power switch 11 is turned off and the setting key switch 12 is turned on (the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise), the main CPU 55 is changing the setting. That is, the mode is changed to the setting change mode. At this time, the main CPU 55 executes initialization processing (RAM clear processing) at the time of setting change. Also, normal startup processing is not performed.
The execution timing of the RAM clear process is not limited to the time when the setting change mode is entered (when the power switch 11 is turned on while the setting key switch 12 is turned on).
For example, the RAM clear process may be executed when the set value is confirmed (when the start switch 41 is turned on in the setting change mode), and when the setting change mode is finished (the setting key switch 12 is turned off in the setting change mode). RAM clear processing may be executed at the same time.

In the setting change mode, the main CPU 55 displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 73.
In the setting change mode, every time the setting switch 13 is operated (turned on) once, the main CPU 55 displays the setting value by the setting value display LED 73 as follows: →→ “1” → “2” → “ 3 ”→“ 4 ”→“ 5 ”→“ 6 ”→“ 1 ”→“ 2 ”→...

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) in the setting change mode, the main CPU 55 determines the set value with the value displayed on the set value display LED 73. At this time, the main CPU 55 stores setting value data corresponding to the determined setting value in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) on the RWM 53.
For example, when the set value is “1”, the set value data “0” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK). That is, when the set value is “N” (N is an integer from “1” to “6”), the set value data “N−1” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK). As a result, the set value data “0” to “5” are stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK).

In the setting change mode, when the setting key switch 12 is turned off (the setting key is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise), the game can be performed with the changed set value.
If the setting key switch 12 is turned on from off (turns the setting key 90 degrees clockwise) while the power switch 11 is on, the main CPU 55 shifts to the setting confirmation mode during the setting confirmation. Thus, when only the set value is confirmed, it is not necessary to turn on / off the power switch 11. During the setting confirmation, the setting value at the present time is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 as in the case of changing the setting.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the main CPU 55 executes the first initialization process when the advantageous section ends, and executes the second initialization process when the set value is changed.
Further, in the first initialization process, the lottery state at the end of the advantageous section (RT state) is maintained, and the process shifts to the normal section. In the second initialization process, the predetermined lottery state (non-RT) is set. Transition to normal section.
Then, in the first initialization process and the second initialization process, information regarding the advantageous section stored in the predetermined storage area in the RWM 53 is cleared. Thereby, when the 1st initialization process is performed and when the 2nd initialization process is performed, it shifts to the usual section where the information about an advantageous section is the same state.

FIG. 177 shows information on the RWM 53 that is cleared in the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section (first initialization process), information on the RWM 53 that is retained even after the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section, and the initial state when the setting is changed. It is a figure which shows the information on RWM53 cleared by a conversion process (2nd initialization process).
In a predetermined storage area on the RWM 53, information related to the advantageous section is stored.
Examples of information relating to the advantageous section stored on the RWM 53 include an advantageous section counter value, an AT counter value, an upper limit counter value, an additional counter value, an advantageous section flag, and a one-time instruction determination flag.

The advantageous section counter value indicates the number of games in the advantageous section. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the number of games determined at that time is set in the advantageous section counter 69a on the RWM 53 as an advantageous section counter value. Further, every time one game is consumed in the advantageous section, the advantageous section counter value is decremented. Then, when the advantageous section counter value becomes “0”, the advantageous section is terminated.
Further, when the number of games in the advantageous section is added in the advantageous section, a value corresponding to the added number is added to the advantageous section counter value.

The AT counter value indicates the number of games in the designated game section (AT). When it is decided to shift to the designated game section, the number of games decided at that time is set as an AT counter value. Further, every time one game is consumed in the designated game section, the AT counter value is decremented. When the AT counter value becomes “0”, the designated game section is ended.
Further, when the number of games in the designated game section is added in the designated game section, a value corresponding to the added number is added to the AT counter value.

The upper limit counter value indicates the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. At the start of the advantageous section, “1500” is set as the upper limit counter value in the upper limit counter 69b on the RWM 53. In addition, the upper limit counter value is decremented every time one game is consumed in the advantageous section. When the upper limit counter value becomes “0”, the advantageous interval and the designated game interval are ended regardless of the advantageous interval counter value and the AT counter value.
The additional counter value indicates the additional number of games in the designated game section. Each time the number of games in the designated game section is added, the added number is added to the added counter value.

The advantageous section flag is a flag indicating that it is in the advantageous section.
On the RWM 53, a storage area for storing an advantageous section flag is provided.
When the advantageous section flag is on, “1” is stored in the storage area of the advantageous section flag on the RWM 53, and when the advantageous section flag is off, “0” is stored.
And when it transfers to an advantageous area, an advantageous area flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the advantageous section flag remains on until the advantageous section ends, and at the end of the advantageous section, the advantageous section flag is turned off.

The one-time instruction determination flag is a flag indicating that at least one instruction function for enabling the advantageous section to be ended is activated.
On the RWM 53, a storage area for storing a one-time instruction determination flag is provided.
When the one-time instruction determination flag is on, “1” is stored in the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53, and when the one-time instruction determination flag is off, “0” is stored. .
In the advantageous section, when the first instruction function is activated, or when a special role is won before the first instruction function is activated, the one-time instruction determination flag is turned on. Thereafter, the instruction determination flag remains on once until the advantageous section ends, and the instruction determination flag is turned off once at the end of the advantageous section.

In addition, in a predetermined storage area on the RWM 53, as information other than information related to the advantageous section, for example, stored number data, set value data, RT state data, internal medium flag, accessory condition device number data, and accessory operation Status flags and the like are stored.
The stored number data is data indicating the stored number.
On the RWM 53, a storage area for the stored number data is provided. Data indicating the stored number (for example, “15” when the stored number is 15) is stored in the storage area of the stored number data.

The set value data is data indicating the set value.
As described above, the set value data is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK) on the RWM 53.
The RT state data is data indicating the RT state (lottery state).
Here, an RT state data storage area (_NB_RT) is provided on the RWM 53.
The RT state data storage area (_NB_RT) stores data corresponding to RT, for example, “0” for non-RT, “1” for RT1,.

The internal medium flag is a flag indicating that the game is an internal game carrying over the winning information of the special role.
Here, a storage area (_FL_PRD_LOT) for an internal medium flag is provided on the RWM 53. When it is inside, “FF (H)” is stored in the storage area (_FL_PRD_LOT) of the inside flag, and when it is not inside, “0” is stored.

The accessory condition device number data is data indicating the accessory condition device number, that is, the type of the winning accessory condition device (special role).
Here, a storage area (_NB_CND_BNS) for the accessory condition device number data is provided on the RWM 53. And, when the feature condition device is not won, “0” is stored in the storage area (_NB_CND_BNS) of the accessory condition device number data, and when any of the accessory condition devices is won, A value (other than “0”) corresponding to the accessory condition device number is stored.

The accessory operating state flag is a flag indicating the operating state of the accessory.
Here, on the RWM 53, a storage area (_FL_ACTION) of an accessory operating state flag is provided. The bit of the storage area (_FL_ACTION) of the accessory operation state flag corresponding to the accessory is “1” when any accessory is activated, and the bit is “0” when the accessory is not activated. It becomes.

As shown in FIG. 177, at the end of the advantageous section, the main CPU 55 executes the first initialization process. At this time, among the information stored in the storage area on the RWM 53, information related to the advantageous section (such as advantageous section counter value) is cleared, but predetermined information other than information related to the advantageous section (such as RT status data) is cleared. Hold without.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, “clearing information stored in the storage area on the RWM 53” means that the value of the storage area on the RWM 53 is set to “0”.

Therefore, when the first initialization process (initialization process at the end of the advantageous section) is executed, the advantageous section counter value, AT counter value, upper limit counter value, additional counter value, advantageous section flag, and one-time instruction on the RWM 53 are indicated. The values of the determination flag storage areas are all “0”.
On the other hand, even if the first initialization process is executed, the storage area of the stored number data, the set value data, the RT state data, the internal medium flag, the accessory condition apparatus number data, and the accessory operating state flag on the RWM 53 The value of is kept without being cleared.

Therefore, when the advantageous section ends and the first initialization process is executed, the normal section is shifted to while maintaining the RT state at the end of the advantageous section. For example, assuming that the user stays at RT3 at the end of the advantageous section, when the first initialization process is executed after the advantageous section ends, the routine proceeds to the normal section while maintaining RT3.
The process corresponding to the first initialization process is also performed in the third embodiment (FIGS. 43 to 52). For example, the processes in steps S445 to S447 in FIG. 44 (e) correspond to the first initialization process.

  As shown in FIG. 177, when the setting is changed, the main CPU 55 executes a second initialization process. At this time, among the information stored in the storage area on the RWM 53, information related to the advantageous section (such as advantageous section counter value) is cleared, and predetermined information other than information related to the advantageous section (such as RT status data) is also cleared. .

For this reason, when the second initialization process (initialization process at the time of setting change) is executed, the advantageous section counter value, the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, the additional counter value, the advantageous section flag, and the one-time instruction determination on the RWM 53 The values of the flag storage areas are all “0”. In addition, the storage area data of the RWM 53, the set value data, the RT state data, the internal medium flag, the accessory condition device number data, and the accessory operating state flag storage area values are all “0”.
Therefore, when the set value is changed (including resetting the same set value) and the second initialization process is executed, the RT state shifts to non-RT and shifts to the normal section. For example, assuming that the user stays at RT3 before the set value is changed, when the set value is changed and the second initialization process is executed, the process shifts to non-RT and shifts to the normal section.

Further, in both the first initialization process executed at the end of the advantageous section and the second initialization process executed at the time of setting change, the information regarding the advantageous section stored in the storage area on the RWM 53 is cleared.
For this reason, when the 1st initialization process is performed and when the 2nd initialization process is performed, it shifts to the normal section in which the information about an advantageous section is the same state.
In addition, the “normal section in which the information related to the advantageous section is in the same state” means an advantageous section counter value, AT counter value, upper limit counter value, additional counter value, advantageous section flag, and one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53. It means a normal section where the values of the storage area are all “0”.

Here, each time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is changed, or the advantageous section is changed from the normal section to the advantageous section when the advantageous section ends and the set value is changed. If the ease of transition is changed, there is a risk of harming the fairness among players.
Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, both the first initialization process executed at the end of the advantageous section and the second initialization process executed at the time of setting change are related to the advantageous section stored in the predetermined storage area on the RWM 53. Clear information.
As a result, each time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be made the same, and when the advantageous section ends and when the set value is changed, Since the ease of transition from the section to the advantageous section can be made the same, fairness among the players can be ensured.
<Modification of 25th Embodiment>

Although the twenty-fifth embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, whether to shift to the designated game section (AT) is determined by AT lottery (two-stage lottery). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, after winning a small role E1 and moving to an advantageous section, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that a predetermined role is won reaches a specified number of times, or the number of winnings of a predetermined role reaches a specified number of times Alternatively, it may be decided to shift to the designated game section.

(2) In FIG. 160, 1BBA does not have a case where a common winning is made with a probability of “70/65536”, and a winning combination with a small role is shared. In addition, the small role E1 has a common setting and has a case of winning a single winning with a probability of “1000/65536” and overlapping with a special role. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, 1BBA is elected independently with a probability of “40/65536” common to the settings, “1BBA + small role E1” is elected with a probability of “30/65536” common to the settings, and “1000/65536” is common to the settings. You may make it win a small combination E1 independently by probability.

Here, when the small role E1 is elected alone, the middle cherry can be stopped. In addition, even when “1 BBA + small role E1” is won repeatedly, the middle cherry can be stopped. That is, both the single winning of the small role E1 and the overlapping winning of “1BBA + small role E1” are the lottery results in which the middle cherries can be stopped.
When the small role E1 is elected alone, it always shifts to the advantageous zone, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, and even when “1BBA + small role E1” is duplicated, always the advantageous zone. And the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.

Further, when the small role E1 is elected alone and shifts to the advantageous section, the next game medal can be inserted (bet) and the settlement switch 46 can be operated (hereinafter, this timing is referred to as “predetermined timing”). The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on (timing 1 in FIG. 23).
On the other hand, when “1BBA + small role E1” is selected and transferred to an advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on by a predetermined timing, and a combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed. Alternatively, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on (timing 2 in FIG. 23).
For this reason, the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 may be the same or different between when the small combination E1 is won alone and when “1BBA + small combination E1” is selected and overlapped.

In addition, when both the small role E1 is elected and moved to the advantageous section, and when both the “1BBA + small role E1” are elected and moved to the advantageous section, the instruction game section is designated and And when not going to the game section.
Even in this case, when the lottery result is such that the middle cherries can be stopped, the advantageous section is always switched to and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. And although it turns out that it transfers to an advantageous area, since it will be in the state which does not know whether it transfers to an instruction | indication game area, it can give a player the expectation with respect to transfer to an instruction | indication game area over multiple games.
When “1BBA + small role E1” overlaps and shifts to the advantageous section, for example, at the end of the 1BBA game, it is possible to notify whether to shift to the designated game section.

(3) FIG. 178 (a) shows a modified example of the number table (1) in FIG. 160, and FIG. 178 (b) shows the transition to the advantageous section at the time of rare role winning in FIG. 168 (b). It is a figure which shows the modification of the presence or absence of lighting of advantageous area display LED77.
In FIG. 160, the single winning number for the small role E1 is “1000” common to the settings, and the single winning number for the small role E2 is not defined, but in FIG. 178 (a), the single winning number for the small role E1 is single. The winning number is “500” for all settings, and the single winning number for the small role E2 is also “500” for all settings. In FIG. 178 (a), when the small role E1 is won, the normal section always shifts to the advantageous section, and even when the small role E2 is won, the normal section always shifts to the advantageous section.

Here, when the small winning combination E1 is elected alone, the middle cherry can be stopped, and when the small winning combination E2 is independently won, the middle cherry can be stopped. That is, both the single winning of the small role E1 and the single winning of the small role E2 are lottery results that allow the middle cherry to be stopped.
Then, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), when the small role E1 is selected, it always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
Further, when the small role E1 is won, the game moves to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the instruction game section (AT) is transferred with the probability of “128/256”. With the probability of “/ 256”, the game does not shift to the designated game section. As a result, the probability of transition to the designated game section (AT) when the middle cherry can be stopped is 25%.
Whether or not to shift to the designated game section (AT) at the time of winning the small role E1 is determined by AT lottery (two-stage lottery).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), when the small role E2 is won, as in the case of the small role E1, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is always turned on.
Further, when the small role E2 is won, the game shifts to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the instruction game section is not shifted.

In this way, when the small role E1 is won and the small role E2 is won, the advantageous zone is always switched to and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on. Further, when the small role E1 is won, there is a time when the game shifts to the designated game segment and when the small game E2 is won, and when the small role E2 is won, the game is not shifted to the designated game zone.
Even if it does in this way, when it becomes a lottery result that can stop the middle stage cherries, it will be understood that it will shift to the advantageous section, but it will not be known whether or not it will shift to the designated game section, so to the designated game section It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition of the game over a plurality of games.

(4) FIG. 179 (a) shows a modified example of the number table (1) of FIG. 160, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the presence or absence of lighting of advantageous area display LED77.
In FIG. 178 and FIG. 179, the contents of the number table (1) in (a) are the same, but the contents of whether or not the advantageous section transition and the advantageous section display LED 77 are lit in the rare role winning in (b) are different.

As shown in FIG. 179 (b), when the small role E1 is won, it always shifts to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
Also, by winning the small role E1, when the advantageous section is displayed and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the instruction game section (AT) is transferred with a probability of “64/256”. With the probability of “/ 256”, the game does not shift to the designated game section.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), when the small role E2 is won, it always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
Furthermore, when winning the small role E2, when the advantageous zone is displayed and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, as in the case of winning the small role E1, the instruction game zone (with a probability of “64/256”) AT), but with the probability of “192/256”, it does not enter the designated game section. As a result, the probability of transition to the designated game section (AT) when the middle cherry can be stopped is 25%.
Whether or not to shift to the designated game section (AT) is determined by AT lottery (two-stage lottery) in both cases of winning the small role E1 and winning the small role E2.

In this way, at the time of winning the small role E1 and at the time of winning the small role E2, it always shifts to the advantageous zone and turns on the advantageous zone display LED 77, and further, both at the time of winning the small role E1 and at the time of winning the small role E2. , When there is a transition to the instruction game section, and when not to transition to the instruction game section.
Even if it does in this way, when it becomes a lottery result that can stop the middle stage cherries, it will be understood that it will shift to the advantageous section, but it will not be known whether or not it will shift to the designated game section, so to the designated game section It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition of the game over a plurality of games.

(5) FIG. 180 (a) shows a modified example of the number table (1) of FIG. 160, and FIG. 180 (b) shows the transition of the advantageous section and the transition of the rare role in FIG. 168 (b). It is a figure which shows the modification of the presence or absence of lighting of advantageous area display LED77.
In FIG. 180 (a), the number of the single winning combination of the small combination E1 is “250” common to the setting, and the number of the single winning combination of the small combination E2 is “750” common to the setting. In FIG. 180 (a), when the small role E1 is won, the normal section always shifts to the advantageous section, and even when the small role E2 is won, the normal section always shifts to the advantageous section.

Further, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), when the small role E1 is won, it always shifts to the advantageous zone, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, and even when the small role E2 is won, it always shifts to the advantageous zone, And the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
Furthermore, when the small role E1 is won, the game shifts to the advantageous section, and whenever the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the instruction game section is always transferred.
On the other hand, when the small role E2 is won, the game shifts to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the instruction game section is not shifted.
As a result, the probability of transition to the designated game section (AT) when the middle cherry can be stopped is 25%.

In this way, when winning the small role E1 and winning the small role E2, it always shifts to the advantageous section and turns on the advantageous section display LED 77, and further, when winning the small role E1, shifts to the designated game section, At the time of winning the role E2, do not shift to the designated game section.
Even if it does in this way, when it becomes a lottery result that can stop the middle stage cherries, it will be understood that it will shift to the advantageous section, but it will not be known whether or not it will shift to the designated game section, so to the designated game section It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition of the game over a plurality of games.
Further, in any of the modes of FIG. 168 (b), FIG. 178 (b), FIG. 179 (b), and FIG. 180 (b), the transition probability to the designated game section (AT) when the middle stage cherry can be stopped is Even if any mode is adopted, the same effect can be exhibited and the same impression can be given to the player.

(6) In FIG. 161 to FIG. 164, 1 BBB is elected alone, but is not limited to this.
For example, in FIG. 161 to FIG. 164, instead of 1BBB single winning, “1BBA + small role 34 (“ Bell B ”−“ red 7 ”−“ red 7 ”: 1)” may be overlapped.

Specifically, in FIG. 161 to FIG. 164, the number of duplicated winnings of “1BBA + small role 34” is “80” when setting 1, “88” when setting 2, and when setting 3 Can be set to “96”, “104” for setting 4, “112” for setting 5, and “120” for setting 6.
Even in this manner, the winning probability of 1BB (the sum of 1BBA single winning and overlapping winning) increases as the set value increases, and the probability of transition to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB winning decreases. Can be made higher.

(7) In FIG. 168 (b), when the small role E1 (middle cherries) is elected, when the advantageous section is displayed and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the instruction game section (64/256) has a probability of (64/256). AT) and does not move to the designated game section with a probability of “192/256”. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, in FIG. 168 (b), it may be possible to shift to the chance zone (CZ) instead of the designated game section (AT).

Specifically, in FIG. 168 (b), when winning the small role E1 (middle cherries), the player moves to an advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up with a probability of “64/256”. It is possible to shift to the chance zone (CZ) and not to move to the chance zone with a probability of “192/256”.
In addition, when transitioning to the chance zone, there are a case where the transition is made (promotion) to the designated game section (AT) and a case where the transition is not made to the designated game section. For example, in the chance zone, if the transition condition to the instruction game section is satisfied, the transition to the instruction game section is performed, and if the transition condition to the instruction game section is not satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated without shifting to the instruction game section. Move to normal section.

Furthermore, the transition conditions from the chance zone to the designated game section may include, for example, that the number of winnings for a predetermined combination has reached a specified number of times, or that the number of winnings for a predetermined combination has reached a specified number of times. it can.
Even if it does in this way, it will be understood that when the small role E1 (middle cherries) is elected, it always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, but it shifts to the advantageous section. Since it is not known whether or not to perform, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition to the designated game section over a plurality of games.

(8) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the “one-time instruction operation condition” is defined as “having consumed a predetermined number of games (for example,“ 15 games ”) after shifting to an advantageous section”, but is not limited thereto. .
For example, “having won or won a predetermined number of times for a given role after shifting to an advantageous section”, specifically, “having won or won a push order (small role B group) five times after shifting to an advantageous section”, “ “7 wins or winnings for replay after transition to a section” or the like can be defined as “single instruction operating condition”.

  In addition, for example, “the fact that the lottery is performed at a predetermined time after the transition to the advantageous section was not won”, specifically, “50% probability at the time of winning the push order bell (small group B) after the transition to the advantageous section” "Lottery to win in this lottery, it was not won in this lottery", "After the advantageous section transition, every time the game is played, a lottery to win with a probability of 70%, and was won in this lottery Can be defined as “one-time instruction operation condition”.

  Furthermore, for example, “the condition determined at the time of advantageous section transition was satisfied”, specifically, “at the time of advantageous section transition, 10 games, 15 games, or 20 games were determined by lottery and determined. “Digested the number of games”, “At the time of advantageous section transition, either 5 times, 7 times, or 10 times was decided by lottery, and then the number of winning of the push order bell (small role B group) was decided “The number of times has been reached” or the like can be defined as “one-time instruction operation condition”.

Furthermore, for example, “the number of times of incorrect repressing in the replay duplication (replay B group, replay C group) winning after reaching the advantageous section has reached 3 times”, “freezing occurred after the advantageous section transition "Can also be defined as" one-time instruction operating condition ".
Of course, the above-mentioned conditions can be appropriately combined to be defined as a “single instruction operating condition”.

  (9) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, at the time of setting change, the second initialization process (initialization process at the time of setting change) is executed, so that the advantageous interval counter value, AT counter value, upper limit counter value on RWM 53 are added. The counter value, the advantageous section flag, the one-time instruction determination flag, the RT state data, the stored number data, the internal medium flag, the accessory condition device number data, and the accessory operating state flag are cleared. However, it is not limited to this.

  For example, when the setting is changed, only the stored number data is cleared from among the RT state data, the stored number data, the internal medium flag, the accessory condition device number data, and the accessory operating state flag, and the RT state data, the internal intermediate flag, The accessory condition device number data and the accessory operating state flag may be held without being cleared.

Here, the “information regarding the advantageous section” must be cleared at the end of the advantageous section, and must be cleared even when the setting is changed.
In addition, “RT state data”, “internal flag”, “object condition device number data”, and “object operation state flag” must be retained without being cleared at the end of the advantageous section. When changing, it may be cleared or may be held without being cleared.

Furthermore, the “stored number data” must be held without being cleared at the end of the advantageous section, and must be cleared when the setting is changed.
As described above, the “stored number data” is data on the RWM 53 that is handled differently when the advantageous section ends and when the setting is changed.

(10) In the flowchart shown in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the figure. When the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing can be changed. is there.
(11) The twenty-fifth embodiment and the various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combination.

<Twenty-sixth embodiment>
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, it is possible to check whether there is a failure in the acquisition number display LED 78 (digit 3, digit 4) on which the push order instruction information is displayed, and whether there is a failure in a signal line that transmits a signal to the acquisition number display LED 78. It is a thing.

That is, in the situation where the number of acquired medals is displayed, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit of the acquired number is displayed in the digit 3 and the LED display counter value is “01000000. In the interrupt processing at (B) ", the lower digit of the acquired number is displayed in the digit 4.
In the situation where the push order instruction information is displayed, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, “=” which is a part of the push order instruction information is displayed on the digit 3. In the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, any one of “1” to “3”, which is another part of the push order instruction information, is displayed on the digit 4.

Further, in a situation where the set value can be changed (during setting change), seven segments A to G of the digit 3 are turned on in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)” ( “8” is displayed on the digit 3), and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, the seven segments A to G of the digit 4 are turned on (“8” is displayed on the digit 4). Is displayed).
Thus, the digits 3 and 4 for which the push order instruction information is displayed in the instruction game section are not broken by lighting the seven segments A to G of the digits 3 and 4 during the setting change. In addition, it can be confirmed that there is no failure in the signal line for transmitting the segment signal to the digits 3 and 4.

Further, during the setting change, for example, seven of the segments A to G of the digit 3 are lit, and among the seven segments of the digit 4, the six of the segments A and C to G are lit. When segment B is not lit, it can be determined that segment B of digit 4 has a possibility of failure.
Furthermore, during the setting change, for example, the six segments A to E and G of the digit 3 are lit, but the segment F is not lit and the six segments A to E and G of the digit 4 are lit. Lights up, but when segment F does not light up, not only the segments F of digits 3 and 4 may have failed, but also the signal line that transmits the segment signal to segment F may have failed. It can be judged.

Hereinafter, the 26th embodiment will be described in more detail.
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the digits 1 to 5 and the circuit configuration for lighting them are the same as in the twentieth embodiment.
Here, although the contents partially overlap with the twentieth embodiment, the digits 1 to 5 and the circuit configuration for lighting them will be described.
As shown in FIG. 125 (A), a storage number display LED 76 composed of digits 1 and 2, an acquired number display LED 78 composed of digits 3 and 4, and a set value display LED 73 composed of digit 5 I have.
As shown in FIG. 126, digits 1 to 5 have seven segments of segments A to G.

Furthermore, the output ports 2 and 3 are provided on the main control board 50.
Further, as shown in FIG. 128, the output port 2 outputs digit 1-5 signals indicating which digit is to be lit, and the output port 3 indicates segment A indicating which segment is to be lit. ~ G signal is output.

As shown in FIG. 129, IC2 and IC3 are provided on the main control board 50.
Furthermore, IC2 is an IC related to the control of the digits 1 to 5 signal, and has an output port 2 composed of D0 to D7 output terminals.
Further, IC3 is an IC related to the control of the segment A to G signals, and has an output port 3 composed of D0 to D7 output terminals.

As shown in FIGS. 129 and 131, the digit 1 signal line is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 2 of the IC 2 and is connected to the drive signal line of the digit 1.
Similarly to the digit 1 signal line, the digit 2 to 5 signal lines are respectively output from the D4 to D7 output terminals of the output port 2 of the IC 2 and connected to the drive signal lines of the digits 2 to 5, respectively.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 129 and 131, the segment A signal line goes out from the D0 output terminal of the output port 3 of the IC 3 and is connected to the segment A of the digits 1 to 5.
Similarly to the segment A signal line, the segment B to G signal lines are respectively output from the D1 to D6 output terminals of the output port 3 of the IC 3 and connected to the segments B to G of the digits 1 to 5, respectively.
Thereby, in the digits 1 to 5, the segment A to G signals are also used.

  For example, when the digit 3 signal is output from the D5 output terminal of the output port 2, the segments A to G of the digit 3 can be turned on. At this time, for example, when the segment B signal is output from the D1 output terminal of the output port 3 and the segment C signal is output from the D2 output terminal of the output port 3, the segments B and C of the digit 3 are lit. As a result, “1” is displayed in the digit 3.

In interrupt processing, only one of the digits 1 to 5 is set to be lit, and the digit to be lit is switched sequentially for each interrupt processing executed in a cycle of 2.235 ms. To go. That is, dynamic lighting is executed.
In particular, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, the signal “00001000 (B)” is output from the output port 2 so that the digit 1 signal is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 2. As a result, the digit 1 can be turned on.

Similarly, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”, the digit 2 can be lit, and in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the digit 3 is lit. It becomes possible.
In addition, the digit 4 can be lit in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, and the digit 5 can be lit in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “10000000 (B)”. It becomes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), the LED display request flag is “01111111 (B)” during normal operation, “11100000 (B)” during setting change, and “11111000 (B) during setting confirmation. "
In the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 134, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter and the LED display request flag, and the digit corresponding to the calculation result is turned on.

FIG. 181 is a diagram showing the address, label, and content of data stored in the RWM 53.
The data shown in FIG. 181 is for use in the description of the twenty-sixth embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The address “F000 (H)” is a set value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
As described in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the set value is “N”, the set value data “N−1” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
In this embodiment, it has setting values “1” to “6”. Therefore, any one of the set value data “0” to “5” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
In addition, the set value display LED 73 displays “N” obtained by adding “1” to the set value data “N−1” stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK) as a set value.

The address “F010 (H)” is a stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT), and in this embodiment, any value from “0” to “50” is stored as the stored number data.
For example, when 50 medals are stored, the stored number data “50” is stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT).

In the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, the upper digit of the value (stored number) stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) is the digit 1 (the stored number display LED 76 Displayed in the upper digit).
In the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”, the lower digit of the value (stored number) stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) is displayed in the digit 2.

The address “F011 (H)” is an acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). In the present embodiment, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) stores acquired number data, setting change display data, or a push order instruction number.
At the time of paying out medals, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) stores any value from “0” to “9” as acquired number data.

Further, during the setting change, “88” is stored as the display data during the setting change in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
Furthermore, at the time of pushing order instruction (when notifying the pushing order of the stop switch 42 which is advantageous to the player in the designated game section), in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), as the pushing order instruction number, One of the values “A0 (H)”, “A1 (H)”, “A2 (H)”, or “A3 (H)” is stored.

  For example, when 9 winning combinations are won and 9 medals are paid out, “0” is first stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as acquired number data. Thereafter, every time one medal is paid out, “1” is added to the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). That is, the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is updated according to the payout of medals as “0” → “1” → “2” → “3” →. Go. When the ninth medal is paid out, the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is “9”.

  In the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit of the value stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is changed to the digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78). Is displayed. At this time, if the acquired number data is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the upper digit of the acquired number is displayed in the digit 3, and if the setting change display data is stored, the setting is being changed. If the value of “8” indicating that the data is present is displayed in the digit 3 and the push order instruction number is stored, the push order instruction information (indicating that it is the push order instruction information) “=” is displayed in the digit 3. Is done.

  In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, the lower digit of the value stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is changed to the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78). Is displayed. At this time, if the acquired number data is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the lower digit of the acquired number is displayed in the digit 4, and if the setting change display data is stored, the setting is being changed. If the value of “8” indicating that there is a value is displayed in the digit 4 and the push order instruction number is stored, the push order instruction information (indicating the push order) “0” to “3” Displayed in digit 4.

The address “F012 (H)” is an LED display counter value storage area (_CT_LED_DSP), and every time an interrupt process is performed, “00000001 (B)” → “00000010 (B)” → “00000100 (B)” → ... → “10000000 (B)” → “00000000 (B)” → “00000001 (B)” The values are updated.
The address “F013 (H)” is an LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP), and stores a value corresponding to normal, setting change, or setting confirmation as shown in FIG.

The address “F014 (H)” is an error number storage area (_NB_ERROR).
When no recoverable error has occurred, “00 (H)” is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR).
When a recoverable error occurs, an error number corresponding to the type of the recoverable error that has occurred is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR). In this embodiment, ten types of errors shown in FIG. 181 are detected as recoverable errors. The recoverable error is not limited to these.
Until the error is cleared, the value of the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) is maintained. When the error is cleared (return from the error), the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) is again set to “00 (H)”. Is stored.

  For example, when an HP error (medal jam error) occurs, “0E (H)” (“14” in decimal) is stored as an error number in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR). In this case, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the character “H” is displayed in the digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78), and the LED display counter value is “01000000 ( In the interrupt processing at “B)”, the character “P” is displayed in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78). That is, from the value of “0E (H)” stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR), the offset value for displaying the character “H” in the digit 3 and the character “P” in the digit 4 Is calculated.

The address “F040 (H)” is a medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL), and in this embodiment, any value from “0” to “9” is stored as medal payout number data.
In this embodiment, since the maximum number of medals paid out in one game is nine, the medal payout number data is “0” to “9”. For example, when a 15-card combination is provided, The medal payout number data is “0” to “15”.

The address “F041 (H)” is a medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL), and in this embodiment, “0” to “9”, similar to the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address “F040”. One of the values is stored.
When the winning determination is made, the values of both the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) and the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) are updated. At this time, the same value is stored in both addresses. For example, when nine winning combinations win, “9” is stored in both addresses.

Thereafter, the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is decremented by “1” every time one medal is paid out, and becomes “0” when the medal payout ends. That is, the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) corresponds to the medal payout as “9” → “8” → “7” →... “2” → “1” → “0”. Will be updated.
On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) is not updated by the medal payout, but is maintained until it is updated at the next game winning determination.

FIG. 182 is a diagram showing the LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and the LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2) in the twenty-sixth embodiment, and corresponds to the in-use area data table of FIG. 127 in the twentieth embodiment. .
182, the LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) has “0101110 (B)” as the display data “d”, which is different from the in-use area data table of FIG. 127. It is the same as the data table.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing addresses of each data of the LED segment table 1 and the LED segment table 2 stored in the use area of the ROM 54.
In the LED segment table 1, the head address is set to “1811 (H)”, and each data of the LED segment table 1 is stored in order from “1811 (H)”.
In addition, the LED segment table 2 has its head address set to “1817 (H)”, and each data of the LED segment table 2 is stored in order from “1817 (H)”.
Further, the LED segment table 1 and the LED segment table 2 are stored at consecutive addresses.

Thus, when “1811 (H)” is designated as the head address, each data of the LED segment table 1 and the LED segment table 2 can be represented by an offset value from the head address “1811 (H)”.
When “1817 (H)” is designated as the head address, each data in the LED segment table 2 can be represented by an offset value from the head address “1817 (H)”.

For example, the head address “1811 (H)” of the LED segment table 1 is designated when a H0 error (abnormality of the payout sensor) occurs. Also, from the error number “10 (H)” (decimal number “16”) of the H0 error, “1” is calculated as the upper digit offset value, and “6” is calculated as the lower digit offset value.
Then, by reading the address obtained by adding the upper digit offset value “1” to the head address “1811 (H)”, that is, the data of “1812 (H)”, “H” can be displayed in the digit 3. .
Similarly, by reading the address obtained by adding the lower digit offset value “6” to the head address “1811 (H)”, that is, data “1817 (H)”, “0” can be displayed in the digit 4. it can.

FIG. 184 is a diagram showing addresses in the push order instruction number table stored in the use area of the ROM 54, and corresponds to the address entered in FIG. 19 of the first embodiment.
In the push order instruction number table, the head address is set to “1900 (H)”, and push order instruction numbers corresponding to the condition device numbers “0” to “30” are stored in order from this “1900 (H)”. ing.

For example, when the small combination B1 of the condition device number “11” is won, the condition device number “11” is set as the offset value, and the offset value “11” is set in the head address “1900 (H)” of the push order instruction number table By reading the added address, that is, data of “190B (H)”, it is possible to obtain the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” corresponding to the condition device number “11”.
Note that the push order instruction number (* 1) for winning the small combination A and the push order instruction numbers (* 2) for winning the small roles E1 and E2 are the same as those in FIG. 19 of the first embodiment.

Subsequently, information processing by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described.
When the power switch 11 of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the main control board 50 executes a program start process.
In the program start process, the signal of the door switch 15 is on (the front door is opened), the signal of the setting door switch is on (the setting door is opened), and the setting key switch 12 Is determined to be on (set key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise), the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) shown in FIG. In other words, when the power switch 11 is turned on while the setting key switch 12 is turned on, the setting is being changed (setting change mode).

Furthermore, in the program start process, when it is determined that the signal of the door switch 15 is off, the signal of the setting door switch is off, and the signal of the setting key switch 12 is off, the power-off recovery data is It is determined whether it is a normal value.
Then, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to the power-recovery process. In this power-return process, the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 133 is started, and then the main process (M_MAIN shown in FIG. 186). )
On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, an “E1” error (power-off recovery error) occurs, and the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error process 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) shown in FIG.

Further, when an “E1” error occurs and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error process 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1), the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 133 is not executed, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 134 is not executed. . When an “E1” error occurs, “E” is displayed on the digit 3 and “1” is displayed on the digit 4 by the unrecoverable error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) shown in FIG. Specifically, the process of displaying “E” on the digit 3 and the process of displaying “1” on the digit 4 are repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals.
Further, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is temporarily turned off. Then, the setting key switch 12 is turned on by inserting the setting key and rotating it 90 degrees clockwise. In this state, the power switch 11 is turned on again. As a result, in a setting change process (M_RANK_SET) described later, a predetermined range of the RWM 53 is cleared and the “E1” error is released.

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET).
First, in step S <b> 2121, “predetermined range” is stored in a register as an initialization range within the usage area of RWM 53 (“F000 (H)” to “F1FF (H)” in FIG. 124). Here, the “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been normally executed, and at least the setting value data (address “F000 (H)”) is not initialized. Let the range be a “predetermined range”.
In addition to the set value data, an initialization range in which the gaming state (for example, the RT state) and all or some of the winning flags are not initialized may be set as the “predetermined range”.

Next, proceeding to step S2122, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data is a normal value. If it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2124, and the “predetermined range” stored in step S2121 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2122 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2123.
In step S <b> 2123, the main control board 50 stores “specific range” in the register as an initialization range in the usage area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power interruption is not normal, and the entire range within the use area including the set value data (address “F000 (H)”) is set as the initialization range. Set.

  In step S2124, initialization of the predetermined range set in step S2121 or the specific range set in step S2123 (in the use area of the RWM 53) is started. In the next step S2125, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S2124 has ended. If it is determined that the initialization is complete, the process advances to step S2126.

  In step S2126, the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved. The reason for saving the AF register is that the F (flag) register is originally saved here, but the AF register is saved for convenience of instructions. Then, the process proceeds to step S2127, and a predetermined range is stored as an initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53 (in FIG. 124, "F200 (H)" and thereafter). Here, the “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been normally executed. For example, after the address “F28E (H)” or after “F293 (H)” (initialization) The range is different depending on the specification etc.).

  In the next step S2128, as in step S2122, it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data is a normal value. If it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2130, and the “predetermined range” stored in step S2127 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2128 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2129.

In step S <b> 2129, the main control board 50 stores “specific range” in the register as an initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power interruption is not normal, and the entire range outside the use area after the address “F200” is set as the initialization range. Therefore, in this case, the ring buffer and the like are initialized.
In step S2130, initialization of the predetermined range set in step S2127 or the specific range set in step S2129 (outside the use area of the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S2131, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S2130 has ended. If it is determined that the initialization is complete, the process advances to step S2132.
In step S2132, the AF register saved in step S2126 is restored. In the next step S2133, activation setting for interrupt processing is performed. In the present embodiment, timer interrupt processing is used as interrupt processing, and therefore processing for setting a timer interrupt cycle (in this embodiment, “2.235 ms”) corresponds. Then, the interrupt process is executed after the process of step S2133. In other words, the interrupt process is not executed before “interrupt activation”.

In the next step S2134, an output request set at the start of setting change is performed. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in a register in order to notify the sub control board 80 that the setting change process is started.
The “output request set” is also executed in the process described below. Similar to step S2134, the “output request set” is a process for setting a control command for transmission to the sub control board 80 in the register. means. The control command here does not mean only a command that is actually transmitted, but also a command that is a source of a command that is actually transmitted.
In step S2135, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing a control command (control command set in the register) to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

  In step S2136, the main control board 50 stores the standby time in a BC register (a pair register including a B register and a C register each capable of storing 8-bit data (1 byte data)). In the present embodiment, the interrupt processing count “224” (about 500 ms) is set as the waiting time at the start of setting change. In step S2137, a 2-byte time waiting process (wait process) for starting the setting change is executed. In this embodiment, the process waits until the interrupt processing count “224” is counted (“1” is subtracted every time interrupt processing is performed and the set interrupt processing count becomes “0”). During this waiting time (during the 2-byte waiting process), the setting change process does not proceed, but the interrupt process is executed.

  As described above, the reason for executing the 2-byte time waiting process (wait process) in step S2137 on the main control board 50 side is that the initialization process of the RWM 83 on the sub control board 80 side takes time. In particular, the main control board 50 cannot know whether or not the initialization process has been completed on the sub-control board 80 side.

Accordingly, when the initialization process is still in progress on the sub control board 80 side, the process proceeds on the main control board 50 side, and the progress of the control process of the main control board 50 and the progress of the control process of the sub control board 80 are progressed. It is possible to prevent the synchronization from being lost.
That is, since the sub control board 80 starts initialization of the RWM 83 after execution of the output request set and the control command set 1 at the start of setting change, a sufficient time is set as the wait time for completing the initialization of the RWM 83. There is a need to. Thus, after the initialization process of the RWM 83 is completed on the sub control board 80 side, the process can proceed to the processes after step S4001 on the main control board 50 side.

  Note that the control command at the start of setting change set in steps S2134 and S2135 can execute interrupt processing even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S2137. It is transmitted to the control board 80. However, while the 2-byte time waiting process is being executed in step S2137, the process after step S4001 does not proceed (the setting change process does not proceed).

After the completion of the 2-byte time waiting process in step S2137, the process proceeds to step S4001, and “88” (binary number “01011000 (B)”) indicating that the setting is being changed is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Remember.
In step S4002, “11100000 (B)” corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).

When interrupt processing is executed after this processing by the processing in step S4002, the digits 3 to 5 (the acquired number display LED 78 and the set value display LED 73) can be turned on.
Specifically, in the interrupt process executed after the process of step S4002, “8” can be displayed on the digits 3 and 4 (“88” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78), and the digit 5 (set value display) can be displayed. The current set value can be displayed on the LED 73).
Since the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) and the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) are initialized by the initialization process in the use area of the RWM 53 in step S2124, the values before step S4001 are “ 0 ".

In step S2139, an interrupt wait process is executed. This process is a process of waiting until the interrupt process is executed (2.235 ms elapses). The reason why this process is provided will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S2140.
In step S2140, it is determined whether an operation of setting switch 13 has been detected. Here, it is determined whether or not the setting switch 13 is turned on by determining rising data of the input port including the setting switch 13. If it is determined that the operation of the setting switch 13 has been detected, the process proceeds to step S2141. If it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S2142.

In step S2141, the set value (set value data) is updated. Specifically, the value of the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK) is updated. When the interrupt process is executed after the set value is updated, the set value after update is displayed on the set value display LED 73.
As described above, when the set value is “N”, the set value data “N−1” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
For this reason, when the set value data “N−1” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK), “N” obtained by adding “1” to the set value data “N−1” is set as the set value. It is displayed on the digit 5 (set value display LED 73).

In the next step S2142, it is determined whether or not an operation of the start switch 41 is detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2143. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2139.

In the above processing, step S2139 (interrupt wait processing) is provided to clear the rising data of the setting switch 13.
For example, when the processing of step S2139 is not provided, if it is determined in step S2140 that the rising data of the setting switch 13 is on, the setting value is updated in step S2141 and the start switch 41 is not on in the next step S2142. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S2140, and it is determined whether or not the rising data of the setting switch 13 is ON.

  If it is determined in step S2140 that the switch is turned on, the rising data of the setting switch 13 is turned off if interrupt processing is executed even once. However, until the interrupt process is executed, it is determined in step S2140 that the rising data of the setting switch 13 is ON. As a result, the set value continues to increase by 2 or more just by operating the setting switch 13 once. Therefore, in step S2139, an interrupt waiting process is executed.

In step S2143, it is determined whether setting key switch 12 has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch 12 is turned off, the process advances to step S4003 to clear the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) (set the value to “0”).
In step S4004, “01111111 (B)” corresponding to the normal state is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).

Due to the interrupt process executed after the process of step S4003, the display of the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78) is changed from “88” to “00”.
In addition, “0” is displayed on the digits 1 and 2 respectively (“00” is displayed on the storage number display LED 76) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S4004. Thereby, the display of the digits 1 to 4 (the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78) becomes “0000”. The digit 5 (set value display LED 73) is turned off.
The digits 1 to 4 (the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78) may be turned off.

Next, proceeding to step S2145, as in step S2134, an output request set at the end of setting change is performed. This process is a process of ending the setting change process and setting a control command for informing the determined setting value to the sub-control board 80 side.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2146, and the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 as in step S2135. Then, the process proceeds to step S2147 to shift to a main process (M_MAIN).

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) processing.
In step S2171, the stack pointer is set. The stack pointer refers to an area of the RWM 53 that stores data (for example, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) at the time of power failure when a power failure occurs. Is a process of setting a register value to an initial value in the RWM 53 area.

In the next step S2172, game start set processing is performed. This process is a process such as generation, update, and storage of an operation state flag.
In the next step S4011, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared (value is set to “0”). For example, it is assumed that the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) displays the number of medals paid out in the previous game (the number of players acquired). In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes “00” by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S4011.

In the next step S2173, a bet medal is read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are bet at the present time.
In the next step S2174, the presence / absence of a bet medal is determined based on the bet number read in step S2173.
If it is determined in step S2174 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S2176. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S2175 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and then proceeds to step S2176. In the medal insertion waiting process in step S2175, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 12 is turned on. If it is turned on, a process such as shifting to a setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode) is performed.

In step S2176, a management process for inserted medals is performed. This processing is processing for determining whether or not a medal has been maintained, determining whether or not the settlement switch 46 has been operated, and the like.
In the next step S2177, a soft random number update process is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding “1” by one) a processing random number (soft random number) for processing (calculation processing) into a built-in random number (hard random number) used in the role lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of 0 to 65535. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt process) to the value before the update may be executed.

  In the next step S2178, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2179. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2173. Even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number for the game, “No” is determined in step S2178.

In step S2179, processing at the time of accepting the start switch is executed. This process is a process for setting a setting change impossibility flag, setting an output request when starting reel rotation, setting the number of outputs of a medal insertion signal, and the like.
In step S2180, the winning combination lottery means 61 executes the winning combination lottery at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. Note that the random number value (hard random number value) at the time of lottery is acquired in step S2179. In step S2180, the random number value of the processing random number is added to the acquired random number value, and whether the random number value after the addition is a random value corresponding to any winning combination is determined using the role lottery table. To determine.

In the next step S4012, a push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) is executed.
This process stores the push order instruction number in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the RWM 53 when the game has an advantageous push order in the designated game section (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group). It is processing to be equal.
When the processing proceeds to step S4012, the processing proceeds to the processing in FIG. Although details will be described later, in a game having an advantageous push order, push order indication information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by an interrupt process executed after this process. Is done.

In the next step S2181, a reel rotation start preparation process is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed.
Next, proceeding to step S2182, the reel control means 65 starts rotating the reel 31. In the next step S2183, the stop acceptance of the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 has been received, and when the operation signal is received, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the lottery result of the combination and the position of the reel 31, The reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

In the next step S2184, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S2185.
In step S2185, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 are stopped. If it is determined that all the reels 31 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S4013. If it is determined that all the reels 31 are not stopped, the process returns to step S2183. .

In step S4013, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared (value is set to “0”). For example, it is assumed that the game has an advantageous push order in the designated game section, and push order instruction information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4). In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes “00” by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S4013.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, “00011111 (B)” may be stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP), or “OFF” display data (00000000B) is provided instead of “0” display data. Also good.

In step S2186, symbol display determination (winning determination) is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the active line.
In the next step S2187, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. When it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1), and a display error has not occurred. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S4014.
Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is executed based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 does not normally stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, if a symbol that should not be displayed (a kicked symbol) is displayed on the active line, it is determined that there is an abnormality ("E5" error), and the return shown in FIG. Execute impossible error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1).

If it is determined in step S2187 that no display error has occurred and the process proceeds to step S4014, a medal payout number update process is executed. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the next step S4015, the payout means 67 executes a medal payout process by winning. This process is a process of paying out medals corresponding to a winning combination (small role). When the number of stored sheets is less than “50”, the number of stored sheets is added until the number of stored sheets reaches “50”. This is a process for controlling to drive the hopper motor 36 and pay out medals from the hopper 35 to the player when the number of stored sheets becomes “50” or more. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S2190, an interrupt wait process is performed. This process is the same as step S2139 in FIG.
In the next step S2191, interrupt processing is prohibited. By the processes in steps S2190 and S2191, the interrupt process is prohibited immediately after the interrupt process.
In the next step S2192, the AF register is saved. This process is the same as step S2126 in FIG.

Next, proceeding to step S2193, a ratio setting process is executed. This ratio setting process is a process executed outside the use area.
In the ratio setting process, the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) has an advantageous section ratio, a continuous feature ratio (6000 times), an accessory ratio (6000 times), a continuous feature ratio (cumulative), and an accessory ratio. In order to display (cumulative), various counter value update processing, ratio calculation processing, and the like are executed.

  In step S2194, the AF register saved in step S2192 is restored, and interrupt is permitted (resumed) in the next step S2195. In this way, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited. Note that interrupt processing is prohibited during the execution of ratio setting processing. If interrupt processing is entered when a program outside the use area is executed in the main process, the program in the use area and the program outside the use area are mixed. This is because the processing becomes complicated.

Next, proceeding to step S2196, a game end check process is performed. In this process, a condition device flag (a winning combination flag, a winning flag) is cleared. In step S2197, an output request set at the end of the game and a control command set 1 are performed in the next step S2198. These processes are processes similar to steps S2134 and S2135 in FIG. 185, and are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has been completed.
When the process of step S2198 is completed, the process returns to the main process (step S2147) again.

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S4012 of FIG. 186.
In step S4021, it is determined whether or not the designated game segment (AT).
Here, when it is determined that it is the designated game section, the process proceeds to the next step S4022.
On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the designated game section, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. In this case, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4011 of FIG. 186, and step S4026 is skipped, so the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) remains “0”. Therefore, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) remains “00”.

In step S4022, the condition device number is set. The condition device number determined in the winning lottery process in step S2180 in FIG. 186 is stored in the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) and the accessory condition apparatus number storage area (_NB_CND_BNS) of the RWM 53. In step S4022, the value of the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) is stored in the A register.
In step S4023, a push order instruction number table is set. In step S4023, the head address “1900 (H)” of the push order instruction number table shown in FIG. 184 is stored in the HL register. As a result, the HL register value becomes “1900 (H)”. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S4024.

In step S4024, designated address data is set. In step S4024, a value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) is used as an offset value, and data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the head address of the push order instruction number table is acquired.

For example, when the small combination B1 is won in the combination lottery process in step S2180 of FIG. 186, the condition device number “11” of the small combination B1 is stored in the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR). For this reason, after the process of step S4022, the A register value becomes “11”.
Further, the A register value “11” is added to the HL register value “1900 (H)” after the processing in step S4023 to obtain a new HL register value “190B (H)”. In this way, it is possible to calculate the address of the storage area of the push order instruction number of the small role B1.
Then, the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” corresponding to the address “190B (H)” in the push order instruction number table is stored in the A register. As a result, the A register value after the process of step S4024 becomes “A1 (H)”.

In step S4025, the push order instruction number is stored in the RWM 53. That is, the A register value is stored in the storage area of the push order instruction number in the RWM 53.
In this way, by performing the calculation process using the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) as an offset value, the push order instruction number corresponding to the condition device number is calculated and stored in the RWM 53. be able to.

In the next step S4026, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
When a push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) in step S4026 of FIG. 187, a push order instruction is given to the obtained number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by an interrupt process executed after this process. Information is displayed.
For example, it is assumed that “A2 (H)” is stored as the push order instruction number in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). In this case, “10” is calculated as the upper digit offset value and “2” is calculated as the lower digit offset value from the push order instruction number “A2 (H)” by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. To do.

Then, by reading the address obtained by adding the upper digit offset value “10” to the head address “1817 (H)” of the LED segment table 2, that is, the data of “1821 (H)”, “=” is added to the digit 3. indicate.
Similarly, by reading the address obtained by adding the lower digit offset value “2” to the start address “1817 (H)” of the LED segment table 2, that is, the data of “1819 (H)”, “2” is input to the digit 4. Is displayed.
In this way, the push order indication information “= 2” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the medal payout number update process in step S4014 of FIG. 186.
First, in step S4031, medal payout number data is acquired. Since the winning combination (combination of symbols) can be specified based on the display determination (winning determination) in step S2186 in FIG. 186, the medal payout number corresponding to the combination of symbols is read from the data table or the like.

In the next step S4032, the medal payout number data acquired in step S4031 is stored (stored) in the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53.
Since the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is “0” at the time of processing in step S4031, processing for newly writing data is executed. For example, when a single winning combination is won, the data value is updated from “0” to “1”.
It should be noted that whether or not the process of step S4031 is performed is optional when a combination having a medal payout is not won. For example, there are a method of skipping step S4031 and a method of executing the process of step S4031 and writing a data value “0”.

In the next step S4033, the medal payout number data acquired in step S4031 is stored (stored) in the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53.
Since the value written in the previous game remains in the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL), the medal payout number data in the game (“0” if no medal payout is present) is written (overwritten) Execute.
And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In the medal payout number update process of FIG. 188 described above, the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) stored in step S4032 is decremented by “1” each time one medal payout is performed, and the medal payout is made. It is “0” at the end.
On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) stored in step S4033 is maintained (changed) until it is updated in the next game, that is, until the process in step S4033 is performed in the next game. Absent).

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S4015 of FIG.
First, in step S4041, medal payout number data is acquired. This process is a process of storing the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53 in the A register. Thereby, the medal payout number data is stored in the A register.

  In step S4042, it is determined whether or not a medal has been paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (A register value) of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0”, that is, when it is determined that no medal has been paid out, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, that is, when it is determined that a medal has been paid out, the process proceeds to step S4043.

In step S4043, the number of stored sheets is read. Specifically, the value of the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) of the RWM 53 is acquired.
Next, proceeding to step S4044, it is determined whether or not the medal storage number is a limit value. Specifically, when the stored number data acquired in step S4043 is “50”, it is determined that the stored number is a limit value, and the process proceeds to step S4083, where the acquired stored number data is less than “50”. If there is, it is determined that the stored number is not at the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S4045.

In step S4045, a standby time for adding a stored medal is set. In the present embodiment, in order to set about 100 ms as the wait time, the interrupt processing count “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 100 ms) is set. For this reason, “00000000 (B)” is set as the B register value, and “00101110 (B)” is set as the C register value.
In step S4046, a 2-byte time waiting process is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt process and waiting until it becomes “0”.

When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S4046 is completed, the process proceeds to step S4047 to execute a process for adding one stored number. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) of the RWM 53. Then, the display of digits 1 and 2 (reserved number display LED 76) is “+1” by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S4047. For example, the display of the storage number display LED 76 changes from “08” to “09”.
When the process of step S4047 is completed, the process proceeds to step S4049.

  When the process proceeds from step S4044 to step S4048, a single medal payout process (a process of paying out an actual medal from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. By the above processing, the number of stored sheets is added until the stored number reaches the limit value, and when the stored number is the limit, processing for paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 is executed.

  In step S4049, “1” is added to the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the RWM 53. By the interrupt process executed after the process of step S4049, the display of the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78) is “+1”. For example, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is changed from “02” to “03”.

In the next step S4050, “1” is subtracted from the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53.
In step S4050, only the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is updated, and the value of the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) is not updated.

  In step S4051, it is determined whether or not the medal payout has been completed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the value of the updated medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is “0”, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and when the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is determined not to be “0” Returns to step S4043.

In the above payout processing, when paying out by adding one stored number, a waiting time of about 100 ms is set by the processing in steps S4045 and S4046. Thereby, it can be shown to a player so that the display of storage number display LED76 may count up. For example, when the display of the storage number display LED 76 before storage addition is “08” and 8 medals are stored and added to this, “display“ 08 ”→ 100 ms wait processing → display“ 09 ”→ 100 ms Wait process →... → 100 ms wait process → display “16”. On the other hand, if no standby time is provided when adding one stored number, it will appear as if the display “08” is instantaneously changed to “16”.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of stored sheets, a payout sound ("Plululu ...") output from the sub-control board 80 side is executed by executing a 2-byte waiting process for each addition. ) And the counting up of the number of stored sheets can be synchronized.

On the other hand, when the stored number exceeds the maximum number “50” and the medals are actually paid out in the process of step S4048, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S4046 and S4047 is not provided.
This is because, in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out, and it takes about 100 ms to pay out one piece of medal. As a result, the payout time per medal is about 100 ms, so when waiting for an actual medal, a 2-byte time waiting process is not provided. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize with the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 190 (1) is a diagram illustrating a state in which “88” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 during the setting change (7 segments A to G included in the digits 3 and 4 are respectively lit). is there.
As described above, in step S4001 of the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in FIG. 185, “88 (D)” (in binary notation) indicating that the setting is being changed in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the RWM 53. 01011000 (B) ") is stored, and in the next step S4002," 11100000 (B) "corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) of the RWM 53. Then, “88” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the interrupt processing executed after this processing.

Here, when “88 (D)” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), in step S1447 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 134, “88 (D)” is acquired from the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). D) "is acquired and stored in the A register.
Further, in step S1450 of FIG. 134, an operation of dividing the A register value “88 (D)” by “10 (D)” is executed, and the quotient “8 (D)” is stored in the A register as the upper digit offset value. The remainder “8 (D)” is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

  Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, in step S1455 of FIG. 134, the upper digit offset value “8 (D)” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 2 of FIG. By adding, “8” display data (address “181F (H)” in FIG. 183) is acquired as segment output data. In step S 1458, “8” is displayed in the digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

  In the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, in the same manner as the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, in step S1455 of FIG. 134, the LED of FIG. By adding the lower digit offset value “8 (D)” to the head address of the segment table 2, “8” display data is acquired as segment output data. In step S1458, “8” is displayed in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In this way, during the setting change, “88” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
The display of “88” continues until the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4003 of the setting change process in FIG. When the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) is changed from “88” to “00” by the interrupt processing executed after this processing.

FIG. 190 (2) is a diagram showing a state in which “= 1” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) as the push order instruction information in the instruction game section.
As described above, when the process proceeds to the push order instruction number set process (M_ORD_INF) in step S4012 in the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 186, when the game has an advantageous push order in the designated game section, The push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
When the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the push order instruction information is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by an interrupt process executed after this process. The

For example, it is assumed that the push order instruction number “A3 (H)” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). In this case, in step S1447 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 134, “A3 (H)” is acquired from the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) and stored in the A register.
Further, in step S1450 of FIG. 134, an operation of dividing the A register value “A3 (H)” by “10 (D)” is executed, and “A (H)” (“10 (D)” is used as the upper digit offset value. ")" Is acquired and stored in the A register, and "3 (H)"("3(D)") is acquired as the lower digit offset value and stored in the C register.

  Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, in step S1455 of FIG. 134, the upper digit offset value “10 (D)” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 2 of FIG. By adding, “=” display data (address “1821 (H)” in FIG. 183) is acquired as segment output data. In step S1458, “=”, which is a part of the push order instruction information, is displayed in the digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

  Further, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, in step S1455 of FIG. 134, the lower digit offset value “3 (D)” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 2 of FIG. By adding, “3” display data (address “181A (H)” in FIG. 183) is acquired as segment output data. In step S1458, “3”, which is another part of the pressing order instruction information, is displayed in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In this way, when the game has an advantageous push order in the designated game section, the push order designation information “= 3” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
The display of the pressing order instruction information “= 3” is continued until the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4013 of the main process in FIG. When the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) is changed from “= 3” to “00” by the interrupt processing executed after this processing. .

FIG. 190 (3) shows a state in which “dE” error (opening of the front door), which is one of recoverable errors, is detected and “dE” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4). FIG.
When the front door is opened, the door switch 15 is turned on. At this time, when it is detected in the input port reading process in step S1407 in the interrupt process of FIG. 133 that the door switch 15 is turned on, an error number “dE” is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) of the RWM 53. "35 (H)" corresponding to the error is stored (FIG. 181).

When “35 (H)” is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR), an interrupt process executed after this process causes the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) to indicate a dE error. dE "is displayed.
Here, when “35 (H)” is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR), in step S1439 of the LED display control in FIG. 134, the error number “35 (H)” is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR). Is acquired and stored in the B register.

In step S1448 of FIG. 134, the B register value is not “0”, so it is determined that an error is displayed (“Yes”). In the next step S1449, the B register value is set in the A register, and the LED is displayed. The start address of the segment table 1 is set in the HL register.
Further, in step S1450 of FIG. 134, an operation for dividing the A register value “35 (H)” (“53 (D)”) by “10 (D)” is executed, and the quotient “5 (D)” is higher. The digit offset value is stored in the A register, and the remainder “3 (D)” is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

  In the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, in step S1455 of FIG. 134, the upper digit offset value “5 (D)” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 1 of FIG. 183. By adding, “d” display data (address “1816 (H)” in FIG. 183) is acquired as segment output data. In step S1458, “d” is displayed in the digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

  Further, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, in step S1455 of FIG. 134, the lower digit offset value “3 (D)” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 1 of FIG. 183. By adding, “E” display data (address “1814 (H)” in FIG. 183) is acquired as segment output data. In step S1458, “E” is displayed in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In this way, when the “dE” error occurs, “dE” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Further, the display of “dE” is not solved by simply closing the front door and turning off the door switch 15, but continues until the error is cleared.
When the door key is inserted into the keyhole of the front door and rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, the reset switch 14 is turned on. At this time, if it is detected that the reset switch 14 is turned on by the input port reading process of step S1407 in the interrupt process of FIG. 133, the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) of the RWM 53 indicates that there is no error data. 00 (H) "is stored (FIG. 181).

Thereby, the error is canceled. Then, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) is returned from “dE” to the original display (for example, acquired number “09”) by the interrupt processing executed after this processing.
In this way, when a recoverable error occurs, it is possible to recover from the error by removing the cause of the error and operating the reset switch 14 without performing the on / off operation of the power switch 11. .
The “dE” error may be canceled by closing the front door and turning off the door switch 15.

FIG. 190 (4) shows an “E1” error (an error indicating that it is determined that the recovery from power failure is not normal), which is one of the unrecoverable errors, and “E1” is displayed as the acquired number display LED 78 (digit). It is a figure which shows the state currently displayed on 3 and 4).
In the program start process executed when the power switch 11 of the slot machine 10 is turned on, if it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, an “E1” error occurs and the non-recoverable error process shown in FIG. Go to 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1).

When the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error process 1, the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 133 is not executed, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 134 is not executed.
When an “E1” error occurs, “E” is displayed on the digit 3 and “1” is displayed on the digit 4 by the unrecoverable error processing 1.

If it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred, segment data for displaying the lower digit of the unrecoverable error that has occurred is stored in the L register before the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error process.
A segment for displaying the lower digit “1” of the “E1” error in the L register before proceeding to the unrecoverable error processing 1 when it is determined that an “E1” error has occurred in the program start processing Data “00000110 (B)” is stored.

In step S1491 in FIG. 136, digit data “01000000 (B)” for lighting digit 4 is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, in step S1492 of FIG. 136, digit data “00100000 (B)” for lighting digit 3 is stored in the D register, and the upper digit “E” of the “E1” error is displayed in the E register. Segment data “01111001 (B)” is stored.

136, the output port 2 outputs the data (digit signal) stored in the D register, and the output port 3 outputs the data (segment signal) stored in the E register. As a result, “E” is displayed in the digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).
In step S1501 of FIG. 136, the DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged. In step S1502, the data stored in the D register is output from the output port 2 in the same manner as in step S1497. 3 outputs the data stored in the E register. As a result, “1” is displayed in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

Thereafter, the process of displaying “E” on the digit 3 and the process of displaying “1” on the digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly executed until the return process is performed.
In this way, when an “E1” error occurs, “E1” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Further, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is temporarily turned off. Then, the setting key switch 12 is turned on by inserting the setting key and rotating it 90 degrees clockwise. In this state, the power switch 11 is turned on again. Accordingly, the predetermined range of the RWM 53 is cleared by the initialization process in the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in FIG. 185, and the return process is performed.

FIG. 190 (5) shows a state in which the stored number “50” is displayed on the stored number display LED 76 (digits 1 and 2) and the acquired number “09” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4). FIG.
When the number of stored medals is 50, stored number data “50” is stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) of the RWM 53.
Further, when the number of medals paid out (player acquired number) is 9, the acquired number data “9” is finally stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the RWM 53.

  Further, when the stored number data “50” is stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT), in step S1443 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 134, the stored number data “_NB_CREDIT” is stored in the stored number data storage area “_NB_CREDIT”. 50 "is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S1444, an operation of dividing the A register value “50” by “10” is executed, the quotient “5” is stored in the A register as an upper digit offset value, and the remainder “0” is the lower digit. Is stored in the C register as an offset value.

  In the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, the upper digit offset value “5” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 2 of FIG. 183 in step S1455 of FIG. Thus, “5” display data (address “181C (H)” in FIG. 183) is acquired as segment output data. In step S 1458, “5” is displayed in the digit 1 (the upper digit of the stored number display LED 76).

Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”, in step S1455 of FIG. 134, the lower digit offset value “0” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 2 of FIG. 183. Thus, “0” display data (address “1817 (H)” in FIG. 183) is acquired as segment output data. In step S1458, “0” is displayed in the digit 2 (the lower digit of the stored number display LED 76).
In this way, “50” is displayed on the storage number display LED 76.

  When the acquired number data “9” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), in step S1447 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 134, the acquired number data “_NB_PAYOUT” is acquired from the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). 9 "is acquired and stored in the A register. Further, in step S1450 of FIG. 134, an operation of dividing the A register value “9” by “10” is executed, and the quotient “0” is stored in the A register as an upper digit offset value, and the remainder “9” Is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

  Then, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, in step S1455 of FIG. 134, the upper digit offset value “0” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 2 of FIG. 183. Thus, “0” display data (address “1817 (H)” in FIG. 183) is acquired as segment output data. In step S1458, “0” is displayed in the digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

Further, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”, in step S1455 of FIG. 134, the lower digit offset value “9” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 2 of FIG. 183. Thus, “9” display data (address “1820 (H)” in FIG. 183) is acquired as segment output data. In step S1458, “9” is displayed in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).
In this way, “09” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is important information related to whether or not the medal is paid out.
However, if the segment of the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) is broken or if there is a failure in the signal line that transmits a signal to these segments, stop switch operation information that is advantageous to the player is acquired. It is not displayed correctly on the number display LED 78, which may cause a disadvantage to the player.

Here, it is assumed that a small role B5 is won in the designated game section. At this time, if none of the segments have failed and no failure has occurred in any of the signal lines that transmit signals to the segments, the acquisition number display LED 78 indicates “= 2” indicating the middle first stop. Should be displayed (FIGS. 19 and 20).
However, for example, it is assumed that the segment E of the digit 4 has failed or the signal line that transmits a signal to the segment E has failed. In this case, when the small role B5 is won in the designated game section, the digits 4 are in a state in which the segments A, B, D and G are turned on and the segments C, E and F are turned off. In this case, whether “= 2” indicating the middle first stop is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 or whether “= 3” indicating the first right stop is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, Cannot be distinguished.

  Then, the player who sees the digit 4 with the segments A, B, D, and G turned on and the segments C, E, and F turned off estimates that “3” is displayed on the digit 4, and the right Assume that the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of the first stop. In this case, the number of medals acquired by the player is 1 or 0 (FIG. 14), and if the “= 2” indicating the first stop is correctly displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, the player would have been able to acquire the medal. The player cannot obtain 9 medals.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, during the setting change, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the seven segments A to G of the digit 3 are turned on (the digit 3 is set to “8”). In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, the seven segments A to G of the digit 4 are turned on (“8” is displayed on the digit 4).

  Thus, by turning on the seven segments A to G of the digits 3 and 4 during the setting change, the digits 3 and 4 in which the push order instruction information is displayed in the instruction game section are not broken. In addition, it can be confirmed that there is no failure in the signal line for transmitting the segment signal to the digits 3 and 4.

  Further, during the setting change, for example, seven of the segments A to G of the digit 3 are lit, and among the seven segments of the digit 4, the six of the segments A and C to G are lit. When segment B is not lit, it can be determined that segment B of digit 4 has a possibility of failure.

  Furthermore, during the setting change, for example, the six segments A to E and G of the digit 3 are lit, but the segment F is not lit and the six segments A to E and G of the digit 4 are lit. Lights up, but when segment F does not light up, not only the segments F of digits 3 and 4 may have failed, but also the signal line that transmits the segment signal to segment F may have failed. It can be determined. In particular, since the setting change is performed by the hall clerk before the opening of the hall, the hall clerk can check whether there is a segment failure and a signal line failure before the opening of the hall. The player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  In the present embodiment, when an “dE” error occurs, “d” is displayed in the digit 3 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, and the LED display counter value is “01000000 ( In the interrupt processing at the time of “B)”, “E” is displayed on the digit 4.

Here, when "d" is displayed on the digit 3, the segments B, C, D, E, and G of the digit 3 are lit. As a result, it can be confirmed that these segments have not failed and that no failure has occurred in the signal lines that transmit segment signals to these segments.
When “E” is displayed on the digit 4, the segments A, D, E, F, and G of the digit 4 are lit. As a result, it can be confirmed that these segments have not failed and that no failure has occurred in the signal lines that transmit segment signals to these segments.

  Further, in digits 3 and 4, segment A to G signals are also used. Therefore, by confirming that the segments B, C, D, E, and G of the digit 3 are lit and that the segments A, D, E, F, and G of the digit 4 are lit, the segment A to G signals Of the lines, it can be confirmed that no trouble has occurred in the parts common to the digits 3 and 4.

Of the segment A to G signal lines, the portion common to the digits 3 and 4 is a branching portion where the signal line branches to the digit 3 and the digit 4 from the output port 3 (D0 to D7 output terminal of the IC 3). Means up to.
Further, of the segment A to G signal lines, a portion common to the digits 3 and 4 includes a harness and a connector for connecting the main control board 50 and the display board 75.
Therefore, it is displayed from the main control board 50 by confirming that the segments B, C, D, E, and G of the digit 3 are lit and that the segments A, D, E, F, and G of the digit 4 are lit. It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the harness and the connector for transmitting the digit signal and the segment signal to the board 75.

In particular, when the hall clerk opens the front door to replenish medals to the hopper 35, for example, before or during the opening of the hall, the door switch 15 is turned on and “dE” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Is displayed. Accordingly, since the store clerk of the hall can confirm whether there is a failure in the segment and whether there is a failure in the signal line before or during the opening of the hall, the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.
Also, during the setting confirmation, unlike the setting change, “88” is not displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, but if the front door is open, the door switch 15 remains on, and the acquisition number display LED 78. “DE” continues to be displayed. Thereby, the hall clerk can confirm the presence / absence of a segment failure and the presence / absence of a signal line failure, so that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  In addition, when the setting is confirmed, a “menu screen” which is one of the screens for the hall clerk is displayed on the image display device 23. On the menu screen, items such as “volume setting” and “setting change history”, “current volume”, “date and time of last setting change”, and the like are displayed. Then, by operating the cross key 24 to select the “setting change history” item and operating the menu button 25 in this state, the “setting change history screen” is displayed on the image display device 23. On the setting change history screen, “date and time of setting change” and “setting value after change” can be confirmed multiple times.

In this way, during the setting confirmation, the setting value can be confirmed while looking at the image display device 23 provided on the front side of the front door. Therefore, “dE” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 also provided on the front side of the front door. It is easy to check whether or not is displayed correctly.
However, in a situation where the player can visually recognize the image display device 23, it is not preferable to display the setting value on the image display device 23. Therefore, when the setting is confirmed, the image display device 23 is initially set to the setting value. A menu screen with no value displayed is displayed.
Note that, in a situation where the player can visually recognize the image display device 23, the store clerk in the hall may check the set value with the set value display LED 73 provided in the slot machine 10.

In addition, an illegal act of opening the front door without permission from a hall clerk may be performed for setting change or setting confirmation. Furthermore, in order to prevent the hall clerk from noticing that such a fraudulent act is being performed, a fraudulent act such as destroying the sub-control board 80 or cutting off the power supply to the sub-control board 80 may occur. Sometimes done.
If the sub-control board 80 is destroyed or the power supply to the sub-control board 80 is cut off, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 do not operate, and an error notification using these is performed. Disappear.

Here, if the sub control board 80 is destroyed or the power supply to the sub control board 80 is cut off, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 do not operate. Notification is not performed.
However, in this embodiment, since the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, even if the sub-control board 80 is destroyed or the power supply to the sub-control board 80 is cut off, a person who performs an illegal act Will be informed of the favorable push order.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the opening of the front door is detected, “dE” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Thereby, even if the sub control board 80 is destroyed or the power supply to the sub control board 80 is cut off, the hall clerk knows that the front door is opened.
When the acquired number display LED 78 is destroyed, “dE” is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but push order information is not displayed. This makes it impossible for a person who performs an illegal act to know an advantageous push order. For this reason, by displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the destruction of the acquisition number display LED 78 can be suppressed.
That is, by displaying both the error information and the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, even if the sub control board 80 is destroyed, the error information is displayed and the destruction of the acquisition number display LED 78 is suppressed. can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an “E1” error occurs, interrupt processing is not executed, but a digit signal is output from the output port 2 and a segment signal is output from the output port 3 so that “E” is displayed on the digit 3. And a process of outputting a digit signal from the output port 2 and outputting a segment signal from the output port 3 are alternately and repeatedly executed so that “1” is displayed in the digit 4.

Here, when “E” is displayed on the digit 3, the segments A, D, E, F, and G of the digit 3 are lit. As a result, it can be confirmed that these segments have not failed and that no failure has occurred in the signal lines that transmit segment signals to these segments.
When “1” is displayed on the digit 4, the segments B and C of the digit 4 are lit. As a result, it can be confirmed that these segments have not failed and that no failure has occurred in the signal lines that transmit segment signals to these segments.

Further, since the segment A to G signals are also used in the digits 3 and 4, the segments A, D, E, F, and G of the digit 3 are turned on, and the segments B and C of the digit 4 are turned on. By confirming this, it can be confirmed that no trouble has occurred in the segments A to G signal lines that are common to the digits 3 and 4.
That is, it can be confirmed that there is no failure in the harness and the connector for transmitting the digit signal and the segment signal from the main control board 50 to the display board 75.

In particular, when the power switch 11 is first turned on after shipment from the factory, it is determined in the program start process that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value. For this reason, when the power switch 11 is first turned on after shipment from the factory, an “E1” error always occurs, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) in FIG.
If an “E1” error occurs, turn off the power switch 11 and then turn the setting key 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 12. In this state, turn on the power switch 11 again. To. Accordingly, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET), the predetermined range of the RWM 53 is cleared, and the “E1” error is released.

As described above, when the power switch 11 is first turned on after shipment from the factory, “E1” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. When an operation for canceling the “E1” error is performed, the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) is performed, and “88” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
As a result, when the power switch 11 is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, the hall clerk can confirm the presence of a segment failure and the presence of a signal line failure, so that a player is not disadvantaged. be able to.
In particular, when transporting from a factory to a hall or installing in a hall, there is a possibility that a failure occurs in a harness and a connector for transmitting a digit signal and a segment signal. For this reason, when the power switch 11 is turned on for the first time, it is effective to confirm that “E1” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 in order to confirm that there is no failure in the harness and the connector. It is.

  In this embodiment, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, the upper digit of the stored number is displayed in the digit 1 and when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”. In the interrupt processing, the lower digit of the stored number is displayed in the digit 2. Further, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit of the acquired number is displayed in the digit 3, and in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, The lower digit of the acquired number is displayed in digit 4.

  Here, if it can be confirmed that the numerical value from “0” to “2” is displayed in the digit 1, the segments A to G of the digit 1 are not broken, and the segments A to G signals are transmitted to the digit 1. It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the transmission signal line. The same applies to the digits 2 to 4.

  In addition, since the segments A to G signals are also used in the digits 1 to 4, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 1 are lit, the digits 1 to It can be confirmed that there is no failure for the common part in FIG. That is, it can be confirmed that there is no failure in the harness and the connector for transmitting the digit signal and the segment signal from the main control board 50 to the display board 75.

Here, if the player inserts a medal from the medal insertion slot 43 in a state where the number of stored medal is 0, the first three medals are not stored (credited) but bet for the game (betting) The fourth and subsequent medals are stored.
For this reason, for example, when the player inserts five medals from the medal insertion slot 43 in a state where the number of stored medals is zero, two medals are stored, so the storage number display LED 76 (digit 1 And the display of 2) changes as “00” → “01” → “02”. Thereby, since the numerical value from “0” to “2” is sequentially displayed in the digit 2 (the lower digit of the stored number display LED 76), the player confirms this, thereby the segments A to G of the digit 2 are displayed. Can be confirmed that there is no failure, and that no failure has occurred in the signal lines that transmit the segment A to G signals to the digits 1 to 4.

  Also, in a hall where you can borrow 50 medals for 1,000 yen, if a player borrows 50 medals and inserts them all through the medal slot 43 at the start of the game, the number of stored medals will be 47 . At this time, numerical values from “00” to “47” are sequentially displayed on the storage number display LED 76, and when the player confirms this, the segments A to G of the digits 1 and 2 have failed. It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the signal lines that transmit the segment A to G signals to the digits 1 to 4.

<Twenty-seventh embodiment>
In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the digit 5 is not provided. Then, in the situation where the number of acquired medals is displayed, the number obtained is displayed in digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78), and in the situation where push order instruction information is displayed, the push order instruction information is displayed in digits 3 and 4. When the setting value can be changed, the setting value is displayed in the digit 4.
In the twenty-seventh embodiment, as in the twenty-sixth embodiment, when the “dE” error occurs, “dE” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and when the “E1” error occurs, “E1” is displayed on the acquired number display LED. Is displayed.

Here, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the digits 1 to 4 and the circuit configuration for lighting them are the same as those in the twenty-first embodiment.
In other words, as shown in FIG. 138, the output port 3 outputs digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 signals, and the output port 4 outputs segment A to G signals. In addition, the segment A to G signals are shared by the digits 1 to 4.

Further, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00000001 (B)”, the digit 1 can be turned on, and when the LED display counter value is “00000010 (B)”. In the interrupt processing, digit 2 can be turned on. In addition, digit 3 can be lit in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00000100 (B)”, and digit 4 can be lit in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”. It becomes.
In this way, the digit to be lit is sequentially switched for each interrupt process. That is, dynamic lighting is executed.

FIG. 191 is a diagram illustrating addresses, labels, and contents of data stored in the RWM 53 in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 181 in the twenty-sixth embodiment.
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the setting change display data (“88”) is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) during the setting change. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, instead of the setting change display data. , The set value display data (any value of “1” to “6”) is stored.
Further, storing the LED display request flag in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) is the same in the twenty-sixth embodiment and the twenty-seventh embodiment, but the value of the LED display request flag is the same as in the twenty-sixth embodiment. And the twenty-seventh embodiment.
Other than the above, the configuration is the same as FIG. 181 of the 26th embodiment.

FIG. 192 is a diagram illustrating a relationship among the setting value data, the setting value display data, and the setting value display.
As described above, the set value data is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
The set value display data is data obtained by adding “1” to the set value data, and is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) during the setting change.
When the set value is “N”, the set value data “N−1” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK). At this time, when the setting is changed, the acquired number data storage area is stored. The set value display data “N” is stored in (_NB_PAYOUT), and the set value “N” is displayed in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing a setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 185 in the twenty-sixth embodiment.
In the flowchart described below, steps that execute the same processing as in the twenty-sixth embodiment are given the same step numbers, and redundant descriptions are omitted. Further, steps having contents different from those of the twenty-sixth embodiment are underlined with step numbers.

Step S4101 is a step corresponding to step S4001 in FIG. 185. Here, setting value display data is generated and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
The next step S4102 is a step corresponding to step S4002 in FIG. 185, and here, “00001100 (B)” corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).
By the processing in step S4102, the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78) can be turned on. Then, the current set value is displayed in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S4102.

In step S4103, as in step S4101 described above, set value display data is generated and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Note that the step corresponding to step S4103 is not provided in FIG.
The next step S4104 is a step corresponding to step S4004 in FIG. 185. Here, “11111111 (B)” corresponding to the normal state is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).
And the display of the digits 1-4 (the storage number display LED76 and the acquisition number display LED78) becomes "0000" by the interruption process performed after the process of step S4104. The storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off.
Other than the above, the flowchart is the same as the flowchart of FIG. 185 of the 26th embodiment.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the set value display data set processing in steps S4101 and S4103 of FIG. 193.
First, in step S4111, set value data is acquired from the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK), and in the next step S4112, "1" is added to the set value data to generate set value display data. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S4413.
In step S4113, the set value display data is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 195 (1) is a diagram illustrating a state in which setting values “1” to “6” are displayed in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) during the setting change.
As described above, in step S4101 of the setting change process of FIG. 193, set value display data is generated and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). In the next step S4102, the LED display request flag storage area ( _FL_LED_DSP) stores the LED display request flag “00001100 (B)” corresponding to the setting change. Then, the set value is displayed in the digit 4 by an interrupt process executed after this process.

  Here, it is assumed that, for example, “6” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as set value display data. In this case, in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 134, in step S1447, the set value display data “6” is acquired from the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) and stored in the A register. In step S1450, an operation of dividing the set value display data “6” stored in the A register by “10” is executed, and the quotient “0” is stored in the A register as an upper digit offset value, and the remainder “6” is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

  Further, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, the lower digit offset value “6” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 2 of FIG. 183 in step S1455 of FIG. Thus, “6” display data (address “181D (H)” in FIG. 183) is acquired as segment output data. In step S 1458, “6” is displayed in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

  If the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140 in FIG. 193, the process proceeds to step S2141 where the setting value data in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) is updated. In the next step S4103, the setting value data is updated. Value display data is generated and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Then, the updated set value is displayed in the digit 4 by the interrupt process executed after this process.

Further, when the process proceeds to step S2140 in FIG. 193, the processes in steps S2140 to S4103 are repeated until the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2142. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 195 (1), the display of the digit 4 is switched from “1” → “2” →... → “5” → “6” → “1” →.
In this way, the setting value is displayed in the digit 4 while the setting is being changed.
The display of the set value is continued until the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4003 of the setting change process in FIG. Then, when the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared, the display of the digit 4 is changed from the set value (any one of “1” to “6”) by the interrupt processing executed after this processing. It becomes “0”.

FIG. 195 (2) is a diagram showing a state in which push order instruction information “= 1” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 in the instruction game section. The process for displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is the same as that in FIG. 190 (2).
FIG. 195 (3) is a diagram showing a state where the acquired number “09” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The process for displaying the acquired number on the acquired number display LED 78 is the same as in FIG. 190 (5).

As described above, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, during the setting change, the set value is displayed in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”. To do.
While the setting is being changed, every time the setting switch 13 is operated, the display (setting value) of the digit 4 is changed from “1” → “2” →... → “5” → “6” → “1”. → Switch to ...

Here, if it can be confirmed that, for example, a numerical value from “2” to “4” is displayed in the digit 4, the segments A to G of the digit 4 are not in failure, and the segment A to G signals are transmitted to the digit 4. It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the signal line for transmitting.
In addition, since the segments A to G signals are also used in the digits 3 and 4, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 4 are lit, the digits 3 and 4 of the segment A to G signal lines It can be confirmed that there is no failure for the common part in FIG. That is, it can be confirmed that there is no failure in the harness and the connector for transmitting the digit signal and the segment signal from the main control board 50 to the display board 75. In particular, since it can be confirmed when the hall clerk changes the set value before the hall starts business, there is no disadvantage to the player.

<Modification of 26th and 27th Embodiments>
Although the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, when the game has an advantageous pushing order in the designated gaming section, the order of pushing the digit 3 in the interruption process when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”. “=” Which is a part of the instruction information is displayed, and the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”. “3” was displayed. However, it is not limited to this.

(2) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, when the game has an advantageous pushing order in the designated game section, an interrupt process is performed when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”. The pressing order instruction information “1” to “3” may be displayed.
For digit 4, “0” or “=” may be displayed in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, or not displayed (segments A to G are turned off) ).

(3) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 3, the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)” during the setting change. In interrupt processing, “8” may be displayed on the digit 3 (segments A to G are lit).
Thereby, it can be confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 3 are not broken down and that no failure has occurred in the signal line for transmitting the segment A to G signals to the digit 3.

(4) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 3, the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)” during the setting change. In interrupt processing, “8” may be displayed on the digit 4 (segments A to G are lit).
Thereby, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 4 are lit, it is possible to confirm that no failure has occurred in the common portions of the digits 3 and 4 among the segment A to G signal lines.

(5) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 3, a numerical value from “0” to “2” may be displayed on the digit 3. .
Even in this way, it can be confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 3 are not broken down and that no failure has occurred in the signal line for transmitting the segment A to G signals to the digit 3.

(6) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 3, the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B) when a“ dE ”error occurs. “D” may be displayed in the digit 3 in the interrupt processing at “”, and “E” may be displayed in the digit 4 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”.
Thus, by confirming that the segments B, C, D, E, and G of the digit 3 are lit and that the segments A, D, E, F, and G of the digit 4 are lit, the segment A to G signals Of the lines, it can be confirmed that no trouble has occurred in the parts common to the digits 3 and 4.

(7) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 3, the “E” is displayed on the digit 3 when the “E1” error occurs. And the process of displaying “1” in the digit 4 may be alternately repeated.
Accordingly, by confirming that the segments A, D, E, F, and G of the digit 3 are lit and that the segments B and C of the digit 4 are lit, the digit 3 of the segment A to G signal lines is displayed. 4 and 4 can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in the common part.

(8) Even when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 3 in the circuit configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)” The upper digit of the stored number is displayed on the digit 1, and the lower digit of the stored number is displayed on the digit 2 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”. Further, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit of the acquired number is displayed in the digit 3, and in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, The lower digit of the acquired number is displayed in digit 4.
As a result, by confirming that the segments A to G are lit for the digits 1 to 4, it is confirmed that no trouble has occurred in the common portions of the digits 1 to 4 among the segment A to G signal lines. it can.

  (9) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, when the game has an advantageous pushing order in the designated game section, an interrupt process is performed when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”. "0" is displayed on the display or digit 3 is not displayed (segments A to G are turned off), and when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", the digit 4 is pushed to the digit indication sequence information " “1” to “3” may be displayed.

(10) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 4, the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)” during the setting change. In interrupt processing, “8” may be displayed on the digit 4 (segments A to G are lit).
Thereby, it can be confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 4 have not failed and that no failure has occurred in the signal line for transmitting the segment A to G signals to the digit 4.

(11) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 4, the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)” during the setting change. In interrupt processing, “8” may be displayed on the digit 3 (segments A to G are lit).
Thus, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 3 are lit, it is possible to confirm that no failure has occurred in the common portions of the digits 3 and 4 among the segment A to G signal lines.

(12) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 4, a numerical value from “0” to “2” may be displayed on the digit 4. .
Even in this case, it can be confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 4 are not faulty and that no failure has occurred in the signal line for transmitting the segment A to G signals to the digit 4.

(13) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 4, the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B) when a“ dE ”error occurs. “D” may be displayed in the digit 3 in the interrupt processing at “”, and “E” may be displayed in the digit 4 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”.
Thus, by confirming that the segments B, C, D, E, and G of the digit 3 are lit and that the segments A, D, E, F, and G of the digit 4 are lit, the segment A to G signals Of the lines, it can be confirmed that no trouble has occurred in the parts common to the digits 3 and 4.

(14) With the circuit configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 4, the process of displaying “E” on the digit 3 when the “E1” error occurs And the process of displaying “1” in the digit 4 may be alternately repeated.
Accordingly, by confirming that the segments A, D, E, F, and G of the digit 3 are lit and that the segments B and C of the digit 4 are lit, the digit 3 of the segment A to G signal lines is displayed. 4 and 4 can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in the common part.

(15) With the circuit configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 4, the interrupt processing is performed when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”. The upper digit of the stored number is displayed on the digit 1, and the lower digit of the stored number is displayed on the digit 2 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”. Further, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit of the acquired number is displayed in the digit 3, and in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, The lower digit of the acquired number is displayed in digit 4.
As a result, by confirming that the segments A to G are lit for the digits 1 to 4, it is confirmed that no trouble has occurred in the common portions of the digits 1 to 4 among the segment A to G signal lines. it can.

  (16) In the twenty-seventh embodiment, when the game has an advantageous push order in the designated game section, the push order to the digit 3 in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00000100 (B)” “=”, Which is a part of the instruction information, is displayed, and in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, “1” ˜ “3” was displayed. However, it is not limited to this.

(17) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-seventh embodiment, when a game having an advantageous pushing order is obtained in the designated game section, the digit 3 is obtained by an interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00000100 (B)”. The pressing order instruction information “1” to “3” may be displayed.
For digit 4, “0” or “=” may be displayed in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, or not displayed (segments A to G are turned off) ).

(18) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-seventh embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 3, the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)” during the setting change. The set value may be displayed on the digit 4 by interrupt processing.
While the setting is being changed, every time the setting switch 13 is operated, the display (setting value) of the digit 4 is changed from “1” → “2” →... → “5” → “6” → “1”. → Switch to ...

For example, if it can be confirmed that the numerical value from “2” to “4” is displayed in the digit 4, the segments A to G of the digit 4 are not faulty, and the segment A to G signals are sent to the digit 4. It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the transmission signal line.
In addition, since the segments A to G signals are also used in the digits 3 and 4, the digits 3 and 4 of the segment A to G signal lines are confirmed by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 4 are lit. It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the common part.

(19) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-seventh embodiment, when the game has an advantageous pushing order in the designated game section, an interrupt process is performed when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”. The pressing order instruction information “1” to “3” may be displayed.
For digit 3, “0” may be displayed in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00000100 (B)”, or may not be displayed (segments A to G are turned off). .

(20) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-seventh embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 4, the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)” during the setting change. The set value may be displayed on the digit 4 by interrupt processing.
While the setting is being changed, every time the setting switch 13 is operated, the display (setting value) of the digit 4 is changed from “1” → “2” →... → “5” → “6” → “1”. → Switch to ...
For example, if it can be confirmed that the numerical value from “2” to “4” is displayed in the digit 4, the segments A to G of the digit 4 are not faulty, and the segment A to G signals are sent to the digit 4. It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the transmission signal line.

  (21) In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the setting value is displayed in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) during the setting change. At this time, the digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78) is “0” may be displayed, “_” may be displayed (only the segment D is lit), or not displayed (segments A to G are turned off).

  (22) In the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments, as shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 184, there are three types of an advantageous push order: left first stop, middle first stop, and right first stop, There are four types of “A0 (H)” to “A3 (H)” as the push order instruction numbers, and four types “= 0” to “= 3” as the push order instruction information. However, it is not limited to this.

(23) As shown in FIG. 196, as an advantageous push order, in addition to the three choice push orders such as the first left stop, there are nine types including six choice push orders such as 123 (left middle right), Ten types of “A0 (H)” to “A9 (H)” may be provided as push order instruction numbers, and ten types of “= 0” to “= 9” may be provided as push order instruction information.
Even in this case, by storing the push order instruction number in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the push order indication information “= 0” to “= 9” is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4). can do.

(24) In FIG. 196, the push order instruction number corresponding to the first left stop is “A1 (H)” and the push order instruction information is “= 1”. For example, the push order corresponding to the left middle right The instruction number may be “A1 (H)” and the pressing order instruction information may be “= 1”.
Similarly, the push order instruction number corresponding to the first left stop may be “A7 (H)” and the push order instruction information may be “= 7”.
As described above, the relationship among the advantageous pressing order, the pressing order instruction number, and the pressing order instruction information can be set as appropriate.

Specifically, for example, the push order instruction numbers may be “1A (H)” to “9A (H)”, and “1” to “9” may be displayed on the digit 3 as push order instruction information. At this time, the digit 4 is not displayed (segments A to G are turned off). In this case, it is necessary to provide non-display data “00000000 (B)” instead of “=” display data.
Further, for example, the push order instruction numbers may be “A1 (H)” to “A9 (H)”, and “1” to “9” may be displayed on the digit 4 as push order instruction information. At this time, the digit 3 is not displayed (segments A to G are turned off). Also in this case, it is necessary to provide non-display data “00000000 (B)” instead of “=” display data.

  Furthermore, for example, the push order instruction numbers may be “1” to “9”, and “01” to “09” may be displayed as the push order instruction information in the digits 3 and 4. “10” to “90” may be displayed, and “10”, “20”, “30”... “80” or “90” may be displayed on the digits 3 and 4 as the pressing order instruction information. The order designation numbers are “1A (H)” to “9A (H)”, and the digits 3 and 4 are pushed to the order designation information as “1 =”, “2 =”, “3 =”... “8 =” Alternatively, “9 =” may be displayed.

  (25) In the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments, when there is no advantageous pushing order (pushing order designation number “A0 (H)”) in the designated game section, the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) Although the push order instruction information “= 0” is displayed, the acquisition number display LED 78 may be hidden (segments A to G are turned off) without displaying “= 0”.

(26) When the game has an advantageous push order in the designated game section, the push order instruction information is displayed on the digit 3 (the upper digit of the obtained number display LED 78), and the digit 4 (the obtained number display LED 78) Information (next operation instruction information) indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated next may be displayed in the lower digit).
Of course, contrary to the above, the next operation instruction information may be displayed on the digit 3 and the push order instruction information may be displayed on the digit 4.

Here, regarding the pressing order instruction information, “left middle right” is set to “1”, “left / right middle” is set to “2”, “middle left / right” is set to “3”, “middle right / left” is set to “4”, “Right middle left” is “5”, and “Right middle left” is “6”. In addition, “first left stop” is set to “7”, “middle first stop” is set to “8”, and “right first stop” is set to “9”.
Furthermore, regarding the next operation instruction information, “left” is set to “1”, “middle” is set to “2”, and “right” is set to “3”. Further, when there is no stop switch 42 to be operated next, the next operation instruction information is set to “0”.

In this case, when the advantageous push order is “middle left and right” and the stop switch 42 to be operated next is “middle”, “3” is displayed as the push order instruction information on the digit 3, and the next on the digit 4 “2” is displayed as the operation instruction information. At this time, “32” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
When the advantageous pressing order is “middle left and right” and the stop switch 42 to be operated next is “left”, “3” is displayed on the digit 3 as the pressing order instruction information, and the next operation on the digit 4 “1” is displayed as the instruction information. At this time, “31” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).

Furthermore, when the advantageous pushing order is “right first stop” and the stop switch 42 to be operated next is “right”, “9” is displayed on the digit 3 as pushing order instruction information, and the digit 4 “3” is displayed as the next operation instruction information. At this time, “93” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
Further, when the advantageous push order is “first stop right” and there is no stop switch 42 to be operated next, “9” is displayed as the push order instruction information on the digit 3 and the next operation instruction is displayed on the digit 4. “0” is displayed as information. At this time, “90” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
When there is no stop switch 42 to be operated next, the next operation instruction information may be “4” instead of “0”. Moreover, the digit in which the next operation instruction information is displayed may be hidden (segments A to G are turned off).

(27) In the designated game section, when the game has an advantageous pushing order, the condition device number may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (segments 3 and 4).
For example, in the designated game section, when winning the small role B2 of the condition device number “12”, the digit 3 (higher number of the acquired number display LED 78) in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)” In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) is displayed in the digit). ), “2” which is the lower digit of the condition device number “12” is displayed.

In addition, when the replay B3 with the condition device number “4” is won in the designated game section, “0” is displayed on the digit 3 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”. In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, the condition device number “3” is displayed on the digit 4.
As described above, when the condition device number is one digit, “0” may be displayed in the digit 3, but the digit 3 may be hidden (the segments A to G are turned off).

Furthermore, when the condition device number “0” is not selected in the designated game section, “0” may be displayed in digits 3 and 4 respectively, and both digits 3 and 4 are not displayed (segment A to G may be turned off.
Further, in the designated game section, when the condition device without an advantageous pushing order is obtained, such as Replay A (condition device number “1”) or small part F (condition device number “29”), the digit 3 and The condition device number may be displayed in 4, “0” may be displayed in digits 3 and 4, and both digits 3 and 4 may be hidden (segments A to G are turned off).

(28) When the game has an advantageous push order in the designated game section, the push order designation number is determined by the lighting or extinguishing pattern of the segments A to G included in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78). A numerical value corresponding to may be displayed in binary.
In this case, the push order instruction numbers are not “A1 (H)” to “A9 (H)” but “1” to “9”.
It should be noted that the numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number may be displayed in binary notation by the pattern of lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G included in the digit 3 instead of the digit 4.

FIG. 197 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between segments A to G and bits 0 to 6.
As shown in FIG. 197, segment A corresponds to bit 0 and segment B corresponds to bit 1. Similarly, segments C to G correspond to bits 2 to 6, respectively.
When the numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number is expressed in binary, if bit 0 is “0”, segment 4 of digit 4 is turned off, and if bit 0 is “1”, digit 4 The segment A is turned on. The same applies to the segments B to G.

FIG. 198 is a diagram showing the relationship among the push order instruction number, display data, digit display, and advantageous push order.
As shown in FIG. 198, when the push order instruction number “1 (D)” is expressed in binary, it is “00000001 (B)”, which is used as display data (segment output data) of the segments A to G of the digit 4 If used, the segment A of the digit 4 can be turned on and the segments B to G can be turned off.
In this way, the push order instruction number is represented by a binary number, and this can be displayed in the pattern of lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G included in the digit 4. In this case, LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2) are not used. The same applies to the pressing order instruction numbers “2 (D)” to “9 (D)”.

For example, suppose that a small role B12 is won in the designated game section. The advantageous pushing order corresponding to the small role B12 is “first stop right”, and the pushing order designation number is “3 (D)”.
In this case, in the push order instruction number set process (M_ORD_INF), the push order instruction number “3 (D)” (binary “00000011 (B)”) corresponding to the selected small role B12 is used as the push order instruction of the RWM 53. Store in the number storage area. Further, the push order instruction number is not stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
In the LED display control (I_LED_OUT), in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)” (digit 4 signal is ON), the push order stored in the push order instruction number storage area of the RWM 53 The instruction number “00000011 (B)” is acquired as display data (segment output data) and is output from the output port 3 (output port 4).

Thereby, the segments A and B of the digit 4 can be turned on, and the segments C to G can be turned off.
In this manner, the numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number can be displayed in binary by the pattern of lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G of the digit 4.
Further, when the numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number is displayed in the digit 4 in the binary number, the digit 3 may be hidden (the segments A to G are turned off), and the next operation instruction information is displayed in the binary number. May be.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing the relationship between next operation instruction information, display data, digit display, and stop switch 42 to be operated next.
As shown in FIG. 199, when the stop switch 42 to be operated next is on the left, the next operation instruction information is “1”, which is “00000001 (B)” in binary. For this reason, when the next operation instruction information “1” is displayed on the digit 3 in binary, the segment A of the digit 3 is turned on and the segments B to G are turned off. The same applies to the next operation instruction information “2” to “4”.
It should be noted that the numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number may be displayed in binary number on the digit 3 instead of the digit 4. In this case, the digit 4 may be hidden (segments A to G are turned off), and the next operation instruction information may be displayed in binary.

(29) In the designated game section, when the game has an advantageous pushing order, the condition device number is set according to the lighting or extinguishing pattern of the segments A to G included in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78). You may display by a binary number.
FIG. 200 is a diagram exemplifying the relationship between the condition device number, display data, digit display, and advantageous pushing order for the small roles B1 to B12.
As shown in FIG. 200, the condition device number of the small combination B1 is “11”, which is expressed as “00001011 (B)” in binary. For this reason, when the condition device number “11” is displayed in binary on the digit 4, the segments A, B and D of the digit 4 are turned on, and the segments C and E to G are turned off. The same applies to the other condition device numbers.

Specifically, in the designated game section, when winning the small role B1 with the conditional device number “11”, the conditional device number “11” (binary “00001011 (B)”) is used for winning and replaying the RWM 53. Store in the condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR).
In the LED display control (I_LED_OUT), in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)” (digit 4 signal is ON), the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) of the RWM 53 is stored. The acquired condition device number “00001011 (B)” is acquired as display data (segment output data), and is output from the output port 3 (output port 4).

Thereby, the segments A, B, and D of the digit 4 can be turned on, and the segments C and E to G can be turned off.
In this way, the condition device number can be displayed in binary by the pattern of lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G of the digit 4.

When the condition device number is displayed in the digit 4 in binary, the digit 3 may be hidden (the segments A to G are turned off), and the next operation instruction information may be displayed in binary.
Furthermore, the conditional device number may be displayed in binary number on the digit 3 instead of the digit 4. In this case, the digit 4 may be hidden (segments A to G are turned off), and the next operation instruction information may be displayed in binary.

  (30) In the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments, in the same interrupt process, the digit that can be turned on is varied depending on the LED display counter value. For example, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)” in the same interrupt processing, digit 3 can be turned on, and when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”. The digit 4 can be turned on. However, the display control of the LED including the digits 3 and 4 is not limited to being executed by the same interrupt process.

  For example, the interrupt process A is executed and the interrupt process B is executed independently of the interrupt process A. That is, a plurality of interrupt processes are executed. In the interrupt process A, the display of the digit 3 is controlled, and in the interrupt process B, the display of the digit 4 is controlled. In this way, the display of the LEDs including the digits 3 and 4 may be controlled by a plurality of independent and independent interrupt processes.

(31) In the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments, at the time of an unrecoverable error, the interrupt process is not executed, and the display of the digits 3 and 4 is controlled by the unrecoverable error process 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) shown in FIG. However, LED display control at the time of an unrecoverable error is not limited to this.
For example, an interrupt process may be executed even when an unrecoverable error occurs, and the display of the LEDs including the digits 3 and 4 may be controlled by this interrupt process.
In this case, when an unrecoverable error has occurred, an error number corresponding to the type of the unrecoverable error that has occurred is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) of the RWM 53.

Specifically, when the “E1” error occurs, the error number “25 (H)” of the “E1” error is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) of the RWM 53.
In step S1439 of the LED display control in FIG. 134, the error number “25 (H)” is acquired from the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) and stored in the B register.
Furthermore, in step S1448 of FIG. 134, it is determined that an error is displayed because the B register value is not “0” (“Yes”). In the next step S1449, the B register value is set in the A register. The head address of the LED segment table 1 is set in the HL register.

Further, in step S1450 of FIG. 134, an operation of dividing the A register value “25 (H)” (“37 (D)”) by “10 (D)” is executed, and the quotient “3 (D)” is ranked higher. The digit offset value is stored in the A register, and the remainder “7 (D)” is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.
In the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, in step S1455 of FIG. 134, the upper digit offset value “3 (D)” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 1 of FIG. 183. By adding, “E” display data (address “1814 (H)” in FIG. 183) is acquired as segment output data. In step S1458, “E” is displayed in the digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

Further, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, in step S1455 of FIG. 134, the lower digit offset value “7 (D)” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 1 of FIG. 183. By adding, “1” display data (address “1818 (H)” in FIG. 183) is acquired as segment output data. In step S1458, “1” is displayed in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).
In this way, when the “E1” error occurs, “E1” can be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by interrupt processing. The same applies to other unrecoverable errors.

(32) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, “88” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) during setting change.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the setting change, “88” may be displayed on the storage number display LED 76 (digits 1 and 2) in addition to the acquisition number display LED 78. That is, during the setting change, “8888” may be displayed on the storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 1 to 4).

Specifically, for example, in the setting change process (M_RANK_SET), “88 (D)” (binary number “01011000 ( B) ") is stored.
During the setting change, “11111000 (B)” is stored as the LED display request flag in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) of the RWM 53.
Then, “8888” is displayed on the storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 1 to 4) by the interrupt processing executed after these processes.

For example, the storage number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 1 to 4) are dynamically lit, and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is static lit. During the setting change, “01111000 (B)” is output as a digit signal from the output port 2 and “01111111 (B)” is output as a segment signal from the output port 3 for each interrupt process. As a result, during the setting change, “8” can be simultaneously displayed in the digits 1 to 4 for each interrupt process.
In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET), “01111000 (B)” may be output from the output port 2 as a digit signal, and “01111111 (B)” may be output from the output port 3 as a segment signal. .

  (33) In the twenty-seventh embodiment, when the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140 of FIG. 193, the setting value data (value of the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK)) is updated in step S2141, and in step S4103 Then, the set value display data is generated from the updated set value data, and this is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). However, it is not limited to this.

FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing a setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in a modification of the 27th embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 193 of the 27th embodiment.
In the flowchart described below, steps that execute the same processing as in the twenty-seventh embodiment are given the same step numbers, and redundant descriptions are omitted. Further, steps having contents different from those of the twenty-seventh embodiment are underlined with step numbers.

First, in FIG. 201, step S4121 is provided instead of steps S2141 and S4103 in FIG. 193. In this step S4121, the set value display data (value of acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT)) is updated.
For example, when the set value display data “1” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), if the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140, the acquired number data storage area ( _NB_PAYOUT) stores the set value display data “2”.
Further, when the set value display data “6” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), if the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140, the acquired number data storage area ( _NB_PAYOUT) stores the set value display data “1”. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S2142.

In FIG. 201, step S4122 is newly provided between step S2142 and step S2143. In step S412, the set value data (value of the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK)) is updated.
For example, when the set value display data “1” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), if the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2142, the set value display data “1” is detected in step S4122. "0" obtained by subtracting "1" from "" is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK) as set value data.
If the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2142 when the set value display data “6” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the set value display data “6” is detected in step S4122. "5" obtained by subtracting "1" from "" is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK) as set value data. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S2143.

(34) In the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments, when the set value is “N”, the set value data “N−1” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, when the set value is “N”, the set value data “N” may be stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK). In this case, the set value display data can be obtained without adding “1” to the set value data. That is, when the set value data is “N”, the set value display data is also “N”.

(35) In the flowcharts shown in the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the figure. If the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing is changed. Is also possible.
(36) The twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments and the various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combination.

<Appendix>
The inventions (initial inventions) described in the initial specification and the like of the present application can include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 51. Means for achieving this and the effects of the initial invention are as follows. However, the invention described in this specification is not meant to be limited to the first inventions 1 to 51.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 1 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, when an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is provided in the advantageous section, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and AT. In such a case, appropriate control is required.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent the player from giving an impression that a game can be played beyond the upper limit when the designated game section (AT) is extended and the upper limit of the advantageous section is exceeded. is there.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 1 (the corresponding embodiment will be described in parentheses)
The first solving means (third embodiment; example 2 in FIG. 55)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for outputting the production related to the designated game section,
The game control means includes
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the condition for extending the designated game section (addition of the number of games) is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) related to the instruction game section to the effect control means,
The production control means includes
Based on the information received from the game control means, if the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is not exceeded even if the instruction game section is extended, predetermined information regarding the extension of the instruction game section (AT remaining game after addition) Count)
Based on the information received from the game control means, if the instruction game section is extended, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section will be exceeded, or the instruction game section may be extended after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. When determined, specific information (“celebration”, “congratulations”, etc.) different from the predetermined information is displayed.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
The production control means includes
As the predetermined information, information that can grasp how much the instruction game section is extended is displayed (a specific number of games is displayed),
As the specific information, it is possible to grasp that some decision regarding the extension of the designated game section has been made, but information that cannot be grasped about the degree of the extension of the designated game section is displayed (a specific number of games is displayed). do not do)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of the original invention 1 According to the original invention, when the instruction game section is extended, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is exceeded, or after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, When the extension is decided, the predetermined information regarding the extension of the designated game section is not displayed, so that the player is not misunderstood if the designated game section continues beyond the upper limit of the advantageous section. be able to.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 2 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (third embodiment; example 3 in FIG. 55)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for outputting the production related to the designated game section,
The game control means includes
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the condition for extending the designated game section (addition of the number of games) is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) related to the instruction game section to the effect control means,
Based on the information received from the game control means, the effect control means determines that the indicated game section is the advantageous section when the designated game section or the advantageous section has reached a predetermined threshold (the total number of AT games is 1500 games). It is possible to output an effect (ending effect) that suggests that the continuation upper limit is approached.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, an effect is output that suggests that the designated game section is approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, so that the designated game section continues beyond the upper limit of the advantageous section. The player can be informed that he will not.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 3 Same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (third embodiment; example 1 in FIG. 55)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for outputting the production related to the designated game section,
The game control means includes
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the extension condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) related to the instruction game section to the effect control means,
The production control means includes
Based on the information received from the game control means, if the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is not exceeded even if the instruction game section is extended, information on extension of the instruction game section (number of remaining AT games after addition) is displayed. ,
Based on the information received from the game control means, if the instruction game section is extended, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section will be exceeded, or the instruction game section may be extended after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. When it is determined, the information regarding the extension of the designated game section (the number of remaining AT games after the addition) is not displayed.

(C) Effect of the original invention 3 According to the original invention, when the designated game section is extended, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is exceeded, or after the designated game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, When the extension is determined, the information regarding the extension of the designated game section is not displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood if the designated game section continues beyond the upper limit of the advantageous section.

4). Initial invention 4
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 4 Same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (third embodiment; example 4 in FIG. 55)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for outputting the production related to the designated game section,
The game control means includes
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the extension condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) related to the instruction game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means is characterized by displaying game information indicating that the designated game section is not executed beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section (such as “I will finish in 10 games”).

The second solving means is the first solving means,
Based on the information received from the game control means, the effect control means may extend the instruction game section when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is exceeded, or after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. When the extension of the designated game section is determined, the game information is displayed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood if the indicated game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 5 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, when the upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is provided in the advantageous section, there is a possibility that the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and AT. It is necessary to eliminate.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent the designated game section (such as AT) from exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 5 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 44 to 46)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes
After starting the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached (for example, “Yes” in step S443 in FIG. 44), the advantageous section is ended.
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the designated game section, it is possible to decide whether to extend the designated game section,
When it is decided to extend the instruction game section, when the instruction game section has reached the upper limit of the advantageous section before the extension is determined (for example, “Yes” in step S451 in FIG. 44), The decision result concerning the extension is cleared.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, even if it is decided to extend the designated game section, if the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, the decision result relating to the extension is obtained. Since it clears, it can prevent that an instruction | indication game area exceeds the continuation upper limit of an advantageous area.

6). Initial invention 6
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 6 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, when an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is provided in the advantageous section, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and AT.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to make it difficult for the designated game section or the advantageous section to reach the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 47 to 49)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes
After starting the advantageous section, if you reach the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games), end the advantageous section,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the designated game section, it is possible to decide whether to extend the designated game section,
An extension determination table (lottery table A or B) used when determining the extent of extension of the designated game section is provided,
The extension determination table is
at least,
A first extension determination table (lottery table A in FIGS. 47 to 49);
A second extension determination table (a lottery table B in FIGS. 47 to 49) having a smaller expected value of the extent of extension to be determined (addition number) than the first extension determination table;
The degree of extension is determined using the first extension determination table until the designated game section or advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold value (the number of AT games is 1000 games), and the designated game section or advantageous section is the predetermined threshold value. When reaching, the extension degree is determined using the second extension determination table.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, when the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold value, the degree of extension is determined using the extension determination table having a small expected value of the degree of extension. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the designated game section to reach the upper limit of the advantageous section.

7). Initial invention 7
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 7 Same as the original invention 6.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 50 to 52)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes
A lottery means (61) for drawing a role is provided,
Based on the winning combination in the role lottery means, it is possible to determine whether to extend the instruction game section,
When the first role (for example, small role E1) is won in the role lottery by the role lottery means, the extent of extension determined (the number of additions) than when the second role (for example, small role D) is won The expected value of
When the designated game section or the advantageous section has not reached the predetermined threshold (the number of AT games is 1000 games), when the first combination is won, the extension of the instruction game section is based on the first combination winning. The degree is determined (step S541 in FIGS. 50 to 52),
When the designated game section or the advantageous section has not reached the predetermined threshold, when the second combination is won, the degree of extension of the designated game section is determined based on the winning of the second combination,
When the designated game section or the advantageous section has reached the predetermined threshold value, when the first combination is won, the extent of extension of the instruction game section is determined in the same manner as when the second combination is won (FIG. 50). To Step S543 in FIG.
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of the original invention 7 According to the original invention, when the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold value, the extension of the designated game section is reduced so that the expected value of the degree of extension determined becomes small. Since the degree is determined, it is possible to make it difficult for the designated game section to reach the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

8). Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 8 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
In addition, an external signal indicating AT is output during the AT, and an external signal indicating the special game is output during the special game. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent the on / off timing of the external signal from becoming unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the external signal indicating the designated game section and the external signal indicating the special game from being turned on / off unnaturally when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (fourth embodiment; FIG. 57)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes
Role lottery means (61) for drawing a role including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game);
An external signal transmission means (70),
Based on having won the special role in the role lottery means,
The external signal transmission means includes
When the instruction game section is started, the first external signal (external signal 2) indicating the instruction game section is turned on, and when the instruction game section is ended, the first external signal is turned off,
When the special game is started, the second external signal (external signal 1) indicating the special game is turned on. When the special game is finished, the second external signal is turned off.
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached when it is in the designated game section and not in the special game, the first external signal is turned off (Example 1 in FIG. 57),
When the special role is won during the designated game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the first external signal and the second external signal are turned off when the special game ends (FIG. 57). Example 2)
It is characterized by that.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
Provided with an advantageous section display device (favorable section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the display indicating the advantageous section by the advantageous section display device is ended even during the special game (example 2 in FIG. 57).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, the first external signal indicating the designated game section can be turned off at a natural timing even when the special game crosses the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. .

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 9 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
In addition, an external signal indicating the AT is output during the AT, but when the AT is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, there is a problem of how to control the external signal indicating the AT. It becomes.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately control an external signal indicating the designated game section when the designated game section is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 9 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (fourth embodiment; FIG. 58)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes external signal transmission means (70),
The external signal transmission means includes
When the designated game section is started, a predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section is turned on, and when the designated game section is finished, the predetermined external signal is turned off,
The predetermined external signal is turned off when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the designated game section.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, it is possible to match the timing when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached with the timing at which the predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section is turned off.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 10 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
In addition, an external signal indicating the AT is output during the AT, but since the external signal, the start and end of the special game, and the time when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached are mixed, the external signal It is necessary to prevent the on / off timing from becoming unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent unnatural turning on / off of the external signal indicating the designated game section, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the start and end of the special game, and the designated game section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (fourth embodiment; FIGS. 57 and 58)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes
Role lottery means (61) for drawing a role including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game);
An external signal transmission means (70),
Based on having won the special role in the role lottery means,
The external signal transmission means includes
When the designated game section is started, a predetermined external signal (external signal 2) indicating the designated game section is turned on, and when the designated game section is finished, the predetermined external signal is turned off (Example 1 in FIG. 57). ,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached when it is in the designated game section and not in the special game, the predetermined external signal is turned off (FIG. 58),
When the special role is won during the designated game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, when the special game is finished, the predetermined external signal is turned off (example 2 in FIG. 57).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the initial invention, the time when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the end of the special game, and the timing for turning off the predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section are matched. Can do.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 11 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed.
When such an advantageous section is provided, there is a problem as to when the AT starts and when the AT ends.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to enable a wide range of game design by giving the start and end triggers of the designated game section in the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (fifth embodiment; FIG. 60 (a))
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes a role lottery means (61) for drawing a role,
As a lottery state (RT) in which the lottery is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (for example, RT5) and a second lottery state (for example, RT2) having different winning probabilities for at least one re-gamer are provided.
In the advantageous section and the first lottery state, the instruction game section can be executed,
In the designated game section and the first lottery state, when the player enters the second lottery state because the predetermined condition is satisfied (50 games have been consumed), both the advantageous section and the designated game section are terminated. Features.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 11 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section and the designated game section can be started and ended with the transition of the lottery state. This allows a wide range of game design.

12 Initial invention 12
(A) Problem to be solved by the initial invention 12 Same as the original invention 11.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 12 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (fifth embodiment; FIG. 61)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The state controlled by the game control means includes at least a first control state (a precursor, CZ, AT, etc.) and a second control state (normal),
On the condition that it is an advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the first control state (precursor),
In the first control state (AT), an instruction game section is started,
When the condition for transition to the second control state (normal) is satisfied in the advantageous section and the first control state (AT pull-back period, CZ, CZ pull-back period), the second control state is entered and the advantageous section is terminated. It is characterized by.
The second solving means is the first solving means,
In the first control state, which is the designated game section, when the condition for transition to the second control state is satisfied, the second control state is entered, and both the advantageous section and the designated game section are terminated. .

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 12 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section and the designated game section can be started and ended with the transition of the control state as a trigger. This allows a wide range of game design.

13. Initial invention 13
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 13 Same as the original invention 11.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 13 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (fifth embodiment; FIG. 60 and FIG. 61)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
As a gaming state controlled by the game control means (RT (lottery state), AT, CZ, precursor, normal (control state)), at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
In the first gaming state (RT5 and AT), the advantageous section is executed and the instruction gaming section can be started,
When the designated game section is started in the first game state and the predetermined number of games has been consumed, the game state is shifted to the second game state (RT2 and normal) and the designated game section is ended.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
When the predetermined number of games has been consumed in the designated game section in the first game state, the second game state is entered, and both the advantageous section and the designated game section are terminated.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 13 According to the initial invention, the designated game section can be started or ended with the transition of the gaming state as a trigger. This allows a wide range of game design.

14 Initial invention 14
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 14 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
However, the playability that only ends when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached is not sufficient for differentiation from other models.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to execute a game that is not restricted by the upper limit of the advantageous section by enabling the advantageous section to be executed intermittently even if the advantageous section has an upper limit.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 14 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes a role lottery means (61) for drawing a role,
As the lottery states in which the winning lottery is performed by the winning lottery means, the first lottery state (RT3), the second lottery state (RT6), and the third lottery state (for example, RT2) having different winning probabilities for at least one re-playing player )
In the designated game section in the first lottery state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied before the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (when replay 06 is displayed), the state shifts to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the designated game section Both sides,
In the second lottery state, it is determined whether to start the normal section and shift to the advantageous section (execute a lottery of “1/32”),
In the second lottery state normal section, when a specific condition for transitioning to the advantageous section is satisfied (when the “1/32” lottery is won), the transition is made to the advantageous section and transition to the advantageous section Based on the instruction game section can be started,
In the normal section in the third lottery state, when the specific condition is satisfied, it shifts to the advantageous section, but the designated game section is not started based on the transition to the advantageous section.

The second solving means (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, there is an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in the game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section,
The game control means includes a role lottery means (61) for drawing a role,
As the lottery states in which the winning lottery is performed by the winning lottery means, the first lottery state (RT3), the second lottery state (RT6), and the third lottery state (non-RT) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying player are different. )
In the designated game section in the first lottery state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied before the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (when replay 06 is displayed), the state shifts to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the designated game section Both sides,
In the second lottery state, it is determined whether to start the normal section and shift to the advantageous section (execute a lottery of “1/32”),
In the second lottery state, when the end condition of the second lottery state is satisfied (when 50 games are consumed), the state shifts to the third lottery state,
There is a case of shifting to the third lottery state without going through the second lottery state,
Even in the normal section of the third lottery state that has shifted without going through the second lottery state, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section,
When it is decided to move to the advantageous section in the second lottery state, the instruction game section can be started thereafter,
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section without going through the second lottery state, the designated game section is not started.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 14 According to the initial invention, the designated game section in the first lottery state is shifted to the second lottery state to end the advantageous section and the designated game section, and then the advantageous game section is transferred again. Since it is possible and the instruction game section can be started, it is possible to execute a game that is not limited to the upper limit of the advantageous section.
In addition, by adding conditions that can start the designated game section (the first solution means satisfying a specific condition in the second lottery state, the second solution means going through the second lottery state), It can suppress that an instruction | indication game area becomes easy to be performed more than needed.

15. Initial invention 15
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 15 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed. Further, it has been proposed to display to the player that the advantageous section is an advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where an advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special role. In this case, it is desired not to lower the player's expectation during the special game.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to be able to continue to give the player a sense of expectation even during special games.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 15 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (eighth embodiment; FIGS. 64 and 65)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantageous section display means (favorable section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the production,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game),
The winning probabilities for special roles are the same for all settings,
Based on winning the special role, you can start the advantageous section,
Based on the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role has been stopped by winning the special role,
The advantageous section started based on winning the special role ends when the special game ends (Example 1 or 2 in FIG. 64) and continues after the special game ends (FIG. 65). Example 3)
The effect control means is capable of outputting a continuous effect over a plurality of games regarding the continuation of an advantageous section during a special game.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
The continuous effect is an effect suggesting whether or not the advantageous section continues even after the special game ends.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 15 According to the initial invention, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the advantageous section will continue until the end of the special game.

16. Initial invention 16
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 16 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed. Further, it has been proposed to display to the player that the advantageous section is an advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where an advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special role. In this case, it is desired not to lower the player's expectation even after the end of the special game.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to be able to continue to give the player a sense of expectation even after the end of the special game.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 16 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (eighth embodiment; FIG. 66)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantageous section display means (favorable section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section;
Means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the production,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game),
The winning probabilities for special roles are the same for all settings,
Based on winning the special role, you can start the advantageous section,
Based on the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role has been stopped by winning the special role,
An advantageous section started based on winning of a special role ends when a special game ends after a predetermined number of games (5 games) (example 4) and when the game continues beyond the predetermined number of games (example) 5)
The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined effect relating to continuation of the advantageous section in at least a part of the predetermined number of games after the end of the special game.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
The predetermined effect is an effect suggesting whether or not the advantageous section continues even if the predetermined number of games is exceeded after the end of the special game.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 16 According to the initial invention, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the advantageous section will continue even after the end of the special game.

17. Initial invention 17
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 17 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to shift to an advantageous section based on the winning of special role. In this case, the player's skill cannot be exhibited only by starting the advantageous section uniformly based on the winning of the special role.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to make a difference in the profit related to the advantageous section depending on the skill of the player when the transition to the advantageous section is made based on the winning of the special role.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 17 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (9th embodiment (FIG. 67))
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
The part lottery means performs a part lottery so as to have a case of a specific winning (1BBA + small part E1),
The specific win is a win that includes a special role (1BBA) that carries the win to the next game until the combination of symbols stops, and a predetermined role (small role E1) that does not carry the win to the next game,
The winning probability for a specific win is the same for all settings,
In the case where it is decided to move to an advantageous section in a game that has been won specially ("N" game), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role does not stop, and the winning of the special role is carried over to the next game The advantageous section is started from the game ("N + 2" game) in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination carrying over the winning can be stopped.

(C) Effect of the original invention 17 According to the initial invention, in the first game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role can be stopped, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the symbol corresponding to the special role It is possible to make a difference in the profit obtained in the advantageous section between the player whose combination has been stopped and the player who has not been able to stop the combination. Thereby, the profit obtained in an advantageous area can be varied according to the skill of the player.

18. Initial invention 18
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 18 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, it is possible to perform the AT addition based on the winning of the special role having no setting difference, but it is possible to prevent the AT from being performed based on the winning of the special role having the setting difference. ing.
However, if this is done, there is a problem that when a special role with a setting difference is won during AT, the player cannot be given the expectation of adding AT.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it possible to add an instruction game section (AT) even when a special combination having a setting difference is won.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 18 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (tenth embodiment (FIG. 22))
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section game (AT) in which an instruction function operation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
The part lottery means performs a part lottery so that a special part (for example, 1 BBA game) for winning a special game (for example, 1 BBA game) may be won.
Based on the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role has been stopped by winning the special role,
As a lottery state in which a lottery of a role is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (RT2) and a second lottery state (RT3) having different winning probabilities of at least one replaying role are provided,
In order to shift to the second lottery state after the end of the special game, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state,
When transitioning to a special game based on winning a special role during the designated game section, the designated game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state after the special game ends. age,
In the designated game section, when the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state is made without transitioning to the special game, the designated game section is not extended based on that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 18 According to the initial invention, the designated game section can be extended when the first lottery state is shifted to the second lottery state on condition that a special game has been executed. . This makes it possible to extend the designated game section after the end of the special game, regardless of whether the selected special combination has a setting difference. Furthermore, it is possible to set the designated game section not to be extended only by shifting from the first lottery state to the second lottery state without passing through the special game.

19. Original invention 19
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 19 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed. Here, it is desired to provide a new game using the instruction function operation game.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to provide a new game using the instruction function operation game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 19 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (eleventh embodiment; FIG. 68)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section game (AT) in which an instruction function operation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the production,
The part lottery means performs a part lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined part (small part E1) is won,
The winning probability for a given role is the same for all settings,
When winning a predetermined role in the role lottery by the role lottery means, the next game shifts to an advantageous section,
An advantageous section that shifts based on the winning of the specified role is
A first advantageous section (Example 1 in FIG. 68) that executes at least one instruction function operation game but does not execute the instruction game section;
A second advantageous section (Example 2 in FIG. 68) for executing the designated game section;
The production control means outputs a continuous production in an advantageous section that has been shifted based on the winning of a predetermined combination.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
The production control means starts the continuous production after one instruction function operation game is executed.
The third solution means in the first or second solution means,
The continuous effect is an effect suggesting whether it is the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section.

(C) Effects of the original invention 19 According to the initial invention, even when a transition is made to the advantageous section, the instruction game section is executed, and at least one instruction function operation game is executed but the instruction game section is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even after shifting to the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gameability from shifting to the advantageous section / not shifting.

20. Initial invention 20
(A) Problem to be Solved by the Initial Invention 20 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been considered to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to provide an upper limit for the advantageous section. On the other hand, even if it shifts to the advantageous section, it is conceivable that the condition device (combination) having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not won.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to balance the end condition (including the upper limit) of the advantageous section and the execution of the instruction function operation game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 20 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (11th embodiment; FIG. 69)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
The part lottery means performs a part lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined part (small part E1) is won,
The winning probability for a given role is the same for all settings,
When winning a predetermined role in the role lottery by the role lottery means, there may be a transition to an advantageous section from the next game,
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined end condition of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, if there is no game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch until the predetermined end condition is reached, the advantageous section is terminated until at least one instruction function operation game is executed. Although not (Example 3 in FIG. 69), if there is no game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, it is advantageous without executing the instruction function operation game. End the section (Example 4 in FIG. 69)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effects of the Initial Invention 20 According to the initial invention, in the advantageous section, “at least one instruction function operation game is executed” and “when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated”. Can be balanced.

21. Initial invention 21
(A) Problem to be Solved by the Initial Invention 21 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to set an upper limit for the advantageous section. Furthermore, it is possible to win a special role during the advantageous section and shift to a special game. In this case, if the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the execution of the special game, the advantageous section ends at that time, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during execution of the special game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 21 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (Twelfth Embodiment; FIG. 70)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
Production control means (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the production,
The part lottery means performs a part lottery so that a special part (for example, 1 BBA game) for winning a special game (for example, 1 BBA game) may be won.
The production control means includes
When a certain condition is satisfied in the advantageous section (for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached), a specific effect (ending effect) is started,
When the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached during the output of the specific effect, the advantageous effect is ended and the specific effect is ended.
Even when the special role is won during the output of the specific effect and the game shifts to a special game, the specific effect is continued,
When the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game and during the output of the specific effect, the advantageous section is ended, but the specific effect is continued until the special game is ended.

(C) Effect of the original invention 21 According to the original invention, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the advantageous section is ended, but the special section is output until the special game is ended. Continue the specific production. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the specific effect in the advantageous section from suddenly ending during the special game, and not to give the player a sense of incongruity.

22. Initial invention 22
(A) Problem to be Solved by the Initial Invention 22 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having a plurality of lottery states with different winning probabilities of at least one re-game player.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Further, for example, a slot machine that shifts RT (lottery state) in order to execute AT is known.
In the prior art, it is known that RT transition is performed, for example, by winning a specific condition device and stopping a specific symbol combination. However, there is a problem that the ease of transition of RT may differ depending on the set value.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the RT transition from being affected by the set value.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 22 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (13th embodiment; FIG. 71)
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
As the lottery states in which the role lottery means is performed, the first lottery state (RT2), the second lottery state (RT3), and the third lottery state (RT4) having different winning probabilities for at least one replaying role are selected. Prepared,
In the first lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so that there is a case of winning a specific role (replay group B)
When the specified combination is won in the first lottery state and the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped, the state shifts to the second lottery state,
The winning probabilities of specific roles in the first lottery state are the same for all set values,
The role lottery means draws a role so as to have a case of winning a special role (for example, 1BBB) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBB game),
If a special combination is won in any lottery state and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination does not stop, the system shifts to the third lottery state.
The special role winning probability varies depending on the set value.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction function operation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, or an instruction game section (AT) with a high execution frequency is provided, and
The instruction game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
When a special role is won during the designated game section, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state in order to shift to the second lottery state after the end of the special game.
After the special game is over, the designated game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state.

The third solution means in the first or second solution means,
The designated game section can be executed in the third lottery state,
When the designated game section is in the third lottery state, the designated game section is not extended.

(C) Effect of the original invention 22 According to the initial invention, the winning probability of the specific role that becomes the trigger for the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state is the same for all the set values. The ease of transition to the second lottery state can be prevented from being affected by the set value.

23. Initial invention 23
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 23 Same as the original invention 22.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 23 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (13th embodiment; FIG. 71)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section where the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section game (AT) in which an instruction function operation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased, and
Means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.);
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
As a lottery state in which a lottery of a role is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (RT2) and a second lottery state (RT3) having different winning probabilities of at least one replaying role are provided,
The instruction game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
The part lottery means performs a part lottery so as to have a case where a specific re-playing part (replay C group) is won in the second lottery state,
In the second lottery state, when a specific re-game player is won and the combination of predetermined symbols is stopped, the state shifts to the first lottery state,
The winning probability of a particular re-gamer in the second lottery state is the same for all set values,
In the second lottery state, the combination lottery means performs a lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined re-playing combination (Replay A) is won,
Even if the predetermined re-gamer is won in the second lottery state and the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined re-gamer is stopped, the first lottery state is not shifted,
The winning probability of the predetermined re-gamer in the second lottery state is different according to a set value.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 23 According to the initial invention, the winning probabilities of a specific re-gamer that triggers the transition to the lottery state are the same for all the set values. It is possible to avoid being affected by. Furthermore, in the second lottery state, the winning probability of a predetermined re-gamer who does not trigger the lottery state transition is made different according to the set value. can do.

24. Initial invention 24
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 24 The same as the original invention 22.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 24 (Note that the corresponding embodiment will be described in parentheses)
The first solving means (13th embodiment; FIG. 71)
A role lottery means (61) for drawing a role;
Means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.);
As a lottery state in which a role lottery is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (RT1) and a second lottery state (RT2) having different winning probabilities of at least one replaying role are provided,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first lottery state, the state shifts to the second lottery state,
The role lottery means, in the first lottery state, performs a lottery of the role so as to have a case of winning the first role (small role B group) having the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition,
The winning probability of the first combination in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
The role lottery means, in the first lottery state, performs a lottery of the role so as to have a case of winning the second role (small role D) that does not have the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition,
The winning probability of the second combination in the first lottery state varies depending on the set value,
The role lottery means, in the first lottery state, performs a lottery of the role so as to have a case of winning the third role (small role E1) that does not have the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition,
The winning probability of the third combination in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
The maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first combination is stopped is D1 (9 sheets), the maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second combination is stopped is D2 (15 sheets), and the third combination is When the maximum payout when the corresponding symbol combination stops is D3 (2),
D2>D1> D3
It is characterized by satisfying.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, it has an advantageous section that can execute the instruction function operation game,
When a third combination is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means during a normal section, there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous section.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 24 According to the initial invention, since the winning probabilities of the first combination having the possibility of shifting to the second lottery state in the first lottery state are the same in all set values, the first lottery state It is possible to prevent the setting value from affecting the ease of transition from the first to the second lottery state.
Furthermore, since the winning probability of the second combination with the highest payout is made different according to the set value, the payout rate can be changed greatly according to the set value.

25. Original invention 25
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 25 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to change the end condition of the advantageous section after starting the advantageous section. Further, it is considered necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game in the advantageous section.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to end the advantageous section at an intended timing while making it possible to change the end condition of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 25 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 72)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
An advantageous section in which at least one instruction function operation game needs to be executed among the game sections,
When the transition conditions to the advantageous section are met in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section
When a predetermined condition (extended section extension condition) is satisfied during the advantageous section, the end condition (30 games) of the advantageous section until then is changed (50 games are added),
After the execution of at least one instruction function operation game in the advantageous section, when the end condition of the advantageous section is changed based on satisfying the predetermined condition, the instruction function operation game is set to 1 after the end condition is changed. The advantageous section can be ended without executing it again (example 1 in FIG. 72),
If the end condition of the advantageous section is changed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied before the first instruction function operation game is executed after the transition to the advantageous section, at least once after the end condition is changed. If the instruction function operation game is not executed, the advantageous section cannot be ended even if the end condition is satisfied (example 2 in FIG. 72).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effects of the original invention 25 According to the initial invention, after the advantageous section is started, the end condition of the advantageous section until then can be changed. Can be prevented from becoming monotonous. In addition, it is possible to change the end condition of the advantageous section, and at the timing when the advantageous section is intended because the instruction function operation game has not been executed even though the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the termination.

26. Initial invention 26
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 26 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that an AT is managed by a main control board in addition to managing an AT by a sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to perform a freeze at the end of the advantageous section. However, even if the freezing is executed even when the advantageous section ends without giving a sufficient profit to the player, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to appropriately execute the freeze at the end of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 26 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 73)
A game having a favorable operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, it has an advantageous section that can execute the instruction function operation game,
When the transition conditions to the advantageous section are met in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section
There are at least two types of first end condition and second end condition as the end condition of the advantageous section,
The advantage interval of the first end condition has a larger expected value of profits obtained during the advantage interval than the advantage interval of the second end condition,
Freeze control means for controlling the freeze to temporarily stop the progress of the game,
The freeze control means does not execute the freeze when ending the advantageous section with the second ending condition (CZ ending condition), and freezes when ending the advantageous section with the first ending condition (AT ending condition). It is characterized by being executed.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
During the freeze, a display relating to profits obtained during the advantageous section is performed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 26 According to the initial invention, when freezing is executed according to the expected value of profit obtained during the advantageous section (when the expected value of profit obtained during the advantageous section is large), By providing the case where the freeze is not executed (when the expected value of profit obtained during the advantageous section is small), the freeze can be appropriately executed at the end of the advantageous section.

27. Original invention 27
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 27 The initial invention includes an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and shifts to this advantageous section. The present invention relates to a slot machine that determines the effect on the main control board side.
In a conventional slot machine, there is known a slot machine that performs lottery on the main control board side and determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-150881). No. publication).
Here, if the main control board side decides whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, data and a program for performing processing relating to this decision are required, and the memory on the main control board side is accordingly provided. Requires capacity.
On the other hand, there is a certain limitation on the memory capacity on the main control board side.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch is provided, and the main control board side indicates that the transition to this advantageous section is made. In the slot machine determined in (1), the processing relating to the determination to shift to the advantageous section is appropriately performed within a certain memory capacity range.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 27 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (for example, “44”) indicating that it will be a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and small part D overlapping winning) and that it will shift to an advantageous section,
Predetermined storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information relating to the transition to the advantageous section,
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than a predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the predetermined storing means, it is stored in the predetermined storing means. (In the case of “No” in step S1044 of FIG. 89, step S1045 is skipped),
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when a predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storing means, the value stored in the predetermined storing means can be updated. (If “Yes” in step S1044 of FIG. 89, the process proceeds to the next step S1045, and the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53)
It is characterized by that.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
Special storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role is provided,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than a specific value (“0”) is stored in the specific storing means, a predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storing means. Even if is stored, the value stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained (if “No” in step S1043 in FIG. 89, steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped, so the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “ 0 "will maintain the value of" _NB_CND_AT ")
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of the original invention 27 According to the original invention, when the winning number is determined as the specific winning number, when a value other than the predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storage means, the value is maintained, When a predetermined value is stored, the value can be updated.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, so that the transition to the advantageous section is made within a certain memory capacity range. Processing related to the determination can be appropriately performed.

28. Initial invention 28
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 28 Same as the original invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 28 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (for example, “44”) indicating that it will be a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and small part D overlapping winning) and that it will shift to an advantageous section,
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information relating to the transition to the advantageous section;
Second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when a value other than a predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the second storage means, it is stored in the first storage means. (In the case of “No” in step S1043 in FIG. 89, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained by skipping steps S1044 to S1046),
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when a predetermined value is stored in the second storage means, the value stored in the first storage means can be updated. (If “Yes” in step S1043 of FIG. 89, the process proceeds to step S1044. If “Yes” at this time, the process proceeds to step S1045, so that the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated.)
It is characterized by that.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when a value other than the specific value (“0”) is stored in the first storing means, a predetermined value is stored in the second storing means. Even if is stored, the value stored in the first storage means is maintained (“Yes” in step S1043 in FIG. 89, and even if the process proceeds to step S1044, if “No” in step S1044, step S1045) (Since it is skipped, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” will be maintained)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 28 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined as the specific winning number, when a value other than the predetermined value is stored in the second storing means, the first storing means is stored. The stored value is maintained, and when the predetermined value is stored in the second storage unit, the value stored in the first storage unit can be updated.
This makes it possible to determine the winning number in the same process regardless of whether or not the special role is won and whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section. Within the range, it is possible to appropriately perform processing related to the decision to shift to the advantageous section.

29. Initial invention 29
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 29 Same as the original invention 27.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 29 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, we have a specific winning number (for example, “43”) indicating that we will win a special role (for example, 1BBA) and move to an advantageous section,
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information relating to the transition to the advantageous section;
Second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means may be updated based on the information stored in the second storage means. (If “Yes” in step S1043 in FIG. 89 and “Yes” in step S1044, the process proceeds to step S1045 to update the value of “_NB_CND_AT”),
After executing the process related to the update of the information stored in the first storage means, the information stored in the second storage means is updated (after updating the value of “_NB_CND_AT” in step S1045, “ _NB_CND_BNS "value is updated)
It is characterized by that.

The second solving means (sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (for example, “44”) indicating that it will be a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and small part D overlapping winning) and that it will shift to an advantageous section,
The specific winning is a double winning including a special role (for example, 1BBA) and a specific role (for example, small role D),
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information relating to the transition to the advantageous section;
Second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role;
Third storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the specific role,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means may be updated based on the information stored in the second storage means. (If “Yes” in step S1043 in FIG. 89 and “Yes” in step S1044, the process proceeds to step S1045 to update the value of “_NB_CND_AT”),
After executing the processing related to the update of the information stored in the first storage means, the information stored in the second storage means and the third storage means is updated (after the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated in step S1045) In step S1046, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated, and in step S1047, the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” is updated.)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 29 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined as the specific winning number, it is stored in the first storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means. Processing related to the update of information is executed, and thereafter, the information stored in the second storage means is updated.
Thereby, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not the special combination is won and whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section.
Further, even if it does not have a flag indicating whether or not the special combination winning information is carried over, it can be determined whether the special combination has been won in the current game or whether the special combination has been won before the previous game.
Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform processing related to the determination to shift to the advantageous section within a certain memory capacity range.

30. Initial invention 30
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 30 The same as the original invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 30 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (modified example of the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 92)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, we have a specific winning number (for example, “43”) indicating that we will win a special role (for example, 1BBA) and move to an advantageous section,
When you win a special role, carry on the winning information of the special role until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information relating to the transition to the advantageous section;
Second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role;
And third storage means (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of RWM 53) capable of storing carry-over information indicating that the special role winning information is carried over,
Based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, the information stored in the second storage means may be updated (when “Yes” in step S1073, In step S1074, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated),
When a predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the third storage unit after the processing related to the update of the information stored in the second storage unit is executed, the information stored in the first storage unit is stored. (In step S1073, it is determined whether or not the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”. After updating the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” in step S1074, “0” is stored in “_FL_PRD_LOT” in step S1078) If it is, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated in step S1079)
It is characterized by that.

The second solving means (modified example of the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 92)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (for example, “44”) indicating that it will be a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and small part D overlapping winning) and that it will shift to an advantageous section,
The specific winning is a double winning including a special role (for example, 1BBA) and a specific role (for example, small role D),
When you win a special role, carry on the winning information of the special role until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information relating to the transition to the advantageous section;
Second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role;
Third storage means (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of RWM 53) capable of storing carry-over information indicating that the special role winning information is carried over;
Fourth storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the specific role,
The information stored in the second storage means and the fourth storage means may be updated based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number (“Yes” in step S1073). ”, The value of“ _NB_CND_BNS ”is updated in step S1074, and the value of“ _NB_CND_NOR ”is updated in step S1075).
When a predetermined value is stored in the third storage means after executing processing related to the update of the information stored in the second storage means and the fourth storage means, the information stored in the first storage means (In step S1073, it is determined whether the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated in step S1074, and the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” is updated in step S1075. When “0” is stored in “_FL_PRD_LOT” in step S1078, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated in step S1079)
It is characterized by that.

The third solution means in the first or second solution means,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than the specific value (“0”) is stored in the second storing means, it is stored in the second storing means. It is characterized by maintaining the same value.

(C) Effect of the original invention 30 According to the original invention, based on the fact that the winning number is determined as the specific winning number, the processing related to the update of the information stored in the second storage means is executed, and thereafter When the predetermined value is stored in the third storage unit, the information stored in the first storage unit is updated.
This makes it possible to determine the winning number in the same process regardless of whether or not the special role is won and whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section. Within the range, it is possible to appropriately perform processing related to the decision to shift to the advantageous section.
In addition, after executing the processing related to the update of the information stored in the second storage means, the register storing the winning information of the special role can be used for other processing.

31. Initial invention 31
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 31 The same as the original invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 31 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “38” to “42”) that can execute a transfer lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section. Number)
Predetermined storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information relating to the transition to the advantageous section,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than a predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the predetermined storing means, the transition lottery is not executed (FIG. If “No” in step S1114 of 99, two-step lottery is not executed by skipping steps S1115 and S1116)
It is characterized by that.

The second solving means (seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “38” to “42”) that can execute a transfer lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section. Number)
Predetermined storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information relating to the transition to the advantageous section,
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than a predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the predetermined storing means, the transition lottery may be executed. The value stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained.

(C) Effect of the original invention 31 According to the original invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, if a value other than the predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storage means, is it shifted to the advantageous section? No transition lottery to determine whether or not.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, so that the transition to the advantageous section is made within a certain memory capacity range. Processing related to the determination can be appropriately performed.

32. Initial invention 32
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 32 The same as the original invention 27.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 32 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “38” to “42”) that can execute a transfer lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section. Number)
Special storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role (for example, 1BBA) is provided,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than the specific value (“0”) is stored in the specific storing means, the transfer lottery is not executed (FIG. If “No” in step S1113 of 99, the two-step lottery is not executed by skipping steps S1114 to S1116)
It is characterized by that.

The second solving means (seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “38” to “42”) that can execute a transfer lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section. Number)
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information relating to the transition to the advantageous section;
Second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role (for example, 1BBA),
If the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, and a value other than the specific value (“0”) is stored in the second storage means, the transition lottery may be executed. The value stored in the first storage means is maintained.

(C) Effect of the original invention 32 According to the original invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, if a value other than the specific value is stored in the specific storage means, is it shifted to the advantageous section? No transition lottery to determine whether or not.
This makes it possible to determine the winning numbers including the specific winning numbers that can execute the transfer lottery regardless of whether or not the special role is won. It is possible to appropriately perform processing related to the decision to shift to.

33. Initial invention 33
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 33 The same as the original invention 27.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 33 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “38” to “40”) that can execute a transfer lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section. Number)
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that a special role (for example, 1BBA) has been won,
Predetermined storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role is provided,
Based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, there is a case where a transfer lottery is executed (when the winning number is determined from “38” to “40”) If “Yes” is set in step S1113, “Yes” is set in step S1114, and “No” is set in step S1115, a two-stage lottery is executed in step S1116).
After executing the process related to the transfer lottery, the winning information of the special role is stored in the predetermined storage means (after the two-stage lottery is executed in step S1116, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated in step S1117).
It is characterized by that.

The second solving means (seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “39” or “40”) that can execute a transfer lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section. Number)
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that a special combination (for example, 1BBA) and a specific combination (small role D) have been won,
Predetermined storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role;
Specific storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the specific role,
Based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, there is a case where a transfer lottery is executed (when the winning number is determined to be “39” or “40”) If “Yes” is set in step S1113, “Yes” is set in step S1114, and “No” is set in step S1115, a two-stage lottery is executed in step S1116).
After executing the process related to the transfer lottery, the winning information of the special role is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the winning information of the specific role is stored in the specific storage means (after executing the two-stage lottery in step S1116, the step The value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated in S1117, and the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” is updated in Step S1119)
It is characterized by that.

The third solution means in the first or second solution means,
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if the winning information of the special role is stored in the predetermined storage means, the transfer lottery is not executed (in step S1113 in FIG. 99). If “No”, steps S1114 to S1117 are skipped, so the two-stage lottery in step S1116 is not executed.
It is characterized by that.

The fourth solving means is the first to third solving means,
Advantageous section information storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing information relating to the transition to the advantageous section,
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, the transfer lottery is not executed when the information regarding the transition to the advantageous section is stored in the advantageous section information storing means (FIG. 99). If "No" in step S1114, steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped, so the two-stage lottery in step S1116 is not executed)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 33 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, the transfer lottery can be executed. And after performing the process regarding the transfer lottery, the winning information of the special role is stored in the predetermined storage means.
This makes it possible to determine whether a special role has been won in this game or whether a special role has been won prior to the previous game without having a flag indicating whether or not the special role winning information has been carried over. It can be determined whether or not a lottery is executed.
Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform processing related to the determination to shift to the advantageous section within a certain memory capacity range.

34. Initial invention 34
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 34 The same as the original invention 27.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 34 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (modified example of the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 103)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “38” to “40”) that can execute a transfer lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section. Number)
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that a special role (for example, 1BBA) has been won,
When you win a special role, carry on the winning information of the special role until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role;
Second storage means (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing carry-over information indicating that the special role winning information is carried over;
Based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means is updated (the winning numbers are determined from "38" to "40"). When it is done, “Yes” is obtained in step S1153 of FIG. 103, and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated in step S1154).
Based on the information stored in the second storage means, there is a case where the transfer lottery is executed and a case where the transfer lottery is not executed (if “No” in step S1158 in FIG. 103, the process proceeds to step S1116 and the two-stage lottery And if “Yes” in step S1158, step S1116 is skipped, so the two-stage lottery in step S1116 is not executed)
It is characterized by that.

The second solving means (modified example of the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 103)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “39” or “40”) that can execute a transfer lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section. Number)
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that a special combination (for example, 1BBA) and a specific combination (small role D) have been won,
When you win a special role, carry on the winning information of the special role until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role;
A second storage means (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing carry-over information indicating that the special role winning information is carried over;
Third storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the specific role,
Based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storing means and the third storing means is updated (the winning numbers are “38” to “ When the number is determined to be “40”, “Yes” is set in step S1153 of FIG. 103, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated in step S1154, and the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” is updated in step S1155).
Based on the information stored in the second storage means, there is a case where the transfer lottery is executed and a case where the transfer lottery is not executed (if “No” in step S1158 in FIG. 103, the process proceeds to step S1116 and the two-stage lottery And if “Yes” in step S1158, step S1116 is skipped, so the two-stage lottery in step S1116 is not executed)
It is characterized by that.

The third solution means in the first or second solution means,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when the winning information of the special role is stored in the first storing means, the information stored in the first storing means is maintained. (If “No” in step S1153 of FIG. 103, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is maintained by skipping step S1154)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 34 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined as the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means is updated. And based on the information memorize | stored in the 2nd memory | storage means, it has the case where a transfer lottery is performed and the case where it is not performed.
This makes it possible to determine the winning numbers including the specific winning numbers that can execute the transfer lottery regardless of whether or not the special role is won. It is possible to appropriately perform processing related to the decision to shift to.
In addition, after updating the information stored in the first storage means, the register storing the winning information of the special role can be used for other processing.

35. Initial invention 35
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 35 The same as the original invention 27.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 35 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (eighteenth embodiment; FIGS. 105 to 108)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Winning number determination means for determining a winning number based on a random value (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88);
A lottery data table (all RT common lottery table (8) in FIG. 105 to all RT common lottery table (11) in FIG. 108) used when determining a winning number;
The lottery data table
Winning number data (for example, “@BBA” = “38”) indicating a winning number, probability data (for example, “10”) indicating a winning probability, and advantageous interval data (for example, “@ LT_AT1” indicating transition to an advantageous interval) )) And the first data group (for example, 1BBA condition device lottery data in FIG. 106),
A second data group (for example, 1BBA conditional device lottery in FIG. 105) that associates winning number data (for example, “@BBA” = “38”) with probability data (for example, “10”) and does not associate advantageous section data. Data) and
The first data group and the second data group define the same winning number data.

(C) Effect of the original invention 35 According to the original invention, the same winning number is determined when either the first data group or the second data group is used, but when the first data group is used, , It is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and when the second data group is used, it is determined not to shift to the advantageous section.
As a result, it is possible to determine the winning number by performing a lottery using one lottery data table and to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous section. Thus, it is possible to appropriately perform the process related to the decision to shift to the advantageous section.

36. Initial invention 36
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 36 Same as the original invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 36 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (19th embodiment; FIG. 121)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Random number generation means;
Based on the random number value acquired from the random number generation means, the lottery means for performing the lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined role (for example, Replay A) is won (internal lottery 2 in FIG. 119 and condition device number set 6 in FIG. 120). )When,
Transition lottery means (advantageous section transition lottery in FIG. 121) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section based on the random number value obtained from the random number generating means,
Having a first gaming state (for example, RT1) and a second gaming state (for example, RT2) having different probabilities of winning a predetermined combination in the lottery means.
The transition lottery means executes the transition lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied (not during the operation of the accessory (“No” in step S1323 in FIG. 120) and not in the interior (“Yes in step S1324”). )), And when it is not an advantageous section (“Yes” in step S1325), the process proceeds to step S1326 to execute an advantageous section shift lottery).
In the transfer lottery, when the random number value belongs to a predetermined range, it is decided to move to the advantageous interval (when the random value belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, it is decided to move to the advantageous interval 2). And when the random number value falls within the range of “178” to “344”, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section 1).
The winning combination by the winning lottery means when the random number value belongs to the predetermined range is the same in the first gaming state and the second gaming state (when the random value belongs to the range of “0” to “344”) 114, all RT common lottery table (12) to all RT common lottery table (14) of FIG. 116 are used to determine the winning number, so that the condition device to win is non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or Any RT4 is the same)
It is characterized by that.

The second solving means (modified example of the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. 121)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction function operation game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing the instruction function operation game,
Random number generation means;
Based on the random number value acquired from the random number generation means, the lottery means for performing the lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined role (for example, Replay A) is won (internal lottery 2 in FIG. 119 and condition device number set 6 in FIG. 120). )When,
Transition lottery means (advantageous section transition lottery in FIG. 121) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section based on the random number value acquired from the random number generating means, and predetermined storage means capable of storing information relating to the transition to the advantageous section (Storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53),
Having a first gaming state (for example, RT1) and a second gaming state (for example, RT2) having different probabilities of winning a predetermined combination in the lottery means.
The transfer lottery means decides to shift to the advantageous interval when the random number value belongs to the predetermined range (when the random value belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, shift to the advantageous interval 2). And when the random number value falls within the range of “178” to “344”, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section 1).
When the transfer lottery is executed under a condition that satisfies a specific condition, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained (when the accessory is operating (“Yes” in step S1356 in FIG. 123). ), When the internal flag is on (“Yes” in step S1357 of FIG. 123), and when the advantageous section number is not “0” (“No” in step S1358 of FIG. 123), In this case, even if the advantageous section shift lottery is executed, the advantageous section number is maintained (the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained by skipping step S1338 of FIG. 121). ),
The winning combination by the winning lottery means when the random number value belongs to the predetermined range is the same in the first gaming state and the second gaming state (when the random value belongs to the range of “0” to “344”) 114, all RT common lottery table (12) to all RT common lottery table (14) of FIG. 116 are used to determine the winning number, so that the condition device to win is non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or Any RT4 is the same)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of the original invention 36 According to the initial invention, the lottery means performs lottery based on one random number value acquired from the random number generating means, and the transition lottery means shifts to an advantageous section. It is determined whether or not to do so. When the transition lottery means determines to shift to the advantageous section, the winning combination lottery means wins the same winning combination in the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
In this way, it is possible to perform a lottery drawing using a single random number value, and to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous interval. Therefore, within a certain memory capacity range, It is possible to appropriately perform processing related to the decision to shift.

37. Initial invention 37
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 37 The initial invention relates to a technique for outputting an LED digit signal and segment signal from an output port in a gaming machine.
Conventionally, it is known about dynamic lighting of a 7-segment display (7-segment) (for example, JP 09-225091 A).
For example, the above publication describes assignment of output ports for digit signals and segment signals.
In recent years, it has been studied to mount 7 segments capable of displaying an advantageous section ratio or the like on a main control board of a gaming machine (slot machine).
On the other hand, conventionally, gaming machines are provided with 7 segments for displaying the number of storage, 7 segments for displaying the number of acquisitions, and the like.
Thus, when the number of 7 segments increases, it becomes a problem how to design each 7-segment digit signal and segment signal and the output port.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately design digit (drive) signals, segment signals, and output ports, and to perform efficient signal output processing.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 37 (Note that the corresponding embodiment will be described in parentheses)
The first solving means (twentieth embodiment; FIG. 128)
A display unit that has a plurality of segments (segments A to P) that can be lit and displays predetermined information (the number of stored items, the number of acquisitions, error information, a push order instruction number, a gaming state, or a set value) by lighting the segments. First display means having one or more (digits) (storage number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, status display LED 79, or set value display LED 73);
Second display means (management information display LED 74) having one or more display units;
A first output port (output port 2) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display section of the first display means;
A second output port (output port 4) capable of outputting a drive signal to the display section of the second display means;
A third output port (output port 3) capable of outputting a segment signal to the segment of the display section of the first display means and the second display means,
A first output process (LED display control; FIG. 134) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display unit of the first display means and outputting a segment signal from the third output port to the segment;
A second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 135) for outputting a drive signal from the second output port to the display unit of the second display means and outputting a segment signal from the third output port to the segment;
Before the first output process and the second output process, a clear signal output process for outputting a clear signal from the first output port, the second output port, and the third output port (step S1431 and step S1432 in FIG. 134); Run
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the first output processing (time from Step S1431 and Step S1432 to Step S1458) is “t1”, and the second output from the output timing of the clear signal When the time until the output timing of the drive signal and segment signal in the processing (time from Step S1431 and Step S1432 to Step S1487) is “t2,” the processing is executed so that “t1 <t2”. And

The second solving means is the first solving means,
A display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 132) updated at a predetermined timing is provided.
When the display counter is a first value, a first output process is executed, and when the display counter is a second value (second value ≠ first value), a second output process is executed. To do.

(C) Effect of the Initial Invention 37 According to the initial invention, since the segment signal is output using the output port common to the first display means and the second display means, the IC cost is reduced and the drive signal (digit) is efficiently generated. Signal) and segment signals can be output.
Further, when the first display means is a display means visible to the player and the second display means is a display means not visible to the player, the output processing of the first display means is performed before the second display means. Thus, the flicker prevention of the first display means can be performed with priority.
Further, according to the second solution means, it is possible to execute the output process to the first display means and the output process to the second display means by using one display counter.

38. Initial invention 38
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 38 Same as the original invention 37.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 38 (Note that the corresponding embodiment will be described in parentheses)
The first solving means (21st embodiment; FIG. 138) is:
A display unit (digit) that has a plurality of segments (segments A to P) that can be turned on and displays predetermined information (the number of stored items, the number of acquired items, error information, a push order instruction number, or a gaming state) by lighting the segments. 1st display means (storage number display LED76, acquisition number display LED78, or status display LED79) having one or more of
Second display means (management information display LED 74) having one or more display units;
A first output port (output port 3) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display unit of the first display unit and the display unit of the second display unit;
A second output port (output port 4) capable of outputting a segment signal to the segment of the display section of the first display means and the segment of the display section of the second display means,
A first output process (LED display control; FIG. 140) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display section of the first display means and outputting a segment signal from the second output port to the segment;
A second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 141) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display unit of the second display means and outputting a segment signal from the second output port to the segment;
Before the first output process and the second output process, execute a clear signal output process (step S1531 in FIG. 140) for outputting a clear signal from the first output port and the second output port,
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the drive signal and segment signal in the first output process (time from step S1531 to step S1534) is “t1”, and the drive in the second output process from the output timing of the clear signal. When the time until the output timing of the signal and segment signal (time from step S1531 to step S1487) is “t2,” the process is executed so that “t1 <t2”.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
A display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 139 (B)) updated at a predetermined timing is provided.
When the display counter is a first value, a first output process is executed, and when the display counter is a second value (second value ≠ first value), a second output process is executed. To do.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 38 In addition to the effect of Initial Invention 37, the number of output ports can be reduced because the number of drive signal output ports can be one and the number of segment signal output ports can be one. it can.

39. Original invention 39
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 39 Same as the original invention 37.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 39 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (the twenty-second embodiment; FIG. 144)
A display unit that has a plurality of segments (segments A to P) that can be lit and displays predetermined information (the number of stored items, the number of acquisitions, error information, a push order instruction number, a gaming state, or a set value) by lighting the segments. First display means (stored number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, or status display LED 79) having one or more (digits);
Second display means (management information display LED 74) having one or more display units;
A first output port (output port 2) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display unit of the first display unit and the display unit of the second display unit;
A second output port (output port 3) capable of outputting segment signals (segments 1A to 1P signals) to the segment of the display section of the first display means;
A third output port (output port 4) capable of outputting a segment signal (segment 2A to 2P signal) to the segment of the display section of the second display means;
A first output process (LED display control; FIG. 149) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display unit of the first display means and outputting a segment signal from the second output port to the segment;
A second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 150) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display unit of the second display means and outputting a segment signal from the third output port to the segment;
A clear signal output process (step S1541 and step S1542 in FIG. 149) for outputting a clear signal from the first output port, the second output port, and the third output port before the first output process and the second output process; Run
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the drive signal and segment signal in the first output processing (the time from step S1541 and step S1542 to step S1554 and step S1555) is “t1”, and from the output timing of the clear signal When the time (time from step S1541 and step S1542 to step S1561) to the output timing of the drive signal and segment signal in the second output process is “t2”, the process is executed so that “t1 <t2”. It is characterized by that.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
A display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 148) that is updated at a predetermined timing;
When the display counter is a first value, a first output process is executed, and when the display counter is a second value (second value ≠ first value), a second output process is executed. To do.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 39 Same as Initial Invention 37.

40. Initial invention 40
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 40 The same as the original invention 37.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 40 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (24th embodiment; FIG. 154)
A display unit that has a plurality of segments (segments A to P) that can be lit and displays predetermined information (the number of stored items, the number of acquisitions, error information, a push order instruction number, a gaming state, or a set value) by lighting the segments. First display means having one or more (digits) (storage number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, status display LED 79, or set value display LED 73);
Second display means (management information display LED 74) having one or more display units;
A first output port (output port 3) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display unit of the first display means;
A second output port (output port 6) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display section of the second display means;
A third output port (output port 4) capable of outputting a segment signal to the segment of the display section of the first display means;
A fourth output port (output port 7) capable of outputting a segment signal to the segment of the display section of the second display means,
A first output process (LED display control; FIG. 158) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display unit of the first display means and outputting a segment signal from the third output port to the segment;
A second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 159) for outputting a drive signal from the second output port to the display section of the second display means and outputting a segment signal from the fourth output port to the segment;
Before the first output process and the second output process, a clear signal output process for outputting a clear signal from the first output port, the second output port, the third output port, and the fourth output port (step S1571 in FIG. 158). And Step S1572) and
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the first output processing (time from Step S1571 and Step S1572 to Step S1576 and Step S1577) is “t1”, and from the output timing of the clear signal When the time (time from step S1571 and step S1572 to step S1581) until the drive signal and segment signal output timing in the second output process is “t2”, the process is executed so that “t1 <t2”. It is characterized by that.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
A display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 156) updated at a predetermined timing is provided.
When the display counter is a first value, a first output process is executed, and when the display counter is a second value (second value ≠ first value), a second output process is executed. To do.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 40 Same as Initial Invention 37.

41. Initial invention 41
(A) Problems to be Solved by the First Invention 41 The first invention relates to a technique for outputting digit signals and segment signals of LEDs from an output port in a gaming machine.
Conventionally, it is known about dynamic lighting of a 7-segment display (7-segment) (for example, JP 09-225091 A).
For example, the above publication describes assignment of output ports for digit signals and segment signals.
In recent years, it has been studied to mount 7 segments capable of displaying an advantageous section ratio or the like on a main control board of a gaming machine (slot machine).
On the other hand, conventionally, gaming machines are provided with 7 segments for displaying the number of storage, 7 segments for displaying the number of acquisitions, and the like.
When the number of 7-segments increases in this way, the program becomes complicated due to the lighting control of each 7-segment.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to efficiently store and execute a program for controlling the lighting of LEDs.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 41 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
A display unit that has a plurality of segments (segments A to P) that can be lit and displays predetermined information (the number of stored items, the number of acquisitions, error information, a push order instruction number, a gaming state, or a set value) by lighting the segments. First display means having one or more (digits) (storage number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, status display LED 79, or set value display LED 73);
Second display means (management information display LED 74) having one or more display units;
A first program (LED display control) for outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display section of the first display means and outputting a segment signal to a segment of the display section of the first display means is stored. 1 for outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the storage area (in the use area of the ROM 54) and the display section of the second display means, and outputting a segment signal to the segment of the display section of the second display means Storage means (ROM 54) having a second storage area (outside the use area of the ROM 54) storing the second program (ratio display processing),
After executing the first program, execute the second program,
A drive signal is output to the display unit of the first display unit, and a clear signal is output to the first display unit and the second display unit before the segment signal is output to the segment of the display unit of the first display unit. A clear signal output process (for example, step S1431 and step S1432 during LED display control in FIG. 134) is provided.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 41 According to the initial invention, the programs of the first display means and the second display means are stored separately, and the second program is executed after the execution of the first program. And can be executed efficiently.
Further, since the clear signal output process is executed when the first program is executed, afterimages can be prevented.

42. Initial invention 42
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 42 The initial invention relates to a technique for outputting an LED digit signal and a segment signal from an output port in a gaming machine.
Conventionally, it is known about dynamic lighting of a 7-segment display (for example, JP 09-225091 A).
For example, the above publication describes assignment of output ports for digit signals and segment signals.
Nowadays, it is considered to mount 7 segments (management information display LED) capable of displaying an advantageous section ratio or the like on a main control board of a gaming machine (slot machine).
On the other hand, the 7-segment is composed of segments A to G, but a segment P that is a dot segment (also referred to as a segment DP) may be provided.
Then, when the management information display LED has a dot segment, how to use the dot segment becomes a problem.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to display specific information using dot segments.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 42 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solution is
A first display unit (digit 7) and a second display unit (digits) that have a plurality of segments (segments A to P) that can be lit and display predetermined information (management information such as an advantageous section ratio) by lighting the segments. 6, 8, 9),
A display counter (LED display counter) updated at a predetermined timing, and
When it is time to turn on the first display unit by the display counter, turn on the segment including the specific segment (segment P),
At any timing of the display counter, do not light the specific segment of the second display unit,
When a specific error (non-recoverable error 2) occurs, the display counter update (interrupt) is stopped, and the specific error processing (non-recoverable error processing 2) for lighting the specific segment of the second display unit is performed. It is characterized by being executed.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
The specific error process is characterized by executing a process of lighting the specific segment of all display units including the first display unit and the second display unit.
The third solution means in the first or second solution means,
A first storage area (in the use area of the ROM 54) for storing a program (for example, main process) for executing a game control process, and a storage area separated from the first storage area, and executing the specific error process A storage means (ROM 54) having a second storage area (outside the use area of the ROM 54) for storing a program (non-recoverable error processing 2) is provided.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 42 According to the initial invention, different information can be displayed in the specific segment of the first display unit and the specific segment of the second display unit. In particular, information delimiters can be displayed by lighting a specific segment of the first display section. On the other hand, the occurrence of the specific error can be notified by lighting of the specific segment of the second display unit.

43. Initial invention 43
(A) Problems to be solved by the initial invention 43 The initial invention has an advantageous section in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be operated, and the main control board side indicates that the operation shifts to this advantageous section. It relates to the slot machine to be determined.
In a conventional slot machine, there is known a slot machine that performs lottery on the main control board side and determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, JP-A-2014-161344). No. publication).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed and to display the advantageous section by using the advantageous section display device when the advantageous section is entered.
Here, at the time of winning the rare role, if there is a time to shift to the advantageous section and when not to shift to the advantageous section, the game that won the rare role will move to the advantageous section according to the content displayed by the advantageous section display device The player knows whether or not to do so. In this case, the player's expectation for AT execution by rare role winning cannot be maintained.
On the other hand, if the AT is always executed at the time of rare role winning, the rare role winning means AT execution, and the game becomes monotonous.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is that when a lottery result (rare role winning) that allows a combination of specific symbols to be stopped is achieved, the game is expected to move to the designated game section (AT) across multiple games. It is to give to the person.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 43 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (25th embodiment)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section where the instruction function is not activated,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section that can operate the instruction function,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which an instruction function is always activated or an operation frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
An advantageous section display device (favorable section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section;
When a predetermined symbol combination (a combination of symbols in which “watermelon” is aligned on a straight line in a diagonally upward direction) results in a lottery result (small winning D win) and a specific symbol combination (left reel A lottery means (role lottery means 61) for performing a lottery so that there may be a lottery result (small part E1 winning) that can be stopped). Prepared,
When the lottery means results in a lottery result in which the combination of the predetermined symbols can be stopped, the advantage section is displayed, and the advantage section display device displays the advantage section, and the advantage section And not displaying the advantageous section by the advantageous section display device,
When the lottery means results in a lottery result that allows the combination of the specific symbols to be stopped, it always shifts to an advantageous section, and displays the advantageous section by the advantageous section display device,
When the lottery means results in a lottery result in which the combination of the specific symbols can be stopped, when the advantage section is displayed and the advantage section display device displays that the section is an advantageous section, the designated game section It is characterized in that it has a time to shift to, and a time not to shift to the designated game section.

(C) Effect of the original invention 43 According to the original invention, when a lottery result is obtained in which a combination of specific symbols can be stopped, it always shifts to an advantageous section and is an advantageous section by the advantageous section display device. Display. And in this case, since there is a time when the game moves to the designated game section and when the game does not move to the designated game section, a transition to the designated game section is made when the result of the lottery that a specific symbol combination can be stopped is obtained. It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation for a plurality of games.

44. Initial invention 44
(A) Problems to be solved by the initial invention 44 The initial invention has an advantageous section in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be operated, and the main control board side indicates that the operation shifts to this advantageous section. It relates to the slot machine to be determined.
In a conventional slot machine, there is known a slot machine that performs lottery on the main control board side and determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, JP-A-2014-161344). No. publication).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed.
Here, each time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is changed, or the advantageous section is changed from the normal section to the advantageous section when the advantageous section ends and the set value is changed. If the ease of transition is changed, there is a risk of harming the fairness among players.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is that each time when the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is made the same, and when the advantageous section ends and when the set value is changed Therefore, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is the same.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 44 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (25th embodiment)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section where the instruction function is not activated,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section that can operate the instruction function,
First storage means (predetermined storage area of the RWM 53) for storing information relating to the advantageous section;
Means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.);
Second storage means for storing setting values (setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) on RWM 53);
A role lottery means (61) for lottery of a role so as to have a case of winning a re-playing role;
A plurality of lottery states (RT states (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4)) having different winning probabilities for at least one re-gamer, and
When the advantageous section ends, the first initialization process (initialization process at the end of the advantageous section) is executed,
When the setting value stored in the second storage means is changed, the second initialization process (initialization process at the time of setting change) is executed,
In the first initialization process, the lottery state at the end of the advantageous section is maintained, and the process shifts to the normal section.
In the second initialization process, a transition to a predetermined lottery state (non-RT) determined in advance and a transition to a normal section,
In the first initialization process and the second initialization process, when the first initialization process is executed by clearing the information related to the advantageous section stored in the first storage unit, the second initialization process is performed. When it is executed, it shifts to the normal section where the information regarding the advantageous section is in the same state.

(C) Effect of the Initial Invention 44 According to the initial invention, information relating to the advantageous section is cleared in both the first initialization process executed at the end of the advantageous section and the second initialization process executed when the setting is changed. As a result, each time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be made the same, and when the advantageous section ends and when the set value is changed, Since the ease of transition from the section to the advantageous section can be made the same, fairness among the players can be ensured.

45. Initial invention 45
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 45 The initial invention has an advantageous section in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be operated, and the main control board side indicates that the operation shifts to this advantageous section. It relates to the slot machine to be determined.
In a conventional slot machine, there is known a slot machine that performs lottery on the main control board side and determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, JP-A-2014-161344). No. publication).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section that is a game section in which AT can be executed.
Here, in the slot machine, it is common that the winning probability of the special combination increases as the set value increases.
However, if it is possible to shift to an advantageous section when a special combination is won, there is a possibility that the difference in the player's degree of advantage between the low setting and the high setting becomes too large.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent the difference in the player's advantage from becoming too large between the low setting and the high setting.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 45 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (25th embodiment)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section where the instruction function is not activated,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section that can operate the instruction function,
Means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.);
A role lottery means (61) for lottery of a role so as to have a case where the first special role (1BBA) and the second special role (1BBB) are won as the special role (1BB) for shifting to the special game. Prepared,
When winning the first special role in the role lottery means, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section,
When winning the second special role in the role lottery means, do not shift to the advantageous section,
The winning probability of the first special role is set to be the same for all set values,
The winning probability of the second special role is set so as to increase as the set value increases, so that the probability of transition to the advantageous section at the time of winning the special role (1BBA and 1BBB) is set It is characterized by increasing as it gets lower.

(C) Effect of the Initial Invention 45 According to the initial invention, the winning probabilities of the first special roles that can be transferred to the advantageous section are the same in all set values, and the winning probabilities of the second special combination that does not move to the advantageous sections are As the set value increases, the value increases. As a result, the winning probability of the special role (the sum of the first special role and the second special role) becomes higher as the set value becomes higher, and the probability of transition to the advantageous section at the time of winning the special role becomes lower. Since it becomes higher as it becomes, it is possible to prevent the difference in the player's advantage from becoming too large between the low setting and the high setting.

46. Initial invention 46
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 46 The original invention has an advantageous section in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be operated, and the main control board side informs that it shifts to this advantageous section. It relates to the slot machine to be determined.
In a conventional slot machine, there is known a slot machine that performs lottery on the main control board side and determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, JP-A-2014-161344). No. publication).
Recently, it is possible to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be operated, and further, in the advantageous section, an instruction game section in which the instruction function is always operated or the operation frequency is increased may be provided. Proposed.
Here, an advantageous section having an instruction game section and an advantageous section not having an instruction game section can be provided, but from the standpoint of designing a ball, in the advantageous section having an instruction game section, as many game media as possible can be provided. In order to pay out, it is preferable to suppress the payout of game media as much as possible in an advantageous section that does not have an instruction game section.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to suppress the payout of game media as much as possible in an advantageous section that does not have an instruction game section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 46 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (25th embodiment)
A game having an advantageous operation mode (in the correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role B group),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Among the game sections, a normal section where the instruction function is not activated,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section that can operate the instruction function,
A role lottery means (61) for lottery of a role so as to have a case where a special role (1BBA or 1BBB) for winning a special game is won,
When the indicator function is activated at least once in the advantageous section, it is possible to end the advantageous section,
In the advantageous section, when the special combination is won by the combination lottery means before the first instruction function is activated, it is possible to end the advantageous section without activating the instruction function,
After the transition to the advantageous section, until the specified condition is satisfied (the instruction operation condition is satisfied once: 15 games are consumed), even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function is not activated. It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of the initial invention 46 According to the initial invention, after the transition to the advantageous section, until the specific condition is satisfied, even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function is not activated. It is possible to increase the probability of winning the special role before the first instruction function is activated. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability that the advantageous section can be terminated without operating the instruction function, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the payout of game media as much as possible in the advantageous section that does not have the instruction game section. .

47. Initial invention 47
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 47 The initial invention relates to a slot machine that includes a display unit having a plurality of segments and displays operation information of a stop switch that is advantageous to a player on the display unit. .
In the conventional slot machine, the main control board determines whether or not to notify the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, and when it is decided to notify, the operation information is connected to the main control board. There is known a slot machine for displaying on a seven-segment display (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-150881).
Here, the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is important information related to whether or not the medal is paid out.
However, if the segment of the 7-segment display is broken or there is a failure in the signal line that sends a signal to the segment, the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player will not be displayed correctly on the 7-segment display. As a result, there is a risk that the player may be disadvantaged.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the original invention is a slot machine that includes a display unit having a plurality of segments (7-segment display) and displays operation information of a stop switch that is advantageous to the player on this display unit. This is to make it possible to confirm the presence or absence of a segment failure and the presence or absence of a failure in a signal line that transmits a signal to the segment.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 47 (Note that the corresponding embodiment will be described in parentheses)
The first solving means (the twenty-sixth embodiment)
It has at least seven segments (segments A to G) that can be lit, and includes a first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) that display predetermined information by lighting the segment,
In a situation where information relating to the number of game media acquired (the number of acquired medals) is displayed (when the process proceeds to the medal payout process in step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 186), the first interrupt process (LED display counter value) In the interrupt processing when the value is “00100000 (B)”, the first digit (upper digit) of the information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit, and the second interrupt processing (the LED display counter value is In the interrupt processing when “01000000 (B)”, the second digit (lower digit) of the information related to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the second display unit,
Under the situation where the operation information (push order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the push order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 186), at least Displaying at least a part of the operation information on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing;
In a situation where the setting value relating to the player's advantage can be changed (when the process proceeds to steps S4001 and S4002 in the setting change process of FIG. 185), at least the first display unit has at least 7 in the first interrupt process. Each segment is lit.

The second solution is
It has at least seven segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, the segment signal indicating which segment is lit is also used.
In a situation where information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of 2;
Under the situation of displaying the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, at least in the first interrupt processing, the segment signal is output so as to display at least a part of the operation information on the first display unit,
A segment signal is output so that at least seven segments of the second display unit are lit at least in the second interrupt process under a situation in which the setting value relating to the player's advantage can be changed. And

The third solution is
It has at least seven segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In a situation where information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed, the first digit of the information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing, and the game media is displayed in the second interrupt processing. Display the second digit of the information on the number of acquisitions on the second display,
Under the situation where the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed, at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt processing,
In a situation where the setting value relating to the player's advantage can be changed, at least seven segments of the second display unit are lit at least in the second interrupt process.

The fourth solution is
It has at least seven segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, the segment signal indicating which segment is lit is also used.
In a situation where information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of 2;
In the situation where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt processing, and a segment signal is output,
A segment signal is output so that at least seven segments of the first display unit are lit at least in the first interrupt process under a situation where the setting value relating to the player's advantage can be changed. And

The fifth solution is
It has at least seven segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In a situation where information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed, the first digit of the information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing, and the game media is displayed in the second interrupt processing. Display the second digit of the information on the number of acquisitions on the second display,
In a situation where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, and the operation information is displayed in the second interrupt process. Is displayed on the second display section,
In a situation where the setting value relating to the player's advantage can be changed, at least seven segments of the first display unit are lit in the first interrupt process, and the second display unit has the second interrupt process. At least 7 segments are lit.

(C) Effect of the Initial Invention 47 According to the initial invention, the first display unit is confirmed by checking whether or not the seven segments of the first display unit are lit up under the circumstances where the set value can be changed. The presence or absence of failure of the seven segments included in the first display unit and the presence or absence of failure of the signal line that transmits signals to the seven segments included in the first display unit can be confirmed.

48. Initial invention 48
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 48 The same as the original invention 47.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 48 (Note that the corresponding embodiment will be described in parentheses)
The first solving means (the twenty-seventh embodiment)
It has a plurality of segments (segments A to G) that can be lit, and includes a first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) that display predetermined information by lighting the segment,
In the 1st display part and the 2nd display part, the segment signal (segment A-G signal) which shows which segment is made to light is combined,
In a situation where information relating to the number of game media acquired (the number of acquired medals) is displayed (when the process proceeds to the medal payout process in step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 186), the first interrupt process (LED display counter value) Segment signal is output so that the first digit (upper digit) of the information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the interrupt processing when is "00000100 (B)" In the interrupt process (interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”), the segment signal is displayed so that the second digit (lower digit) of the information related to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the second display unit. Output
Under the situation where the operation information (push order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the push order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 186), at least Outputting a segment signal so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing;
In a situation where the setting value related to the player's advantage can be changed (when the processing proceeds to steps S4101 and S4102 in the setting change processing of FIG. 193), at least information about the setting value (setting value “ A segment signal is output so that any one of “1” to “6”) is displayed on the second display unit.

The second solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In a situation where information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed, the first digit of the information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing, and the game media is displayed in the second interrupt processing. Display the second digit of the information on the number of acquisitions on the second display,
Under the situation where the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed, at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt processing,
In a situation where the set value relating to the player's advantage can be changed, at least information on the set value is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt process.

The third solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, the segment signal indicating which segment is lit is also used.
In a situation where information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of 2;
In a situation where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is output so that a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing, and the second signal is output. A segment signal is output so that another part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the interrupt process,
A segment signal is output so that at least information related to the set value is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt process under a situation in which the set value related to the player's advantage can be changed. .

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 48 According to the initial invention, the segment signal is shared in the first display section and the second display section. For this reason, by confirming whether or not the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit are lit, the first display among the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit. The presence or absence of a failure can be confirmed for a common part between the display unit and the second display unit.
In addition, by displaying the first digit of the information relating to the number of acquired game media on the first display unit, it is possible to check whether the segment of the first display unit is lit or not, thereby And the presence or absence of a failure in a signal line that transmits a signal to the segment of the first display portion can be confirmed.

49. Original invention 49
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 49 Same as the original invention 47.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 49 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (the twenty-sixth embodiment)
A first display unit (digit 1), a second display unit (digit 2), and a third display unit (digit) that have a plurality of segments (segments A to G) that can be lit and display predetermined information when the segments are lit. 3) and a fourth display unit (digit 4),
In the 1st display part, the 2nd display part, the 3rd display part, and the 4th display part, the segment signal (segment A-G signal) which shows which segment is lit is also used,
In a situation where information relating to the number of stored game media (the number of stored medal numbers) is displayed (when the process proceeds to the main process in FIG. 186), at least the first interrupt process (the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”). Segment signal is output so that the first digit (upper digit) of the information relating to the number of stored game media is displayed on the first display unit, and the second interrupt processing (LED display counter value) Output a segment signal so as to display the second digit (lower digit) of the information relating to the number of stored game media in the second display unit in the interrupt processing when is "00010000 (B)",
In a situation where information regarding the number of game media acquired (the number of acquired medals) is displayed (when the process proceeds to the medal payout process by winning in step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 186), at least the third interrupt process (LED display). In the interrupt processing when the counter value is “00100000 (B)”, a segment signal is output so that the first digit (upper digit) of the information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the third display unit, In the fourth interrupt process (interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”), the second digit (lower digit) of the information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the fourth display unit. Output segment signal,
Under the situation where the operation information (push order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the push order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 186), at least In the third interrupt process, a segment signal is output so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the third display unit.

The second solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit, the segment signal indicating which segment is lit is also used.
In a situation where information related to the number of stored game media is displayed, a segment signal is output so that at least the first digit of the information related to the number of stored game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. In the second interrupt process, a segment signal is output so that the second digit of the information related to the number of stored game media is displayed on the second display unit,
In a situation where information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed, a segment signal is output so that at least the first digit of the information regarding the acquired number of game media is displayed on the third display unit in the third interrupt processing. , Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information relating to the number of acquired game media in the fourth interrupt processing on the fourth display unit,
A segment signal is output so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the fourth display section in the fourth interrupt process under a situation where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed. It is characterized by.

The third solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit, the segment signal indicating which segment is lit is also used.
In a situation where information related to the number of stored game media is displayed, a segment signal is output so that at least the first digit of the information related to the number of stored game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. In the second interrupt process, a segment signal is output so that the second digit of the information related to the number of stored game media is displayed on the second display unit,
In a situation where information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed, a segment signal is output so that at least the first digit of the information regarding the acquired number of game media is displayed on the third display unit in the third interrupt processing. , Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information relating to the number of acquired game media in the fourth interrupt processing on the fourth display unit,
In the situation where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, the segment signal is output so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the third display part in the third interrupt processing, A segment signal is output so that another part of the operation information is displayed on the fourth display unit in the interrupt process of No. 4.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 49 According to the initial invention, the segment signal is also used in the first display unit to the fourth display unit. For this reason, by checking whether or not the segments of the first display unit to the fourth display unit are lit, the first display among the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segments of the first display unit to the fourth display unit. The presence or absence of a failure can be confirmed for a common part in the display unit to the fourth display unit.
In addition, by displaying the first digit of the information relating to the number of acquired game media on the third display unit, it is possible to check whether the segment of the third display unit is lit or not, thereby And the presence or absence of a failure in a signal line that transmits a signal to the segment of the third display section can be confirmed.

50. Initial invention 50
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 50 The same as the original invention 47.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 50 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (the twenty-sixth embodiment)
It has a plurality of segments (segments A to G) that can be lit, and includes a first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) that display predetermined information by lighting the segment,
In the 1st display part and the 2nd display part, the segment signal (segment A-G signal) which shows which segment is made to light is combined,
In a situation where information relating to the number of game media acquired (the number of acquired medals) is displayed (when the process proceeds to the medal payout process in step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 186), the first interrupt process (LED display counter value) Segment signal is output so that the first digit (upper digit) of the information related to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the interrupt processing when is "00100000 (B)" In the interrupt process (interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”), the segment signal is displayed so that the second digit (lower digit) of the information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the second display unit. Output
Under the situation where the operation information (push order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the push order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 186), at least Outputting a segment signal so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing;
In a situation where specific error information (“E1” error) is displayed (when an error that cannot be recovered occurs), a part of the specific error information is displayed on the first display unit without executing interrupt processing. So that the segment signal is output (the error upper digit display output process in step S1497 in the unrecoverable error process 1 in FIG. 136) and the other part of the specific error information is displayed on the second display unit. Thus, the process of outputting the segment signal (the error lower digit display output process of step S1502 in the unrecoverable error process 1 of FIG. 136) is repeatedly executed.

The second solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, the segment signal indicating which segment is lit is also used.
In a situation where information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of 2;
In the situation where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt processing, and a segment signal is output,
In a situation where specific error information is displayed, a process of outputting a segment signal so as to display a part of the specific error information on the first display unit without executing an interrupt process, and the specific error information And a process of outputting a segment signal so as to display the other part on the second display unit.

The third solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, the segment signal indicating which segment is lit is also used.
In a situation where information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of 2;
In a situation where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is output so that a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing, and the second signal is output. A segment signal is output so that another part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the interrupt process,
In a situation where specific error information is displayed, a process of outputting a segment signal so as to display a part of the specific error information on the first display unit without executing an interrupt process, and the specific error information And a process of outputting a segment signal so as to display the other part on the second display unit.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 50 According to the initial invention, the segment signal is also used in the first display unit and the second display unit. For this reason, by confirming whether or not the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit are lit, the first display among the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit. The presence or absence of a failure can be confirmed for a common part between the display unit and the second display unit.
In addition, by displaying the first digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media and a part of the specific error information on the first display unit, it is possible to confirm whether or not the segment of the first display unit is lit. The presence or absence of a failure in the segment of the first display unit and the presence or absence of a failure in the signal line that transmits a signal to the segment of the first display unit can be confirmed.

51. Initial invention 51
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 51 The same as the original invention 47.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 51 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (the twenty-sixth embodiment)
It has a plurality of segments (segments A to G) that can be lit, and includes a first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) that display predetermined information by lighting the segment,
In the 1st display part and the 2nd display part, the segment signal (segment A-G signal) which shows which segment is made to light is combined,
In a situation where information relating to the number of game media acquired (the number of acquired medals) is displayed (when the process proceeds to the medal payout process in step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 186), the first interrupt process (LED display counter value) Segment signal is output so that the first digit (upper digit) of the information related to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the interrupt processing when is "00100000 (B)" In the interrupt process (interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”), the segment signal is displayed so that the second digit (lower digit) of the information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the second display unit. Output
Under the situation where the operation information (push order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the push order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 186), at least Outputting a segment signal so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing;
In a situation where predetermined error information (“dE” error) is displayed (when a recoverable error occurs), a part of the predetermined error information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. The segment signal is output, and the segment signal is output so that the other part of the predetermined error information is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt processing.

The second solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, the segment signal indicating which segment is lit is also used.
In a situation where information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of 2;
In the situation where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt processing, and a segment signal is output,
In a situation where predetermined error information is displayed, a segment signal is output so that a part of the predetermined error information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, and the predetermined error information is displayed in the second interrupt process. A segment signal is output so that another part of the error information is displayed on the second display unit.

The third solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, the segment signal indicating which segment is lit is also used.
In a situation where information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of 2;
In a situation where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is output so that a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing, and the second signal is output. A segment signal is output so that another part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the interrupt process,
In a situation where predetermined error information is displayed, a segment signal is output so that a part of the predetermined error information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, and the predetermined error information is displayed in the second interrupt process. A segment signal is output so that another part of the error information is displayed on the second display unit.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 51 According to the initial invention, the segment signal is also used in the first display unit and the second display unit. For this reason, by confirming whether or not the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit are lit, the first display among the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit. The presence or absence of a failure can be confirmed for a common part between the display unit and the second display unit.
In addition, by displaying the first digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media and a part of the predetermined error information on the first display unit, it is possible to confirm whether or not the segment of the first display unit is lit. The presence or absence of a failure in the segment of the first display unit and the presence or absence of a failure in the signal line that transmits a signal to the segment of the first display unit can be confirmed.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Base part 10 Slot machine 11 Power switch 12 Setting key switch 13 Setting switch 14 Reset switch 15 Door switch 16 Substrate case 16a Caulking part 17 Display window 21 Effect lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Cross key 25 Menu button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 reel sensor 35 hopper 36 hopper motor 37 payout sensor 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 start switch 42 stop switch 43 medal slot 43a passage sensor 44 insertion sensor 45 blocker 46 settlement switch 50 (50A, 50B) main control board ( Main control means)
51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Production group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning judgment means 67 Payout means 68 RT control means 69 Advantageous section control means 69a Advantageous section counter 69b Upper limit counter 70 External signal transmission means 71 Control command transmission means 72 Management information control means 73 Setting value display LED
74 Management information display LED
75 Display board 76 Storage number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1-bet indicator LED
79b 2-bet indicator LED
79c 3-bet indicator LED
79d Game start indicator LED
79e Input indicator LED
79f Replay display LED
79g Production display LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
91 Production output control means 100 External concentration terminal board 200 Hall computer

The present invention solves the above problems by the following means. The configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses.
The invention of claim 1
At least seven segments which can be illuminated (segments A-G), the first display unit capable of displaying operation information of the stop switch (42) which is advantageous to the player (press order instruction information) by turning on the segments (Digit 3) ,
Includes a second display unit having at least seven segments that can light up a (digit 4),
A segment designation signal (segment A to G signal) indicating which segment to light can be output to the first display unit and the second display unit,
Of the plurality of display units (digits 1 to 5) including the first display unit and the second display unit, a display unit designation signal (digits 1 to 5 signal) indicating which display unit segment to light is first. Output to the display unit and the second display unit,
In a situation where the first display unit can be turned on in a game in which the operation information can be displayed (when the game has an advantageous pushing order in the designated game section) (the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”) The operation information can be displayed on the first display section (push order instruction information “1” to “3” can be displayed on the digit 3).
In a state where the first display unit can be turned on in a state where a specific error (“E1” error) has occurred when the power is turned on , specific error information (“E1”) indicating that the specific error has occurred is configured. The first information (“E”) can be displayed on the first display unit ,
In a situation where the second display section in the state where the specific error has occurred when the power is turned on can be turned on (when executing the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”), the specific error information is configured. Second information ("1") to be displayed on the second display unit ,
When displaying the first information on the first display unit, lighting a plurality of segments (segments A, D, E, F, and G) that do not include a predetermined segment (segments B and C). Output the segment designation signal
When the second information is displayed on the second display unit, a segment designation signal indicating that a plurality of segments (two segments B and C) including the predetermined segment are lit is output. .

According to the present invention, the segment signal is also used in the first display unit and the second display unit. For this reason, by confirming whether or not the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit are lit, the first display among the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit. The presence or absence of a failure can be confirmed for a common part between the display unit and the second display unit.
Further, when the first information constituting the specific error information is displayed on the first display unit, it is confirmed whether or not a plurality of segments not including the predetermined segment are lit, and the first information constituting the specific error information 2 When the information is displayed on the second display unit, by checking whether or not a plurality of segments including the predetermined segment are lit, the presence or absence of a segment failure in the first display unit and the second display unit , In addition, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a failure in the signal line that transmits a signal to the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit .

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that includes a display unit having a plurality of segments and displays operation information of a stop switch that is advantageous to a player on the display unit.

In the slot machine as a conventional game machine, determines whether to notify the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player on the main control board side, when you decide to inform the main the operation information A slot machine for displaying on a 7-segment display connected to a control board is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Here, the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is important information related to whether or not the medal is paid out.
However, if the segment of the 7-segment display is broken or there is a failure in the signal line that sends a signal to the segment, the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player will not be displayed correctly on the 7-segment display. As a result, there is a risk that the player may be disadvantaged.
Accordingly, the problem to be solved by the present invention is that a display unit (7-segment display) having a plurality of segments (LEDs ) is provided, and operation information of a stop switch (operation button) that is advantageous to the player is provided on this display unit. In the gaming machine that displays, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of a segment failure and the presence or absence of a failure of a signal line that transmits a signal to the segment.

The present invention solves the above problems by the following means. The configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses.
The invention of claim 1
A first display unit for chromatic least seven LED (the segment A-G) and (digit 4),
And a second display unit having at least seven LED (digit 3),
When the first display unit is turned on (outputs the digit 4 signal) and when the second display unit is turned on (outputs the digit 3 signal),
It is capable of outputting an LED designation signal for designating the LED to be turned on the first display unit and second display unit,
Oite the state errors for RWM at power on ( "E1" error) has occurred, when turning on the first display unit, a first LED of the seven LED (segment B) and a second LED outputs LED designation signal for lighting a plurality of LED containing (segment C), when lighting the second display section of the seven LED does not include the first LED and the second LED 5 By outputting the LED designation signal that lights up the LEDs (5 segments A, D, E, F, and G) , it is possible to confirm whether there is an abnormality in the signal line for the LED designation signal,
When the first display unit is turned on in a setting changeable state, it is possible to check whether there is an abnormality in the signal line for the LED designation signal by outputting an LED designation signal that lights at least seven LEDs. It becomes possible to confirm the presence or absence of abnormality of at least 7 LEDs of the first display unit,
When the second display unit is turned on in a setting changeable state, the presence or absence of an abnormality in the signal line for the LED designation signal can be confirmed by outputting an LED designation signal for lighting at least seven LEDs. And
The first display unit can display information (push order instruction information) indicating an operation mode of a stop button (stop switch 42) that is advantageous depending on the lighting mode of the LED .
The invention of claim 2 is the invention of claim 1,
By changing the setting, the error related to RWM is canceled.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, in the first display unit and second display unit, LED designation signal is also used. Therefore, since the first display unit and second display unit of the LED (segment) to confirm whether or not lighted, the first display unit and second display unit LED to signal that transmits a signal of the lines, parts common to the first display unit and second display unit, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of fault.
Further, when the error information about RWM is displayed on the first display unit, a plurality of LED including a first LED and a second LED confirms whether lights, error information about RWM is first when it is displayed on the second display section, that the five LED that does not include the first LED and the second LED to confirm whether or not lighted, the first display unit and second display unit presence of a failure of the LED, and a first display unit and the LED on the signal of the second display portion can confirm the presence or absence of failure of the signal line to be transmitted.

Claims (3)

It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, the segment signal indicating which segment is lit is also used.
In a situation where information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of 2;
Under the situation of displaying the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, at least in the first interrupt processing, the segment signal is output so as to display at least a part of the operation information on the first display unit,
In a situation where specific error information is displayed, a process of outputting a segment signal so as to display a part of the specific error information on the first display unit without executing an interrupt process, and the specific error information A slot machine that repeatedly executes a process of outputting a segment signal so as to display another part on the second display unit. It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, the segment signal indicating which segment is lit is also used.
In a situation where information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of 2;
In the situation where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt processing, and a segment signal is output,
In a situation where specific error information is displayed, a process of outputting a segment signal so as to display a part of the specific error information on the first display unit without executing an interrupt process, and the specific error information A slot machine that repeatedly executes a process of outputting a segment signal so as to display another part on the second display unit. It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, the segment signal indicating which segment is lit is also used.
In a situation where information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of 2;
In a situation where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is output so that a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing, and the second signal is output. A segment signal is output so that another part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the interrupt process,
In a situation where specific error information is displayed, a process of outputting a segment signal so as to display a part of the specific error information on the first display unit without executing an interrupt process, and the specific error information A slot machine that repeatedly executes a process of outputting a segment signal so as to display another part on the second display unit.

Images